
fi;;t:;.!p;;:l■im^^^::i:;''. ';■;;;:; ^ :;■. 

!'';vVi"'''-.or(>M..r-:';;''; ::•:■, ■■■:■'■■ 
)')W, ■■■',,,;;?';.:■■• '■■ ' ■;• ,. ;■• ;. 



'\} 







t'jit"'*'.v .■■■.;'•''.■'•; .i ;.•■;■, 

liii I i II ii i::E?:| : 



!itKmfl(mii 






o. 






•^ ii i, ^ -s 


^ 1 B ^ 


^-^. 


-oo^ 




■-^t^. V 


o5 -^c^. ^ 




x^^^ 



-C^' 






H 



^,0 



"-^ % ^'^ .^ .0- 



cv 



'>^'\ "= \. ,^^ 









\- 









A^^ 



-P 









\ 



<<• 



^0 






-^ <. , ^ -^ ' \#' 









,0o. 



^' <" A'- 






.0^ 






ff >■ 






^ cV' J^ /\^C^/')l, , -^ 
















"c^ ^^^^^' 



.^ 






'C^'^^ 

.x^^' •^- 



"'^V 



-^. .-^.^ 









* A 



'^./'h. 



\:^ 







^^ 







"^^^^ 






A- 



^' • " ft -Z^ 



J- \ 



\0o 



X-. 






r\* r f3 =,1 «, *?=. 









v^^.^-."/"^ 



.^^' '^^ 



■^ ' t> c ^ ■^'^ \ 1 fl ^ ^^ « X \ 










^ 



Cao^VNo\\CL CVvj>^c\\\ ViiNVoK^^N^ dcVs^ 



Anna n 1 ^ i <"m . 4 . 



\J 




FOR THE USE OF THE 



CATHOLIC CHURCHES 



IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 

^ublisbcb bg orbcr of tlje J^irst Council of Baltimore, 

WITH THE APPROBATION OF THE HOLY SEE. 




THIRD EDITION, 

CAREFULLY REVISED, AND CONSIDERABLY ENLARGED. 
IVITH lliliUSTRATIONS. 



BALTIMORE : 

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY KELLY & PIET, 
No. 174 Baltimore Street, 

1865. r <;^, oefv^^ti 



f\ 



/ ^-^ • I 



(f^s ^••.^■"7-r. 



I 






Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1865, by 

KELLY & PIET, 

in the Clerk's Office, of the District Court of the State of Maryland. 




We have had this third edition of the Ceremonial care- 
fully revised by competent persons, and We hereby approve 
of the same, and recorpmend its adoption. 

MARTIN JOHN, 

ArcTiMshop of Baltimore. 
BALTOfORE — Feast of 
THE Annunciation — 1865. 



%nhtt. 




I HIS third edition of the Ceremonial is sub- 
stantial! j the same as that compiled bj the 
Right Rev. Dr. Rosati, first Bishop of St. 
Louis, specially approved by His Holiness 
Gregory XYI., on the 19th January, 1841, 
and formally adopted by the Plenary Coun- 
cil of Baltimore, held in 1852, for the use 
of all the churches in the United States. 

By direction of the Most Rev. F. P. Kenrick, 
D. D., late venerated Archbishop of Baltimore, 
many additions have been here made, that the work 
may be rendered still more useful. 

The ceremonies of Low Mass, also for that of the 
dead, and the manner of giving communion within 
the Mass, or at other times, are almost literally 
translated from Baldeschi, the same Rubricist from 
whom Dr. Rosati compiled the principal portion of 
the first edition. 

The priest who is obliged to say two Masses on 
the same day, will find on this subject an extract 
from an instruction of the Sacred Congregation of 
Rites, approved under the present illustrious Pope 
Pius IX. 



6 PREFACE. 

The manner of singing Mass without deacon and 
sub-deacon, and Yespers without cope-bearers, is in 
accordance with approved usages of the best regu- 
lated churches in Italy. The mode of giving Bene- 
diction of the Blessed Sacrament with the Osten- 
sorium or Pixis is presented in a more detailed form; 
and in this the ceremonial of Bishops, and the various 
decrees of the Sacred Congregation of Rites on this 
subject, are strictly followed. 

Moreover, to preserve that uniformity which is 
requisite, even in the instruments for the various 
ceremonies of the Church, and in order to give a 
clearer idea of those which ought to be used, many 
engravings have been expressly added. These vdll 
be found very useful to pastors who desire to ap- 
proach as closely as possible to the approved Roman 
Ceremonial. 

The Gregorian notes, to guide the celebrant and 
sacred ministers in singing the Prayers, Epistle, 
Gospel, Confiteor, &c., are found in the last chapter 
of the Ceremonial. 

The miscellaneous remarks, which, in the preced- 
ing edition, were at the end of the book, are now 
either embodied in the work or given in notes under 
corresponding matters. 



CONTENTS. 



PART I. 



Ceremonies of Low Mass. 
Chap. Pasb. 

I, — Abt. I. — What is to be prepared 13 

II. — On the Preparation for Mass by the Priest 15 

III. — On Leaving the Sacristy 19 

IV. — On approaching the Altar 21 

V. — From the Commencement of the Mass to the In- 

troit 22 

VI.— Prom the Introit to the Epistle 25 

" VII.— From the Epistle to the Offertory 27 

VIII.— From the Offertory to the Canon 80 

IX. — From the Canon to the Consecration 35 

X. — From the Consecration to the Pater Noster 40 

XI. — From the Pater Noster to the Communion 43 

XII. — From the Communion to the End of Mass 50 

XIII.— On Votive Masses 53 

II. — Order to be observed in celebrating two Masses on the same 

day 58 

III.— Low Mass for the Dead 60 

IV. — Low Mass when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed 63 

V. — Of Low Mass in the presence of Prelates 65 

VI. — Giving Communion - 68 

Art. I. — Giving Communion during Mass 68 

II. — Purification of the Ciboriam 71 

III. — On giving Communion at other times 72 

VII. — Manner of Serving a Priest at Low Mass 75 

Art. I. — General Kemarks 75 

II.— Of the Vesting of the Priest 77 

III. — From the beginning of the Mass to the end of it 77 

VIII.'^Manner of Serving a Bishop at Low Mass 82 



8 CONTENTS. 

Cha-p. P^««. 

VIII.— Art. I. — Things to be prepared 82 

II. — Of the Preparatioa and Vesting of the Bishop 88 

III. — When there is but one Chaplain 88 

IX. — Manner of Celebrating High Mass without Deacon or Sub- 
deacon 91 

Art. I. — Things to be prepared 91 

II.— Vesting of the Celebrant 92 

III. — Ceremonies of the Mass 92 

X. — Vespers sung without Cope-bearers 96 

Art. I. — Things to be prepared 96 

II 98 

PART II. 

Ceremonies for Holy Week and other Festivals. 

Chap. Pasb. 

I. — Blessing of Candles on Candlemas Day 104 

Art. I. — Of what is to be prepared 104 

II. — Ceremonies to be performed on Candlemas Day .... 106 

II. — Of the Benediction of Ashes on Ash. Wednesday 112 

Art. I. — Things to be prepared 112 

II. — Of the Sacred Eites to be performed 113 

III.— Of Palm Sunday 116 

Art. I. — What is to be prepared 116 

II. — Of the Ceremonies to be performed 117 

IV.— Of Maundy Thursday 125 

Art. I. — What is to be prepared 125 

II.— Of the Sacred Eites 126 

v.— Of Good Friday 133 

Art. I. — Of what is to be prepared 188 

II.— Of the Sacred Eites 135 

v.— Of Holy Saturday 151 

Art. I. — What is to be prepared 1 51 

II.— Of the Sacred Eites 162 

VI. — The Asperges, when there is but one Priest 163 

VII. — Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament 169 

Art. I. — What is to be prepared 169 

II. — Ceremonies (one Priest) 170 

III. — When the officiating Priest is assisted by another 

Priest, &c 175 

IV. — When the Bishop gives Benediction 177 



CONTENTS. 9 

PART III. 

Ceremonies of High Mass. 

Chap. P^qe 

I. — Eules to be observed by the Clergy in Choir , 168 

Abt. I. — The order of going to the Choir 168 

II. — The order to be observed in Choir 181 

III. — Internal dispositions 184 

IV. — The order to be observed in receiving Holy Com- 
munion 1 So 

V. — The order in going from the Choir 186 

11. — Instructions for the Officers 187 

Art. I. — Things to be prepared 187 

II. — Instruction for the Censer-bearer 189 

III. — Instruction for the Acolytes 193 

IV. — Duty of the Master of Ceremonies. 198 

V. — Instruction for the Sub-deacon 207 

VI. — Instruction for the Deacon 217 

VII. — Instruction for the Celebrant 228 

III.— High Mass for the Dead 236 

Akt. I. — Things to be prepared 236 

II. — What is to be particularly observed 237 

IV. — Solemn Vespers 240 

Abt. I. — Things to be prepared 240 

II. — General Eules to be observed 241 

III. — Instruction for the Acolytes 243 

IV. — Instruction for the Censer-bearer 245 

V. — Instruction for the Master of Ceremonies 246 

VI. — Instruction for the Cope- bearers 251 

VII. — Instruction for the Celebrant 254 

V. — Of solemn Vespers, and of the Procession on Corpus Christi 257 

Abt. I. — Of solemn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament exposed 257 

II. — Of the Procession on Corpus Christi 262 

VI. — Vespers for the Dead on the 1st of November 264 

Abt. I. — Things to be prepared 264 

II. — Ceremonies peculiar to these Vespers 265 

PART TV. 

Ceremonies for the Principal Festivals. 

Chap. Page. 

I. — Feast of the Purification 26ii 

Art. I. — Necessary Preparations 26t) 



10 CONTENTS. 

Chap. PAds. 

I. — Art. II. — From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Distribu- 
tion of the Candles 268 

III.— From the Distribution of the Caudleis to the Pro- 
cession 270 

IV.— The Procession , 272 

II.— Ash Wednesday 275 

Art. I. — Necessary Preparations. . .- 275 

11. — Of the Blessing and Distribution of the Ashes. . . . 276 

III.— Of the Mass 279 

III. — Sundays Lastare and Gaudete 280 

IV.— Palm Sunday 280 

Art. I. — Preparations 280 

II. — From the Beginning of the Ceremony to the Dis- 
tribution of the Palms 281 

III.— Of the Distribution of the Palms 284 

IV.— Of the Procession 286 

v.— Of the Mass and Passion 289 

v.— Office of the Tenebrae 293 

Art. I. — Preparations 293 

II. — From the Commencement to the End of the Office. 293 

VI.— Maundy Thursday 295 

Art. I. — Preparations , 295 

II.— Of the Mass . 297 

III. — Of the Procession 300 

IV. — Of Vespers, and of tlie Stripping of the Altars 803 

VII.— Of Good Friday 305 

Art. I. — Preparations 305 

II. — From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Uncover- 
ing of the Cross 306 

III. — From tlie Uncovering of the Cress to the Procession 310 

IV.— Of the Procession 314 

V. — Of the remaining Pait of the Office.. 316 

VIII.— Holy Saturday 321 

Art. T. — Things to be prepared 821 

II.— From the Benediction of the Nevi- Fire to the E.xultet 323 

III. — From the Exultet to tlie Prophecies 827 

IV.— From the Prophecies to the Benediction of the 

Baptismal Font 829 

V. — From the Benediction of the Font to the Beginning 

of Mass 380 

VI.— The Mass 834 



CONTENTS 11 

PART V. 

Ceremonies for Mass and Vespers, solemnly Celebrated 

BY the Bishop, or in His Presence. 
Chap. Pao«. 

I. — Solemn Pontifical Vespers 338 

Art. I. — Things to be prepared 338 

II. — From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy to the 

beginning of Vespers 339 

III. — From the beginning to the end of Vespers 340 

IT. — Solemn Vespers, in th-e presence of the Bishop 343 

ITT. — Complins, when the Bishop oflBciates 345 

IV. — Matins, when the Bishop officiates 345 

V. — Lands, when the Bishop officiates 343 

VI.— Solemn Pontifical Mass 343 

Art. I.— Things to be prepared 348 

II. — Of the Vesting of the Clergy and of the Bishop .... 353 

III.— The Pontifical Mass 858 

VII. — Solemn Mass, celebrated in presence of the Bishop, dressed 

in Cope 871 

VIII. — Solemn Mass in presence of the Bishop, in Eochet and Cape 376 

IX. — Vespers for the Dead, celebrated by the Bishop 377 

X. — Matins and Lauds for the Dead, celebrated by the Bishop. . 378 

XL— Solemn Pontifical Mass for the Dead 379 

Abt. I. — Things to be prepared 379 

II. — From the beginning to the end of Mass 880 

III.— The Absolution after Mass 383 

XII. — Solemn Mass for the dead, in the presence of the Bishop. . . 886 
XIII. — Particular Instructions for the Officers who attend the Bishop 387 

Art. I. — Instruction for the assistant Priest 387 

II. — Instructions for the two assistant Deacons 392 

III. — Instruction for the officiating Deacon 896 

IV. — Instruction for the Siib-deacon 404: 

V. — Instruction for the inferior Ministers 410 

PART VI. 

Other Different Solemnities at which the Bishop Of- 
ficiates or is Present. 

Chap. Paqr 

I. — Commemoration of all the Faithful departed 415 

II. — Sundays in Advent 416 



112 



Cf)NTENTS. 



^^^^- Page 



III.— Chri-stmas 



417 



IV.— Festivals between Christmas and Candlemas 419 

V. — Candlemas 419 

VI. — Ash Wednesday , 423 

VII. — Sundays in Lent 426 

VIII. — Palm Sunday 426 

IX. — Matins of the Tenebrse 45]^ 

X. — Maundy Thursday 43;!^ 

XI.— Good Friday 444 

XII. — Holy Saturday 454 

XIII. — Ceremonies to be observed in Provincial Councils 462 

Art. I. — "What is to be done before it opens 462 

II.— How the Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and 

arranged 453 

III. — The opening of the Council 454 

IV. — Mode of Procedure of the Council 471 

V. — Second Solemn Session 473 

VI. — Third Solemn Session , 475 

XIV. — Ceremonies to be observed in Diocesan Synods 479 

XV.— Solemn administration of the Sacrament of Confirmation. . . 485 

Aet. I, — Things to be prepared 435 

II. — The administration of the Sacrament 487 

XVI.— Episcopal Visitation of Parishes 489 

Art. I.— The Bishop's reception when he visits the Parishes 489 



APPENDIX. 

Chap. P^qe^ 

I. — Forty Hours' Exposition ; 499 

Art. I.— Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Exposition 499 

II. — Of the Mass of the Exposition 500 

III.— Of the Procession for the Exposition 503 

IV. — Of the Mass p)'o Pace 507 

^"•—Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Reposition 508 

VI. — Of the Mass for the Reposition 603 

VII.— From the Litany to the end of the Forty Hours 514 

II.— Different Intonations for Vespers and solemn Mass 518 




CEREMOOTAL. 



PART I. 



CHAPTER I. 
Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED. 

On the Altar. 

1. The altar, which should be of stone or marble, con- 
secrated by the Bishop, or, at least, having on it an altar- 
stone, also consecrated by the Bishop, should be covered 
with three clean altar-cloths. The first two, long enough 
to cover the whole top, and the uppermost should reach 
the base of the altar on both sides. {JRiib. 3Iiss.^ Part 
i., n. XX. 

2. In the middle of the altar, a crucifix sufficiently 
large to be distinctly seen. (Hub., ih.) 

3. At least two candlesticks, with candles, which 
should burn during the whole time of the Mass.* 

* All priests (even prelates, who are not Bishops) should have at 
their private Mass only two candles and one server. {S.E. C, 27th Sept., 
1659.) 

2 



14 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

4. In front of the altar, the antipendium of the color 
of the vestments.* {Huh., ib.) 

5. If the blessed sacrament is in the tabernacle, the 
canopy covering the tabernacle should also be of the 
color of the vestments. 

6. The altar cards.f 

1. At the Epistle side, the book-stand. 

8. On the credence^l or any suitable place, the cruets§ 
with wine and water on a plate, the finger-towel and 
the hand-bell. Should the priest be obliged to celebrate 
Mass without the assistance of a server, the plate with 
cruets and towel should be placed on a stand, near the 
altar, at the Epistle side, not on the altar. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. The sacred vestments, of the color prescribed. 
They should be placed on the sacristy altar, || or on the 
ambry ; they should be so disposed that the priest may 
find them orderly as he vests. The chasuble should be 
adjusted first, so that the lower half of the front part 
will hang down from the ambry, and the lower part of 
the back be folded over the upper part. Il^ext, the stole, 
folded in four parts, should be laid across the chasuble, 
and the maniple across the stole. The girdle, in a 

* As tlie Avord antipendium is generally accepted to signify altar-veil, 

or frontal, it shall be made use of in this manual. 

t "Tabernaculura, in quo assidue Divinissima servatur Eucharistia 
conopes serico, vol simili materiae vestiri debet, ejus item coloris 
cujus est altaris Pallium ; quanquam pro colore nigro violaceus con- 
gruentior erit in honorem Christ! viventis." {Merati.) 

X Credence, generally used for the side table near the altar. 

§ Cruets should be of glass, not of silver. (Gavan., P. 1, 7, xx.) 

II St. Charles Borromeo recommends that the altar or ambry, on which 
the sacred vestments are laid, be covered with a white linen cloth. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 15 

serpentine form, should be placed on the maniple. The 
upper part of the alb should lie on the vestments, and 
over it the amice extended, the strings of which may be 
arranged on the amice itself. 

2. The Missal.* 

3. The chalice,! mass-bread, the purificator, the chalice- 
veil, the pall, and the burse with the corporal in it. 

4. The priest's cap near the vestments, not ou them, 
nor on the chalice. 

5. A surplice for the server. -^ 

Article II. 

On the Preparation for 3fass by the Priest. 

1. The priest, wishing to celebrate the most Holy 
Sacrifice, should prepare himself by prayer. Aliquan- 
tulum orationi vacet. {Miib. Miss.) He should also 
have said matins and lauds. 

2. The suitable prayers for the occasion are those sug- 
gested by the Church, and laid down in the Missal, that 
is, the anthem, ne reminiscaris^ with the Psalms and 

* If there is no sacristy, the sacred vestments are prepared on a 
table near the altar, or, if there is no table, on the Gospel side of the 
altar itself, not in the middle of it, unites a Bishop is to celebrate. 
{Rub. Miss.) 

t The chalice ought not to be carried to the altar, and fixed on it by 
any person before Mass, bnt the priest ought to carry it himself to the 
altar, not before he goes thither to begin Mass, but when vested with 
the sacred vestments he goes from the sacristy, or from the place 
where he dressed, to the altar, as directed. (lb.., tit. ii., n. 1.) " Sacer- 
dos omnibus paramentis indutus accipit manu sinis-tra calicem ut supra 
prseparatum, quern portat elevatum ante pectus, bursam manu dextra 
super calice tenens, et facta reverentia cruci, et capite cooperto accedit 
ad altare cum ministro, cum Missali," &c. ; any contrary custom is to 
be looked upon as an abuse, which should be abolished. (See S. G. B., 
n. 4285.) 



16 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

prayers that follow them. Should the priest say these 
prayers, he will take notice that the aDthem above 
named is said entirely on feasts of double rite; and 
during Paschal time the Alleluia is added to it. 

3. It is well not to omit the pious protestation, Ego 
volo celebrare niissam. By reciting this, not only he 
can gain the indulgences annexed to it, but he can make 
his memento. {Hah. 3Iiss.) 

4. The priest, clad in his cassock, opens the Missal, 
and marks the places of the Mass and prayers, that he 
may not lose time at the altar. {Hub. Miss.) After 
which, he waslies his hands, saying at the same time, in 
a low voice. Da Domine, &g. 

5. Having washed his hands, he prepares the chalice 
by placing on it a clean puriticator,* in such a way that 
it will hang equally on both sides. On the purificator 
he places the 23aten, and on the paten, the Host, which 
should be round, entire, and free from loose particles, to 
remove which, the priest will pass his thumb and fore- 
finger around the edge. {Hub. Miss.) Then he puts on 
it the pall,f which he covers with the veil. If the veil 

* A piece of linen about twelve inches square, folded iu four parts, 
with u small cross worked in the middle ; it is not blessed, and should 
not be starched. 

t According to the Eubric, the pall should be of linen. Formerly 
the -paW formed a part of the cori)oral, which was large enough to cover 
the chalice. The inconvenience of its being too light can be obviated 
by having it made out of a piece of linen about eleven inches square, 
folded into four equal parts, sewed up at the edges, and well starched. 
"In sacrificio missre uti non licet palla a parte superior! drapo serico 
cooperta:" {S. R. C, 2d Jan., 1701.) Nevertheless, by a late decision of 
the S. R. C, the pall may be of silk cloth, ornamented on the outside, 
while the inside is of linen ; but it should not be black. "Pennitti 
posse, dummodo palla linea subnecta calicem cooperiat, ac pannus su- 
perior non sit nigri coloris, aut referat aliqua mortis signa." {S. B. (7., 
10th Jan. 1852.) 



CEKEM0NIE3 OF LOW MASS. 17 

is not large enough to cover the whole chalice, he will 
arrange it so that it will hide that part of the chalice 
that will be towards the people while going to the altar. 
Last of all, he places the burse, containing the corporal,* 
on the veil. The opening of it should be towards him- 
self as he proceeds to the altar. Nothing should be 
laid on the burse. {S. C. B., 1st Sept., 1703.) 

6. Everthing being prepared, the priest goes to the 
vestments. He will do well to make the sign of the cross, 
although the Rubric does not say so. If he does, he 
should make it without the amice in his hand. He then 
takes the amice by the two corners where the strings 
are connected, raises it so that he may kiss the cross 
supposed to be in the middle of the amice ; he puts it 
on his head by adroitly turning his right hand over his 
left, saying at the same time, Impone Domine^ &c. ; and 
as he continues the prayers, he adjusts the amice around 
his neck, so that every article of his neck-dr*s be en- 
tirely covered by it; and after crossing the strings uj^on 
his breast, the left being under the right, he passes them 
behind, and ties them in front with a loose knot.f {JRtib. 
Miss.) 

* The corporal should be of beautiful linen, very clean, and starched. 
It should have a small cross worked in the middle, but not with gold 
or silver. It is generally folded by bending first one-third of it over, 
so as to cover the second third part; again, the other third folded over 
the first. Then one-third of its length over the middle third part, 
and the last part bent over the rest. A corporal will be found suifi.- 
ciently large, if it be from twenty-two to twenty-four inches square. 
The corporal is blessed as well as the pall, 

t In putting on the amice, he ought not to forget that the object of 
it is to cover entirely the usual dress, and that part of the cassock 
v/hich is near the collar, and the collar itself; and, therefore, he ought 
to put it on so as to answer this purpose as directed. (/<{>., tit. i,, n. 3.) 
"Ac primum accipiens amictum circa extremitates et chordulas, oscula- 
tur illud in medio ubi est crux et ponit super caput, et mox declinat ad 



18 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

7. He puts on the alb (without kissing it) by passing 
it over liis head ; then he introduces his right arm into 
the right sleeve, and his left into the other sleeve. He 
adjusts it about his neck, and fits it around so that it 
descends about one inch above the floor all around, at the 
same time saying, Dealha me Domine^ &c. i^Ruh. Miss.) 

8. As he girds himself with the cincture,* he says, 
JPrwcinge me, &g. {Uuh. Hiss.) The common practice 
is to leave the tassels hanging down as low as possible, 
to be able afterwards to fasten the stole with the two 
ends of the cord. 

9. He takes the maniple and kisses the cross on it, and 
passing it ovpt his left arm fastens it between the hand 
and the elbow, saying, 3Ierear Doinine, &g. 

10. Then having taken the stole, he kisses the cross 
on it, and, with both hands, he passes it over his head, 
fits it around his neck, so that both ends of the stole 
hang d(mn at equal distances. Afterwards he crosses 
both ends of the stole, first passing towards his right 
the end that hangs on his left side, and drawing over it 
the other end which hangs upon his right. Then he 
confines the stole with the extremities of the cincture, 
which he allows to hang on each side under his arms, 
and not behind his back. In the meantime he says, 
Medde milii D online, &g. 

11. Lastly, he puts on the chasuble without kissing it, 
saying, Domine, qui dixisti, &c. He will take care to 

coUum, et eo vestium collaria circmn.tegens^'' &c. The first Comicil of 
BaltimoTe has strictly enjoined the observance of this Rubric. ludusia 
vero privati apparatus sub amictu et alba lateant, ita ut non indecoro 
vel muudauo more appareant. {Con. Bait. 1, Deer. 24.) 

* Cinctures are made in the shape of round cord, of linen thread, 
not of silk or cotton. Congrucntior est uti ciugulo lineo. (aS. R. C., 
u. 343G, ad. 7.) 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 19 

:fit it around the neck and shoulders, and tie it in front 
with the strings. He may then fasten a white clean 
handkerchief to the cincture, but it should not be visible 
beneath the chasuble. 

Article III. 

On Leaving the Sacristy. 

12. The priest being vested, puts on his cap. Then, 
taking with his left hand the chahce^^e?' nodum^ he lays 
his right flatly on the burse, holding the chalice before 
his breast, not, however, too far, or too near himself, but 
in a natural position. He makes a low bow* to the 
cross or image in the Sacristy, and, preceded by the 
server, he proceeds to the altar, with a grave and modest 
deportment, his mind and heart occupied with the great 
mystery he is going to celebrate. 

13. It is a laudable custom for the priest to take holy 
water and make the sign of the cross. {S. H, (7., 9th 
April, 1808.) Nevertheless, the Rubric does not pre- 
scribe it. 

14. On going to the altar, if the priest passes before 
the tabernacle containing the Blessed Sacrament, he will 
make a genuflection} without removing his cap. If he 
passes before the high altar, he makes a low bow to the 
cross. Should he pass before an altar where there is a 

* Kabriciaiis distinguish three kinds of bows : the low, the moderate, 
and the simple. A low bow is made by bending the head and the 
shoulders, so that the person making it could touch his knees with 
the extremities of his lingers. The moderate is made- by sufficiently 
lowering the head, and somewhat bending the shoulders. The simple 
bow consists in simply bending the head, without perceptibly moving 
the shoulders. 

t A simple genuflection is made by bending the right knee to thi 
,Eoor, as near as possible to the left foot. 



20 cp:eemonies of low mass. 

relic of a saint whose feast is celebrated, or some other 
remarkable relic, he makes a low bow, without taking 
his cap off. (Hub. Miss.) If it be a relic of the true 
cross, he will make a genuflection with his head covered. 
(S.B. a, YthMay, 1766.) 

15. If he should pass before the Blessed Sacrament 
exposed, or at the time of the elevation, or when Holy 
Communion is given, he will take off his cap, and kneel 
on both knees, being sure in the last two-named instances, 
not to rise until after the elevation, or before the priest 
giving communion has returned to the altar, and placed 
the ciborium on the corporal. {BAib. Miss.) If, how- 
ever, in the latter case, the communicants should be too 
numerous, a genuflection on both knees will be suflacient, 
without remaining until the end. {S. JR. G.^ 5th July, 
1698.) 

16. When on these occasions the priest takes oflf his 
cap, either he will give it to the server to hold, until he 
is to i-)ut it on again, or he will hold it between his 
thumb and forefinger, with the opening of it towards 
himself, and with the last two fingers holding the burse, 
that it may not fall. 

17. While the priest is going to, or coming from the 
altar, he should salute no one, except his Bishop or other 
great prelates, or some distinguished person, and then 
he should do so by a simple bow. He will do the same 
on meeting another priest, clad in sacred vestments, 
going to or retuining from saying mass. If the two 
priests meet in a narrow passage, the one returning will 
give way to the one going to celebrate. 

18. If, perchance, the priest should go to, or return 
from the altar, without the chalice (whenever he is to 
bow or make a genuflection), he should take oflf his cap. 



% ^ 



CEREMONIKS OF LOW MASS. 21 

Article IV. 

On Apiwoaching the Altar. 

19. The priest having reached the foot of the altar on 
which he is to celebrate, he stops in the middle, takes 
off his cap, gives it to the server, and makes a low bow 
to the cross. If the Blessed Sacrament be in the taber- 
nacle, he makes a genuflection on the floor, not on the 
step. {RuJ). Miss.^ Part ii., Rit. iii., n. 1.) 

20. Then he ascends the steps, and having arrived in 
front of the middle of the altar,* without making any 
bow, he places the chalice ou the Gospel side. If the 
veil, being large, is turned over the burse, he will lower 
it immediately, with both hands. Then he takes the 
burse, brings it to the middle of the altar, holds it with 
his left hand, and with his right he takes the corporal 
from it, which he lays on the altar ; after which, with 
his right hand, he will place the burse at the Gospel 
side, against the gracilis, so that the aperture of it be 
towards the tabernacle, unless some figure be marked 
on it, requiring another position. His left hand he will 
keep on the altar.f 

21. Then Avith both hands he will spread out entirely 
the corporal in the middle of the altar, sufficiently, but 
not too near the edge, that neither the maniple nor the 
chasuble may disturb it. 

*Some Rubricists direct that tlie priest, upon arriving at the altar, 
should make a bow to the cross. Kevertheless, neither the Rubrics of 
the Missal, nor any decree of the Sacred Congregation, makes such a 
prescription. 

t As a general rule, when only one harfd is employed, the other is 
kept on the altar; before the consecration and after communion, off 
the corporal ; from the consecration to the communion, on the corporal. 



22 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

22. Having spread the corporal, with his left hand he 
will take the chalice per nodum^ and, putting his right 
on the chalice covered with the veil, he will place it in 
the middle of the corporal at such a distance that he 
may afterwards conveniently kiss the altar* without 
touching the chalice. He will be careful to extend the 
lower extremities of the veil, that the chalice may not 
be seen. (aS. R, (7., 12th Jan., 1669.) After this, with- 
out making any bow, having his hands joined, he goes 
to the Epistle side,f opens the Missal where the Mass of 
the day is to be found {Huh. Miss.^ n. 4), and then returns 
with his hands joined to the centre of the altar, where, 
having bowed moderately to the cross, he moves his 
right foot a little towards the Gospel side, in order to 
avoid turning his back to the cross, and descends to the 
foot of the altar, still keeping his hands joined. (Hub. 
Miss.) 

Aeticle V. 
From the Commencement of the Mass to the Introit. 

23, Having arrived in front of the last step, the priest 

* Some writers on Eubrics are of opinion that the front part of the 
corporal should be laid over the foot of the chalice, giving as a reason, 
that there might remain on the corporal some consecrated particles ; 
but the Eubrics of the Missal, Part 2, Art. 2, speaking of the cor- 
poral, says, quod extendit super altare. The general practice in JRome 
and' Italy is to spread it entirely. The church supposes that every 
priest will follow exactly the Kubrics prescribed, and that, consequently, 
no consecrated particles will be left on the corporal. 

t To join the hands, the palm and the fingers extended, of both 
hands, should be brought together, the thumb of the right to be 
crossed over the thumb of the left, except from the consecration till 
after the ablution. The hands, thus joined, should not be kept either 
too near or too far from the breast, nor too much turned towards the 
face, nor towards the floor, but naturally directed somewhat towards 
heaven. The elbows should recline gently towards the hips. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 23 

turns on his right to the altar, and makes a ]^.w bow to 
the cross, or, if the Blessed Sacrament is in the taber- 
nacle, he makes a genuflection on the last step, without 
making any other bow. Then standing modestly erect, 
he will commence Mass, by making on himself the sign 
of the cross {Hub, 3Iiss.), pronouncing the words dis- 
tinctly, and sufiiciently loud to be heard by the faithful 
near the chapel. 

24. Having signed himself,* he says, in the same tone 
of voice, the antiphon, Jntroibo, and the psalm, Judica 
me Deus. While he says the Gloria Pati% he inclines 
his head, and becomes erect at the ISicut erat. At the 
Adjutorium nostrum^ &c., he makes the sign of the cross. 

25. At the Confiteoi\ he inclines profoundly, still 
keeping his hands joined. At the words, Vohis fratres 
and Vos fratres^ he does not turn towards the server, 
this being only done at High Mass. In saying mea 
culpa^ he strikes gently and unaffectedly his breast with 
the extremities of the fingers of his right hand, while 
he holds his left extended below his breast. {Hub. 3Iiss.) 

After the J^Iea onaxhna cidpa^ he rejoins his hands, 
and remains inclined until (the server having said Mis- 
ereatur tui., &c.) he answers, Amen^ upon which he re- 
sumes his former attitude. 

26. The server, having terminated the Confiteoi\ the 
priest says, Misereatur vestry &c. ; and while he says 
Indulgeniiam.^ &c., he makes the sign of the cross. 



* He makes the sign of the cross by putting his left hand extended 
under his breast, then he raises his right to his forehead, and touching 
it with the extremity of his fingers, he says. In nomine Patris ; then, 
with the same hand, touching his breast, says, Et Filii ; touching his 
left and right shoulders, ^^ Spiritvs Sancti ; and again joining his 
hands, he says, Amen. 



24 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

[Huh. 3Iiss.) Then, inclining moderately, he says, 
Deus tu coiiversus^ &c., and remains in that attitude till 
Or emus inclusively, which he says in the same tone of 
voice, extending his hands* and immediately rejoining 
them, and having become erect, he ascends the steps 
slowly, saying at the same time, in a low voice, Aufer 
a nobis.\ 

27. Having arrived in front of the altar, he inclines 
moderately, puts his hands joined on the edge of the 
altar, so that the little fingers, joined and extended, 
touch the front of it, and the other fingers, being also 
joined and extended, rest on the top. (In this manner 
are the hands to be placed whenever the Rubric pre- 
scribes to place them joined upon the altar.) In this 
position, he says Oramuste, and at the words. Quorum 
Teliquis^hiG sunt^ he extends his hands upon the altar, on 
either side of the corporal, and kisses the altar. J After 
which he becomes erect, joins his hands, and turns 
towards the Epistle side, to which place he goes to com- 
mence the Introit^ without making any bow to the 
cross. 

* la extending the hands, the priest should not allow them to pass 
the width of his body. 

+ The Missal (with many Eubricists) does not prescribe any eleva- 
tion of the hands in this case. The ceremonial of Bishops, however, 
enjoins it, perhaps only for Bishops ; nevertheless, it would seem that 
priests could also do so. 

X It is to be remarked, that whenever the priest kisses the altar, he 
does so in the middle, not on one side, nor on the edge of it ; and 
that to do this properly, he should neither be too near, nor too far 
from the altar, lest he be awkward or afi'ected. Neither is it suiiicient 
in these cases to put the lingers on the altar, and it is too much to 
place the wrists there ; yet it is required to lay the hands on the altar- 
cloth. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 25 

Article VI. 
From, the Introit to the Epistle. 

28. Having arrived opposite to the Missal,he commences 
the Introit aloud, making on himself the sign of the 
cross, and then having joined his hands, he continues in 
the same tone of voice ;* as he says Gloria Patri, &c., 
he makes a simple bow to the cross, turning himself a 
little towards it, without, however, moving his feet. 

Should the holy name of Jesus occur during the In- 
troit, he bows to the cross. If the name of Mary is 
mentioned, or the Saint whose feast is celebrated on 
that day, he bows towards the book. After the Sicut 
erat^ he repeats the Introit, but does not make the sign 
of the cross. 

29. At the end of the Introit^ he returns to the 
middle, having his hands joined ; and, facing the chalice, 
he says alternately with the server, the Kyrie. {Rub. 
3Iiss.) 

30. After the last I{^yrie^ if there are no prophecies 
to be read, and the Gloria is to be said, he will disjoin 
the hands, and raise them as high as his shoulders, and 
without raising the eyes, he says, Gloria in excelsis, &c., 
and in the same tone of voice, in saying Z>eo, he joins 
the hands again, making a simple bow to the cross, and 
remains in that position till the end of the Gloria. At 
the words, Adoramus te^ Gratias agimus tibi, Jesu 
Christe^ Suscipe deprecation em nostram^ he makes a 
simple bow to the cross. Whilst he says Gmn Sancto 
Spiritu^ &c., he makes the sign of the cross on himself, 

* Sufficiently so to be heard by the faithful who assist near tho 
altar. 

3 



26 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

and having said Amen^^ he kisses the altar in the usual 
way, joining his hands afterwards. 

31. If there are Prophecies to be read, as is the case 
on the Ember days, the priest, after the .fi^ne" (with- 
out making any bow), returns to the Missal, and says 
Oremics^ &g. He reads the Prophecies in the same tone 
of voice, having at the same time both his hands either 
on the Missal, or on the stand. The Prophecies being 
concluded, he returns to the middle of the altar to say 
the Gloria. 

32. After having kissed the altar, the priest becomes 
erect, turns on his right, facing the people, and extend- 
ing his hands and rejoining them again, he says Domi- 
nus vobiscum.j- (Hub. Miss.) 

33. Then he returns towards the Missal as before, he 
extends the hands, and rejoining them, he says, Oreinus, 
at the same time making a simple bow towards the 
cross ; and again extending his hands not higher than, 
nor beyond his shoulders, as has been already said. J 

34. At the conclusion of the prayer or prayers, when 
Per Dominum nostrum is to be said, the priest shall join 

* Some Eubricians are of opinion, that at the word Amen, the priest 
should join his hands, but as the Missal and Baldeschi (whom we fol- 
low) are silent on the subject, we think it better to omit the joining 
of the hands. 

t Whenever the priest says Dominus vobiscum, he does not look at 
the people, nor does he raise or lower the hands, and in extending 
them, he does not bring them beyond the limits of his body, but 
simply opens them so that the palm and fingers of one hand face the 
other, and rejoins them again. Neither does he bend the head towards 
the people, nor does he rest his back against the altar. 

X The same thing is to be done whenever Oremus is to be said, unless 
something else is prescribed. Also, in pronouncing that word, care 
should be taken not to prolong the letter 0, nor should it be said in 
any way affectedly. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. ' 27 

his hands, and bow simply to the cross ; he shall remain 
erect, with hands joined, till. the end of the conclusion 
of the prayer. If, however, the prayer concludes with 
the words, Qui vivis et regnas^ or, Qui tecum vivit et 
regnat^ without making any bow, he joins the hands 
while saying, In unitate Spiritus Sancti. {Hub. Miss.) 

35. When there is more than one prayer, he says 
Oremus only at the commencement of the first and of 
the second, so, also, the conclusion is said at the end of 
the first prayer and of the last. 

If, during the prayers, he pronounces the holy name 
of Jesus, or of Mary, or the Saint whose feast is cele- 
brated that day, or the name of the Pope, he makes a 
simple bow, in the first case to the cross, in the others 
towards the Missal.* 

Aeticle VII. 

From the Epistle to the Offertory. 

36. At the end of the prayer or prayers, the priest 
reads the Epistle in the same tone of voice, having his 
hands on the book or book-stand, in such a manner, 
however, that he touches the Missal. {Hub. Miss.) If, 
in reading the Epistle, he happens to pronounce the holy 
name of Jesus, he will bow as was said before. If he 
is to make a genuflection, as is the case when he says. In 
nom,ine Jesii geniifiectatur, &c., or, Adjuva nos Deus, 
he bends only the right knee to the floor. The last 
words of the Epistle he may say in a lower tone, as an 

* lu the prayer, A cunctis^ the Patron Saint to be named is that of 
the phice hi which he celebrates. The name of the saint, founder of 
the community to which the priest happens to belong, is mentioned 
after tliat of the Patron Saint of the place. 



28 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

indication to the server that he is to answer, Deo Gra- 
tias, but he should not turn his head towards him. 
After which, he reads, in the same former tone of voice, 
the gradual, the tract, or the sequentia, if these are to 
be read. 

37. This done, he goes with his hands joined to the 
middle of the altar, where, having raised his eyes to the 
cross, he inclines profoundly, keeping his hands joined 
between his breast and the altar, and in that attitude he 
says, Mu7ida cor vneum. Then, Jube Domine^ &c. 
{Bub. Miss.) 

38. Should there be no server, the priest will move 
the Missal to the Gospel side, so that the opening of it 
be somewhat towards the middle of the altar. In mov- 
ing the book, he makes a simple bow to the cross, and 
having adjusted it in its place, he returns to the middle 
to say the prayer above named. (Hub. Miss.) 

39. The prayer being over, he becomes erect, and 
having his hands joined, he goes to the book, his face 
turned partially towards the Gospel side, and in the 
same loud tone of voice he says, Domimis vobiscum. 
In saying Seqiientia or Initium Sancti Evangelii^ he 
disjoins his hands, and with the thumb of his right, the 
linger extended, he makes a cross on the commencement 
of the Gospel he is to read, at the same time keeping 
bis left hand extended on the Missal. (S. H. C, l7th 
Sept., 1816.) Then he forms a cross with the same 
thumb on his forehead, his lips, and his breast, holding 
his left hand on his breast. (Hub. Miss., n. 2.) 

40. After this, he joins his hands, and continues to 
read the Gospel in the same tone of voice. Should the 
holy name of Jesus, or any other name at which (ac- 
cording to what has been said before) he is to bow, be 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 29 

mentioned, he does so towards the book. So, also, 
should he be required to make a genuflection, it is to be 
made towards the book, his hands supported on the 
altar. {Rub,^ iL) The Gospel being read, he raises the 
Missal with both hands, at the same time bending a 
little over it, and kisses the commencement of the same 
Gospel, saying, in a low voice, JPer Evangelica dicta^ &c. 

41. When he is to read the JPassion, he makes a 
simple bow to the cross, as he goes from the Epistle 
8ide to the Gospel; he reads the passion in the same 
attitude as at the Gospel, without, however, making any 
sign of the cross. At the words, JEonisit Spiritum^ he 
kneels on both knees, his hands supported upon the 
altar, and again joins his hands, in which position he 
meditates for a few moments on the passion of our Lord. 
Then, resting his hands on the altar, he rises, rejoins the 
hands, and continues to read until where he is to say the 
munda cor meiim^ which he says in the middle of the 
altar, in the same attitude prescribed above. After the 
munda cor nieum^ he returns to the book, his hands 
being joined, and finishes reading the Passion ; at the 
end of which (except on Good Friday) he kisses the 
Missal as above, saying, I^er Evangelica dicta, &q. 

42. Having kissed, the Missal, he replaces it on the 
stand, and, with both hands, he takes the stand with the 
Missal on it, and brings it nearer to the corporal, placing 
it so that he may conveniently read in it thereafter, and 
having rejoined his hands, he returns to the middle. 

43. There (if the Comedo is to be said) he extends his 
hands, raises them (not higher than his shoulders) at the 
word Credo, and joins them again at the words. In 
iinum Deum, making at the same time a simple bow to 
the cross. In this position he continues the Credo to 

3* 



30 CKREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

the end, in the same tone of voice, except that at the 
words, Et lncar7iatiis est^ having placed the hands upon 
the altar, on either side of the corporal, he makes a 
genuflection with his right knee only {S. R. C, 22d 
Aug., 1818) in such a manner that, by commencing it 
at the £Jt Xncarnatus, he touches the floor with bis knee 
at the words ^t Ho'rno f actus est ; as he makes the genu- 
flection, he does not bend his head. He makes a bow 
at Siniul adoratur ; whilst he says JEt vitaon, &g., he 
makes on himself the sign of the cross, as at the end of 
the Gloria. 

Article VIII. 
From the Offertory to the Canon. 

44. After the Credo^ if it has been said, or after hav- 
ing arranged the Missal, the priest kisses the altar; and, 
turning towards the people, he says, Dominus vobis- 
cum. He turns again to the altar, and, with the usual 
moving of the hands and bowing of the head, he says, 
Oremus^ and keeping his hands joined, he reads the 
Offertory. {Rub. Miss.) 

45. At the end of the Offertory, he removes the veil 
from the chalice with both hands, folds it, and places it 
at the right hand, near the corporal, on which he may 
afterwards place the pall, if he chooses, or, without fold- 
ing it, he gives it to the server. Then, having placed 
his left hand on the altar, near the corporal, he takes the 
ch^ilice per nodu7n with his right, and places it at the 
right side of the corporal.* Then, with the same hand, 
he removes the pall from the paten, and places it on the 

* If tie chalice is not purified, be puts the pall first, where the 
chalice h-. to be placed. 



CEKEMONIES OF LOW MASS. 31 

folded veil, or on the corporal against the altar-card.* 
Then, taking the paten, upon which the Host is, between 
the thumb and the forefinger of his right hand, he brings 
it ojDposite to him, over and in the middle of the cor- 
poral, at the height of his breast, and there he takes it 
also with the thumb and forefinger of his left hand, in 
such a manner that the paten is supported by the named 
four fingers at equal distances from each other, and that 
the other fingers are extended and joined underneath 
it ; after this, he raises his eyes, immediately lowering 
them on the Host, and says, jSuscipe, Sancte Pater, &q. 
{Hub. Miss.) 

46. The prayer being entirely finished, still holding 
the paten in the same manner, but nearer to the corporal, 
he forms a cross in straight lines of about eight inches 
in length ; then bending the paten towards the corporal, 
he causes the Host to slide on the middle of the anterior 
part of the corporal. Then he places the paten some- 
what under the corporal, at the right, holding at the 
same time his left hand on the altar.f {Hub. Miss.) 

If there are small hosts to consecrate, either in a Ci- 
borium,! or on the corporal, he directs his intention to 
the ofi*ering of them, having previously opened the 
Ciborium, and drawn it nearer towards the middle. 
Before saying Suscipe, &c., he covers it, and places it 
back in its former position, after having located the 
paten under the corporal. If he should be presented 

*It is always with the right hand that the priest uncovers and covers 
the chalice. 

tit is not permitted to make any marks with the paten, or anything 
else, on the Host. 

X According to Oaxantns, De Men-suns, the Ciborium should have a 
veil or cover made out of rich materials, either of silk or silver, or 
eveo gold cloth, through respect for the Blessed Sacrament. 



32 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

with any small Hosts at that moment, he places them on 
the paten, and, after the Oflertory, he puts it on the 
corporal, a little higher up than the Host, at the Gospel 
side. 

47. N'ext, having joined his hands, he repairs to the 
Epistle side. From there, he takes the chalice per no- 
dum with the left hand, brings it before him, and, with 
the fingers of his right hand, he puts a portion of the 
corporal in the cup of the chalice, and purifies it, while 
he holds it with his left hand. 

48. Then, holding the chalice, with his left hand on 
the altar, he places the purificator between the cup and 
the thumb of his left hand, that it may serve to gather 
drops which might fall from the cruets. 

Then, with his right hand, he receives the cruet with 
wine from the server, and pours a sufiicient quantity of 
it in the Chalice.* Then, having returned the cruet to 
the server, he forms with the same hand, extended, a 
cross over the cruet containing water, saying, Deus qui 
huinanm siibstantim. He takes the same cruet, and pours 
a little water in the chalice,f saying, at the same time, 
Da nobis per hujus aquce et viiii mysterium {Hub. Miss., 
n. 4), he returns the cruet to the server, continuing the 
prayer, taking care to make a simple bow towards "the 
cross, at the holy name of Jesus. It is advisable to ab- 
sorb with the purificator the drops within the chalice, 

* It is generally supposed, that the quantity of the wine should 
cover tlie bottom of the chalice, or such quantity that the priest, in 
consuming it, may be able, without effort, to take it all at one draught 
without lowering the hand (tmo liaustu). ^ 

t The quantity of water poured in the chalice should be very small, 
thr^e or four drops of it are sufficient, and should be less than the 
third part of the wine. (See Pope Eugenius IV.y in Decnto pro 
Armenis.) 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 33 

that might have gathered around the cup. (S. M. (7., 
nh Sept., 1816.) 

49. This done, he places the chalice sufficiently near 
the corporal with his left hand, goes to the middle of the 
altar, and lays the purificator, folded in two, on that part 
of the paten that remains outside of the corporal. Then, 
having placed his left hand on the altar, he takes with 
his right the chalice per nodum^ carries it over the cor- 
poral, and advances his left hand under the foot of it ; 
then, holding it raised, so that the top of it may not be 
higher than his eyes, he says, Offerimus tihi Domine^ 
&c., looking at the cross the whole time of that offering. 
{Mub.^ ih.) 

50. After the Offerimus^ the priest forms with the 
chalice a cross over the corporal, without passing over 
the Host. Then, having placed the chalice in the middle 
of the corporal, behind the Host, he covers it with the 
pall. (Hub., ih.) 

51. Then he inclines moderately, and places his joined 
hands on the edge of the altar, and says. In Spiritu 
humilitatis, &g. {Rub., ib.) Having finished the prayer, 
he becomes erect, extends his hands, and, having raised 
them as high as his eyes, he joins them again, in the 
mean time saying, Fen^ sanctificator, &c. Then he 
forms a cross with his right hand over the chalice and 
the Host together, saying, JEt benedic hoc sacrificium 
tuo Sancto nomini preparatmn^ while he holds his left 
hand on the altar near the corporal. 

* When the priest is to make across over the offerings, the hands 
^e first joined before his breast, and, in forming the cross, the left 
hand is placed on tlie altar, and the right should be straight, and the 
fingers united, according to the decree of the S. R. C, 24th July, 1683. 
Also, when the cross is made on the chalice and Host conjointly, the 



34 . CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

52. After this, he joins his hands again, and goes to 
the Epistle side, where, a little beyond the altar, he 
washes the extremities of the thumbs and forefingers of 
his hands, at the same time saying, Lavaho^ &c., which 
he continues while he wipes his fingers ; and there he 
may stand, his hands joined, until the completion of 
that Psalm. 

53. At the Gloria Patri he bows to the cross, whilst 
he goes to the middle of the altar, although he may say 
it on arriving there. 

54. Having reached the middle of the altar, his hands 
joined, he raises his eyes to the cross, and having lowered 
them immediately, he puts his hands, joined, on the 
edge of the altar, inclines moderately, and says, Suscipe 
Sancta Trinitas ; at the end of which, extending his 
hands on the altar, he kisses it. 

55. Then, becoming erect, and rejoining his hands, he 
turns to the people, and, extending and joining the 
hands, as at the Doniinus voMscum, with a voice a 
little louder, he says. Orate Fratres ; and, having re- 
joined his hands, he turns to the altar by the Gospel 
side, making the complete circle, and saying, at the same 
time, in a low voice, ut meum ac vestrum sacrijicium^ 
&c. {Mub.^ ib.) The server having answered, Suscipiat^ 
&c., the priest answers, to himselfj Amen. 

■ 56. Here he extends his hands, as at the prayers, and, 
without saying Oremus^ he reads the Secrets in a low 
voice. The number of these should equal that of the 
prayers said before the Epistle. If there is only one of 

first Hue is commenced from the middle of the pall, and, without low- 
ering the hand, it is drawn over the Host ; and the second, or the 
transversal line, is drawn between the Host and the chalice, from one 
corner of the pall to the other, or not any longer than the first line. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 35 

them, he does not read the conclusion, but stops after 
having said, Spiritus Sancti Dens. If there are more 
than one, he will say the conclusion of the first, saying, 
also. Amen ; and at the conclusion of the last Secret^ he 
stops at the above-named words, which are considered 
as the commencement of the Preface. Then he turns 
the pages of the Missal for the Preface with his left 
hand, whilst his right is laid on the altar, off the corpo- 
ral, unless, through necessity, he should be obliged to 
use both hands to find the Preface. 

57. Having found the place for the Preface, he lays 
both hands on the altar, and says, with a loud voice, 
Per omnia scecula scecMlorwn^ &c., Dozninus vobiscuon. 
At the sursum, corda^ he raises his extended hands as 
high as his breast, so that both palms face each other. 
At the Gratias agam/as^ he rejoins his hands without 
raising them any higher. At Deo nostro^ he looks at 
the cross and bows. {Ruh,^ ib.) 

58. When he commences Vere dignmn et justum est, 
he opens his hands again, and holds them as he did 
during the prayers, until he reaches the Sanctus^ &c., 
whereupon he rejoins his hands, inclines moderately, and 
says, in a moderate voice, Sanctus, /Sanctus, &c., with- 
out, however, placing his hands upon the altar. At the 
word Denedictus, &c., he becomes erect, and makes on 
himself the sign of the cross in the usual manner. 

Aeticle IX. 
From the Canon to the Consecration. 

59. After the sign of the cross, the priest raises his 
hands as high as the shoulders, and his eyes to the cross, 
lowering them immediately. Then, joining his hands, 



36 CEEEMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

places them on the edge of the altar, and inclines pro- 
foundly, whilst he says, Te igitur^ in a low voice. {Huh. 
Miss.) At the words, uti accepta habeas et benedicas^ 
he extends his hands upon the altar, and kisses it. Then, 
having become erect, and joined his hands, at the 
words, Swc dona., &c., he makes three signs of the 
cross on the oiFerings conjointly, saying at the first, 
h(£c -^ dona., at the second, licm Hh iminera., and at the 
third, lime sancta ^ sacrificia illibata / and, having ex- 
tended his hands without joining them, he continues, 
J?i p7'imis quoi tibi offerimus., <fcc. (Huh. Miss.) In 
pronouncing the name of the Pope, he makes a simple 
bow towards the Missal, but does not bow at the name 
of the Bishop in whose diocese he says Mass ; or if the 
See is vacant, he does not say Papa nostro^ or Antistite 
jiosfro.* (Gav., p. 2, Tit. viii., n. 2.) 

60. In saying Memento, Domine, he raises'his hands 
only as high as his breast, and joins them slowly, and 
having somewhat bent his head (it is not requisite to 
look at the Host, it not being consecrated), he prays in 
silence, renewing his mem.ento for the living, during a 
short time. Then, having extended his hands, he con- 
tinues to read, in a low voice, Et omnium circumstan- 
tium., &c., till muniam,ur auxilio. {Huh. Miss.) 

61. During Gommunicantes., he makes a simple bow 
towards the book, at the name of the Blessed Virgin, 
and towards the cross, at that of Jesus ; he also bows 
towards the book at the name of the Saint whose Mass 



* The Bishop named is that of the diocese in which the priest cele- 
brates, although he may not he his Bishop. In case he does not know 
the name, it is sufficient to form his intention to pray for him. In 
Eome, the words Et antistite nostra are omitted, as tlie Pope is the 
Bishop of Eome. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 37 

he says, or of whom he makes a commemoration. {Hub, 
Miss.) 

62. At the conclusion., Per eujidem Dominwm^ &c., he 
joins his hands without bowing. Then, on commencing 
Hanc igitur^ &c., he extends his two hands over the 
Host and the chalice together, without touching the 
pall, the thumbs still crossing each other above the 
hands, and the forefingers being united. {S. JR. (7., 4th 
Aug., 1663.) At the conclusion of the prayer, he joins 
his hands, closing them without separating them pre- 
viously, and draws them to himself before his breast, at 
the same time continuing to read, Quam ohlatione')n^ 
<fcc., till the words JBenedictam^ &c. {Hub. Miss) 

63. Then, having placed his left hand on the altar, 
near the corporal, he makes three crosses on the offerings, 
in the same manner spoken of in n. 56. The first, as he 
says JSene'i'dicta'm^ the second at Ad'hscriptam, 
and the third (which is to be made slowly) during the 
words, Ha'htam, JRationabileTn^ acceptabilemque facere 
digneris / and as he continues, he makes another cross 
on the Host at the words, ut nobis Cor'i'pus^ and 
another on the chalice whilst saying Et /Scm'hguis / 
and immediately after, raising and joining his hands 
before his breast, he continues, Eiat dilectissimi Filii 
tui Domini nostri Jesu Christie bowing at the same time 
that he pronounces the sacred name, {Hub. 3fiss.) 

64. If there are Hosts to be consecrated, he uncovers 
the CiboriicTYi^ and moves it a little in advance of the 
chalice ; should they be upon the corporal, and not in a 
Ciborium, he does not move them. 

65. After this (if need be, says the Missal) the priest 
purifies his fingers, which is done by rubbing the thumbs 
and the forefingers on the side of the corporal, while he 

4 



38 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

says, Qui pridie quam pater etur. He takes the Host 
between the thumb and the forefinger of his right hand 
[jRiib. Miss.), pressing it a little for that purpose with 
the forefinger of his left (which he should do, BaMeschi 
says, whenever he is to take it up), and immediately 
after taking it on the other side with the thumb and 
forefinger of his left, extends and joins the other fingers 
together ; and, being erect, holding the Host somewhat 
raised above the corporal, he says in the mean time, ac- 
cepit panem m sanctas . ac venerabiles manus suas. 
{Bub. Miss.) 

66. In saying, JEt elevatis oculis in coelum, he raises 
his eyes to the cross, and lowers them immediately. At 
Tihi gratias agens he bows, and at JBenedixit he makes 
with his right hand a cross on the Host ; while he still 
holds it with his left, he takes it again with the right 
hand, continuing, Fregit^ deditque discipulis' suis, &c. 
{Bub. Miss.) 

67. In this position of the hands, having ended the 
said words, not before, he leans with his elbows on the 
edge of the altar, in an unafifected manner, bends his 
head, and distinctly and reverently, without any twist- 
ing of the body or of the mouth, without at all raising 
his voice, or breathing violently on the Host, he pro- 
nounces the words of the consecration, saying. Hoc est 
enim Corpus nieum. {Rub. Miss.) 

68. After pronouncing these words, continuing to hold 
the sacred Host in the same manner, he becomes erecty 
drawing his hands a little more towards the edge of the 
altar, bends his right knee to the floor, and adores the 
Blessed Sacrament, without saying any thing. {Bub. 
Miss.) After the genuflection, following the Sacred 
Host with his eyes, he raises it respectfully in a perpen- 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 39 

dicular line over the corporal, a little higher than his 
head, that the people may adore it ; then, without stop- 
ping, he lowers it slowly towards the corporal, on which 
he places it, with his right hand, in its former position ;* 
and, having placed his hands on the altar, the thumbs 
and forefingers being united, he makes another genu- 
flection. 

69. After rising, he uncovers the chalice, taking the 
pall with the fore and middle fingers of his right hand 
(in this manner he covers and uncovers the chalice here- 
after), and, having purified his fingers by rubbing them 
over the cup of the chalice, he says, Simili modo post- 
quam cwnatum est ; then, with both hands taking the 
chalice between the cup and the nodum^ he raises it a 
little over the corporal, and replaces it immediately, 
saying, in the mean time, accipiens et hunc proeclarum 
calicem ; and without taking his hands off, he will make 
a bow at the words, Tibi gratias agens, to the conse- 
ci'ated Host, In saying Benedixit^ he makes a cross on 
the chalice with his right hand, still holding it with his 
left, and immediately holding it with both hands, he will 
continue, Deditque discipulis suis, (Bub. Miss.) 

70. Having finished saying these words, he leans with 
the elbows on the edge of the altar, and holding the 
chalice per nodum with his right hand, and supporting 
it at the foot with the last three fingers of his left, with- 

* From this moment until afte'r the ablution, the thumb and the 
forefinger of each hand are kept united, and are not separated unless 
to toueh the eonsecrated Host ; consequently, in turning the pages of 
the Missal, he does so with the fore and middle fingers. Neither are 
the hands placed out of, but on the corporal (as was said before), ex- 
cept when they rest against the edge of the altar as before, with the 
exception that the thumbs and forefingers continue to be united 
together. 



40 CKEEMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

out bending it (as some do), having his head inclined, he 
devoutly pronounces the words of consecration, Hie est 
enim calix, &g. {Bub. Miss.) 

11. After the words of the consecration, he places the 
chalice upon the altar, and, in a low tone of voice, say- 
ing, Hcec quotiescumque feceritis, be makes a genuflec- 
tion, his hands being placed on the altar as at the con- 
secration of the Host, and mentally adores the precious 
blood. Having become erect, he takes the chalice with 
his right hand per nodum, and, with his left at the foot, 
and following it with his eyes, he raises it so that the cup 
is brought above his head, that the people may see it ; 
then he puts it back on the corporal, in its former position, 
covers it with the pall, holding the foot with his left hand, 
and makes a genuflection (Euh. Miss.), paying attention 
in this, as in any other case, that the maniple may not 
touch the Host. 

Aeticle X. 

From the Canon after the Consecration to the Pater Noster. 

T2. Having become erect,- and having extended his 
hands as before, he says, in a low voice, TJnde et memores, 
&G. {Bub. Miss.), to the words De tuis donis ac datis, 
when he joins his hands. Then,, having placed his left 
hand on the corporal, at the Gospel side, he makes three 
signs of the cross over the chalice and Host conjointly, 
saying, hostiam *h puram, hostiam »?• sanctam, hosfiam 
•J- immaculatam ; then he makes one on the Host only, 
saying, panem sanctum *h vitceceternce, and one on the 
chalice alone, saying, et calicem >h salutis perpetuce ; after 
which, he extends his hands, and in that position he 
continues the Canon, in the same low tone of voice, 
eaying. Supra quce propitio, &c. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 4:1 

73. After the words, Imnuteulatam Hostiam^ he in- 
clines profonndl}, and puts his hands joined on the edge 
of the altar, and in that .attitude he says, Supplices tero- 
gamus {S.B. (7., 7th Sept., 1816) till Ut quotquot\ and 
in saying, JEx hac altaris participatione., having extended 
his hands on the corporal, he kisses the altar in the 
middle, being careful not to touch the Host. {Huh.^ ib.) 
Th'Cn, becoming erect, and joining his hands at the 
words Sacro sanctum, Filii tui^ he places his hand on 
the corporal, making with the other a cross on the Host 
at the word, Cor-hpus., and another immediately after, 
on the chalice alone, at the words, Sangui^nem sump- 
serimus ; then, having placed his left hand under the 
breast, so that the thumb and forefinger do not touch 
the chasuble, he makes with his right hand a sign of the 
cross on himself, paying Or^xni henedictione eoelesti, et 
gratia repleaniur y and immediately after, he joins his 
hands before his breast, while saying, Per eundera Dom- 
inimi^ &C. {Rub. Miss.) 

74. In saying, Meonento Doniine, <fec., he extends and 
closes his hands slowly, so that they be joined at the 
In sonuio pads. Then, thus joined, he raises them as 

• high as his chin, without touching it, and somewhat 
lowers his head j and his eyes being fixed on the Blessed 
Sacrament, he makes tlie memento of the dead for 
whom he desires to pi"ay. 

75. After the memento^ he raises his head ; and, hav- 
ing extended his hands as before, he continues, Ipsis 
JDomine^ &c. At Per eundem Christum^ he again joins 
his hands; and, in this particular case, although the 
holy name is not mentioned, he makes a simple bow. 
{Rub, Miss.) 

76. Then having raised his head, and placed his left 



42 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

hand on the corporal, with the three last fingers of his 
right he strikes his breast, saying, in a moderate voice, 
Nobis qtioque peccatoribns ;^ then extending his hands, 
he continues in the low tone fitmulis tuis. (Bub. Miss.) 
Should the name of the Saint, whose feast he celebrates, 
occur in this prayer, he will bow on reading it. 

77. At Per Christum DomimiTn Nostrum he joins his 
hands as usual, with saying Amen ; after which he places 
his left hand on the corporal, and with his right he forms 
three crosses on the chalice and Host conjointly ; the 
first at Sanc^tificas, the second at vim-hficaSy and the 
third at bene*hdicis et prosstas nobis, 

78. Then holding the foot of the chalice with his left 
hand, he uncovers it with his right, and having placed 
his hands on the corporal, he makes a genuflection. 
Having become erect, with the thumb and forefinger of 
his right hand he takes the Host at the lower part, and 
having brought it over the chalice, he forms with the 
same Host, within the cup, and without touching it with 
the Host, three crosses, holding, at the same time, with 
his left hand the chalice ^er nodttm, saying. Per 4« ipsum, 
et cum •h ipso^ et in •!" ipso ; and immediately bi'inging 
the sacred Host out of the chalice, but still with his left 
holding the chalice, he makes two more crosses at the 
words, PJst tibi Deo Patri 'h Omnipotently in imitate 
Spiritus >h Sancti. (These crosses are formed between 
the chalice and himself) Then bringing the Host over 
the chalice, and leaning the thumb and the forefinger 
on the edge of the cup, he raises the chalice a little with 

. * In this cas'e, as well as at the Agnvs Dei, and Domine non sv,in dig^- 
nus, when again he is to strike liis breast, he should take care that the 
thumb and the forefinger shall not separate, and that they may uot 
touch the chasuble. (Durandus, Lib. IV., cap. 46.) 



OEKEMUNIES OB' LOW MASS. 43 

his left hand, at the same time saying, oninis honor et 
gloria. Then having replaced the chalice and the Host 
in their respective places, he purifies his fingers over the 
chalice, which he covers immediately after with his right 
hand, at the same time holding it with his left. After 
which, having placed his hand extended on the corporal, 
he makes a genuflection. 



Article XI. 
From the Pater JVbster to the Communion. 

79. The priest having lisen, with his hands still on the 
corporal, says aloud, Per omnia sceciila sceculorum. The 
server having answered Anien^ he joins his hands as 
usual, and says, Oremus^ at the same time bending his 
head somewhat to the Blessed Sacrament. Having 
raised his head, he continues, with hands joined, the 
prayer till Pater JSfoster^ when, having extended his 
hands before his breast, he continues the Lord's Prayer 
to the end, at the same time keeping his eyes fixed on 
the Blessed Sacrament. [Pub. Miss.) 

80. The server having answered, Sed libera nos a 
malo., the priest says to himself. Amen. Then with his 
right hand he draws the paten from under the corporal, 
and cleans it, for which purpose he makes use of the 
purificator, which afterwards he places at some dis- 
tance from the corporal at the Epistle side. During 
this action his left hand is held on the corporal. Then 
having taken the paten between the fore and middle 
fingers, he holds it upright, its edges resting near the 
corporal, and the concave part towards the sacred Host, 
and tlie hand above the paten, at the same time saying, 



44 ' CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

Libera nos^ &c. (Bub. Miss) In pronouncing Marios, 
he bows to the book. 

81. In saying, Petro et Paulo^ he places his left hand 
under his breast, and with his right, holding the paten, 
he makes with it the sign of the cross on himself, at the 
same time that he says, Da propitius pacem in diebiis 
nostris. After the sign of the cross he kisses the paten, 
not in the middle, but on the border {S. B, (7,, 24th 
July, 1683), where it is not to touch the sacred Host. 
Then, as he continues, saying, ut ope misericordim turn, 
he places the paten under the Host, being helped to 
that effect by the forefinger of the left hand. (Bub., ib.) 
Then in the usual manner he uncovers the chalice, and 
makes a genuflection. Having risen, he takes the Host 
with the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, raises 
it over the chalice, and with the help of the thumb and 
forefinger of his left hand cautiously and skilfiilly breaks 
it in the middle, commencing from the upper part, and 
saying in the mean time, Per eundem Do7ninu'm JVbs- 
trum tTesuni Christum Filiwrn tiiura.'^ Having divided 
the Host, he places the portion remaining in his right 
hand on the paten, still holding the other half over the 
chalice ; then with the thumb and forefinger of his right, 
he breaks a small piece from the lower part of the second 
half, at the same time saying. Qui tecum vivit et regnat ; 
and holding the small piece over the chalice, he places 
the portion that is in his left hand on the paten, near 
the other half, saying. In uyiitate Spiritus Sancti Peus. 
Then, with his left hand, taking the chalice per nodum, 

* To break it properly, it should be gently bent in and out two or 
three times, commencing at the top, then in the middle, and lastly at 
the end; and returning to the middle, bent again carefully, till it be- 
comes divided: In this manner there is less danger of causing small 
particles to break off. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 45 

he says iu a loud voice, Per omnia scecula soBculorum. 
Amen being answered, he makes three crosses within 
the cup of the chalice with the small piece of the Host, 
saying, Pax 'h Dom^ini sit "J* sem.per vobis'hcwn. In 
forming these crosses he should not allow the particle to 
touch the chalice. The server having answered, JEt cum. 
spiritu tuo^ the priest lets the particle fall into the chalice, 
at the same time saying in a low voice, Hcec com,7nixtio^ 
<3b*c. Then having purified his fingers within the cup of 
the chalice, he covers it as usual, holding his left hand 
on the foot of the chalice, after which he makes a genu- 
flection. 

82. Having risen, he inclines moderately before the 
Blessed Sacrament, his hands being joined between his 
breast and the altar ; and, in a loud voice, he says, Agnus 
Dei qui tollis peccata m,undi ; and, having placed his 
left hand on the corporal, he strikes his breast with the 
three fingers of his right hand that have not touched 
the sacred Host, at the same time saying. Miserere 
nobis. In the same manner (without joining th-e hands), 
he strikes his breast again at the second Miserere nobis, 
and at the Dona nobis pacem. {Pub. Miss.) Then, 
having joined his hands, and placed them as usual on 
the edge of the altar, but not on the corporal, according 
to the decree of the Sacred Congregation (Tth Sept., 
1816), he says, in a low voice, the three prayers pre- 
scribed before Communion, his eyes being fixed at the 
same time on the Sacred Host. (Pub. 3fiss.) 

83. Having said the prayers, the priest makes a gen- 
uflection, saying, as he rises, Panem coelestem accipiani., 
et nomen Domini invocabo. {Pub. Miss.) Then, with 
his right hand he takes both parts of the Host at the 
upper ends, from the paten, and places them between 



46 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

the forefinger and the thumb of his left hand, in such a 
manner that the Host preserves its rotundity as much as 
possible. After this, he takes the paten with his right 
hand between himself and the chalice, a little above the 
corporal, and also being somewhat inclined towards the 
middle of the altar, without resting the left elbow on 
it, he says three times, in a moderate voice, Domine^ non 
sum digmis, &c., slightly striking his breast with the 
last three fingers of his right hand as many times. 
Then he continues, in a low voice, Z7i intres, &c. {Hub, 
il/z'ss., n. 4.)* 

84. Having become erect, he places one part of the 
Sacred Host on the other ; then, with the thumb and 
forefinger of his right hand, having taken both parts of 
the Host, thus joined at the bottom, he forms a perpen- 
dicular cross, at the same time holding the paten under 
it. He does not raise the Host so high as to allow the 
people to see it, nor does he pass the limits of the paten 
in drawing the transversal line ; while he forms the cross, 
he says. Corpus Domini nostri Jesu Christi (inclining 
at the word Jesu) custodiat anim^am. meam, in vitam, 
mternam,. Amen. (Hub., ib.) After this, he inclines 
moderately, rests his elbows on the edge of the altar ; 
and, thus inclined, and holding the paten under the Host, 
he communicates by reverently introducing the Sacred 
Host into his mouth.f Should the Host adhere to the 

* To give himself time to pronounce these words, the priest may 
lay his right hand on the corporal, immediately after striking the 
breast, or he may move the hand slowly as he pronounces the words. 
{BaldescJii.) 

t Rubricians differ in describing the method of communicating. It 
would be extremely difficult to reduce to practice what some of them 
prescribe on the subject. It is sufficient to say, that such an action is 
to be done with as much respect and reverence, and, at the same time, 
fl^s unaffectedly as possible. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 4:7 

palate, he must use his tongue, not his fingers to loosen 
it. 

85. Having received the Sacred Host, the priest be- 
comes erect, lays the paten on the corporal near the edge 
of the altar, and joins his hands, which he raises towards 
his chin, without touching it, and his head being a little 
inclined, he meditates for a few moments. {Hiib.^ ih.) 

86. After a short meditation, he lays the left hand on 
the foot of the chalice, and, with the right, takes the 
pall from the chalice, saying, in a low voice. Quid retri- 
huam Domino pro omnibus quae retfihuit m^ihi f and 
makes a genuflection. Then, having taken the paten 
between the first and the second fingers of the right 
hand, and holding it inclined, he passes it gently several 
times from right to left over the corporal, to gather the 
fragments that might have fallen on it, for that pur- 
pose, raising, with his left hand, the extremity of the 
corporal. {Huh.^ ih) 

87. Having gathered the fragments, he brings the 
paten over the chalice, and, holding it there, sufiiciently 
inclined, he takes it between the first and second fingers 
of his left hand, as near as he can to the place where he 
held it with his right hand ; then, with the thumb and 
forefinger of his right, rubs the paten from top to bot- 
tom, so as to bring all the fragments into the chalice ; 
then rubs the same thumb and forefinger together 
in the middle of the chalice-cup, in order to remove any 
particle that may have remained on them. [Rub.^ ih.) 
Here the priest places his left hand (still holding the 
paten) on the corporal, and, with the three free fingers 
of his right, he takes the chalice under the nodus^ 
saying, Calicem Salutaris, &c., till salvus ero^ inclus- 
ively. Then he raises the chalice until the top of it 



48 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

reaches his forehead, and with it he forms a perpendic- 
ular cross, in the same manner as he did with the Sacred 
Host, saying, at the same time, Sanguis Doniini nostri^ 
&c., and bowing at the word Jesu. (Jiub., ib., iV^ S.) 
He then raises the paten under his chin, and brings the 
chalice to his mouth to receive the precious blood, which 
he does uno vel duplici haustu^ together with the par- 
ticle previously placed in the chalice. It is well to re- 
mark, that it is more becoming to hold the chalice steady 
to the mouth than to move it oif and replace it again 
while the priest consumes the precious blood. 

88. Having received the precious blood, or after the 
communion of the people,* the priest having laid on the 
corporal his left hand holding the paten, presents the 
chalice to the server, in order to receive wine for the 
purification, and at the same time he saj^s. Quod ore 
sumjJsim.KS^ &c. Then he takes the wine, holding the 
paten under his chin, as he did in consuming the pre- 
cious blood. {Hub., ib.)f 

* Attention should be paid to renew frequently the sacred species 
preserved in the Ciborium. St. Charles Borronieo ordained that they 
should be renewed every eighth day, Tbe Sacred Congregation (3d 
Sept., 1662) prescribed the same thing. "In renovatione quae quoli- 
het octavo die fieri debet de Augustissimo Sacramento," &c. Clement 
VIII. (Const. Sanctissimus, 81 Mali, 1595) says, that the sacred species 
should be renewed at least every fifteen days, and more frequently in 
damp places. " HostijE consecrat^e post quindecim dies ad summum 
(quod in loeis humidis, praesertim pluvioso aut liiemato tempore, fre- 
quentius fieri debet), una cum niinutissimis fragmentorum particulis, 
quae in ciborio remanserunt, a sacerdote consumentur, et in ipsum ci- 
borium, aut pyxidem, ab illisfragmentis et particulis mundatam, nova3 
hostise consecrataa reponantur; nee unquam illjfi recentes cum his ve- 
tustioribus misceantur." The same thing is to be observed regarding 
the Sacred Host, which is kept for Benediction. 

+ From a letter of Fius V., 8th January, 1571, quoted by Benedict 
XIV. (de Sacvif. Miss., lib. 2, ch. 21), we gather that the quantity of 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 49 

89. After receiving the purification, he puts the chalice 
and the paten on the corporal, so that the chalice be in 
the middle, and the paten a little towards the Gospel 
side; then taking the chalice below the cup with the 
three last fingers of both hands, he puts the thumbs and 
forefingers, still joined, over the cup of the chalice, and 
in this manner he carries the chalice to the Epistle side, 
where, having placed it on the altar, the server pours on 
the fingers wine and water, wliile the priest says. Cor- 
pus tumn Dornine^ &c. It is well to remark that the 
Rubric says, ahluit i^olllces et indices^ therefore the priest 
not only washes the extremities of the fingers, but the 
fingers, b)' rubbing tliem against each other, as the 
server j^ours wine and water on them. Then holding 
the chalice in the same manner, he carries it near the 
purificator, where he places it ; and still keeping the 
thumb and forefinger of the left hand on the cup, he 
takes the purificator with his riglit, and places it on the 
fingers of his left, and as he goes to the middle of the 
altar he dries his four fingers with the purificator. 

90. Having reached the middle of the altar, he places 
the purificator between the thumb and the forefinger, 
so as to cover the fingers of the left hand, and witli his 
right he takes the chalice ^:»er iioduin^ and takes the last 
ablution, at the same time holding the purificator under 
his chin. Then he puts the chalice in the middle of the 
corporal, wipes his lips gently with the purificator, and 
with the same in his right hand wipes the interior of the 

■wine poured in the clialice for the purification should be at least equal 
to that consecrated ; also that the purification should be received at 
that part of the chalice where the precious blood was taken. Should, 
however, the wine for the purification happen to be less, it will suffice 
to move the chalice gently, so that it may touch the parts where the 
Blessed Sacrament reached. 

5 



50 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

cup of the chalice, holding it by the nodus with his 
left. 

91. Lastly, the chalice being dried, he places it at the 
Gospel side (but not on the corporal) ; he extends the 
purilicator over the cup as before, and places on it the 
paten and the pall. Having folded the corporal with 
both hands, and taken the burse with his right hand, he 
puts in it the corporal, which he lays on the middle of 
the altar. Then he covers the chalice with the veil, on 
which he places the burse, and taking the chalice with 
both hands, he puts it in the middle of the altar, and 
adjusts the veil in front as at the commencement of 
Mass. {Ruh.^ ih.; and from the Sac. Con.^ 5th March, 
1698.) Then he joins his hands and goes to the Epistle 
side, whither the server should have removed the Missal.* 

Article XII. 
From the Communion until the Mid of Mass, 

92. Having arrived at the Epistle side, the priest, 
with his hands still joined, reads the Communion in a 
low voice; then he returns to the middle of the altar, 
kisses it, turns to the people and says in a loud voice, 
Dominus vohiscum. He rejoins his hands, returns to 
the Missal, and reads the jorayer (or prayers) in the same 
manner and order in which he had previously read at 
the commencement of Mass. 

93. At the end of the conclusion of the last prayer 
(unless there is a proper Gospel to be read), the priest 

*The Sacred Congregation, consulted by the Bishop of Tuy: " Au 
in Missis privatis, permitti possit ministro si fiierit sacerdos, vel Dia- 
conus, vel Subdiaconus, iit praeparet calicem, et ipsiim extergat in fine 
post oblationes sicut in Missa solemni?" Answered: " Negative, et 
serventur Kubricse." (7th Sept., 1816, no. 4376, ad. 12.) 



\ 



CERKMONIES OF LOW MASS. 51 

closes the book in such a manner that the leaves be 
turned towards the chalice. 

94. Then he goes to the middle of the altar, kisses it, 
and tm-ning towards the people, he says, Dominus vo- 
Mscuni / and having rejoined his hands, he says, Jte 
Missa est, or if the season or particular Mass requires it, 
he says, JBenedicmmis Domino. And in this case he 
says it turned towards the altar. 

95. Having said Ite Missa est, he turns to the altar, 
inclines moderately with his joined hands on the edge 
of the altar, and says in a low voice, JPlactat tibi Sancta 
Tri7iitas. {Hub. Miss.) 

96. Then he kisses the altar, and having risen, he 
raises his eyes, extending his hands (which he has ele- 
vated as high as his shoulders), and then joining them 
again before his breast, he says, Benedicat vos omnipo- 
tens Deus ; at this last word he inclines his head, and 
turns by the Epistle side towards the people, having his 
hands joined, and his eyes modestly lowered. Then 
having placed his hand extended below his breast, he 
blesses the people with his right hand, by forming a 
cross, and saying in a loud voice, Pater et Filius, et 
Spiritus Sanctus. 

To give the blessing properly and unaffectedly, he 
extends his right hand, having all the fingers united, and 
the little finger turned towards the people ; then with- 
out precipitancy drawing a straight line from his eyes to 
his breast, he says, Pater et Filius ; he raises his hand 
vertically to his shoulders, and crosses the first line 
transversely from left to right, saying, Et S>piritus 
Sanctus. Then he rejoins his hands, and turns towards 
the Gospel side to the altar corner to say the Gospel of 
St. John. 



52 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

9*7. The last Gospel is read in the same tone of voice, 
and with the same ceremonies as the first GosjDel, except 
that, when the Gospel of St. John is read, in saying, 
Initium Sancti Enayigelii^ the priest forms the cross. 
on the altar, or on the card instead of the book. At 
the Et Verhum caro factum est^ he makes a genuflec- 
tion, having the hands extended, and laid on the altar. 
He also makes a genuflection, if, on reading other Gos- 
pels, there are words requiring it, as is the case on the 
feast of the Epiphany. 

98. The Gospel being ended, the priest goes, with 
his hands joined, to the middle of the altar, takes the 
chalice by the nodus with his left hand, puts his right 
on the burse, and, turning on his right, he descends to 
the foot of the altar, where he makes a profound bow; 
or a genuflection on the floor, if the Blessed Sacrament 
be in the tabernacle. Having risen, he takes the cap 
presented to him by the server. As he leaves the altar, 
lie says the anthem Triian Puerorum^ — the whole of it 
when the Mass is of double rite ; or only commences it, 
when the Mass is semidouble ; to which, in Paschal time, 
he adds Alleluija. Then he says the JBenedictus, Laiidate 
DoininiLtn in Sanctis ejus. {Huh. Miss.) 

99. On arriving in the sacristy, he makes a low bow 
to the cross or other image; then he places the chalice 
in the sacristy altar, or press, takes off" his cap and un- 
robes. In taking off the vestments, he observes the 
contrary order from that observed in vesting ; for in re- 
moving the alb, he draws ofl" the left sleeve first, then 
passes the alb over his head, and, lastly, draws ofi" the 
right sleeve. He then kisses the cross on the stole, 
maniple, and amice, as he did when vesting. 

100. Finally, having washed his hands (a praiseworthy 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 53 

practice, not ordered by the Rubric, but recoramended 
by most Rubricists), without speaking to any person, he 
goes to make his thanksgiving. If he vested at the 
altar, he unvests there also, at the Gospel side, as soon 
as he has read the Gospel, without previously returning 
to the middle of the altar. 

Aeticle XIII. I 

On Votive Masses.* 

101. A votive Mass is one which a priest celebrates 
for his own devotion, or to comply with the wishes of 
the faithful, if such Mass differ from that prescribed by 
the Rubric, or if it do not accord with the Office. 
There ought to be a legitimate reason for a votive Mass, 
and it cannot be said on all days.f 

The Masses for the dead are classed among votive 
on Sundays ; Doubles ; during the octaves of Christmas, 
Masses. Generally, requiem Masses are prohibited 
Epiphany, Easter, Pentecost, and Corpus Christi ; on 
Ash Wednesday ; during Holy Week, and on the vigils 
of Christmas, Epiphany, and Pentecost. 

102. Votive Masses, generally speaking, are prohibited 
on days when requie^n Masses cannot be celebrated. 

Newly ordained priests who are charged by the Bishop 
to say three Masses — one of -the Holy Ghost, the other 

* This article is transcribed from the Ceremonies of Low Mass by 
Eev. James Hughes. 

t Although the Mass, on Doubles, ought to accord with the Office, 
there is an exception for Quarter Tense Saturdays, on which a Bishop, 
if he confer Holy Orders, always says the Ferial Mass. This is an 
ancient usage, confirmed by many decrees of the Congregation of S. 
Kites. These are three in the general Collection. (11th July, 1739 ; 
21st March, 1744; 11th Feb., 1764; n. 8942, 4004, and 4171.) 

6* 



54 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

of the Blessed Virgin, and the third for the departed 
faithful, after their first Mass — can wait for the days on 
which these Masses may be celebrated ; but the obliga- 
tion is discharged by applying the Mass of the day to 
the intention prescribed, and by adding the oration of 
the votive Mass, after those of precept, if the Rubric 
permit it. If the faithful request a votive Mass to be cel- 
ebrated on a day when it is not allowed, the obligation 
is discharged by saying the Mass of the day. 

103. One solemn requiem Mass can be celebrated, if 
the body be present, on all days, except on the more 
solemn festivals of the first class and of precept, on the 
festival of the Titular, and on the three last days of Holy 
Week.* If an interment occur on such days, and if 
Mass can be said, the oration for the dead is not added 
after that of the day. 

104. The Church considers that more latitude ought 
also to be given for saying the Mass Pro S2^07iso et 
8ponsa in which the nuptial benediction is conferred. 
The decree on this subject, dated the 20th of December, 
1783, was confirmed by Pius YL, on the 7th of 
January, 1784, and the same PontiflT orders its publica- 
tion and observance in the entire catholic world. This 
is the text: "In celebratione nuptiarura quae fit extra 
diem Dominicum, vel alium diem festum de praecepto, 
seu in quo occurrat Duplex primse vel secundas classis ; 
etiamsi fiat Officium et Missa de Festo Duplici per an- 
num, sive majori, sive minori ; dicendam esse Missam 
pro Sponso et Sponsa, in fine Missalis post alias Missas 
votivas specialiter assignatam : in diebus vero Dominicis, 
aliisque diebus festis de prajcepto, ac Duplicibus primaB 

♦Decrees of 5th July, 1698 ; 11th Aug., 1736 ; 29th Jan., 1752 ; 8th 
April, 1808 ; n. 3328, 3901, 4074, ad 12 et 13, 4357, ad I. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 55 

et secundae classis, dicendam esse Missam de Festo, cum 
Commemoratione Missse pro Sponso et Sponsa."* 
Another decree of the 28th of February, referring to 
this, orders the Rubrics of votive Masses to be ob- 
served in the above-mentioned Mass : that is, to omit 
Gloria in excelsis and Credo^ and to say three orations. 

105. In votive Masses, those for the dead excepted, 
the psalm Judica and Gloria Patri at the Lavaho are 
said, even at votive Masses of the passion, or of the 
cross, which may happen to be celebrated in Passion 
time. But Gloria in excelsis is ordinarily omitted, ex- 
cept at Masses of the Blessed Virgin on Saturday, at 
Masses of angels, and at those of the Saints on the day 
of their death, which is considered as a species of fes- 
tival.f It is likewise said at solemn votive Masses cele- 
brated for some weighty cause,;|; unless violet ornaments 
are used. 

106. Three orations are ordinarily said. The first is 
that of the votive Mass ; the second is that of the office ; 
and the third, that which would, have been said in the 
second place in the Mass of the day, unless some com- 
memoration is to be made. When the Blessed Sacra- 

* This decree has been inserted in the Eituale Bomanum ; it is n. 
4266 in the Collection. The other decree is n. 4394. It is easy to infer 
that the above Mass cannot be said on days which exclude either the 
greater or lesser Doubles ; for instance, the entire octave of the 
Epiphany, the vigil of Pentecost, &c. 

t Eomsee, after Gavantus. 

X By Masses 'pro re gravi the Congregation of Eites means those at 
which the Bishop and clergy, &c., assist. (Dec. of 19th May, 1607; 
n. 204, ad 14.) Clothing or religious profession is not to be reckoned 
among the causes which Warrant the singing of a votive Mass of the 
Holy Ghost, on a Sunday or a Double. (Dec. of 24th July, 1683, n. 
2060, ad 5.) Kubricians give the same decision regarding the first 
Masses of newly-ordained priests, and the Masses of the fiftieth year. 
{^mt. sac. ad usum DicEC, MecTilm.) 



56 CEKEMONIPJS OF LOW MASS. 

ment is exposed, the oration thereof is always added. 
If a votive Mass de B. Y. Maria be said, the third ora- 
tion is de, Spiritu Sancto. 

107. During Advent, Alleluia and its versicle are said 
at votive Masses, though not at ferial ones ; and at the 
times of Septuagesima and Lent the tract is said, though 
not said at all ferial Masses in these times. 

108. The Credo is generally omitted at votive Masses. 
At solemn Masses ^wo re gravis it may be sung ; if, how- 
ever, violet ornaments be used, the Credo must be 
omitted, unless it be a Sunday. The Credo is not said 
in private votive Masses, during an octave. 

109. If the votive Mass have a proper preface, it is 
said ; if not, the common preface is used, or that of the 
time or of an octave, if there be a proper preface for 
either. For the Co'inmunicantes^ see the note of no. 
V. In votive Masses the Gospel of St. John is always 
said. WTiite vestments are used at votive Masses De 
SS. Trinitate, De SS. EucharistiaB Sacramento, De S. 
Maria, De Angelis, In Annivers. Elect, seu Consecr. 
Episcopi, Pro Sponso et Sponsa ; red, at Masses De 
Spiritu Sancto, De Sancta Cruce, De SS. Apost., Pro 
eligendo S. Pontifice ; violet, at those De Pass. D. N". 
J. C. Ad tollendum Schisma, Pro quacumque necessi- 
tate ; and at the eight other votive Masses which follow 
in the Missal. At those of saints, the color is the same 
as on their feasts ; and at requiem Masses it is always 
black. 

110. We can refer to this article the Mass which a 
priest ought to celebrate in a Church where the office 
differs from his own. What Mass then ought a priest 



OKKIOMONIKS OF IX)W MASS. 57 

to celebrate wliere the ordo difters from his own, either 
with regard to tlie rite of a feast, or the day on which 
it is fixed ? 

111. If he say Mass in a church, where a festival is 
celebrated solemnly and with concourse of people, for 
instance, on the feast of its patron or on the day of its 
dedication, he ought to conform to the rite and to the 
color of this Church. He would, even do better to say 
the Mass of such Church, without taking any notice of 
his own office, unless on a Sunday or a privileged feria, 
a commemoration of which is never omitted. If he 
celebrate High Mass, on a day of obligation, or even on 
a day when devotion attracts a concourse of people, he 
is obliged to follow, exclusively, the rite of the Church 
where he is, without paying any attention to the office 
he has recited. 

112. If he go, through devotion, to say Mass in a 
Church where the festival of a saint is solemnly cele- 
brated, he can say the proper Mass, if it have been 
granted to the whole Church ; or, if not, he can say the 
common. This has been decided, with some exceptions, 
by many decrees of the Congregation of Sacred Rites.* 

113. On other days, not celebrated with such solem- 
nity, if the color be the same as that of his own church, 
he can say Mass conformably to his office. 

114. If the office of the place be of double rite, or if 
votive or requiem Masses be inconsistent with the office 
of the place, he must conform at least to the color. 

If his own office be of double rite, he cannot say a 
votive Mass, although the office of the place be com- 

* See Traite des SS. Mysteres, eh. 12, n. 5. 



58 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

patible with it ; nor a requiem Mass, unless there be in 
the same Church, on that day, solemn Exequies for the 
dead.* 



CHAPTER II. 

ORDEK TO BE OBSERVED IN CELEBRATING TWO MASSES 
ON THE SAME DAY. 

1. When a priest is authorized to say two Masses 
(which can only be done on Sundays and feasts of obli- 
gation), in order to afford an opportunity for a consider- 
able number of people to comply with the precept of 
assisting at the Holy Sacrifice, he may be much per- 
plexed as to how he should act with regard to the chalice 
and the ablution of the fingers, especially if he has to 
say the second Mass in another Church, and at some 
distance. The Sacred Congregation of Rites, in an in- 
struction approved by Pope Pius IX. the 11th day of 
March, 1858, prescribes that when a priest is obliged to 
celebrate Mass in two different Churches on the same 
day, he should, in consuming the precious blood (during 
the first Mass), use the utmost diligence to take the 
whole of it. Then he places the chalice on the corporal, 
covers it with the pall, and with his hands joined, stand- 
ing in the middle of the altar, he says, Quod ore sump- 
simiis. After which, drawing towards him the little 
water vase, he washes his fingers, saying at the same 

* All these rules have been extracted from several decrees of the 
Congregation of Eites ; 11th June, 1701; 4th Sept., 1745; 7th May, 
1746; 29th Jan., 1752; n. 3437, ad 2, et 3 ; 4026, ad 8; 4032, ad. 13; 
4074, ad 10, et 11. See also Eomsee, torn. 1, art. 5, and torn. 5, u, 89. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 69 

time, Corpus tiium Domine^ &c., and then wipes them. 
The chalice being still on the corporal, removing the 
pall, he places on it the pm-ificator, then the paten, the 
pall, and lastly the veil. He then continues the Mass, 
and having finished. reading the last Gospel, goes to the 
middle of the altar, where, uncovering the chalice, he 
examines whether any of the precious blood has col- 
lected at the bottom, which often happens, for although 
the sacred species were at first carefully consumed, 
nevertheless, in the very act of consuming, drops are 
spread around the surface, and will not collect at the 
bottom until the chalice is again in its position for a 
while. If, then, there still remains a drop of the divine 
blood, he will carefully take it from the same side of the 
chalice from which he had consumed. He should by 
all means do so, as the sacrifice still morally lasts, and 
by divine precept is to be completed by the consumma- 
tion of the species still existing. After this, the priest 
Avill pour into the chalice at least as much water as he 
had before poured wine, and by gently moving the 
chalice cause the water to pass around, and then empty 
it in the vessel used for that purpose by the same side 
of the chalice from which he received the precious blood. 
Then wiping the chalice Avith the purificator, he covers 
it as usual, and leaves the altar. 

2. The priest having unvested and made his thanks- 
giving, if he is to say mass on the following day, in the 
same place, he will preserve that water, and pour it in 
the chalice at the second purification; or he wiU cause it 
to be absorbed by raw cotton, or tow, which he burns ; 
or if it be left to evaporate, he puts it in the Sacrarium^ 
or in the Piscina. 

3. This chalice having been used by the priest, being 



60 LOW MASS FOE THE DEAD. 

now purified, if he needs it for the second Mass he can 
take it with him, or he can use another. {jS. M. (7., 
11th March, 1858.) 

4. When a priest is obhged to say two Masses in the 
same Church, having received the precious blood, and 
covered the chahce with the pall, he says the Quod ore^ 
&c., and washes his fingers with water while saying, 
Corpus iuum^ &c. He then covers the chalice as di- 
rected above, and at the end of the Gospel he consumes 
the drops of the precious blood that may still remain in 
the chalice ; he then covers the chalice with the purifi- 
cator, paten, and pall, and then places it in the taber- 
nacle, with the usual genuflections. Then having joined 
his hands he leaves the altar. 

5. Having said the offertory of the second Mass, the 
priest extends the corporal on the altar, opens the taber- 
nacle door, makes a genuflection, and takes out the 
chalice, being careful to place it on the corporal, or on 
the pall. After communion, having received from the 
server the last ablution, he adds to it the water with 
which he purified his fingers at the first Mass, and then 
continues as usual. 



CHAPTER III. 

LOW MASS FOR THE DEAD.* 

1. There should be no flowers on the altar. The 
antipendium must be black, without any emblems of 

*Low Mass for the dead, even proesente cadavere, cannot be said on 
Sundays, festivals of double rite, nor during the octaves of Christmas, 



LOW MASS FOR THF: DEAD. 61 

death either on it or around the altar. The canopy of 
the tabernacle ought to be removed, unless the color of 
it be purple. The vestments should be black. 

2. At the commencement of Mass, the priest having 
made the sign of the cross and said the anthem Introibo^ 
omits the psalm Judica and the Gloria Patri^ &c., and 
says, Adjutorium Nostrum in Nomine Domini^ making 
at the same time the sign of the cross. 

3. He does not make the sign of the cross at the In- 
troit, but having placed the left hand on the Missal (or 
on the altar), with the right extended, he makes the 
sign of the cross on the Missal, without, however, touch- 
ing it. Instead of the Gloria Patri^ he says, Requiem 
(Eternum,^ &c. The Gloria in Mccelsis is not said. 
{Hub, Miss.^ part ii., rit, xiii,) 

4. At the Munda cor meum^ the Jube Domine^ with 
Dominus sit^ &c., are omitted. After the Gospel he 
does not kiss the book, nor does he say. Per Evangelica^ 
&Q. {Rub.^ ib.) 

5. While saying J)eus qui humanoB substantive^ he 
does not bless the water ; at the end of the Psalm La- 
vabo he omits the Gloria Patri, without saying any 
thing in its place. {Rub.^ ib.) 

6. At the Agnus Dei.^ instead of saying miserere nobis^ 
he says. Dona eis 7'equie9n / and at the third he says, 
Dona eis requiem sempiternam. He does not strike his 
breast in pronouncing these words, but keeps his hands 
joined before him, without touching the altar. 



Eplphaay, Easter, Pentecost, and Corpus Christi, nor on the vigils of 
Christmas, Epiphany, Pentecost, or on Ash-Wednesday, nor during 
Holy Week. " Missas privatas de requiem, etiam corpore presente et 
insepulto, dici non possunt diebus quibus fit de officio duplici, vel aliis 
a Rubrica exceptis." {S. R. 6% 29th Jan., 1752.) 

6 



62 LOW MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

7. He omits the first of the three prayers before Com- 
miinion. (Hub., ib.)^ 

8. At the end of the Mass, instead of Tte missa est, 
he. says, JReqmesca7it in pace, turned towards the altar, 
not. to the people. [Hub., ib.) Having said the prayer 
JPlaceat, he does not say JBenedicat vos, nor does he 
give the blessing to the people (even had he given com- 
munion during Mass), but goes to the Gospel side of the 
altar, where he says, Domimis vobiscum, and the Gos- 
pel of St. John. 

9. It is to be remarked, that as often as only one 
prayer is to be said, the Dies irce should be said ; and 
this occurs, 1st, on All Souls' Pay ; 2d, on the day of 
the death or interment ; 3d, on the third, seventh, and 
thirtieth day after interment, and on the first anniver- 
sary, which are called privileged days for the dead. 

* * Communion may be given at Masses for the dead, either with par- 
ticles consecrated at the same Mass, or with others which had been 
reserved in the tabernacle, provided there be no custom having force 
of law to the contrary in the diocese. This conclusion is drawn from 
the fact that there are a number of conflicting decrees about this mat- 
ter. Benedict XIV., in his book De Saci^ificio Missoe (lib. 3„ cap. 18, n. 
10, 11, 12), holds that communion may be given at Masses of the 
dead either with particles consecrated at Mass, or with others reserved 
in the tabernacle. This he maintains, notwithstanding the decree of 
the S. (7., 2d September, 1741, wliich says: " In paramentis nigri colo- 
ns non ministratur Eucharistia per modum Sacrameuti, scilicet, cum 
particulis praeconsecratis extrahendo pyxidem e custodia; potest 
tamen ministrari per modum sacriticii prout est quando Fidelibus 
prasbetiir communionem cum particulis intra eandam missam conse- 
oratis." The master of ceremonies of the Cathedral of Palermo having 
consulted the Sacred Congregation to learn whether he ought to follow 
Benedict XIV. or the above-mentioned decree, the answer given on 
the 12th of April, 1823, was, that the decision was referred until after 
a special examination of the question : from which answer the editor of 
the collection of decrees concludes, that every Church should conform 
to what has been hitherto practised therein. 



CEKEMOKIES OF LOW MASS. 63 



CHAPTER IV. 

LOW MASS WHEN THE BLESSED SACRAMENT IS EXPOSED. 

1. It should be remarked, that it would be better not 
to celebrate Low Mass a-t an altar on which the Blessed 
Sacrament is exposed, according to the ceremonial of 
Bishops (lib. i., ch. xii., sec. 9), which states, that the 
discipline of the Church is very ancient, to which the 
practice of the Patriarchal Churches of Rome, and of 
the best regulated churches, is conformable. Never- 
theless, when there is a just reason to celebrate at such 
an altar, the following ceremonies should be exactly ob- 
served. 

2. In going to the altar, as soon as the priest comes 
in sight of the Blessed Sacrament, he takes off his cap, 
and gives it to the server. Being arrived at the foot of 
the altar, he kneels on both knees, and bows profoundly; 
he then ascends the altar, sets the chalice thereon, makes 
a genuflection only on one knee (which kind of genuflec- 
tion is made when it is to be made on the platform), and 
arranges the corporal and chalice. He again makes a 
genuflection, goes to the Epistle side, opens the Missal, 
returns to the middle, makes a genuflection, and turning 
a little towards the Gospel side, he descends to the foot 
of the steps, makes a genuflection on one knee only, and, 
without bowing, begins Mass. 

-3. After the confession, without making a genuflec- 
tion, he goes up to the altar, and makes there a genu- 
flection, before he commences the Oramiis te Dotnine, 



64r • CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

After the Oranvris^ he again makes a genuflection, and 
goes to the Missal for the Introit. 

A General Mule. — A genuflection is to be made, 
whenever the celebrant goes from the middle to either 
side of the altar ; the same when he goes from either 
side to the middle, with this difference only, that when 
he goes from the middle, he first kisses the altar or per- 
forms any action prescribed, and then makes the genu- 
flection, this being the last thing to be done. When he 
leaves any side to go to the middle, the first act on ar- 
riving there is to make the genuflection, then to kiss the 
altar, or perform any other duty. 

4. At the Dominus vohiscum, he turns back a little 
towards the Gospel side ; and only half turned tow<irds 
the people, he says, Dominus vobiscum, which must be 
observed whenever he turns towards the people. 

5. When he is about to wash his hands, he makes first 
a genuflection, then goes dovra the steps by the Epistle 
side, and avoiding to turn his back to the altar, turns 
so that his right side be next to the corner of the Epistle, 
and his face towards the people ; and there he washes 
and wipes his hands, then returns to the middle of the 
altar, and makes a genuflection, 

6. He says Ch'ate fratres in the same way as the 
Dominus vobiscum^ without completing a perfect circle. 
The remaining part, till communion, is the same as in 
other Masses. 

v. After the first ablution, without removing from his 
place, he receives the second ablution, having his face 
turned as much as possible towards the Blessed Sacra- 
ment. [Bauldry^^Qxt iv., ch. ix., art. ii., n. 12.) Then 
he wipes his hand, takes the ablution, and adjusts the 
chalice as usual. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS, 65 

B, He then <;ontmues the Mass, observing the genu- 
flections prescribed, and the manner of turning himself 
at the Dominus voMscttm, and lie, missa esL Should 
he havo to say, Bt'iiedica'mus Dowiino^ instead of the 
Ite, .niissa -esU, he turns round to the altar, and makes a 
genuflection before he says it, 

9. After the Plaoecf^ tihi^ he kisses the altar, says, 
JBeiiedicat vos omnipot^ais Deus^ and, instead of the 
usual bow, makes a genuflection, and turning towards 
the people, he gives his blessing. He does not, however, 
make a perfect circle, neither does he make another 
genuflection; but turning to the Gospel side, he say^, 
Dominus vobiscusn, and reads the last Oospel, recollect- 
ing to sign himself with the cross, {Hub. Miss.y Fer, 

V.y m Coend Domini.) 

10. At the Verbwm cwro fclbct^Jum est, "S,^ oa all other 
occasions without exception, he turns a little towards 
the Bles^d Sacrament when he makes the genuflection. 

11. At the end, he goes to the middle, makes a gen- 
uflection, desoends,a little on the right, to the floor, makes 
a genuflection on both knees, and bows. He then returns 
to the sacristy, putting on his cap at the place he had 
taken it ofi" when going to the altar. 



CHAPTER V. 

OF LOW MASS IN PRESENCE OF PRELATES. 

1. By prelacies, are here understood Cardinals in every 
part of the world, Archbishops throughout their whole 
province, and Bishops in their dioceses. Others are 
not so considered ; neither are the above when they are 
incognito, or not in their robes. 

6* 



66 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

2. If possible, the priest should be vested and at 
the altar before the arrival of the prelate, and shonid be 
standing on the floor of the sanctuary, at the Gospel 
side, with his hands joined, waiting for him, and having 
previously prepared the chalice and Missal on the altar. 

3. On the arrival of the prelate, he salutes him with 
a low bow, and on receiving the sign to begin Mass, he 
again bows to him; then turns a little towards the altar, 
makes a low bow, and begins Mass in the same place 
and position. {Hub. Miss.^ part ii., tit. iii., n. 2.) 

The practice introduced, is to commence Mass imme- 
diately after the salutation, without waiting for a sign 
from the prelate. 

4. If the prelate arrive before at the altar, the priest, 
whether he has the chalice or not, salutes him from a 
convenient place; then bowing to the altar, he arranges 
on it whatever is necessary, descends on the floor to the 
place above mentioned, and after bowing to the prelate, 
he commences Mass. 

5. At the GonJiteo7\ms%^2tdi oi S2tyhug^ et vohis fratreSy 
et vos fratreSj turning and bowing to the prelate, he 
says, et tibi Pater ^ et te Pater. [Pub., ib.., n. 8) : if there 
be more than one, et vobis Patres^ et vos Patres. 

6. After the confession, having said OreinuSy he bows 
to the prelate, then ascends to the altar, and continues 
Mass as usual. (Pub., ihy n. 10.) 

7. At the end of the Gospel be does not kiss the 
book, neither does he say. Per Evangelica dicta. The 
attendant takes the book to the prelate to kiss. (Pub.^ 
ib.^ tit. vi., n. 2.) Even should the prelate not kiss it 
(which happens when there are many, no one kisses it), 
the priest should also omit to kiss it, 

8. After the Agnus Pei^ except in Masses lor the 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 67 

dead, when he has said the first prayer before com- 
munion, he kisses the altar, then the instrument of 
peace (which the attendant presents, kneeling at his 
right hand), saying Pax tecum^ the attendant answers, 
M cum spiritu tuo {Hub., ih., tit. x., n. 3), and takes 
it, covered with a cloth, to the prelate to kiss ; or, to 
several, saying to each one. Pax tecum / they answer- 
ing, PJt cum, spiritu tuo. He makes a bow to them 
after they have kissed it, not before. ( Ccererrt. Episc.., 
lib; i., ch. xxix., sec. 8.) The priest continues the other 
prayers. 

9. In giving the blessing, after having said, Penedicat 
vos Omnipotens Pens, he bows to the cross ; then turn- 
ing to the Bishop, he makes a low bow, as if requesting 
permission to bless the people, and says. Pater, et Fllius, 
et Sjnritus Saiictiis, blessing the people only on the side 
opposite the prelate. {Rub., ib., tit. xii., n. 3.) . If the 
prelate should be in the middle, he blesses on the 
Gospel side. 

10. After the last Gospel, without going to the middle 
of the altar, he turns to the prelate, and makes a low 
bow {Rub., ib., ii., 5), and remains there until the Bishop 
leaves. 

11. Should the prelate remain, the priest goes to the 
middle, takes the chalice, descends from the altar, makes 
a low bow to the cross, and another to the Bishop, puts 
on his cap, and proceeds to the sacristy. 

12. The instrument of peace is not presented to 
prelates out of their diocese. A bow is made to them 
in going to and coming from the altar, and, according 
to the opinion of some Rubricists, at the end of the 
Gospel. In other respects, every thing is done as if 
they were not present. . 



68 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

CHAPTER VI. 

• GIVING COMMUNION. 

Article I. 

Giving Gommunion during Mass. 

1. The practice of giving communion to the people 
during Mass, being more conformable to antiquity, is 
preferable to that of giving it before or after Mass. A 
quantity of small Hosts should be prepared, correspond- 
ing with the number of persons to receive. If there 
are many, it is better to make use of a ciborium ; if 
only a few, they may be placed either on the corporal 
at the left side, or on the paten ; but, in all cases, they 
should be on the altar before the Offertory. In making 
the Offertory, the priest extends the intention also to 
the small Hosts ; and after the Offertory, if the Hosts 
are on the paten, he will place them on the corporal, 
near the large Host, a little at the left side. 

If the ciborium is used, before the Offertory, he brings 
it nearer to himself and uncovers it. After the Offertory, 
he covers it again, and places it a little in the rear of 
the chalice, but not off the corporal. 

3. At the consecration, if the small Hosts are on the 
corporal, he does not touch them. If the ciborium is 
there, he uncovers it before prori^uncing the words of 
consecration, as was said above for the Offertory ; and 
after the elevation of the sacred Host, having made the 
genuflection, he covers it, and puts it in its place. 

4. Having consumed the precious blood, and placed 
the chalice on the corporal, he covers it with the pall. 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLT COMMUNION. 69 

If the small Hosts are on the corporal, he makes a gen- 
uflection before touching them, and then he reverently 
places them on the paten, and again makes a genuflec- 
tion. Meanwhile the server says the Gonfiteor\ after 
which the priest turns to the right, and, facing the 
corner of the Epistle, says, in a loud voice, Misereatur 
vestri (not tui^ although there may be only one com- 
municant). The server having answered A^ne^i^ he 
says, Indulge^itiam^ &c., at the same time making a 
sign of the cross with his right hand over the commu- 
nicants, in the same manner as he gives the blessing at 
the end of Mass. If the small Hosts are in a ciborium, 
after having covered the chalice with the pall, he brings 
the ciborium between himself and the chalice, uncovers 
it, makes a genuflection, and turns towards the people 
to say Misereatur^ &c. 

5. Having said Indulgentiam^ &c., he turns to the 
altar, makes a genuflection, and between the middle and 
forefinger of his left hand he takes the paten or the 
ciborium by the nodus / and, having taken one of the 
Hosts with the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, 
he raises it a little above the paten or ciborium, and in 
that position turns to the people. Then, having his eyes 
modestly fixed on the Blessed Sacrament, he says, in a 
clear and unaffectedly devout tone of voice, JEcce Agnus 
Dei^ ecce qui tollit peccata mundi ; and then, three times, 
Domine non sum dignus^ ut intres sub tectum meuni^ 
sed tantum die verbo, et sa7iabitur anim.a mea. {Hub. 
Miss.^ part ii., rit. x., 11^ 6.) 

6. Having said these words, he descends by the middle 
of the altar, not by the side {S. B. (7., Sept, 1737), and 
approaches the communicants, beginning at the Epistle 
side. Before giving communion, the priest makes, each 



70 CEEEMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

time, a sign of the cross with the Host, above the paten 
or ciborium, taking care not to pass the limits of either ; 
while he says, Corpus Do^nini nostri *h Jesu Christie 
bowing at these last words, he puts the Host in the 
mouth of the communicant, saying, Custodial anionam 
tuam in vitam ceternam. Amen. In giving holy com- 
munion, the priest wdll be careful to lay the Host on the 
tongue of the communicant in such a manner that it 
will adhere to it; at the same time, he will carefully avoid 
touching tlie communicant's lips or tongue with his 
fingers.* When there are many communicants, and the 
first row have received, the priest should not continue 
to give communion by retrograding, but should recom- 
mence at the Epistle side; and, as he passes by the 
middle of the altar, he makes no genuflection, even 
should the Blessed Sacrament be exposed. 

7. Having given communion, the priest returns to 
the altar, without saying any thing, keeping the thumb 
and forefinger of his right hand united over the paten 
or ciborium. If any Hosts remain, and there is no 
place to put them, he makes a genuflection and consumes 
them. If they had been on the corporal, he gathers the 
fragments with the paten, and causes them to fall in the 
chalice ; then, receiving the purification, continues Mass 
as usual. 

8. Should the priest give communion with Hosts al- 
ready consecrated, having consumed the precious blood, 



* If there are ecclesiastics in surplice to receive holy conimimion, 
they kneel on the top step of the altar. If the^e are priests or deacons, 
they should wear a stole, and receive first. Lay persons should kneel 
at the railing, or any other place where the communion cloth is pre- 
pared. It is not permitted to use the chalice veil or finger towel for a 
communion cloth. 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION. 71 

he puts the chalice at the Gospel side, on the corporal, 
and covers it with the pall. Then, having removed the 
altar-card, he opens the door of the tabernacle, and 
makes a genuflection. Then he takes out the ciborium, 
places it in the middle of the corporal, closes the taber- 
nacle door, uncovers the ciborium, and makes another 
genuflection. Meanwhile the server says the Gonfiteor^ 
after which the priest says, Misereatui\ &c., and then 
continues as described above. 

9. After having given communion, he returns to the 
altar, makes a genuflection, covers the ciborium, opens 
the tabernacle, and places the ciborium within, makes 
another genuflection, closes the door, and replaces the 
card before it. Then he receives the purification, and 
continues Mass. 

Article II. 

Purification of the Ciborium. 

10. The priest having received the precious blood, 
and given holy communion (if it had to be given), he 
consumes the small Hosts that remain in the ciborium. 
Then, taking with his left hand the ciborium by the 
nodus^ brings the opening of it over the chalice, and, 
with the forefinger and thumb of his right hand, causes 
the particles to fall from the ciborium into the chalice. 
If necessary, he gets a little wine into the ciborium, and 
gently moves it in such a manner that the wine may 
pass all around, and detach the small particles that may 
still remain. To do this more thoroughly, he may use 
the forefinger of his right hand ; and then he pours that 
wine into the chalice, after which he wipes the interior 
of the ciborium with the purificator. If newly conse- 



72 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

crated Hosts are to be placed in the ciborium, he does 
so ; after which, he makes a genuflection, covers the 
ciborium, and replaces it in the tabernacle. Otherwise, 
he covers the empty ciborium, and puts it off the cor- 
poral. This being done, he presents the chalice to the 
server, to receive wine for the purification, and con- 
tinues Mass.* 

Article III. 

On giving Communion at other times. 

11. When circumstances require that communion 
should be given immediately before Mass, the priest pro- 
ceeds to the altar, clothed in the vestments in which he 
is to celebrate (provided, however, that they are not 
black), he places the chalice on the Gospel side, the veil 
concealing it from the people, and then, having taken 
the corporal from the burse, extends it upon the altar. 
After which, he opens the tabernacle, makes a genuflec- 
tion, takes the ciborium, places it on the corporal, and 
proceeds as directed in Nos. 4, 6, and 6. Communion 
being over, should he perceive any particle on his fingers, 
he must let it fall into the ciborium. Then he makes a 
genuflection, purifies his fingers in the little water-vase, 
which is kept near the tabernacle for this purpose, wipes 
them with the purificator, saying during this time, " O 
sacrum convivium in quo (/hristus sumitur, recolitur 
memoria Passionis ejus, mens impletur gratia, et futurae 
glorias nobis pignus datur." During the Paschal time, 

♦ Qnarti, Murati, and other Eubricists remark, that, in purifying the 
ciborium, such particles as may be found in it sliould not be brought 
to the mouth with the fingers, nor received with themoutli at the edge 
of the ciborium ; for, besides the impropriety of so doing, tliere is 
danger of losing some of the particles. 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION. 73 

Alleluja is added to the above anthem. Then he says, 
Fanem de Goelo prestitisti eis, and the server answers, 
Omne delectamentum in se habentem, with Alleluja in 
Paschal time, and during the octave of Corpus Christi. 
Then, without adding, Domine exaudi, &c., and Dorai- 
nus vdbiscum {S. B. (7., 16th June, 1663), he says, 
Oremus. 

" Deus qui nobis sub sacramento mirabili Passionis tuse 
memoriam reliquisti ; tribue qusesumus, ita nos corporis 
et sanguinis tui sacra mysteria venerari, ut redemptionis 
tuae fructum in nobis jugiter sentiamus. Qui vivis et 
regnas cum Deo Patie," &c., and the server answers, 
Amen, During Pasclial time, instead of the above 
prayer, the following is said. Oremus. " Spiritum nobis, 
Domine, tuse caritatis infunde, ut quos Sacramentis Pas- 
chalibus satiasti, tua facias pietate Concordes. Per 
Christum Dominum nostrum." The server answers, 
Atnen. After this, he replaces the ciborium in the 
tabernacle, makes another genuflection, closes the door, 
locks it, and removes the key. (Should the priest fore- 
see that he is to give communion duiing Mass, or im- 
mediately after, the key may be left in the door of the 
tabernacle.) Then he places the chalice in the middle of 
the altar, on the corporal, and gives the blessing (to 
those who received communion) in the following manner. 

12. The chalice being arranged, the priest extends, 
elevates, and rejoins his hands, raising his eyes at the 
same time, and says, Senedictio Dei otnnipotentis y at 
these words bowing to the cross. Having turned to 
those who received holy communion, he continues, Fatris, 
et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti, and he makes the sign of the 
cross, adding the words, Descendat super vos, et maneat 
semper. The server answers. Amen. Then, without 

7 



74 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS» 

turning to the altar, he descends the steps, and having 
made the requisite genuflection or bow, he commences 
Mass. 

13. When communion is given immediately after 
Mass, the priest, having finished the last Gospel, goes to 
the middle of the altar, and puts the chalice on the 
Gospel side ; then, taking the corporal from the burse, 
opens the tabernacle, and proceeds as in "No. 11. The 
ciborium being replaced in the tabernacle, the door of 
it should be locked, and the key placed on the altar. 
After the blessing, the corporal is again put in the burse, 
which he places on the chalice, and on the burse he puts 
the key of the tabernacle, and he returns in the usual 
manner to the sacristy. 

14. When communion is given at other times, the 
priest washes his hands, puts on a surplice and a stole 
of the same color as that used for the day, or white ; 
should the priest wear a cape, he takes it off for the oc- 
casion. {S, B. (7., 12th July, 1628.) He goes to the 
altar with his head covered and his hands joined, being 
preceded by the server, who should have lighted the 
candles previously, and carried to the altar the burse, 
with the key of the tabernacle and the communion 
cloth, unless the latter had been already prepared. If 
the server be a layman, the priest will carry the burse 
before his breast, ^nd take along also the key of the 
tabernacle. Having arrived in front of the altar, he 
gives his cap to the server, and makes a genuflection 
before ascending the steps. Then he goes up to the 
altar, unfolds the corporal, and places the burse against 
the gradus as at Mass. He opens the tabernacle, makes 
a genuflection, takes the ciborium from the tabernacle, 
and places it on the corporal ; he uncovers the ciborium, 



SERVING AT LOW MASS. Y5 

places the cover on the corporal, and again he makes a 
genuflection. He continues the rest as before noticed 
in No. 11. After communion he replaces the ciborium 
in the tabernacle, gives the blessing to those who have 
communicated, puts the corporal into the burse, bows to 
the cross, and, after descending the steps, he makes a 
genuflection, and puts on his cap ; the burse is carried 
either by the priest or the server. He returns to the 
sacristy, where, having bowed to the cross, he takes off 
the stole and surplice, and the server returns to ex- 
tinguish the lights. 



CHAPTER VII. 

MANNER OF SERVING A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 

Aeticle I. 
General HemarJcs. 

1. The server should consider himself highly honored, 
being permitted to attend on a priest offering the most 
Holy Sacrifice. He should therefore perform this im- 
portant office with great purity of conscience, rectitude 
of intention, devotion and decorum. 

2. In making the sign of the cross, he should put his 
left hand a little below the breast, and touching the fore- 
head, the breast, and the left and right shoulders with 
the fingers of his right hand, he should say : In nomine 
JPatris^ et Fillip et Spiritus Sancti. Amen. 

3. A simple inclination is made by bending moderately 
the head downwards. A simple bow implies an inclina- 
tion of the head and a moderate bending of the body. 
A. low bow is made by bending the head and body pro- 



76 MANNER OF SERVING 

found] y, yet not so much as to render the action un- 
seemly. A bow is considered sufficiently profound, when 
the person that makes it, being in that position, can reach 
the knee with the extremity of his hand. 

4. To make a genuflection, one should bring the right 
knee down to the floor near the left foot, without inclin- 
ing the body, and then rise up again naturally, without 
too great haste. 

5. A genuflection on both knees is made by first bend- 
ing the right knee to the floor, then the left likewise to 
the floor ; and, having made a low bow, the person rises 
by lifting the left knee first, and then the right. 

6. To join one's hands properly, the palm of one 
hand should be applied to the palm of the other, and 
both held upwards against the breast. The thumb of 
the right hand should cross the thumb of the left. Dur- 
ing the Holy Sacrifice, whenever the hands are not ne- 
cessarily employed, they should be joined. 

v. The server should make an inclination whenever 
he hears the priest pronounce the holy name of Jesus, 
of Mary, or of the saint whose festival is celebrated, 
and on other occasions marked in the third article. 

8. In answering, he should take care to pronounce dis- 
tinctly, and not too loud, or too quickly. His manner 
should be grave without affectation. He should hold 
his head a little inclined, and his eyes modestly lowered. 

9. To put on the surplice in a proper manner, the 
server should open the lower part of it, and with both 
his hands pass it over the head upon his shoulders. Af- 
terwards he introduces first the right arm in the right 
sleeve, and then the left in the other sleeve ; and having 
adjusted it about his person, fastens it in front. In taking 
it off, he should first loose the strings, then withdraw 



A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 77 

his left arm from the sleeve, and lifting the surplice fi-oni 
the left side above the head over his right shoulder, he 
takes it off from the right arm. 

Article II. 
Of the Vesting of the Priest. 

1. At the appointed time the server puts on the sur- 
plice ; and if no one is appointed to prepare the cruets,* 
light the candles, and make other necessary preparations, 
he should attend to it. Then he places himself at the 
left of the priest and helps him to vest. Whilst the 
priest puts on the amice, the server prepares the alb, and 
then puts it on him, and assists him by holding up first 
the right sleeve of the alb, and then the left. After- 
wards he takes the girdle (keeping the tassels at his right) 
and gives it to the priest, so that he may easily gird him- 
self He should take care to adjust the alb in such a 
manner as to let it hang equally around, about an inch 
from the floor. After that he presents to him the mani- 
ple to kiss, and fastens it on his left arm. Then he 
hands him the stole, and finally he assists him in putting 
on the chasuble. After the priest is vested, he takes 
the Missal, holding it with both his hands before his 
breast, having the back of it to his right. He makes a 
low bow to the chief image in the sacristy, with the 
priest, and a simple bow to him, and goes before him to 
the altar. 

Aeticle hi. 

From the beginning of the Mass to the end of it. 

1. Being arrived before the lowest step of the altar, 
the server places himself at the right of the priest, from 



78 MANNER OF SERVING 

whom he receives the cap, kissing it, after kissing the 
priest's hand. He makes a genuflection on the floor 
with the priest, or (if the Blessed Sacrament be not there) 
a profound bow ; and raising a little the priest's vesture, 
he ascends the steps with him. He places the book on 
the stand, so as to have the back of it turned to the right. 
(The server does not open the book.) Then he puts the 
cap at a suitable place, and goes to the Gospel side, 
kneels on the floor at the left of the priest, a little in 
the rear, and joins his hands. 

2. When the priest descends to the floor to com- 
mence Mass, and makes a genuflection or a bow, the 
server makes a profound bow. He makes the sign of 
the cross with him, and answers at the confession. He 
bows at the Gloria JPatri. After the priest has said 
the Confiteor^ the server, inclining a little towards the 
priest, says Misereatur tui, &g. ; then, bowing profound- 
ly towards the altar, he says the Gonfiteor. At the 
words et tihi Pater^ et te Pater^ he turns his head some- 
what towards the priest. He strikes his breast when 
he says m.ea culpa^ mea culpa^ mea maxima culpa. 
When the priest has said Misereatur vestri, &c., the 
server raises his head. At the words Deus tu co7iversus, 
he inclines a little. At the words Dominus vobiscum^ 
he rises and raises a little the priest's alb, while he as- 
cends the steps. Then he kneels on the lowest step, 
and remains there till the end of the Epistle. 

3. He says the Kyrie eleison alternately with the 
priest. If the celebrant says Flectamus genua^ the 
server answers, Levate. If there be more than one 
epistle, he answers, Deo gratias^ at the end of each of 
them. The Epistle or Epistles being read, he rises, 
makes a genuflection or a bow in the middle, and goes 



A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 79 

to the book. If the priest makes a genuflection, as 
happens during Lent, the server makes also a genuflec- 
tion. When the priest has done reading, the server 
carries the book with the stand to the Gospel side, mak- 
ing a genuflection or a bow in the middle, as he passes. 
Having placed the book on the altar, he turns it a little 
to the right, and goes below the platform near the book* 
He answers at the Dominus vobiscum j and at the 
words Sequentia Sancti JEuangelii he puts his left hand 
on his breast, and with the thumb of the right he makes 
a cross on his forehead, lips, and breast. As the priest 
pronounces the name of Jesus in the beginning of the 
Gospel, the server bows towards the book, and goes 
down on the floor to the Epistle side, making a genu- 
flection or a bow in the middle. If the name of Jesus 
be not mentioned, then he bows to the priest, and goes 
to his place, and there he stands during the Gospel, at 
the end of which he answers, Laus tihi Christe^ and 
kneels down. 

4. If the Credo be said, the server kneels down during 
it, and makes a low bow at the words, JEt incarnatus 
esty &c. Having answered at the Dominus vohiscum^ 
he rises and goes to the side-table, takes the cruets, and 
carries them to the altar on the Epistle side. (He folds 
the veil of the chalice, if the priest leaves it unfolded.) 
When the celebrant approaches the corner of the Epistle, 
the server bows to him, and presents the cruet with wine 
to him, after first kissing it ; he receives it back, kissing 
it, and presents to him the cruet with water, kissing it 
both before giving it and after receiving it. (He does 
not kiss the priest's hand.) Afterwards he puts the 
towel on the altar in such a manner that the priest may 
easily take it, when he is to wipe his fingers. At the 



80 MANNER OF SERVING 

words " Veni sanctificator, he takes in his right hand 
the cruet with water, and the plate in the left, and pours 
water on the priest's fingers, bowing to him before and 
after. 

5. Having placed the cruets on the side-table, he 
kneels on the first step in front of the altar at the Epistle 
side; he answers at the Orate fratres / afterwards he 
answers at the Preface, and moderately rings the little 
bell at the Smictus. * 

6. At the words. Qui pridie^ &c., the server goes up 
and kneels on the edge of the platform, at the right of 
the priest. He inclines during the consecration of both 
species, and makes a low bow when the priest adores 
the Blessed Sacrament. At each elevation the server 
raises a little the extremity of the chasuble with his left 
hand, and with his right gives three strokes of the bell. 

7. The elevation being over, he rises, makes a genu- 
flection, and goes to kneel at his place. He strikes his 
breast at the words, Nobis quoque peccatoribus. He 
answers at the Per omnia scecula sceculorum^ and at the 
end of the Pater Noster. He answers again at the Per 
omnia^ &c., and at the Pax Domini^ &q,. When the 
priest says Domine non sum dignus^ the server inclines, 
and rings the bell moderately, that if there be persons 
to go to Communion, they may approach the holy table. 
When the priest uncovers the chalice after receiving the 
sacred body, the server rises, makes a genuflection, goes 
to the side-table, takes the cruets, carries them up to 
the altar, and inclines when the priest takes the sacred 
blood ; after which he ministers wine and water with 
the usual bows and kisses. 

8. If there are communicants, after the priest has re- 
ceived the most precious blood, the server, kneeling, 



A PiilKST AT LOW MASS. 81 

bows profoundly, and says the Confiteor. He inclines 
and answers at the Misereatur vestri, and makes the 
sign of the cross at the words Indalgentiam^ &c. The 
Communion being over, he raises the priest's alb while 
he ascends the steps, and kneels again until the priest 
has closed the tabernacle ; after which he presents the 
cruets as is said above. 

9. Having placed the cruets on the side-table, the 
server goes to the Gospel side, takes the book, and car- 
ries it with the stand to the Epistle side, making a gen- 
uflection in the middle as he passes ; after which he 
kneels on the lowest step at the epistle side, making a 
genuflection iu the middle as he passes. He answers 
the prayers, &c. When the priest gives the blessing, 
the server, remaining at his place, bows and makes the 
sign of the cross, at the end of which he answers. Amen, 
Then he rises, answers at the Dominus voMscum^ and 
at the beginning of the Gospel signing himself, as men- 
tioned in n. 3. Towards the end of the Gospel, he goes 
for the priest's cap ; he bends the knee at the words £Jt 
verbum, caro, &g. Then he goes up to the altar, takes 
the book, bows to the cross with the priest, and with 
him he goes down and makes a genuflection on the floor, 
or a bow. He gives the cap to the priest, kissing it and 
his hand, and goes before him to the sacristy. There, 
after making a low bow to the image with the priest, 
he bows to him. After that he puts the book at its 
place, and helps the priest to disrobe. Finally, he takes 
ofi" his surplice, and retires. 

10. If there be a last Gospel peculiar to the day, after 
the priest has said Jte, missa est, the server takes the 
book to the Gospel side, taking care to kneel when the 
jjriest gives the blessing. He should stand near the 



82 MANNER OF SERVING 

book below the platform until the priest has done read- 
ing, after which he carries the book back to the epistle 
side. 

11. Should the Mass be celebrated in presence of the 
Blessed Sacrament exposed, the genuflection, in going 
to and leaving the altar, is made on both knees. Neither 
the priest's hand, nor his cap, nor the cruets, are kissed. 
The server pours water on the priest's hands, standing 
on the floor at the Epistle side, with the towel on his 
arm. 

12. When Mass is for the dead, the psalm, Judica 
me, &c., is not said. The usual kisses are omitted. At 
the end of Mass, the priest, instead of Ite, missa est, 
says, Itequiescant in pace, to which the server answers, 
Amen. 



CHAPTER YIII. 

MANNER OF SERVING A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 

Article I. 

Tilings to he Prepared. 

1. The vestments for saying Mass, viz., chasuble, stole, 
cincture, alb, and amice, should be prepared on the middle 
of the altar. Near the vestments on the Epistle side, 
the pectoral cross on a plate, and the maniple on the 
Gospel side. The Missal open at its place. (The altar- 
cards should be removed, if the Canon* be used.) On 

* A book containing the Canon and some otlier parts of the Mass, is 
so called. It is placed on the altar instead of the Missal during the 
most solemn part of Mass, when a Bishop celebrates. 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 83 

common days only two candles should be lighted ; on 
festivals, four or more. On the side-table two large can- 
dles should be placed, to be lighted at the end of the 
preface. 

2. On the side-table the chalice should be prepared, 
the cruets, the basin and ewer, with a towel ; the hand 
candlestick with a lighted candle, and the Canon. 

3. In the sanctuary, towards the middle, the kneeling- 
desk, covered with a green or violet cloth ; also, two 
cushions, one placed on the upper part of the desk, the 
other on the lower part. 

4. If the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, the vestments 
should be prepared in the sacristy, or on a side-table in 
the sanctuary ; as on such occasion the Bishop does not 
vest at the altar. 

Aeticle II. 
Of the Preparation and Vesting of the bishop. 

1. Two chaplains, at least, are requisite to serve a 
Bishop's Mass. 

2. At the appointed time the two chaplains put on the 
surplice, and go to receive the Bishop at the door. 
They bow to him when they meet him, and walk before 
him towards the middle of the sanctuary, where they 
bow to the cross, or make a genuflection if the Blessed 
Sacrament be in the tabernacle. The Bishop goes to 
the kneeling-desk, with the first chaplain at his right. 
The second takes the Canon and the hand candlestick, 
and goes to the left of the Bishop. He gives the book 
to the first, who opens it where the prelate is to read, 
and holds it before him, assisted by the second, who at 
the same time holds the hand candlestick. The first 
should be attentive to turn the leaves. 



84: MANNER OF SERVING 

3. After the preparation, all go to the lowest step of 
the altar, where they bow or make a genuflection. The 
second having placed the Canon open in the middle of 
the altar against the tabernacle, and the hand candle- 
stick near the Missal, takes the basin, ewer, and towel. 
The first takes the cape from the Bishop and places it 
on the kneeling-desk. He takes the ring from the pre- 
late's finger with the usual kisses ; and having taken the 
towel from the second, each kneeling on one knee, they 
give the water and towel for the washing of the Bish- 
op's hands, and rise after having received his blessing. 
(If they are^ priests, they do not kneel.) After which, 
the second puts the basin, ewer, and towel on the side- 
table. 

4. The first goes up to the altar, takes the vestments 
one after the other, and with the assistance of the sec- 
ond vests the Bishop. Takingfirst the amice, he presents 
it to the prelate to kiss, puts it around his neck, and, 
passing the string around the waist, fastens it in front. 
Then he puts on him the alb ; afterwards he girds him 
with the cincture ; then he presents to him the pectoral 
cross to kiss, and suspends it from his neck ; then the 
stole is also kissed, and suspended from the neck down 
on each side and fastened with the cincture ; after that, 
the chasuble is put on him and fastened in front ; lastly, 
the ring is put on his finger wdth the usual kisses. When 
the Mass is for the dead, the maniple is put on him after 
the cincture. If, in vesting, the Bishop wishes to read 
the prayer, the second chaplain should hold the book 
and the hand candlestick before him. 

5. The Bishop being vested, the first chaplain goes to 
his right, and the second to his left ; they make a genu- 
flection or a low bow with him (the second having on 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 85 

hjs arm the maniple.) They answer and bow as usual 
during the confession. After the words Indulgentiam^ 
<fec., the second presents the maniple to the Bishop to 
kiss, and fastens it on his arm. When he ascends the 
steps, they raise the alb a little, go up with him, and re- 
main on each side of him, moving with him to and from 
the middle of the altar, as may be prescribed ; the first 
pointing out what is to be read, holds the hand candle- 
stick. They answer, make on themselves the sign of 
the cross, and bow. When the Bishop makes a genu-, 
flection, they do likewise, supporting him by placing 
each his hand under his elbow. 

6. While the Bishop says Munda cor mewm^ the sec- 
ond chaplain carries the book and the hand candlestick 
to the Gospel side, making the usual genuflections or 
bows; and holding the hand candlestick, points the text 
to the prelate. (Should a Cardinal be present, the first, 
as soon as the Bishop has kissed the text, takes another 
Missal, and observing the usual ceremonies, brings it to 
be kissed. If there be several high dignitaries, the 
Gospel is only given to the highest in dignity ; if they 
be equal in rank, it is given to no one.) When the 
Missal is not to be carried, the first chaplain remains at 
the right of the Bishop. If the Credo be said, they re- 
main by the Bishop during its recitaL 

7. After the Doniimts vohiscum^ the first chaplain and 
the second, leaving the hand candlestick on the altar, go 
to the side-table. The first takes the chalice and car- 
ries it up to the altar on the Epistle side ; he takes the 
corporal out of the burse, and extends it in the middle 
of the altar. IJe gives the paten to the Bishop, kissing 
it and his hand, He then wipes the chalice with a puri- 
fier, The second chaplain having brought the cruets, 

8 



86 MANNER OF SERVING 



gives the wine cruet to the first, who pours wine into 
the chalice. The second takes the water cruet and holds 
it up to the Bishop, saying, Benedicite^ Iteverendissime 
Pater^ and puts some drops of water into the chalice, 
after which he takes back the cruets to the side-table. 
The first having wiped the chalice, presents it to the 
Bishop with the usual kisses. (In Masses for the dead 
the water is not blessed.) Then he puts the pall on the 
chalice, and the paten partly under the corporal, cover- 
ing the remaining part with the purifier. When the J 
Bishop says. In spiritu humilitatis^ the second chaplain 
takes the basin, ewer, and towel, and goes to minister to 
the washing of the hands, the first receiving and re- 
turning the ring with the usual kisses. The second hav- 
ing carried the ewer back to the side-table, goes to the 
right of the Bishop, and the first goes to the book. After 
the Secreta^ the first takes the Missal from the stand, 
and in its place puts the Canon, open. They answer at 
the preface, and bow at the Sanctus, the second ring- 
ing the little bell. Afterwards the second lights two 
large candles on the side- table, which are put out after 
the Bishop's communion, or after he has given com- 
munion. (It would be more conformable to the Cere- 
monial of Bishops if two clerks hold two large candles 
or torches.) At the words Qui pridie, both kneel on 
the platform ; they bow and raise the chasuble as usual, 
the second giving three strokes of the bell at each ele- 
vation. He also uncovers and covers the chalice ; after- 
wards they both rise, make a genuflection on the plat- 
form, and stand on each side of the Bishop as before. 

8. Towards the end of the Pater Noster^ the second 
wipes the paten with the purifier, and gives it to the 
Bishop with the usual kisses. Then he uncovers and 



A BISl^OP AT LOW MASS. 87 

covers the chalice. Tiiey incHne and strike their breast 
at the Agnus Dei. Should the Pax be given, the sec- 
ond chaplain takes the instrument of peace, approaches 
the Bishop, kneels at his right, holding the instrument 
before him, which he kisses, saying. Pax tecum. Hav- 
ing answered, JEt cum spiritu tuo^ he rises and brings 
tlie Pax to the dignitary to kiss. In presenting it, he 
says, jPacc tecum j and being answered, Et cum spiritu, 
tuo^ he bows to him. Then he covers the instrument 
with its veil, carries it back to the side-table, and re- 
turns to the Bishop's side. 

9. At the Dom^ine non sum dignus^ they bow and 
strike their breasts ; afterwards the second chaplain un- 
covers the chalice, and both make a genuflection ; then 
the second goes for the cruets, gives the wine and water 
with the usual kisses, and puts back the cruets on the 
side-table. Meanwhile the first puts the Canon in the 
middle of the altar, and the Missal on the stand, and 
carries it, together with the hand candlestick, to the 
Epistle side. The Bishop washes his hands as usual, the 
second giving the water, and the first attending to the 
ring and presenting the towel. After which the first as- 
sists the Bishop at the book, and the second goes and 
arranges the chalice, carries it to the side-table, and re- 
turns to the left of the Bishop. Should the Bishop give 
communion, when he has taken the sacred blood, they 
kneel on the edge of the platform and say the (Jonfiteor. 
They answer and sign themselves with the sign of the 
cross at the Indulgentiam. When the Bishop returns 
to the altar, they raise his alb while be ascends the 
steps. If the first chaplain be entitled to wear the stole, 
after the Confiteor he puts on a white stole, and takes 
the paten and holds it below the mouth of the commu- 



88 MANNER OF SERVING 

nicants, while they receive ; after which he places it on 
the corporal, on returning to the altar. 

10. When the Bishop is about giving the blessing, 
the chaplains go on the step below the platform, where 
they kneel, and answer at the blessing. If there be a 
last Gospel specially prescribed, the first takes the book 
and the hand candlestick to the Gospel side ; otherwise, 
the second passing to the right, the first turns over the 
Canon, and assists the Bishop while he reads the Gos- 
pel. After the last Gospel, the first closes the book ; all 
bow to the cross and go down on the floor, where they 
make a genuflection, or a low bow. Then the first, as- 
sisted by the second, disrobes the Bishop. The maniple 
is taken off first (unless it was a Mass for the dead), 
which as well as the other vestments are put on the al- 
tar. Afterwards the first chaplain puts the cope on the 
Bishop, and buttons it in front. The second takes the 
Canon and the hand candlestick, goes to the kneeling- 
desk, places himself at the left of the Bishop, gives the 
book to the first, who opens it, and holds it before the 
Bishop whilst he makes his thanksgiving. Finally, they 
accompany him to the door, where they bow to him, 
and return to take off their surplices. If the Bishop 
wear a calotte, the first chaplain takes it off at the 
/Sanctus, and puts it on him again after the communion. 

Article III. 
Whe7i there is but one Chaplain. 

1. If there be no more than one chaplain, he goes to 
receive the Bishop at the door, and accompanies him to 
the kneelino^-desk. Then he takes the canon and the 
hand candlestick. He opens the book and puts it on the 



4 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 89 

desk, and holds the hand candlestick. The preparation 
being over, he puts the Canon and the hand candlestick 
on the altar, and attends to the washing of the Bishop's 
hands. He vests him in the manner above prescribed. 
He takes the maniple, goes to the left hand of the 
Bishop, and answers daring the confession as usual. He 
rises and puts the maniple on the Bishop's arm, after he 
has said Indiilgentiam. After the confession he goes to 
the Missal and assists the prelate, answering, kneeling, 
inclining, &c. After the Bishop has done reading, the 
chaplain carries the book and the hand candlestick to the 
■Gospel side. After the Do'tninus vobiscufn, he takes 
the chalice to the altar, spreads the corporal, and gives 
the paten to the Bishop with the usual kisses. He takes 
the cruets and puts wine into the chalice. Then pre- 
senting the water cruet to the prelate, he says, £ene- 
dicite, JReverendlss-hne Patei\ and jouts a few drops of 
water in the chalice, which he gives to him with the 
usual kisses. He covers the chalice and prepares for 
the washing of the Bishop's fingers. He answers at the 
Orate frutres^ and assists at the book, pointing out to 
the prelate what is to be read. After the offertory, he 
puts the Missal aside, and places the Canon on the book- 
stand. He answei's at the preface, and rings the bell at 
the Sanctus. At the words Qui pridie., he goes to the 
right of the Bishop and assists him, as marked in the 
second article. After covering the chalice he makes a 
genuflection, and goes to the Gospel side, makes a gen- 
uflection, and assists at the book. Towards the end of 
the Pater N'oster he makes a genuflection, and goes to 
the Epistle side, makes a genuflection, again takes the 
paten and gives it to the Bishop with the usual kisses. 
He uncovers and covers the clialice. He bows during 

8* 



90 SERVING A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 

the Doniine^ non sum dignus^ and strikes his breast. 
He makes a genuflection and uncovers the chalice. He 
presents the cruets with the usual kisses, and carries 
them back to the side-table. Then he puts the Canon, 
open, against the tabernacle, and places the Missal, open, 
on the stand, and carries it, with the hand candlestick, 
to the Epistle side. He afterwards attends to the wash- 
ing of the Bishop's hands. Afterwards he repairs to 
the Gospel side, arranges the chalice, and takes it to 
the side-table ; after which he returns to the book, and 
assists the prelate as usual. He kneels and answers at 
the Bishop's blessing, and makes the sign of the cross. 
Then he assists the Bishop during the last Gospel, by 
holding the Canon and the hand candlestick before him. 
If there be a special Gospel, he takes the Missal to the 
Gospel side after the Bishop's blessing. After the Gos- 
pel he bows to the cross with the Bishop, and with him 
he descends the steps, and makes a genuflection or a 
bow. Then he disrobes the Bishop, and assists him at 
the thanksgiving in the manner mentioned in the second 
article. 

2. Should there be a boy dressed in surplice, he will 
hold generally the hand candlestick near the book, at- 
tend to the washing of the Bishop's hands, bring the 
cruets, ring the bell at the jSanctus, at the elevation, and 
at the Domine^ non sura dignus. He kneels during the 
confession, at the elevation, during the communion of 
the people, and when the Bishop gives the blessing. 



CELEBRATING HIGH MASS. 91 



CHAPTER IX. 

MANNER OF CELEBRATING HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACO"" 
OR SUB-DEACON. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PEEPAEED. 

On the Altar. 

1. The chalice, all prepared, should be placed on the 
extended corporal in the middle of the altar. 

2. The burse against the gradus. 

3. The Missal opened on the book-stand. 

4. The altar-cards. 

5. If communion is to be given, the ciborium on the 
corporal. 

6. The antipendium and the canopy (if the Blessed 
Sacrament be there) over the tabernacle, of the color of 
the day. 

7. Six candlesticks with candles. 

8. The cross prominently located in the middle of the 
candlesticks. 

On the Side-tahU. 

1. The cruets with wine and water. 

2. The finger-towel on the plate. 

3. The hand-bell. 

4. The celebrant's bench may be covered with » 
green cloth. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. All the vestments of the color of the day, for the 
celebrant. 



92 MANNER OF CELEBRATING 

2. Two surplices for the two acolytes. 

3. If there are clergymen to assist, a sufficient num- 
ber of surplices for them. 

4. If the Asperges is to be had, every thing should be 
added as marked in the chapter on the Asperges. 

Article II. 

Vesting of* the Celebrant. 

1. At the last bell, the celebrant washes his hands; 
after which, he puts on the vestments in the usual order, 
assisted by the first acolyte, clad- in his surplice. 

2. The second acolyte, with his surplice on, lights the 
candles at the altar. 

Aeticle hi. 
Cerem,omes of the Mass. 

3. When the celebrant is vested, the two acolytes 
place themselves at each side of the celebrant, and all 
bow to the cross, or image in the sacristy. Then, with 
their hands joined, go to the altar, the acolytes preced- 
ing the celebrant. 

4. If there is a clergy, they walk two by two, the 
highest in dignity walking before the two acolytes who 
serve at Mass. The first acolyte presents the holy 
water to the priest, then to his companion. 

5. Being arrived at the foot of the altar, the acolytes 
separate, to leave space for the celebrant ; the first hav- 
ing received the priest's cap, carries it to the bench, 
having previously made a genufiection with the cele- 
brant and his companion. The second acolyte kneels at 
the left of the priest, a little in the rear, and answers 



HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACONS. 93 

Mass with the first, who kneels on the right, also a little 
in the rear. 

6. The celebrant does every thing as at Low Mass, 
except that he sings all that is sung at the solemn High 
Mass, and also the Gospel. There is no incense used at 
any time at the High Mass celebrated without deacon 
and sub-deacon, as it is only Missa Cantata. 

v. Towards the end of the confession, at the words 
Domine exaudi orationem meam^ both acolytes rise to 
elevate a little the alb, while the priest is ascending to 
the platform ; they then kneel on the last step, and 
answer attentively. 

8. After the priest has said the Kyrie^ if he wishes to 
sit down, they rise, meet together before the altar, make 
a genuflection (always on the floor of the sanctuary), 
and go to the seat, the first at the right, the other at 
the left ; they raise the chasuble, so that he may not sit 
upon it ; the first presents the cap with the usual kisses, 
and they remain standing, one at each side, nearly face 
to face, so that their shoulders be not turned to the 
altar. 

9. At the last Kyrie^ the first gives notice to the cele- 
brant to rise; he takes his cap, lays it on the seat, both 
accompany the priest before the altar, they make a genu- 
flection on the floor, raise the alb, and then kneel at 
their places.* 

* They should observe the same at the Gloria and Credo, being 
punctual to rise as soon as the priest bows, before going to take his 
seat, after reciting the Gloria and Gredo. When those parts are sung 
at which the head is bowed, they bow to the cross, and the first gives 
notice to the celebrant to uncover his head, and to cover it. While 
the words of the Gredo, Et incarnatus est, are sung, they kneel down 
with their faces turned towards the altar, and rise after the words, M 
Homo /actus est. 



94 MANNER OF CELEBRATING 

10. When tlie priest begins the last prayer, they re- 
pair to the Epistle side. The second standing at the 
priest's right hand, the first takes the Missal from the 
side-table, and stands behind the priest on the floor ; at 
the words of the conclusion, J'esum Christum^ he bows 
to the cross, goes to the middle, makes a genuflection, 
returns behind the priest as before, and standing, sings 
the Epistle slowly, and with the proper cadence. After 
this he bow^s to the altar, and without kissing the cele- 
brant's hand {Muh. Miss., Part ii.), he places the Mis- 
sal on the side-table, and goes to kneel at his place.* 

11. The second acolyte removes the book at the pro- 
per time, going by the lowest step of the altar, and re- 
turns to kneel at his place; w^hen the Gospel commences 
both rise, and at the end answer, Laus Tihi Christe, smd 
again kneel down until the end of the Credo / then the 
celebrant goes to sit down. 

12. After the Credo, whilst the celebrant is singing 
the Dominus vohiscum and Or emus, they rise, make a 
genuflection together in the middle, and repair to the 
side-table to put the cruets on the altar. The first hands 
the cruet with wine, kissing it ; the other, standing at 
his left, that with the water, and afterwards pours the 
water on the celebrant's hands ; the first presents the 
towel, and both bow to the priest, both before and after. 

13. After putting away the cruets, they return to the 
middle of the altar, make a genuflection on the floor, 
and kneel at their respective places, on each side, front- 
ing the altar. 

* If there be a Sequeyitia,- or long Tract after the Epistle, the cele- 
brant, after having read it, sits down, as at the Kyrie^ and, at the last 
verse, returns to the altar (by the Epistle side), to say the Munda cor 
meum. 



HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACONS. 95 

14. At the elevation, they rise, make a genuflection 
in the middle, ascend the steps and kneel on the edge of 
the platform, and both raise the chasuble, and perform 
every thing as in other Masses. 

15. When the priest has communicated, and made 
the genuflection, the first acolyte rises, and after the 
usual bow, goes to give the wine and water; at the 
same time the second goes to the Missal, and when the 
first repairs to the Gospel side to adjust the chalice, the 
other descends with the Missal, makes a genuflection 
with his companion, places the Missal on the altar, and 
goes to his place. 

16. After taking the chalice to the side-table, the 
first acolyte, with the second, makes a genuflection in 
the middle, and both return to their places and kneel 
down. 

17. At the last Gospel, they both stand up, and the 
first goes to get the cap. At the V^erhum caro faction 
est, they both make a genuflection, and when the priest 
descends from the altar, they make a genuflection with 
him ; his cap is presented to him with a kiss of it and of 
his hand, and they return to the sacristy, both going be- 
fore, as at the beginning. 

18. When they arrive at the sacristy, they bow to 
tlie cross or image ; the first acolyte remains to assist 
the priest in taking ofi* his vestments ; the other goes to 
put out the candles, and put away the things which are 
on the altar. 

19. If communion be given, after the priest has com- 
municated and made a genuflection, the first acolyte goes 
alone to get the communion-cloth, returns to the middle, 
and kneels down on the floor with his companion. 
When the celebrant is receiving the precious blood, 



96 VESPERS. 

they bow, and recite the Co7ifiteor. After the Indul- 
gentiam^ they rise, make a genuflection at the same 
time with the celebrant, and kneel on the platform to 
receive communion ; afterwards they rise, make a genu- 
flection, separate and kneel, holding each end of the 
communion-cloth, for the communion of the clergy ; af- 
ter which, the first acolyte takes away the cloth. When 
communion is over they meet in the middle, make a 
genuflection together, and go to give the wdne, and 
water for the ablution, as was said above. 



CHAPTER X. 

VESPERS SUNG WITHOUT COPE-BEAEERS. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

In the Sanctuary. 

1. Six candlesticks on the altar, and the cross in the 
middle. 

2. In the middle of the sanctuary, against the rail- 
ings, three stools for the two acolytes and the censer- 
bearer, or a bench suiBciently long to accommodate the 
three clerks.* 

3. Near the bench for the officiating priest, a stool for 
the master of ceremonies. 

4. A book-stand, with the book, in front of the 

* If the clerks are to wear caps during vespers, they should be put 
on the stools beforehand. 



VESPERS. 97 

priest's bench, for the officiating clergyman, which may 
be covered with a cloth of the color of the day. 

5. At the altar the antipendium, and if there is the 
Blessed Sacrament, the canopy on the tabernacle, of the 
color of the day. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. A surplice and a cope of the color of the day, and 
if the officiating priest is to give benediction imme- 
diately after Vespers without previously returning to 
the sacristy, a stole of the color of the. cope.* 

* As to the use of the stole, it may be well to remark that the Sacred 
Congregation of Eites, on the 7th September, 181G, issued the following 
decree, wliich was approved by his holiness on the 20th of the same 
month: " Stolam non esse adhibendam prasterquam in coUatione et 
confectione Sacramentoruui ; ideoque consuetudinem incontrarium esse 
abusum, per locorura Ordinarios omnino eliminanduui." The stole is 
less the mark of jurisdiction than of the sacerdotal character; hence 
it should be used only in performing sacerdotal functions, as is pre- 
scribed by the Eoman Missal and Eitual. An alb or surplice should 
always be put on under the stole. Priests should not wear a stole 
while assisting at High Mass, Vespers, or Benediction ; especially as 
Bishops themselves do not wear it when they assist in cope, the Cere- 
monial of Bishops not prescribing its use on such occasions. A priest 
should not use it even in officiating at solemn vespers, unless he is to 
give benediction with the Blessed Sacrament immediately after. For 
this reason he may wear it on the feast of Corpus Christi, when solemn 
vespers are sung, the Blessed Sacrament being exposed, since the ben- 
ediction is to be given afterwards. Should the officiating priest return 
to the sacristy before giving benediction, he there puts on the stole for 
the purpose of giving benediction. The Ceremonial does not prescribe 
that a canon should put on the stole or alb for solemn vespers. 
" Canonicus hebdomadarius indutus amictu et pluvial! supra cottam 
seu rochetum." According to Gavantus, the priest may put on the 
stole immediately before going to preach, if such be the established 
usage, since the Sacred Congregation allows it to be followed. The 
priest who acts as master of ceremonies at the benediction of the 
Blessed Sacrament, should put on the stole when he is to open the 
tabernacle or touch the Blessed Sacrament and the remonstrance that 

9 



98 VESPEES. 

2. Four surjDlices for the master of ceremonies and 
the three servers. 

3. The censer and incense-boat with incense, 

4. Two candlesticks, with candles, for the acglytes. 

Aeticle II. 

1. The instructions given in the first article of the 
fourth chapter on solemn vespers, should be observed also 
during vespers without cope-bearers. 

2. A little before the last bell, the master of cere- 
monies and the three servers put on their surplices. The 
master of ceremonies helps the ofiiciating priest to vest. 
The first acolyte lights the candles on the altar, and the 
two candles in the sacristy. The censer-bearer sees to 
the fire, that it may be ready when wanted. 

3. The censer-bearer in the midst of the two acolytes 
carrying the candlesticks ; the first, being at his right, 
goes behind the officiating priest. As a general rule, 
the acolyte at the right will carry the candlestick by 
holding the foot of it with his left hand, and the middle 
of the stem with his right ; and vice versa, the one at 
the left should hold the foot with his right, and the stem 
with his left, in such a way that the candlestick be car- 
ried straight in front of the bearer, without awkward- 
ness or affectation. 

4. At the sign of the master of ceremonies, all bow 
to the cross, and proceed to the altar in the following 
order: First walks the censer-bearer with his hands 

contains it. He should take it off as soon as these actions are per- 
formed, and not wear it during all the time of the ceremony. For a priest 
to wear a stole while assisting in the sanctuary, even if he be thQ 
pastor of the congregation, is simply ridiculous. 



VESPERS. 99 

joined, then the two acolytes, carrying the candlesticks, 
then the master of ceremonies, and lastly, the officiating 
priest. 

5. Having arrived before the lowest step of the altar, 
the servers place themselves in front, sufficiently distant 
from the step to leave space for the officiating priest. 
The priest, having arrived in front of the altar, gives his 
cap to the master of ceremonies, who receives it with 
the usual kisses. Then all make a genuflection on the 
floor. All having risen, the priest and master of cere- 
monies kneel on the lowest step, and the acolytes go on 
each side of the altar, and place the candlesticks on the 
lowest ste^D, one at the Gospel side, the other at the 
Epistle side, and quench the candles ; after which they 
go in the middle, one on each side of the censer-bearer, 
where they all make a genuflection, and go to their 
bench. 

6. In the mean time, the priest says the Aperi Dom- 
ine, after which he rises, makes a genuflection, and the 
master of ceremonies accompanies him to the bench. 
Being arrived at the bench, the priest says, in a low 
voice, the Pater and Ave^ after which he intones, Den,Si 
in adjutormm meum intende^ at the same time making 
the sign of the cross on himself, while the master oi 
ceremonies raises the right border of the cope. All bowv 
at the Gloria Patri^ towards the altar, and at the com- 
mencement of the Psalm all sit. The priest, having rf»- 
ceived the cap from the master of ceremonies, puts \% 
on, and the master of ceremonies also sits. 

v. Whenever the Gloria Patri is sung, the priest 
takes off his cap, the master of ceremonies giving hira 
notice to that effect each time, by rising and bowing to 
him. He also raises the border of the cope, and inclines 



loo VESPERS. 

towards the altar during the Gloria Patri^ or at any 
similar occurrence, and does not sit till the former re- 
places the cap on his head. The officiating priest takes 
off his cap at the names of Jesus^ Mary^ and of the 
saint whose feast is celebrated, and at the words, Sit 
nomen Domini henedictum. 

8. Towards the end of the last Psalm, the censer- 
bearer rises, makes a genuflection before the altar, bows 
to the officiating priest, and goes to the sacristy to pre- 
pare the censer. The acolytes also rise, make a genu- 
flection and a bow with the censer-bearer. They light 
the candles on their candlesticks, and with them they 
proceed to the middle before the lowest step, make a 
genuflection, and go to the officiating priest, to whom 
they bow, and then locate themselves one on each side 
of the book-stand, facing each other, where they stand 
till the commencement of the hymn, unless it is the Ave 
Maris Stella^ or Veni Creator jSpiritus, in which case 
they will wait till the end of the first strophe, after which 
they salute the officiating priest, go to the middle of the 
altar, make a genuflection, and go to replace the candle- 
sticks in their place, but do not quench the candles; 
then they return to their seats. 

9. The Psalms being ended, the priest rises, after giv- 
ing his cap to the master of ceremonies, sings the chap- 
ter out of the book before him, during which he re- 
mains standing. Then, in the same position, he intones 
the antiphon of the Magnificat. Whilst the choir sings 
the said antiphon, the priest sits, and puts on his cap. 

10. As soon as the Magnificat is commenced, the 
priest takes up his cap, rises, and, with his hands joined, 
goes to the altar, accompanied by the master of cere- 
monies, and makes a genuflection on the lowest step. 



VESPERS. 101 

Then he goes up to the altar, while the master of cere- 
monies raises a little the lowest part of his vestments. 
Being arrived on the platform, the priest bows to the 
cross, and kisses the altar. At this time the censer- 
bearer, having made a genuflection on the lowest step at 
the Epistle side, goes up to the priest, gives the incense- 
boat to the master of ceremonies, and raises the censer 
so that the priest may put incense in it. The master of 
ceremonies presents the little spoon, kissing it first, and 
then the priest's hand (unless the Blessed Sacrament be 
exposed), and says, JSenedicite^ Pater Iteverende. The 
priest having put incense into the censer, returns the 
spoon to the master of ceremonies, and makes a sign of 
the cross on the censer. Ah illo benedicaris^ &g. Then 
the censer-bearer lowers the censer's cover, gives it to 
the master of ceremonies, from whom he receives the 
incense-boat, and steps down to the floor, where he 
stands with his hands joined towards the altar. The 
master of ceremonies presents the censer to the offici- 
ating priest in the usual manner, and with the usual 
kisses. 

11. The officiating priest incenses the altar in the 
manner prescribed in N". 6, Art. 7, of the chapter 
on High Mass. While he incenses the altar, he says 
the Magnificat ; at the same time, the master of cere- 
monies accompanies him, supporting the border of the 
cope on the right. 

12. Having incensed the altar, the priest gives the 
censer to the master of ceremonies, who receives it 
with the usual kisses, and returns it to the censer-bear- 
er. Then he goes to the middle of the altar, where he 
says the Gloria Patri^ bowing at the same time ; after 
which, he descends the steps from the middle, makes a 

9* 



102 ' VESPERS. 

genuflection on the lowest step, and returns to his bench, 
where he is incensed with three double throws by the 
master of ceremonies, who, for that purpose, shall have 
stopped at a convenient distance from the priest's 
bench, bowing to him before and after incensing, and 
the priest returning the bow after being incensed. 

13. Then the master of ceremonies returns the censer 
to the censer-bearer, and bowing to the priest, he goes 
to his place. The censer-bearer, from the middle of the 
sanctuary, incenses the master of ceremonies and the 
two acolytes, the former with one swing, and the others 
with one, bowing to them, and they to him. 

14. Then, having made a genuflection in the middle 
of the floor, he goes to the railings, and from there he 
incenses the people, first towards the middle, then at 
the Gospel side, and lastly, at the Epistle side, bowing 
before and after the incensing. After which, he returns 
to the sacristy, making a genuflection as he passes be- 
fore the altar, and bowing to the officiating priest. 

15. The priest, being incensed, remains standing at 
his place till the end of the Magnificat^ bowing with 
the rest at the Gloria Patri. 

16. If the choir sings the antiphon, the priest will sit 
and cover his head ; and rises at the end of it to sing 
Dominus vobiscum and the prayer or prayers out of the 
book before him, bowing at the Per Pominiim nostrum 
Jesum^ &G. 

17. The two acolytes, after the Magnificat, at the 
JSicut erat, take the candlesticks, go to the middle, 
where they make a genuflection, then to the officiating 
priest ; they salute him, locate themselves as before men- 
tioned, and remain there till after all the prayers are 
sung. After the Dominus vobiscum^ they salute the 



VESPERS. 103 

priest, and go to the middle, make a genuflection, and 
there they remain standing during the anthem of the 
Blessed Virgin and its prayer. After the Dwinum 
auxilium^ they make a genuflection with the priest, and 
walk before him to the sacristy. 

18. The priest, having sung the prayers, sings Domi^ 
nus voMscum. The JBenedicamus Domino is sung by 
one or two members of the choir, after which the priest 
says, in a lower tone of voiee, Fidelium animce^ &c., and 
goes to the altar, accompanied by the master of cere- 
monies. 

19. Being arrived at the foot of the altar, the priest 
and master of ceremonies make a genuflection, after 
which he says, Pater JVbster, and recites the rest of that 
prayer in a low voice ; and then, a little louder, he says, 
Dominus del nobis suam pacem. Then the anthem of 
the Blessed Virgin is said or sung by the choir, during 
which time the priest stands or kneels, according to the 
season. At the end of the anthem, he says, or sings, in 
the ferial tone, standing, the prayer, and after it, Divi- 
num auxilium. After which, all make a genuflection, 
and walk to the sacristy, the priest with his cap on. 
Being arrived there, they bow to the cross, and unvest. 



PART II. 

€txmonm far |oli) Wttk mi otlftt /fstltiab, 

According to the small Ritual of Benedict XIII. ^ S. Jf., 

TO BE USED IN CHURCHES WHERE THERE ARE NO SACRED 

MINISTERS. 



CHAPTER I. 
BLESSING OF CANDLES ON CANDLEMASS DAY. 

Article I. 

OF WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE BENEDICTION, 
PROCESSION, AND MASS. 

On the /Side-table. 

1. The chalice for Mass, with white ornaments, unless 
this festival should fall on one of the privileged Sundays; 
in which case the ornaments must be violet. 

2. The chasuble, stole, and maniple, either of white or 
of violet color, as directed above. 

3. The censer with the incense-boat* filled with in- 
cense. 

4. The vessel containing holy water, and the sprink- 
ling-brush, f 

* The box is so called from its form. 

t We shall hereafter use the simpler term " sprinkle," as in Wor- 
cester's Dictionary. 



BLKSSING OF CANDLKS. 105 

5. A plate with some bread, and a basin with a pitcher 
of water, to wash the hands of the priest, after the dis- 
tribution of the candles. 

6. A towel. 

7. A plate containing the cruets with wine and water, 
and a small towel to wipe the fingers. 

At the Altar. 

1. A violet altar-veil,* that can be easily removed; or 
white, if the Mass be of the Blessed Virgin. 

2. The Missal on the Epistle side, supported by a 
violet cushion, or a small book-stand. 

At the Epistle Side on the floor of the Sanctuary. 

1. A table covered with white linen ; and on it, the 
candles to be blessed, covered likewise with another 
white linen cloth. 

2. The processional cross. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, with stole and cope of 
violet color, for the celebrant. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

*The Latin term, " antipendium," is generally used for the veil 
which covers the front of the altar. 



106 BLESSING OF CANDLES. 

Article II. 

CEREMONIES TO BE PEEFORMED ON CANDLEMASS DAT. 

Section I. — Of the Blessing of the Candles. 

1. At the stated time, the acolytes put on their cas- 
socks and surplices, in the sacristy, and prepare every 
thing as in the preceding chapter. 

2. The faithful should be called to church by the 
ringing of the bells. 

3. The celebrant, having made his preparation for 
Mass, and washed his hands in the sacristy, being as- 
sisted by the second and third acolytes, puts on over 
his cassock the amice, alb, stole and cope of violet 
color.* 

4. In the mean time, the first acolyte removes from 
the altar the flower-pots, and lights the candles that 
are on it. 

5. The celebrant, having made a low bow to the cross, 
or to any other sacred image placed in the sacristy, 
puts on his cap, and being preceded by the first acolyte, 
walks, with his hands joined, to the altar, between the 
second and third acolytes, who raise the lower part of 
the cope at each side. 

6. When he comes to the middle of the altar, he 
gives his cap to the first acolyte, who, having placed.it on 
the celebrant's seat, uncovers the candles which are to 
be blessed. 

• T. Then the celebrant, still standing on the floor of 

* Should this festival fall on Sunday, the celebrant, vested as above, 
blesses the water for the aspersion, as in the Missal. 



BLESSINQ OF CANDLES. 107 

the sanctuary, makes a low bow to the cross (or a genu- 
flection on the lowest step, if the Blessed Sacrament be 
in the tabernacle), ascends the altar, and kisses it in the 
middle. If the holy water is to be given, the celebrant, 
kneeling on the lowest step, intones the anthem, Asj^er- 
ges^ and does so as is prescribed in the Missal, and after- 
wards goes up to the altar. 

8. The celebrant, having kissed the altar, goes to the 
Epistle side, having always the two acolytes on his sides, 
as in ISTo. 5. 

9. There, having his face turned towards the altar, 
and his hands joined, he says in the ferial tone, Domi- 
nus vohiscicm^ Oremics, the prayer, Domine Sancte, with 
the four following prayers. 

10. In the mean time, the first acolyte puts fire in the 
censer, holding it and the incense-boat in his hands. 

11. While the celebrant is saying the fifth prayer, the 
third acolyte, who is on his left side, having made a 
genuflection towards the altar, goes to the side-table, 
takes from it the holy-water vase, and, with the acolyte 
who carries the censer, goes to him. 

12. The celebrant, after the fifth prayer, receiving the 
incense-spoon from the second acolyte, who is at his 
right side, and who, as usual, kisses first the spoon and 
then his hand, takes the incense-boat, puts the incense 
in the censer, and blesses it. 

13. Then having received the sprinkle from the sec- 
ond acolyte, he sprinkles the candles thrice, viz., in the 
middle, at the right, and at the left, saying with a low 
voice, Asperges me, <fcc., without the Miserere. 

14. Afterwards he incenses the candles thrice, not 
saying any thing. 

15. The blessing being ended, the celebrant bows in 



108 DISTRIBUTION OF CANDLES. 

the middle of the altar, and retires to the Gospel side, 
and then explains the institution of this solemnity, the 
meaning of the ceremonies, and the use of the candles, 
that the faithful may come and receive them in a prop- 
er and respectful manner. 



Section II. — Of the Distribution of the Candles. 

1. After the sermon, the first acolyte takes from the 
table a candle for the celebrant, and, if there is no other 
priest present, puts it on the middle of the altar. 

2. The celebrant, having bowed in the middle of the 
altar, kneels on the platform, with his face turned to- 
wards the cross. 

3. Whilst kneeling down, he takes from the altar the 
candle, kisses it, and hands it to the first acolyte.* 

4. Then he goes to the Epistle side, and recites alter- 
nately with the acolytes, in a loud and even voice, Lu- 
men^ &c., and the Canticle, Nunc dimittis, &c. 

5. The anthem, Z/icmen, &c., having- been repeated 
after jSi'cut erat^ the celebrant bows to the cross, turns 
towards the people, distributes the candles, first to the 
priests (if any be present), then to the acolytes kneel- 
ing on the edge of the platform, who all kiss the candle 
first, and then his hand. 

6. The celebrant having bowed to the altar between 
the acolytes, goes to the chancel, or rails, at the Epistle 
side. 

7. There he begins to distribute the candles, which 

* If thjere is another priest, he gives the candle to the celebrant, who 
stands, having his face turned towards the people : the priest kisses 
the candle only, which is also done by the celebrant on receiving it. 



PROCKSSION ON CANDLEMASS-DAY. 109 

are brought thither by the second acolyte, and handed 
to the celebrant by the third. 

8. The distribution of the candles being ended, the 
celebrant washes his hands at the Epistle side; the 
first acolyte pours the water, and the two others offer 
the towel. 

9. The celebrant, having washed his hands, goes to 
the middle of the altar, bows to the cross, and then as- 
cends in a straight line with it, until he arrives at the 
centre of the platform, when he turns to the book at 
the Epistle side, 

10. There he recites with the acolytes the anthem, 
Exurge Doniine^ &c., with a loud voice. 

11. Then standing in the same place, he says, OremuSy 
and if Candlemass-day comes after Septuagesima, and 
not on a Sunday, he subjoins, Flectamus genua^ kneel- 
ing at the same time with all the others ; and the sec- 
ond acolyte, first rising, answers, Levate, 

12. Afterwards the celebrant says the prayer, Exaudi 
quoeswmus^ <fcc., keeping always his hands joined. 

Section III. — Of the Procession. 

1. The prayer being ended, the celebrant goes to the 
middle of the altar, where he receives from the first aco- 
lyte a lighted candle, and a copy of this Ceremonial^ or 
the Ritual for the anthems, to be recited during the 
procession. 

2. The two other acolytes take likewise lighted can- 
dles, and copies of this Ceremonial. 

3. The celebrant turns towards the people, and says, 
Proeedam/tis in pace^ and the acolytes answer, In norn- 
ine Ghristiy amen, 

10 



110 PROCESSION ON CANDLEMASS-DAY. 

4. The celebrant begins to recite the anthem, Adorna, 
&c., as below, and continues all the anthems with the 
acolytes alternately. 

5. After the acolytes have, as directed above, answered, 
Xn nomine Christie amen/ the first acolyte takes the 
processional cross, and having made a genuflection before 
the altar, turns towards the people, and leads the pro- 
cession either out of the church, or within it, as may be 
customary, and turning to his right, and going round, 
returns to the altar. 

6. The celebrant follows him between the other aco- 
lytes, reciting with them the following anthems, which, 
for greater convenience, are divided into verses : 

Antiph. Ado7'na thalamum tuum, Sion y et suscipe Re- 
gem Christum. 

Amplectere Mariam : quae est coelestis porta. 

Ipsa enim regem portat glorice^ novi luminis. 

Suhsistit Virgo, adducens manihus Jilium ante luciferum 
genitum. Quern accipiens Simeon in ulnas suas, prcedicavit 
populis : Dominum eum esse vitce et mortis^ et Salvatorem 
Mundi, 

Responsum accepit Simeon de Spiritu Sancto : non vi' 
surum se mortem, nisi videret Christum Domini, 

Et cum inducerent puerum in templum ; accepit eum in 
ulnas suas, et benedixit Deum, et dixit : 

Nunc dimittis servum tuum, Domine : secundum verhum 
tuum in pace : 

Cum inducerent puerum Jesum parentes ejus, ut facerent 
secundum consuetudinem legis pro eo : ipse accepit eum in 
ulnas suas. 

*J, As the procession enters the church, if it was made 



MASS AFTER PROCESSION. * 111 

outside ; or the sanctuary, if it did not go out of the 
church, the following Response is recited : 

Resp. Obtulerunt Domino par turturum^ aut duos puUos 
columbarum : 

Sicut scriptum est, in lege Domini. 

Postquam impleti sunt dies purgationis Marice : secundum 
legem Moysis : 

Tulerunt Jesum in Jerusalem : ut sisterent eum Domino, 

Sicut scriptum est : in lege DomAnL 

Gloria Patri et Filio : et Spiritui Sancto. 

Sicut scriptum est: in lege Domini. 

8. The acolyte, who carries the cross, after having 
made a genuflection before the altar, leaves it at its 
place, 

9. The celebrant ends the Responses before the altar. 

Sechon IY. — Of the Mass after the Procession. 

1. The Response being ended, the first acolyte re- 
ceives the candles from the celebrant, and from the other 
acolytes, and places them on the table. 

2. The celebrant goes to the bench, whereon he usu- 
ally sits in solemn Masses, attended by the second and 
third acolytes, puts off the cope, and puts on the violet 
chasuble and the maniple for the Mass of the Sunday. 

3. In the mean time, in case the Mass is to be said of 
the festival, the first acolyte removes from the altar the 
violet front veil, leaving the white one ; places the 
flower-pots between the candlesticks, and the chalice 
on the altar; having first spread the corporal. 

4. The celebi-ant goes to the altar to say Mass, in the 
course of which, if it be of the festival, the acolytes hold 



112 ASH- WEDNESDAY. 

lighted candles during the Gospel, and from the eleva- 
tion till after the communion. 

5. Whilst the celebrant is reading the Gommunio, 
the first acolyte removes the chalice from the altar to 
the side-table. 

6. Mass being ended, the celebrant, preceded by the 
acolytes, returns to the sacristy. 

There he makes his thanksgiving, as usual. 

8. The acolytes take every thing from the altar and 
the table, and carry them to the sacristy, arranging 
them in their proper places. 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE BENEDICTION OF THE ASHES ON ASH- 
WEDNESDAY. 

Aeticle I. 

THINGS TO BE PEEPARED FOR THE BENEDICTION AND MASS. 

On the Side-table near the Altar, 

1. A chalice, with a veil of violet color. 

2. A violet maniple and chasuble. 

3. The censer and boat, with incense. 

4. The holy-water vase, with a sprinkle. 

5. A plate, with crumbs of bread ; and a basin, with 
a pitcher of water, to wash the hands of the priest after 
the distribution of the ashes. 

6. A towel. 



ASH-WEDNESDAY. 113 

7. A plate containing the cruets with wine and water, 
and a small towel to wipe the fingers. 

On the, AUar, 

1. A violet altar-veil, the cross, and candlesticks with 
candles, but no flower-pots. 

2. The Missal on the Epistle side, supported by a 
book- stand. 

3. A vessel containing the ashes, made out of the 
boughs blessed on Palm Sunday, which should be dry 
and sifted, covered either with a lid of the same mat- 
ter as the vessel, or with a violet veil, and placed be- 
tween the Missal and the Epistle side. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and cope. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

Article IL 

OF THE SACKED RITES TO BE PERFOEMED ON ASH- 
WEDNESDAY. 

Section I. — JBlessing of the Ashes, 

1. Every thing having been prepared, as above, by 
the acolytes in surplices, the people should be called to 
church by the usual ringing of the bells. 

2. The celebrant, having washed his hands in the 
sacristy, attended by the second and third acolytes, puts 
on over the surplice, the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
stole and cope. 

10* 



114 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

3. The first acolyte lights the candles on the altar, 
and returns to the sacristy. 

4. All having bowed to the cross, or the principal pic- 
ture in the sacristy, go to the altar. 

5. The first acolyte, having his hands joined, walks 
before, then the celebrant with his head covered, be- 
tween the second and third acolytes. 

6. The celebrant gives his cap to the first acolyte, and 
bows to the altar. 

7. He goes up to the altar, having at his side the see- 
end and third acolytes, and kisses it in the middle. 

8. In the mean time, the first acolyte, having placed 
the cap on the celebrant's seat, uncovers the ashes. 

9. The celebrant goes to the Epistle side, and says, 
with the acolytes, the anthem, Exaudi. 

10. In the mean time, the first acolyte prepares the 
censer with the fire. 

11. The anthem, JEJxaudi^ having been repeated, the 
celebrant, standing in the same place,, without turning 
towards the people, says in a ferial tone, and having his 
hands joined, Uominus voMseum, and the four prayers, 
as in the Missal. 

12. Whilst the celebrant is saying the fourth prayer, 
the third acolyte, having made a genuflection before the 
altar, takes the holy-water vase, and with the censer- 
bearer, goes to the celebrant. 

13. The celebrant, assisted by the second acolyte, 
puts the incense in the censer, blesses it, and afterwards 
sprinkles and incenses the ashes, as usual. 

14. The blessing being ended, the vessel containing 
the ashes is placed in the middle of the altar. 

15. The celebrant addresses the congregation fronoi 
the altar, on the ceremony of the ashes. 



I 
I 



ASH-WEDNESDAY. 115 

Section II. — Of the Putting on the Ashes. 

1. The celebrant, if no other priest is present, hav- 
ing made a reverence to the cross, kneels down in the 
middle of the platform of the altar, and whilst thus 
kneeling, puts ashes on his own head, without saying 
any thing. 

2. But if another priest is present, this priest without 
stole goes to the altar, and puts ashes on the head of the 
celebrant, who stands, bowing, and having his face turn- 
ed towards the people, the priest saying, Memento homo, 
quia pulvis es y et in pulverem reverteris. 

3. The celebrant having received the ashes, goes to 
the Missal on the Epistle side, and recites, with the aco- 
lytes, the anthem, Immutemicr, with all that follows. 

4. Then the celebrant puts the ashes on the clergy 
(if any are present), who kneel at the edge of the plat- 
form of the altar, the first of them in dignity being the 
nearest to the Epistle side. He says to each one, Me- 
mento^ &c. 

5. The celebrant having bowed to the altar, goes, be- 
tween the second and third acolytes, to the railing at 
the Epistle side, and puts the ashes first on the men, 
then on the women. * 

6. After the putting on of the ashes, the celebrant, 
standing on the floor of the sanctuary at the Epistle 
side, attended by the acolytes, washes his hands, clean- 
ing them with crumbs of bread, and wipes them. 

7. Then he goes up to the altar by the steps that are 
in front of it, having made a bow in the middle, and 
goes to the Epistle side. 

8. Thus, having his face turned towards the altar, 
with his hands joined, he says, Dominus vohiscimi^ and 



116 PALM SUNDAY. 

the prayer, Concede nohis^ Domifie, and having made a 
bow to the altar in the same place, descends to the 
Epistle side. 

Section III. — Of the Mass. 

1. The celebrant, going to the Epistle side, near his 
seat, assisted by the acolytes, takes off the cope, puts 
on the maniple and chasuble, and sits down. 

2. In the mean time, the first acolyte carries the chal- 
ice to the altar, and having unfolded the corporal, places 
the chalice on it, in the middle of the altar. 

3. The priest goes to the altar for the Mass, in which 
every thing is to be done as in the Missal. 

4. Whilst the Goraraunio is said, the first acolyte re- 
moves the chalice from the altar, and places it on the 
side-table. 

5. After Mass, the celebrant, preceded by the aco- 
lytes, returns to the sacristy with his hands joined, puts 
off the sacred vestments, and makes his thanksgiving. 



CHAPTER III. 
OF PALM SUNDAY. 

Aeticle I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PEEPARED FOR THE SACKED CEREMONIES 
OF THIS SUNDAY. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The chalice, with its ornaments of violet color for 

Mass. 



f 



BLESSING OF PALMS. 117 

2. The maniple and chasuble, of violet color. 

3. The censer, with the incense-boat. 

4. A basin, with a pitcher of water, and a towel. 

5. A plate, with cruets containing wine and water, 
and a finger-towel. 

6. Copies of this Ceremonial, for what is to be recited 
at the procession. 

On the Altar. 

1. The violet altar-veil. 

2. The Missal, on the Epistle side, on a cushion, or a 
small stand. 

3. Branches of palms in place of flowers, between the 
candlesticks. 

By the Side of the Epistle on the Floor. 

1. A table, covered with a white linen cloth, and 
palms to be blessed. 

2. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, stole and cope of violet 
color for the celebrant. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

4. The holy-water vase, with the sprinkle. 

Article II. 

OP THE CEREMONIES TO BE PEKFORMED ON PALM SUNDAY. 

Section I. — Of the Blessing of the Palms. 
1. Every thing being prepared in its proper place, the 



118 PALM SUNDAY. 

people should be called to the church by the ringing of 
the bells. 

2. The celebrant, attended by the second and third 
acolytes, puts on in the sacristy the amice, alb, cincture, 
violet stole and cope. 

3. He blesses the water, as in the Missal ; and in the 
mean time the first acolyte lights the candles on the 
altar. 

4. The celebrant, preceded by the first acolyte, who 
carries the holy-water vase, proceeds to the altar, with 
his head covered, walking between the second and third 
acolytes, and kneels on the lowest step, for the sprinkling 
of the holy water. 

5. When the sprinkling is done, the first acolyte places 
the Missal on the small stand, on the Epistle side of the 
altar. 

6. The third acolyte puts the maniple on the cele- 
brant's ann. 

7. The celebrant, between the second and third aco- 
lytes, goes up to the altar, kisses it in the middle ; retires 
to the Epistle side ; and there, in a high and even tone, 
begins the anthem, Hosanna^ which is continued by the 
acolytes. 

8. The celebrant standing in the same place, with his 
hands joined, says, Dominus vohiscum^ and the prayer, 
Deus, quern diligere^ &c. 

9. Then he recites the lesson, and after it he says, with 
the acolytes, the Response, Gollegerunt, &q. In monte 
Oliveti^ &Q. 

10. Having said in the same place, Munda cormeum^ 
&c., he reads the Gospel ; then kisses the Missal, and 
takes off the maniple. 

11. Then he says, Dominus vobiscum, the prayer, 



DISTRIBUTION OF PALMS. .119 

and the preface, keeping his hands joined, whilst 
he recites the above-mentioned and the following 
prayers. 

12. The acolytes say, Sanctus, Sanctus^ &c. 

13. The celebrant having said, Z>om^nw5 voMscum^ re- 
cites the five other prayers that follow. 

14. In the mean time, the first acolyte puts fire in the 
censer, and takes the incense-boat. 

15. Whilst the celebrant says the fifth prayer, the 
third acolyte, having made a genuflection towards the 
altar, takes from the side-table the holy-water vase, and 
with the censer-bearer goes to the celebrant. 

16. The celebrant, attended by the second acolyte, 
puts incense in the censer, and blesses it. 

17. Then he sprinkles the palms thrice, saying, in a 
low voice, Asperges me^ &c., without Miserere, and in- 
censes them. 

18. The celebrant says again, Dominns vobiscum, 
and then the sixth prayer. 

19. The first acolyte carries back to the sacristy the 
censer, and the second and third acolytes remain with 
the celebrant. 

20. The celebrant addresses to the congregation an 
appropriate instruction. 



Section II. — Of the Distribution of the Palms, 

1. The first acolyte carries from the side table the 
palms for the celebrant and the acolytes, and lays them 
on the altar. 

2. The celebrant, having bowed to the cross, kneels 
in the middle of the platform before the altar, and takes 



120 PALM SUNDAY. 

his palm from the altar ; kisses it, and hands it to the 
first acolyte.* 

3. He goes to the Epistle side, and recites with the 
acolytes the anthem, Pueri JECehrmorum^ &c 

4. Then, having bowed to the cross, he turns towards 
the people, and distributes the palms, first to priests, if 
any are present, then to the acolytes, who all kneel on 
the edge of the platform of the altar, beginning from 
the first in dignity, at the Epistle side ; they all kiss, first 
the palm, then the hand of the celebrant. 

5. The celebrant goes down from the altar, bows be- 
fore it, and goes to the railing of the sanctuary, at the 
Epistle side. 

6. Then the palms are handed to him by the first aco- 
lyte, and he distributes them, first to the men, and then 
to the women. 

7. After the distribution, the celebrant, standing on 
the floor of the sanctuary, attended by two acolytes, 
washes his hands. 

8. He goes by the front steps to the altar, and at the 
Epistle side says, Domimis voMscum, and the- last 
prayer. 

9. In the mean time, the first acolyte ties with 
a violet ribbon a palm on the top of the processional 
cross. 

10. After the prayer, the first acolyte gives to the 
celebrant and to the other acolytes the palms, and a copy 
of this Ceremonial, to read what is to be recited at the 
procession. 

* la case another priest is present, the palm should be given by him 
to the celebrant, as it has been said of the candle, on the feast of Puri- 
fication. 



PROCESSION. 121 

Section III. — Of the Procession, 

1. The celebrant, holding the palm in his hands, turns 
towards the people, and says in the middle of the altar^ 
JProcedamus in pace. The acolytes answer, In nomine 
Christie amen. And the celebrant begins, Cum appro- 

pinquaret^ &c. 

2. The acolyte with the cross walks first ; then the 
celebrant, between two acolytes, reciting alternately, 
in a loud voice, the following anthems divided into 
verses. 

3. The procession goes by the right side out of the 
principal door ; they recite the following 

Anthem, 

Cum appropinquaret Dominus Jerosolymam : misit duos 
ex discipulis suis, dicens : 

lie in castellum, quod contra vos est : et invenietis pul- 
lum asince alUgatum^ super quem nullus hominum sedit: 

Solvite eum : et adducite mihi. 

Si quis vos interrogaverit^ dicite : opus Domino est. 

Solventes adduxerunt ad Jesum : et imposuerunt illi vesti- 
menta sua, et sedit super eum. 

Alii expanderunt vestimenta sua in via : alii ramos de 
arborihus sternehant. 

Et qui sequehantur, clamahant : Hosanna, henedictus qui 
venit in nomine Domini. 

Benedictum regnum patris nostri David : Hosanna in ex- 
celsis : miserere nobis, fili David. 

Another Anthem. 

Cum audiisset populus, quia Jesus venit Jerosolymam : 
acceperunt ramos palmarum^ 

11 



122 PALM SUNDAY. 

Et exierunt ei ohviam : et clamabant pueri dicentes : 
Hie est, qui v-enturus est in solutem populi. 
Hie est salus nostra^ et redemptio Israel. 
Quantus est iste : eui throni et dominationes occurrunt ! 
Noli timere, filia Sion, ecce Hex tuus venit tibi sedens 
super pullum asince ; sicut scriptum est. 

Salve^ Fabricator mundi : qui venisti redimere nos. 

Another Anthem. 

Ante sex dies solemnis Paschce : quando venit Dominus 
in civitatem Jerusalem, 

Occurrerunt ei pueri; et in manibus portabant ramos 
palmarum. 

Et elamabant voce magnob dicentes : Hosanna in excelsis, 

JBenedictus qui venisti in multitudine misericordice turn : 
Hosanna in excelsis. 

Another Anthem. 

Occurrunt turbce cum Jloribus et palmis Redemptori oh- 
viam : et victori triumphanti digna dant obsequia. 

Filium Dei ore gentes prcedicant : et in laudem Christi 
voces tonant per nubila : Hosanna in excelsis. 

Another Anthem, 

' Turba multa, quce convenerat ad diem festum : clama" 
bant Domino : 

Benedictus qui venit in nomine Domini : Hosanna in ex- 
celsis. 

1. The first acolyte, carrying the cross, stops before 
the principal door, having his face turned towards it. 

2. The second and third acolytes go into the church, 
shut the door, and turning towards the procession, say, 

Gloria, laus et honor Tibi sit, rex Christe Medemptor : 
Cut puerile decus prompsit hosanna pium. 



PROCESSION. 123 

3. The celebrant outside of the church, turning to- 
wards the door, and having on his cap, repeats, 

Gloria, laus et honor, <&c. 

Clerks, Israel es Tu Hex, Davidis et inclyia proles, no- 
mine qui in Domini, Rex henedicte, venis. 

Cel. Gloria, <S:c. 

Clerks. Coetus in excelsis Te laudat coelicus omnis, et 
mortalis homo, et cuncta creata simul, 

Cel. Gloria, (&c. 
' Clerks. Plebs Hehroea Tihi cum palmis obviam venit: 
cum prece, voto, hymnis, adsumus ecce Tibi, 

Cel. Gloria, laus, c^c. 

Clerks. Hi Tibi passuro solvebant munia laudis: nos 
Tibi regnanti pangimus ecce melos. 

Gel. Gloria, <&c. 

Clerks. Hi placuere Tibi; placeat devotio nostra; Rex 
bone, rex clemens, cui bona cuncta placent. 

Cel. Gloria, dc. 

4. The preceding verses being ended, the first aco- 
lyte, with the foot of the cross, knocks at the bottom of 
the door ; and the two acolytes within the church open 
the door, and place themselves at each side of it. 

5. The first acolyte, carrying the cross, enters the 
church, and the celebrant follows him, beginning the 
Response, Ingrediente Dotnino, &c. 

6. The second and third acolytes receive the cele- 
brant, place him in the middle, and with him continue 
the Response — 

Ingrediente Domino in Sanctam Givitatem^ HebroBorum 
pueri resurrectionem vitce pronunciantes, 

Cum ramis palmarum : Hosanna clamabant in excelsis. 



124 PALM SUNDAY. 

Cumque audiissent quod Jesus veniref Jerosolymarn, : ex- 
ierunt obviam ei. 

Cum ramis palmarum : Hosanna in excelsis. 

t. The procession and Responses are ended before 
the altar. 

8. The first acolyte leaves the cross, takes the palms 
from the celebrant and the clerks. 

9. The celebrant stands on the floor of the sanctuary 
at the Epistle side, where he is accustomed to sit during 
Mass ; takes off the cope, puts on the maniple and cha- 
suble, and sits for a while. 

10. The first acolyte carries the chalice to the altar, 
unfolds the corporal in the middle of it, places the chal- 
ice, and fixes it on the corporal.. 

11. The celebrant proceeds to the altar to celebrate 
Mass. The acolytes hold palms in their hands whilst 
the Passion is read, and during the Gospel. 

12. Whilst the celebrant reads the Communio^ the 
first acolyte removes the chalice from the altar, and 
carries it to the side-table. 

13. After Mass, the celebrant, with his hands joined, 
preceded by the acolytes, returns to the sacristy. 

14. There he takes off the sacred vestments, and 
makes his thanksgiving. 

15. The acolytes take every thing from the altar, and 
from the side-table, and putting them in their proper 
places, retire modestly. 



REPOSITORY. 125 

CHAPTER IV. 
of maundat-thuesday. 

Aeticle L 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED CEREMONIES 
OF MAUND AY-THURSDAY. 

On the Altar, 

1. The altar is to be adorned as for solemn festivals ; 
the front veil is to be white. 

2. The cross between the candlesticks is to be covered 
with a white veil. 

3. The Missal to be placed on a white cushion, or 
book-stand, on the Epistle side. 

On the Side-tahle. 

1. The chalice for Mass, with white ornaments, and 
two Hosts. 

2. Another chalice with a pall, a paten, a white veil, 
and a white silk ribbon. 

3. A pyx with small hosts to be consecrated for tlie 
communion of the people. 

4. A small plate with the wine and water cruets, and 
a towel for wiping the fingers. 

5. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

6. The censer with the incense-boat. 

7. A white veil for the shoulders. 

8. The communion-cloth. 

9. The canopy for the procession. 

10. The wooden clapper. 

11* 



126 MAUNDAY-THURSDAY. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Surplices for the clerks. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, maniple, stole, and cha- 
suble ; all white. 

3. A white cope. 

4. A violet stole. 

5. A chafing-dish, containing fire. 

6. Candles for the procession. 

In the Repository for the Blessed Sacrament, 

1. This repository is to be prepared apart from the 
principal altar of the church, and hung with precious 
tapestry, which should by no means be of black color : 
adorned with flowers and lights, but not with relics or 
images of saints. 

2. The repository or urn, in which the chalice with 
the Blessed Sacrament is to be placed, should be pre- 
pared in the centre of the altar. It should be finely 
adorned, and secured with lock and key. 

3. There should be a corporal in the repository. 

4. Another corporal on the altar. 

5. Steps to reach to the repository, where the chalice 
is to be placed. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO BE PERFORMED ON MAUNDAY- 
THURSDAY. 

Section I. — Of the Mass. 

1. The bells, which call the faithful to church, should 
be rung as on festivals. 



THE MASS. 



127 



2. The acolytes prepare every thing as above, in their 
proper place. 

3. Meanwhile the priest hears confessions. 

4. At the stated hour, the parish priest of the church 
puts on the sacred vestments for Mass. 

5. The first clerk lights the candles on the altar, and 
places the chalice in the middle of it ; and behind it the 
pyx containing the small Hosts. 

6. The celebrant, with his head covered, preceded by 
the first acolyte, and then by the second and third, who 
walk together, each having his hands joined, proceeds 
to the altar for Mass. * 

7. Beginning Mass, he does not say the psalm, Judica 
me DeuSy nor the Gloria JPatri. 

8. Whilst the Gloria in excdsis is said, they ring the 
bells, which are not rung any more until Holy Saturday. 

9. Besides the usual Host, another large one, and a 
sufficient number of small ones, are consecrated. 

10. The Agnus Dei i^ said, as usual, but the Pax\a 
not given. 

11. Whilst the celebrant is saying the prayers before 
the communion, the first acolyte comes from the side- 
table to the altar, with the empty chalice, pall and paten. 

12. The celebrant having consumed the sacred species 
in both kinds, and covered the chalice out of which he 
communicated, places the other chalice in the middle of 
the altar, and uncovers it. 

13. He kneels, places the consecrated Host in the 
chalice, covers it with a pall. and paten on the concave 
side, covers the whole with the veil, and kneels. 

14. He takes the pyx, places it before the chalice cov- 
ered with a veil, uncovers it, kneels, retires to the Gos- 
pel side, having his face turned towards the Epistle side. 



128 MAUND AY-THURSDAY. 

15. One of the acolytes, kneeling at the Epistle side, 
recites the Confiteor^ the other acolyte and the people 
also kneeling. The celebrant subjoins the Misereatur 
and Indulgentiam^ as usual. 

16. The celebrant going to the middle, kneels, takes 
the pyx, and turns round towards the people, and says 
as usual, JEcce Agnus JDei^ &g. 

17. The acolytes receive communion at the altar, then 
the people at the rails, holding the communion-cloth be- 
fore them. 

18. After the communion the celebrant retires to the 
altar, covers the pyx, and puts it into the tabernacle. 

19. Then having said. Quod ore, &c., he takes the 
first ablution ; kneels, washes his fingers over the chal- 
ice, returns to the middle, kneels, and takes the second 
ablution. 

20. The chalice which has served for Mass, is brought 
.to the side-table; the candles at the repository are 
lighted, the canopy is prepared outside the railing, and 
candles are distributed to some of the people. 

21. In the mean time, the celebrant continues Mass, 
in which the following things are to be observed : 

Having purified the chalice, he kneels, goes to the 
Epistle side, and reads the Communio / then goes to 
the middle, kneels, kisses the altar, withdraws to the 
side of the Gospel, and says, Dominus vohiscum. 

He returns to the middle, kneels, goes to the Epistle 
side, and there reads the Post Communio, 

He again goes to the middle, kneels, kisses the altar, 
turns, says, Dominus vohiscum, and Ite, missa est. 

Then he turns to the middle, kneels, says, Placeat, 
&c., kisses the altar, and says, Benedicat vos, &c., and 
kneels. 



PROCESSION. 129 

He turns to the Gospel side and gives the blessing, 
without turning round entirely, but only towards the 
Gospel side, and he does not return to the middle. 

He says the Gospel of St. John, making the sign of 
the cross, not on the altar, but on the book, or altar- 
card, out of which he reads it. 

At the words Verbum caro factum est, he kneels to- 
wards the Blessed Sacrament. 

22. Mass being ended, the celebrant goes to the mid- 
dle, kneels, and by the shortest way goes down, on the 
Epistle side, to the floor. 

23. There, assisted by the acolytes, he takes off the 
chasuble and maniple, and puts on the white cope. 

Section H. — Of the Procession with the blessed 
/Sacrament to the Mepository. 

1. The celebrant goes before the altar, and having 
made a genuflection, he kneels on the lower step, and 
prays for a while. 

2. The first acolyte takes the censer with fire, and the 
boat with incense, to the celebrant. 

3. The celebrant rises, puts incense into the censer 
without blessing it, the second acolyte offering th« boat, 
without kissing it or the celebrant's hand. 

4. The celebrant goes up to the altar, and, kneeling 
on the platform, incenses the Blessed Sacrament in the 
chalice. 

5. Then the veil is put over his shoulders, and he 
rises, goes to the altar, kneels, rises, ties with a white 
ribbon the veil around the chalice that contains the 
Sacred Host. 

6. He takes the chalice with his left hand covered 
with the veil, places his right hand on the chalice, and 



130 MAUNDAY-THUESDAT. 

the second acolyte extends over it both corners of the 
veil. 

7. The celebrant, holding the chalice in this manner, 
turns his back to the altar, and begins the hymn, Pange 
lingua. 

8. They proceed to the repository in the following 
order : 

1st. The banner, if there be any. 

2dly. Some of the faithful, two by two, carrying can- 
dles in their hands. 

3dly. The processional cross, carried by the third aco- 
lyte. 

4thly. The first acolyte with the censer, having in- 
cense in it. 

5thly. The celebx'ant under the canopy ; having at his 
right hand the second acolyte, who should take care to 
raise a little the celebrant's alb in front, when he goes 
up or down the steps. They say the hymn, Pange 
lingua. 

9. When the procession has arrived at the repository, 
it divides into two lines, one on each side of it, so that 
the censer-bearer and the celebrant, under the canopy, 
may pass between them. 

10. The cross-bearer stops at one side of the reposi- 
tory. 

11. The celebrant goes up to the altar of the reposi- 
tory, places the chalice on it, kneels, goes down one of 
the steps ; kneels on the platform ; the veil is taken from 
his shoulders. 

12. In the meantime, those who carried the canopy, 
leave it in some convenient place. 

13. The celebrant arises, puts incense in the censer, 
without blessing it, and without the usual kisses, and 



REMOVAL OF THE PYX. 131 

kneeling on the platform, incenses the Blessed Sac- 
rament. The acolytes recite the verse, Tantum ergo^ 

&G. 

14. The celebrant gives the censer to the censer-bear- 
er, rises, goes up to the altar, kneels, takes the chalice, 
places it in the repository ; the second acolyte placing 
tbe steps near the altar, if it is necessary to reach the 
repository. 

15. The celebrant kneels again, shuts np the reposi- 
tory, kneels, and goes down to the floor of the chapel. 

16. Then the celebrant, kneeling on the lower step of 
the altar, prays for a while, rises, kneels on both knees 
on the floor of the chapel, and having covered his head, 
preceded by the cross, he returns betw^een the acolytes 
to the altar. 

Section" III. — Of the Hemoval of the Pyx. 

1. All being come to the altar, the cross is put in its 
place ; the second and third acolytes take lighted candles. 

2. The celebrant having made a genuflection, goes 
up to the altar, takes out of the tabernacle the pyx with 
the Blessed Sacrament, places it on the corporal, and 
kneels. 

3. Going down, he kneels on the platform, and puts 
on the veil, assisted by the first acolyte. 

4. The celebrant goes up to the altar, kneels, having 
his hands covered with the veil, takes the pyx, and, pre- 
ceded by the clerks holding lighted candles in their hands, 
he carries the pyx to the altar of the repository, places 
it on the corporal, and kneels down. 

5. Then going down, he kneels on the platform; there, 
assisted by the clerks, he takes oif the veil; again goes 



132 MAUND AY-THURSDAY. 

up, kneels, opens the repository, and places it in the pyx 
behind the chalice. 

6. The celebrant kneels, shuts up the repository, and 
having prayed on the lowest step of the altar, he kneels 
on the floor of the chapel, and, with his head covered, 
returns to the sacristy. 

Y. There, the celebrant takes off the cope and the 
white stole, and puts on a violet one, crossing it on his 
breast as usual. 

Section IV. — Of the Stripping of the Altars, 

1. The celebrant vested as above, attended by the 
acolytes, goes to the altars, with his hands joined. 

2. Standing on the floor of the sanctuary at the foot 
of the altar, he begins with a loud voice the anthem, 
Diviserunt sibi, which he continues with the Psalm, 
J)eus meus, respice in me / reciting it with the acolytes. 

3. In the mean time, the celebrant goes up to the 
altar, strips it, taking off the altar-cloths. 

4. The acolytes receive the cloths, and remove from 
the altar the flower-pots, the front veil, and the carpet, 
so that nothing but the cross and six candlesticks, with 
their candles, but not lighted, is left on the altar. 

5. The celebrant, having stripped the principal altar, 
goes to strip the others, if there be any more. 

6. The altars being stripped, the celebrant returns to 
the principal one; there, after the last verse of the 
Psalm, the anthem JDiviserunt is repeated, he waits for 
the Angelus Dotnini. 

1. One of the acolytes gives the sign for it with the 
usual clapper ; and ail kneel down. 

8. Then the celebrant arises, bows to the cross, and 
the acolytes kneel ; all return to the sacristy. 



WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED. 133 

9. There, the celebrant takes off the sacred vestments, 
makes the usual thanksgivings, and causes every thing 
to be put in its place. 

lOr The first acolyte takes from the cross of the great 
altar the white veil, and covers it with a violet one. 

11, The priest should procure some of the faithful to 
pi*ay before the Blessed Sacrament, whilst it remains in 
the repository ; and he should have a number of candles 
burning before it. 



CHAPTER V. 
OF GOOD FRIDAY. 

Article I. 

OF WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE OFFICE OF GOOD 

FRIDAY. 

At the Great Altar. 

1. On the altar, which is to be altogether bare, six 
candlesticks, with candles of brown wax, not lighted. 

2. A wooden cross, covered with a black veil, fixed 
in such a manner as to be easily removed. 

3. A black cushion on the second step of the altar. 

On the Side-table. 

1. A towel, covering the side-table, without hanging 
down. 

2. An altar-cloth, folded, large enough to cover the 
altar, without hanging down. 

12 



134 GOOD FRIDAY. 

3. A book-stand with a Missal. 

4. A black burse containing a corporal, pall, and 
purifier. 

5. The censer, with the box containing incense. - 

6. A black veil for the chalice, to be used at the end 
of the office. 

Y. A little plate with the cruets, and finger towel. j 

i 

JVear the Table. \ 

1. A carpet with a cushion of violet color, and a 
white veil, adorned with golden and silk violet fringe. 

2. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

3. The wooden clapper. 

At the Hepository. \ 

1. A white veil for the shoulders. i 

2. The canopy. \ 

3. Torches and candles for the procession. I 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, black maniple, stole, and 
chasuble. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 



i 



BEGINNING OF THE OFFICE. 135 



Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO BE PERFORMED ON GOOD 

FRIDAY. 

Section I. — From the Beginning of the Office to the 
Uncovering of the Gross. 

1. At the stated hour, the signal being given, the 
celebrant and acolytes put on their surplices in the sa- 
cristy, and every thing is prepared as above. 

2, The celebrant washes his hands, puts on the amice, 
alb, cincture, black maniple, stole, and chasuble. 

3.. Preceded by the acolytes, with his hands joined, 
lie goes to the altar with his head covered. 

4. He takes off his cap, kneels on the floor of the 
sanctuary before the altar, and prostrates himself, laying 
his hand on the cushion placed on the second step, and 
prays for the space of a minute. 

5. The first acolyte takes the altar-cloth, unfolds it 
over the altar, assisted by the second acolyte, but they 
do not unfold it in its width, as they must leave the 
foremost part of the altar uncovered. 

6. The third acolyte places the book-stand with the 
Missal on the Epistle side of the altar. 

v. The celebrant rises, and the cushion being removed 
by one of the acolytes, he goes up to the altar and 
kisses it in the middle. 

8. He goes to the Epistle side, and reads the first 
lesson, with the Tract. 

, 9. He says, Oremus^ and, kneeling down with all the 
clergy and. people, says, Flectamus genua ; the second 



136 GOOD FRIDAY. 

acolyte, who rises first, answers, Levate / and the cele- 
brant says the prayer, Deus a quo^ &c. 

10. Then he reads the second lesson and Tract, and 
immediately the Passion. 

11. Having said in the same place, Munda cor meum, 
he continues to read that part of the Passion which is 
sung as the Gospel. 

12. At the end he does not kiss the book, but imme- 
diately (in case there be no sermon) he reads the pray- 
er, as in the Missal. 

13. Before every prayer, with the exception of the 
eighth, the celebrant says, Flectamus genua^ on which all 
the clergy and people kneel ; and the second acolyte, 
rising up before the other, says, Levate. 

14. About the end of the prayers, the first acolyte, 
assisted by the third, extends before the steps of the \ 
altar, or of the sanctuary, a carpet, and on the first 
steps, a violet cushion, and over all, the white veil. 

Section II. — Of the Uncovering and Veneration of the 

Cross. 

1. The prayers being ended, the celebrant, standing 
at the same side, takes ofi" the chasuble only. 

2. Then he kneels at the middle of the altar, takes 
the cross from it, and the first acolyte takes the Missal. 

3. The celebrant goes to the Epistle side, retiring 
back from the altar, and having his face turned towar^Js 
the people, the clerk holding the Missal before him. 

4. The celebrant, with his right hand, uncovers the 
top of the cross, as far as the transverse piece, and rais- 
ing the cross a little with both his hands, he says with a 
solemn voice, £Jcce Lignum Qrucis / and the acolytes, 
in the same tone of voice continue, In quo Sahts mundi 



VENERATION OF THE CROSS. 137 

pependit / and all but the celebraat kneel down, and 
the acolytes say, Venite^ adoremiis ; after which words, 
all arise. 

5. The celebrant, in front of the altar, at the side of 
the Epistle, uncovering the right arm. of the cross, and 
the head of the crucifix, raising his voice and the cross 
higher, says again, Ecce Lignum Crucis. 

6. The clerks continue, In quo jSalus^ &c. ; then all 
kneeling, they say, Vetiite, adortmus^ as before. 

7. The celebrant, finally, in the middle of the altar, 
uncovering the whole cross, and raising his hands and 
his voice still higher, says the third time, Ecoe Lignum 
Crucis^ <fcc. 

8. The acolytes also answer, and kneel as before. 

9. The first acolyte uncovers the processional cross, 
and all other crosses in the church are now uncovered, 
and the second acolyte replaces the book on the book- 
stand on the altar. 

10. The celebrant, going down from the altar by the 
Gospel side, carries the cross devoutly, holding it raised 
up with both his hands, to the place prepared for it. 

11. There, kneeling down, he places it on the cushion 
covered with the white veil, and, if necessary, he fastens 
it with some strings. 

12. The celebrant rises, kneels, goes to the Gospel 
side, sits down, and, with the assistance of the acolytes, 
takes off his shoes. 

13. The celebrant, thus without shoes, goes to vene- 
rate the cross, to which, at suitable distances, he bows, 
kneeling on both knees, the first, second, and third time, 
and then he kisses it. 

14. The celebrant rises, and having knelt to the cross, 
returns to his seat at the Epistle side, and puts on his shoes. 

12* 



138 GOOD FRIDAY. 

15. The clerks also take off their shoes, and after the 
celebrant, and before the people, venerate the cross in 
the same manner as the celebrant, then return to their 
places, and put on their shoes. 

16. After the acolytes, the people venerate the cross, 
first the men, and then the women. 

IV. The first acolyte remains by the cross whilst it is 
venerated by the people, and the second and third aco- 
lytes go to the celebrant, and with a loud and distinct 
voice, recite with him the verses and responses called 
the Improperia. 

The Improperia to be recited by the celebrant, with 
the second and third acolytes, are as follows : 

Part 1st. 

Celebrant. Popule mens quid feci tibij aut in quo con- 
tristavi te ? Responds mihi. 

V. Quia eduxi te de terra Egypti : parasti crucem Sal- 
vatori tuo. 

Clerk 2. R. Agios o Theos. 

CI. 3. Sanctus Deus. 

CI. 2. R. Agios Ischyros. 

CI. 3. V. Sanctus fortis. 

CI. 2. Agios athanatos^ eleison imas. 

CI. 3. Sanctus imm^or talis, miserere nobis. 

Cel. Quia. eduxi te per desertum quodraginta annis ; et 
manna cibavi te, introduxi te in terram satis bonam : parasti 
crucem Salvatori tuo, 

CI. 3. Agios Theos. 

CI. 2. Sanctus Deus. 

CI. 2. Agios Ischyros. 

CI. 3. Sanctus fortis. 

CI. 2. Agios athanatos, eleison imas. 



VENERATION OF THE CROSS* 139 

Sanctus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Cel. Quid ultra debui facere tibi et non feci? Ego 
quidem plantavi te vineam meam speciosissimam ; et tit facta 
es mihi nimis amara ; aceto namque sitim meam potastiy et 
lancea perforasti latus Salvatori tuo. 

CI. 2. Agios Theos. 

CI. 3. Sanctus Deus. 

CI. 2. Agios Ischyros, 

CI. 3. Sanctus fortis. 

CI. 2. Agios athanatos^ eleison imas. 

Sanctus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Part 2d. 

Cel. V. Ego propter te fagellavi uEgyptum cum primo^ 
genitis suis ; et tu me flagellatum tradidisti. 

CI. ^ <t ^. JR. Popule meus quid feci tibi ? aut in quo 
contristavi te ? Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego eduxi te de jEgypto^ demerso Pharaone in mare 
rubrum ; et tu me tradidisti principibus Sacerdotum. 

CI. 2 <£* 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi ? aut in quo con- 
tristavi te? Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego ante te o'perui mare ; et tu aperuisti lanced la- 
tus meum. 

CL 2 c& 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi ? aut in quo con- 
tristavi te ? Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te pavi mannd per desertum ; et tu me cecidisti 
alapis etfagellis. 

CI. 2 c& 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi ? aut in quo con- 
tristavi te? Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te potavi aqua salutis de petrd : et tu me po^ 
iasti felle et aceto. 

CI. 2 <& Z. Popule meus quid feci tibi? aut in quo con- 
tristavi te? Responde mihi. 



140 GOOD FRIDAY. 

Cel. Ego propter te Chananeorum reges percussi : et tu 
percussisti arundine caput meum. 

CI. 2 <& S. Popule mens quid feci tihi? aut in quo con- 
tristavi te ? Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego dedi tihi sceptrum regale : et tu dedisti capiti 
meo spineam coronam. 

CI. 2 (& 3. Popule mens quid feci tihi? aut in quocon- 
tristavi te ? Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te exaltavi magna virtute ; et tu me suspendisti 
in patibulo crucis. 

CI. 2 <£• 3. Popule meus quid feci tihi ? aut in quo con- 
tristavi te? Responde mihi. 

Part 3d. 

Cel. Crucem tuam adoramus Domine ; et Sanctam Re- 
surrectionem tuam laudamus et glorifcamus : Ecce enim, 
propter lignum venit gaudium in universum mundum. 

Psal. Deus misereatur oiostri et henedicat nobis. 

CI. 2 (§: S. Illuminet vultum suum super nos : et mise- 
reatur nostri. 

Cel. Crucem tuam adoramus Domine : et sanctam resur- 
rectionem tuam laudamus et glorificamus ; ecce enim prop- 
ter lignum venit gaudium in universum mundum. 

CI. 2 (& S. Crux f delis inter omnes^ arhor una nohilis ; 
nulla sylva talem profert^ fronde, fl^^'^'^i germine. Dulce 
lignum^ dulces clavos, dulce pondus sustinet. 

Cel. Pange lingua gloriosi lauream certaminis^ et super 
crucis trophaeo die triumphuni nohilem ; qualiter Redemp- 
tor orbis immolatus vicerit. 

CI. 2 c& 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes arbor una nobilis : 
nulla sylva talem. profert^ fronde^ fore^ germine. 

Cel. De parentis protoplasti fraude factor condolens ; 



VENERATION OF TBE CROSS. 141 

quando pomi noxialis in necem morsu ruit ; ipse lignum 
tunc notavit, damna ligni ut solveret, 

CI. 2 c& 3. Dulce lignum^ dukes clavos, dulce pondus 
sustinet. 

Cel. Hoc opus nostrce salutis or do depoposcerat^ multi- 
formis proditoris ars ut artem faJleret : et medelam ferret 
inde, hostis unde Iceserat. 

CI. 2 cfe 3. Crux f delis inter omnes, arbor una nohilis ; 
nulla sylva talem profert, fronde, floi'^i germine. 

Cel. Quando venit ergo sacri plenitudo temporis : missus 
est ab arce Patris, natus orbis Conditor : atque ventre vir- 
ginali, came amictus prodiit. 

Cl. 2 <& Z. R. Dulce lignum^ dulces clavos, dulce pondus 
sustinet. 

Cel. V. Vagit infans inter arcta, conditus prcesepia, m,em- 
bra pannis involuta virgo mater alligat, et Dei manus pe- 
desque stricta cingit fascia. 

Cl. 2 c& 3. R. Crux fidelis inter omnes, arbor una nobi- 
lis ; nulla sylva talem pi'ofert, fronde, fore, germine. 

Cel. V. Lustra sex qui jam peregit, tempus implens cor- 
poris : sponte libera Redemptor passioni deditus ; agnus in 
crucis levatur immolandus stipite. 

Cl. 2 (k 3. Dulce lignum, dulces clavos, dulce pondus sus- 
tinet. 

Cel. Felle potus ecce la.nguet ; spina, clavi, lanced, mite 
corpus perf or arunt, undd manat et sanguine ; terra, pondus, 
astra, mundus, quo lavantur fumine. 

Cl. 2 dt S. Crux f delis inter omnes, arbor una nobilis : 
nulla sylva talem profert, fronde, fore, germine. 

Cel. Flecte ramos arbor alta, tensa laxa viscera : et rigor 
lentescat ille, quern dedit nativitas ; et superni membra regis 
tende miti stipite. 



142 GOOD FRIDAY. 

CL2(&B. Dulce lignum^ dulces clavos, dulce pondus suS' 
tinet. 

Gel, Sola digna tu fuisti ferre mundi victimam ; atque 
2Jortum p7'ceparare area mundo navfrago^ quern sacer cruor 
perunxit^ fusus agni corpore, 

CI. 2 <j& 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes, arbor una nobilis ; 
nulla sylva talem prqfert^ fronde fiore^ germine, 

Cel. Sempiterna sit JBeatce Trinitati gloria^: cequa Patri, 
Filioque par decus Pa,raclito ; Unius Trinique nomen 
laudet universitas. 

18. Towards the end of the veneration of the cross, 
the first acolyte lights the candles on the altar, and the 
third takes from the altar the book-stand, with the 
Missal. 

19. Then the second and third acolytes go, one to 
the Epistle side, and the other to the Gospel side, and 
unfold the altar-cloths. 

20. This being done, the second acolyte brings to the 
altar the burse with the corporal, and the purifier over 
it ; he takes the corporal out of the burse, unfolds it, 
and places the purifier near it, on the Epistle side. 

21. The third acolyte places on the altar, at the Epistle 
side, the book-stand, with the Missal opened. 

22. The veneration being over, the celebrant brings 
the cross back to the altar, places it between the candle- 
sticks, and makes a genuflection. 

23. The acolyte removes the cushion and the veil from 
the place w^here the cross lay, and one of them puts fire 
in the censer. 

24. The celebrant again puts on the chasuble at his 
seat, on the Epistle side, and goes up to the altar, with 
his head uncovered. 



PROCESSION TO THE REPOSITORY. 143 

Section III. — Of the Procession to the depository ^ and 
the return to the Altar loith the Blessed Sacrament. 

1. The celebrant, standing before the altar, puts the 
incense in the censer, withont the usual blessing. 

2. The procession goes to the repository in the follow- 
ing order : 

The banner. 

Some pious men of the congregation. 

The censer-bearer. 

The cross, uncovered, carried by the third acolyte. 

The celebrant, with the second acolyte at his left hand. 

3. At the repository, the banner and the cross stop on 
one side of the altar, the others who compose the pro- 
cession divide themselves into two lines, one on each 
side of the altar. 

4. The celebrant, having made a genuflection before 
the repository, kneels down on the lowest step of the 
altar, and, with others, prays awhile. 

o. Then he arises, opens the repository, kneels, goes 
down the first step, and, standing, puts incense in the 
censer without blessing it, and without the usual kiss. 
The candles for the procession are lighted, and the can- 
opy is prepared. * 

6. The celebrant, kneeling on the platform of the 
altar, incenses the Blessed Sacrament in the repository, 
arises, makes a genuflection, takes out of the repository 
the chalice, and places it on the altar. 

7. The celebrant makes a genuflection, shuts the re- 
pository, in which he leaves the pyx with the conse- 
crated Hosts; makes another genuflection, and then 
goes down the first step. 

8. There kneeling, he puts on the veil, rises, makes a 



IM GOOD FEIDAT. 

genuflection, and takes the ehalice as he did the day 
before, which the second acolyte covers with the veil. 

9. The celebrant, turning his back to the altar, and 
his face to the procession, with a loud voice, begins the 
hymn, Vexilla Megis^ which he continues with the second 
clerk, as follows : 

Vexilla regis prodeunt, 
Fulget Crucis mysterium : 
Quo vita mortem pertulit, 
Et morte vitam protulit. 

Quae vulnerata lancece 
Mucrone diro, criminum 
Tit nos lavaret sordibus, 
Manavit undd et sanguine, 

Impleta sunt quce concinit 
David Jideli carmine^ 
Dicendo nationibus, 
Megnavit a ligno Deus 

Arbor decora et fulgida, 
Ornata regis purpura, 
Electa digno stipite 
Tarn sancta membra tangere. 



Beata, cujus brachiis 
Pretlum pependii sceculi, 
Stater a facta corporis^ 
Tulitque prcedam tartari. 

Crux^ ave, spes unica / 
Hoc passionis tempore, 



PEOCESSION TO THE REPOSITORY. 145 

Piis adauge gratiam, 
Reisque dele crimina, 

Te, fons saluiiSj Trinitas ! 
Collaudet omnis spiritus : 
Quibus crucis victoriam 
Largiris^ adde prcemium. Amen, 

10. The procession returns to the altar in the follow- 
ing order: 

Th-e banner. 

Some pious men mtli candles. 
The processional cross. 
The censer-bearer ^^•iih. the censer. 
The celebrant under the canopy, and the second aco- 
lyte at his left. 

11. Four candles should be left burning at the re- 
pository. 

12. The banner and the canopy are left outside the 
railing; the processional cross is put near the side- 
table. 

13. The men of the congregation carrying candles, 
stop outside the railing in regular order, holding the 
candles in their hands to the end of the office. 

14. The celebrant goes up to the altar, and places the 
chahce on the corporal ; he then kneels, rises, and goes 
down the first step of the altar. 

15. There he takes off the veil, and standing, puts in- 
cense in the censer without blessing or kissing; then 
kneeling down on the platform, he incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament. 



13 



146 GOOD FRIDAY. 

Section IV. — Of the Last Part of the Ceremony. 

1. The celebrant arising, goes to the altar, makes a 
genuflection, takes off the veil from the chalice, and 
places the paten on the corporal. 

2. Then he takes the chalice, lays the consecrated 
Host on the paten, takes the paten with both his hands, 
and places the Host on the corporal, not saying any 
thing ; and not making the sign of the cross, he places 
the paten on the corporal at his right hand. 

3. The celebrant, having made a genuflection, takes 
the chalice, goes to the Epistle side, and holding the 
chalice in his left hand, puts in it wine and water, with- 
out blessing, and without saying any thing. 

4. The chalice is not wiped, but is placed on the side 
of the corporal. 

5. The celebrant goes to the middle, and having 
made a genuflection, replaces the chalice in the usual 
place, without making the sign of the cross, and covers 
it with the pall. 

6. Remaining in the same place, the celebrant puts 
incense in the censer, without blessing. 

'7. Then taking the censer, he kneels, incenses the of- 
fering, saying as usual, Incensum istud^ &c. 

8. Having incensed the offerings, he kneels again, 
and incenses the cross {ex Deer. S.B. C. 14 Mail 1707), 
saying Dirigatur Domine^ &c., and having again knelt 
to the cross, continues, as usual, the incensing of the 
altar, kneeling every' time he passes by the middle of 
the altar. 

9. The celebrant then gives the censer to the censer- 
bearer, saying, Aeeendat in nohis^ &c. ; he is not in- 
censed. 



LAST PART OF THE CEKEMONY. 147 

10. Immediately, taking care not to turn his back to 
the Blessed Sacrament, lie goes from the platform down 
to the second step, a little back of the altar on the 
Epistle side, having his face turned towards the people, 
and washes his hands, not saying any thing. 

11. He returns to the middle of the altar, kneels, 
rises, and placing his hands joined on the altar, bowing, 
says with a low, but intelligible voice. In spiritu liurai- 
litatis^ &G. 

12. He kisses the altar, kneels, and turning towards 
the people ,on the Gospel side, he says, Orate fratres / 
and returns by the same way to the middle, without 
completing the circle, and kneels again. 

13. The words, Suscipiat, are not answered. 

14. The celebrant, with his hands joined before his 
breast, in a ferial tone, says, Oremus. Prceceptis^ &c. ; 
and whilst he says. Pater noster^ he extends his hands. 

15. The clerks answer, Sed libera nos a malo^ and 
the celebrant. Amen y with a low voice, still holding his 
hands extended, he continues in the ferial tone as before, 
Libera nos, &c., and at the end, the acolytes answer, 
Ame?i. 

16. The celebrant kneels, arises, uncovers the chalice, 
puts the paten under the Host, and holding with his 
left hand the paten on the altar, with the right he 
raises the Host, so that it may be seen by the people. 

17. Immediately after, he raises the Host over the 
chalice already uncovered, and forthwith divides it into 
three parts as usual, not saying any thing ; the last part 
he puts into the chalice, without saying any thing, and 
without making the sign of the cross. 

18. The chalice being covered, he kneels, rises, and 
with his hands joined over the altar, his body inclined, 



148 



GOOD FRIDAY. 



he says secretly, Perceptio corporis^ omitting the two 
other prayers. 

19. He again kneels, then taking the Paten with the 
Host, says, as usual, Panem Coelestem^ &c., and also the 
Do'tnine^ non sum, dignus^ &c., striking his breast. 

20. He signs himself with the Host, saying. Corpus 
Domini nostri^ &c., and communicates. 

21. Having meditated a little, he uncovers the chal- 
ice, and kneels. 

22. He arises, and having gathered, as usual, the frag- 
ments, he takes the chalice with both his hands, not say- 
ing any thing, and without making the sign of the cross, 
he reverently takes the particle of the Host with the 
wine. 

23. Omitting the usual ablution of the chalice, he 
washes his fingers, as customary, over the chalice, with 
wine and water. 

24. Meanwhile, all rise, and the candles are put out. 

25. Having taken the ablution in the middle of the 
altar, the celebrant wipes the chalice, covers it with the 
small black veil, arranges it, and bowing, with his hands 
joined before his breast, he says secretly, Quod ore sump- 
simus, &c. 

26. The first acolyte carries the chalice to the side- 
table. 

27. The celebrant, going down, makes with the clerk 
a genuflection to the cross, and having covered his head, 
he returns to the sacristy. 

28. There he takes off the sacred vestments, and puts 
on a white stole over his surpHce. 



BKINGING BACK THE PYX. 149 

Section V. — Of the bringing haeh of the Pyx to 

the Altar. 

1. The celebrant, preceded by the first acolyte, with 
the veil, and the other two with candles, goes to the re- 
pository. 

2. Having made a genuflection on the floor of the 
chapel, he kneels on the lowest step, and prays for a 
while. 

3. Then he rises, goes up to the altar, opens the re- 
pository, kneels, takes the pyx, and places it on the cor- 
poral, and keeels again. 

4. Going down the first step, he kneels on the plat- 
form, and receives the veil from the first acolyte. 

5. He goes up to the altar, kneels, and with his hands 
covered with the veil, takes the pyx, and preceded by 
the clerks with lighted candles, brings back the pyx, 
which should be kept in a tabernacle, in some remote 
chapel within the church, or in the sacristy, placing it 
there with the accustomed genuflections. 

6. When the pyx is shut up in the tabernacle, all 
kneel down, and the sign for the Angeliis Domini is 
given with the usual wooden instrument. 

T. Lastly, the candles of the altar are put out, and 
every thing is put in its proper place. 

8. Should there be no chapel or sacristy, the pyx 
must be left in the repository, with a lamp burning be- 
fore it. 



18* 



150 HOLY SATURDAY. 

CHAPTER VL 

OF HOLY SATUEDAT. 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED RITES TO BE 
PERFORMED ON THIS DAY. 

Outside the Door of the Church. 

1. A table covered with a white cloth, and on it, 

2. A small book-stand with a Missal. 

3. A plate with five grains of incense. 

4. The censer, with the box, containing incense. 

5. A vessel with holy water and the sprinkle. 

6. A white maniple, stole, and dalmatic. 
v. A lantern with a candle. 

8. Also, near the table, a chafing-dish with coals, or 
wood to be lighted for the new fire. 

9. Tongs. 

10. A long ornamented rod, with the triple candle 
fastened on the top. This has but one common stock, 
from which three candles, of equal length, rise in a tri- 
angular form. 

At the Great Altar. 

1. The altar is to have on it the candlesticks and cross, 
as on solemn festivals. 

2. Its front is to be covered with two altar-veils, a 
white one under another of violet color. 

3. A stand on the Gospel side, to fix in it the rod with 
the triple candle. 



PEEPAKATIONS. 151 

4. On the same side, a high book-stand for the JExultet. 

6. The paschal candle on a large candlestick, the wick 
of which should be so prepared as to be easily lighted ; 
five holes in the form of a cross should be made in the 
candle. 

6. The lamps dressed at proper and convenient places. 

On the Side-taUe. 

1. The side-table should be covered with a white 
cloth. 

2. A Missal for the Exultet and for Mass. 

3. The chalice covered with a white burse and veil. 

4. A plate with the cruets of wine and water, and a 
small hnen towel. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Four surplices for the acolytes; the amice, alb, 
cincture, violet stole and cope ; also, a violet maniple, 
stole and chasuble. 

2. A white maniple, stole and chasuble. 

3. A white veil. 

4. Candles, to accompany the ciborium, when the 
priest brings it back to the altar. 

At the Baptismal Fonts. 

1. A table covered with a white cloth. 

2. Two towels. 

3. The holy- water vase, with the sprinkle. 

4. Vessels to fill water from the fonts. 

5. The vessels containing the oil of the catechumens, 
and the holy chrism. 



152 HOLY SATURDAY. 

6. A pitcher of water, with a basin for washing the 
hands, and a few slices of bread without crust on a small 
plate, for the same purpose. 

7. Some clean cotton on a plate, for wiping the fingers. 
If baptism be administered, besides what is above 

mentioned, the following things ought to be prepared. 

1. The Roman Ritual. 

2. A small plate with salt. 

3. The vessels with the oil of the catechumens, and 
the holy chrism. 

4. A white stole and cope. 

5. A towel to wipe the head of the baptized person. 

6. Another piece of linen for the white garment. 
v. A candle, to be lighted. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACEED KITES TO BE PEEFOEMED ON HOLY 
SATUEDAY. 

Section I. — From the beginning of the Office to the 
blessing of the Paschal Candle, 

1. Outside the church, fire is struck from a flint, and 
with it the charcoals in the pan are kindled. 

2. At a proper hour, four clerks put on their surplices 
in the sacristy, and prepare every thing at their proper 
places. 

3. The sign being given with the clapper, the celebrant 
washes his hands, puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
stole and cope. 

4. They proceed to the principal door in the following 
order : 

The first acolyte with his hands joined. 



BKGIK^INU OF THK OFFICE. 153 

The third acolyte with the jji-ocessional cross. 

The celebrant between the second and fourth acolytes. 
. 5. When outside, the acolyte with the cross stops, 
turning himself, and holding the crucifix turned towards 
the celebrant. 

6. The celebrant places himself before the table, which 
is between him and the cross. 

7. There, standing, he reads out of the Missal, placed 
on the book-stand on' the table, the three prayers for the 
blessing of the fire, and then the prayer for the blessing 
of the incense. 

8. Whilst the celebrant blesses the incense, the first 
acolyte takes, with the tongs, some of the new blessed 
fire, and puts it in the censer. 

9. The celebrant, with the usual blessing and kiss, 
puts the incense in the censer, then he sprinkles the fire, 
and the grains of incense, saying the anthem Asperges 
we, and incenses them. 

10. The censer-bearer, having received the censer, puts 
some more new fire into it. 

11. The celebrant takes off the cope and stole, puts 
on a maniple, and a stole on his left shoulder, as deacons 
wear it, and a dalmatic of white color. 

12. Meanwhile the second acolyte lights a candle with 
the new fire, and places it in a lantern, and the fourth 
acolyte takes the plate with the grains of incense. 

13. The celebrant again puts incense in the censer 
with the usual blessing and kisses, and takes the rod 
with the triple candle. 

14. They go to bless the paschal candle in the follow- 
ing order : 

The acolyte, carrying the grains of incense on the 
right hand, and the censer-bearer on the left. 



154: HOLY SATUKDAY. 

The third acolyte with the cross. 

The celebrant, holding the rod with the triple candle, 
and the second acolyte, with the lighted taper, at the 
left. 

15. The acolytes, carrying the grains of incense, the 
censer, and the cross, go into the church, and stop when 
the celebrant has entered the door. 

16. The celebrant having entered the church, lights 
one of the three candles out of the lighted taper, and 
kneels with the rest of the clergy and the people, the 
cross-bearer excepted. 

17. Thus kneeling, the celebrant says with a distinct 
voice. Lumen Christi ; then he rises, and the acolytes 
also arising, answer, Deo gratias. 

18. They go as far as the middle of the church, where 
again the second candle being lighted, every thing is 
done as before, except that the celebrant raises his voice 
higher. 

19. At last they go as far as the steps of the altar, and 
the third candle being lighted, every thing is done the 
third time, as before, but they raise their voice still 
higher. 

Section II. — Of the Bles&mg of the Paschal Candle. 

1. The acolytes having answered for the third time, 
Deo gratias^ all rise, and form a straight line, with the 
celebrant in the middle, before the altar. 

2. The second acolyte retiring, lays the taper on the 
table, takes the Missal for the Exultet^ gives it to the 
celebrant, who gives him the rod with the triple candle. 

3. The celebraiit, holding the Missal in his hands, 
kneels on the lowest step of the altar, and without say- 



BLESSING OF THE PASCHAL CANDLE. 155 

ing Munda cor 'nieuin^ says only, Juhe Domine henedi- 
cere, Dominus sit in corde raeo^ et in lahiis meis, ut 
digne et competenter annuntiem suum paschale pr(E- 
coniiim. Amen. 

4. Then rising, and having made with the others a 
genuflection to the altar, they go to the book-stand, 
which is covered with a white veil, and placed at the 
Gospel side, in the following order : 

The censer-bearer, having at his right the fourth aco- 
lyte, with the grains of incense. 

The third acolyte, with the cross, having at his left 
the second acolyte, with the rod with, the triple candle. 

The celebrant with the Missal. 

5. Being arrived at the book-stand, they range them- 
selves by it in the following order, in a straight line, and 
turn, as well as the celebrant, their face towards it. 

The celebrant lays the Missal on the book-stand. 

The cross-bearer at the right of the celebrant. 

The -censer-bearer at the right of the cross-bearer. 

The acolytes, holding the triple candle, at the left of 
the celebrant. 

The acolytes, with the grains of incense, at the left of 
the triple candle. 

6. The celebrant, receiving the censer from the censer- 
bearer, incenses the Missal open on the book-stand, and 
with a clear and joyful voice begins the JEhultet. 

7. At the words. Cur vat imperia^ he puts 1 
the grains of incense in the side of the paschal 4 2 5 
candle, in the following order : 3 

8. The fom'th acolyte leaves on the side-table the 
plate, in which the grains were, and takes a rod, with a 
wax taper fastened at the top, and returns to his former 
place, at the left of the triple candle. 



156 HOLY SATURDAY. 

9. At the words, Hutilans ignis accendi% the cele- 
brant lights the candle from the triple candle. 

10. At the words, Apis mater eduxit^ the celebrant 
stops, until the fourth acolyte has lighted a taper to 
light the lamps of the church. 

11. The JExidtet being ended, the celebrant shuts the 
Missal, and the second acolyte puts the triple candle in 
the stand prepared for it at the Gospel side. The third 
acolyte leaves the cross at the Epistle side. 

12. Then, preceded by the censer-bearer, with the 
acolyte that carried the grains of incense, at his left, and 
also by the second and third acolyte, he kneels before 
the altar with them all, and returns to the sacristy. 

13. There, having taken off the white vestments, he 
puts on the violet maniple, stole, and chasuble. 

Section III. — Of the Prophecies, 

1. The celebrant thus vested, preceded by the aco- 
lytes, goes to the altar. 

2. Having bowed to the cross, he goes up to the 
altar, kisses it in the middle, and goes to the Epistle 
side. 

3. There, with a loud voice, he reads the twelve 
prophecies, with the prayers and tracts ; he kneels with 
all the clergy and the people, whilst he says, Flectamus 
genua., before every prayer, the last only excepted ; and 
the clerk, arising, says, Levate. 

4. After the last prayer, the celebrant, having made, 
from the place where he stands, a bow to the cross, goes 
down to his seat at the Epistle side, and takes off the 
chasuble and maniple. 

5. If the church has a baptismal font, the celebrant 



BLKSSING OF THP] FONT. 157 

puts on a violet cope, and sits down. Otherwise he 
goes before th^e altar for the litany, as below. 

Section IY. — Of the Blessing of the Font. 

1. The celebrant being seated as above, the first aco- 
lyte takes from its stand the paschal candle, lighted, and 
goes before the altar. 

2. The third acolyte takes the cross, and likewise goes 
before the altar. 

3. The two other acolytes go to the celebrant. 

4. The celebrant, arising, begins with a loud voice 
the tract, Sicut cervus^ as here below, which he con- 
tinues slowly with the acolytes. 

5. When the tract is begun, the procession moves to 
the front, bowing to the altar, in the following order : 

The acolyte with the paschal candle. The cross-bear- 
er. The celebrant, between the two other acolytes, 
with his head covered, reciting the tract : 

"Sicus cervus desiderat ad fontes aquarum: ita de- 
siderat anima mea ad te Dens. 

" Sitivit anima mea ad Deum vivum : quando veniam, 
et apparebo ante faciem Dei ? 

" Fuerunt mihi lacrymae panes die ac nocte, dum 
dicitur mihi per singulos dies, ubi est Deus tuus ? " 

6. All stop before the railing of the font, and the 
celebrant having his face turned to the cross, after the 
tract is over, says, Dominus voMscum^ and the prayer, 
Omnipotens Sempiterne Deus^ &c., the fourth acolyte 
holding the Missal before him. 

Y. The acolyte carrying the paschal candle, and the 
cross-bearer, go within the railing, if the place is spacious 
enough ; they, however, stand opposite the celebrant. 

14 



158 HOLY SATURDAY. 

8. The celebrant goes near the font, and says the sec- 
ond prayer and the preface, as in the Missal, holding al- 
ways his hands joined. 

9. During the preface, at the proper places, as pointed 
out by the Rubrics, he performs the following rites : 

1. At these words, Gratiam de Spiritu SanctOy with 
his right hand he divides the water in the form of a 
cross, and immediately after wipes his hand. 

2. After the words, N^on inficiendo corrumpat^ he 
touches the water with his hand, and wipes it. 

3. After the words, Indulgentiam consequatur^ with 
his right hand he makes three crosses over the font. 

4. After the words, Buper te ferebatur^ he divides the 
water with his right hand, and spills it towards 1 
the four parts of the world, east, west, north, and 3 4 
south, in the following manner : 2 

5. After the words. In nomine JPatris^ <fec., he 
changes his voice in the tone of a lesson. 

6. After the words, Tu henigniis aspira^ the celebrant 
breathes thrice over the water in the form of a cross. 

7. After the words, JPiirificandis mentibus efficaces, 
he dips the paschal candle a little into the water, saying, 
Descendat in hanc ple7iiHcdi?ie')n fontis, &c., and draws 
it forth. He dips it deeper the second time, saying 
louder, Descendat^ &c., and takes it out again. Last- 
ly, he dips the paschal candle to the bottom of the 
font, and says still louder, Descendat^ &c., and takes it 
out. 

8. The celebrant breathes three time over the water, 
in the form marked in the Missal, and continues, Totam- 
que hujus aqum^ &c. 

9. At the words, Foecitndet effectu^ he takes the pas- 
chal candle out of the font, and it is wiped. 



BAPTISM OF INFANTS. 159 

10. He continues the preface, and in a lower tone 
concludes it, saying. Per Dominum nostrum^ &c., and 
the assistant acolytes answer, Amen. 

11. The second acolyte takes the holy- water vase, and 
with it takes some water out of the font. 

12. The celebrant having received the sprinkle, al- 
ready dipped into the water of the font, sprinkles both 
himself and the bystanders ; then, accompanied by two 
clerks, he sprinkles the people in the church and returns 
to the font. 

13. Holy water is also taken out of the font for the 
vessels that are by the doors of the church. 

14. The celebrant, having returned to the font, puts 
in the water the oil of the catechumens in the form of a 
cross, saying, Sanctificetur^ <fec.* 

15. Then he puts in the chrism, saying, Infusio 
chrismcUis^ &g. 

16. Lastly, he puts in both oils together, in the form 
of a cross, saying, Commixtio ehrisinatis^ &c. 

17. He mixes with his hands in the font the oils with 
the water, spreading them all over the font. 

18. He wipes his hands with some cotton, and washes 
them with some crumbs of bread. 

Section V. — Baptism <of Infants. 

" Duo potissimmn (these words ^are of the Roman 
Ritual) ex antiquissimo JEcclesioe ritu., sacri swat dies^ 
in quibus solemni emr€mo7iia hoe Sacramentum, ad- 
ministrare maxime convenit^ nempe Sabbatum, Sanctum. 



* As, generally, the font Is not sufficiently large, tke water is blessed 
in a more capacious vessel ; in which case the font is filled with, bless- 
ed water by means of vases prepared for that purpose. 



160 HOLY SATURDAY, 

JPaschce^ et Sahhatum Pe^itecostes^ quibus diebus Bap- 
tismatis fontis aqua rite consecratuT?'' 

The celebrant, having finished the blessing of the font, 
proceeds to the baptism of the infants, if any are to be 
baptized. 

1. After the blessing of the font, the children to be 
baptized should be with their sponsors outside the door 
of the church. 

2. The celebrant, having washed his hands, preceded 
by an acolyte with the cross, another acolyte remaining 
by the font with the paschal candle, goes between the 
two other acolytes, to the door of the church. 

3. There, the celebrant performs all that is prescribed 
by the Ritual, as far as the introducing of the child into 
the church. 

4. Then he lays on the infant the extremity of the 
stole which hangs from his left shoulder, and introduces 
it into the church, saying, N. Ingredere in Templum. 
Dei^ &G. 

5. Then having said the Credo and Pater, with his 
back turned to the railing of the font, he says the JEJxr 
orcisniy' touches the ears and nostrils of the infant, and 
anoints it with the oil of catechumens on the breast, 
and between the shoulders. 

6. Remaining still outside the railing, the celebrant 
takes off the violet cope and stole, and puts on the white. 

Y. Preceded by the cross, and followed by the infants 
to be baptized, with their godfathers and godmothers, 
he goes inside the railing of the font. 

8. The celebrant makes the usual questions before the 
font, JSF. Credis f &c., N. Vis baptizari f &c. 

9. The godfather having answered, Volo^ he adminis- 
ters baptism, in the manner prescribed in the Ritual, &c. 



LITANY, MASS, AND VESPERS. 161 

10. After the baptism, the celebrant washes his hands, 
and having put off the white cope and stole, puts on the 
violet. 



Section VI. — Of the Litany^ Mass^ and Vespers. 

1. The celebrant, preceded by the cross and paschal 
candle bearers, and attended by the other acolytes, re- 
turns before the altar. 

2. The paschal candle is placed on its stand, and the 
cross laid against the Avail on the Epistle side. 

3. The celebrant, standing before the altar, takes off 
the cope only. 

4. Then kneeling down vnth the clergy and people, 
he recites the Litany from the Missal, which is placed 
on a stool before him. 

5. The acolytes repeat all that is said by the celebrant. 

6. At the verse, I^e-ceatores^ the violet front veil is 
removed from the altar, the candles are lighted, and 
flower-pots are placed between the candlesticks. 

7. The celebrant continues the Litany, as far as 
Christe exaudl 7ios, inclusively. 

8. Then he rises, and, preceded by the acolytes, goes 
to the sacristy ; where, having taken off the violet stole, 
he puts on a white manij^le, stole, and chasuble. 

9. Accompanied by the acolytes, as above, he returns 
to the altar, before the stej^ of which he makes the con- 
fession as usual, saying the Psalm, Judica rae^ Deus^ and 
the Gloria Patri. 

10. He goes up to the altar, and having said the 
prayer, Aufer a riohis^ in the middle of it, he says im- 
mediately, JSJyrie eleison^ there being no Iiitroit. 

11. At the Gloria in excelsis^ the bells are rung. 

14* 



162 HOLY SATURDAY. 

12. After the Epistle, the celebrant says thrice, Alle- 
luia, raising his voice gradually each time ; and the 
acolytes repeat it in the same tone of voice as the cele- 
brant, vs^ho continues the verse and the tract. 

13. Credo is not said, neither the Offertorium after 
the Dominies voMseum, nor the Agnus Dei ; the Pax 
is not given. 

14. In place of the Com'inunio, vespers are said, as in 
the Missal, viz. : 

15. The celebrant, at the Epistle side, says the anthem 
Alleluia, and with the acolytes continues the Psalm, 
Laudate, after which he repeats. Alleluia. 

16. Then he says the antiphon, Vespere autem, <fec., 
with the canticle, Magnificat. 

17. The antiphon, Vespere, &c., having been repeated, 
the celebrant goes to the middle of the altar, kisses it, 
and, turned towards the people, says, Dominus vohiscum^ 
and then the prayer, as usual, at the Epistle side. 

18. At the Ite, Missa est, is added, Alleluia, Alleluia. 

19. After the Gospel of St. John, the celebrant re- 
turns to the sacristy, and puts off the sacred vestments. 

Section VII. — Of bringing bach the Pyx to the Altar. 

1. The celebrant over his surplice puts on a white 
stole, and, preceded by two acolytes with candles, and 
by another with the burse and veil, he goes to the place 
where the pyx with the Blessed Sacrament is kept. 

2. There, with the usual genuflections, he takes the 
pyx with his hands covered with the veil, and brings it 
back to the usual tabernacle. 

3. He returns to the sacristy, in which he puts off the 
sacred vestments, and reads the anthem, Triu^n puero- 



ASPEEGES. 163 

rwm, with Alleluia and the Canticle, Psalm, and prayers 
of thanksgiving, as in the Missal. 

4. Meanwhile the candles of the altar are put out. 

5. Likewise the triple candle, which is not lighted 
any more; and the rod is removed. 

6. Also the paschal candle is extinguished, but it is 
left in its stand. It is to be lighted on all Sundays and 
festivals of obligation at Mass and Vespers, until the 
Gospel of Ascension-day, inclusively; after which it is 
put out, and after Mass removed from its stand. After- 
wards, it is lighted only on the eve of Pentecost, for 
the blessing of the font. 



CHAPTER III. 

THE ASPERGES *— WHEN THERE IS BUT ONE PRIEST, 

THINGS TO BE PEEPAEED. 

In the Sacristy, 

1. The sacred vestments for the priest, except the 
maniple and chasuble. 

2. A cope, if the priest prefers to wear it. 

3. The holy- water vase. 

4. The sprinkle. 

5. The Missal, or Asperges-card. 

6. Surplices for the acolytes. 

* The Asperges, or sprii^skling of the holy water, takes place every 
Sunday of the year, except when the Bishop solemnly celebrates. 



16J: 



ASPERGES. 



In the Sanctuary. 
The chasuble and maniple on the priest's bench. 

At the Altar. 

Every thing ready for Mass. 

1. At the appointed time, the acolytes put on their 
surplices, the priest washes his hands, and then puts on 
the amice, alb, girdle, and stole, assisted by the acolytes. 
The first acolyte takes the holy-water vase, and the sec- 
ond the Asperges-card, placing themselves a little be- 
hind the celebrant, who takes off his cap, and all bow 
to the image in the sacristy. The celebrant, having 
again put on his cap, goes to the altar, preceded by the 
acolytes ; they bow to the clergy, should they be in the 
sanctuary. 

2. Having arrived in front of the lowest step of the 
altar, the first acolyte at the right, and the second at 
the left, the celebrant gives his cap to the first acolyte, 
and all make a genuflection on the floor,f rise, and kneel 
on the lowest step. J The priest having received the 
sprinkle from the acolyte, intones the Asperges, or the 
Vidi aquam, according to the season, and sprinkles the 
altar three times, first in the middle, then at the right, 
and lastly, at the left side ; in the mean time, the choir 
continues to sing the Asperges. Then the celebrant 
sprinkles himself; after which, he rises and sprinkles the 

{Cxrem., Epis.^ 1. ii., c. xxxi). The water may be blessed in the 
church, or in the sacristy, {Bab.^ Miss.) The holy water siiould be 
changed, at least, once a week. {CcBrem. Epis.., 1. i., c. vi.) 

+ It is supposed that the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle. 

JSliould tlie Blessed Sacrament be exposed, the genuflection should 
be made with both knees. The usual kisses, in giving and receiving 
the sprinkle, should also be omitted, and the altar is not sprinkled. 



ASPERGES. 165 

acolytes, first the one at his right, and then the other, 
while these remain kneeling. 

3. Then all rise, and all make either a profound bow to 
the altar, or a genuflection, if the Blessed Sacrament be 
in the tabernacle, or exposed; and turning at their right, 
they go as far as the railings of the sanctuary, the first 
acolyte, carrying the holy- water vase, at the right of the 
celebrant, and the second at his left, both raising the 
borders of the cope. From the railings the priest 
sprinkles the people three times, first in the middle, then 
at the Epistle, and lastly, at the Gospel side ; after which, 
turning at the right, they go back to the front of the 
lowest step, and there make a genuflection. 

4. Then they rise, and stand until the Antiphon As- 
perges is sung and repeated by the choir ; after which, 
the celebrant sings the versicles, and the prayer from 
the book or card ; the choir having answered, Amen^ all 
make a genuflection, and go to the bench, where the 
priest takes ofl" the cope, assisted by the second acolyte, 
who carries it away, removing also the holy-water vase 
and card ; if the Missal has been used for the Asperges, 
he places it, opened at the right place, on the book-stand 
upon the altar. In the mean time, the celebrant, assist- 
ed by the first acolyte, puts on the manijjle and the 
chasuble ; after which, between the two acolytes, he 
goes in front of the lowest step, where all make a 
genuflection, the acolytes kneeling on the floor, a little 
behind the priest. 

5. If the clergy be in the sanctuary, the celebrant, 
having sprinkled the altar and himself, rises, and being 
accompanied by the acolytes, proceeds to sprinkle the 
clergy. He sprinkles first at that side where the high- 
est in dignity sits, saluting them before and after the 



166 ASPEEGES. 

sprinkling. Should there be Canons, they sprinkle each 
in particular. After sprinkling the clergy, he goes to 
the railings, from which place he sprinkles the people in 
the manner above prescribed. He salutes the clergy on 
both sides of the sanctuary as he returns to the lowest 
step, makes a genuflection, and sprinkles the acolytes. 

6. Should the Bishop assist, the celebrant, after hav- 
ing sprinkled the altar (accompanied by the acolytes 
carrying the holy-water vase), goes to the Bishop, bows 
to him, and, with the usual kisses, gives him the sprinkle. 
The prelate sprinkles himself, then the celebrant, and 
afterwards his own assistants. He then returns the 
sprinkle to the celebrant, who receives it with the usual 
kisses. Having bowed to the Bishop, they return to 
the lowest step of the altar, where, having made a gen- 
uflection, the celebrant sprinkles the two acolytes. They 
again make a genuflection, and go to the railings, to 
sprinkle the people, bowing to the bishop in going and 
returning. 

7. Should there be deacon and sub-deacon, their 
maniples must be placed on the priest's bench in the 
sanctuary beforehand. The celebrant and all the assist- 
ants being vested, at the signal of the master of cere- 
monies, all bow to the cress, and, making the usual sa- 
lutes, put on their caps ; then the procession moves in 
the following order : 

First, the clerk with the holy-water vase, followed by 
the two acolytes carrying candles; then the celebrant, 
with hands joined, accompanied on either side by the 
deacon and sub-deacon, raising the borders of his cope. 
[Ccerem. Epis.) 

8. Having arrived in the sanctuary, they salute the 
clergy; then, proceeding to the lowest step of the altar, 



ASPERGES. 167 

give their caps to the master of ceremonies, and make 
a genuflection. The master of ceremonies takes the 
caps to the priest's bench, and the acolytes go to the 
side-table. The celebrant and his ministers kneel on the 
lowest step, and the clerk, with the holy-water vase, 
goes to the right of the deacon, who takes the sprinkle, 
and, with the usual kisses, presents it to the celebrant, 
who, as he intones the As2Jerges, sprinkles the altar, as 
was before said in No. 2. 

9. The celebrant, still kneeling, having sprinkled 
himself, sprinkles the deacon and sub-deacon. This done, 
the deacon receives the sprinkle, and gives it to the 
clerk, who carries the holy-water vase. Then they rise, 
make a bow to the altar, or a genuflection, if the Blessed 
Sacrament is in the tabernacle, and proceed to sprinkle 
the clergy; the clerk carrying the holy-water vase pre- 
cedes the celebrant, who is accompanied by his minister, 
raising the borders of the cope. Having saluted the 
clergy, the deacon presents the sprinkle to the cele- 
brant, who sprinkles, as he continues to'say the Miserere., 
in a low voice, with his ministers. 

10. Having sprinkled the clergy in the manner pre- 
scribed in Xo. 6, the celebrant, with his ministers, 
sprinkles the people at the railing ; after which, the 
deacon takes from the celebrant the sprinkle, and gives 
it to the clerk, and then they return to the foot of the 
altar, saluting the clergy as they pass. There the dea- 
con again gives the sprinkle to the celebrant, who 
sprinkles the acolytes and other clerks that may be 
about the altar. While sprinkling, the celebrant does 
not bow, but the clergy and others will stand uncovered, 
make a bow and the sign of the cross. {Gavanf.^ in 
Benedict.) 



168 • ASPEEGES. 

11. If, on this occasion, that is, when the celebrant is 
assisted by deacon and sub-deacon, the Bishop is present, 
after the sprinkling of the altar, the celebrant, accom- 
panied only by the master of ceremonies and the clerk 
carrying the holy-water vase, goes to the Bishop, bows 
to him, and, with the usual kisses, gives him the sprinkle ; 
the rest is done as marked in No. 6. The deacon and 
sub-deacon remain standing at the foot of the altar. 
This is, as Gavantus says, through respect for the 
Bishop. The celebrant, having received the sprinkle 
from the Bishop, bows to him, and returns to the front 
of the altar, makes a genuflectiouj and sprinkles the 
deacon and sub-deacon. After this, he proceeds as on 
other occasions, except that he is accompanied only by 
the master of ceremonies and the clerk carrying the 
holy-water vase, the ministers remaining standing at 
their post in front of the altar. 

12. The antiphon being sung, and repeated by the 
choir, the celebrant sings the versicles and the prayer, 
with joined hands, from the book that is held before 
him by his ministers. Then they bow, or make a genu- 
flection, and go to the priest's bench, where, standing 
with tlieir faces towards the altar {Baldesclii)^ the min- 
isters take off the cope from the celebrant, and put on 
him the chasuble and maniple ; after Avhich, they take 
their own maniples. This done, they return to the 
altar, and commence Mass. 



BENEDICTION. 169 

CHAPTER IV. 

BENEDICTION WITH THE BLESSED SACRA^IENT.* 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED. 

1. There should be, at least, twelve lighted candles on 
the altar whenever the Blessed Sacrament is exposed in 
the monstrance, and benediction given with it.f 

2. Likewise a throne, or small canopy, should be 
placed on the highest step over the altar, between the 
candlesticks ; and in the canopy, a corporal or pall, 
on which the Blessed Sacrament is to be placed. 

3. On the altar, a burse with another corporal, the 
remonstrance covered with a white veil, and the head of 
the tabernacle. | 

4. On the side-table, a white benediction veil, and the 
book containing the prayers. 

5. In the sacristy, a surplice, white stole and cope for 
the officiating priest. § 

6. A surplice and white stole, for the priest or deacon 
if there be one, who is to expose the Blessed Sacra- 
ment. 

* Benediction with the Blessed Sacratnent should not be given with- 
out permission from the Ordinary. {Benedict XIV., Instit. XXX., n. 9., 
and S. B. G., 28th April, 1640, 18th Dec., 1647.) 

t Benedict XIV., Instit. XXX, 22, 24. 

X The cross, unless it be too difficult to remove, the altar-cai-ds, and 
reliquaries should be removed from the altar. (Benedict XIV., ibid., 
n. 17.) 

§ According to Merati (Part iv., tit. xii., n. 80), it is commendable 
for the priest to wear an amice, alb, cincture, stole, and cope. 

15 



170 BENEDICTION. 

Y. If thete are sacred ministers, two dalmatics, a stole 
for the deacon, two cinctures, two albs, and two amices.* 

8. A sufficient number of surplices for the clerks that 
are to assist the priest, and for the torch-bearers. 

9. Two, four, or even eight torches, to be carried by 
as many clerks. 

10. The censer, and the incense-boat.f 

Article II. 

CEREMONIES TO BE PEKFOEMED WHEN THERE IS BUT 
ONE PRIEST.;^ 

1. The officiating priest having put on his surplice, 
stole, and cope, preceded by the censer-bearer, and the 
acolytes carrying the lighted torches, two by two, goes 
to the altar, makes a genuflection, rises, and kneels on 
the lowest step ; the acolytes with their torches, form- 
ing a line at some distance behind the officiating priest, 
make a genuflection with him, and then kneel in the 
same place till the end of the ceremony. § 



♦ In Eome it is customary, on great feasts, for an ordinary priest to be 
attended by sacred ministers, vested in dalmatics. However, in this 
respect, the Bishop's injunctions should be attended to. 

+ When benediction is given immediately after vespers, the cele- 
brant keeps the same cope and stole which he wore at vespers. Also, 
when the benediction is given immediately after High Mass, the cele- 
brant keeps the stole he had on, and having taken off the chasuble 
and maniple at his usual seat, he puts on a cope of the color used at 
Mass, If High Mass be celebrated with deacon and sub-deacon, they 
take off their maniples, and assist in their dress at the benediction of 
the Blessed Sacrament. 

t It is a praise-worthy custom for the priest, on this occasion, to 
wash his hands, although the Eubrics do not prescribe it. 

§ The censer-bearer may kneel in the middle, between the torch- 
bearers. 



bp:nkdiction. 171 

2. The priest rises, goes up to the altar, unfolds the 
corporal, and extends it in the middle ; then he opens 
the tabernacle, makes a genuflection on one knee, takes 
the Blessed Sacrament from the tabernacle,* and puts it 
in the monstrance, f By this time, if necessary, the 
censer-bearer, unless there is another clerk to attend to 
it, shall have carried the stool or steps to the platform, 
of the altar, that the priest may reach the place of ex- 
position ; the priest makes another genuflection on one 
knee, and exposes the Blessed Sacrament, then he joins 
his hands and makes a low bow, and another genuflec- 
tion, having reached the platform ; after which, tm'ning 
to his right, he descends, kneels on the lowest step, 
bows, rises, and turns to his right, to put incense in the 
censer; the censer-bearer goes to the priest with the 
censer, who puts incense in, without, however, blessing 
it. If there are clerks assisting the priest, they rise with 
him : the one at the right receives the incense-boat from 
the censer-bearer, and presents the spoon to the priest ; 
the other, at the left, supports the border of the cope, 
as the priest puts incense in the censer. 

3. Then the priest kneels on the lowest step, takes 
the censer, and in the usual manner, incenses the Bless- 
ed Sacrament with three double swings, bowing before 
and after. During the incensing, the censer-bearer, if 
there are no assisting clerks, kneels at the right of the 
priest, relieving the border of the cope ; then he re- 



* At tliis time, where such is the custom, the choir commences the 
hymn, O Sahitaris Hostia ! 

t Should the priest touch the Blessed Sacrament, he ought to purify 
his fingers in the little vase kept for that purpose near the tabernacle, 
and wipe them with the purificator. 



172 BENEDICTION. 

ceives back the censer, makes a genuflection, and goes 
to his place, where he kneels. 

4. In the mean time, the choir may sing such hymns 
and antiphons as are approved by the Church,* or by 
ancient usage ; nevertheless, they should be in the Latin 
language. The corresponding versicles and responses 
may be sung also ; last of all, the whole hymn, Pange 
lingua^ &c., or the two last strophes, Tantum ergo^ &c., 
and Genitori^ &c., should be sung, and after it, the ver- 
sicle, Panem de coelo^ &c., and the prayer, Pens qui 
nobis, &c. 

5. During the Tantum ergo, at the words, venerewAir 
cernui, all make a low bow, without, however, prostrat- 
ing themselves. f 

6. All remain kneeling, unless the Te Demn be sung, 
during which they stand, except at the verse, Te ergo 
qucesumus, <fcc., during which verse they kneel ; at the 
commencement of Genitori,\ the priest, his assistants, and 
the censer-bearer bow, rise, and incense is put in the 
censer, as is said in n. 2, and the Blessed Sacrament is 
incensed again, as before indicated. § 

7. The hymn being finished, the singers begin the ver- 
sicle, Panem de coelo, &c. ; the choir answers, Omne de- 
lectamentum, &c. During Paschal time and the Octave 
of Corpus Christi, Alleluia || is added both to the versi- 

* Alex. VII. ^ constit. Pice, Solicit udi ids. Benedict XIV.., constit. In- 
ter omnigenas. Ga,rddl. 

t Such is the practice in Eome and through all Italy, and it seems 
very becoming as an expression of deep sentiment of reverence. 

XMerati., parsix,, tit. xii., 31. Gardell.., % xxxiv., 17. 

§ The officiating priest incenses the Blessed Sacrament only twice, 
as is indicated. Bit. Bom., Ccerem. Epis., and Instruct., Clem. XL, 
n. 2. 

i Merati, pars iv., tit. xii. Gardell., % xxxiv., 17. 



BENEDICTION. 173 

cle and response. After this, the priest rises without 
making a genuflection, and sings, Ore')nus* bowing at 
the same time ; then he sings the prayer, Deus qui 
nobis sub Sacramento^ &c., out of the book Avhich, 
in the absence of sacred ministers, he holds in his 
hands. 

He concludes the prayer with these words. Qui vivis et 
regnas in scecula sceculorum ; f neither before nor after 
this prayer Dominiis vobiscum is said. 

8. After the prayer, the priest kneels, and, if there is 
no one assisting, the censer-bearer goes to the side -table, 
takes the benediction-veil, and extends it on the priest's 
shoulders, then, if necessary, he carries the steps to the 
middle of the platform ; then the priest bows, rises, 
goes to the jDlatform, makes a genuflection on one knee, 
takes down the Blessed Sacrament from the throne, 
places it on the corporal, and makes another genu- 
flection. In the mean time the steps are removed. 

9. The priest then turns the back of the monstrance 
to his face ; then covering his hands with the extremi- 
ties of the veil, he takes hold of it at the highest part 
of its foot with his right hand, and at the lowest with 
his left ; then he turns to his right on the Epistle side 
towards the people, raises the Sacrament as high as his 
eyes, brings it down lower than his breast, then he 
raises it in a straight line as high as his breast, after- 
wards brings it to his left shoulder, and completes the 
circle, turning himself to the altar to his right, on the 



* Gardell.^ xxiv., 22. 

+ Other prayers taken from the Missal may be added, especially the 
collect ordered by the Ordinary, under the same conclusion. (-5'. H, 
a, 7th Sept., 1850.) 



174 BENEDICTION. 

Gospel side, At last, he places it on the altar, turns its 
forepart towards his face, and makes a genuflection.* 

10. During benediction the priest is silent, f but a 
few strokes of the hand-bell may give notice of bene- 
diction being given ; also, the censer-bearer may incense 
the Blessed Sacrament with three double throws. J The 
organ may play a grave and sweet melody during bene- 
diction, as at the elevation, during Mass. 

11. The priest having replaced the monstrance on 
the altar, makes a genuflection on one knee, and is in 
the mean time, divested of the benediction-veil ; having 
risen, he takes the Blessed Sacrament out of the 
monstrance, puts it in the tabernacle, .makes a genu- 
flection, closes the tabernacle, goes down to the lowest 
step, makes a genuflection with the clerks, and in the 
same order as he came to the altar, returns to the sacristy. 

12. Whilst the Blessed Sacrament is replaced in the 
tabernacle, the psalm, Laudate Dominum 07nnes gentes^ 
or any thing suitable for the occasion, may be sung. 

* " Sacerdos, ostensorium manibus tenens, vertit se a parte Epis- 
tolse, ita ut in medio Altaris populum respiciat. Tunc illud elevat de- 
cent! mora, non supra caput, sed tantum usque ad oculos, et eodem 
modo illud dimittit infra pectus ; raox iterum recta illud attollit usque 
ad pectus ; et deinde ad sinistrum humerum ducit, et reducit ad 
dexterum, nee ante pectus reducit, sed continuo se convertit ad cornu 
Evangelii ; perflciens circulum, nee tamen, dum Crucem efformat, 
movens pedes." (Cter., Epis.) 

X The benediction with the Blessed Sacrament is to be given in si- 
lence by the celebrant, whether he be a Bishop or a priest, according 
to the Koman Eitual, the Ceremonial of Bishops, and several decisions 
of tlie Sacred Congregation of Eites, 9th Feb., 1762. 

t Neither the ringing of the bell, nor the incensing during bene- 
diction is prescribed by the Eubrics, yet, in many well-regulated 
churches in Europe, the custom prevails of doing either or both. In 
some places even, the large church bell announces to the people that, 
at that moment, God, in His mercy, blesses them. 



BENEDICTION. 1T5 

Aeticle III. 

WHEN THE OFFICIATING PEIEST IS ASSISTED BY ANOTHER 
PRIEST, OR BY DEACON AND SUB-DEACON. 

1. If a priest or deacon assist at the benediction, he 
walks from the sacristy before the officiating priest. He 
carries the stole, not. from his neck, but folded on his 
left arm. At the altar, he takes his place at the right 
of the officiating clerygyman. After making the genu- 
flection with the rest, he puts on the stole,* goes up to 
the platform, unfolds the corporal in the middle of the 
altar, opens the door of the tabernacle, and makes a 
genuflection on one knee. In making a genuflection on 
the platform, he turns his body a little towards the Gos- 
pel to avoid turning his back to the officiating priest. 
He exposes the Blessed Sacrament in the manner pre- 
scribed in Art. II., n. 2. 

2. Having made the genuflection after the exposition, 
he turns to his left, goes down, kneels on the lowest step, 
and takes ofl" the stole without kissing it. Then, having 
bowed with the officiating priest, he rises, moves a little 
backward so as to allow the censer-bearer to pass at his 
right in going to the officiating priest with the censer. 
He receives the incense-boat, and presents the spoon to the 
officiating priest without kisses. Incense having been put 
in the censer, the assisting priest receives back the spoon, 
returns the boat to the censer-bearer, and from him he 
receives the censer, which he presents to the officiating 
priest in the usual manner, but without kisses. He bows 



. "'^ If a deacon assists, he should put on the stole, suspending it from 
his left shoulder to his right side, under his arm. 



176 BENEDICTION. 

Avith the officiating priest, and relieves the border of the 
cope during the incensing. He bows again with him, 
takes the censer, and returns it to the censer-bearer. 

3. At the Genitori, he bows, and rises with the offi- 
ciating priest for the incense, in which he proceeds as 
before. 

4. After the prayer, Z>etcs qui nobis sub /Sacramento 
&c., he puts on the stole, goes up to the altar, and, with 
the usual genuflections, he takes the monstrance, places 
it on the corporal, extended in the middle of the altar, 
and makes another genuflection. Then he goes down, 
kneels on the lowest step, and takes off the stole. In 
the mean time the benediction-veil is extended on the 
shoulders of the officiating priest by a clerk, or by the 
censer-bearer. Then the assisting priest, and the clerk 
at the left of the officiating clergyman, if there is any, 
bow, rise, and ascend the steps, at the same time raising 
a little the lower part of the vestments of the officiating 
priest, as he goes to bless the people. While he makes 
a genuflection on the platform, they kneel on the edge 
of the same. During the benediction, they support the 
borders of the cope, each on his side, keeping profound- 
ly inclined at the same time. 

5. After the benediction, the assisting priest puts on 
the stole, rises, goes to the altar, and makes a genuflec- 
tion at the same time that tlie officiating priest, having 
reached the floor, kneels on the lowest step. Then he 
takes the Blessed Sacrament out of the monstrance, 
and puts it in the tabernacle. Then he makes another 
genuflection, closes the door of the tabernacle, folds the 
corporal, places it in the burse, and, having gone down 
to his place, he takes off* the stole and kisses it. Then, 
having given the cap to the officiating priest, with the 



BKNEDICTION. 177 

usual kisses, he makes with him a genuflection on the 
floor, and all return to the sacristy. 

6. Sliould there be a deacon and sub-deacon dressed 
in dahiiatics, as they go from the sacristy to the altar, 
and from the altar to the sacristy, the deacon at the 
right, and the sub-deacon at the left of the officiating 
priest, they relieve the borders of the cope. The deacon 
makes the exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, and re- 
places it in the tabernacle, unless there is another priest 
for that purpose. They assist the officiating priest to 
put incense in the censer, instead of the above-named 
priest. They hold the book before him while he sings 
the prayers, but they do so kneeling. The officiating 
priest takes the monstrance to give benediction without 
the assistance of the deacon. 

Aeticle IV. 

WHEN THE BISHOP GIVES BENEDICTION. 

1. Besides the preparations mentioned in Art. I., the 
following things are to be prepared : The cope, stole, 
pectoral cross, cincture, alb, amice, mitre, and, if the 
Bishop is in his diocese, the crosier.* Also, the hand 
candlestick with a candle in. (These articles are pre- 
pared instead of the vestments for the priest.) On the 
lowest step of the altar a cushion. 

2. The same ceremonies are observed as when a priest 
gives benediction, with the following particulars :f The 
Bishop, having put on the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral 

* Should the Bishop wash his hands, the pitcher, basin with water, 
and a towel, are prepared. 



178 BENEDICTION. 

cross, stole, cope, and mitre, takes the crosier, if he be 
in his diocese, to the sanctuary, preceded by the censer- 
bearer, torch-bearers, master of ceremonies, deacon and 
sub-deacon dressed with dalmatics, relieving the borders 
of the cope. Then follow the crosier-bearer and mitre- 
bearer. 

3. On arriving at the foot of the altar, the Bishop 
gives the crosier, and the mitre is taken off by the dea- 
con, then he makes a genuflection on the floor,* for 
which purpose the master of ceremonies will put the 
cushion, and replace it on the lowest step, on which the 
Bishop kneels. 

4. The benediction veil having been put on the Bishop's 
shoulder, he bows profoundly, rises, with the deacon and 
sub-deacon, and with them ascends the steps, while they 
raise his alb in front. Then he kneels with the sub- 
deacon at his left, on the edge of the platform, where 
the master of ceremonies has previously put the cushion. 
Meanwhile the deacon, having made a genuflection on 
the platform, takes the monstrance, keeping the fore- 
part of it towards himself, and standing, gives the 
Blessed Sacrament into the hands of the Bishop, who 
then rises, and, without saying any thing, blesses the 
people with three signs of the cross, f ^. 6., the first on 
the Epistle side, the next in the middle of the altar, and 
the third on the Gospel side. 

During the benediction, the deacon and sub-deacon, 
kneeling on the edge of the platform, raise the cope 
on each side. While standing, the Bishop gives the 
monstrance to the deacon or priest kneeling at his right, 

* CcBrem. Episc.^ lib. i., cla, xv., and *S'. B. (7., 12th Nov., 1831. 
t Ccerem, Upisc.^ lib. ii., ch. xxxiii. 



I 



BENEDICTION. 179 

and, the veil being taken from his shoulders, kneels on 
the cushion on the lowest step.* 

5. The deacon or the priest, having placed the mon- 
strance on the corporal, takes the Blessed Sacrament 
out of it, and places it in the tabernacle, with the usual 
genuflections. 

6. After this, the Bishop takes his mitre and crosier, 
if he use it, makes a genuflection on the floor,f and re- 
turns to the sacristy. 

If there be no sacred ministers to assist the Bishop at 
the benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, he will 
conform to the directions found in Art. I. for the ben- 
ediction given by a priest in a similar case ; however, in 
blessing the people, he will make three signs of the 
cross, as explained above — n. 4. 

*Ib., Gardellini, sec. xxxi, 12. 

t lb-, lib. i., ch. XV., S. E. C. 12th Nov., 1831. 



CEREMOOTAL. 



PART III. 

CHAPTER I. 

RULES TO BE OBSERVED BY THE CLERGY IN CHOIR. 

Article I. 

The Order of going to the Choir, 

1. The clergy, dressed in their cassocks and surplices, 
go out of the sacristy, two by two, so close together 
that the right shoulder of the one may almost touch the 
left shoulder of the other ; and they proceed gravely, 
with regular step, holding their caps with both hands 
below their breasts, each pair keeping at equal distance 
from the oth-er. 

2. When they arrive at the altar, they make a genu- 
flection to the cross, both taking care to make it at the 
same time, and to rise slowly, and with gravity ; in this, 
the uniformity and decorum of the ceremonies consist. 
Each pair make their genuflection in the same place that 
the first made theirs ; it will, therefore, be necessary 
that those who are behind should advance slowly, so as 
to allow those before them, time to m?ke the genu- 



RULES FOR THE CHOIR. 181 

flection with decorum. After the genuflection, they 
turn and salute each othei*, and then proceed to their 
place,* one on one side of the choir, the other on the 
other, and remain standing. 

Article II. 

The Order to he observed in Choir. 

1. There are three different postures to be observed 
in choir, viz., to stand, sit, or kneel. When it is time 
to stand, all must stand, and no one must sit down or 
kneel ; so all must be uniform, when it is time to sit or 
kneel. 

The clergy should remember not to kneel down dur- 
ing the elevation at Low Masses that may be celebrated 
whilst they are in the choir. {Sac. Con. Mit.^ 5th Mart., 
1667.) And they should conform to the directions of 
the master of ceremonies, in whatever regards divine 
worship. [Sac. Con. Mit.^ 4th June, 1817.) 

2. During High Mass, the clergy remain standing, 
from the end of the confession, until the celebrant has 

* There should be no chairs in the sanctuary, except that of the 
Bishop, or some very distinguished personage. Priests, even Canons, 
jind others belonging to the clergy, should sit on benches. These 
should be neatly made, with high backs, especially when attached to 
the walls. The bench for the celebrant should be near the altar on 
the Epistle side, and should be sufficiently large to accommodate the 
celebrant, deacon, and sub-deacon. It may be richly ornamented with 
carved work, but should never look like a throne. 

" Sacerdos, Diaconus, et Subdiaconus, ceiebrantes solemniter, possunt 
et debent sedere in banco, dum canitur Gloria, Credo, &c. ; non 
obstante qualibet consuetudine." {S. R. (?., 15th Jan., 1611.) 

" Canonic! Missam ceiebrantes coram Episcopo, non debent sedere in 
sede cum postergali, sed in aliquo scamno oblongo, tapete, vel panno 
cooperto in latere Epistolae." (6'. R. (7., 19th Maji, 1614.) 

16 



182 HIGH MASS. 

said the Kyrie eleison^ whilst he is singing the Gloria 
in excelsis, and until he is seated after reciting it ; whilst 
he is singing the prayers ; whilst the deacon is singing 
the Gospel ; whilst the celebrant is singing the Doniinus 
vohiscum^ and the Oremus^ at the Offertory y during the 
incensing of the choir ; during the preface, until the 
Sanctus is recited ; after the elevation, until after com- 
munion ; at the prayer, after communion, until the end of 
Mass. 

3. The clergy kneel from the beginning of Mass until 
the end of the confession ; whilst the deacon sings the 
Flectamiis genua^ rising again when the sub-deacon 
sings Levate ; whilst the sub-deacon sings in the Epistle, 
Jn nomine Jesu omne genu flectatur^ &c., to the word 
infernorum^ inclusively ; in time of Lent, at the verse, 
Adjuva nos / at Pentecost, at the verse, 'Fe?^^ Sancte 
Spiritus ; at the Verhicm caro faction est^ and at the 
Incarnatus est of the Credo in the Masses of Christmas 
and of the Annunciation of the Blessed Virgin ; from 
the Sanctus^ till after the consecration ; at the commun- 
ion of the clergy, after the celebrant has said Indulgen- 
tiam ; in the ferial Masses of Advent, Lent, ember days 
and vigils, which are fast days ; and in masses for the 
dead, at the prayers, at the Sanctus^ till the Pax Dom- 
ini^ inclusive ; at the Post Communio^ except the vigils 
of Easter, Pentecost, Christmas, and the ember days of 
Pentecost. {Pub. Jliss., part 1.) The clergy remain 
seated with their caps on, at all times when it is not pre- 
scribed above for them to stand or kneel. 

4. The clergy take off their caps whenever they stand 
up ; when they are saluted by the officiating clergy, or 
by others, who come to and from the choir, to return 
the salutation ; whenever they have to bow their heads. 



RULES FOR THE CHOIR. 183 

In the above cases, it is understood that the cap only 
should be taken off. Should any wear the calotte,* 
it is taken off also when a genuflection is made ; when 
the deacon sings the Gospel ; at the Incarnatus est ; 
when the choir is incensed ; at the consecration ; in giv- 
ing and receiving the I*ax y at the communion of the 
clergy ; when the celebrant gives the blessing. 

5. They bow the head during Mass at the following 
times : at the Glori JPatri, till the jSicut eraf, exclusive- 
ly ; whilst it is sung by the choir ; when the name of 
Jesus or Mary, or of the saint whose office is recited, or 
of whom a commemoration is made, is pronounced ; 
and at the name of the Pope ; during tlie Gloria in ex- 
celsis ; at the words, Adoramus te, Gratias agimus tihi^ 
Jesu Christe^ Suscipe depu'ecationem nostram j during 
the Credo^ at the words, Jesuim Christum j adoratur j 
in time of the preface, at Gratias agamus Domino Deo 
nostra. A low bow is made when the priest gives the 
blessing at the end of Mass. 

6. During the time of singing, all should sing in a 
uniform manner, not elevating or lowering the voice 
more than the rest, and if any be unable to keep tune, 
it is better to be silent. They should also be attentive 
not to be faster, or slower than the othei-s, but all should 
utter at the same time, the same syllable and note, and 
each one should be attentive not to get out of tune. 

Y. When the sub- deacon goes to give the Pax^ the 
first of the choir should, on his approach, bow to him, 
and lean his head towards his left cheek, placing at the 
same time, his hands under his elbows, and the sub-dea- 
con, laying his hands on the shoulders of the others, says, 

* This is a small cap, used for covering the crowa of the head, 
where the clerical toiisure is made. 



184 HIGH MASS. 

Pax tecum / to which he answers, JEt cum spiritu tuo, 
and again bows to the sub-deacon, then turning to the 
one next, he gives the Pax in the same way that the 
sub- deacon gave it to him, and so on, each one to the 
one next to him. 

8. The clergy in choir, should always observe silence, 
with modesty and recollection, shunning any thing thai 
might have an air of levity, or irreverence, 

Aeticle hi. 

7%e Internal Dispositions required of those who 
attend the Choir. 

1. A right intention to worship God purely for his 
glory, and not for interest or vanity. 

2. Reflection on what is to be done, in order that no 
mistakes may be made, which are the cause of many 
defects. This preparation should be made before going 
to the choir, by reading the instructions for the cere- 
monies, and impressing them upon the mind by serious 
recollection, and, even in time of choir, at leisure mo- 
ments, by reflecting on what ceremony comes next, and 
how it is to be performed. Thus nothing will be un- 
foreseen, and all will be done well. 

3. Attention to what is doing ; not giving way to 
thoughts, even if good in themselves, foreign to the pre- 
sent occupation, as such thoughts do not come from God, 
but proceed from some evil cause, to divert ns from the 
good we are doing. The presence of God will aid us to 
have proper attention, that we may apply our mind to 
what is done, or said, attending to the signification ; ex- 
citing sentiments corresponding to those, which those 
words express, which St. Augustin beautifully recom- 



RULES FOR THE CHOIK. 185 

mends in his commentary on the tenth Psalm : Si orat 
psalmus, orate / et si gemit^ gemite / et si tim.e% timiete^ 
omnia enim quce hie cotiscripta sunt,, speculum nostrum, 
sunt. What St. Augustin recommends in singing the 
Psalms, we should do in regard to whatever is recited 
or sung in Mass, or any other sacred function. 

4. Devotion is required, making us delight in those 
sacred duties, lest we be as those who perform them 
reluctantly and with tepidity, to whom that sentence 
is applicable : 3faledictus homo^ qui facit opus Dei 
negligenter. 

Article IV. 
Th£, order to he observed in receiving Holy Commxmion. 

1. After all have received the Pax^ all who go to 
communion meet together in the middle, two by two, 
with their caps and calotte off, with their hands joined, 
bowing at the Confiteor^ and striking their breast, &g. 
The oflSciating clergy, who assist at Mass, communicate 
first ; as also the priests, if any wish to communicate, 
with their stoles of the color of the day. Whilst the 
acolytes, after their communion, are descending the side- 
steps on each side, the two first of the clergy, who are 
yet to communicate, approach, making their usual gen- 
uflection, on the floor, before they ascend the steps, and 
after descending, they separate in coming down the 
steps, so as to leave space for the two who follow them 
to communicate; and so on, throughout. All kneel on 
the edge of the platform to receive communion ; and, 
afterwards, with gravity and devotion, return to their 
places in the choir, and conform themselves to the rest 
of the clergy. If any of the laity communicate, they do 

16* 



186 HIGH MASS. 

it at the railings of the choir, or on the floor, at the foot 
of the altar ; and the celebrant descends to the lowest 
step to give them communion, beginning always at the 
Epistle side. 

2. The same order is likewise observed in going to 
receive candles from the celebrant, ashes, or blessed 
palms, or in going to kiss sacred relics, and in similar 
ceremonies ; each one holding in his hand his cap and 
calotte, and kissing first the candle, or blessed palm, and 
then, the celebrant's hand. 

Aeticle. v. 
The order in going from the Choir. 

1. No one should leave the choir without necessity ; 
in which case, he goes to the middle, makes a genuflec- 
tion, salutes the choir, first on the Gospel side, then at 
the Epistle side. If the celebrant is sitting at the Epistle 
side, he should bow first to that side, then to the other. 
The same is done when any one enters the choir after 
the functions have commenced ; he should, however, 
remain some time kneeling, saying some prayers, then 
make a genuflection, and bow to the choir, as mentioned 
above. No one should go out of the choir or enter it, 
whilst the celebrant is reciting the Confession, during 
the singing of the prayers, the Gloria Patri^ Incarnahis 
esty Yeni iSancte Spiritus^ Adjuva nos^ &g. Should any 
one enter the choir at these times, he must stop, and 
kneel, or stand, conforming himself to the rest of the 
choir : during the Confession, at the beginning of Mass, 
he must remain kneeling till it is finished. 

2. After the service, the acolytes go out of the Sanct- 
uary, and after them the members of the choir ; those 



I 



INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OFFICERS. 187 

who are last on the Gospel side, and the last on the 
Epistle side, advance in a straight line, and meet to- 
- gether in the middle, make a genuflection, and turning, 
follow the acolytes ; the others do the same, and pro- 
ceed to the sacristy, in the same order as they left it. 
When they arrive at the sacristy, they separate ; one 
going on one side, and the other on the other, forming 
two lines : when the celebrant arrives, he bows to them, 
and they return a similar bow, and then with modesty, 
gravity, and in silence, take off their dress. 



CHAPTER II. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OFFICERS. 

Aeticle I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

At the Altar. 

1. The altar should be decorated according to the 
solemnity of the festival. 

2. Six candlesticks with candles, and the cross with 
image of the Crucified, in the middle, prominently lo- 
cated. 

3. Relic-cases, with relics or flowers, between the 
candlesticks. 

4. The Antipendium and the canopy of the Taber- 
nacle of the color of the vestments. 

5. The altar cards. 

6. The book-stand, with the missal opened at the 
proper place. 



188 HIGH MASS- 

On the Side-table, 

1. The table is to be covered with a linen cloth. 

2. A plate with the cruets containing wine and water, 
the finger-towel, and the hand-bell. 

3. The chalice with the purificator, paten, Host, pall, 
covered with the chalice-veil, on which is placed the 
burse having in it the corporal. 

4. The Gospel book, or missal, with marks in the right 
place. 

5. The veil for the sub-deacon should cover the cha- 
lice, and hang down on each side of the side-table. 

In the Sanctuary. 

1. A carpet on the steps and platform of the altar. 

2. A carpet on the platform of the celebrant's bench. 

3. The celebrant's bench may be covered with a 
green cloth. [3Ierati) 

In the Sacristy. 

1. On the sacristy altar the sacred vestments for the 
celebrant: viz., chasuble, stole, maniple, alb, cincture, 
and amice. 

2. On each side of the chasuble the dalmatics for the 
deacon and sub-deacon, the stole for the deacon, two 
cinctures, two albs, and two amices. The two maniples 
should be placed outside the dalmatics, as they are to 
be put on after the celebrant has put on the chasuble. 

3. In a convenient i3lace, the surplices for the master 
of ceremonies and for the three clerks ; also as many 
surj^lices as there are clergymen to assist. 

4. Two candlesticks with candles, for Ihe acolytes. 



I 



CENSER-BEAKER. 189 

6. The censer and the incense-boat. 
6. The fire ready for the censer. 
1. A number of torches for the elevation, if they are 
to be used. 

Aeticle II. • 
instruction Jbr the Censer-bearer. 

1. The censer-bearer goes to the sacristy a quarter of 
an hour before Mass, puts on his surplice, and, if no 
acolytes be present, assists the deacon and sub-deacon to 
vest.* 

2. In the beginning of Mass, he prepares the fire in 
the censer; and, at the end of the Confession, he ap- 
proaches the altar, and goes up to the platform, hands 
incense-boat to the master of ceremonies, and when the 
incense is put in, and blessed, he adjusts the cover of the 
censer, and hands it to the deacon ; he takes the boat in 
his left hand, and goes down holding his right hand on 
his breast.f 

* Should the clergy pi'oceed to the altar in solemn procession, pre- 
ceded by the cross, the censer-bearer will have incense blessed by the 
celebrant (or by the Bishop if present) before leaving the sacristy ; 
and then, with smoking censer, will walk immediately before the cross- 
bearer. iCcerem. Epis.y lib, ii., ch. viii.) 

t As the censer-bearer moves eithejr alone or with the clergy, he car- 
ries the censer in his right hand, holding it at the top just under the 
chain-holder, having previously pulled the cover-chain sufficiently 
high fhat the fire may burn. Unless there is another clerk for the 
incense-boat, he carries it in his left hand, otherwise he keeps his left 
hand extended on his breast, as he moves along modestly and gravely. 
Should there be two censer-bearers, the one at the left carries the 
censer in his left hand. In making a genuflection, while holding the 
censer, he will so raise his hand that the censer will not touch the 
floor. When his hands are not employed, they should be joined. 
When incense is to be put in the censer, with his left hand he will 



190 HIGH MASS. 

3. He stands near the deacon, whilst he is incensing 
the celebrant, and bows to the priest both before and 
after ; then takes the censer in his right hand (he should 
make a genuflection, if he is obliged to pass before the 
altar, to put away the censer, and the Blessed Sacrament 
is present), puts it in its proper place, and returns to the 
choir. 

4. When all the prayers are sung, he goes to prepare 
the censer ; and, as soon as the priest has finished the 
Gospel (unless there be a long tract), he goes to the 
altar, to have incense put in and blessed ; then, holding 
the censer in his right hand, and the boat in his left, he 
descends to the floor, and goes before the acolytes, in 

present the boat to whom he should; then, with the sacae hand, he 
takes from his right the top of the censer's chains, and brings it to 
his breast, and with his right he takes the censer's chains near the top 
of the cover, and raises the censer suflB.ciently high that he who is to 
put incense in it may easily do so. After the blessing, if a blessing is 
to be given, he lowers the censer, and takes it in his right hand at the 
top. When the censer-bearer puts incense in it, he will hold the 
chains at the top, and also near the cover with his left hand, and with 
his right will put in incense. If he presents the censer to one of the 
ministers who is to give it to some one else, he will present it with his 
right hand. If to the officiating priest, or to a minister who is to in- 
cense, he will present the top with his right hand, and the middle of 
the chains near the cover with his left. If to the celebrant or officiat- 
ing priest, and the Eubrics require it, he will kiss first the top of the 
censer, and then the right hand of the receiver. When he receives 
back the censer, he does so with bis right hand. To incense in a 
proper manner, having lowered the cover of the censer, he takes the 
top of the chains in his left hand, and brings it to his breast ; with the 
fingers of his right hand he takes the chains close to the cover, and 
brings it as high as his eyes ; then he lowers it, and stretches his arm, 
while he raises it again towards the one whom he is incensing, causing 
the censer to swing forward, and then lowers it again towards himself. 
He will repeat the same as often as he is to give throws, or swings. 
He bows before and after incensing. This manner of incensing is the 
same practised in Kome and in Italy, in well-regulated churches. 



CENSER-BEARER. 191 

tlie middle of the choir, before the altar, at some dis- 
tance from the steps, and stands between the acolytes. 
When the master of ceremonies gives the sign, he makes 
a genuflection, then bows to the choir, together with 
the officiating ministers ; passes the first acolyte, and 
goes on the left of the deacon, a little in the rear, so 
that he may be opposite the first acolyte. 

5. At the proper time he gives the censer to the 
master of ceremonies, and takes it again in the same 
manner ; he raises the lid of it a little, and swings it, in 
order to keejD the coals alive, having to use it to incense 
the priest. 

6. At the end of the Gospel, he approaches the deacon, 
and presents him the censer, making with him the usual 
bows before incensing the celebrant, and after he takes 
it, makes a genuflection to the altar, and puts it in its 
place. He then goes to his place, makes a genuflection 
behind the sub-deacon, and remains there ; he bows at 
the word Demn^ if the Credo is sung. 

7. Towards the end of the Credo^ he goes to prepare 
the censer, and is i-eady at the altar after the oblation of 
the chalice. The incense is put in as usual ; he takes 
the incense-boat and places it upon the side-table,* and 
remains there at the Epistle side, with his hands joined 
before the breast. He attends the deacon whilst he is 
incensing the celebrant, the choir, and sub-deacon ; and 
he stands at his left hand, a little in the rear, making 
the bows and genuflections at the same time with him. 
He receives the censer from the deacon, and when he 
arrives at his place behind the celebrant, incenses him 
twice ; then he incenses the acolytes once each ; he goes 



*The technical name is credentia. 



192 HIGH MASS. 

then to the entrance of the choir, and incenses the 
people thrice, once in the middle, then on the left, and 
last on the right, making the usual bows both before 
and after, and the genuflections to the altar, passing and 
repassing. He then puts the censer in its place. 

8. He again prepares the censer, and a little before 
the elevation, approaches the altar at the Epistle side, 
to the right of the master of ceremonies, to have the 
incense put into the censer ; when that is done, he kneels 
on the floor, and, at the elevation of the sacred Host, 
incenses it three times, making a low bow, both before 
and after. He does the same at the elevation of the 
chalice. [Rub. Miss., part ii.) After this, he makes a gen- 
uflection, puts away the censer, and returns to the altar. 

9. Here his duty ends, unless the acolytes remain 
holding the torches until communion ; in which case he 
takes the veil from the subdeacon at the proper time, 
and, after folding it, lays it on the side table. 

10. After receiving the I^ax from the one next to him 
in the choir, or from the master of ceremonies, accord- 
ing to diflerent circumstances, he takes the chalice-veil 
to the Gospel side, presents at the proper time the cruets 
for the ablutions, and returns to his place, after putting 
every thing on the table. 

11. After the JPax, if the clergy communicate, he 
takes the veil of the chalice, and communion cloth, 
passes to the Gospel side, and kneels on the floor. 
After the " Indulgentiam," he kneels on the lateral 
edge of the platform, to extend and hold the cloth with 
the master of ceremonies. After communion, he goes 
down, makes a genuflection with the master of ceremo- 
nies, and proceeds to the side-table, to present the 
cruets, as was said above. 



ACOLYTES. 193 

The censer-bearer makes a genuflection on one knee, 
when he goes from the choir, or returns to it ; when he 
leaves or approaches the altar, after the consecration 
only, not before it; in passing from one side of the 
altar to the other. 

When the incense is not blessed, the censer is held in 
the left hand ; otherwise in the right, and the boat in 
the left. When it is carried for any particular function, 
viz. : when the Gospel is sung, or in processions, the cen- 
ser-bearer puts his little-finger in the ring of the small 
cover, and the thumb through that of the large cover. 
On other occasions — for instance, when he gOes to have 
incense put into it, &c. — it is usual to hold it by the 
chains below the small cover, with the large cover a lit- 
tle raised, except in the act of incensing. 

Aeticle III. 

Instruction for the Acolytes. 

1. The acolytes, who should be of equal size {Ccerem, 
Episc.lib. i.), put on their surplices a quarter of an hour 
before Mass, and prepare, and take lo the altar whatever 
is necessary ; they assist the deacon and sub-deacon in 
vesting, after they have lighted the candles on the altar 
(unless some other person do this), one on one side, the 
other on the other ; beginning from the candle nearest 
to the cross; and in putting tliem out, they begin with 
the furthest. If there be only one to light them, he will 
begin on the Epistle side, and end with those on the 
Gospel side ; and vice versa., in extinguishing them. 

They must take care not to let the wax fall upon the 
altar cloth. 

2. The second acolyte lights the candles in the sacristy* 



194 HIGH MASS. 

3. When the celebrant is vested, they put the mani- 
ples on the deacon and sub- deacon, presenting them first 
to be kissed. 

4. At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, they 
take their candles, and meeting together, make a bow to 
the cross, or to the chief picture in the sacristy, then with 
their eyes modestly cast down, with a moderate pace, 
they go before the clergy to the altar. {Rub. Miss. 
part ii.) 

5. The first acolyte, at the right of his companion, 
holds the knob of the candlestick with his right hand, 
and the foot with his left ; the second with his left holds 
the knob, and the foot with his right. [Ccerem. JEpisC 
ibid.) 

6. When they arrive at the altar, they make a genu- 
flection on the floor ; they then separate, and go to the 
corners of the steps, and stand facing each other. 

7. When the sacred ministers have arrived, they turn 
towards the altar, make with them a genuflection, and 
then go to j)lace their candles on the table. [JRub., ib.) 
Turning towards the altar, they kneel down, with their 
hands joined, and answer in a low voice to the priest ; 
at the end of the Confession, they rise, and stand near 
the table. 

Whenever the sacred ministers go to sit down, the 
acolytes raise the dalmatic and chasuble over the back 
of the seat, so that they may not sit upon them ; this, 
however, depends upon its situation ; should it be 
necessary to pass before the celebrant, they bow to 
him. If the celebrant makes a genuflection during the 
Epistle or Gospel, they do the same ; and they make 
the usual signs of the cross at the jSequetitia jScmcti 
JEvangelii. 



ACOLYTES. 195 

If the deacon and siib-deacon use the folded chasuble, 
the second acolyte, during the singing of the prayer, 
takes off the subdeacon's chasuble, and puts it on again, 
after he has kissed the celebrant's hand. In like manner 
he takes off that of the deacon, while the priest is read- 
ing the Gospel ; the first acolyte puts on him the large 
stole, and takes it off after removing the book for the 
JPost Communio; and then the second acolyte puts on 
him the folded chasuble. 

8. Whilst the celebrant is putting incense into the 
censer, they take their candlesticks, and the censer- 
bearer having descended from the altar, they follow him 
to the middle of the choir ; he then goes between them, 
they make a genuflection to the altar, and salute the 
choir, together with the sacred ministers. In these, and 
in similar actions, uniformity as to manner and time is 
requisite, that they may appear as one person moving 
and bowing. 

9. Whilst the sub-deacon is at the place where the 
Gospel is usually sung {Rub. Miss., part ii.), the first 
acolyte places himself at his right, and the second at his 
left, in a straight line, facing the left part of the choir. 
During this time, they never kneel down (Huh. Jliss., 
part i.), neither do they make the sign of the cross, but 
remain motionless. Then on each side of the sub- 
deacon they go to the place where the Gospel is to be 
sung. 

10. At the end of the. Gospel, they go to the middle 
of the choir, three or four steps from the lowest front 
step of the altar, according as the space will allow, and 
make there a genuflection with the deacon, and then 
return to the side table. Having placed there the can- 
dlesticks, they remain standing, and kneel at the Incar- 



196 HIGH MASS. 

natus^ on one knee, when it is repeated by the priest; 
and on both, when it is sung, 

11. When the subdeacon takes the chalice, the second 
acolyte folds the veil ; the first follows the sub-deacon 
with the cruets and towel {Hub. Miss.^ part ii.) places 
all upon the altar, and presents the cruets to the sub- 
deacon. When the wine and water are put into the 
chalice, he takes them back, and remains standing at his 
place. 

12. Whilst the deacon is incensing the celebrant, they 
j)repare the water to wash his hands. The first alcolyte 
takes the towel ; the other the cruet and basin. When 
the deacon has done incensing, they attend to the wash- 
ing of the celebrant's hands {JRub.^ ibid.), bowing to him 
both before and after. They then put everything on 
the side table, and remain there standing. 

13. They bow to the censer-bearer both before and 
after being incensed ; and the first alcolyte bows to his 
companion before being incensed. 

14. At the commencement of the Preface, they go to 
the sacristy, to light the torches, and return at the 
Sanctus {Hub., ib., tit. vii.) ; and both enter together in 
the middle of the choir before the altar ; they make a 
genuflection, then bow to the choir, and to each other, 
and kneel at some distance apart, in a straight line. 

15. After the elevation, if the clergy do not communi- 
cate, and it is not a privileged feast, according to the 
Rubrics, they meet together, make a genuflection, then 
bow to the choir, and take away the torches. Other- 
wise, they remain with the torches, kneeling until after 
communion. {Hub., ib.) 

16. The first acolyte takes the veil off of the sub-dea- 
con at the proper time, and folds it, and lays it on the 



ACOLYTES. 197 

table. They bow when the celebrant is communicat- 
ing. 

17. The first acolyte takes the cruets to the altar at 
the proper time for the ablutions ; and, in the mean 
time, the second takes the veil of the chalice to the 
other side of the altar, making a genuflection in passing 
and repassing. If they hold the torches till after com- 
munion, the censer-bearer supplies their place. 
" 18. During the blessing, at the end of Mass, they 
kneel down on both knees; at the beginning of the 
Gospel, they rise and make the sign of the cross on 
themselves, as usual, at the Initium Sancti JEvangelii. 

If the clergy remain in choir after the Gospel, the 
acolytes take the candles, go together to the middle, 
make a genuflection and, with the sacred ministers, bow 
to the choir. 

19. Towards the end of the Gospel, they take the 
candlesticks and go to the middle ; they make a genu- 
flection at the words, Et verhum, caro^ or at the end of 
any other Gospel, and move towards the sacristy ; there 
they bow to the cross, and with the candlesticks in their 
hands wait until the sacred ministers arrive, and then 
make a bow together. They put out their candles 
afterwards, and assist the deacon and sub-deacon in 
taking ofl" the maniple and the folded chasuble, if they 
use them. When the celebrant has taken off the vest- 
ments, they assist the deacon and sub-deacon to disrobe, 
and then go to put out the candles on the altar, unless 
some other person do it. 

The acolytes remain always standing by the side-table, 
except when they have to do something, as on the 
occasions mentioned above. Whilst the celebrant is 
singing, or reading, they keep their hands joined before 

17* 



198 HIGH MASS. 

their breast ; at other times they keep them folded. In 
the choir the bow is generally made, first on the Gospel 
side, then on the Epistle side, beginning always by the 
greater dignity. In holding the torches, or carrying 
them, they should hold them always on the outside ; 
that is, the first acolyte being always on the right hand 
of the other, holds the torch in his right hand, and his 
companion holds his torch in his left. When one hand 
only is occupied, the other is held open upon his breast. 
When they present anything to the celebrant, they kiss 
it before they present it ; and also when they receive it 
from him (except in Masses for the dead). If they pass 
before the altar in going for the torches, they make a 
genuflection. Should they communicate in time of 
Mass, after the deacon and sub-deacon, and the priests, 
if any communicate, they make a genuflection on one 
knee, before and after communion. During their com- 
munion, they hand their torches to others. 

Aeticle IV. 

Duty of the Master of Ceremonies. 

1. The Master of Ceremonies should be acquainted 
with the duties of all the clergy, and be attentive to 
their performance, making signs to them, but not pulling 
or pushing them ; and in case some mistake be not of 
much importance, it is better to let it pass. 

2. He should go to the sacristy, a quarter of an hour 
beforehand, and after a short prayer, put on his surplice, 
and prepare the chalice, together with the pyx (in case 
the clergy communicate) and put in as many particles 
as there are persons to communicate. He prepares two 
Missals with the marks at their proper places, and takes 



i 



MASTER OF CERMONIES. 199 

all to the side-table, which should be covered with a 
white cloth — JRuh. Hiss., part ii. — and there, aided by 
the acolytes, he arranges everything : he should see that 
the cruets are there prepared, together with the towel, 
the bell, the censer with the incense-boat, the torches 
for the elevation, &c. He leaves one Missal on the 
table ; the other he places on the book-stand at the 
Epistle side ; he opens it at the Mass of the day, and 
covers the table with a veil of the same color as the 
vestments which are to be used. 

3. He gives notice in time to the clergy that are to 
officiate, and with the acolytes assists them in vesting. 
He does not present the maniple to the deacon and sub- 
deacon,. nor the folded chasuble, when they are used, 
until the celebrant is vested. 

4. When it is time, he gives notice to the acolytes to 
move towards the sanctuary ; when the clergy have 
passed on, he makes a sign to the officiating clergy to 
proceed ; they bow to the cross, and he precedes them, 
without either cap, or calotte, on his head ; which is to 
be observed in all other functions. (Cong. Hit. I'Zth Jul., 
1734.) He gives holy water to the sub-deacon and deacon. 

5. If there be any steps to ascend in going to the 
altar, the master of ceremonies raises the border of the 
celebrant's alb. When the officiating clergy enter the 
choir, or arrive at the altar, he receives the caps from 
the deacon and sub-deacon, and after the genuflection, 
places them in order on the bench where they are to 
sit. He then kneels down at the Epistle side, with his 
face turned to the Gospel side, and answers the cele- 
brant in a low voice, making the usual signs of the cross, 
and bows. 

6. At the end of the Confession, he goes up to the 



200 HIGH MASS. 

altar with the mmisters, to have the incense put in ; 
and comes down again to the Epistle side. When the 
celebrant is incensing that side, he takes off the Missal, 
and afterwards replaces it, without making any genu- 
flection. . 

7. If in time, after the incensing of the altar and the 
celebrant, he points out the beginning of the Introit^ as 
he should do, whenever he attends to the book, raising 
or lowering it as may be necessary, and pointing out 
what is to be read or sung, turning the leaves, &c. 

8. When the celebrant has said the Kyrie eleison^ if 
the singing is to continue for any length of time, the 
master of ceremonies invites him to go and sit down on 
a bench prepared, not on chairs ( Goerem. JEpisc.^ lib. i.,) 
as is expressly ordered by the Sac. Gong. Hit. I7th 
Sept., 1822. He descends to the floor, aud with his 
hands modestly folded before his breast, stands at the 
right hand of the deacon ; he should observe the same 
at the Gloria and Credo ^ whilst the clergy are sitting. 

9. When the choir is singing the last Kyrie^ he makes 
a moderate bow, to invite the ministers to the altar, 
and he goes to the Epistle side. When the ministers 
do not sit, during the singing of the Kyrie^ he gives 
them notice to go to the middle of the altar, and to 
stand in a line, one after the other ; when the Gloria in 
excelsis Deo is intoned, he directs them to go on each 
side of the celebrant to recite it with him. 

10. When they have said the Gloria in excelsis^ he 
gives them notice to sit down ; but not whilst the choir 
is singing, Adoranius te^ Gratius agimus tibi^ Jesu 
Christe^ Sicscipe deprecationem nostram. When they 
are seated, by a moderate bow, he gives them notice to 
take off their caps, whilst the choir is singing the above- 



MASTKIt OF CEliEMONIES. 201 

mentioned words, Adoramics te^ &c. ; during which time 
he bows to the altar. 

11. At the Cum Sancto Spiritu^ he makes them a 
sign to go to the altar, and he goes to the Missal to find 
the prayers which are to be sung, pointing them out to 
the celebrant, and turning the leaves of the Missal. 

12. At the beginning of the last prayer, he goes to 
the side-table, takes the Missal in both hands, so as to 
turn the opening of it to his right, and presents it to the 
sub-deacon, bowing both before and after. He then 
places himself at his left, standing a little in the rear, 
and at the conclusion of the last prayer, at the words 
Jesum Christum^ he bows, and goes to the middle of the 
altar with the sub-deacon, makes a genuflection, salutes 
the choir, returns to the same place, and points out the 
Epistle, supporting his left whilst he is singing. He 

I makes a genuflection at the words In nomine Je&u^ &c., 
« and bows at the names of Jesus and Mary, and of the 
I saint whose feast is celebrated; giving notice to the 

choir, immediately before, to kneel down, or take off" 

their caps. 

13. When the Epistle is finished, he accompanies the 
sub-deacon to the middle of the altar, makes a genu- 
flection and bows to the choir, then goes with him to 
the Epistle side, to receive the celebrant's blessing. He 
receives the Missal from the sub-deacon, and gives it to 
the deacon, at the beginning of the Gospel. When the 
celebrant has recited the Gospel, he goes up to the plat- 
form, or to the highest step at the Epistle side, to have 
incense put in, and he hands the incense-box, open, to 
the deacon. 

Should the choir sing a Sequentia^ or long Tracts he 
invites the ministers to sit down, and he stands near the 



202 HIGH MASS. 

bench, as at the Gloria. At the end of it he makes a 
sign to rise, and goes to the Epistle side to have incense 
put in. 

During the Ferial days in Lent, the ministers kneel 
at the words, Adjuva nos Deus^ on the edge of the 
platform, so that it is well to have the incense put in be- 
fore, to give time to the deacon to say the Munda cor 
meum. And as the organ is not played on those days, 
he. can request the choir to prolong their chant, so as to 
have time to perform these ceremonies without con- 
fusion. 

14. Whilst the deacon is receiving the celebrant's 
blessing, the master of ceremonies stands at the Epistle 
side, with his face towards the altar. He then places 
himself at the right hand of the deacon, and makes a 
genuflection with all the other ministers, and goes to the 
Epistle side, always at the right hand of the deacon, 
a little in the rear ; he presents him the censer after the 
Sequentia Sancti Evangelii^ he takes it again after the 
Missal is incensed, gives it to the censer-bearer, and re- 
mains at the side of the deacon to turn the leaves of the 
Missal. 

If it be necessary to make a genuflection, or bow, 
during the singing of the Gospel, he makes it towards 
the altar, which will serve as a notice to the celebrant. 

15. At the end of the Gospel, he goes to the Epistle 
side, and there makes a genuflection with the others. 
He receives the Missal from the sub-deacon, with the 
usual bows, and places it on the side-table, then returns 
to the Epistle side, and remains there until the Credo is 
recited, he bows at the same time with the celebrant, 
and also makes the sign of the cross with him. 

16. When the celebrant says, Et incarnatus est, the 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 203 

master of ceremonies makes a genuflection on one knee 
only, and at the end of the Credo^ makes a sign to sit 
down ; he stands, in order to give notice when they are 
to take off their caps. When the Incarnatus est is 
sung by the choir, he kneels on both knees, together 
with the acolytes and censer-bearer, the sacred ministers 
take off their caps. In the Masses of Christmas and the 
feast of the Annunciation, all kneel down at those 
words; he, therefore, should prepare cushions for the 
occasion. 

17. After Et homo /actus est^ he makes a sign to the 
deacon to come for the burse, and after giving it to him, 
he returns to the bench of the sacred ministers. At the 
words, St vitam venturi^ &c., or a little before, he gives 
notice to the celebrant and others to go to the altar, 
and goes to the Epistle side. 

18. When the celebrant has said the Oremus^ at the 
Offertory^ he makes a sign to the sub-deacon to make 
a genuflection, and go to the side-table. When there, 
he puts upon him the veil, letting it hang down some- 
what lower on the right than on the left. He accom- 
panies him to the altar, taking the pyx with him from 
the side-table ; he assists in uncovering the chalice, and 
when the sub-deacon has taken the paten, he should 
have the incense put in as usual. 

19. He afterwards goes to the Epistle side, and when 
the celebrant is incensing the cross or the Epistle side, 
he passes to the Gospel side, making a genuflection in 
the middle, and removing the Missal, goes down to the 
floor. After the celebrant has incensed that side, he 
replaces, and remains there to attend to the book, 
pointing to the prayers, and turning the leaves. 

20. At the end of the Preface, he gives notice to the 



204 HIGH MASS. 

deacon to go up on the platform to the right of the 
celebrant, to recite the Sanctus. At the Te igitur^ the 
deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, and the master 
of ceremonies to the Epistle side, both making a genu- 
flection in the middle, as they pass. The master of cere- 
monies remains there until the words. Qui pridie quam 
pateretur • when after putting incense in the censer, he 
kneels down with the censer-bearer, and, at the eleva- 
tion, rings the bell three distinct times. He makes a 
low bow with the censer-bearer, both before and after 
each elevation. 

21. After this, he rises, and remains there, or goes to 
the top step, near the altar, until the Nobis quogue pec- 
catoribus, and then passes to the other side, making a 
genuflection in the middle, always behind the sub-dea- 
con. 

22. When the deacon goes from the left side of the 
celebrant, the master of ceremonies takes his place, 
makes a genuflection with the celebrant and deacon, 
who should be at the right hand of the celebrant. The 
master of ceremonies remains at the left, attending to 
the Missal, until the Agnus Dei, making the genuflec- 
tions with him, and turning the leaves, &g. 

23. Before the JPater Noster is commenced, he makes 
a sign to the deacon to make a genuflection and go be- 
hind the priest, on the usual step ; and at the words, 
Dhnitte nobis, he again giv'es notice to the deacon and 
sub-deacon to make a genuflection, and go up to the al- 
tar at the Epistle side ; the sub-deacon leaves there the 
paten, and takes off the veil, the master of ceremonies 
makes him a sign to make a genuflection there, and re- 
turn to his place on the floor. The deacon remains at 
the right of the celebrant, and he at the left, until the 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 205 

Pax Domini is sung, at which time he gives the sub- 
deacon notice to make a genuflection at his place, and 
come up to the left of the celebrant, where he makes 
again a genuflection, and says the Agnus Dei. [Huh. 
Miss.^ part ii.) The master of ceremonies makes a genu- 
flection at the same time, goes down to the floor, and 
waits to accompany the sub-dea<ion, when he goes to 
give the Pax to the choir, beginning at the Gospel side, 
giving it to the first in dignity, and then passing to the 
Epistle side, making a genuflection in the middle. 

24. When this ceremony is over, he returns to the 
altar, makes a genuflection on the floor with the sub-dea- 
con, and receives the Pax from him, bowing both be- 
fore and after. He then gives it to the first acolyte, or 
to the censer-bearer, when he assists at the side-table in 
place of the acolytes, who are occupied in holding the 
torches. He remains after this, in his usual place, at the 
Epistle side, until the celebrant has communicated. 

If the clergy communicate, the sub-deacon covers the 
chalice, after the celebrant has received the precious 
blood. The two sacred ministers make a genuflection 
and change places. The deacon uncovers the pyx, and 
they both again make a genuflection with the celebrant. 
After thii, the deacon stands upon the highest step at 
the Epistle side, facing the Gospel side, and bowing 
lowly, he recites the Conjiteor^ and the celebrant, turn- 
ing on the platform, towards the deacon, says the Mise- 
reatur and Indulgentiam^ making the sign of the cross 
over those who are to communicate, and holding his left 
hand on his breast. When the deacon is about to say 
the Confiteor, the sub-deacon retires to the highest step 
on the Gospel side, with his face turned towards the 
deacon, and with his bands joined ; he remains there till 

18 



206 HIGH MASS. 

aftei: thre Indulgentiam ; both of them then change 
places, making a genuflection as they pass the middle of 
the altar, one behind the other, at the same time with 
the celebrant, and place themselves by the side of the 
celebrant, the deacon at the Gospel side, the sub-deacon 
at the Epistle side. 

If the sacred ministers communicate, after the Indul- 
gentiam^ they kneel upon the edge of the platform in 
front of the celebrant, after communion, they make a 
genuflection in the same place, and place themselves by 
the side of the celebrant as mentioned above, taking the 
communion-cloth from those who hold it, as they pass, 
and giving it back when they have passed. The deacon 
takes the paten, and holds it at a just distance below 
the sacred particle, and accompanies the priest's hand in 
giving communion. The sub-deacon stands near the 
priest, with his hands joined, and face turned towards 
the people, during the communion ; at the end of which, 
the censer-bearer takes the communion-cloth, and places 
it on the side-table, and the master of ceremonies a,ssists 
at the ablution on the Epistle side. 

25. When the celebrant returns to the Epistle side, 
the master of ceremonies stands by him at the Missal, 
which he closes after the last prayer, if there l)e not a 
particular Gospel at the end of Mass. In case, there be, 
after the deacon sings the Ite^ missa est, the master of 
ceremonies hands the Missal to the sub-deacon for 
greater convenience, to take to the other side. 

26. In time of the blessing, he and all the ministers 
kneel down, and rise after it is given. Towards the end 
of the last Gospel, he makes a sign to the acolytes to 
take the candlesticks, and go to the middle of the altar. 
They make a genuflection there at yerhwm caro factum, 



STJB-DEACON. 207 

est, or at the end of any other Gospel, and move towards 
the sacristy, followed by the clergy. He takes the caps 
of the sacred ministers, with whom, at the proper time, 
he makes a genuflection, and gives them their caps, pre- 
sentino; first to the deacon that of the celebrant. 

27. They return to the sacristy in the same order as 
they came ; he salutes the clergy at the same time with 
the sacred ministers, and having bowed to the cross, or 
picture, in the sacristy, he assists in disrobing the cele- 
brant, and then removes the things from the side-table. 

If the clergy remain in choir, the acolytes take the 
candlesticks at the end of the Gospel, and go to the 
middle. When the sacred ministers descend, all make 
a genuflection together, and salute the choir ; the master 
of ceremonies presents the caps, and they proceed in 
the above-mentioned order to the sacristy. 

The sacred ministers make a genuflection on the floor, 
when they first come to the altar before Mass, and at 
the end before they leave the sanctuary ; at other times 
they make it on the step, as far as practicable. 

Aeticle v. 

Instruction for the Sub-deacon. 
f 

1. The sub-deacon should repair to the sacristy a 

quarter of an hour before Mass; and, after a short 
prayer, wash his hands, and put on the vestments, ex- 
cept the manijDle, or folded vestment, when it is used, 
which he puts on after the celebrant is vested. After 
assisting the celebrant to vest, he puts on his cap. 

2. On a sign made by the master of ceremonies, he 
bows before the picture in the sacristy, holding his cap 
in his hand ; he makes also a moderate bow to the cele- 



\ 



208 . HIGH IHAS8. 

brant, and then puts on his cap, and proceeds, with his 
hands joined, after the clergy, and before the deacon. 

3. He receives the holy water from the master of 
ceremonies, with his cap in his hand, and then puts it on. 
When he enters the choir, he goes to the left of the 
celebrant, gives his cap to the master of ceremonies, 
and proceeds with the other ministers. 

4. He makes a genuflection with the deacon before the 
altar, and answers with him during the Confession, mak- 
ing the sign of the cross, and bowing with the celebrant. 
He stands erect when the celebrant says the Confiteor ; 
bows moderately, when he says, Misereatur vestri / and 
bows profoundly, when he recites the Conflteor ; turn- 
ing a little towards the celebrant, at the words, Et tihi 
Pater ^ and JEk te I^ater. {Hub. Miss., part ii.) He stands 
upright, when the celebrant says, Indulgentiam j and 
again bows moderately at the Deus tu cor}.versus, until 
the Or emus. 

He holds his hands joined before his breast, except 
when he sits down, or is engaged : when he performs 
some sacred rite with his right hand, he keeps his left 
open upon his breast ; and when the priest makes a low 
bow, or a genuflection, he also bows, or makes a genu- 
flection, and supports the priest's arm as he rises. 

6. When the celebrant has said the Oremus, he goes 
up to the altar with him, raising a little the extremity 
of his alb. When the celebrant incenses the altar, he 
raises the chasuble with his hand, and makes a genuflec- 
tion every time he passes before the cross. {Hub., ib., iv.) 
When the celebrant returns the censer to the deacon, he 
goes down to the Epistle side, and stands at the left of 
the deacon facing the celebrant, and makes with him a 
low bow, both before and after incensing. 



SUB-DEACON. 



509 



6. After that, he goes to the Epistle side, and stands 
on the step below that on which the deacon stands at 
his right, so that, with the celebrant and deacon who 
stands at his right, an imperfect semicircle may be 
formed. 

7. He makes the sign of the cross at the beginning 
of the Introi% and answers to the Kyrie^ and remains 
there, or goes to sit down {Rub. Miss., part i.), accord- 
ing to the directions of the master of ceremonies, mak- 
ing a moderate bow to the altar, 

8. On notice given by the master of ceremonies, when 
the choir is at the last Kyrie, he goes with the deacon 
to the altar, the celebrant being between them ; they 
bow to the part of the choir nearest to them. When 
they arrive before the altar, he makes a genuflection at 
the same time with the deacon, on the lowest step, and 
then they stand one behind the other. {Rub. Miss.^ 
part ii.) 

9. He bows at the word Deo, when the celebrant 
sings the Gloria / then he goes up to the platform, to 
the left of the celebrant, and says the remainder of the 
Gloria with him. (Hub., ib.) He should take care not 
to say it faster than the celebrant. He ought also to 
bow and make the sign of the cross with him. 

10. At the end of the Gloria, he makes a genuflection 
with the deacon, and (at the right of the deacon, or be- 
fore him, according to the situation of the bench, or 
choir) goes to sit down. He takes his cap, makes a 
moderate bow with the deacon to the celebrant, and 
then sits down at his left ; puts on his cap, keeps his 
hands open on his lap, and takes off his cap, when di- 
rected by the master of ceremonies. 

If the choir is singing a verse, at which it is necessary 

18* 



210 HIGH MASS. 

to bow, whilst he is going to the bench, he stops, and 
bows towards the altar. 

11. At the sign made by the master of ceremonies, 
he rises, goes down from the bench, leaves his cap, makes 
the usual bow to the celebrant, and after two or three 
steps, salutes the choir, together with the deacon and 
celebrant ; first on the Epistle side, then on the Gospel 
side. 

12. When he arrives at the altar, he makes a genu- 
flection with the others, raises the celebrant's alb, as he 
goes up to the altar, and then stops at his place behind 
the deacon. 

13. After the Dominus vohiscum^ he goes behind the 
deacon at the Epistle side. (Rub.^ ib.) He bows with 
the celebrant during the prayers ; but does not answer 
Amen, which he should observe whenever the choir re- 
sponds. 

When Flectamus genua is to be said, the deacon sings 
it in the act of bending the knee, and the sub-deacon 
sings JLevate y and rises before the rest. All kneel 
down except the celebrant. [Huh., ib., lib. v.) If the 
deacon has on the folded chasuble, he will take it off, 
and put it on after receiving the celebrant's blessing. 

14. He takes the book, when it is presented by the 
master of ceremonies, bowing a little in the act of re- 
ceiving it. He rests the upper part of the Missal on 
his breast, holding it below with both hands {Hub., ib., 
lib. vi., n. 4), with the edge to his left, and turning 
towards the altar, he waits until the celebrant has said 
the words, Jesuni Christum • when they occur in the 
conclusion, he bows at them, and then goes to the 
middle of the altar, makes a genuflection on the lowest 
Btep, bows to the choir at the Gospel side, and at the 



SUB-DEACON. 211 

Epistle side ; he returns behind the celebrant, opens the 
book, and sings the Epistle {Mich.^ ib.)^ and when these 
words occur, Jn nomine tTesu omne genu flectatur^ &c., 
he makes a genuflection, with one knee only, upon the 
step. 

15. When the Epistle is ended, he shuts the book, 
and holding it, as was mentioned above, he returns to 
the middle of the altar, makes a genuflection, salutes 
the choir, as he did before the Epistle, goes to the 
Epistle side, kneels upon the upper step, and kisses the 
celebrant's hand, which he places on the Missal. {Hub. 
ibid.) 

16. After receiving his blessing, he rises, gives the 
book to the Master of Ceremonies, and removes the 
Missal to the Gospel side {Rub. ibid., n. 5), making a 
genuflection in passing before the altar. 

IV. After placing the book upon the altar, he remains 
on the upper step with his face turned towards the 
Epistle side, and there answers to the priest, making 
the sign of the cross, and bowing with him, and turning 
the leaves, if necessary. He answers, Laus tibi Christe^ 
at the end, and goes upon the platform, and turns the 
book for the convenience of the celebrant, leaving room 
to spread the corporal. 

If the choir sings the Adjuva nos, the Veniy /Sancte 
Spiritus, &c., he kneels on the edge of the platform at 
the celebrant's left, until it be finished. {Hub. Miss., 
part i.) 

18. When the incense is put into the censer, and 
blessed, he goes down to the floor, and waits for the 
deacon. He makes a genuflection with the other minis- 
ters, salutes the choir, and proceeds before, or if the 
space will allow, at the left of the deacon, to the place 



212J HIGH MASS. 

where the Gospel is to be sung, and there stands be- 
tween the acolytes, holding the book open {Rub. Miss., 
part ii.), and leaning it upon his forehead or upon his 
breast, 'as may be more convenient for the deacon. 
Being occupied in holding the book, he does not bow, 
nor make a genuflection, when the name of Jesus 
occurs, although the others do. {Hub. Miss.., part i.) 

19. At the end of the Gospel, he takes the book open 
to the celebrant {Hub, ibid.)., by the shortest way (he 
does not make a genuflection, even if he pass before the 
Blessed Sacrament), and presents it to him to kiss, 
pointing out, with his right hand, the beginning of the 
Gospel, which was sung. He shuts the book, after the 
priest has kissed it, withdraws a little, salutes the cele- 
brant, and then goes down to the floor in front of the 
Epistle side, where, without making a genuflection, he 
gives the Missal to the master of ceremonies. 

20. At the intoning of the Credo., he stands behind 
the deacon, and having made a genuflection with him 
on arriving at the middle of the altar, he bows at the 
word Deum., and goes up to the celebrant's left, observ- 
ing tke same that was prescribed for the Gloria. {Hub. 
ibid.) 

21. At the Incarnatus est^ he makes a genuflection, 
and at the end of the Creed goes to sit down, as he did 
at the Gloria. When the Incarnatus est is sung, he 
takes off his cap, and bows moderately till Homo f actios 
est is finished. 

In the three Masses of Christmas,, and on the feast of 
the Annunciation, even if the office is not said on this 
festival, on account of its occurring on some privileged 
day, he kneels down with the other ministers, whilst the 
words JEt incarnatus.^ &c., are sung. 



SUB-DEACON. 213 

22. When the deacon goes for the burse, the subdea- 
con rises, and stands with his cap in his hand until the 
deacon has passed with the burse, and bowed to the 
celebrant ; then sits down, and puts on his cap. When 
the deacon returns to sit down, the subdeacon rises a 
little before, and sits down again simultaneously with 
him. 

The subdeacon may stand up while the deacon is pre- 
paring the corporal, according to the custom of many. . 
He takes off his cap whenever the master of ceremonies 
gives notice. 

23. At the end of the Credo^ when the sign is made, 
he returns with the other ministers to the altar, observ- 
ing what was prescribed at the end of the Gloria. 

24. When the celebrant says Oremus^ at the Offer- 
tory^ he bows, then makes a genuflection, and goes to 
the table, puts the veil upon his shoulders, takes the 
veil off the chalice, and gives it to the second acolyte ; 
he takes hold of the chalice at the knot with his left 
hand, covers it with the right end of the veil, places his 
right hand over it, goes upon the platform to the dea- 
con's right, and there places the chalice upon the altar. 
{Hub., ibid) 

When there is no Credo, he takes the burse upon the 
chalice. {Rub., ibid.) 

25. After the deacon has taken off the pall and paten, 
he wipes the chalice wdth the purifier, and presents it to 
the deacon. He receives the cruets from the acolyte, 
presents wine to the deacon, and receives back the cruet 
in his left hand. When the deacon has poured the wine 
into the chalice, he presents the cruet of water to the 
celebrant, and bowing a little toward him, says, Bene- 
dicite, Pater Meverende {Hub. Miss., ibid) ; but if he 



214: HIGH MASS. 

is a prelate, lie says, JBenedicite^ Reverendissime Pater, 
After the celebrant has blessed it, he pours it into the 
chalice, and gives back the cruets to the acolyte. {Mub.^ 
ibid.) 

26. He does not cover his hands with the veil before 
he receives the paten from the deacon ; after receiving 
it in his right hand, he covers it with the end of the 
veil, which is at his right, and then rests it against his 
breast, as he should do whenever he moves from, one 
place to another, when he is incensed, while he is kneel- 
ing, and when he responds to the Orate Fratres. He 
goes in front of the altar, makes a genuflection on the 
lowest step, and then remains standing until the words 
of the Pater Noster, Dimitte nobis debita nostra; hold- 
ing the paten on a level with his eyes, with his left 
hand under his right elbow. The end of the veil, at 
his left hangs down at his side.* 

27. When the deacon kneels at the elevation, he also 
kneels at his place, on the lowest step, until it is over. 
{Rub.., ibid.) 

28. At the words Dimitte nobis., he makes a genuflec- 
tion at his place, and goes up to the altar at the Epistle 
side, near the deacon, and presents him the paten. 
When the acolyte or censer-bearer has taken off the 
veil, he makes a genuflection there, and returns to the 
floor behind the celebrant : and without making another 
genuflection, stands there with his hands joined. {Rub., 
ibid.) 

29. When the celebrant says Pax Doraini., he makes 
a genuflection, and goes up to his left, makes there a 

«§. E. C, Nov. 12, 1831, has decreed that the sub-deacon should pro- 
ceed to say tlie Sanctus with the celebrant in churches where the cus- 
tom exists ; otherwise, he remains in his place. 



SUB-DEACON. 215 

genuflection with the others, and then bowing towards 
the Blessed Sacrament, says, Agnus Dei^ <fec., striking 
his breast at the Miserere nohis^ and at the end of the 
third he makes a genuflection, and returns where he was 
at first. {Huh.^ ib.) 

30. When the deacon comes to give him the Pax^ he 
salutes him both before and after, then makes a genu- 
flection at his place (at the same time that the deacon 
makes it on the platform), and, accompanied by the 
master of ceremonies, he proceeds to give the Pax to 
the clergy, beginning w^ith the first one on the more 
worthy side, and then on the other. [Rub.^ ibid.) Lay- 
ing his hands on the shoulders of the one to whom he 
gives it, he says, Pax tecum, bowing to each of them 
after having given it, but not before. If there be sev- 
eral rows of clergymen, he gives it to the first in each 
row, and makes his genuflection before the Blessed 
Sacrament when he passes in the middle of the choir. 

Should he have to give the Pax to prelates, he puts 
his hands under their elbow^s. 

31. After giving the Pax to the clergy, he returns to 
the middle of the altar, makes a genuflection on the 
step, and gives it to the master of ceremonies ; then 
goes up to the right of the celebrant, and there makes 
again a genuflection. {Pub., ibid.) 

32. At the Domine non sum dignus, he strikes his 
breast, and bows moderately to the Blessed Sacra- 
ment. He bows profoundly to the Blessed Sacrament 
whilst the celebrant is receiving both species. (Pub., 
ibid.) 

33. He uncovers the chalice at the proper time, makes 
a genuflection, and presents wine and water for both 
ablutions, observing the usual ceremonies. {Pub., ibid.) 



216 HIGH MASS. 

After giving the water, lie lays the purifier on the cele- 
brant's fingers. 

34. He gives back the cruets to the acolyte, and 
changes place with the deacon, making a genuflection 
only in the middle of the altar behind the deacon. 
When he comes to the Gospel side, he wipes the chalice 
and adjusts it in the usual manner, putting upon it the 
purifier, the paten with the pall, the veil, and lastly the 
burse, with the corporal in it ; then holding the chalice 
with his left hand, and placing his right upon the burse, 
he takes it to the table, makes a genuflection in the 
middle of the altar, and returns behind the deacon. 
(Hub. ibid.) 

35. After the Ite, missa est, or JBenedicamus Domi- 
no, whilst the celebrant is saying the JPlaceat, he goes 
up to the second step, and he kneels on the edge of the 
platform, at the words JBenedicat vos, and bowing, re- 
ceives the blessing. 

36. He rises and goes to the Gospel side, and there 
holds the card for the celebrant, or attends to the book, 
if necessary. [Muh.^ ib.) He does not make a genu- 
flection towards the altar, at the Verbmii caro, being 
obliged to hold the Gospel-card with both hands for the 
convenience of the celebrant, and for the same reason, 
he does not make the sign of the cross at Initium, Sancti 
Evangelii., &c. 

If any other Gospel is read, after the Ite^ missa est^ 
or JBenedicamus Dom,ino^ he receives the Missal from 
the master of ceremonies, makes a genuflection, and 
takes it to the Gospel side, and kneels down as w^as said, 
at the left of the deacon, upon the edge of the platform, 
to receive the blessing. He rises, and attends at the cele- 
brant's left, making the sign of the cross, genuflection, 



DEACON. 217 

&c. ; at the end, he shuts the Missal, and leaves it 
there. 

37. At the end of the Gospel, he goes upon the plat- 
form at the celebrant's left, and, on notice given by the 
master of ceremonies, bows to the cross, goes down to 
the floor with the other ministers, makes a genuflection 
with them, puts on his cap, and proceeds immediately 
after the clergy towards the sacristy. 

38. When in the sacristy, he stands at the left of the 
celebrant ; he salutes the clergy, bows to the picture, or 
cross in the sacristy, and to the celebrant, then takes off 
his maniple, and the folded vestment when it is used, and 
assists the celebrant to disrobe. 

If the clergy remain in the choir, he bows to them 
after having bowed towards the altar, then puts on his 
cap, and proceeds as above. 

Article V I. 
Instruction for ilie. Deacon, 

1. The deacon goes to the sacristy a quarter of an 
hour before Mass, makes a short prayer, and looks over 
the Gospel, and Ite^missa est^ or JBenedicamus Domino^ 
which he has to sing ; he then washes his hands, and 
puts on all the vestments, except the manijDle (and the 
folded vestment when it is us-ed), which he puts on 
after the celebrant is entirely vested. He assists him in 
vesting, handing him the sacred vestments, by turns 
with the sub-deacon. 

2. When the celebrant is vested, and has put on his 
cap, he also puts on his, and remains standing at the 
celebrant's right, with his hands joined, until the mas- 
ter of ceremonies gives the signal, he then descends 

19 



U^ 



218 HIGH MASS. 

with the other two ministers, bows with them to the 
cross, or image, with his cap in his hand, and again bows 
moderately to the celebrant, and, with his cap on and 
hands joined, proceeds after the sub-deacon. 

3. In entering the church, he receives the holy-water 
from the master of ceremonies, or from the sub-deacon, 
with his cap in his hand, and presents it to the cele- 
brant, bowing as usual, then makes the sign of the cross, 
and puts on his cap. 

4. He takes off his cap when he comes to the choir, 
waits for the celebrant, and goes to his right ; he gives 
his cap to the master of ceremonies, then receives the 
celebrant's cap with both hands, with the usual kisses, 
(except in Masses for the dead), and hands it to the 
master of ceremonies. 

5. He goes to the altar at the celebrant's right, makes 
a genuflection, answers with the sub-deacon, and makes 
the sign of the cross on himself, with the priest, &g. 
He bows moderately towards him when he says the 
Misereatur^ and makes a low bow towards the altar 
when he says the Confiteor^ turning a little towards the 
celebrant at the words, Et tihi Pater^ and Et te Pater. 
(Pub. Miss., part ii.) 

He rises at the Indulgentiam, and bows again at Peus 
tu conversus, continuing in this posture to the Or emus ^ 
inclusively. 

He generally holds his hands joined before his breast, 
except when he is sitting, or doing something. When 
he uses his right hand, he keeps his left upon his breast. 
When the celebrant makes a genuflection, if he be by 
his side, he makes it with him, and with one hand sup- 
ports his arm whilst he is rising ; if he holds the taper, 
he does not make a genuflection. 



DEACON. 219 

6. After the Oremus^ he goes up to the altar at the 
celebrant's right, raising the alb a little in front. He 
receives the incense-boat from the master of ceremonies, 
takes the spoon, kisses it, and presents it to the cele- 
brant, kissing his hand, and says, Benedicite^ Pater 
Mevereiide. If he be a Prelate, JBenedicite^ Reverendis- 
sime Pater. {Ruh.^ ib.) 

7. After the incense is put in, he receives the spoon 
from the celebrant, and kisses it, after kissing his hand. 
{Rub. ib.) He should observe this on similar occasions. 
When the incense is blessed, he takes the censer, hold- 
ing with his right hand the top of the chain, with his 
left the other extremity, and presents it to the celebrant, 
kissing first the lower part of the chain, then the right 
hand of the celebrant, which is placed between his own 
hands. {Rub. ib.) 

8. Whilst the celebrant is incensing the altar, the de?^ 
con stands a little in the rear at his right, and with his 
left hand holds up the back of the chasuble. He makes 
a genuflection every time he passes before the cross. 
{Rub. ib.) 

9. At the end of the incensing, he receives the censer 
from the celebrant, kissing his right hand, as above; 
then with the top in his left, and with his right holding 
the bottom of the chain near the cover, he descends to 
the floor at the Epistle side, and incenses the celebrant 
thrice, making a low bow both before and after ; he 
gives the censer to the censer-bearer, and goes up to the 
step, near the platform, to the celebrant's right. {Rub. 
ib) He points out the Introit., makes the sign of the 
cross with the celebrant, and answers at the Kyrie^ <fcc. 
He remains in the same place, or, if the master of cere- 
monies gives notice, he goes to sit down with the other 



220 HIGH MASS. 

sacred ministers, making first a bow towards the altar, 
from whatever place he is standing. {JRub. Miss.) 

10. At the last Kyrie^ if he is sitting, he retm'ns to 
the altar in the same manner as at the end of the Gloria 
and Credo. If he is not seated, at the sign made by 
the master of ceremonies, he goes behind the celebrant 
{Hub. Miss.^ part ii.), in the middle, on the step next to 
the platform, and at the word Deo in the Gloria^ he 
bows, and goes up to the celebrant's right, and contin- 
ues the Gloria with him [Huh. Miss., ib.), making the 
bows together, and at the end the sign of the cross ; he 
makes a genuflection with the rest, he goes before the 
celebrant at the sub-deacon's left to the seat. 

11. On arriving at the bench, he takes the celebrant's 
cap, and presents it with the usual kisses, he then takes 
his own cap, and bows to the celebrant at the same time 
Avith the sub-deacon, sits down, and puts on his cap. 
He keeps his hands open on his knees, and when the 
master of ceremonies gives notice, he takes off his cap 
and rests it on his right knee. 

12. Towards the end of the hymn, at the words, Cum 
Sancto Spiritu, <fec., he takes off his cap and rises, 
places his cap on the bench, receives the celebrant's, first 
kissing his hand, then the cap, and lays it on the bench. 
Going to the altar, he salutes the choir at the same time 
with the other ministers, first on the Epistle side, then, 
after a few steps, on the Gospel side, and at the cele- 
brant's right. 

13. When he comes before the altar, he makes a genu- 
flection on the first step, and raises the celebrant's alb ; 
he remains behind on the upper step, and after the 
jDo9ni?ius vobiscum, removes behind him to the Epistle 
side {Hub.y ibid.), without making a genuflection, or 



DEACON. 221 

bow ; and remains there whilst the celebrant is singing 
the prayers, bowing when he bows. 

If the Fleet amus genua is to be sung after the Oretnus^ 
the deacon sings it in the act of bending the knee, and 
rises, after the sub-deacon has sung Levate. {Hub., ih.) 

14. As soon as the celebrant terminates the last prayer, 
the deacon goes to his right on the upper step, and at 
the end of the Epistle, which the celebrant reads in a 
low voice, he answers, Deo gr alias, and remains there 
until the celebrant begins the Gospel. (Rub., ib.) 

15. On notice from the master of ceremonies he goes 
down to the floor, and receives from him the Missal, and 
holds it nearly on a level with his eyes, the edge of the 
book being at his left ; he salutes the clergy first on the 
Epistle side, then on the Gospel side, and goes to the 
middle of the altar, makes a genuflection on the lower 
step, then goes up and places upon the altar the closed 
book {Rub., ib,), with the edge towards the Gospel 
side ; and he remains there without repeating the genu- 
flection. 

If the deacon has on a folded vestment, at a signal 
from the master of ceremonies, whilst the celebrant is 
reading the Gospel, he comes down, takes it off assisted 
by an acolyte, and puts on the large stole, which he 
keeps on until he removes the Missal, at the Rost Coin- 
niunio; and then he puts the vestment on again. After 
putting on the large stole, he receives the Missal from 
the master of ceremonies, and proceeds as above. 

16. When the master of ceremonies directs, the in- 
cense is blessed ; then the deacon goes upon the upper 
step, kneels on the edge of the platform, and bowing 
profoundly, says ; " Munda cor meum, ac labia mea, 
Omnipotens Deus, qui labia Isaise Prophetse calculo 

19* 



222 HIGH MASS. 

mundasti ignito : ita me tua grata miseratione dignare 
mundare, ut Sanctum Evangelium tuum digne valeam 
nuntiare. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. Amen." 
After this prayer he rises, takes the book, and turning 
towards the celebrant (who also turns towards the 
deacon), kneels on the platform and says, Jube Dor)\ne 
benedicere. {Hub., ib.) 

17. He kisses the celebrant's hand placed on the book, 
after receiving his blessing ; then he rises, bows to the 
celebrant, and goes down to the floor ; he makes a gen- 
uflection at the sub-deacon's right, bows to the choir, 
and proceeds abreast with, or after the sub- deacon, to 
the place where the Gospel is to be sung : then he gives 
the sub-deacon the Missal open, and with his hands 
joined, he intones the Dominus vobiscum. After Se- 
quentia Sancti JSJvangelii, placing his left hand open on 
the book, with his thumb he makes the sign of the cross 
on the beginning of the Gospel, and then on himself, 

.putting his left hand on his breast. After this, he takes 
the censer, and incenses the book, first in the middle, 
then at the right, and lastly at the left ; he returns the 
censer to the master of ceremonies, and sings the Gos- 
pel with his hands joined. {Hub., ib.) He bows, and 
makes his genuflection, wherever it is prescribed. {Hub, 
Miss., part i.) 

18. Having finished the Gospel, he points out the text 
to the sub-deacon, and incenses the celebrant thrice as 
usual, from the Gospel side, making a low bow, both 
before and after. {Hub., ib.) 

19. He then gives the censer to the censer-bearer, 
and goes up to the second step, or to the top one, be- 
hind the celebrant, and makes a genuflection there, at 
the same time with the sub-deacon and censer-bearer. 



DEACON. 223 

When the celebrant intones the Credo^ he bows at the 
word Dewn^ and goes up to the celebrant's right, and 
observes all the ceremonies prescribed for the Gloria in 
excelsis; then he goes to his seat. {Huh. J[/^5S., part ii.) 

20. After the choir has sung JEt homo factus est, he 
rises, leaves his cap upon the bench, with his hands 
joined, bows to the celebrant, and goes to the table, 
takes the burse, holding it up wdth both hands, and 
keeping the open part of it towards his eyes. He bows 
to the celebrant as he passes him by, then to the choir, 
first at the Epistle side, next at the Gospel side ; after 
which he makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and 
goes up to the altar. 

21. After taking out the corporal, he places the burse 
at the Gospel side, and spreads the corporal ; then ad- 
justs the Missal for the convenience of the celebrant. 
(Hub., ib.) He makes a genuflection there, without 
putting his hands upon the altar, and goes to his seat, 
bowing to the celebrant before he sits down. Towards 
the end of the Credo, at the words ^t vitam, or a little 
before, he returns to the altar with the others, as at the 
end of the Gloria. 

In the three Masses on Christmas day, and on the day 
of the Annunciation, even if this festival be not then 
celebrated, all kneel when the hicarnatus est is sung. 

22. He bows when the celebrant says Orenius; then 
goes up to his right ; and when the sub-deacon brings 
the chalice, he uncovers it (if it be a Mass in which 
there is no Credo; he takes the burse, and spreads the 
corporal, takes ofi* the pall, and places it near the cor- 
poral), then takes the paten with the Host, and presents 
it, kissing first the paten and then the celebrant's hand. 
{Huh., ib.) 



224 HIGH MASS. 

23. If it is necessary to consecrate Hosts for the com- 
munion of the clergy, he uncovers the pyx, and during 
the oblation of the Host, he raises it up a little in his 
right hand, and with his left supports the celebrant's 
arm ; he then covers it, and places it upon the corporal, 
behind the foot of the chalice. When the sub-deacon 
has purified the chalice, he takes it in his left hand, and 
pours in the wine, and the sub-deacon pours the water. 
{JRub,^ ib.) 

24. After having wiped off the drops of wine and 
water from the side of the chalice, he takes it, holding 
it below the cup with his right hand, and the foot with 
his left, and presents it to the priest, with the usual 
kisses. He supports with his right hand the foot of the 
chalice, or the celebrant's arm (Hub., ib.), and with his 
left on his breast, he says with him, " Offerimus tibi, 
Domine, calicem salutaris, tuam deprecantes clementiam, 
ut in conspectu divinse majestatis tuae, pro nostra et 
totius mundi salute cum odore suavitatis ascendat. 
Amen." At the end, he covers the chalice with the 
pall, and puts the paten in the sub-deacon's right hand, 
and covers it with the right extremity of the veil. {Hub., 
ibid.) 

25. The incense is put in and blessed, as was explained 
above. When the celebrant incenses the offerings, the 
deacon raises the chasuble with his left hand, and places 
his right hand on the foot of the chalice. After the 
genuflection, he removes it from the middle towards the 
Epistle side, but not outside of the corporal ; after the 
incensing of the cross he puts it back in its place. (Hub., 
ib.) He makes a genuflection with the celebrant, and 
proceeds as at the Introit, 

26. After having incensed the celebrant, he incenses 



^ 



DEACON. 225 

the choir, beginning at the Gospel side, and ending at 
the Epistle side ; he makes a genuflection in the middle 
of the choir, in passing from one side to the other. 

27. In incensing, he makes a moderate bow to those 
he is going to incense ; and then incenses each one once; 
he bows to them when he is done. After incensing the 
choir at the Epistle side, he incenses the sub-deacon 
twice ; he then gives the censer to the censer-bearer, 
and goes up behind the celebrant, on the highest step, 
makes a genuflection, and turns, that he may be incensed 
by the censer-bearer. {Ruh,^ ib.) 

If there be prelates in the choir, they are incensed 
with a double swing of the censer, as the sub-deacon, 
and a bow is made both before and after. 

28. Whilst the Preface is sung, the deacon remains 
behind the celebrant; at the words Supplici confessione 
dicentes^ he goes up to the platform at his right, says 
with him the /Sanctus, makes on himself the sign of the 
cross at the JBenedictus^ passes to the left to turn the 
leaves of the Missal, and as he passes through the mid- 
dle he makes a genuflection on the edge of the platform. 

29. At the words, Quam ohlatioJietn^ the deacon goes 
to the celebrant's right, making a genuflection, as he 
passes through the middle; if the pyx be there, he 
places it before the celebrant, uncovers it, kneels on the 
platform during the elevation of the Sacred Host, raises 
the celebrant's chasuble with his left hand, and rises 
with him, after he has adored the sacrament, covers the 
j)yx, replaces it behind the chalice, kneels down again, 
and raises the celebrant's chasuble. 

30. When the celebrant is about to place the chalice 
on the altar, the deacon rises, covers it, makes a genu- 
flection with him, and returns to his left. He does not 



226 HIGH MASS. 

make the genuflection as he passes through the middle, 
but only after he has arrived at the celebrant's left, 
where he attends him at the Missal. 

31. At the words, Per quern hmc omnia, the deacon 
makes a genuflection, and goes to the right of the cel- 
ebrant ; at the words, Prmstas nobis, he uncovers the 
chalice, and makes a genuflection with the celebrant. 
After the words, Omnis honor et gloria, he covers it, 
makes a genuflection with the celebrant, and remains 
there till he begins the Pater. Then, having made a 
genuflection, he retires behind the celebrant, on the 
highest step. 

32. At the words, JSt dimitte nobis, the deacon makes 
a genuflection with the sub-deacon, and goes to the left 
of the celebrant, where, having received from the sub- 
deacon the paten, he wipes it with the purifier, kisses 
and presents it to the celebrant, kissing his hand. He 
then uncovers the chalice, makes a genuflection, covers 
the chalice again as soon as the celebrant has put into 
it the small particle of the consecrated Host, makes 
again a genuflection, bowing together with the celebrant, 
and says the Agnus Pei, striking his breast, after which 
he kneels at the right of the celebrant. 

33. After the celebrant has finished the first prayer, 
the deacon rises at the same time with the celebrant, 
kisses the altar outside of the corporal ; with his hands 
joined before his breast, receives from him the Pax, 
making to him a bow before and after, and answers, PJt 
cum spiritu tuo. Then, having made a genuflection, the 
deacon goes down as far as the last step, and standing 
on it, gives to the sub-deacon the Pax, makes to him a 
bow, goes up to the left of the celebrant, makes a gen- 
uflection, and remains there till after the last ablution. 



DEACON. 227 

Whilst the celebrant communicates under both species, 
the deacon bows profoundly. 

34. After the last ablution, the deacon carries the 
Missal to the Epistle side, making a genuflection at the 
same time with the sub-deacon as they pass before the 
middle. And when he uses the large stole, takes it off 
and puts on the folded chasuble. Then he goes on the 
highest step behind the celebrant, follows him when he 
goes to the middle, and returns to the Ej^istle side, 

35. When the celebrant has said Dominus vohiscum^ 
after the last prayer, the deacon turn&to the people, and 
sings, J?e, raissa est. 

When the Bertedicamus Domino or Hequiesccmt in 
pace is sung, the deacon does not turn round to the 
people. In Lent, when Sumiliate capita vestra Deo is 
to be sung, after the third prayer of the Post com- 
munio^ the celebrant having sung Orenms^ the deacon 
turns round to the people by his right hand, sings Su- 
miliate^ and turns again to the altar by the same right 
side. 

36. Whilst the celebrant says the Placeat^ the deacon, 
retiring towards the Epistle side, turns to the altar. 
When the celebrant says Denedicat vos, the deacon, 
kneeling on the edge of the platform, receives the bless- 
ing, making on himself the sign of the cross ; he then 
rises, makes with his thumb the usual crosses on his 
forehead, lips, and breast, at the beginning of the Gos- 
pel, and makes a genuflection at the words, PJt Verbum 
caro. 

37. After the Gospel, the deacon goes up to the right 
of the celebrant ; at the sign made by the master of 
ceremonies, he bows to the cross, descends with the rest 
below the steps, makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy. 



228 riiGa mass. 

if they remain in the sanctuary, j)resents the cap to the 
celebrant with the usual kisses, first of the cap, and 
secondly of the hand, receives from the master of cere- 
monies his cap, puts it on, and walks to the sacristy 
behind the sub-deacon. 

38. When arrived at the sacristy, the deacon takes 
off his cap, salutes the clergy, if they have also left the 
sanctuary, makes a bow to the crucifix and to the cele- 
brant, takes off his maniple (also the folded chasuble 
when used), heljDS the celebrant to disrobe, salutes him, 
and takes off his sacred vestments. 

When the sacred ministers have to pass from one side 
of the altar to the other, before the consecration, they 
make the genuflection in the middle ; but after the con- 
secration, they make it on each side near the celebrant, 
both before and after, without placing on the altar their 
hands, which they hold joined before their breast. 
Only at the Dimitte nobis they make the genuflection 
in the middle, before they go up to the altar. The first 
and last genuflection is to be made on the floor, below 
the lowest step ; all the others on the lowest step. 

Article VII. 
Instruction for the Celebrant. 

1. The priest who is to celebrate High Mass should 
foresee every thing that is to be sung, especially the 
Gloria., the prayers, the Preface, and the manner of 
singing them, according to the quality of the Mass, and 
the festival which is celebrated. 

2. At the proper hour, the celebrant having spent 
some time in prayer, and washed his hands, puts on the 



CELEBRANT. 229 

sacred vestments, attended by the ministers, who should 
have previously put on their own, 

3. The celebrant being vested, puts on his cap, and 
on notice given by the master of ceremonies, takes it 
off, goes below the steps, makes a bow to the crucifix, 
or to the principal image of the sacristy, salutes the 
sacred ministers at his right and at his left, covers his 
head, at the door of the sacristy takes off his cap, re- 
ceives the holy water from the deacon, makes the sign 
of the cross, puts on his cap, and, with his hands joined 
and his eyes modestly cast down, walks towards the 
sanctuary. 

If, on their way to the altar, where High Mass is to 
be celebrated, the celebrant pass before the high altar, 
he should make a profound bow to it, and in case the 
Blessed Sacrament be kept there, he should make a gen- 
uflection. If he pass before an altar whilst Mass is cel- 
ebrated, and in time of the elevation, as the bell rings, 
the celebrant, with the ministers on each side of him, 
should stop, and kneel on both knees till after the ele- 
vation. 

4. As the celebrant enters the sanctuary, he takes off 
bis cap, gives it to the deacon, makes a profound bow 
to the cross, or a genuflection, if the Blessed Sacrament 
be kept there, and begins the Confession^ having the 
deacon at his right and the sub-deacon at his left. 

If the clergy are already in the sanctuary, the cele- 
brant should salute them as he enters it. 

5. At the words, VoMs^ fratres — Et vos^fratres, the 
celebrant turns towards the deacon and sub-deacon. 
After the Confession^ he goes up to the platform, kisses 
the altar, puts incense thrice into the censer, saying, 
Ab illo benedicaris in ciijus ho7iore cremdberis. Amen: 

20 



230 HIGH MASS. 

and makes the sign of the cross on the censer with his 
right hand, holding the left on his breast. 

6. The celebrant, having received the censer from 
the deacon, makes a profound bow to the cross, or a 
genuflection to the Blessed Sacrament (if it is on the 
altar), in the latter case, laying his left hand on the 
altar ; he then incenses the cross with three double 
swings* (as directed in the plates, n. 2, 3) ; after this, he 
again makes a bow to the cross, or a genuflection to the 
Blessed Sacrament, and, remaining in the same place, 
incenses the relics (if there be any) with two swings, 
between the candlesticks at the side of the Gospel (as 
in n. 4, 5), makes again a bow or genuflection, and, 
with two other swings, incenses the relics at the Epistle 
side (as in n. 7). If there are more or less than two 
cases of relics on each side, the celebrant incenses them 
also with two double swings. If the relic of the saint 
whose festival is celebrated is placed in the middle of 
the altar, the celebrant, after having incensed the cross, 
incenses it with two double swings, bowing to it before 
and after. Having incensed the relics, the celebrant 
proceeds to incense the altar ; he incenses the table of 
it, at the Epistle side, with three double swings, corres- 
ponding to the places where the three candlesticks stand 
(as in n. 8, 9, 10), walking one step at each swing. On 
arriving at the Epistle side, the celebrant lowers his 
hand, and incenses, with one swing, the lower part of 
that side of the altar, and with another, the upper part 
(as in n. 11, 12). Then, turning to the altar and raising 
his hand, he incenses the table of the altar with three 
swings as far as the middle (as in n. 13, 14, 15), advan- 

* We borrow this term from Kev. J. Hughes, High Mass^ dtc. 



CELEBRANT. 231 

cing in like manner, one step at each swing ; when he is 
arrived at the middle, he makes the bow or genuflection, 
and incenses the other side of the altar with three swings 
(as in n. 16, 17, 18); then he incenses the lower and the 
upper part of the Gospel side with two swings (as in n. 
19, 20) ; without moving from that corner, he raises the 
censer, and incenses with three swings the table of the 
altar towards the middle (as in n. 21, 22, 23); then low- 
ering his hand, he incenses with three swings the front 
of the altar on the Gospel side (as in n. 24, 25, 26), ad- 
vancing one step at each swing ; having arrived at the 
middle, he makes a bow or genuflection, and continues 
to incense the front of the altar with three other swings 
(as in n. 2*7, 28, 29), advancing likewise one step at each 
swing ; when he is arrived at the Epistle side, he stops, 
gives the censer to the deacon, and, standing with his 
face turned towards him, is incensed by him. 

When there are no relics on the altar, the ceremony 
of incensing pointed out by n. 4, 5, 6, T, is omitted. 

T. After the incensing, the celebrant reads the Introit^ 
says the Kyrie^ and if the music is long, makes a bow 
to the cross, and goes to sit down. He should be sitting 
when he receives his cap from the deacon, as also when 
he gives it back to him. Whilst sitting, the celebrant 
holds his hands spread on his lap, and when he returns 
to the altar, he salutes the clergy, first at the Epistle 
side, then the Gospel side, before he arrives at the mid- 
dle. 

8. When he is arrived before the lowest step, the 
celebrant makes a profound bow or a genuflection, goes 
up to the platform, and there, in the middle, intones the 
Gloria in exceUis Deo^ and continues it with the minis- 
ters in a low voice. Having finished it, at the invitation 



232 HIGH MASS. 

of the master of ceremonies, the celebrant makes a bow, 
and by the nearest way goes to the bench, as before. 
Whenever he is invited by the master of ceremonies, he 
takes off his cap ; at the end of the Gloria he takes it 
off and returns to the altar, as directed above, he kisses 
it in the middle, turns to the people, sings Dominus vo- 
hiscum^ and then the prayers, 

9. If the altar is iSxed in such a manner that the priest 
is always turned to the people, the celebrant, saying, 
Dominus vobiscum, Orate fratreSy Jte, missa est, and 
giving the blessing, ought not to turn, 

10. After the sub-deacon has sung the Epistle, the 
celebrant places his hand on the Missal, to be kissed by 
the sub-deacon, and then gives him the blessing ; after- 
wards he goes to the middle, says, Munda cor nteumy 
goes to the Missal, reads the Gospel, but after reading 
it he does not kiss the book, nor does he say, JPer evan- 
gelica dicta/ then he returns to the middle of the 
altar to put the incense into the censer, and tobless it. 

If there is in the gradual any verse at which the 
clergy kneel, when the choir sing it, the celebrant kneels 
on the edge of the platform, with the ministers at his 
sides, till the verse is sung. 

11. When the deacon, having said Munda cor meum^ 
kneels before the celebrant, and says, Juhe Domne hene- 
dicere, the celebrant turned towards him, with his hands 
joined, says, " Dominus sit in corde tuo, et in labiis tuis, 
ut digne et competenter annunties Evangelium suum : 
In nomine Patris, et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti. Amen." 
In saying. In nomine, &c^ he makes on him the sign of 
the cross, then he places his right hand on the book, to 
be kissed by the deacon. 

12. When the deacon goes down below the steps, the 



FigX 




18 Ills to ciiam. 17Dojninc iCPone ■ SHicui dinccnswn- -iO in vConspectu 

—, \\^- =-s ^, 5 "l *W0. 



-^ .OS^-„„...^-..«V^>^'" ......<, .cXIi 










Watatum 
Eki'cUio 




CELEBRANT. 233 

celebrant retires to the Epistle side, and i-emains turned 
to tbe altar, with his hands joined, till the deacon begins 
to sing the Gospel ; then he turns round towards the 
deacon, makes the usual signs of the cross at the words, 
Sequentia^ &c., bows to the cross at the name of Jesus, 
bows also towards the book, at the name of Mary, and 
of the saint whose feast is celebrated. 

13. When the sub-deacon offers him the Missal, the 
celebrant kisses it, saying, Per evangelica dicta^ &o., 
remains in the same place till he is incensed by the dea- 
con, goes to the middle, intones the Gredo^ if it is to be 
said, and continues it in a low voice with his ministers. 

14. Having said the Credo^ the celebrant goes to sit, 
as said above ; at the Incarnatus he takes off his cap, 
and bows towards the cross, till the verse is finished ; he 
takes it off also at the words, Simul adoratur^ and at 
the end of the Credo returns to the altar, kisses it in 
the middle, and sings Dominus vohisGutn and Oremus, 

15. After having said the Offertory^ the celebrant re- 
ceives from the deacon the paten with the Host, offers 
it, saying the usual prayer, blesses the water, saying, 
Deus^ qui humanm substantiae y receives from him the 
chalice, offers it, saying, Offerimus, &g. 

16. The celebrant having said, Jn spiritu humilitatiSy 
and Veni sanctijicator^ puts incense into the censer, say- 
ing the prayer, " Per iutercessionem Beati Michaelis 
Archangeli, stautis a dextris altaris incensi, et omnium 
electorum suorum, incensum istud dignetur Dominus 
benedicere, et in odorem suavitatis accipere. Per Chris- 
tum Dominum nostrum. Amen." At the word bene- 
dicere^ the celebrant makes the sign of the cross on the 
incense, then he receives the censer, and without mak- 
ing any reverence, he incenses the sacred offerings, 

20* 



234: HIGH MASS. 

forming with the censer three crosses on both chalice 
and Host, saying at the first, Incensum istud j at the 
second, a te henedictum j at the third, ascendat ad te^ 
Domine / and afterwards making three circles round 
the chalice and Host, beginning the two first from the 
right to the left, and the third from the left to the right 
(see the plate), and saying at the first, et descendat super 
nos ; at the second, misericordia ; and at the third, 
tua. 

17. After the incensing of the sacred offerings, the 
celebrant makes a profound bow, or a genuflection, and 
incenses the cross and the altar, as directed above, but 
with this difference, that at each swing he says the 
prayer, distributed as follows : at n. 1 (see the plate), 
Dirigatur ; 2, Domine ; 3, Oratio mea ; 8, Sicut ; 9, 
Incensum; 10, In conspectu tuo ; 11, Elevatio ; 12, 
Manuum ; 13, Mearum ; 14, Sacrificium ; 15, Vesper- 
tinum ; 16, Pone; 17, Domine; 18, Custodiam ; 19, 
OrH ; 20, Meo ; 21, Et ostium ; 22, Circumstantice ; 23, 
Labiis meis ; 24, Ut non declinet ; 25, Cor meurn ; 26, 
In verba malitice ; 2t, Ad excusandas; 28, Excusationes ; 
29, In peccasis. 

18. When the celebrant gives back the censer to the 
deacon, he says, Accendat in nobis Dominus ignem sui 
amoris et flammatn ceternoe charitatis. Amen. After- 
wards he is incensed, he washes his hands, and contin- 
ues Mass ; he sings the Preface, the Pater ^ &c. After 
the Agnus -Z>e^, having said the first of the three pray- 
ers before the communion, he kisses the altar, gives the 
Pax to the deacon, saying. Pax tecum.^ and goes on as 
usual. 

19. After the communion of the precious blood, if 
communion is to be given, the celebrant, after the dea- 



CELEBRANT. 235 

con has uncovered the pyx, makes a genuflection with 
him ; then turns towards the deacon whilst he says the 
Confiteor / after which, he says, Misereatur and Indul- 
gentiam^ &c. As usual, he turns to the altar, makes a 
genuflection, takes the pyx in his left hand, and one of 
the small Hosts in his right, and, turned to the people, 
says, Ecce Agnus Dei^ &c. Then he gives the com- 
munion, first to the deacon, afterwards to the sub- 
deacon; and likewise he gives the communion to the 
others, first to him who kneels at the Epistle side, then to 
the other who kneels at the Gospel side. 

For the communion of the people, the celebrant goes 
to the railing of the sanctuary, and there gives the com- 
munion, beginning from the Epistle side. 

20. After communion, the celebrant either takes the 
Hosts that are left, or if the Blessed Sacrament is kept 
at that altar, he puts them in the pyx with the others 
in the tabernacle. When requisite, he removes from 
the pyx into the chalice the small particles that may 
there be, takes the purification and ablution as usual, 
wipes the chalice w4th the purifier, leaves it to the sub- 
deacon, and goes to the Epistle side, to read the Com- 
vrmnio. 

21. When the choir has sung the Communio^ the 
celebrant sings, Dominus vohiscum^ Oremus^ and the 
prayers ; then he sings again, Dominus vobiscum, and 
remains turned towards the people, whilst the deacon 
sings Ite^ missa esty or he turns to the altar, if the JBen- 
edicamus Domino be said, and he says it in a low voice. 
(Deer. S. R. (7., 7th Sept., 1816.) 

22. The celebrant then says, Placeaty gives the bless- 
ing, and reads the last Gospel, as usual ; after which he 
goes to the middle, makes a bow to the cross, goes 



236 HIGH MASS FOE THE DEAD. 

down below the lowest step, makes a profound bow or 
a genuflection. If the clergy remain in the sanctuary, 
the celebrant salutes them on each side, receives from 
the deacon the cap, puts it on himself, and walks to the 
sacristy, after the deacon. 

23. At the door of the sacristy, if the clergy have 
returned thither, the celebrant takes off his cap, having 
his ministers at his side, salutes them, first at the right, 
then at the left ; makes a bow to the cross, salutes the 
ministers, and, assisted by them, takes off the sacred 
vestments, salutes them again, and retires to make his 
tlianksgiving. 



CHAPTER III. 
HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD.* 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PEEPAJIED. 

1. In the sacristy, black vestments. 

2. The bench of the ministers should be bare. 

3. Antipendium of black or purple color; a carpet 
also of purple color, covering the platform only. 

4. The side-table is to be covered with a cloth, hang- 
ing down a little on each side ; besides every thing 
necessary for the celebration of Mass, the candles to be 

* Solemn Mass for the DQ&d pjvesente cadavere is permitted every day, 
except on great festivals of precept of first class, on the last three days 
in Holy Week, and on the feast of the titular saiut. {S. 2i. (7., 29 
Jaii.j 1752.) 



HIGH MASS FOK THE DEAD. 237 

distributed to the clergy should be prepared on it. The 
chalice is not to be covered with the long veil, which is 
not used by the sub-deacon at this Mass. 

Aeticle II. 

What is to he particularly observed at High Mass for 

the Dead. 

1. During the Confession^ the master of ceremonies 
kneels below the steps at the Epistle side; after the 
Confession, the deacon and sub-deacon, without going 
up to the middle of the altar, go to the Epistle side, to 
attend as usual the celebrant for the Introit. There is 
no incensing at the beginning of this Mass. The clergy 
and the minor ministers kneel down, while the celebrant 
sings the prayers. 

2. The sub-deacon, after having sung the Epistle, does 
not carry the Missal to the celebrant, but immediately 
gives it to the master of ceremonies, and does not kiss 
the celebrant's hand or receive his blessing. 

3. While the Sequentia is sung, the celebrant having 
read it, goes with the ministers to sit on the bench ; then 
candles are distributed to the clergy, who keep them 
lighted in their hands whilst the Gospel is sung, and 
fi'om the Sanctvs till after the communion of the cele- 
brant. 

4. Five or six strophes before the end of the Sequen- 
tial the ministers and the celebrant are invited by the 
master of ceremonies to go by the nearest way to the 
altar, where the celebrant goes to the middle, and says, 
Munda cor meum, &c. ; the sub-deacon removes the 
book with the stand from the Epistle side to that of the 
Gospel, and the celebrant reads the Gospel. The dea- 
con, at the proper time, carries, as usual, the Missal to 



238 HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

the altar, lays it in the middle, kneels on the edge of 
the platform, and says, Munda cor meum, but does not 
ask the blessing of the celebrant or kiss his hand. 

5. After the celebrant has done reading the Gospel, 
the master of ceremonies invites the deacon and sub- 
deacon to go down below the steps. The acolytes, with- 
out candlesticks, go behind the deacon and sub-deacon. 
All make a genuflection, and go to the usual place, 
where the deacon sings the Gospel. Incense is not used 
at the Gospel. 

6. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon does not carry the 
book to the celebrant to kiss, but gives it back at once 
to the master of ceremonies. Then each one returns to 
his place. 

7. After the celebrant has said Oremus^ at the Offer- 
tory^ the sub-deacon, invited by the master of ceremo- 
nies, goes to the side-table, and carries from thence to 
the Epistle side the chalice, with its veil and burse. 

8. The Deacon takes the corporal out of the burse^ 
and spreads it on the altar, as usual; the sub-deacon 
takes the veil off the chalice, and gives it to the acolyte ; 
when he presents the water, he does not offer it to the 
celebrant to be blessed. 

9. At the Mass for the Dead, neither the celebrant's 
hand nor any thing given to or received from him is to 
be kissed. 

10. While the celebrant is making the oblation of the 
chalice, the master of ceremonies invites the sub-deacon 
to go to the left of the celebrant, whither he goes, 
making a genuflection in the middle. The sub-deacon 
does not hold the paten, as at the other Masses. 

11. After the oblation of the chalice, the deacon places 
the paten partly under the corporal, and covers the rest 



HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD. 239 

of it with the purifier; at the proper time he presents 
the censer for the incense, and both ministers attend the 
celebrant at the incensing, which is done in the usual 
manner ; the celebrant only is incensed by the deacon, 
after the incensing of the altar. 

12. The celebrant being incensed, the sub-deacon re- 
ceives from one of the acolytes the water-cruet and the 
basin ; the deacon having given the censer to the cen- 
ser-bearer, receives from the other acolyte the towel, 
and both go to wash the celebrant's fingers ; afterwards 
they go to the middle, as usual, behind the celebrant. 
The deacon at the proper time answers, Suscipiat^ &c. 

13. At the end of the Preface, the deacon goes up to 
the right of the celebrant, and the subdeacon to the left, 
and say with him the Sanctus/ then the subdeacon re- 
turns to his place below the steps, and the deacon goes 
to the left of the celebrant to attend to the book. 

14. At the words, Quarn ohlationem, the deacon goes 
to the right of the celebrant, and the subdeacon to the 
Epistle side, where he kneels on the second step. Hav- 
ing put incense in the censer, he receives it from the 
censer-bearer, and incenses the Blessed Sacrament thrice, 
at each elevation ; afterw^ards he gives back the censer 
to the censer-bearer, returns to his place in the middle, 
makes a genufl.ection, and remains there till JPax 
Domini, 

The acolytes remain kneeling on each side of the 
altar, holding their candles till after the celebrant's 
communion. 

15. At the words, Dimitte nobis, the deacon only 
makes a genuflection, and goes up to the right of the 
celebrant, to give him the paten. 

16. A little before the celebrant says Agnus Dei, the 



240 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

subdeacon makes a genuflection, and goes to the left of 
the celebrant ; there he makes a genuflection with the 
others, who profoundly bowing towards the Blessed 
Sacrament, say the Agnus Dei, without striking their 
breast. 

17. After the Agnus Dei, the deacon and sub-deacon 
exchange places, making a genuflection both before 
and after ; the Dax is not given ; the rest goes on as 
usual. 

18. After the last Dominus vohiscum, the deacon, 
without turning himself to the people, sings, Mequiescant 
■in pace (always in the plural number). The celebrant, 
turned likewise to the altar, says the same in a low 
voice. (Deer. S, B. C, Sept. 7, 1816.) The blessing is 
not given ; the rest is as usual. 



CHAPTER IV. 
SOLEMN VESPERS. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

In the Sanctuary. 

1. Six candlesticks on the altar, and the cross in the 
middle. 

2. In the middle of the sanctuary, at a proper dis- 
tance, two or four stools for the cope-bearers. 

3. Against the railings in the middle, three stools, or 



SOLEIVIN VESPERS. 241 

a bench sufficiently long to accommodate the censer- 
bearer and the two acolytes. 

4. Near the bench for the officiating priest, a stool for 
the master of ceremonies.* 

5. A book-stand with the book, in front of the priest's 
bench, for the officiating priest, which may be covered 
with a veil of the color of the day. 

6. The celebrant's bench, covered with a green cloth. 

7. At the altar the antipendium ; and if there is the 
Blessed Sacrament, on the tabernacle the canopy of the 
color of the day. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. A surplice and a cope of the color of the day; and 
if the Benediction is to be given immediately after Ves- 
pers without previously going to the sacristy, a stole of 
the color of the cope. 

2. Two or four surplices and copes of the same color 
for the cope-bearers. 

3. Four surplices for the master of ceremonies and 
the three servers ; and surplices for the clergy. 

4. The censer and incense-boat. 

6. Two candlesticks with candles for the acolytes. 

Aeticle II. 

General Rules to he observed by the Clergy in the Sanc- 
tuary for solemn Vespers and Complin. 

1. Besides what has been said in the first chapter of 
this book concerning High Mass, clergymen should ob- 
serve what follows, in solemn Vespers ; they should not 

* If the servers are to wear caps, they should be put on the bench 
beforehand, 

31 



242 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

enter the sanctuary whilst Deus in adjutorium^ Gloria 
Patf% prayers, Capitidum^ the first verse, and the last 
strophe of any hymn, the first strophe of the Ave Maris 
Stella^ and Fe?^^, Creator Spiritus, and the two last 
strophes of the hymns, Pange Lingua^ Vexilla Regis 
prodeu7it^ are sung. 

2. At Complin, they should not go into the sanctuary 
whilst the Confession is made ; should, however, any 
one enter the sanctuary at the above-mentioned times, 
he should kneel, or bow, or stand, during the singing of 
the aforesaid verses or strophes, in conformity with the 
clergy already in the sanctuary. 

3. As soon as the officiating clergyman arrives at the 
altar, the clergy kneel to say, each in particular, the 
prayer, Aperi; they should kneel likewise during the 
first strophe of the hymns, Ave Maris Stella^ and Fern, 
Creator j during the strophe, Tantum ergo; when the 
Blessed Sacrament is exposed ; while they sing the 
strophe, crux ave^ spes unica^ even if it be said 
during the Paschal time ; at the ferial prayers ; at the 
anthem of the Blessed Virgin, said at the end of the 
office, and at the Pater^ Ave^ and Gredo^ recited after 
said anthem, except all Saturdays after Vespers, and all 
Sundays and the Paschal time, in which the clergy 
kneel only at theprayer, Sacrosanctce. 

4. The clergy should stand while the Pater and Ave 
are said; and from the beginning of Vespers till the 
first Psalm is intoned. When the antiphon is intoned, 
all the clergy who are on the same side with the clergy- 
man that intones it, rise as soon as the chanters in cope 
come to give the tone : the clergy should stand also 
during the chapter, the hymn, and from the hymn till 
the end of Vespers, only except whilst the choir sing 



ACOLYTES. 24:3 

and repeat the antipbon of the Magnificat ; at which 
time they sit, if the incensing be over. They should 
likewise stand during the prayer and commemorations, 
and till the end of Vespers. 

5. At Complin, the clergy stand from the beginning 
till the intonation of the first Psalm*^ from the intoning 
of the hymn till the end of Complin. When, as before 
directed, they are not to stand or kneel, they sit. 

6. The clergy bow, and take off their caps at the 
Gloria Patri^ at the names of Jesus and Mary, at the 
last strophe of the hymns, when it contains the dox- 
ology ; at the words, Sit nomen Domini henedictum^ of 
the Psalm, Laudate pueri Dorrdnum^ and whilst the 
Confiteor is said at Complin. 

Aeticle hi. 
Instruction for the Acolytes. 

1. Before the beginning of Vespers, the acolytes go 
to the sanctuary, and put their cap on the place where 
they are to sit. Having lighted the candles on the 
altar, they afterwards light those of their own candle- 
sticks, and go to the sanctuary, as when High Mass is to 
be celebrated. 

2. When the officiating clergyman has arrived at the 
altar, the acolytes turn themselves to the altar, make 
with the others a genuflection, and immediately after go 
to place the candlesticks on the steps near the altar, 
each on his own side ; they put out the candles of their 
candlesticks, and go to their place. 

3. Towards the end of the last Psalm, the acolytes, 
leaving their caps on their seats, go to light the candles 
of their candlesticks, and with them go to the middle 



244: SOLEMN VESPERS. 

before the lowest step, make a genuflection, and go to 
the officiating clergyman. 

4. Having made a bow to him, the acolytes, turned 
towards each other, stop on each side of the book-stand 
which is before him, till he has intoned the hymn, 
and when the Ave Maris Stella or the Ve?ii Creator 
Spiritus is said, they stand during the first strophe, 
then they go, after having saluted the celebrant ; they 
should take care to turn in such a manner that each one 
remain on his own side ; that is, the first acolyte at the 
right, and the second acolyte at the left ; then they re- 
turn to the altar, where, having made a genuflection, 
they carry the candlesticks to their place, and leave 
them lighted ; afterwards they go to their seats. 

5. After the Gloria Patri of the Magnificat^ the 
acolytes take the candlesticks, and go, as before, to the 
celebrant, salute him, place themselves as before, and 
remain there till after all the prayers are sung ; after 
which, when the celebrant has said Dominus vohiscum^ 
having saluted him, they go to the middle ; and when 
he has arrived at the same place, they make a genuflec- 
tion together with him, salute the clergy, and walk to 
the sacristy. 

K the clergy also immediately after Vespers return to 
the sacristy, when the celebrant has arrived before the 
altar, they do not make a genuflection with him, but 
remain standing during the anthem of the Blessed 
Virgin, and its prayer; after the celebrant has said 
Divinum auxiliurn^ they make a genuflection, and 
walk to the sacristy, as directed. Ch. iii., n. 19. 



CENSEK-BEAKER. 245 

Article IV. 
Instruction for the Censer- Bearer. 

1. The censer-bearer prepares every thing as directed 
for High Mass. 

2. He goes to the sanctuary with the clergy, and sits 
in such a place of the sanctuary as may be most con- 
venient, that he may go to the sacristy when required. 
The hymn being intoned, or if there be no hymn as in 
Easter-week, about the end of the fifth Psalm, he takes 
off his cap, leaves it on his seat, and having made a gen- 
uflection to the altar, goes to the sacristy to prepare the 
censer. 

3. When the celebrant, after intoning the antiphon 
of the Magnificat^ arrives at the altar, the censer-bearer 
also goes thither, making a genuflection below the 
steps ; the incense having been put into the censer, and 
blessed as usual, the censer-bearer gives the censer to 
the master of ceremonies, from whom he receives the 
incense-boat; then, without making a genuflection in 
the middle, he goes immediately to the left of the cele- 
brant ; there he makes a genuflection, keeps the cele- 
brant's cope raised on his side during the incensing, and 
follows him, making a genuflection at the same time 
with the master of ceremonies, whenever the celebrant 
makes it ; or if the Blessed Sacrament be not on the 
altar, whenever he makes a bow in the middle. 

4. After the incensing of the altar, the censer-bearer 
goes to the Epistle side, receives the censer from the 
master of ceremonies, puts the censer-boat on the table, 
gives back the censer to the master of ceremonies, 
remains at his left, makes with him a profound bow to 

31* 



246 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

the celebrant before and after he is incensed, receives 
the censer, and incenses the clergy, as directed .in the 
instruction for the deacon. 

5. The censer-bearer having incensed the clergy, in- 
censes with a double swing the master of ceremonies, 
and then incenses the people, as directed for High Mass ; 
he carries the censer to the sacristy, and returns to the 
sanctuary, making the usual genuflections. 

If there be chanters in cope, the censer-bearer does 
not go to the left of the celebrant for the incensing, 
as in such case they assist the celebrant ; the clergy also 
are incensed by the first of them, and the censer-bearer 
accompanies him, as he does the deacon at Mass, hold- 
ing his cope raised at his right hand, that he may more 
easily throw the incense. After the clergy on each side 
are incensed, the censer-bearer accompanies the chanters 
in cope to incense the other chanters dressed likewise in 
cope ; then he receives from him the censer, and stand- 
ing at the Epistle side, he incenses him with tw^o double 
swings, then the master of ceremonies with a double 
swing, and lastly the people. 

If, besides the high altar, any other altar is to be in- 
censed, the censer-bearer will follow the directions of 
the master of ceremonies. 

Aeticle V. 

Instruction for the Master of Ceremonies. 

1. The master of ceremonies having prepared every 
thing, and placed the signs at the book of the celebrant, 
which is to be placed on a stand covered with a long 
veil of the same color of the vestments, and which 
should be sufficiently light to be easily removed, goes to 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 24:7 

the sacristy, helps the celebrant to put on the surplice 
and cope; and every thing being ready, invites the 
acolytes to walk to the sanctuary, having first, in an 
audible voice, announced to the clergy the Yespers, the 
commemorations to be made, and other particulars. 

2. As the clergy walk out of the sacristy, the master 
of ceremonies invites the celebrant to follow them, and 
walks with him to the altar ; at the door of the sacristy 
he gives him the holy water ; when they arrive at the 
altar, he makes a genuflection at the right of the cele- 
brant below the steps, kneels during the Aperi, rises, and 
invites the celebrant to rise also. 

3. When the celebrant bows to the altar, the master 
of ceremonies makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy at 
the Gospel side, and at the Epistle side; accompanies 
the celebrant to his seat, stops there at his left, receiving 
from him, and giving him at the proper times, his cap 
with the usual kisses, turning the leaves of the book 
when necessary, pointing out to him every thing that 
he has to read or sing, and raising his cope whenever he 
has to make the sign of the cross. 

4. The master of ceremonies sits on a stool near the 
celebrant, whilst he is not employed in attending him 
particularly, and whilst the Psalms are sung ; making 
him signs to take ofl" or put on his cap, whenever he is 
to do it ; he likewise makes the same signs to the clergy 
in the sanctuary, unless another be appointed for this 
purpose, which is desirable. 

5. Towards the last Psalm, the master of ceremonies 
makes a sign to the acolytes to light their candles, and 
to come before the celebrant, whilst the antiphon is 
repeated; Hkewise he makes them a sign when they 
should go. 



248 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

6. When the Magnificat is intoned, the master of 
ceremonies receives the celebrant's cap, accompanies 
him to the altar, having, with him, saluted the clergy, 
first on the Epistle side, then on the Gospel side. 

v. When arrived at the altar, the master of cere- 
monies makes, a genuflection below the steps at the 
right of the celebrant, raises his cassock a little in front, 
and the lower extremity of the cope, whilst with him he 
ascends to the platform, presents the incense-boat and 
the spoon as usual, with the customary kisses, for the 
benediction of the incense, saying, Benedicite^ Pater 
Heverende, 

8. The incense being blessed, the master of cere- 
monies gives the boat to the censer-bearer, receives from 
him the censer, and gives it to the celebrant ; whilst the 
latter incenses the altar, the master of ceremonies raises 
his cope on his side,.and with the censer-bearer makes a 
genuflection whenever the celebrant makes a bow, or a 
genuflection in the middle. 

9. After the incensing, the master of ceremonies re- 
ceives the censer from the celebrant, gives it to the 
censer-bearer, goes again by the celebrant on the plat- 
form, makes with him a bow to the cross, goes down 
below the steps, makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy, 
accompanies the celebrant to the bench, and there in- 
censes him with three double swings, gives the censer 
to the censer-bearer^ goes near the celebrant, and points 
out to him whatever he has to read or sing. The mas- 
ter of ceremonies is incensed after the clergy on each 
side of the sanctuary. 

10. When the celebrant has said Fidelium animoe^ 
the master of ceremonies gives him the cap, goes with 
him to the altar, after having saluted the clergy. 



MASTER OF CKKEMONIES. 249 

11. If Complin is not said after Vespers, the master 
of ceremonies having made a genuflection before the 
altar, presents to the celebrant the book, to intone the 
anthem of the Blessed Virgin, either kneeling or stand- 
ing, as required by the particular time ; then at the left 
of the celebrant, he returns to the sacristy, salutes the 
clergy, makes a bow to the cross, and assists the cele- 
brant to take off the sacred vestments. 

12. If there be chanters in cope, they attend the cele- 
brant at the altar for the incensing, and the first of them 
incenses the celebrant and the clergy. 

13. If, besides the high altar, any other be incensed, 
as for instance that of the Blessed Sacrament, which 
ought to be incensed first, the master of ceremonies 
should observe what follows: whilst the hymn is sung, 
he should invite two or four of the clergymen in the 
sanctuary, who are the first in dignity, to assist at the 
incensing. 

14. The Magnificat having been intoned, the acolytes 
win be ready with their candlesticks in the middle of 
the sanctuary, and the censer-bearer between them, and 
the two or four clergymen behind the acolytes, all 
turned to the altar. 

15. The master of ceremonies accompanies the cele- 
brant to the altar between the two chanters in cope; 
whither being arrived, they make the genuflection, 
salute the clergy, and walk out of the sanctuary in the 
following order : 

16. The censer-bearer walks first, then the acolytes, 
the chanters in cope, having the celebrant in the midst, 
and raising his cope on each side. They put on their 
caps before they move forward. 

17. If there be four cope-bearers, the two chanters 



250 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

walk first, and the two others after them, at the side of 
the celebrant. The four clergymen follow the celebrant, 
two by two. 

18. Having arrived at the altar of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, they make a genuflection. The acolytes and the 
cope-bearers, with the celebrant in their midst, place 
themselves in a row before the lowest step. The cele- 
brant, with the two cope-bearers next to him, ascends to 
the altar to incense it, and the others remain standing 
below. 

19. After the incensing, having made a genuflection, 
they return to the high altar as they came. The acolytes 
having arrived at the sanctuary, divide and retire, the 
first with the censer-bearer at his right towards the 
Epistle side, the second towards the Gospel side, so also 
the chanters in cope ; and the celebrant, in the middle 
of the two assistant cope-bearers, having arrived, and all 
forming one line, they all salute the clergy on each side, 
walk to the altar, and make a genuflection below the 
steps. 

20. The acolytes immediately put the candlesticks at 
their places on each side of the altar; the others remain 
as before till after the incensing of the high altar, for 
which the incense is not again put into the censer. 

21. After the incensing, they all make the genuflec- 
tion (the celebrant only makes an inclination, if the 
Blessed Sacrament be not at the high altar), salute the 
clergy, and the four clergymen return to their places, 
after having bowed to each other. 



COPE-BEARERS. 251 

Article YI. 

Insti'uction for the Cope-Bearers, 

In some festivals, Vespers are sung with the assistance 
of two or four clergymen, according to the greater or 
less degree of solemnity of the festival, dressed in sur- 
plice and cope. AVhen there are four, two of them, who 
should be those amongst them who are inferior in dig- 
nity, should perform the office of chanters, and go to 
the celebrant and clergy to pre-intone the antiphon and 
intone the Psalms in the middle of the sanctuary. The 
two others attend immediately the celebrant ; when 
there are only two, these perform the office of assistants 
and chanters. 

1. The cope-bearers having put on their surplices, 
assist the celebrant to put on his surplice and cope; 
then, attended by the acolytes, they put on their own 
copes, which should be of the proper color and uniform, 
as also their caps. 

2. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, they 
come down, bow to the cross, and with their caps on, 
walk after the clergy, at the side of the celebrant, rais- 
ing his cope on each side ; if there be four cope-bearers, 
the two chanters walk together before. 

3. As they enter the sanctuary, they take off their 
caps, and when arrived at the altar, all in one line make 
a genuflection below the lowest step (the celebrant 
bowing, if the blessed sacrament be not at the altar) ; 
they kneel on the lowest step; at a sign made by the 
master of ceremonies they rise, make a genuflection, 
salute the clergy, accompanying the celebrant to the 
bench, they stop before him, being turned towards him, 



VTlt 



252 . SOLEMN VESPERS. 

without turning entirely their back to the altar, until 
the first cope-bearer-chanter has pre-intoned to him the 
first antiphon. 

4. Then they all go to the middle to intone the Psalm, 
taking care always to make a genuflection to the altar, 
in going to and from it, and a bow to the celebrant 
every time they pass before him. Having intoned the 
first Psalm, they make a genuflection, salute each other, 
and go to sit down on the stools prepared for them in 
the middle of the sanctuary, before the altar. 

5. The cope-bearers put on their caps only after hav- 
ing seated themselves, and sing together with the rest 
of the clergy. 

6. After the first Psalm, both chanters go to pre- 
intone the antiphon to the clergyman who occupies the 
first place on the Gospel side ; who having intoned it, 
they go to the middle to intone the Psalm, and thus 
successively and alternately on each side of the sanctu- 
ary; the two assistants remain sitting during all this 
time. 

1. All the Psalms being sung and the last antiphon 
repeated, the four cope-bearers go to the celebrant, and 
remain before him, whilst he sings the chapter; then 
the first chanter pre-intones to him the hymn ; which 
being intoned, they return to their places, after having 
made a bow to the celebrant and a genuflection to the 
altar. They remain there standing, with their heads un- 
covered. 

When the Ave Maris SteUa^ or Veni Creator^ is 
sung, the cope-bearers go to the middle, and kneel dur- 
ing the first strophe. 

8. After the hymn, the cope-bearers go to the middle, 
and sing the verse ; then they go to pre-intone the anti- 



COPK-BEARERS. 253 

pbon to the celebrant, return to the middle, intone the 
Magnificat^ make a genuflection, and go to the cele- 
brant. 

9. As they accompany him to the altar, having placed 
him in their middle (in case no other altar is to be in- 
censed), they salute the clergy, and make together a 
genuflection to the altar ; the two assistant cope-bearers, 
with the celebrant in their middle, go up to the altar, 
and the others, if there be any, remain below the steps ; 
the first assistant cope-bearer presents the incense-boat 
for the benediction of the incense, and the second raises 
the celebrant's cope a little on his right. 

10. During the incensing, they hold the celebrant's 
cope raised a little on each side ; after which they re- 
turn to the middle, make a bow to the cross, go below 
the steps, make a genuflection to the altar, salute the 
clergy and accompany the celebrant to the bench; the 
first assistant cope-bearer incenses the celebrant, then 
the clergy, beginning at the Gospel side ; and the others 
go to their places. 

11. After having incensed the clergy, who are on the 
first or highest row of benches, or stools, on each side, 
the first assistant cope-bearer incenses the cope-bearers, 
each with two double swings; then he continues to in- 
cense those who are in the inferior rows; then, having 
returned to his place, he is incensed by the censer- 
bearer. 

1 2. When the celebrant is about to say the prayer, 
all the cope-beai'ers rise, go to attend him at the con- 
clusion, bowing at the name of Jesus, and having bowed 
to the celebrant, they go to the middle to sing the 
JBenedicamtis Domino; or if there be any commemora- 
tions, after the first prayer, they go to the middle to 

22 



254 SOLEMN VESPEBS. 

sing the verses ; they remain there, and sing the Bene- 
dicamus Domino. 

13. Having sung the JBenedicamu3^ the cope-hearers 
go again to the celebrant, make with him a bow to the 
clergy, go to the altar, make a genuflection to the cross, 
go to the sacristy in the same order as they had come 
from it, or assist to recite the usual anthem. 

14. The cope-bearers go to the sacristy, and if the 
clergy also have left the sanctuary, and are already id 
the sacristy, they salute them, and take off their copes, 
after having assisted the celebrant to disrobe. 

If, besides the high altar, any other is to be incensed, 
they follow the directions of the master of ceremonies^. 

Article VII. 

Instruction for the Celebrant. 

1. The officiating priest, whom we call the celebranty 
having made an inclination to the cross, walks, with his 
cap on, to the altar, attended by the master of cere- 
monies ; when arrived there, he takes off his cap, makes 
a profound bow to the cross, or if the Blessed Sacra- 
ment be kept at the high altar, makes a genuflection 
below the steps, and kneels down to say the Aperi 
Domine^ which he, as well as each of the clergy, say 
privately, so as not to be heard. 

What has been said about the profound bow or genu- 
flection, is to be observed whenever we say that the 
celebrant makes a profound bow; for if the Blessed 
Sacrament is kept at the high altar, the celebrant should 
make a genuflection. 

2. After the Aperi, the celebrant rises, makes a pro- 



CELEBRANT. 255 

found bow, salutes the clergy at each side of the sanc- 
tuary, and goes to the bench, which is the same where 
he sits with the ministers at High Mass, and should be 
placed at the Epistle side near the wall, facing the 
Xrospel side, and near the altar. There, standing, he 
says, Pater et Ave; intones Deus in adjutorium; bows 
at the Gloria Patri^ towards the altar; sits when the 
first Psalm is begun, and having received the cap from 
the master of ceremonies, he puts it on, 

S. Every time the Gloria Patri is sung, he takes off 
his cap, and bows during that verse, then he puts on his 
cap ; likewise he takes it off, and bows at the names of 
Jesus, Mary, and of the saint whose feast is celebrated. 

4. After the Psalms have been sung, the celebrant 
rises, sings the chapter, intones the hymn, during which 
he remains standing, and intones the antiphon of the 
MagnificaL 

5. Whilst the choir sings the antiphon of the Mag- 
nificat^ the celebrant sits down ; when the Magnificat is 
begun, he rises, goes to the altar with his hands joined, 
and salutes the clergy as usual; when he has arrived at 
the altar, he makes a profound bow to the cross, goes 
up, kisses the altar, and makes the incensing as directed 
for High Mass, After it, he gives the censer to the 
master of ceremonies (if there be no cope-bearers), goes 
to the middle, bows to the cross, goes below the steps, 
makes a profound bow, and goes to his place, where 
he is incensed with three double swings. 

6. After the Magnificat is sung, the celebrant sits 
down, with his cap on, Avhilst they sing or i"«peat the 
antiphon of the Magnificat/ then he rises, sings the 
prayers, and the Dominus vobiscuon; the Penedicamus 
is to be sung either by the cope-bearers or the choir ; 



266 SOLEMN VESPEES. 

and having said Fidelium animcB^ &c., he goes to the 
altar in the usual manner. 

7. The celebrant when arrived at the altar, if Complin 
is not to be sung, after having said the words. Pater 
noster^ in an audible voice, and continued and finished 
secretly, he says, Dominus det nobis suam pacem^' then 
the anthem of the Blessed Virgin is said or sung, either 
standing or kneeling, according to the different pre- 
scriptions of the Rubrics for the different times; the 
celebrant standing, says or sings, in the ferial tone, the 
prayer, and after it, JDivinum auxilium. 

8. If the clergy leave the sanctuary, the celebrant 
"waits till the last couple have made the genuflection, 
then at the sign made by the master of ceremonies, hav- 
ing made a profound bow to the altar, he walks with his 
cap on to the sacristy, and on his entering it, he takes it 
off, salutes the clergy, and disrobes, as usual. 

9. If Complin is to be sung after Vespers, then the 
celebrant leaves the sanctuary after having said Fidelium 
animoe^ <fec., and returns to the sacristy preceded by the 
acolytes, and attended by the master of ceremonies and 
cope-bearers, if there be any. 

At the hymn, Ave Maris Stella^ or Veni Creator 
Spiritus^ the celebrant, after having intoned them, 
kneels at his place before his seat, during the first 
strophe. He kneels also there on similar occasions. 
For the incensing of another altar besides the principal 
one, he follows the directions of the master of cere- 
monies. 

The celebrant should never put on his cope in the 
sanctuary during Vespers ; but he must do it in the sa- 
cristy, before he goes to the sanctuary for Vespers. 
Neither should he incense the bishop, or any other 



BEFORE THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 257 

superior prelate ; but after having incensed the altar, he 
must be incensed at his place, with three double throws, 
but if the bishop be present, only with two throws, after 
which the bishop is incensed with two throws. 



CHAPTER V. 

OF SOLEMN VESPERS, AND OF THE PROCESSION ON 
CORPUS CHRISTI, AND DURING THE OCTAVE OF 
THIS FEAST. 

Article I. 

Of Solemn Vespers^ the JBlessed Sacrament being exr 

posed. 

1. The master of ceremonies should see that every- 
thing necessary for this solemnity be prepared ; besides 
what is required for solemn Vespers, and a stole for the 
clergyman who is to expose the Blessed Sacrament. 

2. If the Blessed Sacrament be not kept at the high ' 
altar, but at another, the master of ceremonies should 
have the umbrella,* long veil, and candles ready to 
carry it to the high altar. 

3. On the altar he should prepare a corporal, the key 
of the tabernacle, and monstrance. 

4. On the side-table, the long veil, and the Missal 
with a mark in it, at the place where the prayer of the 
Blessed Sacrament may be found. 

* A small ornate canopy somewhat in the shape of an umbrella) 
which is carried over the Blessed Sacrament. 

23^ 



258 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

5. The cope-bearers and the celebrant, having put on 
their copes — the celebrant, besides the cope, should have 
on a stole — the clergy walk to the sanctuary preceded 
by the acolyte, and the censer-bearer with his censer and 
boat before them. 

6. Arrived before the altar, they make a genuflection ; 
the acolytes carry their candlesticks to the usual place ; 
the celebrant with the cope-bearers kneel on the lowest 
step ; the priest who is to expose the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, puts on the stole, goes up to the altar, extends 
the corporal in the middle of it, opens the tabernacle, 
makes a genuflection turning towards the Gospel side, 
takes the Blessed Sacrament, puts it in the monstrance 
and places it in the middle, makes a genuflection, and 
places it on the throne ; then he goes below the steps at 
the Gospel side, takes off the stole, and remains there 
kneeling. 

7. The celebrant, with his two assistants, having made 
a profound bow, rises; he then puts incense into the 
censer, the first assistant holding the incense-boat and 
presenting the spoon, without kissing it, and the second 
holding the cope at his right, kneels down again ; re- 
ceives the censer from the first assistant, makes a pro- 
found bow, incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament, the 
two assistants raising in the mean time his cope on each 
side ; makes again a profound bow, gives back the cen- 
ser to the first assistant, who gives it to the master of 
ceremonies; and having said the Aperi Domine, they 
rise, make a genuflection below the steps on both knees, 
and a profound bow, and go as usual to the bench. 

8. But if the Blessed Sacrament be kept at another 
altar, a little before Vespers, a priest in surplice and 
stole, with bis cap on, carrying the burse with a corporal 



BEFORE THE BLESSED SACKAMENT. 259 

in it, and the key of the tabernacle before his breast, 
preceded by some acolytes with candles, and attended 
by the master of ceremonies, carrying the long veil and 
the umbrella, goes from the sacristy to the altar where 
the blessed sacrament is kept. 

9. When they have arrived at the altar, they all make 
a genuflection ; the priest gives the cap to the master of 
ceremonies, goes up to the altar, extends the corporal on 
it, opens the tabernacle, and having made a genuflection, 
takes out the blessed sacrament, kneels, receives the veil, 
which the master of ceremonies puts on his shoulders, 
rises, covers his right hand with the veil, takes the Blessed 
Sacrament, covers it with the other extremity of the veil, 
and carries it with both his hands before his breast, re- 
citing some Psalms, to the high altar, preceded by the 
acolytes with lighted candles, who alternately with the 
priests say the Psalms ; and followed by the master of 
ceremonies, who carries the umbrella opened over him. 

10. flaving arrived at the altar, the acolytes kneel 
below the steps at a short distance from them ; the priest 
goes up, places the Blessed Sacrament on the corporal, 
kneels, and in the mean while takes ofi" the veil, which 
the master of ceremonies carries to the side-table, leav- 
ing the umbrella in some convenient place. 

11. The priest rishig, places the Blessed Sacrament in 
the monstrance, makes a genuflection, places it on its 
throne, goes below the steps, makes a genuflection on 
both knees on the lowest step, rises, puts incense into 
the censer, but does not bless it ; kneels again, makes a 
profound bow, incenses the Blessed Sacrament with three 
double throws ; after a short prayer, rises, and all make 
a genuflection on both knees, and go to the sacristy. 

12. After the exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, at 



Ji 



260 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the clergy go 
into the sanctuary, and make a genuflection on both 
knees in the middle; they go to their places without 
bowing to each other ; there they stand, and wait till 
the celebrant, with the cope-bearers, have arrived before 
the altar ; then they kneel on the lowest step. The lat- 
ter, as soon as they arrive within sight of the Blessed 
Sacrament, take off their cap, and carry it in their hands ; 
they make a genuflection on both knees below the lowest 
step. 

13. After having made a profound bow, while kneel- 
ing, the celebrant and his assistants rise with the master 
of ceremonies, and the acolytes ; the acolytes carry their 
candlesticks, each to his side of the altar, and place them 
on the highest step near it ; the celebrant with his assist- 
ants kneels on the lowest step ; and at the same time all 
the clergy in the sanctuary kneel at their places ; say 
the Aperi ; at the sign made by the master of ceremo- 
nies, all rise, and the celebrant with the cope-bearers 
goes to the bench. It is to be remarked, that when the 
blessed sacrament is exposed, no bow is made to any 
one in the sanctuary. 

1 4. Yespers are sung as usual as far as the Magnificat^ 
except that no one should put on his cap, and the sing- 
ers and cope-bearers do not bow to each other. 

15. At the Magnificat^ the celebrant with the cope- 
bearers goes to the altar, where, having made a genu- 
flection on both knees, he goes up with his assistants, 
kisses the altar, puts in the incense, kneels on the edge 
of the platform, incenses the Blessed Sacrament, rises, 
makes a genuflection, and incenses the altar as usual. 

16. After the incensing of the altar, the celebrant and 
his assistants go to the middle, make a genuflection, 



BEFORE THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 261 

bendiDg one knee, go below the steps, the celebrant 
with the second assistant by the Gospel side, and the 
first assistant by the Epistle side ; make a genuflection, 
bending both knees on the floor below the steps, and 
return to the bench. No other altar is incensed ; but 
the celebrant, clergy, and people are incensed as usual ; 
the censer-bearer incenses the people, not from the mid- 
dle, but from one side, taking care not to turn his back 
to -the Blessed Sacrament. 

17. After the prayers, the acolytes carry the candle- 
sticks to their place, and after the Benedicamiis Domino^ 
the celebrant does not say Fidelium animce^ but goes 
with the cope-bearers immediately to the altar, makes a 
genuflection on both knees below the steps, and a pro- 
found bow, rises, and kneels with them on the lowest 
step. 

18. In the mean while the acolytes come to the sanc- 
tuary with lighted candles, and kneel on each side ; the 
singers intone the Tantum ergo; the celebrant incenses 
the Blessed Sacrament as usual, and after the verse, 
Partem de coelo, &c., says the prayer, JDeus qui nobis, 
&c., with the short conclusion, Qui vivis et regnas in 
soecula, &q. ; then a priest in surplice puts on the stole, 
goes up to the altar, and with the usual genuflections 
places the Blessed Sacrament on the corporal, in the 
middle of the altar, and retires, taking oif his stole. 

19. The celebrant puts on the long veil, makes a pro- 
found bow, goes with the assistants up to the altar, 
makes a genuflection, rises, takes with both his hands, 
covered with the veil, the Blessed Sacrament, and turn- 
ing by his left to the people, gives the benediction as 
usual. 

If the altar were so situated that the celebrant always 



11 



Ji 



262 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

faces the people, he should not turn as directed 
above. 

20. After the benediction, the celebrant makes a genu- 
flection, takes off the long veil, goes down, kneels on the 
lowest step, and makes a profound bow. Then a priest 
in surplice puts on the stole, makes a genuflection, puts 
the Blessed Sacrament in the tabernacle, makes again a 
genuflection, and shuts it. 

' If there be no tabernacle at the high altar, the priest 
above mentioned, having taken the sacred Host from 
the monstrance, and put it into its box, or into a pyx, 
covers it with a veil, and after the clergy have left the 
sanctuary, he carries it to the altar where the Blessed 
Sacrament is kept, in the manner described above. 

21. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the 
acolytes with the candles go back, or, if necessary, leave 
them in a convenient place, take their candlesticks, go 
to the middle, make a genuflection, and walk to the 
sacristy, as usual. 

Article II. 
Of the Procession on Corpus Christi and its Octave. 

1. The master of ceremonies should take care to have 
prepared in the sacristy, the cope, stole, cincture, alb, 
and amice for the celebrant ; dalmatic, <fec., for the dea- 
con ; tunic, <fec., for the sub-deacon, but without mani- 
ples;' the candlesticks for the acolytes, the processional 
cross, and, according to custom, the sacred vestments 
for the priests and other clergymen who attend — such 
'as copes, chasubles, dalmatics, tunics, &c., but without 

stoles and maniples. 

2. The canopy should be prepared in a convenient 



PROCESSION ON CORPUS CHRISTI. 263 

place, and the umbrella, two censers with their boat, and 
at least four lanterns, beautifully made, and placed on 
sticks, with candles within. 

3. The Blessed Sacrament being exposed, when every 
thing is ready, at the sign made by the master of cere- 
monies, the acolytes, preceded by the censer-bearer, walk 
from the sacristy to the sanctuary, followed by the 
clergy, two by two, according to their order and dignity, 
and the celebrant walking between the deacon and sub- 
deacon, who raise his cope on each side. 

4. When they arrive within sight of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, they take off their caps, and, when they have 
arrived before the altar, they make a genuflection on 
both knees ; the clergy go to their places, and the cele- 
brant and ministers kneel on the lowest step. 

5. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the 
ministers rise, the celebrant puts in the incense as usual, 
and incenses the Blessed Sacrament. The deacon takes 
from the throne the Blessed Sacrament, puts it on the 
corporal in the middle of the altar, makes a genuflection, 
and goes down. 

6. The celebrant, having put on his shoulders the long 
veil, goes up with the ministers, and kneels on the edge 
of the platform ; there he receives the sacrament from 
the deacon, rises, turns to the people, having the minis- 
ters at his side, who raise the extremities of his cope ; 
he intones the Pange Lingua^ and the procession moves, 
and makes the usual tour. 

v. If there is a repository with an altar, where the 
procession is to stop, when the ministers Arrive before it, 
the deacon kneeling receives the Blessed Sacrament from 
the celebrant, rises, puts it on the altar, or on the throne, 
if there is any, makes a genuflection, returns to the right 



A 



264 vp:spee3 for the dead. 

of the celebrant, who takes off his veil ; the choir sings 
the Tantum ergo, and the Blessed Sacrament is incensed 
as usual. 

8. After the Paneim de coelo, &c., the celebrant sings 
the prayer with the short conclusion, puts on the veil, 
gives the benediction, and the procession is continued. 

9. The procession having returned to the church, and 
the sacred ministers having arrived at the altar, the 
deacon receives the Sacrament, &c. The Tantum ergo, 
&c., the verses, and the prayers are sung, and the bene- 
diction given as above. 



CHAPTER VI. 

VESPERS FOR THE DEAD ON THE FHIST DAY OF NO- 
VEMBER. 

Article I. 
Things to be prepared. 

1. In the church, a cenotaph, or representation of a 
tomb, covered with a black cloth, with candlesticks and 
candles around it. 

2. At the altar, the black altar-veil under the white 
one, if possible, otherwise it should be kept ready in the 
sacristy ; also, if the tabernacle with the Blessed Sacra- 
ment is on the altar, the violet canopy under the white 
one. 

3. On the side-table, a black cope for the celebrant. 

4. A book-stand, or desk, in a convenient place. 



VESPERS FOE THE DEAD. 265 

Aeticle II. 

Ceremonies peculiar to these Vespers, 

1. Whilst the Magnificat of the Vespers of All Saints 
is sung, the candles around the tomb are lighted, and 
whilst they sing the JBenedicanms Domino^ the acolytes 
go from the celebrant's bench, place their candlesticks 
as usual at each side of the altar, put out their candles, 
go behind the cope-bearers who sing the JBenedicamus^ 
make together a genuflection to the altar, and bow to 
the clergy, and preceded by the acolytes with their 
hands joined, go to the sacristy, and take off their copes. 

2. After the JBenedicamus Domino^ the celebrant 
does not say Fidelium aiiirncej be takes off his white 
cope, and puts on the black ; the acolytes take the carpet 
from the steps of the altar, and remove the white altar- 
veil and the white canopy. 

3. The celebrant having put on the black cope, all 
rise, and the choir begin Placebo Domino^ and sing it 
entirely, the Vespers being of double rite ; and when 
they begin the Psalm, all the clergy sit, till the begin- 
ning of the Magnificat. 

4. At the beginning of the Magnificat^ they all rise, 
and the acolytes light their candles. After the Mag- 
nificat^ they all sit down whilst the antiphon is repeated ; 
the acolytes take their candlesticks, make a genuflection 
in the middle, and go before the celebrant. 

5. The antiphon being repeated, all the clergy kneel, 
except the acolytes, the celebrant intones Pater noster, 
which is continued in a low voice ; then the celebrant 
says, Et ne nos inducas^ with the other verses, and the 
choir answers them. At the Domimis voMscum, the 

23 



266 VESPEES FOR THE DEAD. 

celebrant rises and says the prayer, FideUutn Deus^ and 
after it, Fidelium animce^ &c., and Requiem ceternam^ &c. 
6. The acolytes make the usual bow to the celebrant, 
go to the middle, make a genuflection, put the candle- 
sticks in the proper place, return to the middle, and, 
when the singers have sung Mequiescant in pace^ they 
make a genuflection, and with their hands joined, go to 
the sacristy, followed by the clergy and the celebrant. 



PART IV. 

€ttmmm fat l\)t |)rinri})al /fstwala 

THROUGHOUT THE YEAR. 



CHAPTER I. 
FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

Article I. 

Necessary preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, a cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 
amice for the officiating clergyman : a folded chasuble, 
stole, cincture, alb, and amice for the deacon : likewise a 
folded chasuble, cincture, alb, and amice for the sub-dea- 
cons. The sacred vestments should be violet. 

2. On the altar, six candlesticks and the cross as 
usual, and a violet altar-veil over a white one. 

3. A small table covered with a white cloth should be 
placed near the altar, at the Epistle side ; and on the 
table the candles to be blessed, covered also with a 
white linen cloth. 

4. On the small table, a vessel with holy water, a 
sprinkle, and a basin, ewer, and towel ; also the chalice 



268 FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

with every thing else necessary for Mass ; the whole 
covered during the blessing of the candles with a violet 
veil. 

5. In any convenient place, the processional cross, the 
censer with the incense-boat, and a chafing-dish with fire 
and tongs. 

6. On the seat of the ofiiciating clergyman, a white 
chasuble, stole, and maniple for him ; on those of the 
ministers, a white dalmatic, stole, and maniple for the 
deacon ; and also a white tunic and maniple for the sub- 
deacon. 

7. If the Mass be not of the Blessed Virgin, but of 
the Sunday, the sacred vestments ought to be such as 
are required for the Sunday. 

Aeticle II. 

From the vesting of the Ministers to the distribution of 

the Candles. 

1. At a stated hour, the ministers put on the amice, 
alb, and cincture ; then the officiating clergyman, at- 
tended by them, puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
stole, and cope ; lastly, the ministers put on the folded 
chasubles without maniples. The signal being given by 
the master of ceremonies, the ministers, with the ofii- 
ciating clergyman between them, bow to the cross, put 
on their caps, and go to the sanctuary ; the deacon at 
the right of the officiating clergyman, and the sub-dea- 
con at the left. Both sacred ministers raise the cope of 
the officiating clergyman. 

2. Having arrived at the sanctuary, the celebrant 
gives his cap to the deacon, and the deacon and sub- 
deacon give theirs to the master of ceremonies, and, 



VESTING OF THE MINISTERS. 269 

having knelt on the floor of the sanctuary, they go up to 
the altar; the celebrant kisses it, and the ministers at 
the same time make a genuflection, and all go to the 
Epistle side, where the deacon stands on the first step, 
at the right of the celebrant, and the sub-deacon at the 
left, on the platform. Then the master of ceremonies 
uncovers the candles. 

If the Blessed Sacrament be not kept on the great 
altar, the celebrant bows profoundly to the cross, and 
the ministers and the other clergymen make a genu- 
flection. 

3. The celebrant thus, in the middle of the ministers, 
with his hands joined, sings in a ferial tone, Dominus 
vobiscum, Oremus, and the prayer Domine Sancte, with 
the other four that follow. When he blesses the candles, 
he lays his left hand on the altar ; the deacon in the 
mean time raising the hem of his cope ; as also when 
the celebrant uses the censer and the sprinkle. 

4. At the beginning of the prayers, the censer-bearer 
puts fire into the censer, and at the end he goes to the 
Epistle side, having at his right hand the first acolyte, 
carrying the vessel with holy water and the sprinkle. 

5. The fifth prayer being ended, the censer-bearer 
makes a genuflection, goes up to the highest step of the 
altar, to have incense put into the censer and blessed as 
usual by the celebrant, and goes down with the censer 
and the incense-boat ; then the first acolyte makes like- 
wise a genuflection, goes up to the highest stej), gives 
the sprinkle to the deacon, who taking it in the middle, 
with the usual kisses, gives it to the celebrant, who 
sprinkles the candles thrice, first in the middle, then at 
the right, and lastly at the left of the candles, saying 
the anthem, Asperges me, &c., without the Psalm. The 

23* 



270 FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

deacon, having received the sprinkle from the celebrant, 
gives it back to the first acolyte ; then takes the censer 
from the censer-bearer, gives it with the usual kisses to 
the celebrant, who incenses the candles thrice, in the 
same manner as he sprinkled them, but without saying 
any thing. 

6. Afterwards the censer-bearer takes back the censer, 
and with the first acolyte makes a genuflection to the 
altar, and they carry the censer and the vessel with holy 
water to their proper places. 

Article III. 

From the distribution of the Candles to the Procession, 

1. After the blessing of the candles, the celebrant and 
ministers go to the middle of the altar, and having 
bowed to the cross, turn to the people ; the first acolyte 
at the Epistle side hands the candles to the deacon, who 
stands at the left of the celebrant. 

2. Before the celebrant turns towards the people, the 
second master of ceremonies calls the clergyman first in 
dignity amongst those who are presenrt in the sanctuary, 
who, without stole, goes to the highest step of the altar ; 
where, standing, he receives from the deacon a candle, 
kisses it, and gives it to the celebrant, without kissing 
his hand ; the celebrant also kisses the candle, but not 
the hand of the clergyman from whom he receives it ; 
and gives the candle to the sub-deacon, who having re- 
ceived it with the usual kisses, lays it on the altar. The 
celebrant having received another candle from the dea- 
con, gives it to the clergyman highest in dignity, who 
receives it kneeling with the usual kisses, and having 
made a genuflection to the cross, and bowed to the 



DISTRIBUTION OF CANDLES. 271 

celebrant, retires, accompanied by the second master of 
ceremonies. The latter should direct the clergy to go 
in proper order to receive the candles. 

If there be not a priest to offer the candle to the cele- 
brant, the deacon, having received it from the acolyte, 
places it on the middle of the altar ; then the celebrant, 
having bowed to the cross, kneels on the platform 
towards the cross, and thus takes the candle from the 
altar, kisses it, and gives it to the sub-deacon ; then, 
rising, he continues the distribution as is hereafter di- 
rected. 

3. At the beginning of the distribution of the candles, 
the choir sings the anthem, Lumen ad revelationem^ and 
the canticle. Nunc diinittis, 

4. If the distribution be not finished at the end of the 
canticle. Nunc dimittis^ the canticle ought to be re- 
peated, and the Gloria Patri sung at the end of the 
distribution. 

5. The clergyman highest in dignity having retired, 
the deacon and sub-deacon go on the highest step, kneel 
on the platform, receive with the usual kisses their can- 
dles from the celebrant ; rise, and return to their former 
places, that is, the deacon to the left, to hand the candles 
to the celebrant, and the sub-deacon to the right, to hold 
up the border of his cope. The ministers give their 
candles to the acolytes, and then the celebrant dis- 
tributes the candles, first to the priests, then to the 
clergy in inferior orders, who go up to the altar, two by 
two, kneel on the platform, kiss first the candle, then 
the celebrant's hand. 

6. Towards the end of the distribution, at a signal 
given by the master of ceremonies, the acolytes light 
the candles of the clergy for the procession. 



272 



FEA.ST OF THE PURIFICATION. 



7. The distribution being ended, the celebrant and 
the ministers turn towards the altar, bow to the cross, 
go back in the same order as before, to the Epistle side, 
where the celebrant washes his hands, and in the mean 
time the choir sings the anthem, JExurge^ &c., which is 
repeated. 

8. After the anthem, the celebrant, standing at the 
Epistle side, without saying Dominus vohiscum, sings 
Ore^nus^ and the prayer, JEJxaudi. 

After Se]3tuagesima, provided it be not on Sunday, 
before the celebrant says Oremus^ the ministers place 
themselves behind the celebrant, the deacon sings Flec- 
tamus genua^ immediately after the Oremus has been 
sung ; he and all in the church kneel ; the sub-deacon 
sings Levate^ and they all arise, and stand till the prayer 
is finished. Where it is customary that the candles 
should be distributed to the people by the celebrant, he 
shall do it at the railing ; the men first kiss the candle, 
then the hand of the celebrant ; but the women kiss only 
the candle. After the distribution, the ministers go 
back to the altar, make genuflections on the lowest step, 
and the celebrant bows to the cross. They then go to 
the Epistle side, where the celebrant washes his hands 
at the small table. In case the number of people be 
great, another priest, in surplice and violet stole, may 
distribute the candles with the celebrant. 

Aeticle IV. 



The Procession. 

1, Whilst the celebrant sings the last prayer, the 
censer-bearer puts fii'e into the censer ; when the prayer 
is finished, he goes to the Epistle side, the incense is put 



PKocEssioN. 273 

into the censei", aod blessed by the celebrant as usual. 
Then the sub-deacon bows to the altar, and goes, by the 
shortest way, to take the cross, which he receives from 
the second master of ceremonies, and walks between the 
acolytes to the middle of the sanctuary, where he stands 
turned towards the altar. 

2. In the mean while, the deacon receives from the 
master of ceremonies the celebrant's candle, gives it to 
him, kissing it and the celebrant's hand, and having 
received his own candle, at the signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, turned towards the people, sings 
with a loud voice, Procedamus in Pace. The clergy 
answer, In nomine Christie Amen. 

3. The procession then moves in the following order : 
first; the censer-bearer, who makes a genuflection ; then 
the cross-bearer between the acolytes, none of whom 
make a genuflection ; then follow the singers, and the 
rest of the clergy, who make genuflections, two by two, 
and carry their candles lighted ; then the deacon and 
the celebrant, who likewise carry their candles lighted, 
and, when notified by the master of ceremonies, descend 
the steps, and bow to the altar; the deacon then gives 
the cap to the celebrant, kissing it first, then the cele- 
brant's hand. He afterwards places himself at the 
left of the ofiiciating clergyman, raising the border of 
his cope. The singers sing the anthems as in the 
Missal. 

If, during the procession, a Low Mass is said in the 
church, the bell should not be rung at the elevation ; 
but if the bell should be inadvertently rung, the proces- 
sion passing before that altar should kneel till the end 
of the elevation. {I>ecr. JR. S. C, 1 Mart., 1681.) 

4. When they are out of the door of the church, they 



274 FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

all put on their caps, the censer-bearer, cross-bearer, 
acolytes, and master of ceremonies excepted ; but as 
soon as they re-enter the church, they uncover their 
heads, the celebrant and deacon only excepted. 

5. Coming into the church, the singers chant the 
response, Obtulerunt^ even if the anthems be not yet 
finished. 

6. The censer-bearer makes a genuflection in the 
middle of the sanctuary, and carries the censer back to 
its place. The cross-bearer and the acolytes do not 
kneel ; they go to the side-table, on which the acolytes 
place their candlesticks, and the cross-bearer the cross ; 
the latter goes to the ministers' bench, where he waits 
for the celebrant and the deacon. 

7. The clergy having made a genuflection in the mid- 
dle of the sanctuary, go to their places, and extinguish 
their candles. The celebrant and deacon, as they come 
into the sanctuary, take off their caps, go to the middle 
of the sanctuary, put out the candles, give them to the 
master of ceremonies, make the usual bows, go to the 
ministers' bench, turn towards the altar, and the minis- 
ters take the cope from the celebrant, help him to put 
on the chasuble, put on their own vestments, accompany 
him to the altar, and having made the usual bows, begin 
Mass, which is said as usual, and is to be sung by the 
priest that officiated at the distribution of the candles. 
(JDecr. S. C. B., 12 Jun., 1627.) If a Bishop bless the 
candles, a priest may say the Mass. 

When the Mass of the feast of the Purification is to 
be celebrated, an acolyte should remove from the side- 
table and the altar all the violet ornaments. 

Also, when the Mass of said festival is celebrated, the 
celebrant and the clergy hold lighted candles in their 



NECESSARY PREPARATIONS. 275 

hands during the Gospel; the clergy, moreover, hold 
them from the Sanctus till after the communion. 



CHAPTER II. 

ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

Article I. 

Necessary Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, the violet cope and stole, also the 
cincture, alb, and amice for the celebrant; the folded 
chasuble and stole of violet color, with the cincture, alb, 
and amice for the deacon ; the same things (the stole 
excepted) are to be prepared in the usual place. 

2. On the altar, six candlesticks, with the cross and 
the violet altar-veil. At the Epistle side, a silver vessel 
containing ashes, and covered either with a violet veil 
or with its own silver cover. 

3. On the side-table, besides the things that are neces- 
sary for High Mass, the holy-water vase with the sprin- 
kle ; a small plate with some bread ; a ewer and basin 
with a towel. 

On the ministers' bench, the chasuble and maniple for 
the celebrant ; two other maniples for the ministers, who 
put them on, after having assisted the celebrant to put 
on his vestments. 

5. In any convenient place, the censer with the incense- 
boat, and a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 



276 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

Aeticle II. 

Of the Blessing and Distribution of the Ashes. 

1. The deacon and sub-deacon, having put on, as 
usual, all their vestments (the maniples and folded chas- 
ubles excepted), help to vest the celebrant with the 
amice, alb, cincture, stole, and cope ; then they put on 
their folded chasubles. The signal being given by the 
master of ceremonies, they all bow to the cross, put on 
their caps, go out of the sacristy, having the celebrant 
in the middle, and raising his cope on each side. 

2. Having arrived at the altar, they give their caps 
to the master of ceremonies, kneel, go up to the plat- 
form, the celebrant kisses the altar in the middle, and 
the ministers make a genuflection ; then they go to the 
Epistle side, the celebrant having the sub-deacon at his 
left, and the deacon at his right ; the master of ceremo- 
nies uncovers the ashes. 

3. There the celebrant, with his hands joined, reads 
the anthem, Mcaudi^ while it is sung by the choir. 

4. After the anthem has been repeated by the singers, 
the celebrant in the same place, without turning to the 
people, sings, in a ferial tone, with his hands joined, 
Dominus vohiscum^ Oremus, bowing as usual to the 
cross, and then the four following prayers; when he 
blesses the ashes, he places his left hand on the altar, and 
the deacon raises his cope, which is also to be observed 
whenever the celebrant uses the sprinkle or the censer. 

5. At the beginning of these prayers the censer-bearer 
prepares the censer, and at the end of them he goes to 
the Epistle side, having on his right the first acolyte, 
who carries the holy-water vase and the sprinkle \ they 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE ASHES. 277 

both kneel, and the censer-bearer goes up to the highest 
step, that the incense may be put into the censer, and 
blessed; he then descends, and gives his place to the 
acolyte, who presents to the deacon the sprinkle, which 
is presented by him to the celebrant, whose hand, as 
well as the sprinkle, is kissed by the deacon. The cele- 
brant sprinkles the ashes thrice, first in the middle, then 
on the right, and lastly on the left, saying with a low 
voice, Asperges nie, &c,, but not the Psalm, Miserere, 
The deacon returns the brush, and having received the 
censer from the censer-bearer, gives it to the celebrant, 
who incenses the ashes thrice. 

6. The censer-bearer, having received the censer, 
makes a genuflection to the altar with the acolyte, and 
they carry the censer and the holy-water vase to their 
proper places. 

7. The celebrant and the ministers proceed to the 
middle of the altar without their caps ; the deacon, on 
the left, holds the vessels with the blessed ashes, and the 
sub-deacon, turned towards the people, stands at the 
celebrant's right. 

8. The signal being given by the master of ceremo- 
nies, the clergyman who is first in dignity amongst those 
that are present, goes, without stole, to the highest step, 
when, forming as usual the sign of the cross, and saying. 
Memento homo^ <fcc., he places the ashes on the fore- 
head of the celebrant, who stands with his hands 
joined. 

9. The celebrant then forming the sign of the cross, 
and saying, Memetito horno^ jDlaces the ashes on the 
head of the same clergyman, who kneels to receive 
them, and after having made the usual bows and genu- 
flection, returns to his place, accompanied by the master 

24 



278 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

of ceremonies, who directs the clergy in what order 
they are to proceed to the altar. 

If there be no priest present dressed in surplice, the 
celebrant kneeling on the platform of the altar makes 
the sign of the cross on his head, with the ashes, with- 
out saying any thing ; which must be observed even if 
the ministers be priests. 

10. At the beginning of the distribution of the ashes, 
the singers chant the anthem, Jmmutemur hahitu^ &c., 
which they repeat, if necessary, during the distribution. 

11. The priest who is first in dignity having retired, 
the deacon gives the vessel containing the ashes to the 
master of ceremonies, or lays it on the altar. He then 
kneels on the highest step at the right of the sub-deacon, 
where they both receive the ashes; then the deacon 
goes to the right side of the celebrant, where he holds 
the vessel with the ashes, and the sub-deacon proceeds 
to the left. The celebrant puts the ashes on the fore- 
heads of the clergymen, who go to the altar, two by 
two, according to their respective dignity and order. 

12. After the distribution of the ashes, the deacon re- 
turns the vessel in which they are contained to the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, who places it on the table ; the cele- 
brant, attended by the ministers, goes to the Epistle 
side, where he washes his hands, rubbing them also with 
bread prepared for that purpose, one of the acolytes 
pouring the water, and a minister holding the towel. 

Where it is customary, the celebrant may distribute 
the ashes to the people at the railing. 

13. Then, the ministers standing at the side of the 
celebrant, he sings, Dominus voMscum, and the prayer, 
Concede noMs, in a ferial tone. The prayer being 
ended, and the singers having answered, Amen, they 



MASS. 279 

bow to the cross, and go by the shortest way to their 
seats, where the celebrant, assisted by the ministers, 
takes off the cope, and puts on the maniple and the 
chasuble. The ministers also put on their maniples. 
They then go to the altar to sing Mass, which must be 
sung by the same priest who has blessed the ashes. 
{Deer. jS. C. B., 12 Jun., 1627.) 

Article III. 
Of the Mass, 

1. The ministers having left their seats, bow, as usual, 
to the clergy, and on arriving at the steps of the altar, 
kneel before the cross. Mass is celebrated as usual, 
with the following exceptions : at the Confession^ and 
at the prayers, the clergy, as well as the acolytes, who 
serve at the altar, remain kneeling ; the same is to be 
observed from the Sanctus to the Agnus Dei. 

2. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer before the 
last previously to his reading the Epistle, the second 
acolyte takes off the sub-deacon his chasuble, and lays it 
on the bench, and assists him in putting it on again 
after he has sung the Epistle, and kissed the hand of the 
celebrant. Whilst the celebrant is reading the Gospel, 
the same acolyte helps the deacon to take off the chasu- 
ble and put on the large stole ; taking care to assist him 
again in taking off the large stole and resuming the 
chasuble, after he has removed the Missal from the 
Gospel side to the Epistle side, after the communion. 

3. The celebrant should not kneel whilst he reads the 
Ac^uva nos, &c., but after having read the Gospel, he 
goes as usual to the middle of the altar, where he re- 
mains till the Adjuva nosj &c., then he and the minis- 



280 SUNDAYS L^TAEE AND GAUDETE. 

ters kneel on the platform ; when the Adjuva nos, &c., 
is ended, they all arise, incense is then put into the 
censer, and the rest proceeds as usual, 

4. The acolytes holding their candles, remain kneeling 
from the Sanctus to the communion of the celebrant. 

5. At the prayer, Super populum, the celebrant having 
sung Oremus^ the deacon at his right side, turned to- 
wards the people, sings, jETumiliate capita. 



CHAPTER III. 

/Sundays L^tare «w(? Gaudete. 

On these Sundays three things are particularly to be 
observed : 

1. The organ, which is silent during Lent, is played 
at High Mass and Vespers. 

2. The sacred vestments should be of rose color. 

3. The deacon and subdeacon, instead of folded chas- 
ubles, make use of the dalmatic and tunic. 



CHAPTER IV. 

PALM-SUNDAT. 

Aeticle I. 

Preparations, 

1. In the sacristy, for the celebrant, the violet cope 
and stole, the cincture, alb, and amice ; for the deacon, 
the folded chasuble, stole and maniple of violet color, 



PALM-SUNDAY. 281 

the cincture, alb, and amice ; for the sub-deacon, the 
violet folded chasuble and maniple, the cincture, alb, 
and amice. Also, three amices, albs, and cinctures, and 
three violet maniplCvS and stoles ; besides three books for 
the three deacons who sing the Passion. 

2. On the altar, the cross and six candlesticks, with- 
out any ornaments ; where the custom prevails, branches 
of olive or palm trees may be placed between the can- 
dlesticks. 

3. Near the altar, on the Epistle side, a small table 
covered with a linen cloth ; on the Gospel side, in any 
convenient place, three book-stands for the Passion. 

4. On the table, the holy-water pot with the sprinkle, 
the chalice in the middle, covered as usual with the 
veil, the cruets, bell, the Missal for the Epistle and Gos- 
pel, the large stole for the deacon, a basin with a pitcher 
of water, and a towel. 

5. In any convenient place, the processional cross, 
covered with a violet veil, a chafing-dish, with fire and 
tongs. 

6. On the minister's bench, the violet chasuble and 
maniple, for the celebrant. 

Article II. 

From the beginning of the Ceremony to the Distribution 

of the Palmes. 

1. The ministers dressed as usual, with amice, alb, and 
cincture, and the deacon having put on his stole, assists 
the celebrant in putting on the amice, alb, cincture, 
stole, and cope ; they then put on their folded chasubles 
and maniples. The master of ceremonies having given 
the signal, they bow to the cross ; and proceed to the 

24* 



282 PALM-SUNDAY. 

altar, having their heads covered, walking at each side 
of the celebrant, and raising the border of his cope. 

2. Having arrived at the altar, and given their caps 
to the master of ceremonies, they kneel before the cross, 
and go up to the platform, where the celebrant kisses 
the middle of the altar, and the sacred ministers make 
a genuflection ; they immediately go to the Epistle side, 
where they remain ; the sub-deacon standing at the left 
hand of the celebrant, and the deacon on the highest 
step at his right. The palms are then uncovered by the 
master of ceremonies. 

3. The celebrant, with his hands joined, and without 
making the sign of the cross, reads from the Missal the 
anthem, Hosanna^ which is sung by the chanters. 

4. The anthem being sung, the celebrant remaining 
turned towards the Missal, and with his hands joined, 
sings in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer 
that follows ; during this, the ministers at each side 
raise the celebrant's cope. At the beginning of the 
prayer, the sub-deacon bowing to the cross, descends to 
the floor, and standing below the steps, behind the 
celebrant, with his face turned towards the altar, with 
the assistance of the second acolyte he takes off* the 
chasuble, and receives the Missal from the second master 
of ceremonies. 

5. At the end of the prayer, having made the usual 
bows to the clergy, he sings the lesson that follows it in 
the tone of the Epistle; then bowing as before the 
lesson, he goes to the celebrant, and kneeling kisses his 
hand, and receives his blessing. Having put on the 
chasuble, he goes by the shortest way to the left of the 
celebrant, and remains there. 

6. After the lesson, the singers chant one of the two 



PALM-SUNDAY. 283 

responses with its verses, and in the mean time the ' 
deacon having bowed to the cross, goes down, and 
taking off his chasuble, puts on the large stole, receives 
from the second master of ceremonies the Missal, which 
he places on the middle of the altar ; then making a 
genuflection, he returns by the shortest way to the 
right of the celebrant, to hold the incense-boat whilst 
he puts the incense into the censer ; in the same time 
the sub-deacon raises the border of the celebrant's 
cope. 

V. The incense being blessed, the sub-deacon goes 
down the steps, and the deacon goes by the shortest way 
to the middle of the altar ; there, kneeling on both 
knees, he says, Munda cor meum ; then takes the Mis- 
sal, and saying, Juhe JDomne^ &c., asks the blessing of 
the celebrant, who turning himself to the Gospel side, 
gives it in the usual words, Dominus sit^ &g. The 
Gospel is sung, as usual in High Masses ; at the end of 
which the sub-deacon carries the book to the celebrant, 
who kisses it, and the deacon incenses him as customary ; 
he then takes off the large stole, puts on the folded 
chasuble, and returns to the right of the celebrant, the 
sub-deacon being on his left. 

8. After the celebrant has been incensed, he turns 
towards the altar, and sings in a ferial tone the prayer 
that follows ; after which he sings the Prcefatio. After 
this, standing at the Epistle side with the ministers, and 
bowing at the same time^ he says in a low voice the 
Sanctus^ which is sung by the choir. 

9. The celebrant, with his hands joined, sings in a 
ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayers for the 
blessing; when he makes the sign of the cross on the 
palms, he lays his left hand on the altar, and the deacon 



284: BLESSING OF THE PALMS. 

raises the border of his cope ; the same is to be observed 
when he makes use of the sprinkle or the censer. 

10. At the beginning of the prayers, the censer-bearer 
prepares the censer, and when they are ended, he goes 
to the Epistle side, having at his right the first acolyte, 
who carries the vessel with holy water. Both bow at 
the lowest step, and the censer-bearer goes np to the 
highest step ; and after the celebrant has put the incense 
into the censer, and blessed it, he retires; the acolyte 
then takes his place, gives the sprinkle to the deacon, 
who, holding it in the middle of its handle, kisses it and 
presents it to the celebrant, whose hand he also kisses. 
The celebrant sprinkles the palms three times, first in 
the middle, afterwards at the right, and lastly at the left, 
saying, at the same time, Asperges mey the deacon re- 
turns the sprinkle to the acolyte, and receives the censer 
from the censer-bearer, kisses and gives it to the cele- 
brant, whose hand he also kisses ; the celebrant incenses 
the palms also three times, in the same manner as has 
been said for the sprinkhng, but without saying any 
words. 

11. The censer-bearer receives the censer from the 
deacon, makes a genuflection with the acolyte, and both 
retire to place the censer and the vessel in their proper 
places. 

12. After incensing the palms, the celebrant sings 
Dominus vohiscum^ and the prayer that follows. 

Article III. 

Of the Distribution of the Palms. 

1. After the prayer, the ministers and the celebrant 
proceed to the middle of the altar, bow to the cross, and 



BLESSING OF THE PALMS. 285 

turn towards the people; the first acolyte, at the 
Epistle side, holds the palms, which he gives to the 
deacon. 

2. The clergyman who is first in dignity amongst 
those who are present at the ceremony, when invited by 
the second master of ceremonies, goes in his usual choir- 
dress, without stole, to the highest step of the altar ; 
there, standing, he receives from the deacon the palm, 
which he kisses and gives to the celebrant, without 
kissing his hand ; the celebrant also kisses the j^alm 
only, and gives it to the sub-deacon, who, having kissed 
the celebrant's hand and the palm, lays it on the altar. 
The celebrant having received from the deacon another 
palm, gives it to the clergyman who is first in dignity. 
He kneels on the platform to receive it, and kisses both 
the celebrant's hand and the palm. {Deer. S. M. (7., 14 
Feb., 1703.) After which, bowing and making a genu- 
flection, he returns to his place, attended by the second 
master of ceremonies, who invites the clergy to go to 
the altar in proper order. 

3. When the distribution of the palms commences, 
the anthem Pueri Sehrceorum is sung by the chanters, 
and repeated, if necessary, during the distribution. 

4. The deacon and sub-deacon then go to the highest 
step, and, kneeling on the platform, receive the palm 
from the celebrant, and kiss his hand and the palm ; 
afterwards they arise, and make a genuflection ; the 
sub-deacon returns to the right, and the deacon to the 
left of the celebrant, to give him the palms that are to 
be distributed, having previously placed their own on 
the altar, or given them to the acolytes. The celebrant 
distributes the palms to the clergy, beginning by the 
priests and ending with the inferior clergy, who must 



286 PALM-SUNDAY. 

come, two by two, and kiss first tlie palm, then the hand 
of the celebrant. 

5. After the distribution, the celebrant and the minis- 
ters turn towards the altar, bow to the cross, and go in 
the same order as before to the Epistle side, where the 
celebrant washes his hands, and sings the prayer, Omni- 
potens sempiteme Deus^ &g. 

The celebrant, w^here it is customary, may go to the 
railing to distribute the palms to the people ; the men 
kiss the palm and the celebrant's hand, but the women 
kiss only the palm. After the distribution, the ministers 
return to the altar, make a genuflection on the lowest 
step, but the celebrant merely bows, if the Blessed 
Sacrament is not present, after which they all go to the 
Epistle side, as in the preceding number. 

Should the congregation be large, another priest, 
dressed in surplice, and having on a violet stole, may 
assist the celebrant in distributing the palms ; the same 
is to be observed with respect to the distribution of the 
candles and of the ashes. 



Aeticle IV. 

Of the Procession. 

1. When the ministers go to the Epistle side, the 
censer-bearer prepares the censer ; after the prayer, he 
goes to the Epistle side, where the incense is put into 
the censer, and blessed by the celebrant. Then the sub- 
deacon kneels to the cross, and by the shortest way goes 
to the side-table, where, taking off his maniple, he takes 
the processional cross, and, preceded by the censer- 
bearer, walks between the acolytes to the middle of the 



PEOCESSION. 287 

sanctuary, where he remains with his face turned towards 
the altar. 

2. In the mean time, the deacon having taken off his 
maniple, gives the palm to the celebrant, at the same 
time kissing it and also the hand of the priest ; then he 
takes his own palm, and withdraws to the highest step 
behind the celebrant; and at a signal given by the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, he turns towards the people, and 
sings, Procedamus in pace^ to which the clergy answer, 
In nomine Christi. Amen. 

3. They then walk in procession out of the door of 
the church, in the following order: the censer-bearer, 
having made a genuflection, proceeds fi^rst ; then come 
the acolytes, on each side of the cross-bearer, who make 
no genuflection ; after them the chanters and the rest of 
the clergy, two by two, who all make a genuflection in 
the middle of the sanctuary, and carry their palms in 
their right or left hand, according to their position ; if 
they are on the left, they must carry them in their left 
hand ; but if on the right, they must bear them in their 
right. Last of all, the deacon and the celebrant, who, 
at the signal given by the master of ceremonies, go 
down the steps, the celebrant bows, and the deacon 
kneels before the cross ; he then gives the cap to the 
celebrant, kissing it and the celebrant's hand ; and hav- 
ing received his cap from the master of ceremonies, he 
goes to the left of the celebrant, whose cope he raises 
with his right hand, holding in his left his own palm. 
They follow the procession with their caps on. 

4. As the procession goes out of the door of the 
church, all tlie clergy except the cross-bearer, the aco- 
lytes, the censer-bearer, and the master of ceremonies, 
put on their caps. The procession is made through the 



288 PALM-SUNDAY. 

usual places round the church, and the chanters sing 
either all or only a part of the anthems that are in the 
Missal, according to the length of the way. 

5. On their return to the door of the church, some of 
the singers enter the church, and shut the door; the 
censer-bearer goes to the right of the first acolyte, the 
cross-bearer stops between the acolytes near the door, 
and turns the crucifix towards the people. The clergy, 
as they arrive, keep their respective rows, but draw 
near the acolytes, and form a circle, which is completed 
by the celebrant, with the ministers at his side, who 
remain turned towards the door ; all may wear their caps. 

6. The singers within the church, turned towards the 
door, sing Gloria^ laus^ which is repeated by the clergy, 
who are without ; then the other strophes are sung by 
those within, the clergy alternately repeating Gloria^ 
laus. 

1. When all the verses have been sung, the sub-dea- 
con, turning the crucifix, knocks at the door with the 
foot of the cross ; the door is immediately opened, the 
procession enters the church, and the anthem Jngredi- 
ente Domino is sung. 

If the procession cannot be made out of the church, 
it should be made within ; and should stop at the door 
of the sanctuary. 

8. As the clergy enter the church, all, with the excep- 
tion of the celebrant and ministers, uncover their heads, 
and proceed to the sanctuary. The censer-bearer arriv- 
ing at the middle of it, makes a genuflection, and carries 
the censer to its place. The cross-bearer and acolytes, 
without making a genuflection, go to the side-table, the 
acolytes place their candlesticks on it, the sub-deacon 
leaves the cross near it and goes to the bench, waiting 



MASS AND PASSION. 289 

there for the celebrant and deacon. The clergy having 
made a genuflection in the middle of the sanctuary, go 
to their respective places, carrying the palms in their 
hands. 

9. The celebrant and deacon, as they enter the sanctu- 
ary, uncover their heads, go to the middle, make a genu- 
flection, and go to the bench of the ministers ; there the 
deacon receives from the celebrant his palm, kissing it 
and the celebrant's hand, and gives it with his own to 
the master of ceremonies ; then, having turned towards 
the altar, the ministers take off the cope from the cele- 
brant, and put on his maniple and chasuble ; after which, 
they put on their own maniples, and having bowed to 
the clergy as usual, go to the altar, and begin Mass, 
which ought to be celebrated by the same priest who 
blessed the palms, unless they were blessed by the 
bishop. 

Article V. 

Of the Mass and Passion. 

1. Mass is celebrated as on other Sundays durmg 
Lent, with the following exceptions: the Psalm Judica 
is not said at the Confiteor^ nor the Gloria JPatri at the 
Introit and Lavaho. 

2. Only one prayer is said. Whilst the sub -deacon 
sings the Epistle, the clergy, deacon, and celebrant, un- 
less the latter should actually be reading the Gradual 
or Tracts kneel at the words. In nomine Jesu omne 
genuflectatur^ till the words JEt inferorum are sung. 

3. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon waits till the cele- 
brant has read the Tracts he then receives his blessing, 
descends the steps, puts on his chasuble, and goes to the 

25 



290 PALM-SUNDAY. 

right of the deacon, as observed for the Introii, The 
celebrant and ministers sit at their seats, whilst the Tract 
is sung, 

4. During the Passion and Gospel, the celebrant and 
all the others, except the deacons who sing the Passion, 
the acolytes and the master of ceremonies, hold palms 
in their hands ; the same is to be observed by all, ex- 
cept the sacred ministers, when they return to the sa- 
cristy. 

5. The Gospel of St. John is read at the end of the 
High Mass. 

6. Whilst the Epistle is sung, the deacons, who are to 
sing the Passion, put on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
maniple, and stole. The acolytes place in a straight 
line, at a little distance from each other, the three book- 
stands, in the place where the Gospel is usually sung. 

v. Towards the end of the Tracts the three deacons 
appointed for the Passion, each holding in both hands 
his book, which he lays against his breast, accompanied 
by the second master of ceremonies, bow to the cross, 
put on their caps, and go out of the sacristy in the fol- 
lowing order : first, the master of ceremonies, with his 
hands joined ; next, the deacon, who sings the words of 
the Evangelist ; then he who sings the words of the 
multitude ; and, lastly, the one who sings the words of 
our Saviour. 

8. When they enter the sanctuary, they uncover their 
heads, and give their caps to the master of ceremonies ; 
then the deacon, who sings the words of our Saviour, is 
placed in the middle; he who sings the part of the 
Evangelist, at the right ; and he who sings the words of 
the multitude, at the left ; they make a genuflection be- 
fore the altar, bow to the celebrant, and the clergy go 



MASS AND PASSION. 291 

to the book-stands, place their books upon them, so that 
he who personates the EvangeHst, be in the middle ; he 
who sings the words of our Saviour at the right ; and 
the one who represents the multitude at the left. Then 
the Evangelist begins, Passio Domini^ &c. ; during the 
Passion, they stand with their hands joined, and near 
them the second master of ceremonies. 

9. When he who is in the middle begins the Passion, 
the clergy take off their caps, rise, and stand during it ; 
the celebrant and the ministers rise, and go by the 
shortest way to the Epistle side, place themselves as for 
the Introit; the deacon gives, as usual, the palm to the 
celebrant; the ministers receive it from the inaster of 
ceremonies, and all hold them in their hands; then the 
celebrant, turning a little towards the singers, reads the 
Passion at the Epistle side {Deer. S. R. C, 4 Aug., 1663), 
turning a little, as far as that part which is sung hke the 
Gospel, exclusively ; but when he arrives at the words 
JEniisit &piritum^ he makes no genuflection. 

10. When the celebrant has read the Passion, the 
ministers place themselves behind each other^ and, with 
the celebrant, turn towards the singers. In their right 
hands they hold their palms, and place their left on their 
breast ; at the name of Jesus they bow to the cross ; at 
the words JEmisit Spii^itmn they all kneel, where they 
are, but turned towards the altar; the deacons, how- 
ever, who sing the Passion, kneel towards their books ; 
they all rise at the signal given by the master of cere- 
monies. 

11. At the end of the Passion, the clergy sit down, 
the deacons, by whom it was sung, go to the middle of 
the altar in the same order in which they came, kneel to 
the cross, bow to the clergy, receive their caps from the 



292 PALM-SUNDAY. 

second master of ceremonies, and leaving the sanctuary, 
they cover their heads, go to the sacristy as they came 
out, and the acolytes remove the bo#k-stands from the 
place where the Passion was sung. 

12. In the mean time, the sub-deacon gives his palm 
to the first master of ceremonies, and carries the Missal 
to the Gospel side. The celebrant gives his palm to the 
deacon, who gives it and his own to the master of cere- 
monies, goes to the middle of the altar, and says, Munda 
cor tneum^ Jube Domne henedicere^ as usual ; he then 
reads the Gospel, as in the Missal, without saying Do- 
minus vobiscum^ or making the sign of the cross either 
on himself or on the book ; at the end, the sub-deacon 
answers, JOaus tibi CJiriste. In the mean time, the dea- 
con having taken off his chasuble, puts on the large 
stole, and carries the book to the altar. 

13. The celebrant having read the Gospel, every 
thing is performed as usual, except that the acolytes do 
not carry the candlesticks, but they go, either with their 
hands joined, or, if it be customary, holding the palm in 
their hands; the deacon does not saj, Domi7nis vobis- 
cum, neither does he make the sign of the cross on him- 
self or on the book, but having incensed it, he begins by 
singing. Altera autem, &c., in the usual tone of the 
Gospel. In the mean time, the celebrant holds the 
palm in his right hand ; and at the end of the Gospel 
he kisses the Missal, which the sub-deacon presents at 
these words, Altera die, and Mass is continued as usual. 



OFFICE OF THE TENEBK^. 293 

CHAPTER V. 

OFFICE OF THE TENEBR^, 

ON WEDNESDAY, THUKSDAY, AND FRIDAY, IN HOLY-WEEK. 

Article I. 

Preparations. 

1. At the altar, the carpet, violet altar-veil, six candle- 
sticks with brown wax candles ; the blessed sacrament is 
to be removed to another altar, in case it is usually kept 
at the principal altar. The altar-cards also should be 
removed. 

2. In the place where the Epistle is sung, a triangular 
candlestick, with fifteen candles of brown wax, and a rod 
with the proper instrument to extinguish them. 

3. In the middle of the sanctuary, a book-stand, for 
the lessons that are to be sung. 

Article II. 

From the Commencement to the End of the Office. 

1. At the stated hour, the candles of the altar and 
those of the triangular candlesticks being lighted, at the 
signal given by the master of ceremonies, the clergy 
leave the sacristy. When they are arrived at their 
places in the sanctuary, they all kneel down for a while, 
to say in secret the Aperi Dominej then they arise, and 
say in secret. Pater ^ Ave, and Credo. 

2. At the signal from the presiding clergyman, the 
chanters sing the anthem, Zelus domus/ after which 
they begin the Psalm, and all sit down. 

25* 



294 OFFICE OF THE TENEBE^. 

At the end of every Psalm, Gloria Patri is not said, 
but the anthem is immediately repeated. 

3. At the end of the first Psalm, the acolyte appointed 
to put out the candles, puts out the last candle of the 
triangle at the Gospel side; at the end of the second, 
he extinguishes that on the Epistle side, and so on at 
the end of each Psalm alternately, leaving lighted only 
the candle at the top of the triangle. 

4. After the verses at the end of the third Psalm and 
anthem of each nocturn, the clergy rise, and say, Pater 
nosterj at the end of which, they sit down, and put on 
their caps. 

5. In the mean while, the second master of cere- 
monies invites the clergyman who is to sing the first 
lamentation, by bowing to him ; he then places himself 
at his left, accompanies him to the book-stand, where 
both make a genuflection, and bow to the clergy. Then 
the lamentation is sung, without asking the blessing, and 
ended without saying Tu autem Pomine. Afterwards 
they make a genuflection, bow to the clergy, and the 
master of ceremonies accompanies the singer back to his 
place, and bows to him. The same is to be done for 
each lesson. 

6. Whilst the singers begin the Penedictus^ all rise, 
and stand till they begin to sing Christus^ &c., at the 
verse Ut sine timore; the same acolyte extinguishes the 
last candle of the altar at the Gospel side ; at the verse 
Pn sanctitate^ that at the Epistle side, and so at each of 
the following verses alternately. 

Whilst the Penedictus is sung, all the lights in the 
church are put out, except the lamps before the Blessed 
Sacrament. 

v. When the anthem of the Penedictus is repeated. 



MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 295 

the top candle is taken from the triangular candlestick 
by the acolyte, who carries it to the Epistle side, and 
holds it lighted at the corner of the altar. When they 
begin Christus f actus est, he hides it behind the altar. 

8. At the beginning of Christies, &c., all kneel and 
say in secret, Pater nosterj then the Psalm Miserere is 
either said or sung, at the end of which the presiding 
clergyman recites, without Or emus, the prayer, Hespice 
qiicesumus, but says, in a low and inaudible voice. Qui 
tecum vivit, &g. 

9. At the end of the prayer, the celebrant taps his 
book with his hand, as the others also do; then the 
lighted candle is brought from under the altar, and all 
rise and depart in silence, after the usual genuflection. 

10. The same is to be observed on the two following 
days, except that the altar is without a cloth, altar-veil, 
or carpet; having only the cross and six candlesticks 
on it. 



CHAPTER VI. 

MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 

Article I. 

Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, white vestments for High Mass; 
besides two violet stoles to be used when the priest 
strips the altars ; also a third white tunic, with amice, 
alb, and cincture, but without maniple for the cross- 
bearer. The candlesticks for the acolytes, two censers, 



296 maundy-thuesdat. 

with their incense-boat, and a sufficient number of can- 
dles for the procession ; also torches for the elevation. 

2. The principal altar is to be decorated with the 
most precious ornaments, with a white altar-veil, and if 
it has a tabernacle with the Blessed Sacrament, it is to 
be covered with a canopy of the same color ; the cross 
on the altar is to be covered with a white veil. {Deer. 
S. JR. C, 20 Dec, 1783.) 

3. On the table, besides every thing necessary for 
High Mass, a chalice for the repository, with pall, paten, 
and a white veil and ribbon ; on the paten used for the 
Mass, two Hosts, one of which should be of such a size 
that it may be put in the chalice prepared for the reposi- 
tory ; as many white stoles as will be sufficient for the 
priests who are to go to communion ; a pyx with small 
Hosts ; the communion-cloth, and a white cope for the 
celebrant ; near the table, a clapper, used instead of a 
bell. 

4. In any convenient place, the canopy and the pro- 
cessional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

5. A proper place, or repository, should be prepared 
in some chapel, or on some altar of the church, and 
decently adorned with hangings, flowers, and lights. 
Above the altar, in the most conspicuous and. elevated 
part, should be placed an urn, or tabernacle, that may 
be locked, with a pall in it, that the Blessed Sacrament 
may be kept in for the following day. On the altar, an 
unfolded corporal, with the burse and the key of the urn. 
Near the altar, steps, or a stool, that the deacon may 
reach the door of the tabernacle. 



MASS. 297 

Aeticle IL 

Of the Mass. 

1. This day, at Mass, the Psalm Judica me is not 
said ; nor the Gloria Patri at the Introit and Lavabo. 

2. The celebrant having sung the words, Gloria in 
excelsis Deo^ one of the acolytes rings the small bell till 
the celebrant has finished it ; all the large bells of the 
church are rung, and the organ is played till the singers 
have chanted the whole of the Gloria in excelsis. 

3. At the Sanctus^ and at the elevation, instead of 
bells, a clapper is used. 

4. The Pax is not given ; consequently, after the 
Agnus Dei the sacred ministers change places, the dea- 
con goes to the left of the celebrant, near the Missal, 
and the sub-deacon to the right, to uncover and cover 
the chalice at the proper time, making the usual genu- 
flections. 

5. Whilst the celebrant says the last of the. three 
prayers that precede the communion, the master of 
ceremonies carries from the table to the altar the 
chahce, in which the consecrated Host is to be kept ; also 
the paten, paU, veil, and ribbon, prepared for that pur- 
pose. 

6. After the celebrant has received the sacred blood 
of our Lord, the ministers make a genuflection, change 
places, make another genuflection together with the 
celebrant ; who, rising, takes the Host with reverence 
on the paten, and places it horizontally in the chahce, 
which is presented to him by the deacon, who covers 
it with the pall, over which he places the paten, with 
the inside part turned down, and covers it with the 



298 MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 

veil, fastening it with the ribbon near the knot of the 
chalice. 

7. Then the deacon places it in the middle of the cor- 
poral, and uncovers the pyx ; here all make a genuflec- 
tion ; the ministers then retire to the two corners of the 
altar, bowing, and with their faces turned towards each 
other ; the celebrant turns towards the clergy ; the dea- 
con sings the Confiteor; after which, the celebrant says, 
Misereatur^ &c., and having given the blessing, turns 
towards the altar, and makes a genuflection, whilst the 
deacon and sub-deacon kneel on the platform before 
him. 

8. Whilst the deacon sings the Confiteor^ the second 
master of ceremonies and the censer-bearer go to each 
side of the altar, and make a genuflection there ; they 
kneel, turned towards one another, and wait till the 
ministers have knelt before the celebrant ; they then ex- 
tend the communion-cloth, which the censer-bearer must 
have carried from the table, and hold it with both their 
hands. 

9. The celebrant, holding in his left hand the pix, and 
in his right one of the small Hosts, turns towards the 
people, and having said Agnus De% &c., gives the com- 
munion to the ministers, who, having received it, make 
a genuflection, go to the side of the celebrant, at the 
same time changing their places — viz., the deacon goes 
to the right, and the sub-deacon to the left ; the censer- 
bearer withdraws the communion-cloth, that they may 
have room to pass. Then the clergy receive the com- 
munion as usual ; the priests, however, having on their 
stoles, which must be given them by an acolyte, receive 
it before the others in inferior orders. 

10. After the communion, the celebrant and the min- 



MASS. 299 

isters turn towards the altar, and make a genuflection. 
Should any Hosts remain, they are received by the cele- 
brant. The acolytes, who held the communion-cloth, 
make a genuflection, leave the cloth on the table, and 
retire to their places. 

11. The acolytes return to the sacristy with their 
torches, and distribute the candles to the cleigy, who 
light them immediately. The censer-bearers prepare 
their censers, and the cross-bearer puts on the amice, 
alb, cincture, and white tunic. One of the acolytes car- 
ries to the chapel of the repository the caps of the cele- 
brant and ministers. 

12. The celebrant receives both ablutions without 
leaving the middle of the altar. The ministers change 
places, and make a genuflection at each side of the cele- 
brant, both before and after they change places. When 
they minister to the celebrant, they no longer kiss his 
hand, nor any thing they present to him, or receive from 
him. The sub-deacon wipes the chalice, and covers it; 
leaves room for the celebrant when he says Dominus 
vohiscum; makes a genuflection on the platform, and 
also on the lowest step,. when he passes before the Blessed 
Sacrament ; carries the chalice to the table, and goes 
behind the deacon. 

13. The celebrant, having given the chalice to the sub- 
deacon, makes a genuflection, and goes to read the com- 
munion. He then returns to the middle, kisses the altar, 
makes a genuflection with the deacon, turns towards the 
people from the Gospel side, so as not to turn his back 
to the Blessed Sacrament, and sings Domirius vohisciim. 
Afterwards the celebrant makes a genuflection with the 
ministers, goes to sing the prayer, then returns to the 
middle, kisses the altar, turns towards the people, as before, 



300 MAUNDY-THUESDAY. 

and sings Dominus vohiscum. In the mean time the 
deacon makes another genuflection, turns towards the 
people, as the celebrant also turns ; he sings, Ite^ missa 
est, after which they all make a genuflection. The cele- 
brant says, JPlaceat, &c., and the ministers go to each 
side of the platform, and, kneel down to receive the 
benediction. 

14. The celebrant, after the JPlaceat, kisses the altar, 
and having said Benedicat vos omnipotens Deus, instead 
of bowing, makes a genuflection, and turns in the same 
manner as for the Dominus vohiscum, and without 
turning round, makes another genuflection, and tilrns 
from his left to the Gospel side, to read the Gospel of 
St. John, without making the usual sign of the cross oa 
the altar ; however, he makes it upon himself; when he 
pronounces the words, JEt Verhum caro, he makes a 
genuflection to the Blessed Sacrament. 

15. The Gospel of St. John being ended, the ministers 
go up the platform to each side of the celebrant, and 
having made a genuflection, go to the bench by the 
shortest way. 

Aeticle III. 

Of the Procession. 

1. When the ministers arrive at the bench, they assist 
the celebrant in taking off the maniple and chasuble, 
and putting on the cope ; they also take off their own 
maniples ; after which they go to the lowest step before 
the altar, kneel on both knees on the floor of the sanc- 
tuary, rise, and kneel on the lowest step, where they 
adore the Blessed Sacrament for a short time ; at a sig- 
nal given by the master of ceremonies, they rise. In- 



PROCESSION. 301 

cense is then put into the censer by the celebrant, but 
not blessed. The celebrant, whilst the ministers raise 
his cope, incenses the Blessed Sacrament. Every thing 
is prepared for the procession, which is to be made in 
the church, and not out of doors. {Deer, S. H. C, 6 
Aug., lo91. 

2. Whilst the celebrant incenses the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, the master of ceremonies brings the veil from the 
table, which he puts on the shoulders of the celebrant,, 
as soon as he has returned tlie censer to the deacon. 
The censer-bearers go to each side of the altar, and the 
acolytes, appointed for the purpose, give the canopy to 
the priests dressed in surplices, or to others, according 
to custom. 

3. The celebrant, having put on the veil, goes up to 
the second step, with the ministers at his side; there 
the celebrant and the sub-deacon kneel down, and the 
deacon goes upon the platform to the altar, makes a 
genuflection, takes the chalice, holding it with his right 
hand at the knot, and with his left at the foot, gives it 
to the celebrant, who takes it with his left at the knot, 
and places his right hand over it ; then the deacon covers 
it with both extremities of the veil ; and having made a 
genuflection, goes to the right of the celebrant, who 
rises with the ministers, and goes up with them to the 
platform; there they turn towards the people, the dea- 
con standing at the right, and the sub-deacon at the left 
of the celebrant, and holding up the border of his cope. 
The singers begin the Pange Lingua, 

4. The following order is to be observed in the pro- 
cession : first, the cross-bearer, a sub-deacon dressed in 
tunic, between the acolytes. All three should go to the 
middle of the sanctuary, near the rails, whilst the cele- 

26 



802 MATTNDT-THUESDAY. 

brant incenses the Blessed Sacrament, and remain stand- 
ing with their faces towards the altar. When the Pange 
Lingua is intoned, they turn towards the people, without 
making any genuflection, and walk with gravity towards 
the chapel of the repository. Next to them, the rest of 
the clergy, having made a genuflection on both knees 
before the Blessed Sacrament, walk two by two, carry- 
ing lighted candles in their hands. 

5. Lastly, the sacred ministers descend the steps, 
place themselves under the canopy, and are preceded 
immediately by the censer-bearers, who keep their cen- 
sers in continual and regular motion, and walk after the 
clergy. 

6. During the procession, the celebrant recites, alter- 
nately with the ministers, psalms and hymns, without 
saying Gloria Patri at the end, whilst the chanters con- 
tinue to sing the Pange Lingua, 

1. When the cross-bearer and the acolytes arrive at 
the door of the chapel, they retire a little aside, in order 
that the procession may pass, and they remain there 
standing, with their faces turned towards the procession. 
Those of the clergy who walked next to the cross-bearer 
stop, the first on each side of the chapel, and those who 
follow stop next to them, so that the clergymen who 
walked the last- are the nearest to the altar of the reposi- 
tory ; having divided into two lines, the celebrant, with 
the sacred ministers, passes between them. The censer- 
bearers, on entering the chapel, keep their censers still. 

8. The celebrant and ministers having arrived at the 
altar, ascend the steps; the deacon, kneeling on the plat- 
form, receives the Blessed Sacrament, rises, and after 
the celebrant has adored it, places it on the altar, makes 
a genuflection, and kneels at the right of the celebrant j 



VESPERS — STRIPPING THE ALTARS. 303 

then the singers begin the Tantura ergo. After the two 
first verses have been sung, incense is put into the cen- 
ser, as usual; the deacon, or a priest in surplice and 
stole, places the Blessed Sacrament in the urn, which he 
shuts at the end of the hymn. 

It is prescribed by the Ceremonial of the Bishops (1. 
2, c. 23 and 13), that the deacon, on receiving the chal- 
ice, as has been said above, should not place it on the 
altar, but in the urn, which he should leave open till the 
sacrament is incensed, &c. 

Aeticle IV« 

Of Vespers, and of the Stripping of the Altars. 

1. When the urn or tabernacle is shut, some acolytes 
take the candles from the clergy, who, having prayed 
for a short time, at a signal from the master of cere- 
monies make a genuflection on both knees, and return 
to the sanctuary, the first in dignity walking first, and 
so on, 

2. When they have come to the sanctuary, they 
make a genuflection in the middle, and return to their 
places ; where, standing, they say in secret the Pater 
and Ave ; then the first clergyman in dignity, begins in 
a moderate tone of voice, the first antiphon of Vespers, 
and at the proper time, the Magnificat and the Mise- 
rere / after which, he recites the prayer, Mespice, Sdg, 

3. The clergy having left the chapel of the repository, 
the ministers and the censer-bearers make a genuflection 
on both knees on the floor of the chapel, and having re- 
ceived their caps, go to the sacristy, preceded by the 
censer-bearers and the cross-bearer, with the acolytes 
carrying the candlesticks wdth lighted candles. The 



304 MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 

ministers on each side of the celebrant raise his cope. 
After they have entered the sacristy, they make a pro- 
found bow to the cross, take off their white vestments, 
and the celebrant and deacon put on violet stoles. 

4. Towards the end of the Psalm, Miserere^ the cele- 
brant with the ministei*s walking after each other, and 
having their caps on, go out of the sacristy, preceded by 
the acolytes, and attended by the master of ceremonies. 
On entering the sanctuary, the ministers walk on each 
side of the celebrant, and having given their caps to the 
master of ceremonies, bow to the clergy, make a genu- 
flection to the cross, with the exception of the celebrant, 
who merely bows ; they then go up the platform, and 
the prayer, Mespicey being ended, the celebrant begins 
in a moderate tone, XHviserunt sibi, which is continued 
by the clergy, together with the Psalm, JDeus, Deus 
oneus, &c., which they should recite so slow as to finish 
them when the celebrant comes back to the sanctuaiy, 
after having stripped all the altars. 

5. The celebrant alternately with the ministers recites 
in a low voice the same Psalm, whilst they strip the al- 
tars. They first take off the upper cloth, then the 
others ; and the acolytes remove the front veil, the altar- 
cards, the carpet, and all the other ornaments, leaving 
only the cross and six candlesticks. Afterwards, the 
ministers descend the steps, and having made a genu- 
flection with the acolytes, the celebrant only bowing, 
they bow to the clergy, put on their caps, and walk one 
after the other, preceded by the acolytes, and proceed 
to strip the other altars; when they pass before the 
chapel of the repository, they make a genuflection on 
both knees. 

In churches that have many altars, whilst the cele- 



i 



PKEPARATIONS. 305 

brant strips the grand altar, other priests in sui'plice and 
stole may strip the others, reciting the same Psalm. 

6. After the stripping of the altars, the celebrant hav- 
ing returned to the grand altar, waits there till the anti- 
phon, Diviserimt, is repeated by the clergy ; then, after 
the usual genuflection, they go to the sacristy. 



CHAPTER VII. 
good friday. 

Article L 

Preparations, 

1. In the sacristy, the black vestments, viz.: two 
folded chasubles for the deacon and sub-deacon ; a chas- 
uble for the celebrant, two stoles, three maniples, albs, 
cinctures, and amices. 

2. Also three albs, with cinctures and amices, as 
many black maniples and stoles, and three Missals for 
the deacons, who sing the Passion. Besides, two cen- 
sers and incense-boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and 
tongs ; the torches and candles for the procession. 

3. The altar must be undressed, having, however, six 
candlesticks, and candles of brown wax, and the cross 
covered with a black veil, fastened in such a manner as 
to be easily and gradually taken ofi*. 

4. On the edge of the platform of the altar, three vio- 
let cushions, one on each side, and one in the middle, at 
a proper distance. 

26* 



306 GOOD FRIDAY. 

5. On the side-table, a plain linen cloth, projecting 
only a little on each side ; and on it the cruets in their 
plate ; an altar-card ; a Lavahoj a book-stand with the 
Missal for the celebrant ; another Missal for the minis- 
ters ; a folded altar-cloth, and a large black stole for the 
deacon ; a small vessel with water, covered with a pm-i- 
fier, for the ablution of the fingers in case the priest 
should touch the Blessed Sacrament ; a black burse, con- 
taining a corporal, and a purifier on it ; a black veil for 
the chalice, two candlesticks with brown wax candles 
for the acolytes. The candles should not be lighted. 

6. In any convenient place, the processional cross, 
covered with a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 

T. At the Epistle side, in the sanctuary, a violet car- 
pet with a long white veil, and a violet cushion, on 
which the cross may be placed for the adoration. Also 
three book-stands for the Passion. The minister's bench 
must be without ornaments. 

8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the can- 
opy, the white veil on the side-table. On the altar, the 
key of the urn, or tabernacle; and near the altar, the 
steps, &c. 

Aeticle II. 

From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Uncovering of 

the Cross. 

1. After the ministers are dressed, they proceed with 
the clergy to. the sanctuary, as usual, except that the 
acolytes without candlesticks, and with their hands 
joined, walk before tlie clergy. When they arrive at 
the altar, they make a genuflection and retire to their 
usual places. The ministers at the foot of the altar 



VESTING — UNCOVERING OF CROSS. 307 

give their caps to the master of ceremonies, and make 
a genuflection with the celebrant, without bowing to 
the clergy ; they prostrate themselves, and lay their 
hands and faces on the cushions. 

2. At the same time the clergy kneel down, and bow 
their heads ; the acolytes having knelt and made a short 
prayer, rise, and with the assistance of the second master 
of ceremonies, extend on the altar a cloth, which should 
hang down only very little on each side; then the aco- 
lytes go to their places ; and the master of ceremonies, 
places on the Epistle side of the altar the book-stand, 
with the Missal open. 

3. After a few minutes, the signal being given by the 
master of ceremonies, the sacred ministers and all the 
clergy rise. Immediately, the acolytes remove the 
cushions ; and the celebrant, with the deacon and sub- 
deacon, goes up to the altar ; the celebrant kisses it ; 
the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflection, and 
they all go to the Epistle side, as for the Introit. 

4. At the same time, one of the acolytes receives the 
Missal from the second master of ceremonies, goes, ac- 
companied by him, to the middle of the altar, makes a 
genuflection, bows to the clergy, goes to the place where 
the Epistle is usually sung, and there sings the lesson in 
the tone of the jjrophecies. At the beginning of it the 
clergy sit down, and the celebrant reads it with a low 
voice ; the ministers do not answer, Deo gratias^ at the 
end, but the celebrant immediately reads the Tract. 

5. The acolyte having sung the prophecy, makes a 
genuflection before the altar, bows to the clergy, and 
returns to his place. The singers chant the Tracts dur- 
ing which the celebrant and ministers may sit down. 

6. When the choir sing the words, Operuit codos^ the 



308 GOOD FRIDAY. 

deacon and sub-deacon go, one after the other, behind 
the celebrant. In case they be sitting, they should first 
return to the altar by the shortest way. 

7. After the Trac% the celebrant sings Ore'tnus^ and 
the deacon immediately subjoins, Flectamus genua^ 
kneeling, with all the clergy, the celebrant excepted ; 
then the sub-deacon answers, Levate^ and all rise. 

8. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer, with his 
hands extended, the second acolyte helj^s the sub-dea- 
con to take off his chasuble. The latter, having re- 
ceived the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, 
kneels before the altar, bows to the clergy, and sings 
the lesson, without the title, in the usual tone of the 
Epistle. 

9. The lesson being ended, the sub-deacon kneels to 
the altar, bows to the clergy, and without asking the 
blessing from the celebrant, returns the Missal to the 
second master of ceremonies, puts on his chasuble, and 
returns to his place, as at the Introit, The celebrant 
having read the lesson with the Tracts goes with the 
ministers to sit down. 

10. Whilst the Tract is sung, three book-stands are 
prepared for the Passion, and every thing is done as 
directed in the fourth chapter, witli the following excep- 
tions : the celebrant reads all the Passion at the Epistle 
side, even that part which is sung in the tone of the 
Gospel ; saying before it, Munda cor niewn^ in the 
same place, but profoundly inclined, and omitting Jiibe 
Domyie^ &c. 

11. After the Passion, those who sang it having re- 
turned to the sacristy, the sub-deacon goes down the 
step before the altar, and the deacon to the Epistle side ; 
the latter takes off his chasuble, pats on the large stole, 



BEGINNING OF THE OFFICE. 309 

and carries the Missal to the altar, making the usual 
bows and genuflection. Then kneeling on the platform, 
he says, Munda cor 7neum^ without asking the blessing ; 
he rises, takes the Missal, goes down the steps at the 
right of the sub-deacon, and after the usual genuflection 
and bows, goes to sing the Gosj^el, at which neither the 
censer nor the candlesticks are used. 

12. The Gospel being sung, the sub-deacon does not 
carry the Missal to the celebrant, but shuts it, and gives 
it to the second master of ceremonies ; and all having 
made a genuflection in the middle, the acolytes go to 
their place ; the master of ceremonies lays the Missal on 
the table, and the ministers go, one after the other, be- 
hind the celebrant at the Epistle side. 

13. Then the celebrant begins to sing the first pre- 
amble, with his hands joined ; at the end of it, he ex- 
tends and joins them, bowing to the cross, and sings, 
Oremics; then the deacon adds, Flectamus genua^ and 
the sub-deacon, Levate^ as in n. 7. 

The celebrant immediately sings the prayer in the 
ferial tone, with his hands extended. All the fol- 
lowing preambles and prayers are sung in the same 
manner. 

14. At the prayer which begins with the words, 
Omnipotens seinpiteme Deus^ qui salvas, omnes, &c., 
the acolytes go to spread the violet carpet, covering the 
lowest step of the altar with one end of it, aud extend- 
ing the other on the floor of the sanctuary ; they also 
lay the cushion on the lowest step, and cover the whole 
with the white veil. 

15. All the prayers being ended, the ministers go by 
the shortest way to the bench, where the celebrant and 
the sub-deacon take off their chasubles, go to the Epistle 



310 GOOD FRIDAY. 

side and stop before the lowest step, turned towards the 
people. 

16. Then the master of ceremonies and the deacon go 
up to the altar, having first made a genuflection on the 
lowest step. The master of ceremonies takes the cross, 
and gives it to the deacon, who, having received it, 
reverently carries it by the shortest way to the cele- 
brant, having the image of the crucifix turned towards 
himself; the celebrant receives it with great respect, 
holding the crucifix turned towards the people. 

Article III. 
From the Uncovering of the Gross to the Procession. 

1. The celebrant, standing on the lowest step at the 
Epistle side, having the sub-deacon at his left, and the 
deacon at his right, turned towards the people, holds 
the cross in his left hand, and with the right uncovers 
the top of it, as far as the cross-piece, assisted, if neces- 
sary, by the ministers, raises it to the height of his eyes, 
and, with a grave and moderate voice, sings, JEJcce lig- 
num Crucis^ from the book, which one of the acolytes 
holds open before him. 

2. At these words, the clergy, having uncovered their 
heads, rise ; the celebrant, with the ministers and the 
acolytes, continues to sing the whole anthem. At the 
end of it, the choir and the clergy, kneeling on both 
knees, and bowing, answer, Yenite adoremus. The 
ministers also and all the others, the celebrant excepted, 
kneel at the same time, and bow to the cross. 

3. The words Venite adoremus being sung, the cele- 
brant and the ministers ascend in the same order as 
before to the platform, and stop at the Epistle side. 



UNCOVERING OF THE CROSS. 311 

The celebrant uncovers the right arm and the head of 
the ci-iicifix, and raising his voice one tone higher than 
the first time, sings, Ecce lAgnum^ and every thing is 
done as before. 

4. Then the celebrant and the ministers go to the 
middle of the altar, in the same order ; there he uncov- 
ers the whole cross, giving the veil to the sub-deacon, 
who gives it to one of the acolytes, by whom it is placed 
on the side-table ; afterwards, raising his voice one tone 
higher, he sings, Ecce Lignmn^ and the rest is done as 
above. 

5. The clergy having risen, the celebrant, accompanied 
by the master of ceremonies, who raises his vestments 
as he goes up or down, carries the cross, without making 
any bow, to the place prepared for it, and kneeling, puts 
it on the cushion and veil; then rises, makes a genuflec- 
tion, and goes to the bench. 

6. Whilst the celebrant kneels, the clergy rise, and 
the ministers, making a genuflection on the platform 
towards the cross, go by the shortest way to the bench. 
The second acolyte uncovers the processional cross, and 
another acolyte uncovers the other crosses that are in 
the church and in the sacristy, but not the images. 

7. When the celebrant and ministers arrive at the 
bench, they take off" their maniples and their shoes. 
The ministers remain at the bench, and the celebrant, 
attended by the master of ceremonies, goes to venerate* 
the cross. 

8. Towards the extremity of the sanctuary, the cele- 
brant kneels before the cross, and makes a short prayer ; 
then rises, and about the middle of the sanctuary kneels 

* The technical term is adoration : but to prevent misconception, we 
use the one less likely to be misinterpreted. 



312 GOOD FRIDAY. 

again, and prays in the same manner ; he does the same 
for the third time at the foot of the cross, which he 
humbly kisses. Lastly, he rises, makes a genuflec- 
tion to the cross, returns by the shortest way to the 
bench, puts on his shoes, with the assistance of the aco- 
lytes, and, assisted by the ministers, puts on his chasuble 
and maniple ; then he sits down, and puts on his cap. 

9. The ministers bow to the celebrant, and, attended 
by the second master of ceremonies, go to venerate the 
cross, observing what has been said in regard to the 
celebrant, n. 8. The deacon kisses the cross before the 
sub deacon. 

10. After the ministers, the clergy go, two by two, 
first the priests, then those in inferior orders ; and 
lastly, the laymen, if custom allows them to enter the 
sanctuary. 

Otherwise, a priest, with a surplice and a black stole, 
carries another crucifix to some other place for the ven- 
eration of the people, laying it on the cushion, as above, 
and the same priest removes it, if it be in the w^ay of 
the procession. 

Another method might be followed where the con- 
gregation is very numerous, viz., that one or two clergy- 
men, in surplice and stole, should present the crucifix to 
be kissed at the railing. 

11. During the whole time of the veneration of the 
cross, the choir sings the Improperia. It is not neces- 
sary to continue them after it, nor to sing them all. 

12. The ministers having returned to the bench, put 
on their shoes and maniples; the sub-deacon resumes 
also his chasuble, and both sit down at the side of the 
celebrant. Then one of the acolytes brings the Missal 
from the table, bows to the celebrant, opens it at the 



UNCOVEEING OF THE CROSS. 313 

place where the Improperia are found, and holds it so 
that the celebrant and the ministers may read them 
alternately. 

13. When the acolytes have venerated the cross, the 
first of them lights the candles on the table and on the 
altar, and the second goes to hold the Missal before the 
ministers in the place of the censer-bearer, till they have 
finished the Improperia ; then he shuts it, bows to the 
celebrant, puts it on the table, and returns to his place. 
The censer-bearers having venerated the cross, the second 
of them goes to assist the cross-bearer to put on the 
amice, alb, cincture, and chasuble, and the first prepares 
the censers. 

If there be no sub-deacon besides the one that minis- 
ters to the celebrant, any acolyte dressed in surplice 
may cai-ry the cross. 

14. Towards the end of the veneration, the deacon 
rises, bows to the celebrant, and carries to the altar the 
burse with the corporal and purifier. When he has 
reached the platform he kneels to the cross, unfolds the 
corporal as usual, and places the purifier near it, at the 
Epistle side. At the same time the master of ceremo- 
nies carries the Missal with its stand to the Gospel side, 
kneeling to the cross. The deacon having imfolded the 
corporal, makes again a genuflection to the cross, and 
returns by the shortest way to the right of the celebrant, 
sits down and covers his head. 

15. After the veneration, the deacon, invited by the 
master of ceremonies, takes off his cap, rises, bows to 
the celebrant, and attended by the master of ceremonies, 
goes to the place in which the cross was laid, makes a 
genuflection, takes it up with both his hands, and as- 
sisted by the master of ceremonies, carries it to the 

37 



314 GOOD FRIDAY. 

altar, and places it between the candlesticks, makes a 
genuflection, and returns to the side of the celebrant. 
At the same time the celebrant, the sub-deacon, and all 
the clergy kneel down at their places. 

16. Then the celebrant, ministers, and clergy rise, and 
sit down. In the mean while an acolyte removes the 
veil, cushion, and carpet. 

Article IV. 
Of the Procession. 

1. The cross being placed on the altar by the deacon, 
the censer-bearers go to the middle of the sanctuary, 
followed by the cross-bearer, who walks between the 
acolytes with the candlesticks ; only the censer-bearers 
make a genuflection ; then they all proceed to the re- 
pository by the shortest way; the clergy follow them, 
first those in inferior orders, then the priests, lastly the 
ministers, one after the other, with their hands joined 
and their caps on, all, the celebrant not excepted, 
making a genuflection before the cross. 

2. On arriving at the repository, the censer-bearers 
make a genuflection in the middle on both knees, and 
retire to the Epistle side ; the cross-bearer and the aco- 
lytes stop at the entrance of the chapel on the Epistle 
side, as yesterday ; all the others, after making a genu- 
flection on both knees, place themselves as yesterday. 

3. The sacred ministers, at the entrance of the reposi- 
tory, give their caps to the master of ceremonies, who 
gives them to an acolyte to carry to the sanctuary, and 
place them on the bench of the ministers. Then the 
deacon passes to the right, and the sub-deacon to the 
left of the celebrant. When they arrive before the 



UNCOVERING OF THE CROSS. 315 

altar, they make a genuflection on both knees, rise, 
kneel on the lowest step of the altar, and pray for a few 
moments ; in the mean time candles are distributed to 
the clergy, who light them. 

4. The signal being given by the master of ceremo- 
nies, the deacon rises, makes a genuflection, and goes to 
open the urn, or tabernacle, and having made another 
genuflection, returns. to the right of the celebrant, who 
puts incense in both censers without blessing, and kneel- 
ing with the ministers, incenses the Blessed Sacrament. 
The canopy is given to be carried either to priests 
dressed in surplice, or to other persons, according to 
custom. 

5. After the incensing of the Blessed Sacrament, the 
master of ceremonies puts the veil on the shoulders of 
the celebrant ; the deacon takes the Blessed Sacrament 
from the urn, and gives it to the celebrant, as on yester- 
day, who, having covered it with the lower parts of the 
veil, turns towards the people, having the deacon on his 
right and the sub- deacon on his left hand. The singers, 
•still kneeling, intone Yexilla Hegis^ &c. The proces- 
sion moves off"; first, the cross-bearer with the acolytes, 
without making any genuflection ; then the others, who 
make a genuflection as yesterday. When they are 
arrived at the sanctuary, the cross-bearer leaves the cross 
at the Epistle side, makes a genuflection, and goes to 
the sacristy to take off the sacred vestments. The 
clei'gy, on arriving at the sanctuary, go to their place, 
and remain there kneeling. 

6. The sacred ministers, being arrived at the high 
altar, the deacon receives the Blessed Sacrament from 
the celebrant, and having placed it on the corporal, un- 
ties the ribbon, and extends the veil, as at the beginning 



316 GOOD FEIDA.Y. 

of Mass ; then he makes a genuflection, and returns to 
the right of the celebrant, from whose shoulders the 
veil should have been removed in the mean time by the 
sub-deacon. Incense is put into the censer, and the 
Blessed Sacrament should be incensed as usual. 

Y. The clergymen who carried the canopy leave it 
aside, take candles, and kneel down before the altar, 
forming a semicircle till after the communion. If the 
canopy is carried by laymen, they remain kneeling at 
the rails, holding lighted candles in their hands. 

8. The censer-bearers, after the incensing, make a 
genuflection on both knees in the middle, and the second 
of them goes to the sacristy; the first remains at the 
Epistle side. 

Article V. 

Of the remaining part of the Office. 

1. When the celebrant has incensed the Blessed 
Sacrament, he goes up to the altar with the ministers. 
They make a genuflection, bending one knee ; the dea- 
con takes the veil from the chalice, and gives it to the 
master of ceremonies; he removes also the paten and 
the pall from the chalice. Then he takes the paten w^ith 
his right hand, raises it a little from the corporal, and 
the celebrant, taking the chalice, lets the consecrated 
Host fall gently on the paten, taking care not to touch 
it; but should he happen to do so, he washes his fingers 
in the small vase prepared for this purpose, and the dea- 
con presents to him the purifier. Then the celebrant 
receives with both his hands the paten from the deacon, 
who kisses neither it nor the celebrant's hand; and 
without making any cross, or saying any thing, the cele- 



REMAINING PART OF THE OFFICE. 317 

brant places the Host on the corporal, laying the paten 
also on the corporal at the Epistle side. 

2. The Host being placed on the corporal, the sub- 
deacon makes a genuflection, goes to the right of the 
deacon, makes another genuflection, and receiving the 
cruets from an acolyte, takes that which contains wine, 
and gives it to the deacon, who puts some of the wine 
into the chalice, taking care not to place it on the altar, 
nor to wipe it with the purifier. Then the sub-deacon 
puts a little water into the chalice, without asking the 
blessing of the celebrant, who does not give it, nor say 
the prayer, Deus qui hunicmce^ &c. This done, the aco- 
lyte carries back the cruets to the side-table ; the sub- 
deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, making the 
usual genuflections, and the deacon presents the chalice, 
without kissing it, to the celebrant, who, without making 
any cross, or saying any prayer, j^laces it on the cor- 
poral, and it is covered with the pall by-the deacon. 

3. Then the censer-bearer, having made a genuflection 
below the steps, goes to the platform, and the incense is 
put into the censer as usual, but without blessing or 
kissing the censer, or the hand of the celebrant. The 
sacred oblations are incensed as usual, with the words, 
Incensum istud; likewise, the cross and the altar, with 
the customary genuflections, and with the w^ords, Diri- 
gatur D online^ <fec., Accendat^ &c. At the Ej^istle cor- 
ner the deacon receives the censer from the celebrant, 
and gives it to the censer-bearer, who carries it to the 
sacristy, as it is not used again. 

4. The celebrant, having given the censer to the dea- 
con, descends one step on the Epistle side, turned 
towards the people, and washes his hands, the sub-dea- 
con pouring the water, and the deacon presenting him 

27* 



318 GOOD FRIDAY. 

the towel; the psalm, JLavaho^ is not said; the celebrant 
and the ministers go to the middle of the altar, and the 
acolytes carry every thing back to the side-table. 

5. The celebrant and ministers arriving at the middle, 
make a genuflection ; the deacon goes to the left of the 
celebrant, near the Missal, and the celebrant, placing his 
hands joined on the altar, and bowing, says with a low 
but audible A^'oice the prayer, In spiritu humilitatis^ &c. 
He then kisses the altar, makes a genuflection, and turn- 
ing his face towards the people, and his back to the 
Gospel side, says. Orate fratres; he continues what fol- 
lows in a low voice, and without going round, returns to 
the middle. The ministers do not answer, /Suscipiat, &c. 

6. The celebrant having said the Orate fratres, &c., 
sings, in a ferial tone. Or emus : Prceceptis sahitaribus 
moniti^ with his hands joined, and the later noster with 
his hands extended. At the beginning of the JPater^ 
the deacon makes a genuflection, and goes behind the 
celebrant. The master of ceremonies takes his place by 
the Missal. 

7. At the end of the Pater noster the choir answers, 
Sed libera nos a nialo^ and the celebrant says, in a low 
voice. Amen, continuing to hold his hands extended, and 
not signing himself with the paten. Then he subjoins 
in the same tone of voice. Libera no8 qucesumus Dom- 
ine, &c. After which, the choir answers, Amen. 

8. The celebrant makes a genuflection, places the 
paten under the Host, and holding with his left hand the 
paten on the altar, with his right raises the Host, so that 
it may be seen by all ; without, however, taking it out 
of the limits of the corporal. In the mean while the 
ministers kneel on the platform ; they do not raise the 
lower part of the celebrant's chasuble; the Blessed 



REMAINING PAKT OF THE OFFICE. 319 

Sacrament is not incensed. One of the acolytes sounds 
the clapper. 

9. Whilst the celebrant lays the Host on the paten, 
the ministers rise, go to his side, and with him make a 
genuflection. Then the deacon uncovers the chalice, the 
celebrant takes the Host, divides it as usual into three 
parts, without making the sign of the cross, or saying 
any thing, and places the smallest part in the chalice. 

10. The deacon having covered the chalice, the cele- 
brant, with the ministers, make a genuflection. The 
ministers change places, and make another genuflection. 
Then the celebrant, omitting the Agnus Dei and the 
two first prayers before the communion, says only the 
third, which begins, Perceptio corporis^ &q., holding his 
hands joined on the altar; when he has finished the 
prayer, he makes a genuflection with the ministers, and 
rising says, Partem coelestem^ then takes the paten and 
Host, and communicates, having previously said, as 
usual, Domine non sum dignus. 

11. After the communion of the sacred body, the 
sub-deacon uncovers the chalice, the celebrant and the 
ministers make a genuflection, the fragments are col- 
lected and put into the chalice by the celebrant, who, 
without saying any thing, or making the sign of the 
cross, consumes the wine with the consecrated particle, 
the ministers in the mean time bowing profoundly. 

12. One of the acolytes carries the cruets to the altar; 
the sub-deacon gives the wine and water to the cele- 
brant, who takes the usual ablutions without saying any 
thing. In the mean time the clergy sit down, and put 
out their candles. 

13. After the ablution, the ministers change places, 
making a genuflection as they pass by the middle ; the 



320 GOOD FKIDAY. 

sub-deacon goes to the Missal, and the deacon to the 
side-table ; where, having taken off the large stole, and 
put on the folded chasuble, he returns to the platform 
at the right of the celebrant; who, having taken the 
last ablution, says in the middle, with a low voice, with 
his head inclined, and with his hands joined before his 
breast, the prayer, Quod ore sumpsimus. The sub-dea- 
con, as usual, wipes the chalice, and covers it with the 
veil, which one of the acolytes must have brought to the 
altar, and carries it to the side-table, making a genuflec- 
tion to the cross as he passes by the middle ; then he 
returns to the left of the celebrant, and closes the Missal. 

14. The signal being given by the master of cere- 
monies, the celebrant and the ministers bow to the cross, 
go down to the foot of the altar, make a genuflection, 
together with the master of ceremonies, and the acolytes 
who do not carry the candlesticks ; and having bowed 
to the clergy, put on their caps and go to the sacristy, 
where they take off the sacred vestments. 

15. The sacred ministers having left the sanctuary, 
Vespers are recited as yesterday. In the mean time, 
the censer-bearers remove from the altar the book-stand 
with the Missal, and the towel, so that it be left quite 
bare, with no other ornament than the cross and the six 
candlesticks. They carry every thing to the sacristy. 

16. After Vespers, the clergy make a genuflection to 
the cross, and return to the sacristy. Then the candles 
on the altar are extinguished. 



PREPARATIONS. 321 



CHAPTER VIII. 
HOLT SATURDAY. 

Article I. 

Things to he Prepared. 

1. At a convenient and proper time, the church is 
adorned with white and precious ornaments. The high 
altar is prepared as on the greatest solemnities. The 
relic-cases may be placed between the candlesticks, when 
the ministers put on white vestments. A white altar- 
veil should be under another of violet color, which is to 
be removed only before the beginning of Mass ; at that 
time, also, the carpet should be placed on the platform 
and steps of the altar, w^hich, during the first part of the 
sacred office, should be left bare. 

2. The lamps of the church should be so fixed as to be 
easily lighted at the proper time. The images of the 
church should be kept covered till the beginning of the 
litany. The tabernacle should have a white canopy un- 
der another of violet color, which latter ought to be re- 
moved, when the violet veil is taken away from the 
front of the altar. 

3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments of violet color 
for the ministers, viz., a cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 

!■ amice for the celebrant; two folded chasubles, with two 
maniples, a stole, two cinctures, albs, and amices for the 
ministers. Under the same, or in any other place, the 
usual white vestments for the celebrant and the minis- 
ters. The censer with the incense-boat, the vase for the 



322 HOLT SATUKDAY. 

holy water with the sprinkle, a plate with five large 
grains of incense, the processional cross, the candlesticks 
with white candles for the acolytes. 

4. At the baptismal font, every thing should be 
cleaned ; any water remaining there ought to be put 
into the piscina. A table is to be placed near it, and 
covered with a linen cloth ; on it the vessels containing 
the oil of catechumens, and the sacred chrism in a plate ; 
a vessel with water, and a basin ; a towel on a plate ; 
some slices of bread and lemon, likewise on a plate ; 
some cotton on another plate ; an empty vessel for holy 
water, with the sprinkle. 

If it is customary to distribute among the people the 
water blessed on this day, a large vessel might be pre- 
pared and adorned before the baptismal font, and filled 
with water, which is, in that case, blessed ; before the 
oils are mixed with the water^ the baptismal fonts are 
filled with part of the water blessed in the large vessel, 
and then the oils are put into the water contained in 
the baptismal fonts, not into that contained in the large 
vessel. Some small vessels ought to be prepared to 
take the water from the large vessel, to put it into the 
fonts. 

5. The bench of the ministers must be adorned as on 
the greatest solemnities, and covered with a violet cloth, 
which is removed when the ministers change their vest- 
ments. On this second cloth is to be placed the violet 
chasuble and maniple for the celebrant, also another 
violet maniple for the deacon, and a cap for the sub- 
deacon. 

6. At the Gospel side, if there is a puli^it, the Exultet 
should be sung there ; if not, a book-stand must be pre- 
pared; and either the pulpit or book-stand must be 



BENEDICTION OF THE FIRE. 323 

covered witti a white veil, and a cushion placed on it for 
the Exultet. On the same side should be a stand for 
the paschal candle, and there also near the altar the 
paschal candle itself; also a stand for the triple candle, 
and on the Epistle side a book-stand uncovered for the 
prophecies. 

v. On the side-table, every thing necessary for High 
Mass; the burse and veil of the chalice, and over them 
the white veil, which must be covered with another vio- 
let veil. Xear the table, three violet cushions for the 
ministers during the litany. 

8. In the porch, or if the church have none, in any 
other convenient place, a table covered with a white 
linen cloth, and on it a white dalmatic, stole, and man- 
iple for the deacon, a violet maniple for the sub-deacon, 
a Missal, a j^late containing a small candle, and matches 
to light it. 

9. A large chafing-pan, with pieces of dry wood so ar- 
ranged that fire may be easily hghted, which must be 
done before the ceremony, and be struck from a flint ; 
near it, tongs to put the new fire into the censer. 

10. Near the table, the triple candle on its rod, 
adorned with flowers, at the place the stock of the candle 
is connected with the rod. The candle is to be made so 
as to have one common stock, out of which proceed 
three branches, disposed in a triangular form, at the 
same distance from each other. 

Aeticle II. 

From the Benediction of the New Fire to the Exultet. 

1. The sacred ministers being vested as in chap, iv., 
with this difierence only, that they do not wear their 



824 HOLY SATURDAY. 

maniples, and the signal being given by the master of 
ceremonies, the sub-deacon takes the processional cross, 
and the procession for the benediction of the new fire is 
arranged in the following order : first, three acolytes ; 
the one who is in the middle carries the vessel with holy 
w^ater, and the sprinkle ; the one at the right carries the 
plate with the five grains of incense, and the one at the 
left carries the censer without fire, and the boat with in- 
cense, and the small spoon within. The sub-deacon fol- 
lows, carrying the cross ; after him the clergy, two by 
two ; lastly, the celebrant, with the deacon at his left. 
The latter, with all the clergy, must have their heads 
uncovered. As they j^ass before the cross of the high 
altar, they all make a genuflection, with the exception of 
the cross-bearer and the celebrant; the latter only bows 
to the cross. 

2. When the procession arrives at the porch, the sub- 
deacon places himself by the table, turning his back to 
the door, or to the walls of the church, holding the cross, 
with the image of the crucifix turned towards the cele- 
brant. The clergy divide into two lines, on each side of 
the sub-deacon, so that the highest in dignity amongst 
them may be nearest to the celebrant, who places him- 
self opposite the cross, with the deacon at his right. 
The deacon receives the cap from the celebrant, kissing 
his hand and the cap, and assists him in raising the 
border of his cope when he makes the sign of the cross, 
or uses the sprinkle or the censer, and turning the leaves 
of the book. 

3. The first acolyte having laid on the table the ^^ase 
with holy water, takes the Missal, and holds it open be- 
fore the celebrant. The two other acolytes stand at 
the right of the deacon, but a little behind him, 



BENEDICTION OF THE FIRE. 325 

and the master of ceremonies at the left of the cele- 
brant. 

4. All being so arranged, the celebrant, with his hands 
joined, says, in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum^ and 
the three prayers that follow, for the benediction of 
the new fire, which is to be made before any other. 
(Deer. S. B. (7., 12th April, 1755.) At the end of each 
prayer the clergy answer. Amen, 

5. Then the acolyte who holds the plate with the 
grains of incense comes before the celebrant, who says 
the fourth prayer for the blessing of the five grains of 
incense ; and in the mean while the censer-bearer puts 
some of the hqw fire into the censer, and returns to his 
place. 

6. After the fourth prayer, the first acolyte shuts the 
book, and having placed it on the table, takes the vase 
with holy water, and joins the other acolytes. The 
celebrant puts incense as usual into the censer, and 
blesses it, saying, Ah illo benedicaris^ &c. Then the 
deacon, having received from the first acolyte the 
sprinkle, kisses it, and gives it to the celebrant, kissing 
his hand ; the celebrant thrice sprinkles, first the five 
grains of incense, then the fire, saying, Asperges me, 
without the Psalm and Gloria Patri^ and having re- 
ceived the censer, incenses likewise, first the five grains, 
then the fire. 

*J. After the incensing, the first acolyte leaves the 
holy-water vase on the table, and with one of the 
matches prepared for that purpose lights the small 
candle from the new fire ; the second acolyte laying the 
plate with the five grains of incense on the table, to- 
gether with the second master of ceremonies, assists the 
deacon to take off his violet vestments, and put on the 

28 



326 HOLY SATURDAY. 

white, and carries the maniple to the sub-deacon, who 
puts it on. Then he takes again the plate with the five 
grains, and returns to the right of the censer-bearer. 

8. The deacon having put on the white vestments, 
goes to the right of the celebrant, to assist at the bless- 
ing of the incense for the procession and the JExultet, 
which is performed as usual. Then he takes the triple 
candle with both his hands, and at a signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, the procession advances in the 
following order : 

9. First the censer-bearer, slowly moving his censer, 
and at his riglit the second acolyte, who carries the five 
grains of incense ; the sub-deacon follows with the cross ; 
then the clergy, two by two ; after them the deacon, 
carrying the triple candle, having at his left the first 
acolyte, with the lighted candle ; last of all, the cele- 
brant, with his hands joined, and near him the master 
of ceremonies ; all walk with their heads uncovered, the 
celebrant alone excepted. 

10. During the procession, an acolyte carries the cap 
and the violet vestments of the deacon to the bench of 
the ministers, and the other things to the sacristy. 

11. As the celebrant enters the church, the second 
master of ceremonies ' gives a signal to the clergy to 
stop ; and the deacon bends the rod of the triple candle 
towards the first acolyte, who lights one" of the three 
candles; then the deacon raises the rod, and bends one 
knee, and all the clergy do the same, the cross-bearer 
excepted ; the celebrant uncovers his head before he 
makes the genuflection. The deacon sings Lumen 
Christie in such a tone of voice that it may be raised 
a tone higher twice, and the clergy answer, Deo gratias. 
Then they all rise, and the procession continues to ad- 



PROPHECIES. 327 

vance. When they reach the middle of the church, the 
same ceremony is again performed ; and it is repeated 
the third time before the steps of the altar. 

12. After the Deo gratias has been answered for the 
third time by the clergy, they all go to their places. 
On arriving before the altar, the censer-bearer stops at 
the Gospel side, the acolyte, with the grains of incense, 
at the Epistle side, and the cross-bearer at the right of 
the censer-bearer. The first acolyte having extinguished 
the small candle, receives the triple candle from the 
deacon, and places himself at the left of the second aco- 
lyte ; and the deacon, retiring a little towards the Gospel 
side, and tm'ning from his right side, makes room for 
the celebrant, who goes up to the platform, and stands 
at the Epistle corner. 

Article III. 
Ft^om the McuUet to the Prophecies, 

1. The celebrant, on arriving at the Epistle side, turns 
towards the altar; the second master of ceremonies 
gives the Missal to the deacon, who, kneeling on the 
platform, without saying Munda cor meum^ asks as 
usual the blessing of the celebrant, who gives it, saying 
as usual, Domine sit in corde tuo^ &c., but instead of say- 
ing Evangelium suum^ says, Suum paschale proeconium^ 
making the usual sign of the cross, but without giving 
his hand to be kissed. 

2. The deacon having received the blessing, goes 
down to the foot of the altar, between the cross-bearer 
and the acolyte who carries the triple candle, where, 
having made a genuflection with the acolytes (the cross- 
bearer should not make it), and bowed to the clergy, 



328 HOLY SATURDAY. 

they go, one after the other, to the place prepared at 
the Gospel side, and place themselves in the following 
order : the deacon in the middle, having at his right the 
sub-deacon, who turns the image of the crucifix towards 
the celebrant and the censer-bearer ; and at his left 
hand having the acolyte with the triple candle, and the 
acolyte with the grains of incense. The master of cere- 
monies places himself behind the deacon, who, with all 
the others, are turned towards the book. 

3. When they have arrived at the book-stand, and 
placed themselves in the order already mentioned, the 
deacon lays the book upon it, and opens it ; then, with- 
out making the sign of the cross on himself, and 
without saying Dominus vohisciim^ he incenses it 
as for the Gospel, and, with his hands joined, he 
sings the Mcultet ; during which the clergy remain 
standing, as also the celebrant, who turns towards the 
deacon. 

4. The deacon having said the words, Curvat imperia^ 
stops, the clergy sit down, but not the celebrant, and the 
acolyte who holds the plate with the five grains ap- 
proaches the deacon, who, assisted by the master of cere- 
monies, goes with them to place the five grains in the 
paschal candle (which one of the acolytes holds), in the 
form of a cross, in this order, 1 which being done, 
they return to their place, 4 2 5 and the clergy 
rise. The acolyte places the 3 plate in which 
were the five grains on the side-table, and takes a small 
candle not lis^hted. 

5. The deacon having returned to the Missal, con- 
tinues the Mcultet^ and having sung the words Hutilans 
ignis accendit, the clergy sit down ; he goes with the 
acolyte that carries the triple candle, to light the paschal 



PROPHECIES. 329 

candle with one of them, and returns to continue the 
McidteL The clergy rise. 

6. The acolyte places the triple candle on the stand 
prepared for it near the altar, and the paschal caudle is 
fixed in its candlestick, so that the cross be turned 
towards the celebrant. 

V. The deacon having sung the words, Apis mater 
eduxit^ stops a while, and the first acolyte lights his 
small candle, either from the paschal candle or from the 
triple candle, and lights the lamps of th« sanctuary; the 
deacon continues the Exultet^ and bows at the name of 
the Pope. 

8. After the Mcultet^ the clergy sit down ; the sub- 
deacon leaves the cross at its place, the deacon imme- 
diately shuts the Missal, and leaves it on the stand, and 
both, with their hands joined, make a genuflection in 
the middle, and go to the bench — the celebrant also 
going thither at the same time ; the latter, assisted by 
the sub-deacon, takes off his cope, and puts on the violet 
maniple and chasuble. 

9. The deacon, assisted by the first acolyte, takes off 
his white vestments, and puts on violet ; then the cele- 
brant and the ministers go by the shortest way to the 
Epistle side, as for the Introit. The second master of 
ceremonies prepares, in the middle of the sanctuary, a 
book-stand without any covering, and a Missal on it for 
the prophecies. 

Aeticle IV. 

From the Prophecies to the JBenediction of the Baptismal 

Font. 

1. When the ministers have arrived at the Epistle 
side, the second master of ceremonies invites ths clergy- 

28* 



330 HOLT SATURDAY. 

man who is to sing the first prophecy, as in chapter V., 
except that before he leaves the book-stand with the 
clergyman, he waits till the deacon has said, Flectamus 
genua (when there is no Tract)^ then they make a gen- 
uflection with all the clergy, and rise at the word Levate. 
Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer, the second master 
of ceremonies invites him who is to sing the second 
prophecy, doing as has been already said; and so like- 
wise for all the other prophecies. 

2. The clergy sit dovvn whilst the prophecies are sung, 
rise at the pi-ayers; the celebrant reads the prophecies 
in a low voice, and sings the prayers in a ferial tone, 
with his hands extended, the ministers standing behind 
him, one after the other ; and the deacon, immediately 
after the celebrant has said, Oremus^ sings, Flectamus 
genua^ and the sub-deacon, Levate. After the prayers, 
the ministers go up near the celebrant, as for the Introit. 

3. After the last prophecy and prayer, the second 
master of ceremonies removes from the middle of the 
sanctuary the book-stand with the Missal, and the cele- 
brant, with the ministers, go by the shortest way to the 
bench, where the celebrant, assisted by the ministers, 
takes off his maniple and chasuble, and puts on the cope; 
and the ministers take off their maniples. 

Article V. 

From the heginning of the Benedictio7i of the Bap- 
tismal Font, to the beginning of Mass.^ 

1. The first acolyte, soon after the celebrant has put 
on his cope, takes the paschal candle from its candlestick, 

♦ This article has been added by the translator. 



BENEDICTION OF THE BAPTISMAL FONTS. 331 

and goes with it to the middle of the sanctuary ; like- 
wise the sub-deacon takes the cross, and places himself 
immediately before the first acolyte ; the celebrant, with 
the deacon on his left, goes before the steps of the altar, 
in the middle. At a signal given by the master of cer- 
emonies, the first acolyte makes a genuflection, turns 
towards the people, and walks slowly to the baptismal 
fonts, the sub-deacon carrying the cross, without making 
the genuflection, follows him ; then the singers ; and 
after them the rest of the clergy make a genuflection in 
the middle, and follow them ; last of all, the celebrant, 
with his head covered, and the deacon at his left, ac- 
companied by the master of ceremonies. On the way, 
the tract, Sicut cervus^ is sung by the choir. Arrived 
at the font, the cross-bearer stops at one side, near the 
door or entry, the first acolyte at his left ; the clergy 
divide into two lines, those in inferior orders remaining 
near the door, and those in higher dignity near the font. 
Before the celebrant enters, he stops, takes off" his cap, 
and the second acolyte bringing, and holding before him 
the Missal, he says, in a ferial tone, Dominus voMscum^ 
&c., and the following prayer. Then he goes, with the 
deacon at his left, to the font, and places himself so as 
to be turned towards the cross, and the clergy. The 
second acolyte follows him with the Missal, and having 
opened it, the celebrant begins the blessing of the font, 
saying, in a ferial tone, Dominus voMscwm^ with the fol- 
lowing prayers; in concluding it, he sings, JPer omnia 
scGCula^ in the tone of the ferial preface, with what fol- 
lows ; after the words, Gratiam de Spiritii Sancto^ the 
celebrant divides the water in form of a cross, the dea- 
con holding up the side of his cope, and ofiering him 



332 HOLT SATURDAY. 

the towel to wipe his hands, which one of the acolytes 
should have brought on a plate. 

2. After the words, Inficiendo corrutnpat^ the cele- 
brant touches the water with his right hand, which he 
afterwards wipes, as before. At the words. Per Deum 
•fi vivum^ Per Deum *J« vermn^ Per Deum "f" sanctum^ 
he makes the sign of the cross three times on the water. 
Afier the words Super te ferehatur^ he divides the water 
with his hand, and throws some of it out, towards the 
four parts of the world, in this form, 1 after the 
words Penignus adspira, he breathes thrice 3 4 upon 
the water, in the form of a cross. At the 2 words 
Mentibus efficaces, the first acolyte carries the paschal 
candle to the deacon, that he may give it to the celebrant, 
who dips it into the water at three different times, but 
each successive time he dips it deeper, and sings, one tone 
higher, the words Descendat in hanc. Then breathing 
thrice upon the water in this form 'h he goes on with 
the Preface. After the words Foecundet effectu^ the 
paschal candle is taken out of the water, wiped, and 
given back to the first acolyte, who goes to his place 
near the cross-bearer. The celebrant continues what 
folio w^s in the tone of the Preface, as far as the words 
Per Dominum^ exclusively, which, wnth the following 
words, he only recites ; the minister answers. Amen. 
Then the people are sprinkled with w^ater taken out of 
the font by a priest in surplice and stole. If the water 
is blessed in another vessel, the font is filled with it ; 
but if it is blessed in the font, some of it is taken out to 
satisfy the devotion of the people, and to bless the 
houses and other places. 

3. After this, the celebrant receives from the deacon 
the oil of the catechumens, and pours some of it into 



BENEDICTION OF THE BAPTISMAL FONTS. 333 

the baptismal font, in form of a cross, saying, Sanctifi- 
cetur^ &c. The ministers answer, Ameii. Then he 
pours the chrism into it, in the same manner, saying, 
Infusio^ &c. ; the ministers answering also. Amen. 
Lastly, he pours the oil and chrism both together into 
the water, in the form of a cross, saying, Commixtio^ 
&c. ; and the ministers answer. Amen. Then he mingles 
the oil with the w^ater, and with his hand spreads it all 
over the font. This done, two acolytes bring every 
thing necessary to w^ash the hands, also the slices of 
bread and lemon prepared on a plate ; the celebrant, as- 
sisted by the deacon, washes and wipes his hands. 

4. If any are to be baptized, they are solemnly bap- 
tized by the celebrant, as in the ritual. After the 
blessing of the font, they return to the high altar in the 
same order in which they came. Arrived. there, the first 
acolyte makes a genuflection, replaces the paschal candle 
on its candlestick, and goes to the side-table, near w^hich 
the cross-bearer leaves the cross, and goes to the bench. 
The clergy having made a genuflection in the middle, go 
to their places and sit down. The celebrant having 
bowed, and the deacon having made a genuflection, go 
to the bench, where the celebrant, assisted by the min- 
isters, takes ofl* his cope, who also take ofi" their chas- 
ubles, and having bowed to the clergy, go to the altar. 
In the mean while, the acolytes should place on the 
border of the platform three violet cushions at equal dis- 
tance ; the celebrant and the ministers, having made 
the usual reverence to the cross, prostrate themselves, 
laying their hands and their heads on them. The clergy 
kneel down. The acolytes carry the chasubles to the 
sacristy. 

5. Two chanters, kneeling before two stools, behind 



t 



334: HOLY SATURDAY. 

the ministers, in the middle of the choir, begin to sing 
the Litany of the Saints, and the clergy repeat the same 
words sung by the chanters. The master of ceremonies 
and acolytes kneel by the steps of the altar. 

6. Whilst the chanters sing PeccatoreSy which, with 
the rest of the Litany, ought to be sung very slow, to 
give time to prepare what is necessary, the celebrant, 
the ministers, and the acolytes, at a signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, rise ; the ministers receive their 
caps from him, and having made a genuflection (the cele- 
brant bowing) to the cross, and bowed to the clergy, go 
to the sacristy ; the acolytes walking first, then the min- 
isters, and lastly the celebrant, one after another, with 
their heads covered ; there they take off their violet 
stoles, and put on the white vestments. 

7. After the ministers have left the sanctuary, the 
acolytes appointed for it remove the cushions and the 
violet altar-veil and canopy from the altar, the violet 
veil from the side-table, and the violet cloth from the 
bench of the ministers ; they also spread the carpet on 
the platform and steps of the altar, light the candles on 
the altar, and uncover the images in the church. In the 
sacristy, the acolytes light their candles, and the censer- 
bearer puts fire into the censer. 

Aeticle VI. 

The Mass. 

1. When the chanters have come to the Agnus De% 
or thereabouts, according to the greater or less distance 
of the sacristy from the altar, the ministers, preceded 
by the acolytes with their candles lighted, walk towards 
the altar, so as to be in the sanctuary at the end of 



MASS. 335 

JExaudi 9ios; which, being repeated by the choir, the 
clergy rise, the chanters go to the desk, to sing the 
Kyrie in a slow and solemn manner, as the ministers 
enter the sanctuary (because to-day the Kyrie takes the 
place of the Introit^ which tlie singers should not begin 
to sing before the ministers have arrived at the sanctu- 
ary), {peer. S. B. (7., 14 Apr., 1753.) The ministers 
bow, as usual, to the clergy, make a genuflection (the 
celebrant profoundly bowing) to the cross, and Mass is 
begun. 

2. Mass to-day goes on as usual, till the end of the 
celebrant's communion inclusively, with the following 
exceptions: the psalm, Jiidica me, with the Gloria 
■Patri, is resumed. After the incensing there is no 
Introit, but the sacred ministers say, as usual, Kyrie 
eleison. 

3. The celebrant having sung the words, Gloria in 
excelsis Deo, the first acolyte rings the bell by the side- 
table, the second rings another in the sacristy, and the 
large bells of the church are also rung, whilst the sacred 
ministers continue the Gloria to its end. At the same 
time the organ is played, as usual. 

4. The celebrant having given the blessing to the sub- 
deacon after the Epistle, sings thrice. Alleluia, raising 
every time his voice one tone higher ; and the choir re- 
peats it after each time in the same tone, the ministers 
standing by the celebrant, as for the Introit, who, hav- 
ing read the Tract, goes to read the Gospel, as usual. 

5. The acolytes, at the Gospel, go as usual with the 
ministers, but they do not carry their candlesticks. The 
Credo is not said, neither the Offertory, nor the Agnus 
Dei; the Pax is not given. 

6. The deacon, having covered the chalice after the 



336 HOLY SATURDAY. 

celebrant has put into it the small particle of the conse- 
crated Host, immediately changes place with the sub- 
deacon. 

T. According to the decree of the S. Con. of Rites, 22 
Mar., 1806, communion may be given to the faithful at 
this Mass, by which in parochial churches they fulfil the 
paschal precept. If it be given, the deacon and sub- 
deacon do not exchange places, and every thing for the 
communion should be done as on Holy Thursday. 

8. After the communion of the celebrant, the censer- 
bearer goes to prepare the censer, puts fire into it, and 
the choir, instead of the Gommunio^ sing Alleluia^ and 
the psalm, Laudate Dominum^ &c. 

9. The celebrant, having taken the last ablution, goes 
to the Epistle side, where he recites in a low voice the 
Alleluia, and the psalm, Laudate Domirmm, alternately 
with the ministers who are near him, placed in the same 
position as at the Introit. The choir having repeated 
the anthem Alleluia, the celebrant intones yespere autem 
Sahhati, and, with the ministers, continues it to the end, 
in a low voice, whilst the choir sing it. 

10. Whilst the chanters begin the Magnificat, the 
celebrant and the ministers make the sign of the cross, 
and go to the middle of the altar, the sub-deacon at the 
left and the deacon at the right of the celebrant, where 
he presents the incense. Then the altar is incensed, as 
usual at Vespers. • 

11. The deacon having incensed the celebrant, goes to 
incense the clei"gy, as usual. In the mean time, the 
celebrant and the sub-deacon remain at the Epistle side, 
as at the Iiitroit. After the clergy, the sub-deacon is 
incensed by the deacon, for which purpose the sub-dea- 
con turns towards him, without, however, turning his 



MASS. 337 

back to the celebrant. Then the deacon goes to the 
place where he usually stands at the Introit^ and turns 
to the censer-bearer, who incenses him ; he also incenses 
the acolytes and the people. Afterwards he takes the 
censer to the sacristy, and returns to the altar. 

12. The antiphon, Vespere autem^ <fec., being repeated 
by the choir, the celebrant goes to the middle, the min- 
isters following him behind, one after the other, kisses 
the altar, says, Dominus voMscum,^ and finishes the Mass 
as usual. The deacon sings Senedicamus Domino^ Al- 
leluia^ Alleluia, 

29 



PART V. 

SOLEMNLY CELEBEATED BY THE BISHOP, 
OR IN HIS PRESENCE. 



CHAPTER I. 
SOLEMN PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 

Aeticle I. 

Things to he Prepared, 

1. The altar is to be covered with a long veil, which 
should not hang down before it, but only on the two 
sides. In the middle of the altar are placed the sacred 
vestments for the Bishop — viz., the amice, alb, cincture, 
stole, and cope; on the Epistle side, the ornamented 
mitre ; on that of the Gospel, the golden mitre ; on the 
highest step near the Epistle corner, the crosier, and 
near the vestments, on the Gospel side, on a small plate, 
the pectoral cross and the ring. 

2. On the side-table, the two candlesticks for the aco- 
lytes, the Missal for the prayers to be sung by the 
Bishop, and the hand-candlestick. 

3. In the middle of the sanctuary, two or four stools 
for the cope-bearers, according to their number, 

4. In the sacristy, a cope for the assistant priest ; two 



PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 339 

dalmatics, stoles, albs, cinctures, and amices for the 
assistant deacons; two or four copes for the chanters, 
according to their number ; and a sufficient number of 
copes, chasubles, and dalmatics, with amices, albs, cinc- 
tures, &c., for the clergy who assist at Yespers, dressed 
according to their order. 

5. In a convenient place, the censer with the incense- 
boat, a chafing-dish with fire and tongs. 

Aeticle II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the 
Churchy to the Beginning of Vespers. 

1. The Bishop, preceded by the clergy, two by two, 
goes from the sacristy to the church, the assistant priest 
walking immediately before him, and the two deacons 
at his side ; having adored the Blessed Sacrament, he 
goes up to his seat. There he sits for a short time ; then 
rising, he takes oflT his cape,* and puts on the amice, 
alb, cincture, pectoral cross, stole, and cope; he sits 
down, the first deacon puts the mitre on his head, and 
the assistant priest the ring on his finger. 

2. Being thus vested, and having sat for a while, his 
mitre is taken off by the second deacon. The Bishop 
then rises, and with him all the clergy ; he turns towards 
the altar, and says, secretly. Pater and Ave; then, mak- 
ing the sign of the cross on himself, he sings, Deus in 
adjutorium meum intende. Whilst the choir sings 
Gloria Patri^ the Bishop and all the clergy bow to- 
wards the altar. 

* The technical name is mozetta. It is regarded as a mark of juris- 
diction, and is therefore only to be worn by the diocesan, unless in 
Councils. 



34:0 PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 

Aeticle III. 

From the Beginning to the Mid of Vespers. 

1. In the mean while, two or four chanters in copes, 
accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, make 
the usual genuflection and bows, go to the Bishop's seat, 
and the first among them gives the tone of the first an- 
tiphon to the Bishop, who repeats the same words aloud ; 
then having made the accustomed bows and genuflection, 
they all return to their places. At the beginning of the 
first psalm, the Bishop and the clergy sit down, and the 
first deacon puts the lighter mitre on the Bishop. 

2. At the Gloria Patri^ the bishop, with his mitre on, 
bows towards the altar, and the clergy do the same, 
taking ofl" their caps. 

3. Two of the singers, in copes, attended by the master 
of ceremonies, go to give the tone of the antiphons as 
follows : the second antiphon to the first assistant dea- 
con, the third to the assistant priest, the fourth to the 
clergyman who occupies the first place in the sanctuary, 
and the fifth to the second assistant deacon. Those to 
whom the tone is given, stand, and with them, if they 
be assistants at the bishop's seat, all the other assistants ; 
but if not, all the clergy who are in the sanctuary. 

4. All the psalms and antiphons being ended, the first 
chanter, in cope, or the sub-deacon, attended by the 
master of ceremonies, goes to the place where the epistle 
is usually sung, and, turning towards the bishop, sings 
the chapter ; the bishop, with his mitre on, and all the 
clergy, with their heads uncovered, stand whilst it is 
sung. The choir having answered Deo gratias^ the 
same one who intoned the antiphon, accompanied by the 



PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 341 

master of ceremonies, goes to the bishop, who is still 
standing with his mitre on, to intone the hymn ; imme- 
diately after, the mitre is taken from the bishop, who 
repeats the same words of the hymn, and the hymn is 
continued by the choir. 

At the hymns, Ve7ii Creator^ or Ave Maris Stella^ all 
the clergy kneel whilst the bishop intones them; and 
the bishop himself, after the intonation, kneels either at 
the faldstool before the middle of the altar, or on a 
cushion near his seat. All rise after the first strophe. 

5. After the hymn, the verses having been sung by 
the four singers in copes, and answered by the choir, the 
antiphon of the Magnificat is intoned in the same man- 
ner as the hymn, to the bishop, who is still standing ; 
having repeated the first words, he sits down, receives 
the precious miti-e, attended by the assistant priest, 
puts the incense into the censer, and blesses it. In the 
mean while, two acolytes go to each side of the altar, and 
fold in the middle the veil that covers it, so as to leave 
the half of it near the front uncovered. 

6. As the choir begins the Magnificat^ the bishop rises, 
with his mitre on ; all the assistants likewise rise ; the 
bishop makes the sign of the cross, receives in his left" 
hand the crosier from the assistant priest, and walks to 
tlie altar between the deacons, who raise his cope on 
each side ; when arrived before the lowest step, he gives 
the crosier to the assistant priest; the second deacon 
takes off his mitre, he bows to the cross (the others 
making a genuflection), and all go up to the altar, where 
the bishop, having received the censer from the assistant 
priest, incenses the cross and the altar; the deacons 
who are at his side, raising the border of his cope, and 
reciting the Magnificat alternately with him. 

29* 



342 PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 

7. The bishop, having incensed the altar, goes to 'the 
middle, says the Gloria Patri^ bowing to the cross, 
goes below the lowest step, makes a reverence to the 
altar, receives the mitre and crosier, and returns to his 
seat, where he is incensed by the assistant priest ; then 
the deacon takes off his mitre, and the bishop, holding 
the crosier with both his hands, remains standing till 
the end of Sicut erat in principio^ after the Magnificat. 

8. As soon as the bishop leaves the altar, the acolytes 
spread the veil over the altar. 

9. After the bishop has been incensed by the assistant 
priest, the clergy are incensed by the first of the four 
singers in copes, and the singer, the master of ceremo- 
nies, the acolytes, and the people, by the censer-bearer, 
as it has been said elsewhere. 

The Magjiificat is to be sung, so as to give time for 
the incensing. 

10. Whilst the choir repeats the antiphon of the 
Magnificat^ the bishop gives up his crosier, sits down 
and receives the mitre. In the mean time, the master of 
ceremonies accompanies the acolytes, carrying the 
candlesticks with lighted candles, and the four chanters 
in copes, to the bishop's seat. After the antiphon, the 
bishop leaves off the mitre, rises, and the assistant priest 
holding the book before him, he sings Dominus vohis- 
cwm^ and the prayer, with his hands joined, during 
which all the clergy stand. While the bishop says 
Dombius vobisGum^ after the prayer, the four chanters 
in copes, the acolytes, and master of ceremonies bow to 
him, and go to the middle of the sanctuary; where, 
having made a genuflection, the acolytes go to the side- 
table, and the chanters sing the Benedicamus Domino. 

11. Whilst the choir answer, Deo gratias^ the bishop 



SOLEMN VESPERS. 343 

sits down, receives the mitre, rises, sings Sit nomen 
Domini^ &c., and gives the benediction, as usual, from 
his seat, if he can be seen thence by the people ; other- 
wise he gives it from the altar. 

If the celebrant be an archbishop, the cross is brought 
before him, he bows profoundly to it, and gives the 
benediction without mitre. 

Indulgences are never published at Vespers. 

12. After Vespers, the bishop puts off the sacred robes 
as usual. 

13. The pontifical Vespers are sung in the manner 
heretofore described, when the bishop is to celebrate a 
pontifical Mass the next day, or on the great solemnities 
of the year, such, at least, as Easter, Christmas, the 
Feast of the Patron Saint of the Diocese, the Titular of 
the Church, &c. 

14. On other occasions. Vespers are celebrated with 
less solemnity ; then all the clergy do not put on the 
sacred vestments ; four of them only are dressed in 
copes ; the antiphons are intoned, first to the bishop, 
then to the other clergymen in the sanctuary, according 
to their dignity and order. 



CHAPTER II. 

Solemn Vespers in presence of the Bishop. 

1. "When the bishop does not oflaciate at Vespers, he 
is dressed as usual, with his rochet and cope : he sits at 
his seat, having two clergymen in surplices at his side ; 



344: SOLEMN VESPERS. 

he puts incense into the censer and blesses it ; he is 
incensed immediately after the celebrant, by the assist- 
ant priest ; and after the JBenedicmnus Domino and Deo 
gratias^ the bishop gives the solem^n blessing from his 
seat, if he can be seen thence by the people, otherwise 
from the altar. 

1. The officiating priest is dressed in cope, and sits in 
the usual place on the epistle side. Before he begins 
Deus in adjutorium^ he asks the bishop's leave by bow- 
ing to him ; every time he goes from the altar to his 
seat, or from it to the altar, he bows to the bishop ; he 
does not bless the incense, or put it into the censer ; he 
is incensed only with two swings, and not at his seat, 
but at the epistle corner near the altar. 

3. There may be four, or two chanters, in copes, who 
sit on their stools as usual, in the middle of the sanctu- 
ary; two give the tone of the first antiphon, and that 
of the Magnificat^ to the officiating priest ; the others 
to the other clergymen, according to their dignity and 
order ; and sing the verses, Denedicamiis Dornino^ &g. 
The two first amongst them accompany the celebrant to 
the altar for the incensing of it, raising his cope on each 
side ; and the first of them incenses the celebrant and 
the clergy, including the three other singers. 

4. The acolytes carry their candlesticks as usual in 
other Yespers. 

5. The officiating priest, with the two or four chanters 
in cope, the acolytes, and master of ceremonies, must go 
to the sanctuary before the bishop, sit at their places 
till he enters it ; as he enters, preceded by the rest of 
the clergy, they rise, and whilst he kneels, they kneel 
also. 



COMPLINS — Matins. 346 

CHAPTER III. 

COMPLINS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. For Complin, the bishop is dressed in rochet, cope, 
and stole ; he sits in his usual place. 

2. When the chanter says, Jube Domne^ &c., he 
answers, Noctem quietam^ after the Lesson, he says, 
Adjutorium nostrum; then the Tater^ the confession, 
and absolution, <fec., Deics in adjutorium; all of which 
are to be said standing. At the beginning of the 
psalms, he takes his seat. 

3. All the rest is said by the choir and by the priest 
who should have officiated if the bishop were not pres- 
ent, with the exception of the prayer and of the Bene- 
dicat et custodial nos, &c., which are to be sung by the 
bishop. 

4. When the bishop, although present at Complins, 
does not officiate, nothing is to be observed in particular, 
except that the officiating priest, at the words, Indul- 
gentiam et ahsolutionem,^ and at the Benedicat et cus- 
todiaty bows profoundly to the bishop. 



CHAPTER IV. 

MATINS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. The bishop is dressed in rochet and cope. He is 
seated at his usual place ; no clergymen sit by him. He 
is attended by the master of ceremonies. 



34:6 MATINS. 

2. Whilst the Fater^ Ave, and Credo are said, all 
stand ; the Credo being ended, the bishop making with 
his thumb the sign of the cross on his lips, sings, Domine 
labia, and making the sign of the cross on himself as 
usual, he sings, Deus in adjutoriumfi. He remains stand- 
ing during the hivitatorium, and the Psalm, y^enite ex- 
idtemus; at the words, Venite adoremus et procidam,us^ 
he kneels, then rises, and remains standing during the 
hymn, which he intones only in case he is to celebrate 
Mass, one of the chanters having intoned it. As the 
first psalm begins, the bishop and all the clergy take 
their seats. 

3. The antiphons are intoned by the chanters in sur- 
plices to the clergy, beginning with those who are first 
in dignity and order. At the Gloria Patri, all take off 
their caps and bow. 

4. At the versicles, which are sung by two of the 
chanters, after the third antiphon of each noct-urn, all 
rise. The bishop says, in a loud voice, the words. Pater 
noster; the rest of the Lord's Prayer is said secretly, as 
far as the words et ne nos, which are sung by the bishop, 
who also sings the absolution, and the words of the 
blessing, after the Juhe Pomne benedicere. The bishop 
does not rise to give the second and third blessing at 
each nocturn, but remains sitting. 

5. After the verses of each nocturn, the second master 
of ceremonies goes to invite, with a bow, the clergyman 
who is to sing the Lesson, beginning by those w^ho are 
inferior in order or dignity. He accompanies him ta 
the middle of the sanctuary before the desk prepared 
for the purpose ; there they make a genuflection to the 
altar, bow first to the bishop, then to the clergy on each 
side of the sanctuary ; after the absolution for the first . 



MATINS. 347 

Lesson of each nocturn, or the response for the two 
others, the clergyman who is to sing the Lesson bows 
profoundly towards the bishop, and sings, Jube Domne 
benedlcere. After the words of the blessing, he sings 
the Lesson, at the end of which he kneels to the altar, 
on one knee, saying, Tu aiitem Domine^ then bows pro- 
foundly to the bishop, who makes the sign of the cross 
towards him, and after having bowed to the clergy as 
before, he returns to his place. The same is done for all 
the other Lessons. The seventh and eighth Lessons are 
sung by those who are to officiate at Mass as assistant 
deacons, at the side of the bishop. Whilst the text of 
the Gospel is sung, at the seventh Lesson, the bishop 
and all the clergy should stand. 

6. The ninth Lesson is sung by the bishop at his seat, 
standing, with his face turned towards the altar. Before 
he begins it, the two assistant deacons, and one of the 
acolytes with the hand-candlestick, and another with 
the book, go to him ; the two former place themselves 
at his side, and the latter before him. The bishop, 
bowing profoundly towards the altar, sings, Jube 
Domine^ not tfube Domne; all the clergy rise, and 
answer, Amen. Then the bishop sings the Lesson, 
during which the clergy remain standing. At the end 
of it, the bishop, bowing profoundly towards the altar, 
says, Tu autem Domine^ &c. The choir having an- 
swered, Deo gratias^ the tone of Te Deum, is given to 
the bishop, who repeats the same words, and the choir 
continue the hymn. At the words, Te ergo quaesumus^ 
the bishop and all the clergy kneel down. 



34:8 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

CHAPTER V. 

LAUDS, WHEN THE BISHOP OEFICIATES. 

i. When the bishop has officiated at Matins, it is 
proper that he should officiate at Lauds also. Every- 
thing is to be done as directed for Vespers, when the 
bishop is not to celebrate Mass the next day. Soon 
after the Te Demn^ the bishop, at his seat, puts on all 
the sacred vestments, as for Yespers, and four or six 
clergymen put on copes. 

2. The bishop begins, Beus in adjutoriwm^ making 
the sign of the cross on himself. The antiphons are 
intoned as for Vespers, and every thing else is done as 
directed for the same. 

3. At the Benedictus^ every thing is done as at the 
Magnificat; and after the Benedicamus and Deo gror 
tiaSj the solemn blessing is likewise given by the bishop. 



CHAPTER VI. 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS. 

Aetiole I. 

Things to he Prepared. 

There should be in Cathedral churches a place or 
chapel to answer the purpose of that which was for- 
merly called the Secretarium. It should have an altar, 
the bishop's seat, seats for all the clergy, and a side-table. 



PONTIFICAL MASS. 349 

On the altar of this chapel, all the pontifical vestments 
should be prepared ; and the copes, chasubles, dalma- 
tics, and tunics for the clergy, at their own seats. On 
the side-table, the bishop's sandals and stockings, the 
candlesticks for the acolytes, the incense-boat and cen- 
ser, the book, and hand-candlestick, &c., should be 
placed ; to this chapel the bishop and all the clergy 
ought to go immediately after having adored the Blessed 
Sacrament. There, the bishop having begun Tierce, 
sliould make his preparation for Mass ; the clergy 
should put on the vestments suitable to their order and 
dignity ; the bishop should put on his sacred vestments, 
finish Tierce, and, after having taken off the cope, put 
on the dalmatic and chasuble ; and lastly, being pre- 
ceded by the clergy, he should go in procession from 
this place to the high altar. 

Wherever there is not such a convenient place, every 
thing is to be done in the sanctuary ; we shall, there- 
fore, in the present chapter, adapt the instructions to 
the ordinary construction of our churches. 

1. The altar is to be prepared with the best and rich- 
est ornaments ; three large candlesticks, with candles 
on each side of the cross, and a seventh one behind it. 
This seventh candlestick and candle is to be placed be- 
hind the cross, only when the bishop of the diocese cele- 
brates a solemn Pontifical Mass. Between the candle- 
sticks, relic-cases of a suitable size may be placed. 

2. On the altar, the pontifical vestments, of suitable 
color, should be placed, one over the other — viz., imme- 
diately on the altar-cloth in the middle, the chasuble, 
then the dalmatic, tunic, cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 
over all the others the amice. On the Epistle side, near 
the vestments, the peDtoral cross and the ring should be 

30 



350 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

on a plate ; on the Gospel side, the gloves on another 
plate. On the Gospel side the precious mitre, and the 
golden mitre on the Epistle side, standing against the 
candlesticks, and the crosier at the same corner, against 
the angle formed by the altar and the pilaster near it. 

3. The Bishop's seat is to be on the Gospel side, 
against the side-walls of the sanctuary ; it should be on 
a platform, raised by three steps above the floor of the 
sanctuary ; the platform should be large enough to admit 
two wooden stools without backs, decently painted,, for 
the two assistant deacons, on each side of the Bishop's 
chair, which should have a high back and convenient 
arms, and be covered with silk cloth ^ there should be a 
third stool of the same form with the others, near that 
of the second assistant deacon, but projecting more 
towards the front of the platform, for the assistant priest. 
Over the Bishop's chair there should be a canopy, with 
hangings all around; the walls behind the chair, and 
the assistants' stools, should likewise be covered with 
hangings, which ought to be of a color suitable to the 
festival. 

4. The side-table ought to be placed on the Epistle 
side of the altar, and covered all around and on the top 
with white linen cloth. It should be sufficiently large. 

On this table there should be two candlesticks with 
candles for the acolytes, the chalice with its purifier, 
paten, host, pall, and "burse, containing the corporal ; the 
Missal, for the Epistle and Gospel ; behind the chalice, 
standing against the wall, the cruets on a plate, the 
basin and ewer for washing the Bishop's hands, two or 
three fine towels on a plate, the book containing the 
canon, the Missal for the Bishop, with his maniple in it, 
the hand-candlestick, the Bishop's sandals and stockings 



PONTIFICAL MASS. 351 

on a plate, covered with a veil. Over the chalice, the 
long veil, the two extremities of which ought to hang 
down on each side of the table. 

5. The bench of the ministers should be on the Epistle 
side, below the table, and against the side-walls of the 
sanctuary. It should be covered with a silk cloth. On 
it the maniples of the deacon and sub-deacon should be 
placed. 

6. A sufficient number of seats for the clergy should 
be placed on each side of the sanctuary ; they ought not 
to be the usual chairs, but benches with a back, covered 
with drapery. 

V. There should be a number of acolytes in surplices, 
no fewer than eight. The first of them carries the book, 
and holds it when the Bishop reads out of it ; but when 
he sings, the book must be held by the assistant priest. 
The second holds the hand-candlestick whenever the 
Bishop reads or sings any thing, either at his seat or at 
the altar. The third acolyte, who, besides the surplice, 
wears a cope, is to carry the crosier. The fourth, if he 
is not dressed in cope, wears on his surplice a long veil, 
hanging from his neck before him, in order to cover his 
hands with it when he holds the mitre. The fifth is the 
censer-bearer. The sixth and the seventh are to carry 
the candlesticks. The eighth carries the apron, which 
is a rich cloth that is spread on the lap of the Bishop 
when seated. 

8- The faldstool is a kind of folding seat, sufficiently 
large, the four corners of which project about a foot 
above the cushion, when laid on it; these corners are 
connected together only on the two sides, six inches 
above the cushion, with two cross-pieces, which, as well 
as the projecting corners, should be of gilt metah Thus 



352 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

it remains open behind and before. It is covered with a 
silk cloth of the color of the vestments, which hangs 
down to the ground on the four sides. It is used as a 
praying desk for the Bishop, and as a chair, when, for 
ordinations or other ceremonies, he is to sit at the altar. 
Two cushions covered with the same cloth are to be 
prepared — one on the seat and another before it, to 
kneel or stand on. It is to be placed in the middle of 
the sanctuary, whenever the Bishop is to kneel. 

9. We suppose in the following instructions that the 
Cathedral church has no Secretariu^n or chapel, as men- 
tioned in the beginning of this chapter ; but in case it 
should have one, the Bishop and clergy dress and sing 
Tierce in it. 

10. In the sacristy the following things are to be pre- 
pared : a coj)e for the assistant priest, who puts it on 
over his surplice, without stole ; two amices, albs, cinc- 
tures, and dalmatics for the two assistant deacons. They 
wear neither stoles nor maniples. Also two amices, 
albs, and cinctures for the deacon and sub-deacon ; also 
a stole for the deacon. Their maniples are to be placed 
on their seats in the sanctuary. The clergy are to be 
dressed in sacred vestments. Some of them, the first in 
dignity, wear copes over their surplices ; some, chasubles 
over their albs ; no maniples or stoles are to be used by 
them. The clergymen who are not priests are to be 
dressed in dalmatics over their albs, but without stoles 
and maniples. A sufficient number of these vestments 
ought to be prepared in the sacristy. In order to have 
a sufficient number of clergymen in towns and cities, 
where there are several congregations besides that of 
the Cathedral, the service ought to be performed in 
those earlier than usual, so that all the clergy may go 



VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 353 

to the Catliedral. This custom is observed in other 
countries, and it is conformable to what was practised in 
the remotest antiquity. The Bishops can and ought to 
introduce it into this country. 

Aeticle II. 

Of the Vesting of the Clergy and of the 3ishop, 

1. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy, 
before the Bishop arrives. Those who are to officiate as 
assistant priest and assistant deacons, preceded by the 
inferior clergy, who wear no sacred vestments, all in 
surplices, accompany the Bishop from his house to the 
sacristy, if there be no street between it and the church ; 
otherwise, from the room where he has put on the 
rochet and cope, and, two by two, walk before him; 
lastly, the deacon and sub-deacon; the assistant priest 
walks alone immediately before the Bishop, and the two 
assistant deacons at each side of him. 

2. The Bishop having arrived at the sacristy, and 
bowed to the cross, the clergy go to the sanctuary, first 
those in surplices, then those in dalmatics, chasubles, and 
copes. The assistant priest goes immediately before the 
Bishop, and the two assistant deacons on each side of 
him. As the clergy arrive, at the middle of the sanctu- 
ary, they make a genuflection, bow to one another, and 
go to their places on each side of the sanctuary ; the in- 
ferior clergy towards the railing, and those in superior 
grades towards the altar. The deacon and sub-deacon 
go to their bench. The Bishop bows to the cross, and 
kneels for a while at the faldstool. All the clergy kneel 
and rise with him. After a short prayer he goes to his 
seat, having at his side the assistant deacons in surplices. 

30* 



364 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

3. The Bishop, standing with his head uncovered, 
turning towards the altar, says secretly, Pater and Ave, 
Then making the sign of the cross on himself, he sings, 
I>eus in adjutoriiim,^ &c. ; then he intones the hymn, 
Nunc Sancte^ &c. ; one of the singers intones the anti- 
phon, then the psalm, Legem, pone. Which having been 
begun, the Bishop and the clergy sit down and put on 
their caps; the assistant priest and deacons alone re- 
maining standing by the Bishop. 

4. The acolytes bring the book and the hand-candle- 
stick to the Bishop; the book-bearer kneels down. The 
Bishop reads the anthem iVe reminiscaris, and the 
Psalms for the preparation of Mass. The sub-deacon, 
accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, brings 
from the table the plate with the sandals and stockings 
covered with the veil ; six acolytes follow him and sur- 
round the Bishop's seat ; the sub- deacon, assisted by the 
second master of ceremonies, takes off the Bishop's shoes 
and puts on him the stockings and sandals ; afterwards 
the sub-deacon and acolytes retire to their places. 

5. The Psalms having been read, and the anthem, JVe 
remi7iiscaris^ repeated by the Bishop, he rises, with his 
head uncovered, and turning towards the altar, says, 
Kyrie eleison^ with the verse and prayers that follow. 
Then he takes off the cope, saying the appropriate 
prayer. The acolytes bring the basin, ewer, and towels, 
and the Bishop washes his hands, saying the prayer, Da^ 
Domine. The assistant priest takes off the Bishop's 
ring before he washes his hands, and puts it on after he 
has washed them, and presents him the towel to wipe 
them. 

6. When the Bishop rises, after having read the Psalms, 
the second master of ceremonies goes up to the altar, 



VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 355 

followed by the acolytes, who, one after another, make 
first a genuflection before the lower step, go up, receive 
severally one of the vestments, make another genuflec- 
tion on the platform, go down and place themselves in a 
line, beginning at the Gospel side. When all have re- 
ceived the vestments, that is, the amice, alb, cincture, 
pectoral cross, stole, cope, and mitre, at a signal given 
by the master of ceremonies, they make a genuflection, 
and walk one after another in a line to the Bishop's seat. 
When the first who carries the amice is arrived before 
the last step of the Bishop's seat, he and all the others 
stop one behind another. The second master of cere- 
monies stops at the left hand of the first acolyte, who, 
having given the amice, gives his place to the next, goes 
to his right hand ; they both bow to the Bishop, and the 
first acolyte returns to his place ; the others do in like 
manner. 

7. Whilst the Bishop is washing his hands, the deacon 
and sub-deacon go to the throne, and as soon as he has 
washed his hands, the assistant deacon and priest go 
down, where, having with the deacon and sub-deacon 
bowed to the Bishop, the assistant priest and deacons 
go to put on their vestments in the sacristy ; the deacon 
goes to the Bishop's right, and the sub-deacon to the 
left. The deacon receives fi'om the acolytes all the vest- 
ments, with the assistance of the sub-deacon, that is, the 
amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross, stole, cope, and 
mitre. After which the Bishop takes his seat. The 
deacon and sub-deacon go down, and having made a 
bow to the Bishop, together with the assistant priest 
and deacons, retire to their bench ; the assistant priest 
and deacons go up to their usual places, and seat them- 
selves. 



S56 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

8. When all the Psalms, with the anthem, have been 
sung, which ought to be done slowly, to give sufficient 
time for the vesting of the Bishop, the second master of 
ceremonies accompanies the sub-deacon to the place 
where the Epistle is sung, and the latter turning towards 
the Bishop, sings the chapter. The bishop, before the 
sub-deacon begins it, rises with his mitre on ; the clergy 
likewise rise with their heads uncovered. The sub-dea- 
con having sung the chapter, returns to his place. The 
chanters chant the responses and verses ; which, being 
ended, the acolytes with the candlestick, and those with 
the book and hand-candlestick, go to the Bishop's seat ; 
the second assistant deacon takes off the mitre, and the 
Bishop sings the Dominus vohisGum^ and the prayer 
from the book, which the assistant priest holds before 
him. 

9. The singers having sung Benediccmius Domino^ 
and the choir answered Deo gratias^ the deacon and sub- 
deacon return to the Bishop's side, exchanging places 
with the two assistant deacons ; they take off the cope 
from the Bishop, and give it to an acolyte, who carries 
it to the sacristy. In the mean while, the second mas- 
ter of ceremonies gives to the acolytes, in the same 
manner as in n. 6, the tunic, dalmatic, the plate with the 
gloves, the chasuble, and the crosier, and the plate with 
the ring. The acolytes, with the book and the candle, 
go to the Bishop's seat, and the acolytes with the vest- 
ments also go at a signal given by the master of cere- 
monies. 

10. The deacon and sub-deacon vest the Bishoj), who 
reads the prayers appointed for each vestment. 

If he be an Archbishop, after he has put on the chas- 
u"We, a sub-deacon brings from the altar the pallium, 



VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 357 

gives it to the deacon, who, assisted by the sub-deacon, 
puts it on him. 

Then the Bishop sits, and the deacon puts on him the 
mitre, and the assistant priest the ring on his finger. 

11. The Bishop having thus put on all the sacred vest- 
ments, the deacon and sub-deacon retire to their bench, 
and give their places to the two assistant deacons. 

If Tierce has been sung in the chapel, or Secretarium, 
the censer-bearer comes to the Bishop with the censer 
and boat, gives it to the assistant priest, and the Bishop 
puts the incense into the censer and blesses it. • Then 
they go to the high altar in procession, in the following 
order : the censer-bearer first, the cross-bearer in sub- 
deacon's dress, between the acolytes carrying the candle- 
sticks, the clergy in surplices, those in dalmatics, the 
priests in chasuble, those in cope, all two by two. Then 
the sub-deacon, who is to officiate at Mass, carrying be- 
. fore his breast the Missal closed, with the Bishop's man- 
iple in it ; after him the deacon at the left of the assist- 
ant priest, in cope ; last, the Bishop between the two 
assistant deacons, with the crosier in his left, and bless- 
ing the people with his right hand. After the Bishop 
follow the acolytes, who carry the cross, mitre, book, 
hand-candlestick, &c., two*by two. 

As the clergy arrive in the sanctuary, they make a 
genuflection in the middle, bow to one another, and go 
to their places. The Bishop goes to the altar and be- 
gins Mass, as will be said hereafter. 

If the poutiflfbe an Archbishop, the archiepiscopal cross 
is carried by the cross-bearer in sub-deacon's dress, im- 
mediately before the clergy in sacred vestments. 



358 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

Article III. 

Tlie Pontifical Mass. 

1. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, 
and with his right blesses the clergy (who arise and bow 
to him) and the people as he goes to the altar between the 
two assistant deacons. The deacon and sub-deacon put 
on theii' maniples. The second, master of ceremonies 
gives the Missal with the Bishop's maniple in it to the 
sub-deacon, and all go to the altar. 

2. The Bishop having arrived before the lower step, 
in the middle, the two assistant deacons give place to 
the assistant priest, who goes to the Bishop's right, and 
to the deacon, w^ho goes to the left, and place themselves 
at a little distance behind them, the sub-deacon goes to 
the left of the deacon, and remains a little behind him, 
giving the book to the master of ceremonies. The aco- 
lytes who carry the crosier and 'the mitre, place them- 
selves a little behind the two assistant deacons. The 
Bishop, after his mitre has been taken off by the deacon, 
makes a profound bow to the cross, and all the others 
make a genuflection. Then the Bishop begins the Con- 
fession, &c.. In nomine Patris^ &c. ; at the words Et 
vos fratres^ he turns himself towards the ministers, and 
they, at the words Tibi^ pater^ &c., bow to the Bishop. 

After the prayer, Absolutioneni et remissionem^ the 
sub-deacon taking the maniple out of the Missal, gives 
it to the bishop to kiss, and puts it on his arm. 

4. Whilst the Bishop makes the confession, all the 
clergy in sacred vestments standing, make it alternately, 
two by tw^o. The inferior clergy kneel down during 
the confession. After it, the Bishop goes up to the 



BEGINNING. 359 

altar as usual, but the assistant priest passes to his left, 
and the deacon to his right hand. The sub-deacon at 
the Gospel side goes up with the Missal, which he with 
the assistant priest present open to the Bishop, who, 
after having kissed the altar, touching it with both his 
hands, kisses it at the beginning of the Gospel to be read 
on that day. 

5. The incense is then put into the censer and blessed, 
the deacon offering the boat, and presenting the censer 
to the Bishop, who incenses the altar, as usual ; and after 
it, standing with his mitre on, by the corner of the altar, 
at the Gospel side, he is incensed by the deacon ; then, 
having received the crosier, and made from the same 
place a reverence to the cross, he goes, between the two 
assistant deacons, to his seat. The deacon and sub-dea- 
con go to their bench on the Epistle side. The Bishop, 
standing, without mitre, making the sign of the cross on 
himself, reads the Introit^ from the book which the aco- 
lyte holds open before him; another acolyte holding 
near him the hand-candlestick, and the assistant deacons 
and priests turning the leaves of the book when neces- 
sary. Then he says, alternately with them, Kyrie elei- 
son. The same is said likewise by the deacon and sub- 
deacon, and by all the clergy, two by two, alternately. 
Afterwards the Bishop sits down, and the first deacon 
puts on him the lighter mitre and the apron. All the 
clergy also sit at their places. 

6. After the Kyrie is sung by the choir, all rise, and 
the Bishop, without mitre, turned towards the altar, 
sings, Gloria in excelsis Deo^ the assistant priest hold- 
ing the book before him, whilst he sings those words ; 
but whilst he reads the rest, the book is held by the 
acolyte. The same is to be observed on all other occa- 



360 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

sions, viz. : when the Bishop sings, the assistant priest 
holds the book ; but when he reads, the acolyte holds it, 
and the assistant deacons point out what is to be read, 
and turn the leaves of the book. The assistants say 
with the Bishop, in a low voice, the rest of the Angeli- 
cal Hymn, likewise the deacon and sub-deacon, and all 
the clergy. 

The hymn having been recited, the Bishop and the 
clergy sit down, and the deacon puts the lighter mitre on 
the Bishop, and the apron on his lap. The choir having 
sung the Gloria^ the deacon takes oif the Bishop's 
mitre and the apron ; all rise ; and the Bishop, turned 
towards the people, sings. Pax vohis, and the prayer ; 
after which all sit down, and the deacon puts on the 
Bishop the mitre, and the apron on his lap. 

7. The sub-deacon having received, from the second 
master of ceremonies, the Missal, and holding it on his 
br^east, goes, attended by the same, to the middle, 
makes a genuflection to the altar, bows to the Bishop 
and to the clergy, goes to the Epistle side, and, turned 
towards the Bishop, sings the Epistle ; after it, he 
makes the usual genuflection and bow, goes to the 
Bishop, kneels before him, lays the book on his knees, 
and kisses the Bishop's hand, placed on the book, and 
having received his blessing, returns to his place, where 
he o-ives the book to the master of ceremonies. 

8. After the sub-deacon has kissed the Bishop's hand, 
the acolytes, with the book and the hand-candlestick, go 
before him ; and the Bishop sitting, with his mitre on, 
reads the Epistle, Tract, and says the Mwnda cor meum^ 
<fcc., and reads the Gospel, with his hands joined, the 
assistant deacons remaining standing, and answering, 
.Et cwn spiritu tuo^ and Laus tihi Christe. 



GOSPEL. 361 

9. Towards the end of this, the deacon having re- 
ceived the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, 
carries it raised before him to the altar, bowing to the 
Bishop and to the clergy, and making a genuflection 
before the lower step, places it in the middle of the 
altar, goes down, makes a genuflection, goes to the 
Bishop, kisses his hand, returns to the altar, kneels on 
the lower step, says, in a low voice, Munda cor meum^ 
rises, goes up to take the Missal, comes down, and 
places himself below the lower step a little towards the 
Epistle side, with the sub- deacon, who, at the same 
time, goes to his left, they being exactly in the middle, 
where they wait. In the mean time, the censer-bearer 
having gone to the Bishop's seat, with the censer and 
boat, the incense is put in and blessed, as usual. The 
censer-bearer, accompanied by the second master of 
ceremonies, goes behind the deacon ; the master of 
ceremonies behind the sub-deacon ; and the two aco- 
lytes, with their candlesticks and lighted candles, behind 
them. At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, 
they all make a genuflection, bow to the Bishop and to 
the clergy, and go to the Bishop's seat, w\alking in the 
order in which* they are, the deacon and sub-deacon 
first. Having arrived before the Bishop's seat, they all 
kneel and remain so ; the deacon saying,. Juhe Domne^ 
henedicere^ receives the blessing, Dominus sit, &c., and 
kisses the Bishop's hand. Then they all rise, and go to 
the place where the Gospel is to be sung. 

10. The master of ceremonies walks first, after him 
the censer-bearer, then the two acolytes with the candle- 
sticks, the sub-deacon, and last the deacon. The sub- 
deacon places himself with his face towards the Epistle 
side, between the two acolytes, and holds the book rest- 

31 



362 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

ing on his head. The deacon turns towards the book, 
and the master of ceremonies and censer-bearer are at 
his side. The deacon sings, Dominus vohiscum^ Sequen- 
tial &c., making the sign of the cross on the book and 
himself, &c., incenses the book thrice, towards the mid- 
dle, the right and the left of the same. The Bishop, at 
the beginning of the Gospel, rises, without mitre, re- 
ceives the crosier, w^hich he keeps between both his 
hands, makes the sign of the cross on himself, bows at 
the names of Jesus and Mary, kisses the book, which, 
after the Gospel, is brought to him by the sub-deacon, 
and says, Per evangelica dicta^ &c. ; and lastly is in- 
censed by the assistant priest. The deacon and all the 
others return to their places, making the usual genuflec- 
tions and bows. 

11. If the Bishop preach, he should do it from his 
seat. But should this be so placed as to prevent the 
people from seeing or hearing him, the faldstool should 
be placed on the platform of the altar in the middle, 
and five other seats, viz., three at the right, and two at 
the left of the faldstool. The assistant priest sits at his 
right ; near the assistant priest, the deacon of the Gos- 
pel; and near him, the first assistant deacon. At the 
left of the Bishop, the sub-deacon, and near him the 
second assistant deacon. If the Bishop should not 
preach, a priest may do it from the pulpit ; but first he 
should go to kiss the Bishop's hand, ask the blessing, 
saying, Juhe Domne, benedicere^ and ask the Indulgen- 
ces. After the sermon, the deacon of the Gospel sings 
the Co7ifiteor^ near the Bishop, if the Bishop has 
preached at the altar, otherwise before the lowest step 
of the Bishop's seat ; the assistant priest publishes the 
Indulgences, and the Bishop, standing without mitre, 



OFFEKTORY. 363 

says, Precihas et meritis^ then puts on liis mitre, and 
gives the benediction. In case the sermon has been de- 
livered by a priest, the preacher pubhshes the Indul- 
gences in place of the assistant priest. 

12. After the benediction, the Bishop returns to his 
seat ; or if there has been no sermon, after having been 
incensed, he intones. Credo in unum Deum^ the assist- 
ant priest holding the book till these words are sung ; 
then he gives it to the acolyte, who remains there with 
the other, holding the hand-candlestick till the Bishop 
and the assistants have finished the Credo^ which is also 
recited by the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, 
two by two, at their respective places. At the words 
JEt incarnatus^ they all kneel. The Creed being said, 
they all sit down, and the first assistant deacon puts the 
lighter mitre on the Bishop. When the choir sings the 
words £Jt incarnatus^ the Bishop, with his mitre on, and 
all the clergy in sacred vestments, uncovering their 
heads, bow profoundly towards the altar ; the rest of 
the clergy kneel. However, on Christmas day, and on 
the festival of the Annunciation, the Bishop and all the 
clergy kneel. 

13. After the Incarnatiis has been sung, the deacon 
and the sub-deacon rise ; the deacon, attended by the 
second master of ceremonies, goes to the side-table, re- 
ceives the burse from the master of ceremonies, and, 
having made the usual bows and genuflections, carries it 
to the altar, extends the corporal in the middle of it, 
places the burse on the Epistle side, makes a genuflec- 
tion, and returns to his place. Then he and the sub- 
deacon sit down. 

14. Towards the end of the Creed all the ministers 
rise ; the Bishop rises when it is ended, the mitre and 



364 ^ PONTIFICAL MASS. 

the apron having been previously taken from him. 
Then standing, he sings Dominus vobiscum and Oremus^ 
and reads the Offertory out of the book, which is held 
before him by one of the acolytes, attended by the 
other, who holds the hand-candlestick. Afterwards he 
sits down, the deacon puts on him the precious mitre, 
the assistant priest takes off his ring, and the deacons 
his gloves. The two acolytes bring him the basin and 
ewer to wash his hands, and the towel to wipe them ; 
the assistant priest presents one of them, after he has 
washed his hands, and having wiped them, puts the 
ring on his finger. Then the assistant priest having re- 
ceived from the master of ceremonies the Missal with its 
cushion or stand, attended by the same, carries it to the 
altar, and puts it, opened at the proper place, near the 
corporal, on the Gospel side, and waits for the Bishop, 
retiring to the further corner of the same side of the 
altar. 

15. The Bishop having put on the ring, rises, takes 
the crosier in his left hand, and between the two assist- 
ant deacons, followed by the acolytes of the mitre and 
of the crosier, goes to the altar, blessing on his way the 
people and the clergy ; when he has arrived before the 
lower step, he lays aside the crosier and puts off the 
mitre, makes a profound bow to the cross, goes up to 
the altar, assisted by the deacon of the Gospel at his 
right, and the assistant priest at his left, kisses the altar 
in the middle, placing his hands on each side. The 
clergy sit down. The assistant deacons stand on the 
second step on each side. The crosier and mitre-bearers 
stand at a certain distance from the lowest step, behind 
the two assistant deacons. 

16. The sub-deacon, after the B.ishop has washed his 



OFFERTORY. 365 

hands, goes to the side-table, attended by the second 
master of ceremonies and acolytes, who put on his 
shoulders the long veil, with which the chalice and other 
things on the table were covered, leaving it to hang- 
lower on his right side. The sub-deacon takes, with his 
left hand, the chalice with the paten, Host, and pall, ex- 
tends the longest part of the veil over it, places his right 
hand on the veil and chalice, lest any thing should fall, 
and thus goes to the altar, followed by the acolyte who 
carries the cruets with wine and water ; when arrived 
there, at the same time with the Bishop, he places the 
chalice on the altar at the Epistle side, and removes the 
veil from it. 

17. The deacon receives from the sub-deacon the paten 
with the Host, kisses it, and gives it to the Bishop, kiss- 
ing his hand ; the Bishop, as usual, raises it before his 
breast, says, Suscipe Sancte Patei\ &c., places the Host 
on the corporal, and the paten under it at his right. In 
the mean while, the deacon wipes the chalice with the 
purifier, receives the cruet with the wine from the sub- 
deacon, who had received it from the acolyte, puts some 
wine into the chalice, and the sub-deacon, raising the 
cruet with water a little towards the Bishop, says, JBenedi- 
cite^ Pater JReverendissime^ and the Bishop having made 
towards it the sign of the cross, whilst the sub-deacon 
puts some drops of water into the chalice, says the prayer, 
Dens qui humance. Then the deacon gives the chalice 
to the Bishop, kissing it first, then the Bishop's hand ; 
the Bishop receives it at the knob, with his right hand, 
and at the foot with his left, and offers it together with 
the deacon, who, with his left hand, supports the Bishop's 
elbow, and with his right the foot of the chalice, saying 
with the Bishop the prayer, OjferimiLS tib% &q. j after- 

31* 



366 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

wards, the sub-deacon having extended the lower part of 
the veil hanging on his right on the altar, and put his 
right hand on it, the deacon gives him the paten, which 
he covers with a veil, goes down below the steps, and 
holding the paten raised, remains behind the Bishop till 
the Pater is said. 

18. Mass is continued as usual, and after the Bishop 
has said the words JBenedic hoc sacrificium iuo sancto 
nomlni prceparatum, the censer-bearer goes to the altar ; 
incense is put into the censer, the deacon holding the 
censer, and saying JBenedicite^ Pater Reiser endissimej 
the Bishop blesses it, saying, Per intercessionem^ &c. ; 
then having received the censer from the deacon, he in- 
censes the Ohlata, saying, I^icenswn istud — the cross, 
saying, Dirigatur^ Domine — the relics, saying nothing ; 
and continues the other prayers as he incenses the altar ; 
which being done, he gives back the censer to the dea- 
con, saying, Accendat; then having received the precious 
mitre from the first assistant deacon he is incensed, 
standing at the Epistle corner by the deacon of the Gos- 
pel, who incenses the assistant priest, the two assistant 
deacons, the clergy in the sanctuary, according to their 
rank and order, lastly the sub-deacon ; afterwards he 
gives back the censer to the censer-bearer, who incenses 
the deacon, then the master of ceremonies, the acolytes, 
and the people. 

19. After the Bishop is incensed, the first assistant 
deacon takes off his mitre ; he continues Mass as usual, 
the assistant priest and the acolyte with the hand-candle- 
stick remaining by the Missal. The deacon standing on 
the second step behind the Bishop, being incensed, re- 
mains there till the Sanctus, then he goes up to the right 
of the Bishop, and says it with him and the assistant 



SANCTus. 367 

priest. Likewise, all tlie clergy in the sanctuary, two by 
two, say the Sanctiis at the same time. After the Sanc- 
tus, the deacon goes down to the second step behind the 
Bishop. 

20. At the SanctuSy four or six acolytes, accompanied 
by the second master of ceremonies, go from the sacristy 
to the sanctuary, holding in their hand large candles 
lighted ; when they reach the middle of the sanctuary, 
they make a genuflection, bow to the clergy at each side 
of the sanctuary, kneel in a line at a convenient distance 
from one another ; those who are at the Epistle side hold 
their candle in their right, and those at the Gospel side 
in their left hand, keeping their arm extended, and the 
end of the candle resting on the floor. They remain 
there till after the elevation, unless the Bishop give the 
communion ; in which case they remain kneeling during 
the communion of the clergy, which is given at the altar, 
and accompany the Bishop to the railing, where he gives 
the communion to the people. After the communion, 
they go back to the sacristy. 

21. After the jSa?ict'iis has been recited by the Bishop 
and the clergy, all in the sanctuary and in the church 
kneel down, except the ministers assisting at the altar. 
When the Bishop says Quam ohlationem^ the deacon 
goes up to his right during the consecration and eleva- 
tion, kneels down, raises with his left hand the Bishop's 
chasuble on his side; after the elevation of the conse- 
crated Host, he rises, uncovers the chalice, kneels again, 
raises the Bishop's chasuble as before, and after the ele- 
vation of the chalice, rises, covers the chalice, and makes 
a genuflection with the Bishop. The two assistant dea- 
cons, the sub-deacon, and the assistant priest remain 
kneeling at their places during the elevation. The assist- 



368 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

ant priest with his right hand raises the chasuble of the 
Bishop on his side during the elevation. The master of 
ceremonies rings the bell at the elevation, and the cen- 
ser-bearer incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament at each 
elevation. 

22. During the elevation, nothing should be sung ; but 
some devout and harmonious tunes may be played on 
the organ. After the elevation, the choir sings 3ene- 
dictus qui venit, and all rise, and stand until the com- 
munion. The celebrant continues Mass as usual; the 
deacon makes a genuflection and goes to his place be- 
hind the Bishop. At the words JBenedicis et pi^mstas ^ 
nohis^ the deacon goes to the right of the Bishop, makes 
■\vith him a genuflection and uncovers the chalice ; at the 
words Per ipsmn^ he places two fingers on the foot of 
the chalice, and after the words Oymiis honor et gloria^ 
he covers the chalice, makes a genuflection with the 
Bishop, and goes to his place behind him. 

23. At the Pater JVoster, when the Bishop says ^t di- 
mitte nobis, the deacon and sub-deacon, having made a 
genuflection, go up to the altar, the deacon to the right 
of the Bishop, and the sub-deacon to the right of the 
deacon ; there, the sub-deacon, placing his hand on the 
altar, the deacon uncovers the paten, receives it from 
the sub-deacon, cleans it with the purifier, kisses it, and 
puts it into the Bishop's hand, which he also kisses, 
whilst the Bishop says, Libera nos qucesiimus, &c. As 
the Bishop places the paten under the Host, the deacon 
uncovers the chalice, makes a genuflection, and rises 
with the Bishop, who puts the particle of the Host in 
the chalice ; the deacon then covers it, and again makes 
a genuflection. The sub-deacon having given the paten 
to the deacon, takes off his veil, gives it to the second 






AGNUS DKI. 369 

master of ceremonies, and having made a genuflection, 
returns to liis place at the foot of the altar ; he does not 
go up to say the Ag?ius Del, but he goes to the right of 
the Bishop, whilst the deacon remains at his left, in place 
of the assistant priest. 

24. The assistant priest and the ofiiciating deacon say 
the Agnus Dei, with the Bishop ; the rest of the clergy 
say it at the same time, at their places. After the 
Agnus Dei, the assistant priest and the deacon make a 
genuflection, exchange places, and again make a genu- 
flection ; the deacon remains near the Missal, and the 
assistant priest kneels down whilst the celebrant says 
the prayer, Domine Jesu Christe qui dixisti ; after 
which, he rises, kisses the altar at the same time with 
the Bishop, receives from him the Pax, approaching his 
left cheek to the left cheek of the celebrant, placing his 
two hands under the celebrant's elbows and answering, 
Et cum spiritu tuo. Then rising, he carries the Pax to 
the clergy, giving it to the first of them on each side of 
the sanctuary; on returning to the foot of the altar, he 
gives it to the master of ceremonies, by whom he was 
accompanied, and goes up to the left of the Bishop. 
The first assistant deacon, after the assistant priest has 
received the Pax, goes to the Bishop's right, and re- 
ceives it in the same manner ; then the second assistant 
deacon, the officiating deacon, and lastly the sub- 
deacon. 

When the Bishop is to give communion, after he has 
received the precious blood, the deacon and sub-deacon 
at his left, kneel on the platform before the Bishop, who, 
holding the Sacrament in his hand, gives to each of 
them the Pax immediately before communion, and the 
communion before the Conjlteor^ which the officiating 



370 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

deacon sings, having returned to the right of the cele- 
brant. 

25. The deacon, after the communion, goes to the 
right of the Bishop, receives the cruets from the acolyte, 
serves the wine for the first ablution, and the wine and 
water for the second, after which he places the purifier 
on the Bishop's fingers. After the Bishop has taken the 
first ablution, the assistant priest carries the Missal, on 
its cushion or stand, from the Gospel to the Epistle side, 
followed by the acolyte with the candlestick. The dea- 
con puts the mitre on the head of the Bishop, who 
washes his hands, two acolytes having brought the basin 
and ewer with water and the towel. The assistant 
priest takes off his ring, presents him the towel to wipe 
his hands, and replaces the ring on his finger. Then 
the officiating deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre. In 
the mean time, the sub-deacon, having folded the cor- 
poral, and put it in the burse, and placed the purifier, 
paten, pall, and burse on the chalice, carries it to the 
side-table, and places himself^ below the lower step be- 
hind the deacon, who stands on the middle step, behind 
the Bishop, who, attended by the assistant priest, and 
remaining near the Missal, on the Epistle side, reads the 
communion, goes to the middle, followed by the deacon 
and sub-deacon, says, Dominus vohiscum^ and finishes 
Mass as usual. After the last prayer and Dominus vo- 
biscum^ the Bishop remains turned towards the people, 
towards whom the deacon also turns, and sings, Ite^ 
Missa est. Then both turn to the altar towards the 
Epistle side. The Bishop having said, JPlaceat tibi^ &c., 
gives the solemn blessing, as usual. 

If the celebrant is an archbishop, he gives the blessing 
without mitre, bowing first to the cross which is held 



SOLEMN MASS. 371 

before him. Then he lays his pallium on the altar, and 
says, Initium Sancti JSvangelii. 

When the Indulgence has not been already published, 
iu consequence of no sermon having been preached, the 
assistant priest publishes it as usual, from the Epistle 
side. 

26. The Bishop then takes off his mitre, begins the 
Gospel of St. John, at the Gospel side, puts on the 
mitre, takes the crosier in his left hand, and continues 
the Gospel while going to his seat, where he finishes it. 

27. The Gospel being ended, the two assistant dea- 
cons give their places to the deacon and sub-deacon, 
and retire to the minister's bench. The Bishop, having 
disrobed, washes his hands, and puts on the cape and 
pectoral cross ; then two acolytes bring the book and 
candle, and the master of ceremonies brings the Bishop's 
shoes to his seat, who reads the thanksgiving, whilst the 
acolytes take off his sandals and put on his shoes. 
Which being done and the thanksgiving being ended, 
the clergy and Bishop return to the sacristy, and thence 
the Bishop is accompanied to his house, or to his room, 
where he puts on his rochet and cape. 



CHAPTER YII. 

SOLEinS" MASS CELEBRATED IX PEESENCE OF THE BISHOP 
DPcESSED IX COPE. 

1. Ox solemn festivals, when the Bishop does not 
celebrate a Pontifical Mass, it is proper that he should 



3Y2 SOLEMN MASS IN PEP^SENCE 

assist at tlie divine service in mitre and cope. On such 
occasions, what follows is to be observed : 

2. The Bishop's vestments should be placed on the 
altar, viz. : amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross on a plate, 
stole and cope ; two mitres, one on each side, and the 
crosier. 

On tbe side-table, besides every thing necessary for 
High Mass, a Missal for the Bishop, the hand-candlestick 
with a candle, the basin and ewer, and a towel on a 
plate. 

3. The celebrant and ministei's go to the church before 
tbe Bishop, and seat themselves at tbe bench, waiting 
for him. 

4. The Bishop, accompanied by the clergy, goes .to 
the church, and having arrived at the middle of the 
sanctuary, kneels before the faldstool, rises, after having 
said a short prayer, and with him all the clergy rise. 
Then, between the two assistant deacons, preceded by 
the assistant priest, who are all dressed in surplices, he 
goes to his seat, where he puts on all the vestments be- 
fore mentioned. Thus vested, with his mitre on, and 
the crosier in his left hand, he goes to the altar, 
whither the celebrant and ministers have gone before 
him. 

5. On arriving before the altar,-i;he Bishop takes off 
his mitre, bows to the cross, the others making a genu- 
flection, and, having the celebrant on his right, the dea- 
con on the right of the celebrant, the assistant priest on 
his left, and the sub-deacon at the left of the assistant 
priest, and the two assistant deacons behind tlie cele- 
brant and the assistant priest, and the acolytes, with the 
mitre and crosier, behind the assistant deacon, he makes 
the Confession, saying, as usual. In nomine Patris^ <fcc., 



OF THE BISHOP IN COPE. 373 

the celebrant and the ministers answering. After the 
prayer, Indulgentiam absolutionem^ the Bishop makes 
a profound bow, receives the mitre and the crosier from 
the first assistant deacon, and returns to his seat ; the 
celebrant having bowed to the Bishop, goes to the 
middle and continues Mass. 

6. 'The Bishop, on arriving at his seat, gives the crosier 
into the hands of the assistant priest, sits with his mitre 
on, and the censei'^bearer, presenting the censer and 
giving the boat to the assistant priest, the Bishop puts 
incense into the censer, and blesses it, as usual. The 
celebrant incenses the cross and altar, as usual ; then he 
is incensed with two swings only, by the deacon, who 
gives the censer to the censer-bearer, by whom it is 
carried to the Bishop's seat, and given to the assistant 
priest, who is below the lowest step, where he incenses 
the Bishop with three swings. Afterwards, the Bishop's 
mitre is taken oiF by the second assistant deacon, and 
the Missal and candlestick are brought by the acolytes 
before the Bishop, who commences the Introi% when 
the celebrant begins to read it at the altar. After the 
Introi% the Bishop says the Kyrie alternately with the 
assistants and the priests who are present at Mass in the 
^sanctuary dressed in surplices. They go before the 
Bishop's seat, placing themselves in a semicircle ; after 
having bowed to him, they say the Kyrie and Gloria 
with the Bishop ; at the end of the Kyrie^ they bow 
aud return to their places. The Bishop, as they bow, 
gives them his blessing. If the choir has not finished 
singing the ICyrie^ the Bishop sits, receives the mitre, 
and the assistants also sit and cover their heads ; other- 
wise, he remains standing. At the Gloria, he rises 
without his mitre ; the book is not held before him dur- 

32 



374 SOLEMN MASS IN PEESENCE 

ing the Gloria^ but he says it by heart with his assist- 
ants, standing. He sits, with his mitre on, after the 
Gloria. During the Dominus vohiscum and the Col- 
lects, the Bishop stands with his head uncovered. After 
the Collects, he sits with his mitre on. The sub-deacon, 
turned towards the Bishop, sings the Epistle, and, 
having sung it, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand, and to 
receive his blessing. Then the acolytes come to him 
with the Missal and candlestick, and the Bishop reads 
the Epistle and Tract, says, Munda cor meum^ and reads 
the Gospel. 

7. A little before the Bishop finishes reading the 
Gospel, the deacon, having placed the Missal on the 
middle of the altar, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand ; he 
then returns to the altar, and says, kneeling, Munda cor 
meicm. In the mean time, the censer-bearer carries the 
censer to the Bishop's seat, and the incense is put in, 
and blessed by the Bishop, as usual. Afterwards, the 
deacon and sub-deacon, with the master of ceremonies, 
censer-bearer, and acolytes, go to the Bishop's seat, as. 
has been said elsewhere, and kneel down ; the deacon 
asks and receives the blessing, and sings the Gospel, as 
usual. After it, the sub-deacon carries the book to the 
Bishop to be kissed ; and the assistant priest incenses 
the Bishop. The celebrant is not incensed. 

If there is a sermon, the preacher asks the Bishop's 
blessing. 

8. At the Credo^ the Bishop rises, the priests go be- 
fore his seat, as at the Kyrie and Gloria^ say it with 
him, and kneel also with him, at the words Incarnatus 
est. The book is not carried to the Bishop, who says 
the Credo by heart. At the Offertory, the Bishop, 
standing, with his head uncovered, reads it out of the 



OF THE BISHOP IN COPE. 3T5 

Missal, which the acolyte holds open before him ; and 
then sits, with the mitre on. The sub-deacon carries 
the cruet with water to the Bishop, and says, JBetiedicite^ 
Meverendisshne Pater j the Bishop then blesses the 
Avater. Afterwards he puts incense into the censer and 
blesses it. The celebrant incenses the oblation, the cross, 
and the altar, as usual, then he is incensed twice only by 
the deacon, who carries the censer to the Bishop's seat ; 
and the assistant priest, coming down to the foot of the 
altar, receives the censer, incenses the Bishop thrice, 
returns the censer to the deacon, who incenses the 
assistant, priest, the first and second assistant deacons, 
and afterwards the clergy in the sanctuary, and the sub- 
deacon. 

9. At the Preface, the Bishop stands with his head 
uncovered ; he recites the Saiietiis by heart, with the 
assistants and the priests, who go before his seat at the 
Kyrie and Gloria. After the Sanctus^ the Bishop goes 
to the middle of the sanctuary, between the two assist- 
ant deacons, and followed by the acolytes carrying the 
crosier and mitre, and there kneels at the faldstool, till 
after the elevation ; he then returns to his seat, and 
stands till after the communion of the priest, 

10. At the Agnus Dei^ the priests go to the Bishop's 
seat, and say it with him; then they return to their 
places. The assistant priest goes to the right of the 
celebrant, and, with the usual ceremonies, receives from 
him the Pax^ and goes to give it to the Bishop, who 
gives it to the first and second assistant deacons. The 
celebrant gives it also to the deacon. But the sub- 
deacon receives it from the assistant priest, and then 
gives it to the first clergyman on each side of the sanctu- 
aiy, as in other High Masses. If the celebrant gives 



376 SOLEMN MASS. 

communion, the Bishop kneels as at the elevation, after 
communion ; the Bishop reads the communion in the 
Missal, and sits with his mitre on. 

11. At the Dominus voMscum^ the Bishop and the 
cleigy rise, and stand during the Collects. The cele- 
brant does not give the blessing, but the Bishop gives it 
solemnly, as usual ; after which the celebrant publishes 
the Indulgence, and finishes Mass, as usual. 

12. After Mass, the celebrant, with the deacon and 
sub-deacon, and the acolytes with their candlesticks, 
having made a genuflection to the cross, and bowed to 
the Bishop and clergy, go to the sacristy. The Bishop 
takes off the sacred vestments, puts on the cape and 
pectoral cross, and having prayed a short time before 
the altar, retires^ accompanied by the clergy. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF SOLEMN MASS 

CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OP THE BISHOP NOT DRESSED IN 
COPE AND MITRE, BUT ONLY IN ROCHET AND CAPE. 

1. Every thing is to be observed as in the preceding 
chapter, with the following exceptions : 

2. The Bishop is incensed only at the Offertory. 

3. The celebrant is incensed, as usual, at the beginning 
of Mass, after the Gospel, and at the Offertory, twice 
only on each occasion. 

4. The Bishop may go from the sacristy to the sane- 



VESPERS FOR THE DEAD- 377 

tuary, at the same time with the celebrant, but behind 
him, immediately preceded by the assistant priest, and 
having at his side the two assistant deacons ; he may 
likewise return to the sacristy behind the celebrant in 
the same manner. 



CHAPTER IX. 

VESPERS FOR THE DEAD, 

CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop at these Vespers wears the cape, or the 
pontifical mantle,* over his rochet. He sits in his stall 
in the choir, or on his seat, but without assistant priests 
and deacons. 

2. Vespers are begun with the antiphon, Placebo Do- 
mino^ sung by the choir, during which the Bishop and 
the clergy stand with their heads uncovered. When 
they begin the Psalm, Dilexi^ they all sit and put on 
their caps. When the Magnificat is begun, they all 
take them off, and rise. They sit down again, whilst 
the choir repeats the antiphon after the Magnificat; 
after which the Bishop says, in an audible voice. Pater 
noster^ which is secretly continued and finished by all, 
kneeling. 

3. At the same time, two acolytes, with their candle- 
sticks and lighted candles, and a third one with the 
book, come before the Bishop, who says, still kneeling, 

* The cappa magna is a full robe with a train. 
33* 



3Y8 MATINS AND LAUDS. 

Et ne nos inducas^ &c., with tlie other verses, as in the 
Breviary. When he says Dominus vobiscum, he rises, 
and says the prayer. Requiem ceternam. Then the 
chanters sing Req^iiescant in pace, 

4. Should the Bishop sit on the usual place, at the 
Tater Noster^ <fcc., he kneels before the faldstool, and 
there finishes the prayers. The same thing is to be ob- 
served of Matins. 



CHAPTER X. 

MATINS AND LAUDS FOR THE DEAD, 

CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop at these Matins is dressed, and sits as 
at "Vespers. 

2. Having sat for a short time, the Bishop rises, and 
with him all the clergy. The choir begins the Invitor 
torium: Megem cui omnia vivunt, &c., during which, 
and the Psalm, Venite exultemus, all stand. When the 
Psalm of the first nocturn is begun, they all sit and put 
on their caps. After the verses of the first nocturn, 
they all rise, with their heads uncovered, and say in 
silence the Pater Noster; after which, the Bishop and 
the clergy sit down. The Lessons are sung by the 
clergy in the middle of the sanctuary at the desk. The 
same is done in the other nocturns. 

3. After the ninth response, Lauds are said, the Bishop 
and the clergy sitting. When the JBenedictus is begun, 
they all rise, with their heads uncovered. Whilst the 



PONTIFICAL MASS FOR THE DEAD. 379 

antiplioii is repeated after it, they sit and cover their 
heads. 

4. After the antiphon, they rise, the acolytes go with 
the candlesticks and the book before the Bishop, and 
every thing is done as at Vespers. 



CHAPTER XI. 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

Article I. 
Things to he Prepared. 

1. The altar should be dressed in the plainest manner, 
having on it the cross and six candlesticks with candles 
of brown wax ; before it a black antipendium. The 
canopy on the tabernacle, if there is the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, should be of purple color. 

It is contrary to the Rubrics to put about the altar 
vestments, stools, or books, any representation of death, 
or white crosses.* 

2. On the side-table, two candlesticks with candles of 
brown wax ; the basin and ewer, and a plate with some 
towels; the Missal, a vase with holy water and a 
sprinkle, the chalice with every thing necessary for 
Mass. 

3. On the bench of the ministers, the maniples for the 
deacon and sub-deacon. 

* Caeremoniale Episc, chap. ii.. lib. ii. 



€> 



80 PONTIFICAL MASS 



4. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., a black 
chasuble, dalmatic, tunic, stole, and maniple, cincture, 
alb, and amice. The pectoral cross and ring on a plate ; 
and a plain white mitre. 

The Bishop does not use sandals, gloves, or crosier at 
this Mass. 

The tabernacle may be covered with purple, or not 
covered. 

5. In the sacristy, a black cope for the assistant priest ; 
two black dalmatics, two cinctures, albs, and amices for 
the two assistant deacons; also a black dalmatic and 
stole, with a cincture, alb, and amice for the officiating 
deacon; and a tunic, cincture, alb, and amice for the 
sub-deacon. Moreover, as many black copes, chasubles, 
dalmatics, and tunics, with amices, albs, and cinctures, as 
may be required for the clergy, who assist in sacred 
vestments at the Pontifical Mass. Lastly, a cope for the 
Bishop, to be taken to him by an acolyte after Mass. 

6. A black carpet and four candlesticks must be kept 
ready, in a convenient place, to be extended before the 
Bishop's seat after Mass, for the absolution, unless a 
cenotaph or monument be erected in the middle of the 
church ; in this case, the processional cross is to be pre- 
pared at the Epistle side. 

Aeticle il. 

From the Beginning to the End of Mass, 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as usual. 

2. The clergy should put on their respective vestments 
before the Bishop arrives at the sacristy. 

3. They all go from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 



FOR THE DEAD. 381 

4. The Bishop having arrived at his seat, attended by 
the deacon and sub-deacon, and the assistant priest (the 
assistant deacon remaining at the minister's bench whilst 
the Bishop is dressing), does not say the anthem, ISfe re- 
miniscaris^ nor the Psalms v^^hich follow ; but he takes 
off his cape, reading, from the book which is held open 
before him by an acolyte, the prayer, JExue^ &c. ; he 
then washes his hands, puts on the vestments prepared 
on the altar, as in Art. 1, n. 4, saying the respective 
prayers, and having received the mitre, sits for a short 
time ; the assistant deacons go to his side, and the dea- 
con and sub-deacon go to put on their maniples. 

At this Mass, whenever the ministers give any thing 
to the celebrant, or receive it from him, they do not kiss 
it, nor the celebrant's hand. * 

During the Collects, the clergy in the sanctuary, with 
the exception of the Bishop's assistants, kneel down, as 
also from the Sanctus till the Pater JVoster. 

5. The Bishop being vested, he and the assistants and 
ministers go to the altar, and take their places as directed 
above. The Psalm, Judica, is not said. After the Con- 
fession, he says the usual prayers, goes up to the altar 
with the assistant priest, deacon, and sub-deacon ; he then 
kisses the altar, but not the Missal ; neither does he in- 
cense the cross or the altar ; having kissed the altar, he 
returns to his seat between the assistant deacons; and 
the deacon and sub-deacon go to their seat. 

6. The Bishop having returned to his seat, takes off 
the mitre ; the acolyte holding the book before him, he 
reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie^ alternately with 
his assistants, which last is said likewise by the deacon 
and sub-deacon, and all the clergy in the sanctuary. 

7. After the choir has finished singing the Kyrie^ the 



382 PONTIFICAL MASS 

Bishop rising, Ms head being uncovered, sings, Dominus 
vohisciim^ and the Collect. He then sits with his mitre 
on. The sub-deacon sings the Epistle as usual ; but 
after it, he does not go to the Bishop to receive his bless- 
ing. ' The Bishop, after the sub-deacon has sung the 
Epistle, reads it, w'lXh the Tract and Sequeritiay says, 
Munda cor Tneum^ &c., but not Jube Doinne^ <fec., and 
reads the Gospel. The deacon and sub-deacon sit at 
their bench. About the end of the Sequentia^ the dea- 
con carries the book to the altar, and without going to 
kiss the Bishop's hand, kneeling on the highest step, 
says, Munda cor meum^ &c. The sub-deacon, at the 
same time, places himself before the lowest step, so as to 
be at the left of the deacon when he goes down ; two 
* acolytes place themselves behind them, without candle- 
sticks. At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, 
they go to sing the Gospel. The book is not incensed 
before the Gospel is sung, nor the celebrant after it ; nor 
does the sub-deacon carry the book to the Bishop ; who, 
immediately after the Gospel, sings Dominus vohis- 
cum and Orem^us^ reads the Offertory^ and washes his 
hands. 

8. The Bishop having washed his hands, goes to the 
altar, and every thing is done as before, except, 1st, the 
sub-deacon, before he puts water into the chalice, does 
not say JBenedicite^ <fcc., and the Bishop does not bless 
it; 2dly, the sub-deacon does not put on the veil, nor 
hold the paten; 3dly, after having incensed the altar, 
the Bishop alone is incensed by the deacon. 

9. At the /Safictus, four acolytes go from the sacristy 
into the sanctuary with four torches, as directed above ; 
and remain kneeling till after the communion. 

10. The sub-deacon, at the elevation, kneels on the 



FOR THE DEAD. 383 

lowest step of the altar at the Epistle side, and incenses 
the Blessed Sacrament. 

11. The Pax is not given. 

12. At the end of Mass, the blessing is not given. 
The deacon, turned towards the altar, sings, JRequiescant 
in pace. The Bishop, having said, Placeat tibi^ begins, 
at the Gospel side, the Gospel of St. John, receives the 
mitre, and continues the Gospel in going to his seat. 

Article III. 
The Absolution after Mass. 

1. The Bishop, having finished the Gospel at his seat, 
takes off the mitre, maniple, chasuble, dalmatic and 
tunic, and puts on the cope previously brought by one 
of the acolytes from the sacristy, then receives the 
mitre, and sits down. The deacon and sub-deacon take 
off their maniples before they help the Bisho]) to disrobe. 
If a funeral oration is to be delivered, the preacher, 
dressed in his cassock, without surplice, after a short 
prayer before the altar, without asking the Bishop's bless- 
ing, but having made a profound reverence to him, goes 
into the pulpit, which is to be dressed with black hang- 
ings ; and having there made again a profound bow to 
the Bishop, he makes the sign of the cross, and begins 
his discourse. 

2. After the funeral oration, or if there be none, after 
Mass, a large black cloth is spread before the Bishop's 
seat, and four candlesticks placed at its corners. In the 
mean time, the Bishop sits down, and the choir sings 
Libera me^ &c. ; whilst this response is repeated, two 
acolytes, one with the censer and boat, the other with 
the holy-water vase, go to the Bishop, who, whilst the 



384 THE ABSOLUTION 

assistant priest holds the boat, puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it ; then he rises, his head being un- 
covered, and after the last Kyrie has been sung, he says 
the words Pater noster, in an audible voice ; continues 
the prayer in silence, and having received the sprinkle 
from the assistant priest, sprinkles the black cloth three 
times ; he then gives him back the sprinkle and receives 
the censer, and incenses the cloth thrice also ; the assist- 
ant deacons holding, during all this time, the extremities 
of his cope on each side. Two acolytes, with candle- 
sticks and lighted candles, now come to the foot of the 
Bishop's seat, and another, with the book immediately 
before him, and the Bishop sings, ^t ne nos, &c., with 
the other verses, and the prayer ; after which he repeats, 
JRequie^n mternam^ and the chanters sing, Mequiescant 
in pace^ &c. ; the Bishop makes, at the same time, the 
sign of the cross towards the cloth. 

If there be a monument, or cenotaph, in the middle 
of the church, the absolution should be made there. All 
go thither in procession in the following order: two 
acolytes, one with the censer and boat, and the other 
with the holy- water vase ; the sub-deacon carrying the 
cross between two acolytes with candlesticks and lighted 
candles ; then the clergy, two by two, according to their 
order; the deacon at the left of the assistant priest; 
the Bishop between the two assistant deacons, followed 
by the acolytes, who wait on him with the mitre, book, 
&c., &c. ; when they reach the place, the two acolytes, 
with the censer and holy-water vase, stop at the head of 
it on the right side, and the sub-deacon, with the aco- 
lytes at his side, goes to the foot of the same place ; the 
clergy divide into two lines, one on each side of the 
monument, and the Bishop sits on the faldstool in the 



AFTER MASS. 385 

middle, at the head of the same, where he performs 
what has been directed above. 

On particular occasions, for instance at a funeral ser- 
vice for the Pope, &c., besides the Bishop, there are four 
other prelates or priests, who, after Mass, put on copes, 
and perform four absolutions before that performed by 
the Bishop ; they walk two by two, immediately before 
the assistant priest, and when they come to the monu- 
ment, sit on seats placed at each corner of it. Then all 
rise, and the assistant priest holds the book before the 
Bishop, who reads, JSfon intres ; the choir afterwards 
sings the response, Suhveiiite^ and the prelate first in 
dignity, who is placed at the right corner at the head of 
the monument, attended by the deacon, puts incense 
into the censer, blesses it, says, at the proper time, Pater 
noster^ sprinkles the monument thrice at each corner, 
going round it, beginning on his right side, incenses it 
in the same manner, says, JEt ne nos, and the. verses and 
prayer as in the Roman Pontifical. Then the prelate, 
second in dignity, who is placed at the left corner, at 
the foot of the monument, does the same ; so also the 
prelate, third in dignity, placed at the left corner at the 
head of the monument. The same is done by the 
prelate, fourth in dignity, who is placed at the right 
corner, at the foot of the monument. Last of all, the 
Bishop performs the same, after the Libera has been 
sung, as is to be found in the Roman Pontifical. But if 
there are no other prelates present, tiie Bishop alone is 
to bless the incense. 

38 



386 SOLEMN MASS FOR THE DEAD. 



CHAPTER XII. 

SOLEMN MASS FOR THE DEAD, CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE 
OF THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop may assist at solemn Mass for the 
dead, either with cap and cape, or with black cope and 
mitre. 

2. Should he assist in cope and mitre, his vestments 
are placed on the altar, and he puts them on, as men- 
tioned above ; but he does not use the crosier. 

3. He makes the Confession at the beginning of Mass ; 
but he does not say the Psalm, Judica. 

4. He puts incense into the censer ; but he is incensed 
by the assistant priest at the Offertory only, after the 
deacon has incensed the celebrant twice. 

5. At the Collects, he goes to the middle of the 
sanctuary, and kneels during them at the faldstool be- 
tween his assistant deacons. 

6. After the Sanctus^ he goes likewise to the middle, 
and kneels till the Ag?ius Z>ei, which he says at his 
seat ; but the priests in the sanctuary do not go before 
his seat. 

7. At the Post Communion^ he goes again to the 
middle, and kneels as before; he then returns to his 
seat, but he does not give the blessing. 

8. After Mass, he performs the absolution, observing 
what has been said in the foregoing chapter. 



INSTRUCTION FOR THE ASSISTAI^T PRIEST. o87 



CHAPTER XIII. 

PARTICULAE INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE DIFFERENT 
OFFICERS WHO ATTEND THE BISHOP. 

Article I. 

INSTRUCTION FOR THE ASSISTANT PRIEST. 

Section 1. — His Quality^ Dress^ and Place. 

1. The assistant priest, who, in the Pontifical, is some- 
times called by the name of archdeacon, is the first 
amongst all the ministers of the Bishop. Therefore this 
office should generall}*- be exercised by the most con- 
spicuous clergyman, who holds the first rank in the 
diocese. 

2. His dress, when the Bishop officiates pontifically, is 
the amice over his surplice (or rochet, if he be entitled 
to wear it), and the cope. 

3. He sits on a stool placed on the platform of the 
pontifical chair, and at the left of the second assistant 
deacon; however, should the place not allow this ar- 
rangement, he may sit at the right of the first assistant 
deacon; in either case, his stool must not be on the 
same line with those of the assistant deacons, but a little 
forward towards the steps of the platform. 

Section II. — JECis Office in general, 

1. The assistant priest, after the Bishop is dressed, 
puts the ring on his finger ; he also tak^s it ofi" every 
time the Bishop is to wash his hands, and puts it on his 



388 INSTRUCTIONS FOR 

finger again, and presents to him the towel ; he holds 
the book on his head before the Bishop, whenever he 
sings any thing out of it at Vespers or High Mass ; but 
when the Bishop reads, the book is to be held by an 
acolyte ; he holds the incense-boat, and presents the 
spoon to the Bishop every time the Bishop is to put the 
incense into the censer, and says, JBenedicite^ Pater 
Meverendissime ; but at Mass, only when he is at his 
pontifical chair, for the deacon is to present it when he 
is at the altar at Mass. He incenses the Bishop when 
he is at his chair. 

Section III. — His Office at Pontifical Vespers. 

1. The assistant priest holds the book before the 
Bishop when he intones the first antiphon. 

2. Standing at his place he intones the third antiphon. 

3. He holds the book when the Bishop intones the hymn ; 
after the antiphon of the Magnificat has been intoned, 
he presents the spoon to the Bishop, to put in the in- 
cense, kissing, as usual, both the spoon and the Bishop's 
hand, and saying, £enedicite, &c. When the Magnifir- 
cat is begun, he walks before the Bishop to the altar ; on 
arriving there, after the Bishop has kissed it, he gives 
him the censer with the usual kisses ; after the incensing, 
he takes it back, and gives it to the censer-bearer ; re- 
turns to the Bishop's seat, walking before him, and there 
standing below the lowest step, he incenses the Bishop 
with three double swings, goes up to his seat, is incensed 
with two double swings, holds the book before the 
Bishop whilst he sings the prayer, then returns to his 
place, and after Vespers takes oflf his cope as usual. 



ASSISTANT PRIEST. 389 



Section IV. — The Office of the Assistant Priest at 
Pontifical Mass. 

1. As the assistant priest particularly attends the 
Bishop at the book, it is his duty to prepare, find, and 
mark, with the usual ribbons in the Missal, the Mass of 
the day, the commemorations, and whatever is to be 
read or sung by the Bishop, to whom he is to point out 
every thing, and suggest what he has to sing or read. 

2. The assistant priest j^uts on the cope over the 
amice, which he puts over the surplice, or rochet if he 
be entitled to wear it. Whilst the Bishop reads the 
Psalms for the preparation of Mass, standing near the 
first or second assistant deacon, he answers together 
with them, and alternately with the Bishop ; then he 
ofiers the towel to the Bishop, when he washes his 
hands ; holds the book before the Bishop at the prayer 
of Tierce ; puts the ring on the Bishop's finger after he 
is vested, offers the spoon, when the Bishop puts incense 
into the censer, walks to the high altar at the right of 
the officiating deacon, places himself near the Bishop, 
and at his right below the lowest step, makes a genu- 
flection, answers to the confession, making a profound 
bow to the Bishop, when he says Et tibi Pater^ and 
M te Pater. 

3. When the Bishop has kissed the altar, the assistant 
priest holds the Missal on his side, whilst the Bishop 
kisses it, and retires on the Gospel side, below the steps, 
during the incensing ; after it, he walks to the Bishop's 
chair before him ; there he stands at his place, whilst 
the Bishop reads the Introit and Kyrie^ to which he an- 
swers with the assistant deacons \ after it, he sits. He 

33* 



890 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

holds the Missal whilst the Bishop sings Gloria m ex- 
celsis Deoj gives it to the acolyte after the Bishop has 
sung those words ; holds it again before him whilst he 
sings the prayers; and incenses the Bishop after the 
Gospel. During the sermon, if the Bishop preaches at 
his seat, he sits at his usual place ; but if he preaches at 
the altar, he sits at the right of the- Bishop, and the dea- 
con at the left. After the deacon has sung the Gon- 
fiteor^ the assistant priest publishes the Indulgences. 
But if the assistant priest preaches (for he that preaches 
at the Pontifical Mass ought to perform the office of as- 
sistant priest), after the Gospel, having incensed the 
Bishop, he asks his benediction, saying, Juhe Domne 
henedicere^ kisses his hand, preaches dressed as he is in 
cope, and after the Confiteor^ sung by the deacon from 
the pulpit, publishes the Indulgences. 

4. The Bishop having read the Offertory, the assistant 
priest attends him with the towel, when he washes his 
hands, puts the ring on his finger, carries the Missal to 
the altar, goes to the altar walking before the Bishop ; 
in case, for greater convenience, the Missal was carried 
thither by an acolyte, the assistant priest attends the 
Bishop, standing at his left near the book, and turns the 
leaves, when necessary ; when the Bishop incenses the 
sacred offerings and the altar, the assistant priest takes 
the Missal with its stand from the altar, and retires with 
it to the Gospel side, below the steps ; after the incens- 
ing, he puts it back in the same place, and remains near 
it to attend the Bishop. He says Sanctus^ with the 
Bishop, kneels only at the elevation, and makes a genu- 
fliection whenever the Bishop makes it. He says with 
him, Agnus Deij after it, he exchanges place with the 
deacon, and when the Bishop says the first prayer, Do- 



ASSISTANT PRIEST. 391 

mine Jesu Christe^ he kneels at his right ; after it, he 
rises, kisses the altar at the same time with the cele- 
brant, receives from him the Pax^ approaching his left 
cheek to the celebrant's left cheek ; and when he has 
said Pax tecum^ the assistant priest answers, Et cum 
spiritu tuo. Then he makes a genuflection, and, at- 
tended by the master of ceremonies, gives the JPax to 
those of the clergy on each side of the sanctuary who 
occupy the first places or stalls on each row, making no 
reverence before he gives it, but only after he has given 
it. Lastly, he gives it to the master of ceremonies, by 
whom he was accompanied. 

5. The assistant priest, after having given the Pax to 
the master of ceremonies, returns to his place, at the 
left of the Bishop ; after the ablution, he carries the 
Missal from the Gospel side to the Epistle side, attends 
the Bishop when he washes his hands, presenting to him 
the towel, goes near the book at the right of the Bishop, 
and when the Indulgences have not been published, if 
there has not been any sermon, he publishes them after 
the Bishop has given the blessing 

Section Y.— The Office of the Assistant Priest^ when 
the Bishop does not celebrate himself^ but only assists 
at Mass or Vespers celebrated by others, 

1. When the Bishop does not celebrate, but assists 
either in cope, or in his large mantle, or in cape, the 
assistant priest attends him in his usual choral dress, 
viz., in surplice, or in rochet, if he be entitled to use it. 

2. The assistant priest presents the incense-boat to 
the Bishop, incenses him, if he assists in cope and mitre 
after the Introit, after the Gospel and at the Offertory ; 



392 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

after the Agents Dei^ he goes to the altar, kneels, rises, 
kisses the altar, receives the Pax from the celebrant, 
gives it to the Bishop, Avho gives it to his assistant dea- 
cons, and on returning to his seat he gives it to the sub- 
deacon, by whom it is given to the clergy ; but if Mass 
be celebrated by a prelate, who has his own assistant 
priest, the latter receives it from the Bishop's assistant 
priest, and gives it to the others. 

Aeticle II. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TWO ASSISTANT DEACONS. 

Section 1 . — Their Quality^ Dress^ and Place. 

1. Whenever the Bishop officiates pontifically, either 
for Mass or for Vespers, two clergymen, the highest in 
dignity next to him that performs the office of assistant 
priest, ought to attend the Bishop. 

2. They ought to be dressed in rochet or surplice, 
amice and dalmatic; they wear neither maniples nor 
stoles. Custom permits them to wear albs, instead of 
rochet or surplice ; and this use prevails throughout this 
country ; it may, therefore, be followed. 

3. The assistant deacons sit on each side of the Bishop, 
on two stools placed on the platform, whereon stands 
the Bishop's chair. They walk at his side, and if he is 
dressed in cope, they raise it, each on his own side. 

4. A bishop officiating out of his diocese is not enti- 
tled to have the two assistant deacons. 

Section II. — The Office of the two Assistant Deacons 
at the Po7itifical Yespers. 

1. Whenever the Bishop kneels before the altar at 



ASSISTANT DEACONS. 393 

the faldstool, the assistant deacons adjust the sides of his 
cope. 

2. The second assistant deacon, at the Bishop's left, 
takes off the mitre, and gives it to the acolyte ; the first 
assistant deacon at his right takes off his cap, and 
gently presses down his hair, every time the Bishop is 
to take off his mitre. 

3. The first assistant deacon, at the Bishop's right, 
having first put on him his cap, puts also the mitre on 
him, and the second assistant priest helps him, and fixes 
behind him the mitre-bands every time the Bishop is to 
put on the mitre. Every time the Bishop raises his 
hand, either to make the sign of the cross on himself, or 
to bless some person or thing, or to put incense into the 
censer, or to strike his breast, or to incense the altar, or 
to do any thing else, the first assistant deacon raises the 
celebrant's cope on his side; likewise, whenever the 
Bishop raises both his hands, when he has to read any 
thing out of the book, or to give the solemn blessing, 
both assistant deacons, on each side of him, raise his 
cope. Whenever the Bishop sings, or reads any thing 
from the book, the two assistant deacons, on each side, 
put their hands on the book, the first assistant deacon 
turns the leaves of the boak, and the second points out 
what he has to sing or read. 

Section III. — The Office of the Assistant Deacons at 
the Pontifical Mass, 

1. The assistant deacons go to the side of the Bishop, 
as soon as he is dressed for Tierce, and sit there till the 
chapter is sung. Then they rise, the second assistant 
deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and they both at- 
tend him standing till Tierce is finished ; then they give 



394: PONTIFICAL MASS. 

their places to the deacon and sub-deacon. When the 
bishop has put on all the vestments for Mass, they re- 
turn to his side, walk with him to the altar, where, be- 
ing arrived, the second assistant deacon takes off his 
mitre, and they make a genuflection ; the first assistant 
deacon gives his place to the assistant priest, the second 
assistant deacon to the oflaciating deacon, and retiring 
each behind him to whom he gave w^ay, remain there 
answering, and bowing profoundly at the Confiteor; 
during the incensing, they go up to the second step, the 
jfirst assistant deacon towards the Epistle side, and the 
second assistant deacon towards the Gospel side, and re- 
main there till it is finished ; then the first assistant dea- 
con puts the mitre on the Bishop ; after the Bishop has 
been incensed, they both go at his side to the pontifical 
chair, the second assistant deacon takes off his mitre, 
they both attend him standing whilst he reads the 7h- 
troit and ^yrie^ to which they answer ; then the first 
assistant deacon (if the choir have not done singing the 
JKyrie) puts on him the mitre, and both seat themselves. 
The Kyrie being sung, they rise ; the second assistant 
deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre ; they attend him 
whilst he reads the Gloria^ and when he has finished it, 
and seated himself, the first assistant deacon puts the 
mitre on him. After the Gloria has been sung by the 
choir, they both rise, the second assistant deacon takes 
off the Bishop's mitre, and both attend him whilst he 
sings the prayer and the Collects ; after them, the first 
assistant deacon puts on him the mitre, and they both 
sit whilst the Epistle is sung ; they rise after it, and, 
standing, attend the Bishop whilst he reads the Epistle, 
Tract, <fcc., and Gospel, and whilst he puts the incense 
into the censer ; then they sit ; when the Bishop has 



\RSISTANT DExVCONS. 895 

given the blessing to the deacon, and the latter is about 
to begin the Gospel, they both rise ; the second assist- 
ant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and they stand 
whilst the Gospel is sung ; after the Bishop has been in- 
censed, if there is a sermon, the first assistant deacon 
puts the mitre on him, and they sit during the sermon ; 
after it the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's 
mitre before he sings the absolution ; after it, the first 
assistant deacon puts the mitre on him ; at the blessing, 
they both bow profoundly and make the sign of the 
cross on themselves ; after the blessing, the second as- 
sistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre ; they both 
standing attend him, and with him say the Credo / they 
kneel at the Incarnatus / the Creed being ended, the 
first assistant deacon puts the mitre on the Bishop ; 
whilst the Incarnatus is sung, they make a profound 
bow. The Creed being sung, they rise, the second as- 
sistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and standing 
they attend him whilst he says the Offertory ; after it, 
the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on him, takes 
off his glove from his right hand, and the second assist- 
ant deacon from his left, and they give them to the 
master of ceremonies. After he has washed his hands, 
they go at his side to the altar, but the officiating dea- 
con takes off the mitre, they make a genuflection, go up 
to the second step, remain there whilst the Bishop is at 
the altar ; the first assistant deacon puts on him the 
mitre before he is incensed, and takes it off after the in- 
censing ; at the elevation they both kneel down at their 
place, and likewise at the blessing. After the assistant 
priest has received the P«cc, they go to the Bishop's 
right, make a genuflection without kissing the altar, and 
receive from the Bishop the Pax. Mass being ended, 



396 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

they accompany the Bishop to his seat, where, having 
made him a profound bow, they give their places to the 
deacon and sub- deacon, go to the sacristry, disrobe, 
put on their surplices, and go to accompany the Bishop 
to his house, or to the sacristy. 

Section IV. — TTie Office of the Assistant Deacons, 
when the Bishop does not celebrate, 

1. In this case, they attend the Bishop in their choral 
dress, viz., in surplice, or rochet if they have the privilege 
of using it ; they do what has been said in the preceding 
article, with regard to the mitre, the incense, and the 
place where they must remain. When the Bishop, at 
Mass, goes to kneel down before the faldstool or desk, 
in the middle of the sanctuary, they go with him, and 
kneel at his side. 

The two assistant deacons are to attend only the 
Bishop in his own diocese ; not even Legates have the 
right of their attendance. However, if the Ordinary 
should be willing to confer this honor on any Bishop, 
whom he has invited to officiate in his place, he may 
give him the two assistant deacons. 

Aeticle III. 

INSTBUCTION FOR THE OFFICIATING DEACON. 

1. The officiating deacon puts on all the sacred vest- 
ments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 

2. During Tierce, he sits at his usual place, at the 
right of the sub-deacon, until the Bishop has read the 
Psalms and prayers for the preparation of Mass. 

3. After the Bishop has read the prayer above men- 



OFFICIATING DEACON. 397 

tioned, the officiating deacon goes with the sub-deacon 
to the Bishop's seat, and having made to him a profound 
bow, goes to his right, and there standing, after he has 
washed his hands, receives every one of the Bishop's 
vestments from the acolytes who carry them, and vests 
the Bishop, assisted by the sub-deacon. 

4. The Bishop being vested, the deacon returns, with 
the sub-deacon, to the bench, where they remain till 
after Tierce is over. 

5. After Tierce, the officiating deacon goes again with 
the sub-deacon to the Bishop's seat, and at his right 
takes off from him the cope, and puts on him the other 
vestments for Mass ; then he returns with the sub-deacon 
to the bench, and puts on his maniple, 

6. The officiating deacon goes .to the altar for the be- 
ginning of Mass ; if Tierce has been sung, and the Bishop 
has put on the sacred vestments in the chapel, prepared 
for this purpose, he walks in procession to the high 
alta^^ at the left of the assistant priest, immediately be- 
fore the Bishop; otherwise, from the bench, he goes be- 
fore the last step of the altar, at the left of the Bishop, 
and there answers him for the Confession as usual; goes 
up to the altar, and standing at the Bishop's right, pre- 
sents the incense-boat and the spoon, with the usual kiss 
of the latter, and of the Bishop's hand, and says, JBene- 
dicite^ Pater Heverendissiyne^ receives the censer from 
the censer-bearer, gives it to the Bishop, kissing the 
upper part of the chain, which he puts into the Bishop's 
left hand, and the lower part near the cover into his 
right hand, which he kisses, attends the Bishop, kneels 
whenever he kneels, and makes a profound bow when 
the Bishop bows, raises with his left hand the Bishop's 
chasuble on his side, and supports his arm whenever he 

84 



398 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

makes a genuflection. After the incensing, he receives 
with the usual kiss the censer from the Bishop, goes be- 
low the last step on the Epistle side of the altar, and 
after making a profound bow to the Bishop, he incenses 
him with three double swings, and makes again a pro- 
found bow to him. 

V. When the Bishop goes to his chair, the officiating 
deacon returns to the bench, where he stands till the 
Bishop has said ICyrie eleison, which he also says alter- 
nately with the sub-deacon. Then he sits, rises wheh 
the Bishop says Gloria in excelsis Deo, which likewise 
the officiating deacon continues together with the sub- 
deacon. Having finished it, he sits. He rises at the 
J*ax voMs, or Dominiis vobiscum; stands during the 
prayer and collects, and sits again during the Epistle 
sung by the sub-deacon. 

8. Whilst the choir sings the gradual, or Alleluia^ the 
officiating deacon receives from the master of ceremonies 
the Missal, carries it shut before his breast to the altar, 
saluting the clergy, making a profound bow to the 
Bishop, and a genuflection on the last step ; lays it on the 
middle of the altar; goes to the Bishop, making the 
usual reverences, kisses his hand, returns to the altar, 
kneeling on the lowest step, in the middle, says with a 
low voice, Munda cor meimi, rises, takes the book from 
the altar, returns to the Bishop at the right of the sub- 
deacon after having made a genuflection, and salutes 
the clergy, first on the Epistle side, then on the Gospel 
side, kneels down with the sub-deacon and acolytes, and 
says Jube Domne henedicere. After receiving the bless- 
ing, he goes to the place where the Gospel is sung, puts 
the book open into the hands of the sub-deacon, and 
turned towards the wall of the sanctuary, on the Gospel 



OFFICIATING DEACON. 399 

side, with his hands joined before his breast, sings Do- 
minus voMscum; when he says Sequentia^ or Initium 
S. JEJvangelii^ he makes with his thumb the sign of the 
cross on his Ibrehead, mouth, and breast. Whilst the 
choir answers, Gloria tibi^ &c., he receives the censer 
from the master of ceremonies or the censer-bearer, in- 
censes the book with three double swings, one in the 
middle, the second on the right, the third on the left 
side of the book, gives back the censer, and, with his 
hands joined, sings the Gospel. 

9. The officiating deacon, having sung the Gospel and 
made a genuflection before the altar, returns to his 
place. If the Bishop preaches from the altar, immedi- 
ately after the sermon, the officiating deacon, at the left 
of the Bishop, bowing a little towards him, sings the 
Confiteor^ and at the words Et tibi Pater ^ and Et te Pater^ 
makes a profound bow. But when any other besides 
the Bishop preaches, the officiating deacon goes to the 
Bishop's chair, and standing below the lowest step, sings 
the Confiteor^ as before directed. 

10. At the Credo^ the officiating deacon rises, and 
continues it together Avith the sub-deacon, reciting it at 
the same time with the Bishop, and kneeling likewise 
with him at Pncarnatus est; and whilst the same verse 
is sung by the choir, he remains profoundly inclined; 
then he goes to the side-table, takes the burse with the 
corporal, which he carries to the altar supported by both 
bis hands, raising it to the height of his eyes, walking 
slowly, and saluting the clergy, making a bow to the 
Bishop, and a genuflection to the cross, he goes up, 
spreads the corporal in the middle, places the burse on 
the Gospel side, makes a genuflection, returns directly 
by the side steps to his place, and sits down. 



400 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

11. After the Creed has been sung, the officiating 
deacon goes to the altar at the same time with the 
Bishop, places himself at his right, takes off his mitre, 
makes a genuflection, goes up to the altar with him, 
raising a little his vestments in front, goes to the corner 
of the altar at the Epistle side, takes off one of the Hosts 
from the paten, gives the paten with the other Host, 
after having kissed it, to the Bishop, kissing also his 
hand. 

12. Whilst the Bishop says Suscipe, Sancte Pater, 
the officiating deacon takes the chalice, wipes it with the 
purifier, puts wine into it, and after the sub-deacon has 
put in some drops of water, be wipes with the purifier 
all the drops that may be within on the sides of the 
chalice, kisses the foot of the chalice, holding it with his 
left hand, and the knot under the cup with his right ; 
gives it to the Bishop, kissing his hand, then supporting 
the Bishop's arm with his left hand, and touching the 
chalice with his right, he says with the Bishop, Offeri- 
mus tibi, Domdne, &c., and when the Bishop has placed 
the chalice on the corporal, the officiating deacon 
covers it. 

13. When the censer-bearer comes to the altar, the 
officiating deacon receives from him the incense-boat, 
attends the Bishop whilst he puts in the incense, gives 
him the censer, assists him at the incensing, as directed 
above; observing, moreover, at the incensing of the 
sacred offerings, to hold with his left hand the Bishop's 
vestments, to prevent their embarrassing him, or touch- 
ing the offerings, and with his right the foot of the 
chalice ; which he also removes from the middle, at the 
incensing of the cross, and replaces there, afterwards. 

14. After the Bishop has incensed the altar, the dea- 



OFFICIATING DEACON. 401 

con i*eceives from him the censer, and incenses him as 
directed in n, 6 ; then he incenses the assistant priest, 
the iirst and second assistant deacons, with two double 
swings (but in case other Bishops and prelates are 
present in the sanctuary, they should be incensed 
with three double swings immediately after the Bishop 
who celebrates) ; afterwards he incenses with one 
double swing, the clergy in the sanctuary. On return- 
ing to the altar, he incenses the sub-deacon with two 
double swings, gives the censer to the censer-bearer, 
goes to his place on the highest step behind the Bishop, 
turns towards the censer-bearer, by whom he is in- 
censed. 

15. The officiating deacon remains there till after the 
Preface is sung ; then he goes up to the right of the 
Bishop, and says with him Sanctus, &c., after which he 
returns to his place. At the words Quani oblationein, 
he goes up to the right of the Bishop ; if there be a pix 
with small Hosts to be consecrated, he places it before 
the Bishop, and uncovers it, kneels on the edge of the 
platform during the consecration and elevation of the 
Host, raising the Bishop's chasuble ; and when he has 
placed the Host on the altar, the officiating deacon rises 
at the same time with him ; after he has made the genu- 
flection, he covers the pix, and places it behind the 
chalice, uncovers the chalice, kneels again, and raises 
the chasuble during the elevation. When the Bishop 
lowers the chalice on the altar, the officiating deacon 
rises, covers it, makes a genuflection with him, and re- 
turns to his place behind liim. Every time the Bishop 
makes the sign of the cross, either on the sacred ofier- 
ings or on himself, the officiating deacon takes care that 
his vestments should not touch the ofierings. 



402 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

16. When the Bishop says Benedicts et prcestas nohis^ 
the officiating deacon goes up to his right, uncovers the 
chalice, making a genuflection every time he uncovers 
it, with the Bishop, before and after. When the Bishop 
makes the sign of the cross on the sacred offerings, say- 
ing, Per ipsum et cum ipso, the officiating deacon puts 
two fingers of his right hand on the foot of the chalice ; 
and when the Bishop puts the Host on the corporal, he 
covers the chalice, and returns to his place behind the 
Bishop. 

17. Towards the end of the Pater ^ when the Bishop 
says Et dimitte nobis, the officiating deacon goes up to 
his right, having previously made a genuflection; re- 
ceives from the sub-deacon the paten, wipes it with the 
purifier, kisses it^ and when the Bishop says Ziibera nos, 
puts it into the celebrant's right hand, which he kisses ; 
when the Bishop places the paten under the Host, the 
officiating deacon uncovers the chalice, and covers it 
again, after the Bishop has put into it the small part of 
the Host, making a genuflection, which he always does 
when at his side. 

18. The officiating deacon says the Agnus Dei, with 
the celebrant, then makes a genuflection, exchanges place 
with the assistant priest, by going to the Bishop's left j 
there he makes a genuflection, and attends the Bishop at 
the Missal. If the officiating deacon does not receive 
the communion, after the second assistant deacon has 
received the Fax from the Bishop, he goes to receive it, 
making a genuflection first at the Bishop's left, then at 
his right ; but he does not kiss the altar. Having re- 
ceived the Fax, he returns to his place, making a genu- 
flection on each side of the Bishop. 

19. When the assistant priest returns to the Bishop's 



OFFICIATING DEACON. 403 

left, after having given the Fax to the clergy, the officiat- 
ing deacon returns to the Bisliop's right. There he pre- 
sents wine for the ablution of the chalice, and wine and 
water for the ablution of the Bishop's fingers, and puts 
the purifier on his fingers over the chalice. 

20. But if communion is to be given by the Bishop, 
and if the deacon and sub-deacon are to receive it, im- 
mediately after the Bishop has consumed the precious 
blood, the officiating deacon covers the chalice, makes a 
genuflection, places the pix with the consecrated Hosts 
before the chalice, uncovers it, makes a genuflection, 
kneels at the right of the sub-deacon on the edge of the 
platform, receives from the Bishop first the Fax^ and 
answers, Et cum spiritu tiio^ then tlie communion, rises, 
goes to the Epistle side, bows somewhat, having his face 
turned to the Gospel side, and sings the Confiteoi\ mak- 
ing a profound bow towards the Bishop at the words Et 
tibi Fatei\ and Et te Fater, When he does not receive 
communion, he says the Confiteor before the celebrant 
takes the first ablution, as directed above; after the 
celebrant has said Indulgentiam^ &c., he changes place 
wuth the sub-deacon, and going to the Gospel side, he 
makes a genuflection in the middle; takes the paten, 
holds it under the sacred Host, and accompanies the 
hand of the Bishop,, as he gives the communion, going 
with the paten to the railing, if the people are to receive 
the communion ; after it he returns to the altai', goes to 
the Epistle side, and presents the wine and water for the 
ablutions. 

21. After the ablutions, the officiating deacon puts the 
mitre on the Bishop, and after he has washed his hands, 
takes it ofi", and goes behind him, follows him to the 
middle, and then back to the Epistle side, returns agaiD 



404 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

behind him to the middle, and when the Bishop has 
sung Dominus vohiscum^ after the last prayer, the 
officiating deacon, turned to the people, sings, Ite^ Missa 
est, or, if the Mass so require, remaining turned to the 
altar, he sings JBenedicmims Domino. 

22. Before the Bishop gives the solemn blessing, the 
officiating deacon puts the mitre on him ; unless the 
celebrant be an Archbishop, who does not wear it. In 
this case, after the Archbishoj) has given the blessing, 
and the Indulgences have been published, th-e officiat- 
ing deacon takes off the pallium, and lays it on the altar, 
receives the blessing standing, but bowing profoundly ; 
accompanies the Bishop to the Gospel side, where he 
begins the Gospel of St. John, or reads it entirely, goes 
below the steps of the altar, makes a genuflection ; ac- 
companies the Bishop to his seat, and assists him in tak- 
ing off" the sacred vestments. When the Bishop has 
washed his hands, he puts on him the cape, gives his 
place to the first assistant deacon, or to one of the two 
other clergymen who come to the side of the Bishop, 
and returns to the sacristy, where he disrobes, and then 
retires. 

Aeticle IV. 

Instruction for the Suh-deacon officiating at Pontifical 

Mass, 

1. The sub-deacon, at a proper time, puts on all the 
vestments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 

2. During Tierce, he sits at the bench as usual, at the 
left of the deacon, until the master of ceremonies comes 
to invite him to go to the side-table, he lays his cap on 
the bench, takes the plate on which are the Bishop's 



SUB-DEACON. 405 

stockings and sandals, carries them covered with a veil, 
and raised to the height of his eyes, and, assisted by 
some acolytes, puts them on the Bishop's right and left 
foot. Then he returns to the bench, and remains there 
till the Bishop has read the Psalms and prayers of the 
preparation for Mass. 

3. After the Bishop has read them, the sub-deacon 
goes with the deacon to the Bishop's seat, and having 
made to him a profound bow, goes to his left, and there 
standing, after he has washed his hands, helps the dea- 
con to dress the Bishop. 

4. The Bishop being vested, the sub-deacon returns 
with the deacon to the bench, and remains there till 
after Tierce is over. 

5. After Tierce, the sub-deacon goes again with the 
deacon to the Bishop's seat, and standing at his left, 
assists the deacon to take off the Bishop's cope, and to 
put on him the other vestments for Mass ; then he re- 
turns with the deacon to the bench, and puts on his 
maniple. 

6. When the Bishop is ready to proceed to the altar, 
the sub-deacon receives from the master of ceremonies 
the Missal, with the Bishop's maniple in it, and carrying 
it shut before his breast, walks to the altar before the 
deacon, either from the chapel or Secretarium in proces- 
sion, or from his bench goes to the Gospel side, at the 
left of the deacon, but a little behind him, makes a genu- 
flection, gives the Missal to the master of ceremonies, 
answers the Bishop at the confession, as usual, making 
him a profound bow at the words Et tihi Fater^ and Et te 
Pater; and while the Bishop says Indiilgentiam^ &c., 
takes the Bishop's maniple from the book, kisses it on 
one side, and offers it to the Bishop to kiss, puts it on 



406 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

his left arm, and kisses the Bishop's hand. "When the 
Bishop goes up to the altar, he follows him with the 
Missal, and on the Gospel side, with the help of the 
assistant priest, offers the Bishop the Missal open, and 
pointing out the beginning of the Gospel of that day to 
be kissed. The sub-deacon gives it to the master of 
ceremonies, remains at the left of the Bishop, and at- 
tends him whilst he puts incense into the censer and 
incenses the altar, raising with his right hand the 
Bishop's chasuble on his side, and making a genuflection 
every time he passes before the middle. 

1. After the incensing of the altar, the sub-deacon 
goes below the stej)s by the Epistle side, and remains at 
the left of the deacon whilst he incenses the Bishop, 
making with him the usual bows ; then he goes with 
him to the bench, stands there at his left, whilst the 
Bishop reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie^ which he 
says alternately with the deacon ; sits till the JEhjrie is 
finished by the choir; rises at the Gloria in excelsis, 
says the rest of it together with the deacon; afterwards 
he sits at the same time as the deacon, and all the others, 
whilst it is sung; makes a bow, and takes off his cap at 
the words Adorcwms, gratias^ suscipe, Jesic Christe/ at 
the end of it, he rises, and stands during the Collect. 
When the Bishop says I^er Domimmi nostrum^ or the 
words of the conclusion of the last prayer, the sub-dea- 
con receives the Missal from the master of ceremonies, 
goes to the middle, holding it with both his hands, and 
leaning it towards his breast, he makes a genuflection 
to the altar, a profound bow to the Bishop, and a 
moderate bow to the clergy, first on the Gospel side, 
then on the Epistle side ; goes to his place below the 
last step, and turned to the Bishop, without turning his 



SUB-DEACON. 407 

back to the altar, he sings the Epistle, supporting with 
both his arms the book open. 

8. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon goes again to the 
middle, makes a genuflection to the altar, a bow to 
the Bishop, and to the clergy on the Epistle side and the 
Gospel side, goes to the JBishop, kneels before him, rests 
the book on his knees, and kisses his hand, as he puts it 
on the book, rises, returns to the bench, and gives the 
book to the master of ceremonies : then he goes to the 
middle, at the left of the deacon, makes a genuflection, 
salutes the clergy at the Epistle side and at the Gospel 
side, walks, at the left of the deacon, to the Bishop's 
seat, and makes a profound bow. On arriving before it, 
he kneels whilst the deacon says, Jube Domne^ <fec., and 
during the blessing ; t.hen he I'ises, makes a profound 
bow to the Bishop, walks to the place where the Gospel 
is sung, receives the book in his hand, and supports it 
on his head open before the deacon ; and whilst the 
deacon sings, he remains immovable. 

9. When the deacon has done singing the Gospel, the 
sub-deacon still holding the book open, without making 
any bow, carries it to the Bishop to kiss the beginning 
of the Gospel. When the Bishop has kissed it, the sub- 
deacon shuts the book, bows to the Bishop, and returns 
to the bench, making a genuflection to the altar as he 
passes before it. 

10. At the Credo, the sub-deacon rises, says it to- 
gether with the deacon, and at the same time with the 
Bishop, kneels at the Incarnatus ; and having finished 
the Credo, sits with the rest of the clergy. Whilst the 
Incarnatus is sung, the sub-deacon remains profoundly 
inclined. After the Incarnatus, he rises, standing, waits 
till the deacon returns from the altar, and sits with him. 



408 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

11. At the Offertory^ the sub-deacon rises, goes to the 
side-table, puts on his shoulder the long veil, and lets it 
hang lower on his right side, takes hold of the chalice 
with his left hand, covers it with the longest part of the 
veil hanging on his right, and places his right hand open 
over it ; then he goes to the altar, whither he should ar- 
rive at the same time with the Bishop, uncovers the 
chalice, gives it to the deacon ; then he gives also to the 
deacon, the wine-cruet which he has received from the 
acolyte, and having received the water-cruet, he pre- 
sents it to the Bishop, saying, JSenedicite^ Reverendis- 
sime Pater ^ and puts a few drops of water into the 
chalice. 

12. After the oblation of the chalice, the sub-deacon 
receives the paten from the deacon in his bare hand, 
and covers it with the longest part of the veil hanging 
on his right ; then he goes down below the lowest step 
in the middle, holding the paten against his breast ; but 
Avhen he has arrived there, he keeps it raised to the 
height of his eyes, supporting his elbow with his left 
hand. There he remains without moving, except only 
to kneel in the same place, and on the lowest step, for 
the elevation. When the celebrant says those words 
of the Pater Noster^ Et dimitte nohis^ &c., the sub-deacon 
makes a genuflection, goes u]3 to the altar at the Epistle 
side, gives the paten to the deacon, takes oflT the long 
veil, makes a genuflection, returns below the steps in the 
middle, takes the place of the deacon at the Bishop's 
right, whilst the same deacon keeps that of the assistant 
priest at the left, and uncovers the chalice when required, 
kneehng with the Bishop. The sub-deacon receives the 
Pax after the deacon, at the usual time, if he is not to 
receive Communion ; otherwise, the Bishop gives him 



SUB-DEACON. 409 

the Pax immediately before the Communion, which he 
gives him before the Confiteor. When the deacon sings 
or recites the Confiteor^ the sub-deacon goes to the Gos- 
pel side, and remains turned to the opposite side, till the 
Bishop has said, Indulgentiam^ &c., then he changes 
places with the deacon, and goes to the Epistle side, re- 
maining by the Bishop, and accompanying him to the 
railing for the communion of the people. Returning to 
the altar, the sub-deacon goes to the Epistle side, puts 
wine and water into the chalice for the ablutions; puts 
the purifier on tlie Bishop's fingers, unless the deacon 
has already returned to that side, and is there ready to 
minister for the ablutions ; then he goes to the Gospel 
side, wipes the chalice, puts on it the purifier, paten, 
pall, veil and burse with the corpoi-al ; takes hold of it 
with his left, and places his right hand on it, goes down, 
makes a genuflection on the last step, and carries it to 
the side-table, returns to his place, below the last step, 
behind the Bishoj), whom he follows, when he goes to 
the middle. At the blessing the sub-deacon goes up on 
the highest step, receives it, profoundly bowing, takes 
in his hand the book, or the altar card, and presents it 
to the Bishop, to read the Gospel of St. John. After 
the Bishop has read this, the sub-deacon goes to his left 
side and helps the deacon to disrobe him. Which being 
done, he goes to the sacristy, puts ofi" the sacred vest- 
ments and retires, 

35 



410 PONTIFICAL MASS. 



Aeticle V. 

INSTRTJCTION FOR THE INFERIOR MINISTERS WHO ATTEND 
THE BISHOP AT PONTIFICAL MASS AND OTHER FUNC- 
TIONS. 

Section I. — The Master of Ceremonies. 

1. There should be two masters of ceremonies; the 
first, if possible, should be either a priest, or at least in 
sacred orders. 

2. The office of the first master of ceremonies, is to 
direct and conduct the whole ceremony; he should, 
therefore, be perfectly acquainted with what is to be 
done by the celebrant and all the officers. He ought to 
be familiar with all the instructions given in the present 
work, which he ought to read frequently ; and especially 
he oiight to refresh his memory, by looking at the par- 
ticular ceremonies to be performed, the day before. 

3. He ought to take especial care of what is to be 
performed by the Bishop, either at his seat or at the 
altar, or in any other place, and always be near him. 

4. The second master of ceremonies assists the first ; 
he ought to be likewise well conversant with this book ; 
and his particular duty is to attend the ministers, and he 
should therefore remain near them. 

5. During Mass, the masters of ceremonies never sit, 
except during tlie sermon. They must stand, with their 
heads uncovered, whilst the rest of the clergy sit, the 
first master of ceremonies below the steps of the Bishop's 
seat, the second near the bench of the ministers ; and a 
little before a reverence is to be made, or a genuflection, 



CEOSIKR-BKAkKR. 411 

they ouglit to give a sigiipJ to the clergy. At the In- 
carnatus^ and at the blessing, they kneel down. 

6. At the procession, and when the clergy go from, 
the sacristy to the church, and from the church to the 
sacristy, the masters of ceremonies never wear their 
caps, neither do they carry them. 

v. At Vespers, they may sit during the Psalms ; but 
they must rise before the Gloria Patri^ to give the 
signal to the clergy to bow. 

8. The second master of ceremonies, at the altar, 
gives the Bishop's vestments to the acolytes when he is 
to be vested, and receives them back likewise at the 
altar, when he takes them off. 

SECTioiir II. — Instruction for the Crosier-hearer. 

1. The crosier-bearer, when the Bishop celebrates 
Mass, or Yesjiers, pontifically, may be dressed in surplice 
and cope ; at least, he must be in surplice. 

2. He holds continually in his hand the Bishop's 
crosier, whenever the Bishop does not use it. He must 
watch the time in which he is to give or receive the 
crosier, and be always ready. 

3. The crosier-bearer sits either on the steps of the 
bishop's chair, or at any other convenient place near it. 
He must stand whenever the Bishop stands. 

4. When the Bishop walks, either from the chair to 
the altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the 
crosier-bearer walks after him, at the right hand of the 
mitre-bearer ; he likewise stands at the right of the 
mitre-bearer, at a certain distance from the lowest step, 
when the Bishop is at the altar, and kneels there at the 
elevation and communion. 

5. In processions, when the Bishop uses the crosier, 



4:12 PONTIFICAL MASS. 

and carries it, the crosier-bearer walks behind him ; but 
at the procession of the blessed Sacrament, when the 
Bishop does not carry the crosier, and on similar occa- 
sions, the crosier-bearer walks alone in the middle, im- 
mediately before the clergy, dressed in sacred vestments, 
and carries the crosier, holding it erect with both 
hands. 

SECTioisr III. — Instruction for the Mitre-hearer. 

1. The mitre-bearer may wear the cope over his sur- 
plice, when the Bishop celebrates Mass or Vespers pon- 
tifically ; at least, he ought to be in surplice, and wear 
a long silk white veil, hanging from his neck ; with the 
lower part of which he covers his hands, whenever he 
holds the mitre. 

2. He goes to receive it at the altar, from the master 
of ceremonies, when the Bishop is to be dressed ; goes 
with the others before him to his seat, and carries it 
back to the altar, after the Bishop is disrobed. 

3. He sits either on the steps near the Bishop's chair, 
or in any other convenient place ; he holds the mitre 
whenever the Bishop does not use it ; he must watch 
the moment in which he is to give or receive it, and be 
always ready ; he gives it to the deacon that is at the 
Bishop's right hand, and receives it from the deacon 
that is at his left. 

4. The mitre-bearer must stand whenever the Bishop 
stands. When the Bishop walks, either from his chair 
to the altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the 
mitre-bearer walks after him, at the left hand of the 
crosier-bearer ; he likewise stands at his left, at a certain 
distance from the lowest step of the altar, and kneels 
there at the elevation and communion. 



BOOK-BEARER. 4:13 

5. As the Bishop generally uses two mitres, the 
precious and the lighter mitre, the mitre-bearer must 
give the precious mitre whenever the Bishop first puts 
it on, after having dressed ; at Vespers, after the first 
Psalm has been begun, the mitre-bearer then places the 
precious mitre on the altar, at the Epistle side, and car- 
ries the lighter mitre to the deacon. At the beginning 
of the antiphon, before the Magnificat^ he carries the 
lighter mitre to the altar, and the jDrecious mitre to the 
deacon. At Mass, the mitre-bearer, at the beginning of 
the Gloria in excelsis^ carries the precious mitre to the 
altar, and the lighter mitre to the deacon, which the 
Bishop uses till the end of the Credo. Then the mitre- 
bearer carries the precious mitre to the deacon, and the 
lighter mitre to the altar. The Bishop uses the precious 
mitre till the end of Mass, whenever he has to put it on ; 
therefore, the mitre-bearer holds it in his hand w^hile the 
Bishop is at the altar, standing or kneeling, as has been 
said before. When he holds the mitre, the bands must 
always be outside, and hang down. 

6. In processions, the mitre-bearer walks always be- 
hind the Bishop. 

Section IV. — Instruction for the Booh-hearer. 

1. The book-bearer is dressed in surplice. He should 
take care that the marks be at the proper place in the 
Missal, and hold it. 

2. He sits in a convenient place by the candle-bearer ; 
watches the moment in which the book is necessary, and 
at the first token given by the master of ceremonies, he 
carries it to the Bishop. When the Bishop reads stand- 
ing, the book-bearer holds it likewise standing ; when 
the Bishop sings any thing out of the book at his chair, 

35* 



414 CANDLE-BEARER. 

the book-bearer gives it to the assistant priest, who is 
to hold it only during that time ; then he receives it 
back ; when the Bishop reads any thing sitting, the 
book-bearer holds it kneeling down. Holding the book, 
he places the upper end of it on his head, and holds the 
lower on his hands. He never kneels nor bows whilst 
he is holding the book before the Bishop. 

Section V. — Instruetion for the Candle-bearer. 

1. The candle-bearer, who carries and holds the hand- 
candlestick, which is used whenever the Bishop officiates, 
is dressed in surplice ; he sits, and remains at the right 
of the book-bearer ; accompanies him whenever he car- 
ries the book to the Bishop's chair, and remains at his 
side with the candlestick in his hand, but always stand- 
ing whilst the Bishop reads or sings any thing out of it. 

2. The book-bearer, moreover, goes to the altar, and 
there, always at the side in which is the Missal, stands 
by the assistant priest, holding the candle near the 
book. 



PART VI. 

®tl)fr Mfferent Saletnnitie0j 

AT WHICH THE BISHOP OFFICIATES 

OE IS PRESENT. 



CHAPTER I. 

COMMEMORATION OF ALL THE FAITHFUL DEPARTED. 

1. On All-Saints' Day, for the second Vespers, a black 
altar veil is to be placed under the white one ; the latter 
is to be removed by the acolytes, soon after the solemn 
Vespers of the day. 

2. After these Vespers, the Bishop and the clergy 
take off the sacred vestments, the Bishop at his seat, and 
the clergy (as quickly as possible) in the sacristy ; the 
latter return to the sanctuary, and the Bishop goes to 
his choir-stall, if there be such, otherwise he remains in 
his seat, without an assistant priest and deacon. 

3. Vespers for the dead are sung as directed in Part V. 
of this book, chapter ix. 

4. After Vespers, in Cathedral churches. Matins and 
Lauds for the dead are sung, as directed in Part V. chap- 
ter X. 



416 SUNDAYS IN ADVENT. 

5. The next day, a Pontifical Mass is celebrated by 
the Bishop, as in Part Y. chapter xi. 

6. After Mass, the absolution is made by the Bishop, 
either at his seat, or at the cenotaph, as directed in Part 
Y. chapter xi. 



CHAPTER II. 
SUNDAYS IN ADVENT. 

1. If the Bishop officiates on these Sundays, the as- 
sistant deacons, the officiating deacon, and sub-deacon, 
instead of dalmatics, use folded chasubles, which have 
the same form as the usual chasubles, but' that part 
which hangs before is shorter, and does not hang 
further than the cincture. Where there are none for 
this purpose, the others may be used, if folded so as not 
to hang further than the cincture. The same are used 
by the niinisters for all High Masses celebrated either 
in the presence or in the absence of the Bishop. How- 
ever, on the third Sunday in Advent, the ministers use 
dalmatics and tunics of rose color. If the fourth Sun- 
day falls on Christmas Eve, dalmatics of violet color are 
also used. 

2. The Bishop, instead of Pax vohis^ says Dominus 
vobiscum. 

3. The sub-deacon, whilst the celebrant sings the last 
Collect, takes off his folded chasuble, sings the Epistle 
without it, and having received the Bishop's blessing, 
puts on the folded chasuble again. 

4. The deacon also, before the first Alleluia is sung, 
takes off his chasuble, puts on the large stole over the 



CHRISTMAS. 417 

other, and remains so till after the celebrant's com- 
munion ; he then takes off the large stole, and puts on 
the folded chasuble. 

5. What has been said above, n. 3 and 4, is to be ob- 
served also in other High Masses, celebrated either in 
the presence or in the absence of the Bishop. 



CHAPTER III. 

CHEISTMAS. 

i. On Christmas Eve, the first Vespers are sung as 
directed page 340. 

2. The following night. Matins are sung as directed 
page 345. 

3. What follows is to be i>articularly observed for 
these Matins. 

4. The church and sanctuary must be illuminated with 
a sufficient number of candies. 

5. Another table, besides the usual side-table, is to be 
prepared, and all the sacred vestments for the Pontifical 
Mass should be placed on it ; also a cope to be worn by 
the Bishop during the Te Dewn. 

6. At the third nocturn, whilst the choir sings the 
Psalm, Miser icordias Domini^ the Bishop attended, by 
the two assistants in surplice, reads the antiphon and 
Psalms for the preparation of Mass, out of the book, 
which is held open before him by an acolyte, who has at 
his side another acolyte with a candlestick ; and in the 
mean time the Bishop's stockings and sandals are put on. 



418 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

The deacon and sub-deacon go also, at the beginning of 
the third nocturn, to the sacristy, where they put on the 
sacred vestments. The Bishop ought to finish the prep- 
aration in time to be ready to sing, A vlnculis, &c., be- 
fore the Lessons. The two assistants, after the prepara- 
tion, return to their seats ; but they go again to the 
side of the Bishop, when he sings the last Lesson ; after 
which, having intoned the Te Deum^ the deacon and 
sub-deacon go to his side, and the two assistants go to 
put on the sacred vestments ; the acolytes, with the book 
and candlestick, go before the Bishop ; the master of 
ceremonies, having given the Bishop's vestments to the 
acolytes, goes also with them before the Bishop, who, 
after having put on the stole, receives the cope, and re- 
mains standing till the end of the Te Deuni^ he then 
sings Do'ininus vohiscum and tlie prayer ; after which 
he repeats Dominus vobiscutn, and whilst the singers 
sing, Benedicamus Domino^ the Bishop takes oif the 
cope, puts on the other vestments for Mass, which he 
celebrates as usual. During the Te Deum^ the clergy 
put on the sacred vestments. 

7. At the Incarnatus^ the Bishop and all the clergy 
kneel. 

8. The Bishop does not take the ablutions, because he 
is to sing the third Mass ; he washes his fingers in an- 
other chalice or vessel. 

9. Lauds are sung as directed page 348. 



FESTIVALS CHRISTMAS TO CANDLEMAS. 419 

CHAPTER IV. 

FESTIVALS BETWEEN CHEISTMAS AND CANDLEMAS. 

1. The Bishop may celebrate these festivals with more 
or less solemnity, as he thinks proper. 

2. However, on ISTew Year's day, he ought to assist 
at Mass in cope, as directed page 371. 

3. On the Epiphany, he ought to celebrate pontifi- 
cally, as directed page 348. 

On the same day, after the Gospel has been sung, a 
clergyman in cope goes to the pulpit, and publishes the 
movable feasts, singing what is prescribed for this pur- 
pose in the Roman Pontifical. 

4. On other festivals, the Bishop may assist at Mass 
in cape or in his long robe, as directed page 371. 



' CHAPTER Y. 

CANDLEMAS. 
Things to be Prepared. 

1. In the sanctuary, between the Bishop's seat and 
the altar, a table entirely covered with a Avhite linen 
cloth, and on it a sufficient number of candles for the 
Bishop and clergy. 

2. On the side-table, besides every thing necessary for 
High Mass celebrated in presence of the Bishop, the 
holy-water vase, the basin, ewer, towels on a plate, and 



420 PONTIFICAL CKKEMONIES. 

some slices of bread on another plate, for cleansing the 
Bishop's hands ; an apron beautifully embroidered, to be 
put on the Bishop's knees at the distribution of the 
candles. 

3. Near the side-table, the processional cross ; and in 
a convenient place the censer with the incense-boat, a 
chafing-dish with fire and tongs. 

4. In front of the altar, a violet veil over another of a 
white color, to be removed after the procession, unless 
the Mass be not of the Blessed Virgin. 

5. On the altar, the Bishop's ornaments, viz., the violet 
cope and stole, the pectoral cross, the cincture, alb, 
amice, and mitre, besides the crosier at the angle be- 
tween the altar and the steps. 

6. In the sacristy, a violet cope for the assistant priest, 
two violet chasubles folded, with two cinctures, albs, and 
amices for the assistant deacons, and violet vestments 
for all the clergy, as before directed. 

7. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy ; 
the Bishop goes thither as before directed. 

They go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, as di- 
rected page 353. 

The Bishop is vested as prescribed at page 354. 

8. The Bishop being vested, takes off the mitre, and 
rises ; the acolytes go before him with the book and the 
candlestick, and the Bishop, standing turned a little to- 
wards the candles, blesses them, singing in the ferial 
tone what is prescribed in the Missal for this purpose. 
When he begins the last prayer, the two acolytes go be- 
fore him with the censer and incense-boat, and the holy- 
water vase. 

9. After the prayers, the Bishop puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it ; then having received the sprinkle 



CANDLEMAS. 421 

from the assistant priest, he sprinkles the candles three 
times; afterwards he incenses them also thrice, after 
which he sits, and puts on the mitre. Then the clergy- 
man first in dignity, having been previously invited by 
the master of ceremonies, goes befoi'e the Bishop, makes 
a bow to him, and gives him the candle, which he kisses 
as well as the hand of the Bishop, who gives the candle 
to the master of ceremonies to be kept by one of the 
acolytes. 

10. Then the apron, prepared for the purpose, is put 
on the Bishop's knees. One of the acolytes brings the 
candles to be distributed, gives them, one by one, to the 
second assistant deacon, who presents them to the Bishop, 
who distributes them, first to the clergyman from whom 
he received the candle, then to the assistant priest, the 
assistant deacons, and all the clergy, who go to receive 
them, according to their order and rank ; all receive 
them kneeling, and kiss, first the candle, then the Bish- 
op's hand. In the mean time, the candles are distributed 
to the people by one or two priests ; and during the dis- 
tribution the choir sings, Lumen ad revelationem, 

11. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his 
hands. The antiphon, Exurge^ having been repeated, 
the Bishop takes off his mitre, rises and sings Oremus, 
the first deacon sings Flectaniits genua^ and the second, 
Levate^ only after Septuagesima, but not on Sunday, and 
the Bishop sings the prayer, Exaudi qumswnus^ after 
w^hich he sits, puts on the mitre, puts the incense into 
the censer and blesses it. 

12. In the mean time, the candles are lighted, and 
every thing is arranged for the procession around the 
church. The censer-bearer, with his censer, goes to the 
middle of the sanctuary, behind the sub-deacon, in his 

36 



422 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

folded chasuble, carrying the cross, and having the aco- 
lytes, with their candlesticks and lighted candles, at his 
side. The first deacon sings JProcedamus in pace^ the 
choir answers. In nomine Christie Amen. Then the 
procession moves from the sanctuary in the following 
order: first the censer-bearer, then the cross-bearer 
with the acolytes, afterwards the clergy, two by two, 
according to their order, all carrying their candles; 
lastly, the Bishop, between the assistant deacons, carry- 
ing the candle in his left hand, and blessing the people 
with his right. 

13. During the procession, the priest who is to sing 
Mass, and the deacon and the sub-deacon, go to the 
sacristy, and put on their respective vestments, — white, if 
Mass is of the Blessed Virgin, violet, if of the Sunday. 
Also the violet altar-veil is removed, if Mass is of the 
Blessed Virgin. 

14. After the procession, the clergy take off their 
sacred vestments in the sacristy, and extinguish their 
candles. The Bishop goes to his seat, takes off the 
violet cope and stole, and puts on the white, which an 
acolyte should bring thither in time. But if Mass is of 
the Sunday, the Bishop does not change his vestments. 

15. Then the celebrant, preceded by the deacon and 
sub-deacon, goes to the altar, and Mass is celebrated as 
directed page 358. 

16. The clergy hold in their hands lighted candles, 
from the beginning to the end of the Gospel, and from 
the consecration to the communion, except the Mass of 
Sunday be said. 



ASH-WEDNESDAY. 423 



CHAPTER VI. 
ASH- WEDNESDAY. 

Article I. 
Tilings to he prepared. 

1. On the side-table, besides every thing necessary 
for High Mass, the following should be prepared : the 
holy-water vase, the ewer with the basin, a plate "with 
some towels, another with slices of bread to cleanse the 
Bishop's hands, a tow^el to be placed on the Bishop's 
knees during the distribution of the ashes, a Missal for 
the-Bishop, the candlestick andalarge stole for the deacon, 

2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., a violet 
cope and stole, pectoral cross, cincture, alb, amice, mitre, 
and crosier; also a vase containing the ashes to be 
blessed, made of branches blessed on Palm Sunday the 
year preceding. 

3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the cele- 
brant, deacon, and sub-deacon (the two latter make use 
of folded chasubles), also two folded chasubles for the 
assistant deacons, a Q,o^^Q for the assistant priest, and a 
sufficient number of sacred vestments for the clergy, ac- 
cording to their order and dignity, the censer with the 
incense boat, a chafing-dish with fire and tongs. 

Article IL 

From the entrance of the JBishop into the sacristy^ to the 
end of the blessing and distribution of the ashes. 

I 1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as be- 



4:24: PONTIFICAL CEREMOMIES. 

fore directed. The clergy put on their vestments in the 
sacristy ; they go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, 
as directed page 353, except that the celebrant, preceded 
by the deacon and sub-deacon, walks immediately before 
the assistant priest. 

2. On arriving at the sanctuary, the clergy go to their 
usual places, the celebrant, with the deacon and sub- 
deacon, to their bench, and the Bishop, with his assist- 
ants, to his seat, after having respectively made the 
usual genuflections and bows. The Bishop is vested as 
directed page 354. 

3. The sub-deacon, attended by the second master of 
ceremonies, goes up to the altar, and taking, with both 
hands, the vase containing the ashes, carries it, raised 
before his face, to the throne, and holds it there, 
kneeling at the right of the Bishop, till the end of the 
blessing. 

4. The acolytes, with the book and the candlestick, 
go before the bishop, who, sitting with the mitre on, 
reads the antiphon, Mcaudi nos/ which being repeated 
after the Psalm by the choir, the Bishop rises, with his 
head uncovered, and sings, in the ferial tone, Dominus 
voMscumy Oremus, and the four prayers as in the 
Missal. 

5. After the prayers, the Bishop puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it, sprinkles and incenses the ashes 
three times. 

6. Then he sits with his head uncovered; the cele- 
brant, accompanied by the muster of ceremonies, goes 
to the Bishop, and having bowed to him, puts ashes on 
his head, saying, Memento honio^ &c. 

7. The Bishop puts on the mitre, the apron is placed 
on his knees, and he puts ashes on the head of the cele- 



ASH- WEDNESDAY. 425 

brant, who stands inclined before him; to whom he 

says, Memento^ <fec. 

8. Then the Bishop puts ashes on the heads of the as- 
sistant priest, assistant deacons, officiating deacon, and 
all the clergy, who go for this purpose to receive them, 
according to their respective rank and order, kneeling 
whilst the ashes are put on. Last of all he puts ashes 
on tiie people at the railing ; in doing which, he may be 
assisted by a priest, if the number of people is great. 

9. Afterwaids, he returns to his seat and washes his 
hands as usual ; then rises, with his head uncovered, 
and sings, Dondnus voMscum^ and the prayer as in the 
Missal, during which two acolytes remain before him, 
with their candlesticks and lig^hted candles. 

10. After the prayer, the clergy go to take off the 
sacred vestments ; the Bishop keeps his on, and assisted 
and vested as before, does every thing at Mass as directed 
page 234, observing what follows. 

11. At the collects, the Bishop kneels at the faldstool 
or praying desk, in the middle of the sanctuary, between 
his assistants. Again, he kneels in the same place, but 
with his mitre on, during the whole verse, Adjuva^ sung 
by the choir. Also the celebrant, with his ministers, 
kneels before the altar during the same. 

12. The deacon and sub-deacon observe what has 
been said before. 

13. The preacher, after the Gospel has been sung, 
goes to ask the Bishop's blessing, and announces the 
Indulgences. 

14. The Bishop, having said the Sanctus^ kneels as 
fur the Collects, till the Per omnia scecula, before the 
Ag?itcs Dei. So also all the clergy in the sanctuary. At 
the Post Communion, the Bishop kneels in the same 

36* 



426 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

manner ; after the celebrant has sung the last Oremus^ 
the deacon, turned towards the people, sings, Humiliate 
capita^ &c. The rest is done as usual. What has been 
said in particular for this Mass, is to be observed in all 
ferial Masses during Advent and Lent. 



CHAPTER YII. 
SUNDAYS IN LENT, 

1. For the Sundays in Lent, every thing is to be ob- 
served as directed for Sundays in Advent. 

2. What has been said for the third Sunday in 
Advent, is to be observed also for the fourth Sunday in 
Lent. 

3. Before the first Vespers of Passion-Sunday, all the 
crosses and images on the altar and in the church are 
to be covered. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

PALM SUNDAY. 

Article I. 
Things to he Prepared* 

1. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, as directed 
page 349. 

2. On the side-table, every thing as there directed j 
also the large stole for the deacon. 



PALM-SDNDAY. 42T 

3. By the side-table, as there stated. The processional 
cross is to be covered with a violet veil. 

4. Between the Bishop's seat and the altar, a table 
covered all over with a white linen cloth, and on it the 
palms to be blessed, and that of the Bishop adorned 
with flowers. 

5. In the sanctuary, on the Gospel side, three stands 
for the deacons who are to sing the Passion. 

6. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the cele- 
brant, deacon, and sub-deacon, as directed in chap. vi. 
Also three violet stoles and maniples, with three cinc- 
tures, albs, amices, and Missals, for the three deacons who 
are to sing the Passion. 

Aeticle II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the 
Church to the beginning of Mass. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as di- 
rected page 353. 

2. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy. 

3. All go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 

4. The Bishop puts on the sacred vestments. All is 
done as directed page 354. 

5. The Bishop being vested, the choir sings Hosanna, 
which the Bishop reads in the mean time, and then sings, 
in a ferial tone, Dominus^ and the prayer as in the 
Missal. The sub-deacon sings the Epistle with the 
usual ceremonies, and the Bishop reads it as well as the 
Gradual, Munda cor ineum^ and the Gospel. The dea- 
con sings the Gospel with the usual ceremonies. After 
the Gospel, the sub-deacon carries the book to the 



428 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Bishop, who kisses it, and is afterwards incensed by the 
assistant priest. 

6. Then the Bishop sings Dominus vohiscum,^ and the 
prayer, Auge^ as in the Missal, and after it the Preface ; 
which being ended, the choir sings, and the Bishop says 
the /Sa?ictus. Afterwards the Bishop sings the five pray- 
ers, as in the Missal. Whilst he is singing the last 
prayer, two acolytes go before him with the censer and 
incense-boat, and with the holy- water vase and sprinkle. 
The last prayer being ended, the Bishop puts incense 
into the censer, blesses it, sprinkles thrice the palms, 
saying, Aspei'ges me, without the Psalm, and incenses 
them thrice. Then he sings Dominus vohiscum^ and 
the prayer, Deus qui Filium tuumj and having finished 
it, he sits down, and puts on the mitre. 

7. The clergyman first in dignity amongst those who 
are present, on invitation from the master of ceremonies, 
goes to the Bishop, and gives him the palm, kissing it 
and the Bishop's hand. The apron, prepared for this 
purpose, is then put on the Bishop's knees, and one of 
the acolytes furnishing, one by one, the palms to the 
second assistant deacon, the deacon gives them to the 
Bishop, who distributes them, first to the clergyman 
from whom he received it, then to the assistant priest 
and assistant deacon, to the deacon and sub-deacon, and 
all the clergy, who go to receive them, two by two, and 
kiss both the palm and the Bishop's hand, making the 
usual reverences. The choir, during the distribution, 
sings, Fueri Sebroeormn. 

8. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his hands. 
Then two acolytes, with their candlesticks and lighted 
candles, go before the Bishop, who, standing with his 
head uncovered, sings Dominus vohiscum.^ and the prayer, 



PALM-SUNDAY. 429 

Omnipotens sempiterne Deusj at the end of vv^hich he 
sits down, puts on the mitre, and puts incense into the 
censer, as usual. 

In the mean while, every thing is prepared for the 
procession. The first assistant deacon signs, JProceda- 
mus in pace. Instead of candles, they all carry the 
palms in their hands. The Bishop, between the assistant 
deacons, holds the palm in his left, and blesses the peo- 
ple with his right. The officiating deacon walks at the 
left of the assistant priest. The choir sings the anti- 
phons as in the Missal. 

9. The procession moves out of the church ; there 
they divide and place themselves as directed page 287 ; 
two or four of the singers remain within the church; 
the doors are shut, the Gloria^ laus^ is sung, and after 
it, when the sub-deacon knocks at the door with the foot 
of the cross, it is opened, the procession enters the 
church, the choir singing Ingrediente Domino. 

10. The procession having returned to the sanctuary, 
the Bishop goes to his seat, and remains for Mass in his 
sacred vestments ; but the others take them off. The 
celebrant comes from the sacristy to the sanctuary, and 
Mass is celebrated, as directed in page 289 and page 416. 

11. What follows, is particularly to be observed at 
Mass. 

12. When the sub-deacon, at the Epistle, sings the 
words. Tit in nomine Jesu omne genvjlectatur^ the Bishop 
and all the clergy kneel till after the words, JEJt infer- 
norum,. 

13. Whilst the Epistle and Tract are sung, three dea- 
cons go to the sacristy, put on amices, albs, cinctures, 
maniples, and stoles, and at the end of the Tract, pre- 
ceded by the master of ceremonies, go to the sanctuary 



430 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

in the following order, carrying tlie Missal before their 
breast. First the deacon, who sings the words of the 
Evangelist ; second, he who sings the words of the 
crowd ; third, he w^ho sings the words of Christ. They 
are followed by three acolytes, without candlesticks, 
and without the censer; after having made the usual 
genuflection and bows, they go to kiss the Bishop's 
hand, without asking the blessing. They go to the place 
where the Passion is to be- sung, and place themselves 
as directed page 290, the acolytes holding the books. 

14; Wlien they begin to sing the Passion, the Bishop 
and all the clergy rise, with their heads uncovered, and 
stand with the palms in their hands till the end of it. 
The celebrant reads it at the Epistle side, and when he 
has done reading, he turns towards the deacons of the 
Passion, and stands at the corner of the altar, the dea- 
con also on the middle step, and the sub-deacon before 
the lowest step, with palms in their hands; at the words 
Jesii aute)n exclmnans emisit spiritum^ the Bishop and 
all the clergy kneel at their jjlaces. 

15. After the Passion, the Bishop sits, says Munda 
cor meu7n^ and reads the Gospel ; the deacon takes off 
his folded chasuble, puts on the large stole, carries the 
book to the altar, kisses the Bishop's hand, goes to the 
altar, kneels, and says Munda cor Memn; at the same 
time, the Bishop puts incense into the censer as usual ; 
then the deacon and sub-deacon, with the censer-bearer, 
and two acolytes, without candlesticks, go to the Bish- 
op's seat, the deacon asks his blessing, the Gospel is sung 
as usual, and tlie Bishop, having kissed the book, is in- 
censed by the assistant priest. 

16. At the elevation, the Bishop alone holds the palm 
in his hand. The rest is done as in other Masses. 



TENEBR^^MAUNDY-THUESDAY. 431 

CHAPTER IX. 

MATINS OF THE TENEBR^. 

1. For these Matins, every thing is to be prepared as 
directed page 293, and when the Bishop officiates at 
them, every thing is done as there specified. 

2. If the Bishop occupies his usual seat, he has no 
other assistant than the master of ceremonies, who sits 
in some place near ; but it is advisable that the Bishop 
should sit in a choir-stall with the other clergymen. 

3. The Bishop rises with the clergy, and kneels and 
recites the prayer, Mespice. 

4. On Maundy-Thursday, and on Good-Friday, for 
the Tenebrse, the altar, the Bishop's seat, and faldstool 
should be quite bare. 



CHAPTER X. 
MAUNDT-THURSDAT. 

Article I. 
Things to he prepared, 

1. A chapel for the repository. 

2. The high altar, as on the greatest festivities, with 
white altar-veil, &c. 

3. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, with the ex- 
ception of the cope. A chalice, with a purifier, for 
cleansing the Bishop's fingers. 



432 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

4. On the side-table, besides every thing necessary for 
the Pontifical Mass, two Hosts on the paten, one of which 
should be of a size to fit the chalice in which it is to be 
placed ; a second chalice, with its paten, pall, veil, and a 
w^hite ribbon to fasten the veil round the chalice ; a pix, 
with a sufficient number of small Hosts, for the com- 
munion of the clergy and people; a long linen cloth for 
the communion of the clergy. 

By the side-table, the processional cross. 

5. In a convenient place, in or near the sanctuary, the 
canopy for the procession. 

6. In the sanctuary, in the middle towards the railing, 
a table covered with fine linen cloth, two candlesticks 
and candles, and the pontifical book on a cushion qr 
stand on it, on that side which corresponds to the 
Gospel side. Behind the table, a chair for the Bishop, 
with three stools for the assistant deacons on each side, 
and for the assistant priest on the Gospel side. On each 
side of the table, six seats, or a bench sufficient for six 
persons, covered with suitable cloth. • Behind the 
Bishop's chair, placed near the table, seats for the seven 
deacons and seven sub-deacons, who assist at the conse- 
cration of the oils. 

7. In the sacristy, besides the usual white vestments 
for the assistant priest and deacons, and for the officia- 
ting deacon and sub-deacon, twelve white chasubles, 
stoles, and maniples, with as many cinctures, albs, and 
amices for twelve priests; also seven white dalmatics, 
stoles, and maniples, with as many cinctures, albs, and 
amices for seven deacons, and seven white tunics and 
maniples, with seven cinctures, albs, and amices for 
seven sub-deacons, who are all to assist at the censecra- 
tion of the oils ; besides, a sufficient number of sacred 



MAUNDY-THUESDAY. 433 

vestments for the other clergymen, according to their 
order and rank, if there be any more. Moreover, two 
censers and incense-boat, and a wooden clapper. Can- 
dles in sufficient number for the procession. 

8. In a suitable place, either in the sacristy, or near 
the baptismal font, three metal vases, large enough to 
contain a sufficient quantity of oil for all the churches of 
the diocese. On one of them there should be engraven 
at least the initials of these words, Oleura Injirinorum^ 
on another. Oleum Catechutnenorum^ and on the third, 
Sanctum Chriswa. The first and second should be 
covered with silk cloth of any color, the third with white 
silk cloth. Near them, should be prepared two long 
veils for the deacons, wlio are to carry the vases con- 
taining the oil of the catechumens and the chrism. Also 
near the vase, a plate, and in it a small vessel containing 
the balm, and a spatula to mix it. 

9. For the washing of the feet, should be prepared 
the necessary vessels to hold the water, which should be 
a little warm; and basins for washing the feet; also, a 
sufficient number of towels to wipe them ; the ewer, 
basin, and towels for the Bishop to wash and wipe his 
hands; also a large towel with strings, which the 
Bishop puts before him, when he washes the feet ; two 
benches, capable of containing six persons each, higher 
than usual, before which there should be a step ; the 
book of the Gospel, a violet stole, and cope, for the 
Bishop; and white dalmatic, tunic, stole, and maniples, 
for the deacon and sub-deacon ; the candlesticks, with 
lighted candles, for the acolytes, and the censer and 
incense-boat. 

37 



434: PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and clergy into the 
sanctuary^ to the beginning of Mass. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as before directed. 

2. As soon as the Bishop and clergy arrive at the 
sacristy, they go into the sanctuary before they put on 
the sacred vestments. After a short prayer, they all 
rise, and say None^ which is not to be sung. The 
Bishop, at the same time, reads the Psalms for the prep- 
aration of Mass, without Gloria Patri^ and they put on 
him the stockings and sandals. The Psalms of None 
being ended, the Bishop goes to the middle, kneels be- 
fore the faldstool, and all the clergy kneel at their places, 
during Christus^ Pater^ and Miserere^ &q. ; at the end 
of which the Bishop says the prayer Pespice. 

3. The prayer Pespice being ended, the clergy who 
have to put on the sacred vestments, go for this purpose 
to the sacristy. The Bishop goes to his seat ; the dea- 
con and sub-dea,con, who should take their sacred vest- 
ments during Kone^ go to the Bishop's side, and help to 
take off his cape, wash his hands, and put on the sacred 
vestments as before directed. 

Article III. 

From the beginning to the end of Mass. 

1. As soon as the clergy have put on their vestments, 
they go to their places in the sanctuary, and the Bishop 
being vested, the deacon and sub-deacon put on their 
maniples, the assistant deacons go to the side of the 



MAUNDY-TIIURSDAY. 435 

Bishop, and Mass is celebrated as usual, with the follow- 
ing exceptions. 

2. At the Confession the Psalm, Judica^ with the 
Gloria^ is omitted. The organ is not played, nor the 
bells rung any more after the Gloria iii excelsis; instead 
of bells a wooden clapper is used. 

3. Before the Bishop says the words, Per quern hcBC 
onxnia^ Domine^ semper bona creas, having made a 
genuflection to the Sacrament, he retires to the Epistle 
side, near the altar, where he washes his fingers in 
another chalice, and wipes them, makes again a genuflec- 
tion to the Sacrament, goes to the first step of the altar, 
puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in his hand, and be- 
tween the two assistant deacons, preceded by the assistant 
priest, goes to the seat near the table, prepared as in Art. 
I., n. 6, of this chapter, sits, turned towards the altar, 
having the table before him, and his assistants at his 
side, all the others remaining at their places ; then the 
assistant priest says, with a loud voice, in the tone of a 
Lesson, Oleum wfirmorum,. Immediately after, one of 
the seven sub-deacons, having at his side two acolytes, 
goes to the sacristy, takes the vessel with the oil to be 
consecrated for the infirm, covered as it is, and holding 
its foot in his right hand, and having his left arm round 
it, carries it to the Bishop, and gives it into the hands 
of the assistant priest, saying, Oleum infirmorum. The 
assistant priest presents it to the Bishop, saying the 
same words, and puts it on the table. 

4. The Bishop, with his mitre on, rises, and reads the 
exorcisms in a low voice, loud enough, however, to be 
heard by the priests who are round him ; after the ex- 
orcisms, the clergy answer. Amen ; the Bishop, having 
taken oflf his mitre, says, Dominus vobiscum^ and reads 



436 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

also, in a low voice, the prayer, JEmitte qucesumusj 
after which, the vessel is brought back to the sacristy 
by the sub-deacon, accompanied by two acolytes. The 
Bishop puts on the mitre, seats himself, and washes his 
hands ; then rising with his mitre on, returns to the 
altar attended by his ministers, and on arriving before 
the lowest step, takes off his mitre, makes a genuflection, 
goes up to the altar, and continues Mass from the words, 
I*er quern hcec omnia^ &g., as far as the communion of 
the sacred body and blood inclusively. 

5. The Bishop having communicated, places the con- 
secrated Host to be reserved for the following day into 
the chalice prepared for the purpose, which the master 
of ceremonies should have previously carried to the 
altar, with its veils and ribbon; the deacon covers it 
with the pall and the paten ; over them he places the 
veil, which be fastens with the ribbon round the foot of 
the chalice, and places in the middle of the altar. 

6. Then the deacon sings the Conjiteor, and the cele- 
brant gives the communion, first to the deacon and sub. 
deacon, and afterwards to the rest of the clergy, accord- 
ding to their rank, beginning by the priests, who should 
wear the stole. To-day, the JPax is not given to the 
deacon and sub-deacon by the Bishop before the com- 
munion. 

v. The communion being ended, the Bishop having 
taken not only the usual ablutions, but also that which 
had been previously left in the other chalice, makes a 
genuflection to the Sacrament, goes down to the second 
step, puts on the mitre, takes the crosier, and attended 
by the ministers as before, goes to the seat near the 
table. 

8. The Bishop having seated himself, the assistant 



MAUNDY-THUKSDAY. 437 

priest standing near him, says in a loud voice, and in the 
tone of a Lesson, Oleum ad Sanctum Chrisma^ and im- 
mediately after. Oleum Catechiirnenorum,^ then the 
Bishop puts incense into the censer and blesses it. This 
being done, they go to the sacristy for the oils in the 
following order: the censer-bearer, the two acolytes 
with their candlesticks and lighted candles, the seven 
sub-deacons, two by two, and in the third row three ; 
the seven deacons likewise ; and, lastly, the twelve priests, 
also two by two. The Bishop, and his assistants and 
ministers, remain at their places. 

9. The procession comes out of the sacristy in the fol- 
lowing order : the censer-bearer, the sub-deacon -with 
the processional cross, between the acolytes wdth their 
candlesticks, tw^o chanters singing the verses, He- 
demptoTy six sub-deacons, two by two ; five deacons, in 
the first row two, in the second three ; a sub-deacon, 
carrying the vase ^vith the balm, two deacons carrying 
the vases with oil, having a long veil hanging from their 
neck before their breast, holding the vases with their 
left arms round them, and covering the inferior part of 
the vases with that part of the veils which hangs on 
their right ; the deacon carrying the oil for the chrism, 
walks at the right, and he that carries the oil of the 
catechumen at the left; last of all, the twelve priests, 
two by two. As they move from the sacristy, the chant- 
ers begin to sing the verses, Redem^ptor^ &c., which 
are immediately repeated by the choir; as also after 
each strophe sung by the chanters. 

10. When the procession arrives at the sanctuary, the 
censer-bearer and the sub-deacon with the cross, be- 
tween the acolytes, place themselves near the altar at 
the Epistle side ; the twelve priests, six on each side of 

35'* 



438 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

the assistant deacons, with their faces turned towards 
the altar, the deacons behind the Bishop, and the sub- 
deacons behind the deacons. The sub-deacon with the 
bahn, and the deacons with the oil, stop until the others 
have taken their places. Which being done, the deacon 
with the oil for the chrism goes before the Bishop, and 
the assistant priest receiving from him the vase wrapped 
in the veil, which the deacon had i-ound his neck, pre- 
sents it to the Bishop, and lays it on the table before 
him. In the mean while, the other deacon holds the 
vessel of the oil of the catechumens on his arm. Then 
the sub-deacon with the balm gives the vase which 
contains it to the assistant priest, who, having presented 
it to the Bishop, lays it on the table. The Bishop takes 
off his mitre, rises, and turned towards the altar, blesses 
the balm, saying, Dorninus voMseum, and the two pray- 
ers as found in the Roman Pontifical. The second 
prayer being ended, the Bishop, still standing, puts on 
the mitre, and mixes in a paten, or m another vessel, the 
balm with some oil, which is taken from the vase, say- 
ing the third prayer. 

11. After the third prayer, the clergy having answered, 
Amen, the Bishop sits with his mitre on, breathes thrice 
in the form of a cross over the mouth of the vase, which 
is yet kept wrapped in the veil. Then the twelve priests 
breathe over it in the same manner as the Bishop, one 
after another, making genuflections to the Sacrament on 
the altar, and bowing to the Bishop both before and 
after. Which being done, the Bishop rises, and, with 
his mitre on, reads the exorcism; at the end of which, 
he takes off his mitre, and with his hands extended be- 
fore his breast, he sings the Preface as in the Pontifical, 
and having concluded it with the words, JPe?^ eiimdem 



MAUNDY-THURSDAY. 439 

Dominmn^ &c., which he reads, the clergy answer, 
Amen. 

12. Then the Bishop puts into the vase for the chrism, 
the mixture of babu and oil, saying, Hmc commixtio^ 
&c., and the deacon who carried the vase of the chrism 
removes from it the long veil in which it was ^^•rapped. 
Then the Bishop bowing, sings, Ave Sanctum Chrisma^ 
three times, but the second time he raises his voice a 
tone highei", and the third he raises it another tone 
higher. After the third time, he kisses the border of 
the vessel, sits down, and puts on his mitre. 

13. The twelve priests, one after the other, make a 
genuflection to the Sacrament and a reverence to the 
Bishop, kneel on both knees, in the middle, at a distance 
from, the table, and sing, Ave Sanctum Chrisma^ then 
rise, go nearer the table, kneel again, sing, Ave Sancturn 
Chrisma^ a tone higher; rise, approach the table, kneel, 
sing, Ave Sanctum Chrisma^ another tone higher; then 
rise and kiss the border of the vase. They then return 
to their places, having made a genuflection to the Sacra- 
ment on the altar, and a bow to the Bishop. This being 
done by the twelve priests, the vase with the chrism is 
placed on one side of the table. 

14. The deacon Avho holds the vase of the oil of the 
catecliumen goes before the Bishop, and gives it (with- 
out the veil, which he retains) to the assistant priest, w^ho, 
having shown it to the Bishop, places it on the middle 
of the table before the Bishop, who immediately after 
breathes over it thrice in the form of a cross. The 
twelve priests, one after the other, do in like manner. 
Then the Bishop rises, with his mitre on, and reads in a 
low voice, the exorcisms; at the end of which, the 
clergy answer, Amen. The Bishop takes off his mitre, 



4:40 PONTIFICAL CEEEMONIES. 

and standing, says in a low voice, Dominus vohisciini^ 
&c., Oremus^ and the prayer, Deus^ incrementorum,^ for 
the blessing of the oil of the catechumens, which being 
ended, the clergy answer, Amen. Afterwards, the 
Bishop sings thrice, Ave Sanctum Oleum^ as has been 
said, n. 12, for the chrism, and kisses the brim of the 
vase ; the same is done likewise by the twelve priests, as 
directed in n. 13. 

15. All this being done, the deacons take the vases in 
their arms, and the procession is arranged, as in n. 9, to 
bring back to the sacristy the consecrated oil and the 
chrism, the chanters singing the verses, J7t novetur^ and 
the choir repeating after each strophe, Rede'tnptor. 

16. Whilst they go to the sacristy, the Bishop, sitting, 
washes his hands, returns to the altar, and continues 
Mass as usual ; but every time he goes to or from the 
middle of the altar, he makes a genuflection to the Sacra- 
ment, and when he says Donninus vohiscum^ does not 
turn his back to the Sacrament, but draws back a little 
towards the Gospel side. After the Tife, Missa est^ the 
Bishop standing, without mitre, on the Gospel side, 
without turning completely round, gives the solemn 
blessing. But the Indulgences are to be published in 
the chapel of the repository. 

17. The Bishop, at the words 7n principio erat Ver- 
bum, should not make the sign of the cross, as usual, on 
the altar. 

Aeticle IV. 

The Procession to the Repository. 

1. After the Gospel of St. John, he goes to his seat, 
takes off the sacred vestments as far as the stole exclu- 
sively, and puts on a white cope. In the same time, an- 



MAUNl'Y-TliUIlSPAY. 44:1 

other sub-deacon in tuuic, takes the processional cross, 
covered with a violet veil, and the acolytes their caudle- 
sticks ; candles are distributed to tlie clergy, and lighted ; 
the canopy is brought outside of the railing, and given 
to those who are to carry it, 

2. The Bishop, at his seat, with his mitre on, puts in- 
cense into the two censers, but he does uot bless it, 
neither does the assistant priest kiss the spoon, nor the 
Bishop's hand. Then the Bishop, with his assistants, 
goes to the altar, takes off his mitre, and kneeling on a 
cushion on the lowest step of the altar, he incenses 
thrice the Blessed Sacrament; the long veil is put on 
his shoulders, and fastened before his breast. The first 
assistant deacon goes up to the altar, and after the usual 
genuflections, takes the Blessed Sacrament, and, stand- 
ing, presents it to the Bishop, kneeling down on the 
highest step; who, having received it, rises, and the 
deacon makes a genuflection, and the choir begins to 
sing Pange Lingua. The assistant deacons, on each 
side of the Bishop, raise the extremities of his cope, and 
the master of ceremonies raises up his vestments in front, 
when he goes up or down the steps. The jDrocession 
walks to the repository in the following order : the sub- 
deacon, cross-bearer, between the acolytes with their 
candlesticks, the chanters, the inferior clergy, the aco- 
lyte carrying the crosier, the sub-deacons, the deacons, 
the priests in chasubles, the deacon and sub-deacon, the 
assistant priest, the two censer-bearers, moving slowly 
and regularly their censers ; the Bishop, between the two 
assistant deacons, under the canopy, followed by the 
acolytes, with the mitre, book, candle, &c. 

3. The cross-bearer and the acolytes, on arriving near 
the door of the chapel, retire a little on one side to make 



442 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

way for the procession, and remain there standing and 
turned towards the procession. Those of the clergy 
who walk next to the cross-bearer stop, the first on each 
side of the chapel, and those who follow stop next to 
them, so that the clergymen who walked the last may 
be the nearest to the altar of the repository, and divide 
into two lines, and the Bishop, with the assistant minis- 
ters, passes between them. The censer-bearers, on en- 
tering the chapel, keep their censers motionless. Those 
who carry the canopy, stop at the door of the chapel. 

4. The Bishop, on arriving at the highest step of the 
altar, stops, and the deacon kneeling down, receives 
from him the Blessed Sacrament, and immediately places 
it in the urn, or tabernacle, prepared for the purpose, 
leaving the door opened. Then the Bishop goes down 
to the second step, puts incense into the censer, kneels 
down, and incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament. The 
deacon shuts the door of the urn, and the Bishop goes 
up to the altar, makes a genuflection, kisses the altar, 
takes in his left hand the crosier, and standing at the 
Gospel side, without mitre, gives the solemn blessing; 
after which, the assistant priest publishes as usual the 
forty-days' Indulgences. 

5. The procession returns to the sanctuary in the same 
order as it came; the Bishop, on arriving at his seat, 
takes off the sacred vestments. The clergy likewise 
take theirs off in the sacristy. Then Vespers are recited, 
and the altars stripped. 

Article V. 

The Mandatum^ or Washing of the Feet, 

1. At a convenient hour, the Bishop and clergy meet 
in the place prepared for the washing of the feet. The 



MAUNDY-THDRSDAY. 443 

Bishop puts on the amice, alb, cincture, with a violet 
stole and cope, and plain mitre. The deacon and sub- 
deacon, with the assistant priest, put on white vestments 
as for Mass. 

2. Thirteen poor men, or thirteen clergymen, sit on 
high benches, with a high step in front; the covering of 
their right feet sliould be so arranged as to make it easy 
to remove it, when they are to be washed. 

3. The Bishop, attended as usual by his assistants, at 
his seat or faldstool, puts incense into the censer and 
blesses it. Then the deacon holding the Missal before 
his breast, with the sub-deacon, the two acolytes carry- 
ing their candlesticks, go before the Bishop, kneel down, 
and the deacon asks the blessing, saying, Juhe Domne^ 
&c., which the Bishop gives him as usual, saying, Dom- 
inus sit, &c. The Gospel is afterwards sung with the 
usual ceremonies ; the book is carried to the Bishop by 
the sub-deacon, and the Bishop is incensed by the 
deacon. 

4. After the Gospel, the choir sings Mandatum noviim^ 
and what follows as in the Missal ; the Bishop takes off 
his cope, ties an apron on him, and with his mitre on, 
goes before the first poor man, or clergyman, kneels on 
a cushion, which for this purpose is moved by an aco- 
lyte, as he passes on, and the ewer and basin being 
brought by the attending clergymen, the Bishop washes 
the right foot, wipes it with a towel, and kisses it; and 
if a poor man, he gives him some alms. He does in like 
manner to the other twelve. 

5. After having washed his feet, the Bishop returns to 
his seat, washes his hands, takes off the apron which he 
had tied on him, puts on the cope, and takes off his 
jnitre. The two acolytes with their candlesticks, and a 



444 PONTIFICAL CKKEMONIES. 

third one with the book, and a fourth with the candle- 
stick, go before hira, and rising, he says, Fater JVoster, 
&c., £Jt ne 7ios^ &c., with the following verses and pray- 
ers as in the Missal. After which, the Bishop, raising 
his hands, makes the sign of the cross towards those who 
are present. Lastly, he takes off the sacred vestments, 
and retires. 



CHAPTER XI. 

GOOD FEIDAT. 

Aeticle I. 

What is to he Prepared. 

1. The altar, the seat intended for the Bishop, the 
sacred ministers' bench, and all the sanctuary, should be 
quite bare, without any ornaments. 

2. On the altar, the cross covered with a black veil, 
but in such a manner as to render it easy to uncover its 
different parts successively ; six plain candlesticks, with 
brown wax candles; the Bishop's vestments, viz., an 
amice, alb, and cincture, with a black maniple, stole, 
dalmatic, tunic, and chasuble, the pectoral cross, and 
the plain white mitre. The sandals, gloves, and crosier 
are not used on this day. 

3. On the small table should be spread a linen cloth, 
which ought not, however, to hang down ; and on this 
table should be placed the ewer and basin, with a towel 
on a plate ; the cruets, a book-stand with a Missal, an- 
other Missal, an altar-cloth folded, a large black stole 



GOOD FRIDAY. 445 

for the deacon, a black burse with a purifier and a cor- 
poral, a black veil for the chalice, two candlesticks, 
with brown wax candles, for the acolytes. 

4. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the dea- 
con and sub-deacon, viz., two amices, albs, and cinctures, 
and a stole ; a black cope for the assistant priest ; also 
two folded chasubles of the same color, with cinctures, 
albs, and amices, for the two assistant deacons. Like- 
wise, a sufficient number of sacred vestments for the 
clergy. Also, three amices, albs, cinctures, with as 
many black maniples and stoles, and three Missals, for 
the deacons who have to sing the Passion. Two censers 
with incense-boats, a chafing-dish with fire and tongs, 
the tapers and candles for the procession. 

5. At the Gospel side in the sanctuary, a violet carpet, 
with a long white veil, and a violet velvet cushion, 
adorned with gold-lace and embroidery, for the venera- 
tion of the cross. Also, three bare book-stands or desks, 
for those who are to sing the Passion, 

6. Before the middle of the altar, and at the foot of 
the lowest step, the praying-desk bare, and five cushions 
to be placed on the highest step of the altar, for the 
prostration of the Bishop's assistants and ministers, three 
on the Epistle side, and two on the Gospel side. 

7/. In any convenient place, the processional cross 
covered with a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 

8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the canopy, 
the white veil on the side-table, and the key of the 
tabernacle on the altar ; also contiguous to it, the steps 
(if necessary) to reach the door of the tabernacle. 

9. On the ministers' bench, the folded chasubles, and 
maniples for the deacon and sub-deacon. 

38 



44:6 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



Aeticle II. 

From the entrance of the JBishop and clergy into the 
sanctuary^ to the beginning of the Office. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as directed in the 
first part of this book. 

2. From the sacristy, the clergy, before they put on 
the sacred vestments, go with the Bishop to the sanc- 
tuary: only the deacon and sub-deacon remain in the 
sacristy, and put on the sacred vestments, the folded 
chasubles and maniples excepted. The Bishop and 
clergy having entered the sanctuary, kneel, pray for a 
short space of time, and rise. The Bishop goes to his 
seat ; they all say Pater and Ave^ in a low voice, and 
when the Psalm Mirahilia is begun, they sit down, and 
continue the part of the divine office called in Latin, 
None. At the end of this canonical hour, the Bishop 
goes to the praying-desk, and, with the clergy, kneels 
during the Christus and Miserere; at the end of which, 
the Bishop says the prayer Respice^ at the end of 
which they all rise ; the Bishop goes to his seat ; the 
deacon and sub-deacon come from the sacristy, go to his 
side and assist him to put on his vestments. 

At the same time, the clergy put on their sacred vest- 
ments in the sacristy. The two assistant deacons go to 
the side of the Bishop, and the deacon and sub-deacon 
go to their bench, and put on their maniples and folded 
chasubles. 



GOOD FRIDAY. 447 

Aeticle III. 
From the beginning of the Office to the end of it, 

1. The Bishop, being vested, goes to the middle, and 
taking off his mitre, kneels before the praying-desk ; at 
the same time the assistant priest and deacons, with the 
officiating deacon and sub-deacon, prostrate themselves 
on the cushions, which the acolytes place on the steps as 
directed above. All the clergy kneel, and remain pray- 
ing for some time. Meanwhile, two acolytes unfold 
the altar-cloth. 

2. The Bishop and ministers rise, go up to the altar, 
and kiss it. An acolyte places the armed-chair on the 
platform, at the Epistle side, and the Bishop sits on it, 
turned towards the Gospel side (for to-day he goes not 
to his seat, before the end of the office) ; the assistant 
priest sits on the first step, at the feet of the Bishop, and 
behind him, on the same step, the deacon and sub-dea- 
con ; and near these, the two assistant deacons. The 
clergy sit at their usual places. 

3. One of the acolytes, attended by the master of 
ceremonies, having made the usual genuflection and 
reverences, goes to the place where the Epistle is usually 
sung, and there sings the Lesson in the tone of a Pro- 
phecy. He does not kiss the Bishop's hand ; but, leaving 
the book in the hand of the master of ceremonies, makes 
the usual genuflection and reverences, and returns to his 
place. Whilst the Tract is sung by the choir, the 
Bishop, still sitting, rrtads the Lesson and the Tract from, 
the book, which an acolyte holds before him ; but he is 



44:8 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

not accompanied by the other, nor do the acolytes carry 
the candlesticks on this day. The Bishop's assistants 
and ministers stand by him whilst he reads. 

4. After the Tract, the Bishop takes off his raitre, 
rises, and turning towards the altar, sings Oremus. 
The deacon sings Flectamus genua; and the sub-deacon, 
I/evate; standing, one after the other, behind the Bishop. 
At the words, Flectamus^ &c., all, except the Bishop, 
kneel, and at the word Levate they rise. Then the 
Bishop sings the prayer ; during which the sub-deacon 
takes off his folded chasuble, and at the end of the 
prayer sings the second Lesson in the tone of the Epis- 
tle, during which the bishop, with his assistants and the 
clergy, sit as before. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon 
does not kiss the Bishop's hand ; but he resumes his 
chasuble, and returns to his place. The Bishop sits, and 
whilst the choir sings the Tract, he reads the Epistle and 
the Tract, attended as usual. 

5. Whilst the Tract is sung, the three deacons who 
are to sing the Passion, go to the sacristy, put on the 
sacred vestments, and towards the end of the Tract go 
out to the sanctuary, and sing the Passion. Every thing 
is done as at page 430, except that they do not kiss the 
Bishop's hand. 

The Bishop, attended by his assistants, reads the Pas- 
sion out of the Missal placed on the altar at the Epistle 
side, and makes a genuflection there at the words Ft 
inclinato capite. 

6. After the Passion, the Bishop and the clergy seat 
themselves; the officiating deacon takes off his chasuble, 
puts on the large stole, carries the book to the altar, 
kneels, says, Munda cor meum, takes the book, and 
"without asking the blessing, goes with the sub-deacon. 



GOOD FRroAY. 4A9 

and the acolytes without candlesticks and without the 
censer, to sing the last part of the Passion, in the tone 
of the Gospel ; which being done, they all return to 
their places. 

7. If there is a sermon, the preacher, accompanied by 
the master of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop and asks 
the Indulgences, without, however, asking the blessing ; 
and having made the usual genuflection and reverences, 
goes to the pulpit and preaches. The Bishop sits at the 
Epistle side, but turned towards the preacher. All the 
clergy sit during the sermon. After the sermon, the 
preacher publishes the Indulgences. Then the Bishop 
immediately takes ofi" the mitre, and rises ; the armed- 
chair is removed, and the prayers are sung as in the 
Missal ; the Bishop singing Oremiis^ the deacon FlectOr 
'nius genua^ and the sub-deacon, Levate. Whilst the 
last prayers are sung, the acolytes spread the carpet on 
the steps of the altar, and put the cushion on the lower 
steps, and over it the veil on which the cross is to be 
laid. 

8. After all the prayers, the Bishop takes off his 
chasuble, and goes to the back corner of the altar, at the 
Epistle side, and turns towards the people. The sacris- 
tan, taking the cross from the altar, gives it to the dea- 
con, and the deacon to the Bishop, who, having received 
it respectfully, with his right hand uncovers the top as 
far as the cross-piece, and raising it with both hands, 
sings, Ecce lignutn Crucis^ out of the book which the 
assistant priest holds before him ; the deacon being at 
the Bishop's right and the sub-deacon at the left. All 
ri?e with their heads uncovered ; the Bishop, assisted by 
the ministers, continues to sing, In quo stilus mundi 
jpependit; and the choir and all the clergy, the Bishop 

38* 



450 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Only excepted, kneeling on both knees, and bowing their 
heads, answer, Venite adoremus ^ after which, the 
Bishop, Avith the assistant priest and ministers, goes up 
to the platform and stops at the Epistle side, where he 
uncovers the right arm and the head of the crucifix, and 
raising his voice one tone higher, sings again, Ecce lig- 
num Crifcis; and every thing is done as before. After- 
wards he goes to the middle of the altar with all his 
assistants ; there he uncovers the whole cross, giving 
the veil to the sub-deacon, by whom it is given to an 
acolyte, who carries it to the small table ; and the 
Bishop then sings, one tone still higher than the second 
time, JEcce lignum Crucis; and every thing is done the 
third time as before. 

The Bishop goes alone to the place prepared for the 
cross, carrying it raised up with both hands, and lays it 
on the cushion. He then goes to the chair, takes off his 
shoes, and without mitre, goes between the two assistant 
deacons to venerate the cross, kneeling the first time 
near the communion rail, and praying a little ; the sec- 
ond time, at half the distance from it to the place where 
the cross is; and the third time, close to the cross, 
which, after having prayed, he reverently kisses, and 
returns to the chair where he puts on his shoes, chasuble, 
and mitre. He afterwards sits and reads, Popiile 
meics, &G. 

9. After the Bishop, the assistant priest, the two 
assistant deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon, and all 
the clergy, according to their respective order and 
dignity, go to venerate the cross, in the same manner as 
the Bishop. During the veneration of the cross, the 
choir sings, Improper ia^ and about the end of it the 
candles are lighted. The deacon and sub-deacon unfold 



GOOD FRIDAY. 451 

the linen cloth, which had been extended by the aco- 
lytes on the altar. The deacon carries from the small 
table to the altar the corporal and the purifier, and 
having taken the coi"poral out of the burse, unfolds it in 
the middle of the altar ; the master of ceremonies carries 
the book-stand and the Missal to the altar, and places it 
at the Gospel side. The veneration being ended, the 
deacon carries back the cross to the altar, without mak- 
ing any reverence, and all the clergy kneel as he passes. 
The Bisliop sits down and washes his hands. 

10. Til en the procession is arranged in the following 
order : the two censer-bearers with their censei's and in- 
cense-boat ; the cross-bearer in sub-deacon's dress, be- 
tween the two acolytes with their candlesticks; the 
clergy ; the assistant priest between the deacon and sub- 
deacon, and the Bishop between the two assistant dea- 
cons. As they move from the middle of the altar, they 
all make a genuflection to the cross. 

11. When the procession arrives at the repository, all 
place themselves as yesterday ; the Bishop, on arriving 
at the door or entry of the chapel, takes off his mitre ; 
on coming to the altar, he kneels, with all the clergy ; 
and, having prayed for some time, the Bishop rises ; the 
assistant priest presents to him the incense-boat. The 
Bishop puts incense into the censer; but does not bless 
the incense ; the sacristan opens the tabernacle, and the 
Bishop having knelt down, incenses the Blessed Sacra- 
ment thrice ; the long veil is put on the Bishop's 
shoulders, and the first assistant deacon takes the Blessed 
Sacrament from the tabernacle, and gives it to the 
Bishop, who is yet kneeling. The deacon makes a genu- 
flection, and the Bishop, having covered the chalice 
with the veil hanging from his shoulders, holds it with 



452 PONTIFICAL CKBEMONIES. 

both hands, rises, and all go in procession, as yesterday, 
to the altar ; at the same time the choir sings, Vexilla 
Hegis^ &c Those who carry the canopy stop at the 
chancel, the others form a double semi-circle before the 
altar, and kneel down till after communion, holding the 
lighted candles in their hands. 

12. The Bishop, on arriving at the steps of the altar, 
standing, gives the Blessed Sacrament to the officiating 
deacon, who receives it kneeling, and places it on the 
altar. The Bishop, having taken oif the veil, kneels on 
a cushion, on the lowest step. He afterwards rises, and 
being attended by the assistant priest, puts incense into 
the censer without blessing it. He incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament thrice, goes up to the altar, takes the Blessed 
Sacrament out of the chalice, and taking care not to 
toucli it, places it on the paten which is held by the 
officiating deacon ; and having received the paten from 
the hands of the same, lays the sacred Host on the cor- 
poral, without saying any thing. If he happen to touch 
the Blessed Sacrament, he washes his fingers in some 
vessel prepared for this purpose ; the deacon puts wine 
into the chalice, and the sub-deacon water, which is not 
blessed by the Bishop, who does not say the usual 
prayer; but having received it from the deacon, places 
it on the altar, and the deacon covers it with the pall. 

13. The Bishop, having received the incense boat 
from the assistant priest, puts incense into the censer, 
without blessing it, and incenses first the sacred offer- 
ings, saying, Incensicm istud; secondly, the cross, and 
thirdly, the altar, saying, Dlrigaticr Domine^ &c., mak- 
ing a genuflection before and after, and every time he 
passes before the Blessed Sacrament ; and having in- 
censed the altar, he gives the censer to the deacon, say- 



GOOD FRIDAY. 463 

ing, Aeeendat in nobis Domine^ &c. The Bishop is not 
incensed. 

14. After the incensing, the Bishop retires a little to- 
wards the Epistle side of the altar, and washes his hands, 
without saying any thing ; then he goes to the middle 
of the altar, bows, and joins his hands, saying, I71 spiritu 
huniilitatis f afterwards receding a little towards the 
Gospel side, he turns towards the people, and says, 
Orate fratreSy taking care not to make a complete circle, 
turning his face towards the people, and back again, to- 
wards the altar. He immediately sings in a ferial tone, 
Oremus^ JPrcBceptis salutarihus moniti^ <fec., and having 
said in a low voice. Amen, says the prayer^ Libera nos, 
&c., in the same tone of voice in which he said the 
JPater. Having finished it, he makes a genuflection, 
puts the paten under the Blessed Sacrament, and taking 
the latter in his right hand, raises it so that it may be 
seen by the people ; then he divides the sacred Host in 
three parts as usual, and puts the smallest of them into 
the chaUce, without making the sign of the cross. He 
does not say JPax Domini, nor Agnus Dei; neither 
does he give the Pax. 

15. The Bishop having put the particle into the chalice, 
makes a genuflection, and having said only, Perceptio 
corporis, makes again a genuflection, takes the paten 
with the Blessed Sacrament, says, Panem coslestem acci- 
piam, &c., signs himself with the Blessed Sacrament, 
saying. Corpus Domini nostri, ifcc, and communicates ; 
he immediately consumes the wine with a part of the 
Host in the chalice, without saying any thing ; after- 
wards he washes his fingers (the deacon pouring, as 
usual, the wine into the chalice), takes the ablution, and 
bowing, with his hands joined, in the middle of the 



454: PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

altar, says only, Quod ore sumpsimics, Domine, &c. 
After this, he goes to the Epistle side, puts on the mitre, 
washes his hands, and goes to his seat ; where, having 
taken off his vestments, and put on the cape, he says 
Vespers with the clergy, who have by this time taken 
off the sacred vestments, and put on their surplices. 
The candles are extinguished, and after the antiphon of 
the Magnificat has been repeated, the Bishop goes to 
the middle, kneels at the faldstool during the Christies 
and the Miserere/ after which, he says the prayer, He- 
spice, and retires, as usual. 



CHAPTER XII. 

HOLY SATURDAY. 

Article I. 
Things to he Prepared. 

1. The church, the high altar, and the baptismal font 
should be prepared as directed page 321. Likewise, 
the triple candle, the paschal candle, the new fire, the 
grains of incense, and every thing else, as there di- 
rected. 

2. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments should be 
prepared as usual for the assistant priest, the two as- 
sistant deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon ; for the 
clergy according to their order and dignity ; with this 
difference, that to-day violet vestments must be pre- 
pared ; the deacon and sub-deacon make use of folded 
chasubles. Under the violet, white vestments must be 
prepared. 

i 



HOLT SATURDAY. 465 

3. On the altar, two front veils, white and purple ; the 
sacred vestments for the Bishop must be double, that is, 
white vestments should be placed immediately upon the 
altar, and over them violet vestments. 

4. The Bishop's chair should be adorned with white 
ornam'ents, and then covered with purple cloth. 

Article II. 
The Blessing of the New Fire. 

1. The Bishop, unless prevented by some urgent 
cause, ought to bless the new fire ; for this purpose he 
puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and cope ; 
wearing the mitre, and holding the crosier in his hand, 
attended by the deacon and sub-deacon, and the two as- 
sistant deacons in folded chasubles, and the assistant 
priest in cope, and preceded by the cross and the clergy, 
he goes to the porch, where the new fire has been 
lighted, and blesses it as directed page 323, and in the 
Roman Missal. After which, he takes off his vestments, 
and puts on the cape. 

Aeticle III. 
The JExaltet^ and of the Blessing of the Paschal Candle. 

1. The Bishop, dressed in cape, sits on his pontifical 
chair, having at his side the two assistant deacons, and 
the assistant priest, and puts incense into the censer 
and blesses it, the assistant priest presenting to him the 
incense-boat. 

2. The sub-deacon in violet folded chasuble, taking 
the processional cross, goes with the deacon, who is 
habited in a white dalmatic, with a sufficient number of 



456 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

attending clergymen, to the place where the triple 
candle and other necessary things have been prepared. 
The Bishop, with his assistants, remains at his seat, and 
the rest of the clergy in the sanctuary. 

3. The master of ceremonies walks first ; then the cen- 
ser-bearer, having at his left an acolyte ; after them a 
sub deacon carrying the cross; the deacon follows; and, 
lastly, four acolytes, two by two. 

4. On arriving at the place prepared, the master of 
ceremonies lights a candle from the new fire ; the dea- 
con takes the triple candle, and one of the acolytes the 
plate with the grains of incense; after this, they go 
back in the following order : first the acolyte, carrying 
with both hands the plate with the grains of incense; 
on his left, the censer-bearer, swinging the censer gently; 
second, the sub-deacon carrying the cross ; third, the 
deacon with the triple candle, and on his left, the mas- 
ter of ceremonies with the lighted candle; lastly, the 
four acolytes, two by two. 

5. As the deacon enters the church, he lowers the 
triple candle, that one of the branches may be lighted by 
the master of ceremonies, then he raises it again ; and 
he, as well as all the others in the procession, together 
with the Bishop and all the clergy, kneel on one knee, 
when Luynen Christi is sung by the deacon ; and rise 
when Deo gratias is answered by the clergy. The same 
is done a second time when they arrive at the middle of 
the church, and a third time when they arrive before 
the altar ; but the deacon, at each time, raises his voice 
one tone higher. 

6. Then the Bishop and all in the sanctuary sit down. 
Those of the procession rise, and place themselves as di- 
rected in the preceding Book, chapter viii. The deacon 



HOLT SATURDAY. 



457 



having left the triple candle in the hands of one of the 
acolytes, receives from the master of ceremonies the 
Missal ; and having made the usual genuflection to the 
altar, and reverences to the Bishop and the clei'gy, goes 
to the Bishop, and without kissing his hand, says, Juhe 
Domne^ &c. ; the Bishop makes the sign of the cross to- 
wards him, using the accustomed form, Dominus sit, 
&c., saying, however, Paschale proeconium, instead of 
Evangeliiitn. 

1. The deacon, having received the blessing, goes 
from the Bishop's seat to the middle before the altar, 
between the cross-bearer and the acolyte, who carries 
the triple candle, and having there made a genuflection, 
and tlie usual reverences, as directed in page 327, he 
goes to sing the Pi-etace, which begins by the word 
JSxultet, and performs every thing as directed in the 
same place. 

8. When the deacon commences, the Bishop and all 
the clergy in the sanctuary rise, and stand with their 
heads uncovered during it. 



Article IV. 

From the end of the JExidtet to the benediction of the 
Baptismal Font. 

1. The Fxidtet being ended, the deacon shuts the 
Missal, leaves it on its stand, goes to the bench of the 
sacred ministers, takes ofl" his white maniple, dalmatic, 
and stole, and puts on the violet stole ; the sub-deacon 
leaves the cross by the side-table, and takes oif his 
folded chasuble and maniple, and with the deacon goes 
to the Bishop's seat, and the acolyte places the triple 
candle on its stand at the Gospel side. 

39 



458 PONTIFICAL CKREMONIES. 

2. The Bishop and all the clergy, standing with their 
heads uncovered, say. Pater et Ave^ secretly, and then 
sit down, and JVone is recited. After the last Psalm, 
the Bishop kneels at the faldstool, the clergy kneeling 
likewise during the Christus and the 3Iiserere; after 
which, the Bishop says the prayer, Hespice. Then hav- 
ing returned to his seat, he reads the Psalm, Quani 
dilecta^ &c., with the Gloria Patri^ and the other 
verses with the following prayers ; at the same time he 
puts on the w^hite sandals ; after the prayers he washes 
his hands, and puts on the pontifical vestments of violet 
color, including the maniple and the plain mitre, read- 
ing the appropriate prayers. The clergy likewise put 
on their sacred vestments; and the Bishop being vested, 
the two assistant deacons in violet folded chasubles, and 
the assistant priest in violet cope, go to the Bishop's 
chair, and the deacons to their bench, where they put 
on their violet chasubles and maniples, and sit down. 

3. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, 
and attended by his assistants, and the deacon and sub- 
deacon, goes up to the altar, which he kisses, after hav- 
ing taken off his mitre. Then having made a reverence 
to the cross, he puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in 
his left hand, and attended by the assistant deacons and 
priest, goes to his chair, where he sits; the deacon and 
sub-deacon go to their bench. All in the sanctuary sit 
down. 

4. A book-stand is placed in the middle of the sanctu- 
ary ; a clergyman, attended by the master of ceremo- 
nies, goes to it, makes a genuflection to the altar, and 
the usual reverences to the Bishop and to the clergy, on 
each side of the sanctuary, and reads the first prophecy, 
without the title. In the mean time, the Bishop reads 



FIOLY PATUKDAY. 459 

the same projjhecy out of the book, Avliich an acolyte 
holds open before Iiim. Wiiilst he reads, his assistants 
stand near him. The; singer having finished the prophecy, 
and made the usual genuflection and reverences, goes to 
kiss the Bishop's hand, and to receive his blessing. 
Then the Bishop rises, sings, OreJnus — the first assistant 
deacon, Flectcunus genua. At these words, all in the 
sanctuary (the Bishop only excepted) make a genuflec- 
tion, and the second deacon sings, Levate; then all rise, 
and the Bishop sings the prayer out of the book, which 
the assistant priest holds open before him. The same is 
done in regard to all the other prophecies, with the ex- 
ception, that after the fourth, eighth, and eleventh 
prophecies, the choir sings the Tract, and the Bishop 
reads it. After the twelfth prophecy, Flectamus getiua 
and Levate are not sung. 

Aeticle V. 

JBlessing the Baptismal Font. 

1. After the prayer which follows the last prophecy, 
the Bishop takes off the maniple, chasuble, dalmatic, and 
tunic, and puts on a violet cope ; then, with his mitre on, 
and the crosier in his left hand, preceded by the cross, 
carried by the sub-deacon and all the clei-gy, arranged 
as directed at page 330, he between two assistant dea- 
cons goes to the baptismal font, the assistant priest walk- 
ing immediately before him at the right of the deacon, 
and he does every thing as directed in the same place, 
and in the Roman Missal. 

2. If any child or adult is to be baptized, the Bishop 
baptizes* them, as directed in the Roman Ritual. 

3. After the blessing of the font, they return to the 



460 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

sanctuary in procession, in the same order as they came 
to the font. 

Article VI. 

JBVom, the Benediction of the Font to the beginning of 

Mass. 

1. The Bishop on arriving at the high altar takes off 
his cope and mitre, and kneels, leaning on the faldstool ; 
the assistants, deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, 
likewise kneel; and the Litany is sung by two chanters 
kneeling before two stools behind the Bishop. 

If there is an ordination, those who are to be ordained 
prostrate themselves during the Litany, which the sing- 
ers interrupt at the proper place when the Bishop is to 
say, Ut hos electos^ &q. 

2. When the chanters sing the verse. Per mysteriuni 
sanctcB incarnationis tuce^ the deacon and sub-deacon go 
to the sacristy, take off their violet vestments, and put 
on white, and come out immediately. 

3. At the verse, Feccatores^ the Bishop rises with the 
assistant deacons and priests ; the latter go to the 
sacristy to take off the violet vestments, and put on 
white ; the Bishop, standing in the same place, assisted 
by the deacon and sub-deacon, takes off the violet vest- 
ments, and puts on the white ; all the clergy in sacred 
vestments do the same. In the mean while the acolytes 
remove from the altar the violet front-veil, and from the 
tabernacle the canopy of the same color, and from the 
small table the violet veil that covered the white ; the 
candles are lighted, the relic cases are placed between 
the candlesticks, and the carpet is spread. The chanters 
should take care to sing the Litany very slowly from the 
verse Peccatores, 



MABS. 461 

Akticle VII. 

From the beginning to the end of Mass, 

1. The Bishop, having put on the white vestments, 
when the singers begin, Kyrie^ makes the Confession 
with his ministers, saying the Psahn Judica and the 
Gloria Patrij goes up to the altar, kisses both it and 
the book of the Gospels ; puts incense into the censer and 
blesses it ; incenses the cross and altar, and is incensed, 
as usual, by the deacon. Then he goes to his seat, 
where, having said the Kyrie^ he sings, Gloria in excel- 
sis Deo. Then all the bells are rung, and the organ is 
played. 

2. After the hymn, Gloria in excelsis, the Bishop rises 
without mitre, turns towards the people, and sings, J^ax 
voMs, and the prayer, J)eus qui hanc sacratissimani 
noctem^ &c. The rest is done as usual. 

3. The sub-deacon, having sung the JEpistle, leaves 
the Missal in the hands of the master of ceremonies, and 
forthwith going to the BishojD, says in an audible voice, 
Reverendissime Pater ^Annuntio vohis gaudium magnum^ 
quod est Alleluia^ and kisses his hand; then either the 
sub-deacon or a chanter intones Alleluia to the Bishop, 
who, rising without mitre, sings thrice, Alleluia^ raising 
every time his voice one tone higher, and the choir 
every time repeats it ; and after the third AUeluia, 
sings the verse, Gonfitemini/ then the Bishop sits down 
and continues Mass as usual. 

4. At the Gospel, the acolytes do not carry the can- 
dlesticks, but the book is incensed as usual, and the 
deacon asks the blessing. Pax Domini sit semper vo- 

39* 



462 PEOVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

biscum is said; but the Pax is not given. Agnus Dei 
is not said, neither the Communio. 

5. The Bishop, after the communion and the usual 
ablutions, washes his hands, goes to his seat, seats him- 
self, and the choir begins Alleluia^ in place of Vespers. 
At the Magnificat^ the sub-deacon intones the antiphon 
to the Bishop, which he repeats, standing ; then he sits 
with his mitre on, puts incense into the censer, and 
when the Magnificat is begun, he goes to the altar, 
takes off his mitre, makes the reverence, kisses the altar, 
incenses the cross and the altar, returns to his seat, is 
incensed, as well as all the clergy, as usual, and stands 
till the end of the Magnificat. Whilst the antiphon is 
repeated, he sits, puts on the mitre, returns to the altar 
at the end of the antiphon, sings, Dominus voMscmn^ 
and the prayer; the deacon sings, JBenedicaimts Domino^ 
Alleluia^ Alleluia j the Bishop gives the solemn blessing, 
and the Indulgences are published. 

Then the Bishop disrobes and retires, as usual. 



CHAPTER XIY. 

CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN PROVINCIAL 

COUNCILS* 

Article I, 

WTiat is to be done before it opens. 

1. Previous notice should be given of the celebration 
of the P]-ovincial Council to all the Bishops of the prov- 
ince, and others who are to attend. 



* Ex Cseremoniali Episcoporum, L. i, e. 31, et ex Pontiflcali Eo- 
aiano, Part III., Tit. Ordo ad Synodum. 



PRELIMINARIES. 46S 

2. On the feast of the Epiphany, when the movahle 
feasts are published, as directed in the Roman Pontifical, 
Part III., Tit. Be puhlicatione festorum mohilium in 
Epiphania Dotnini^ adding to the usual formula before 
the publication of the movable feast, immediately fol- 
lowing the day of the celebration of the Council, these 
words. Die . . . niensis . . . hujus anni^ quae erit do- 
ininica . . . ConGilium pi'ovincicde Deo adjiwante in 
Metropolitana JEcclesia inchoabitur. 

3. On the three Sundays immediately preceding the 
opening of the Council, it should be published from the 
pulpit before the sermon, in all the churches of the prov- 
ince, and the prayers of the people requested for its suc- 
cess. It is usual on such occasions, that the Bishop of 
each diocese order the Collect, De Spiritu Sancto^ to be 
added at Mass every day till the conclusion of the 
Council. 

Aeticle II. 

Sow the Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and 

arranged. 

ft 

1. The Metropolitan, or any other church in which 
the Council is to be celebrated, should be adorned as for 
the greatest festivals. On the evening before, the bells, 
with festive peals, should announce the opening of the 
Council. 

2. The Archbishop's seat is placed at the altar ; those 
of the Bishops on each side of the sanctuary : those 
nearest to the altar are to be occupied by the senior 
bishops, according to priority of consecration ; they 
should be raised on a platform by one or two steps. The 
other clergymen may sit against the railing of the sane- 



464 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

tuary ; the vicars-general of any diocese, if present, tak- 
ing precedence, according to priority of ordination ; 
next, the superiors of clerical congregations ; next, the 
provincials of religious orders ; next, the theologians, 
according to priority of ordination. The first place is 
on the Gospel side. This arrangement is not quite con- 
formable to that prescribed by the Roman Pontifical, in 
which it is required that the Bishops should sit in a 
semicircle before the Archbishop, and behind them the 
priests ; but we have adapted ours to suit best the sanc- 
tuary of our churches. 

3. The Archbishop's usual chair should be likewise 
prepared and adorned as on great festivals, with stools 
on each side for the two assistant deacons ; also a third 
one for the assistant priest. 

4. The seats for the deacon and sub-deacon are to be 
placed, as usual, at the Epistle side, where also the side- 
table should be placed. 

5. On those days on which one of the bishops sings 
High Mass, a faldstool should be prepared on the Epis- 
tle side, on a small platform, where the ofiiciating Bishop 
will sit, with his face turned towards the people ; on the 
same side, near the side-wall of the sanctuary, and in 
the same direction with it, a bench should be placed, 
where the deacon and sub-deacon with the assistant 
priest sit. 

Aetiole III. 

THE OPEJSriISrG OF THE COUNCIL. 

Section I. — What is to be prepared for it. 

1. In one of the rooms oftlie Archbishop's house, the 
following vestments are to be prepared : 



THE OPENING. 465 

For the Archbishop, sandals and stockhigs, amice, 
alb, cincture, with red stole and cope, crosier and 
mitre. 

For the Archbishop's assistant priest, a red cope, 
which he puts over his surplice or on his rochet, if he is 
entitled to use it. 

For the Archbishop's assistant deacons, red vestments 
suitable to their order. 

For each of the bishops, an amice, cope, and mitre ; 
they put the amice over their rochet. 

For the officiating deacon and sub-deacon, the sacred 
vestments of their order. 

For priests, sacerdotal vestments. 

If other deacons and sub-deacons be present, besides 
those who officiate, a sufficient number of sacred vest- 
ments suitable to their order. 

For the Archbishop, on the altar, a chasuble, the dal- 
matic, and tunic and gloves, which he puts on immedi- 
ately before he begins Mass, having taken off the cope ; 
also the pallium. 

If the Archbishop could not celebrate Mass, he re- 
mains in cope, and assists at the Mass celebrated by the 
senior Bishop of the province — who, in this case, puts 
on the pontifical dress in the Archbishop's house, and is 
attended by the deacon and sub-deacon, and an assistant 
priest. 

Section II. — The Procession, 

1. All the prelates and clergy being dressed, the pro- 
cession moves from the Archbishop's house in the follow- 
ing order : 

The censer-bearer and the second master of cere- 
monies. 



4:66 PROvmciAL councils. 

The cross-bearer, between the acolytes carrying their 
candlesticks. 

The inferior clergy in surplices, two by two. 

Those in sacred orders in dalmatics, two by two. 

The priests in chasubles, two by two. 

The Bishops in mitre and cope, two by two, accord- 
ing to the time of consecration, those last consecrated 
going before. 

The senior Bishop — pontifically dressed to celebrate 
Mass, preceded by his assistant priest, and between the 
deacon and sub-deacon, in case the Archbishop could 
not sing it — should walk after the other bishops. 

The sub-deacon. 

The assistant priest at the right of the deacon. 

The Archbishop's cross. 

The Arclibishop between the two assistant deacons, 
and followed by the crosier and mitre bearers. 

2. During the procession, the bells ring continually, 
and the clergy sing psalms. 

3. The organ is played as the procession enters the 
church. 

4. The clergy, as they arrive at the sanctuary, make a 
genuflection, bow to each otiher, and go to their places, 
where they remain standing. 

5. When the Archbishop has arrived at his seat, all 
the clergy sit down ; and he takes off his cope, and puts 
on the other vestments for Mass, if he celebrate. 

Section III. — Mass. 

1. The Mass is to be of the Holy Ghost, with Gloria 
and Credo^ without any commemoration of the current 
Feast, or Sunday ; the last Gospel is that of St. John. 
The Archbishop wears the pallium. 



MASS. 46T 

2. The Mass is sung as usual. The Bishops and priests 
in sacred vestments do not kneel at the Confession ; they 
make it, two by two ; the one that is at the right be- 
gins, the other at the left answers, at the Confession, and 
at the Kyrie. They bow to one anotlier befoi'e they 
begin, and after they have finished, not only for the 
Confession and Kyrie^ but also for the Gloria^ Credo^ 
Sanctics, and Agnus Dei^ whicli they recite together. 

3. The deacon incenses the bishops with three double 
swings, and the priests in sacred vestments with two, in 
the order that will be pointed out for the Pax m the 
followino^ number. 

4. The JPax is carried by the assistant priest, first to 
the senior Bishop, who sits first at the Gospel side, then 
to the second senior Bishop," who sits first at the Epistle 
side ; afterwards to the priest who sits first at the Gospel 
side, then to the other, who sits in the first place at the 
Epistle side. 

5. The Archbishop does not give the blessing at the 
end of Mass, but, as it will be said below, at the end of 
the Session. 

Section lY.— The Ceremonies for the first Session, or 
the opening of the Council. 

1. It is more convenient that the sermon, which is 
chiefly intended for the instruction of the people, should 
be preached after Mass ; during this time the Archbishop 
takes off the chasuble and tunic, and puts on the cope, 
either in the sacristy, or in the cliurch at his seat. 

2. The faldstool is prepared below the lowest step of 
the altar, in the middle. The Archbishop, attended by 
the assistant priest and deacon, goes to the middle, 
salutes the Bishops on each side, and kneels before the 



4:68 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

faldstool ; having taken off his mitre, he intones the 
antiphon, Exaudi nos^ Domine^ which is continued and 
chanted by the choir ; after the antiphon, the chanters 
intone the 68th Psalm,* Saltmm me fac^ Deus^ quoniam 
intraverunt aqiice usque ad animam uneam^ which is 
alternately sung by the clergy. After the first verse, all 
rise, the Archbishop sits on the faldstool, which is placed 
in the middle of the platform of the altar, having at his 
side the two assistant deacons and the assistant priest at 
the right of the first assistant deacon, the book-bearer 
and the candle-bearer holding respectively the book and 
the candle before him. The Bishops likewise, with their 
mitres, and the clergy, with their caps on, sit during the 
Psalm. 

3. After the Psalm is ended, and the anthem jBJxaudi 
repeated, all rise, and the Archbishop and Bishops take 
off their mitres. The Archbishop, turned towards the 
altar, sings the prayer, Adsumus^ Domine Sancte Spiri- 
tics, &c., at the end of which the clergy answer, Amen. 
Then the Archbishop sings Oremus, and the prayer, 
Oinnipotens sempiterne Dexisj after which the clergy 
answer, Amen. 

4. Then the Archbishop, with his mitre on, kneels be- 
fore the faldstool ; the bishops likewise kneel with their 
mitres on, and all the clergy kneel at their places. The 
two chanters, kneeling in the middle of the sanctuary, 
sing the Litany of the Saints, to which the clergy 
answer. 

5. When the chanters have sung the verse, TTt omni- 
hus fidelihus defunctis^ &c., and the clergy answered, Te 
rogamus^ audi nos^ the Archbishop alone rises, takes 
the crosier in his left hand, and turned towards the 

* It is found at the beginning of Matins of the V. Feria. 



MASS. 469 

clergy, sings, Tit hanc ]yrmsentem Synodum visitare^ dis- 
ponere^ et benedicere digneris j the clei-gy answer, Te 
roganius^ audi nos, Tlie chanters continue the Litany 
to the end — viz., as far as Jfgrie eleiso?i^ Christe eleison^ 
and Kyrie eleison^ inclusively. 

6. Tiie Litanies being ended, they all rise, the Arch- 
bishop and Bishops take off their mitres, the Archbishop 
turned towards the altar, sings, Oremics; the first dea- 
con, Flectamus genua^ and the second, Ijevate. The Arch- 
bishop sings the prayer, Da qucesumus ecclesice tuoe^ &c. 

7. The prayer being ended, the Archbishop goes up 
to the altar, sits on the chair or faldstool placed in the 
middle, turning his back to the altar. The clergy sit in 
the mean time, and the Archbishop puts the incense 
into the censer and blesses it, as usual. The deacon 
carries the Missal, and lays it on the altar, kneels, says, 
Mund<i cor nieum^ asks the Archbishop's blessing, and 
goes with the sub deacon, master of ceremonies, censer- 
bearer, and acolytes, to the place where the Gospel is 
usually sung ; having first made the genuflection to the 
altar, and bowed to the Archbishop, Bishops, and clergy, 
he sings in the usual manner the Gospel, which is taken 
from St. Luke, c. 9, from v. 1 to 6. 

8. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon carries the Missal 
to the Archbishop, who kisses it; and the deacon in- 
censes him, as usual, 

9. After the Archbishop has been incensed, he takes 
off his mitre, and kneels before his chair, or faldstool ; 
the Bishops likewise, having taken off their mitres, and 
all the clergy, kneel at their places. The Archbishop in- 
tones the hymn, Ve7ii^ Creator Sjnritu^, and the choir 
continues to sing it ; after the first strophe, they all rise, 
and stand till the end of the whole hymn. 

40 



470 PEOVINCTAL COUNCILS. 

10. After the hymn, all sit, and the Archbishop makes 
a Latin allocution to the Conncil, either as it is in the 
Roman Pontifical, or any other, as he pleases. Should 
he choose to have another discourse addressed to the 
Council by some one else, it may be made at this time. 

11. The Archbishop addresses the Fathers of the 
Council to this eiR^ct : HeverencUssbni Patres^ Venera- 
hiles fratres^ placetne vobis ad Dei gloriam et honorem^ 
et ad Catholicce JEcclesioe amijlificationem Concilium 

provinciale legitime convocatityn, et hie congre- 

gatum hodierno die aperiri et inckoari. The Bishops 
severally reply, Placet^ aperiatur. Then the Arch- 
bishop, in his own name and that of his colleagues, 
turning towards the people, says, Christi notnine invo- 

cato^ decernimus Sanctam Synoduyn provincialem 

esse apertani^ et ita judicamits.^ 

12. The Aich bishop tlien orders his secretary to read 
the names of those whom he proposes as officers of the 
Council ; which being read, he says, Placetne vobis, 
venerahiles fratres^ hosce in Goncilii officiates eligeyidos. 
The Bishops severally answer, Placet. The Archbish- 
op's secretary then reads the Decree in these words: 

Peverendisshniis P. Archiepiscopus xma cum 

EpisGopis in hoc sacro Goncilio Provinciali congregatis 
decernit hosce Peverendos viros in officiates hvjus sancti 

Concilii eligendos esse^ et legitime jam electos^ nempe 
Promotorem, Secretarios Magistros 

Cderemoniarum Cantores. 

13. The Promoter addresses the Archbishop : Plus- 
trissime ac Peverendissim,e Poniine^ peto ict legantur 
/Sacro-sancti Concilii Tridentini decreta de Professione 

* Ex Concil. Ehemensi, an. 1583. 



MODE OF PROCEDURE. 471 

Jidei^ et de residentia. The Archbishop addressing the 
Bishops, says : Venerahiles fratres^ placetne vohis ut le- 
gantur decreta Concilii Tridentini de Professionefidei^ 
et de residentia f The Bishops severally reply, Placet^ 
legantur. Then the Archdeacon reads the decrees. 

14. Then, such of the BishojDS as hare not in a former 
Council made the profession of faith, appioach to the 
front of the altar, take off their mitres, make a genufiec 
tion on the lowest step, salute the Ai-chbisihop, and kneel- 
ing on the step, simultaneously recite the Profession of 
Faith as in the Roman Pontifical. In saying the last 
words, Sic me Deus adjuvet^ <fec., each Bishop places his 
right hand on the Book of the Gospel After having 
made the usual genuflection and salutation, they retire 
to their places, 

15. The Archbishop then gives the solemn pontifical 
blessing, which the Bishops receive standing, with their 
heads uncovered, and profoundly inclined. After this, 
they all retire as usual to the sacristy, where they dis- 
robe. 

Aeticle IV, 

Mode of procedure of the Council. 

1, Each day, two meetings, called Congregations, are 
usually held ; the one private, consisting of the Bishops 
alone, with the secretaries of the Coun<^l, in the sacristy 
of the Metropolitan church, or in the Archbishop's house, 
in the morning, from about nine till twelve; the other 
public, in the afternoon, held in the Metropolitan church, 
from about four to six. To this latter are invited the 
Theologians of the Archbishop and Bishops, with the 
Supervisors of the Religious Orders, and Clerical bodies. 



472 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

and all the officers of the Council. The chief matters, 
which each pi'elate intends to submit to the considera- 
tion of the Council, are usually made known by idm to 
the Archbishop, within a reasonable time before the 
holding of the Council, and by the Archbishop com- 
municated to the Bishops generally. Tlie Promoter, 
after the opening of the Council, appoints select com- 
mittees, called also Congregations, of the inferior clergy 
there assembled, to whom such matters as the Bishops 
deem proper are referred for examination. They as- 
semble in the morning at convenient places to investi- 
gate the matters submitted to them respectively, and 
their written reports are read in the public Congrega- 
tions ; after the reading of the reports, the Promoter 
suggests that any clergyman who dissents therefrom, or 
who wishes to propose any amendment, or to make any 
observation, may freely, but respectfully, deliver his 
sentiments. If no one rises to speak, tlie Promoter pro- 
poses that the report be referred to the Bishops for pri- 
vate consideration. Should any one choose to speak, 
the reference is made after the sentiments have been de- 
livered. In speaking, each clergyman follows the order 
in which they are seated. No clergyman sjjeaks a 
second time on the same subject, unless he obtains 
special leave. 

2. In the private Congi'egations of the Bishops, the 
matters to be submitted to the consideration of the 
clergy are designated ; the reports of the clergy are 
subsequently read, and the matters finally decided. 
Each prelate, according to priority of consecration, is 
free tO' express his sentiments on the respective matters 
treated of in the Council. After the matters have been 
canvassed, the question is put by the Archbishop, and 



SECOND SOLEMN SESSION. 473 

the decision made by the majority of suffrages, which 
are given according to the order of consecration. 

3. It is usual in Councils, that all propositions be ex- 
pressed in the Latin language and given in writing, and 
that the decrees be in the first instance drawn up in that 
language, 

4. Ko special exercise of devotion is prescribed for 
the various Congregations. It is usual, however, to be- 
gin by the recital of the hymn, Vent Creator Spiritus. 
The evening Congregation is opened by the recital of 
the Veni^ Sancte Spiritus^ &c,, and closed by reciting 
the Sub tuurn prcesidium. In this article we have stated 
the usages of the Baltimore Councils. 

Article V. 

Second solemn Session. 

1. On some day during the holding of the Council, a 
second solemn session is celebrated ; High Mass for the 
deceased Bishops and clergy is sung by one of the pre- 
lates, the other prelates assisting in their pontifical robes ; 
a discourse is usually pronounced after Mass, by a prelate 
or priest appointed for that purpose. 

2. A faldstool or chair for the celebrant is placed on a 
small platform in front of the altar, at the Epistle side, 
so that the celebrant when sitting has his face towards 
the people. A bench for the assistant priest, deacon, 
and sub-deacon, is placed near the faldstool, parallel to 
the side-wall of the sanctuary. The assistant priest 
takes his seat on it, nearest to the Bishop's left hand; 
next to him sits the deacon on the same bench ; the sub- 
deacon sits at the side of the deacon. 

3. The prelates dress in the sacristy, and proceed 

40* 



47^ PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

thence to the church, in the same order as on the first 
day, except that the celebrant with his assistants follows 
the other prelates, and walks immediately before the 
Archbishop. 

4. The prelates go to their respective seats, and the 
celebrant with his assistants, having made a genuflection 
before the altar, salutes the Archbishop and the pre- 
lates, and then begins Mass as usual. 

5. The ceremonies of the Mass are the same as on 
other occasions, with the following exceptions. After 
the Confession the Bishop ascends to the altar and 
kisses it, and then, having received the mitre, makes 
a profound bow to the cross, and goes directly, per hre- 
viorem, to the faldstool, where the sub-deacon, having 
taken off the mitre, the celebrant and assistants stand- 
ing with their faces turned to the altar, the celebrant 
reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie ; he turns to the 
people to say, Dominns vobiscum, and turns again to 
the altar to say the prayer. He sits whilst the sub- 
deacon sings the epistle, which being terminated, he 
himself reads it with the Tract, Sequentia^ Munda cor 
meum, and the Gospel. Tlie Offertory is read by him 
standing with his face towards the altar, which posture 
is observed whenever he reads or sings any thing 
standing. 

6. At the end of the Mass, the celebrant with his 
assistants retires to the sacristy, and the Archbishop 
from his chair performs the absolution of the dead as 
usual. 

7. After the absolution, the black ornaments are laid 
aside, and the prelates put on copes. The ceremonies 
of the session are performed as prescribed in the Roman 
Pontifical, — for the second day of the synod, beginning 



'IHIRD SOLEMN SESSION. 475 

with the anthem, Propitius esto peccatis nosiris, Do- 
mmCi nequando dicant gentes : ubi est Deus eorwnf 
and the Psalm 78, Deus^ venerunt gentes in hcereditatem 
tuam^ &c., which may be found in the Breviary, at Fer. 
V. ad Matutin. The prelates and clergy kneel while the 
anthem and first verse of the Psalm are sung, and then 
resume their mitres, and sit until the end of the Psalm, 
as directed in the first session. The prayers are then 
sung by the Archbishop, after which he resumes his 
seat on the platform of the altar, and puts in, and 
blesses the incense, and gives the blessing to the 
deacon ; then all the prelates and clergy rise, and 
stand with their heads uncovered, while the deacon 
sings the Gospel, Designavit Dominus^ Luke 10th, 
from the 1st verse to the 9th inclusive, with the 
usual ceremonies. 

8. Afterwards, all kneel with their heads uncovered, 
whilst the first verse of the hymn, "Fe?^^, Creator Spi- 
ritus, is sung, which being intoned by the Archbishop, 
is continued by the choir and clergy. After the first 
verse, all rise, and stand until the termination of the 
hymn. Then all resume their seats, and the Archbishop 
addresses them in the words of the Pontifical, or others, 
if he thinks proper. Such decrees as have been already 
agreed on may be then read, and the assent of the Fa- 
thers asked, after which the pontifical blessing is given, 
and all depart. 

Aeticle yi. 

Third solemn Session, 

1. On the last day of the Council the third solemn 

session is held. The prelates wear copes and mitres as 

in the other sessions. Solemn Mass is celebrated by the 

Archbishop, or by one of the Bishops. 



476 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

2. When one of the Bishops celebrates, he proceeds 
before the Archbishop to the sanctuary, as before ex- 
pressed, and observes the other pecuhar ceremonies 
stated in the preceding article. On ascending to the 
altar, after the Confession, he makes the usual incensing, 
and then, having received the mitre, he stands at the 
Epistle side of the altar, with his face turned towards 
the side-wall, and is incensed by the deacon. He then 
retires to his faldstool and reads the Introit. The censer- 
bearer, in the mean time, carries the censer to the as- 
sistant priest of the Archbishop, who incenses the Arch- 
bishop. After the Gospel, the celebrant is incensed by 
the de^icon, and then the archbishop by his assistant 
priest. After the Offertory, the celebrant is incensed by 
his deacon, the Archbishop by his assistant priest, and 
the prelates by the deacon, with three double swings, 
the clergy in sacred vestments, with two, and the infe- 
rior clergy with one. 

3. The Pax is given by the celebrant, first to the as- 
sistant priest of the Archbishop, who, advancing to the 
altar, kneels down as usual, whilst the previous prayer 
is recited. The deacon and sub-deacon then receive the 
Pax from the celebrant. In the mean time, the assistant 
priest of the Archbishop gives the Pax to the Arch- 
bishop, who immediately gives it to his assistant dea- 
cons. The assistant priest of the celebrant, after the 
deacon and sub-deacon have received the Pace, goes to 
the assistant priest of the Archbishop and from him re- 
ceives the Pax^ which he subsequently gives to the first 
prelate on each side, and to the first among the clergy- 
men. The Bishop, w^io receives from him the Pax^ gives 
it to the next, and so on. 

4. The celebrant does not give any blessing at the end 



PROVINCIAI. COUNCILS. 471 

of Mass, but having secretly said the prayer, Placeat^ 
&c., recites the Gospel of St. John, and, with his at- 
tendants, retires to the sacristy. 

5. The Archbishop advances towards the altar and 
kneels by liis faldstool below the lowest step. He be- 
gins the anthem, JExaudi nos, Domine^ quoniam be- 
nigna est misericordia tua^ et secundu7n multitudinem 
miserationum tuarum respice fioSy D amine ; wliich is 
chanted as the Psalm, Salvum me fac^ Deus^ on the first 
day. Then three prayers are sung by the Archbishop, 
and the Gospel is sung, taken from the 18th chap, of St. 
Matt., from the 15th to the 22d v. The hymn, Veni 
Creator^ is sung as in the preceding sessions. The Arch- 
bishop, seated on his faldstool on the platform of the 
altar, addresses his brethren in the words of the Pontifi- 
cal, or in such other terms as he deems expedient. A 
sermon is delivered by a prelate, or priest, appointed by 
the Council, unless it has been already delivered during 
Mass, or subsequently. The secretary of the Council, 
by order of the Archbishop, reads the decrees which 
have been prepared in the private Congregations of the 
prelates, and the Promoter solicits that they be pub- 
licly approved of and confirmed by the Council, in these 
words : Heverendissime JPater^ ego JSF. h^ijus Sancti 
Goncilii promotor^peto 2ct decreta hceo quce lecta sunt^ a 
patrihus kujus Concilii approhentur et confirraentur^ ad 
ecclesice Catholicce augmentum. Then the Archbishop 
proposes them to the judgment of the prelates, in these 
words : Placetne vohis, Venerahiles Fratres^ hmc quce 
lecta sunt decreta approhare et confirmare. The Bishops 
severally reply, Placet^ appi^ohanius^ corifivmamiis. Then 
the secretary reads the decree in these w^ords : Nos 
N. N. Archiepiscopus aliique ephcopi in hoc Sacra 



478 PONTIFICAL CEEEMOIHES. 

Concilio adunati decreta hcec quce mox lecta sunt, ap- 
prohamus^ et confirmamus. Then the prelates sign the 
decrees, which are placed by the secretary on the altar ; 
the Archbishop first subscribes, in these words, JEgo N. 
Archiepiscopus definiens subscripsi. The Arch- 
bishop having retired from the altar to his seat, the 
other Bishops, according to priority of consecration, 
successively advance towards the high altar, and, 
having made a genuflection and saluted the Arch- 
bishop, severally subscribe the decrees in these words, 
£Jgo JST. epis. JV. definiens subscripsi. 

6. The Archbishop having returned to the faldstool, 
on the platform of the altar, the Promoter solicits that 
the Council be terminated, in words of this import: 
MeverendissiTne Pater, ego JSF. hujus S. Concilii JPro- 
motor, peto ut huic Concilio Provinciali finis jam fiat. 
The Archbishop inquires into the wishes of the Fathers 
in words to this effect : Venerabiles Fratres, placetne 
vobis ad Dei Omnipotentis laudem hujus Concilii Pro- 
mncialis finemjam fieri. The Fathers severally answer, 
Placet. The secretary then reads the decree in these 

terms: ISfos JSf. Archiepiscopus aliique Patres 

qui huic Concilio Provinciali intersumus, cum absoluta 
sint quce pro temporis ratione agi gerique posse vide- 
bantur, cumque pastoralis cura ad ecclesiarum nostra- 
rmn status et pastorales vigilias revocet, propterea huic 
Sancto Concilio finem imponi censuimus. 

v. The prayer, Nulla est, Pontine, as in the Roman 
Pontifical, is then sung by the Archbishop. 

8. Afterwards the Acclamations are sung by the 
arch-deacon, the prelates and clergy singing the re- 
sponses, 

9. After the Acclamations, the Te Deum is sung, and 



DIOCESAN SYNODS. 479 

after it the prayer, Pro gratiarum actione; Deus cvjus 
misericordioe non est nwmerus^ &g. The Archbishop 
then having returned to his seat, gives the Pax to each 
of the bishops ; each of them, as he advances to receive 
it, retaining his mitre, salutes the Archbishop. Each 
Bishop subsequently gives the Pax to all of his brethren 
in their respective places. 

The Session closes with the solemn blessing of the 
Archbishop. The deacon sings, .Recedanius i?i pace, 
and the clergy respond, Ik nomine Christi. They then 
return to the sacristy, and disrobe as usual. 



CHAPTER Xy. 

CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN DIOCESAN SYNODS. 

1. The priests and clergymen of every grade, who by 
right or custom are bound to come to the Synod, assem- 
ble in the city, or such other place as the Bishop may 
prescribe. 

2. On the first day of the Synod, at a very early hour 
in the morning, the Bishop in his ordinary episcopal 
dress {cappam indutus), accompanied by all the clergy 
in surplice, goes to the church, puts on the pontifical 
vestments at his seat, celebrates the Mass of the Holy 
Ghost, and gives communion to the clergy. At the end 
of Mass the faldstool or seat is placed on the floor of 
the sanctuary, near the lowest step, a,bout the middle of 
the altar ; and another seat on the platform of the altar ; 



480 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

(the faldstool, however, may suffice, and be placed on 
the platform at the projDer time.) 

3. The Bishop, over his rochet, or over his surplice, if 
he be a regular, puts on the amice, stole, red cope, and 
precious mitre, and bearing his pastoral staff, goes be- 
fore the altar ; the deacon and sub-deacon, in red orna- 
ments, such as they use at Mass, accompanying him, one 
on each side. Kneeling there before the faldstool, and 
having laid aside the mitre, he begins the antiphon, 
Exaudi nos^ Domine^ &c., which the choir continues. 
The Psalm 68, Salvurn me fac Deus, is then sung. 
After the first verse, the Bishop sits with the mitre, and 
so remains until the antiphon is repeated, after the con- 
clusion of the Psalm. 

4. The Bishop rises, and turning towards the altar, 
after the mitre has been taken ofi", says the prayer, Ad- 
sumus Dornine^ &c., to which all reply, Amen. He 
then says, Oremus, Omnipotens sempiterne Deus^ &c., 
as in the Pontifical. 

5. At the end of this latter prayer, the Bishop, hav- 
ing put on the mitre, kneels, leaning on the faldstool, 
and all the clergy kneel, whilst the chanters sing the 
Litany. After the verse, Ut omnibus fidelihus defunctis, 
&c., the Bishop rises, and holding his crosier in his left 
hand, standing with his face towards the Synod, says, 
Ut hanc p^^cBseyitem Synodum visitai'e, disponere^ et 
benedicere digneris^ H. Te rogamus^ audi 7ios. In say- 
ing this, he makes the sign of the cross over all ; and 
then he ao-ain kneels as before until the end of the 
Litany. 

6. The Litany being sung, all rise, and the Bishop, 
laying aside his mitre, says, with his face turned towards 
the altar, Or emus. The deacon says, Flectamus genua- 



DIOCESAN SYNODS. 481 

the sub-deacon, JLevate. Then the Bishop recites the 
prayer, Da qucesumus, &c. This being finished, he re- 
sumes the mitre, ascends to the seat prepared for him 
on the platform of the altar, and sits with his back tow- 
ards the altar. He puts incense into the censer, and 
blesses it, as usual. The deacon, in red dalmatic, prece- 
ded by the censer-bearer and acolytes, and by the sub- 
deacon in tunic, after the pontifical blessing, sings the 
Gospel, Luke ix., 1, 6. The sub-deacon then presents 
the book of the Gospels to the Bishop to kiss, and the 
deacon subsequently incenses him. The Bishop then 
putting off his mitre, kneels before the seat, with his 
face towards the altar, and all the others kneel at the 
same time, in their respectiv^e places. The hymn, 
Veni^ Creator Sjnritus is begun by the bishop, and con- 
tinued by the choir. After the first verse, the Bishop 
rises, and stands without his mitre, and with his face 
towards the altar, until the end of the hymn ; and in 
like manner all the others rise with the Bishop. Then 
all sit, and the Bishop having resumed the mitre, and 
seated himself on the platform of the altar, addresses 
them in the words of the Pontifical, or others, at dis- 
cretion. 

7. After the address, or before, as the Bishop may 
think proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned 
priest, who in it treats of ecclesiastical discipline, of the 
divine mysteries, and of the correction of abuses, accord- 
ing as the Bishop may think fit. After the discourse, 
any complaints that the clergy may think fit to put for- 
ward may be made. 

8. Then the Archdeacon reads aloud from the pulpit 
the Decrees of the Council of Trent, regarding residence 
and the profession of the faith, which all who are bound 

41 



482 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

to it make in the hands of the Bishop, according to the 
form prescribed in the Pontifical. 

Finally, all are charitably admonished to conduct 
themselves with edification in all respects during the 
Synod. The Bishop, after the admonition, gives the 
solemn blessing. 

9. On the second day of the Synod, the clergy assem- 
ble again in the church, and Mass being ended, the 
Bishop, dressed as on the first day, proceeds to the foot 
of the a,ltar, accompanied by the deacon and sub-deacon, 
who likewise are dressed as on the preceding day ; then 
kneeling before the faldstool, and having laid aside his 
mitre, he begins the antiphon, Propitius esto, which is 
continued by the choir. The VSth Psalm, Deus^ vene- 
runt gentes^ is then sung. After the first verse the 
Bishop sits down, resumes his mitre, and remains seated 
until the antiphon is repeated at the end of the Psalm. 

10. The antiphon having been repeated, the Bishop 
lays aside the mitre, rises, and turning towards the altar, 
says the prayer, Nostrorum, tibi^ &c., and the other 
prayers marked in the Pontifical. 

11. Then the Bishop ascends to the seat prepared for 
him on the platform of the altar. After this, the deacon 
presents the censer. The Bishop puts incense into the 
censer, then gives his blessing to the deacon, who after- 
wards proceeds to sing the Gospel, with the accustomed 
ceremonies ; the Bishop having taken off his mitre, stands 
at his seat turned towards the deacon. 

12. When the Gospel has been sung, the Bishop kisses 
the book, and is incensed. Then the Bishop kneels before 
his seat, and the clergy kneeling also at their places, he 
intones the hymn, Fe??^, Creator^ which is continued by 
the choir till the end, as on the first day. After the 



DIOCESAN SYA'ODS. 483 

first verse, the Bishop rises, and stands with the mitre on, 
his face being towards the altar ; the clergy Hkevvise 
stand until the end of the hymn. The hymn being sung, 
they sit in silence. Then the Bishop being seated, and 
having received the mitre, addresses the clergy in the 
words of the Pontifical, or others, at his discretion. 

13. After the address, or before it, if the Bishop 
thinks proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned 
priest, who treats of ecclesiastical discipline, or of other 
subjects at the pleasure of the Bishop. After this, the 
Archdeacon reads the decrees of the Holy See, or of 
Provincial Councils, which have not yet been promul- 
gated, or any others the Bishop may direct. After- 
wards the Diocesan Constitutions are read,* which are to 
be approved of by the Synod. Then the suffrages are 
taken, and those which are approved of, are confirmed. 
This being done, the Bishop rises, and gives his solemn 
blessing, as on the preceding day. Then all retire. 

14. On the third day, the clergy being assembled in 
the church, at the end of Mass, the Bishop dressed as on 
the preceding days, accompanied by the deacon and sub- 
deacon, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, in the 
middle of the altar, and laying aside his mitre, com- 
mences the antiphon, JExaudi nos, Deus, which is con- 
tinued by the choir. Then is intoned the 68th Psalm, 
jSalvum me fac^ Deus^ as on the first day, and the anti- 
phon is repeated at the end of it. After the first verse, 
the Bishop takes his seat in the middle of the altar, re- 
sumes his mitre, and remains sitting until the antiphon 
is repeated. When this is sung, he puts aside his mitre, 
rises, and turning towards the altar, says, Oremus^ Ad 
te^ Doiinine^ and the other prayers mentioned in the 
Pontifical. When these are said, he resumes his mitre, 



484 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

and sits on the faldstool prepared for him. Then the 
deacon, with the censer-bearer, comes to him, and the 
Bishop puts incense into the censer. Then he gives his 
blessing to the deacon, who proceeds to sing the Gospel 
at the accustomed place, with the usual ceremonies; the 
Bishop standing before his seat, without his mitre, and 
turned towards the deacon. 

15. After the Gospel, the book is brought to the 
Bishop to be kissed, and the deacon incenses him. The 
Bishop having taken off his mitre, kneels before his seat, 
turned towards the altar, and all the others likewise 
kneeling, he intones the hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, 
which is continued by the choir to the end. The first 
verse having been sung, the Bishop rises, turned towards 
the altar, without his mitre, and remains standing till 
the end. The hymn being ended, all sit in silence. 
Then the Bishop, being seated with his mitre, addresses 
the Synod, if he pleases, in the words which follow — 
Venerabiles fratres^ &c. ; or he may direct that some 
learned priest should deliver a discourse on the topics 
herein mentioned. 

16. Then the constitutions are read, which are to be 
approved by the Fathers; which being approved, if it 
seems good to them, and all things being concluded, the 
Bishop being seated, and having his mitre on, recom- 
mends himself to the prayers of all. When the names 
of those who ought to be present are read out, each one 
rises and answers, Adsum. A fine is inflicted on the 
absent. Then the Bishop, being still seated with his 
mitre on, admonishes those who are present, in the 
words of the Pontifical, Fratres dilectissimi^ &c., or m 
other words at discretion. 

17. Then the Bishop lays aside his mitre, and rising, 



CONFIRMATION. 485 

turned towards the altar, says the prayer, Nulla est, 
&c. ; afterwards, he gives his solemn blessing. Alter 
this, the Archdeacon, standing by his side, says, Proce- 
damus in pace^ to w^hich all answer. In nomine Christi. 
Then all rise, and accompany the Bishop to his house. 

18. If either on the first or second day all the busi- 
ness of the Synod be terminated, the Synod may be con- 
cluded in the manner here prescribed for the third day. 



CHAPTER XVI. 

SOLEMN ADMINISTRATION OF THE SACRAMENT OF 
CONFIRMATION. 

Article I. 

Things to he Prepared. 

1. On the Gospel side of the sanctuary, the Bishop's 
chair raised on a platform by two or three steps, with a 
canopy over it, and hangings behind it. 

2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., the amice, 
stole, cope, mitre, and crosier. 

3. On the side-table, the Pontifical book, the candle- 
stick with a candle, the vessel containing the holy chrism, 
on a small plate, a sufficient quantity of cotton to wipe 
the forehead (this cotton should be divided in small 
balls for greater convenience), a ewer and basin, to 
wash the Bishop's hands, clean towels on a plate, some 
slices of bread, neatly cut and arranged on another 
small plate, for the same purpose. 

4. Outside of the sanctuary, but near the rails, some 

41* 



486 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

benches for those who are to be confirmed ; all the men 
at the Epistle side, and the women at the Gospel side. 

5. Those who are to be confirmed should have been 
previously instructed and prepared by the sacrament of 
Penance; and it is advisable that they receive on the 
same day the Holy Communion, which may be done 
either at the Bishop's Mass, or at the High Mass, as 
may be deemed most convenient. Each ought to have 
a ticket, on which should be written the Christian and 
family name, which each should hold in the hand, when 
he kneels to receive Confirmation, and give to the clergy- 
man who attends the Bishop. This will answer the 
double purpose of suggesting the Christian name to the 
Bishop, and of recording it, together with the family 
name, in the Register. 

6. Where it is customary to have sponsors, these 
should be placed behind the persons to be confirmed, 
and should be no more than one for each, and of the 
same sex as the person to be confirmed. 

7. It is customary in some places to add another 
name on this occasion, especially if that which they have 
be not of some saint. The adopted name ought to be 
written after the name received at baptism, and called 
with it by the Bishop. 

8. It is proper that the solemn administration of Con- 
firmation should be made at High Mass, either before it 
commences, or, as it seems more convenient, especially 
if the persons to be confirmed receive communion at it, 
after Mass. 

9. There should be four boys dressed as those who 
usually attend at High Mass, one to hold the mitre, an- 
other the crosier, another the book, and another the 
candlestick. 



CONFIRMATION, 4:87 

Article II. 
The Administration of the Sacrament of Confirmation. 

1. At the stated hour, the Bishop, attended by the 
clergy and preceded by the acolytes, goes to the church ; 
on arriving before the altar, he makes a genuflection, 
kneels on the lowest step, and prays for a while with the 
clergy ; then he goes to his seat ; there he takes off his 
cape, washes his hands, puts on the above-mentioned 
vestments, which are carried before him by the acolytes, 
puts on the mitre, and having taken the crosier in his 
left hand, goes to the altar. 

If Confirmation be given after High Mass, the Bishop 
might assist at it in mitre and cope ; in this case, after 
he has been vested, he goes to the altar to begin Mass ; 
the priest who celebi'ates Mass ought to come to the 
sanctuary in his sacerdotal dress, walking immediately 
before the Bishop ; having made a genuflection, when 
the Bishop goes to his chair, the celebrant should go to 
his seat, and remain there sitting, until the Bisliop is 
dressed, then he goes to the altar, places himself at the 
left of the Bishop, and does every thing as directed for 
High Mass celebrated in presence of the Bishop. 

2. On arriving at the altar, the Bishop kneels, and 
although it is not prescribed by the Pontifical, the hymn, 
Veni^ Creator Spiritus^ and the prayer, Deus qui corda 

fidelium^ are generally sung. Then, either the Bishop 
or some other clergyman, if the Bishop chooses, gives 
an instruction on the holy sacrament of Confirmation. 

3. After the instruction, the persons to be confirmed 
are directed to kneel at the rails, holding the tickets in 
their hands j then the Bishop, turned towards them, 



488 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

takes off his mitre, sings, Spiritus Sa?ictus, &c., and all 
the rest as in the Roman Pontifical, with the prayer, 
Omnipotens sempiteriie Deus^ extending his hand on 
them. 

4. The prayer being ended, the Bishop puts on the 
mitre, takes the crosier in his left hand, and goes to the 
rails, where he anoints the foreheads of the persons 
whom he confirms, and having said. In nomi?ie JPatris, 
&c., the attending clergymen answer, Amen. One of 
them, at his right, holds the vessel with the chrism, the 
other, at his left, wipes the foreheads of those who have 
been anointed, with the cotton, which an acolyte holds 
on a plate near him ; and either he or another clergy- 
man takes the tickets from the hands of the persons to 
be confirmed, and suggests their Christian name to the 
Bishop. 

5. When the Bishop has confirmed the men at the 
Epistle side, and as he continues to confirm the women 
at the Gospel side, if there be more than one row of 
them, the men already anointed are directed to retire, 
walking one after the other, behind the last row, and 
those of the second row take the place of the first at the 
rails, those next to them advancing forward ; the same 
is done when the women at the Gospel side are anointed ; 
and so on successively. 

6. The Bishop having anointed all those who were to 
be confirmed, goes to his seat ; the acolytes carry to 
him the ewer with the basin, the towel and the plate 
with slices of bread ; he washes his hands, and in the 
mean while the choir sings, Goiifirma hoc Deus^ &c., or 
if there be no choir, the Bishop's attendants read it; 
then he returns to the altar, and turned towards it, 
sings the verses, Ostetide^ <fcc., the prayei-, Deus^ qui 



VISITATION OF PAKI6HES. 489 

apostolis^ &Q. ; afterwards, he turns towards tlie con- 
firmed, blesses them, as in the Pontifical, gives them 
the admonitions suggested by the Roman Pontifical, 
and tells them to say once, Ihelieve in God^ Our Father^ 
and Sail Mary. 

7. It is proper that the pastor of the congregation 
should say aloud, with the confirmed, the above prayers 
enjoined by the Bishop, before they leave the church. 

8. The Bishop returns to his seat, takes ofi" the sacred 
vestments, puts on the cape, and accompanied by the 
clergy, after a short prayer before the altar, retires. 



CHAPTER XVII. 
EPISCOPAL VISITATION OF PARISHES.* 

Article I. 

The bishop's Reception^ when he visits the Parishes of 

his Diocese. 

1. As it would be inconvenient in this country to 
make the solemn procession as directed in the Roman 
Pontifical, the essential part of the ceremony might be 
performed when he goes to the church to administer 
Confirmation, or the first time the faithful meet in it 
after his arrival in the parish. 

2. He proceeds, accompanied by the clergy, from the 
priest's house, if near the church, or from the sacristy to 
the church. On entering it, the clergy or the choir sing 
the response, JEcce Sacerdos magnus qui in diebus suis 

* Ex Pont. Eom., Part 8. 



490 PONTIFICAL CEKEMONIES. 

placuit Deo^ &c., in tlie office, Gonfessoris Pontificis ^ 
and the parish priest offers to the Bishop the sprinkle 
with holy water; the Bishop having received it, first 
applies to his own forehead, and then sprinkles the 
others; then the priest presents to him the boat, and the 
Bishop puts incense into the censer, and the parish priest 
incenses him. Afterwards, they all go before the high 
altar, there the Bishop kneels before the faldstool, or the 
praying-desk, placed below the steps, in the middle ; 
the clergy likewise kneel, and pray for a short time. In 
the mean time, the parish priest standing with his head 
uncovered, at the corner of the altar, on the Epistle 
side, sings what follows : 

V. Protector noster, aspice, Deus. 

R. Et respice in faciem Christi tui. 

V. Salvum fac servum tuum. 

R. Deus mens, sperantem in te. 

Y. Mitte ei, Domine, auxilium de Sancto. 

R. Et de Sion tuere eum. 

V. Nihil proficiat inimicus in eo. 

R. Et filius hominis non apponat nocere ei. 

V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. 

v. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Oremus. 

Omnipotens sempiterne Deus, qui facis mirabilia 
magna solus, praetende super hunc famulum tuum et 
cunctas congregationes illi commissas spiritum gratiae 
salutaris, et ut in veritate tibi complaceat, perpetuum ei 
rorem tuae benedictionis infunde. Per Christum Domi- 
num nostrum. R. Amen. 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 491 

3. The choir sings an antipbon in honor of the patron 
Saint; and whilst the verses are sung, tlie Bishop rises, 
goes up to the altar, kisses it in the middle, then goes 
to the Epistle side, and there standing, turned towards 
the altar, sings the prayer of the same saint. 

4. When the visit is the first that the Bishop makes 
to the parish, instead of the above prayer, Oinnipotens, 
ifec, the parish priest sings the following : 

Oeemus. 

Deus, omnium fidelium pastor et rector, famuhim tuum 
N. quem Ecclesias tuse praeesse voluisti, propitius re- 
spice, da ei quaesumus verbo et exemplo, quibus prseest 
proficere, ut ad vitam una cum grege sibi credito per- 
veniat sempiternam. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 
R. Amen. 

On the subsequent visits which the Bishop makes to 
the parishes of his diocese, instead of the above prayer, 
the following is said : 

Oremus. 

Deus humilium visitator, qui eos paterna dilectione 
consolaris, prsetende societati nostras gratiam tuam ; ut 
per eos, in quibus habitas, tuum in nobis sentiamus ad- 
ventum. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 

5. After the prayer, the Bishop gives the solemn bless- 
ing to the people, saying as usual, Sit nomen Domini 
henedictum^ &c., and the Indulgences are published. 

6. He then addresses the people, or, if he chooses, 
after the Gospel at High Mass. 

'7. High Mass is then celebrated as usual, with the 
ceremonies to be performed when the Bishop is present. 

8. After Mass, the Bishop puts on the amice, alb, 
cincture, and the black stole and cope, with the plain 



492 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

mitre, and standing near the altar, turned towards the 
people, intones the anthem, jSi ioiiquitates, and says al- 
ternately with the clergy, the Psalm, Deprofandis^ <fec., 
and after it, Mequieni^ &c., repeats the anthem. Si ini- 
quitaies observaveris^ J)omine, Domine.^ quis sustinebit? 
Then, having taken off the mitre, he says: 

Kyrie eleison. 

R. Kyrie eleison. 

Kyrie eleison. 

Pater noster, &c., which is continued secretly. 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

R. Sed libera nos a malo. 

V. In memoria seterna erit Justus. 

R. Ab audition e mala non timebit. 

Y. A porta inferi. 

R. Erue Domine animas eorum. 

V. Requiem seternam dona eis Domine. 

R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. 

Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

Y. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Okemus. 

Deus qui inter Apostolicos sacerdotes famulos tuos 
pontificali fecisti dignitate vigere ; praesta qusesumus, ut 
eorum quoque perpetuo aggregentur consortio. Per 
Christum Dominuni nostrum. R. Amen. 

9. The prayer being ended, if the grave-yard be ad- 
jacent to the church, the Bishop, preceded by the cross, 
the acolytes with the candlesticks, and two others with 
the censer, and the holy-water vase and sprinkle, and all 
the clergy, two by two, go in procession to the grave- 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 493 

yard ; but if it be not convenient to the church, they go 
to the middle of the church, wliere a cenotaph, with at 
least four candles, is placed, and the Bishop makes the 
absolution of the dead. The choir and clergy, while 
going, sing, Qui Lazarum resuscitasti a monumento 
fcetidum,^ Tu eis^ Domine^ dona requiem et locum in- 
dulgentice. V. Qui venturus esjudicare vivos et m,ortuos^ 
et sceculum. per ignem^ Tu eis^ &c. Then the anthem 
Si iniquitates is intoned, the Psalm De profundis is 
sung, and the anthem repeated. 

10. On arriving at the grave-yard, or at the cenotaph, 
the response Libera me Domine is sung, and repeated 
as usual ; the Bishop puts incense into the censer ; after 
the Kyrie eleison has been sung thrice, the Bishop sings 
Pater noster^ which is continued secretly, sprinkles and 
incenses as usual, and says : 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

R. Sed libera nos a malo. 

Y. In memoria seterna erunt justi. 

R. Ab audition e mala non timebunt. 

Y. A porta inferi. 

R. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. 

V. Requiem aeternam dona eis, Domine. 

R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. 

V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

V. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

O REMUS. 

Deus qui inter Apostolicos sacerdotes famulos tuos 
sacerdotali fecisti dignitate vigere, praesta qusesumus ut 
eorum quoque perpetuo aggregentur consortio. 

42 



494 PONTIFICAL CKREM0MIE8. 

Deus venisB largitor, et humaiise salutis amator, qugesU' 
nius clementiam tuam, ut nostrae congregationis fratres, 
propinquos et benefactores, qui ex hoc saeculo transie- 
runt, Beata Maria semper ^irgine intercedente, cum 
omnibus Sanctis tuis, ad perpetuse beatitudinis consor- 
tium pervenire concedas. 

Deus, cujus miseratione animse fidelium, requiescunt, 
famulis et famulabus tuis omnibus hie et ubique in 
Christo quiescentibus, da propitius veniam peccatorura, 
ut a cunctis reatibus absoluti tecum sine fine Isetentur. 
Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. 

V. Requiem aeternam dona eis Domine. 

R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. 

Then two singers sing Requiescant inpace. R. Amen, 

The Bishop, raising his hand, makes the sign of the 
cross on the grave-yard, or on the cenotaph, puts on his 
mitre, and returns to the sanctuary, saying alternate*ly 
with the clergy the Psalm Miserere. 

11. On arriving before the altar, the Bishop takes off the 
mitre, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and stand- 
ing before it in the middle, turned towards the altar, says ; 

Kyrie eleison. 

Christe eleison. 

Kyrie eleison. 

Pater noster, &q,. 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

R. Sed libera nos a malo. 

V. A porta inferi. 

R. Erue Domine, animas eorum. 

V. Domine exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 



VISITATION OF PAKISHK8. 



495 



Or EM us. 

Absolve, qusesumus, Domine aninias famulornm, 
famularumque tuaruin ab omni vinculo delictorara, ut 
in resurrectionis gloria inter sanctos et electos tuos resus- 
citati respirent. Per Ghristum Dominum nostrum. 
R. Amen. 

12. This being ended, the Bishop takes off his black 
cope and stole, and puts on a white cope and stole, and 
begins the visitation by the tabernacle, where the Blessed 
Sacrament is kept ; then proceeds to the baptismal font, 
to the place where the sacred oils are kept, also to that 
where the relics are kept; visits and inspects the altars, 
chapels, saciisty, the sacred vestments, the confessionals, 
and every thing relating to tlie divine worshii^ ; also the 
parish registers, the gi"ave-yard, &g. 



THE THINGS SUBJECT TO THE EPISCOPAL VISITATION AEE 
THE FOLLOWING: 



Tabernacle. 
Veil, and how many. 
Interior litiins. 
Corporal siirend ont 
Cihoriiim : bowl silver, 

gilt wit in. 
Processional canopy. 



Of the Holy Eucharist. 

Veil of ciborium. 
Particles. 
Fragments. 
Kenewed, how often. 
Key. 

Lamp, always burning. 
1 Umbrelhca for processions 



Pyx. for the sick. 
Burse. &c , for com- 
ninnion of the sick. 
Monstrance. 

Throne, for benediction. 
Portable lanterns. 
Huuieral veil. 



Font, 

Cover. 

Bails. 



Of the Baptistry. 

Water. 
Drain. 
Shell. 



Holy oils. 

Salt. 

Cloths. 



Ambry on the Gospel 
si'le of Sanctuary. 

Inscription (exterior and 
interior.) 



Of the Holy Oils. 

Vessel for holy oils. 
Cotton wet with oil, dry 

cotton above. 
Purple burse, or cover. 



How brought from the 

cathedral. 
Eenewal. 
Burning the old. 



In a public position. 
Pierced grating. 



Of the Confessionals. 

Thick veil. 
Pictures. 



Doors with bolt. 



496 



PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



Atnbry. 

Lining. 
Beliquaries. 



Of the Holy Belies. 

Names. 

Approbation. 

Exposition. 



Key. 

Proper Offices. 

Festivals. 



High Altar. 
Steps up to it. 
Steps upon it. 
Stone Altar. 
Consecration. 
■Wax-cloth. 
Altar-cloths. 
Their blessing. 
Crucifix. 



0/ the Altars. 

Candlesticks. 
Statues. 
Pictures. 
Altar- cards. 
Covering. 
Changing-clotbs. 
Antepeadiums, and how 
many. 



Canopy. 

Pred&lla. 

Credence. 

Piscina. 

Screen, or rails. 

Bell. 

Endowment 

Obligations. 



Choir. 

Large Crucifix, in a pro- 
minent place. 

Bishop's tlirone, steps, 
and canopy. 

Nave and aisles. 

Walls. 

Images of saints. 

Pulpit. 

Windows. 

Vaults. 

Seats. 

Division of sexes. 

Roof. 

Pavement. 

Ambry. 



Of the Ohv/rch itself. 

Aims-chests. 

Holy-water stoups. 

Doors. 

Churchyard. 

Cross therein. 

Trees. 

Bell-tower. 

Bells. 

Their blessing. 

Ladders, ropes. 

Roof. 

Spire. 

Weathercock. 

Pavement. 

Door. 

Key. 



Use of bells. 

Subterranean chapels. 

Patron. 

Improper epitaphs. 

Buiying-place for the 

clergy 
And for children. 
Titulars of church. 
Dedication. 
Both festivals. 
Office, how held. 
Other festivals. 
Indulgences. 
Forty hours' Prayer. 
Benediction, how often. 
Lights, how many. 



Ambries. 

Lavatory. 

Towels. 

Kneeling-desk. 

Prayers before and after 

Mass. 
Prayers for vesting. 
Altar-clotlis. 
Finger-cloths. 
Coinm union -cloths. 
Altar-breads, — where 

made. 
Cottas. 

Missal-markers. 
Bier. 
Pall. 

Book-stands. 
Books. 

Supplement to Missal. 
Ordo celebrandi. 
Eitus servandus. 
Missals, binding. 



Of the Sacristy. 

Chalices. 

Patens. 

Purifieators. 

Corporals and palls. 

Veils. 

Burses. 

Amices. 

Albs. 

Girdles. 

Stoles, maniples, and 
chasubles, of five co- 
lors, for feast-days, 
for ferias. 

Dalmatics. 

Tunics. 

Copes of different colors. 

Humf*ral veils. 

Altar-cushions and book- 
stands. 

Devout images. 

Cruets. 



Lavabo-dishes. 

Bells. 

Thurible and boat 

Processional Cross. 

Holy-water vessel and as- 
persory. 

Pax. 

Banners. 

Flower-vases. 

Triangular candlestick. 

Paschal candlestick. 

Door. 

Key. 

Safe. 

Pavement 

Windows. 

Wall. 

Roof. 

Table of obligations. 

Inventory of the afore- 
said. 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 



497 



INDEX OBSBRVANDOBTTM IN VISITATIONE PEBSONABTTM. 



Name. 

Surname. 

Country. 

Ag«. 

"When appointed. 

Profession of faith. 

Income. 

Ohligations satisfied. 

Divine office. 

Faculties. 

Parish books and papers. 

Residence. 

Mass, how often. 

Sermons. 

Pablication of feasts, 

fasts, pastorals. 
Catechism. 
Vespers. 
Processions. 



Proper feasts. 

Customs. 

Montlily conferences. 

Server.** at Mhss. 

Blessing of ashes, candles, 
palms. 

Holy Week. 

Blessing houses. 

Holy sepulchre. 

Blessing font and Pas- 
chal candle. 

Pious pictures. 

The long Litanies. 

Ceremonies in High and 
Low Mass. 

The administration of the 
Sacraments. 

Baptism, how long de- 
layed. 



Given in private houses. 

Goilfiithers and godmo- 
thers. 

Confessions, where, at 
what time. 

Instructions for first Com- 
munion. 

Sick persons, and how 
often. 

Visiting sick, commenda- 
tion. 

Marriages, how, where. 

Other functions. 

Lent sermons. 

Funerals. 

Moral and dosmaatic theo- 
logy. 

Books, what studied. 



13. He gives Confirmation at tlie time he deems 
most convenient, as directed in the foregoing chap- 
ter. 

14. When the Bishop has completed, the visitation, he 
goes in his usual dress to the church, and, standing be- 
fore the altar, at the Epistle side, he says the Psalm, 
De profundis^ Requiem ceternam^ the anthem, Si ini' 
quitates^ Pater noster. 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

R. Sed libera nos a malo. 

V. A porti inferi. 

R. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. 

V. Requiescant in pace. 

R. Amen. 

V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

42* 



498 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Oeemus. 

Deus cujus miseratione animse fidelium requiescunt, 
famulis et famulabus tuis omnibus hie et ubique in 
Christo quiescentibus, da propitius veniam peccatorum, 
ut a cunctis reatibus absoluti, tecum sine fine laetentur. 
Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 

R. Amen. 



«> 



APPENDIX. 



CHAPTER I. 
FORTY-HOURS* EXPOSITION. 

Article I. 
Things to he prepared for the Mass of the Exposition, 

1. The picture or image of the high alto.r, as well as 
the walls near it, should be covered with precious 
drapery ; but representing nothing profane. 

2. The altar ought to be prepared as well as possible. 
No statues or relics of saints should be placed on or 
about it. In the most conspicuous place of it, should be 
erected the throne, or exposition place for the Blessed 
Sacrament, with a pall or corporal on it. It should be 
surrounded with a sufficient number of candles near it, 
besides those that are on the steps of the altar. The 
front altar-veil must always be white, although the Mass 
may require another color. 

3. On the side-table, besides what is usually necessary 
for High Masses, should be a cope of the color of the 
vestments for the celebrant, the book containing the 
Litany and prayers, the remonstrance covered with a 
white veil, and the Host to be consecrated fixed in the 
little half-moon that holds it, a stole for the priest who 
is to expose the Blessed Sacrament. 



500 APPENDIX. 

4. In the sanctuary, a bench covered with a cloth or 
carpet for the clergy who remain at the adoration. 

5. In the sacristy, the usual vestments for the cele- 
brant and ministers. 

6. In any convenient place, the processional canopy, 
the umbrella, the processional cross, two censers with 
their boats, candles for the procession, and two books 
with the Litany for the chanters. 

Aeticle II. 
Of the Mass for the Exposition. 

1. The Mass for the exposition and reposition, is to be 
sung at the altar where the exposition is made. The 
Mass should be the solemn Votiva of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, with the Gloria and Credo^ and with the com- 
memoration of the Sunday, and of the feasts of either 
double or semi-double rite. But on Sundays of first or 
second class, on festivals of double rite of first or second 
class, on Ash- Wednesday, on Monday, Tuesday, and 
Wednesday in Holy Week, during the whole octave of 
Easter, Pentecost, and Epiphany, on the vigils of Christ- 
mas and Pentecost, and within all privileged octaves, 
that exclude the celebration of vestivals of first and 
second class, either translated or falling on those days, 
the Mass of the Blessed Sacrament cannot be sung, but 
the Mass occurring on that day is to be celebrated with 
the prayer of the Blessed Sacrament, &ub unica conclu- 
sione^ with the Preface, de Nativitate^ if the Mass of the 
day has not a proper preface ; and should those festivals 
fall on Sunday, the prayer of the Blessed Sacrament is 
to be said, Suh unica corvdusione^ with that of the Saint, 



FORTY HouKs' i:xposrnoN. 501 

and the commemoration of the Sunday is to be made 
afterwards, under its proper conchision. 

2. This Mass is celebrated as other High Masses, hav- 
ing nothing particular, except that another large Host 
is to be consecrated with that of the Mass. 

3. The acolytes, who hold the candles for the eleva- 
tion, must not leave the sanctuary before the consecrated 
Host is placed in the remonstrance ; and before they go, 
they must make a genuflection on both knees. 

4. The acolytes should light all the candles of the altar 
prepared for the exposition before the elevation. 

5. After the celebrant has consumed the precious 
blood, the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflection, 
exchange places, make another genuflection ; the master 
of ceremonies carries the remonstrance to the altar ; and 
the celebrant, assisted by the deacon, places the sacred 
Host in the remonstrance, the deacon shuts it and places 
it in the middle of the corporal ; the deacon and sub- 
deacon again exchange places. During the remaining 
part of the Mass, the ministers omit the usual kisses in 
giving or receiving any thing from the celebrant. 

6. The celebrant in the usual place makes the ablu- 
tion of his fingers; after which, the ministers make a 
genuflection and exchange places; the sub-deacon wipes 
the chalice, and covers it as usual, leaving the corporal 
spread on the altar, taking care to retire a little, whilst 
the celebrant says, Dominus vohiscumj he then makes 
a genuflection on the platform, and on the lowest step, 
as he passes before the Blessed Sacrament, and having 
brought the chalice to the side-table, goes to his place 
behind the deacon. 

v. The celebrant having given the chalice to the sub- 
deacon, makes a genuflection, and goes to read the Com- 



502 APPENDIX. 

munio; then he returns to the middle, kisses the altar, 
makes a genuflection with the deacon, turns to the peo- 
ple from the Gospel side, so as not to turn his back to 
the Blessed Sacrament ; says, Dominus vobisciim, makes 
again a genuflection with the ministers, goes to sing the 
prayers; after having sung them, returns to the middle, 
kisses the altar, makes a genuflection with the ministers, 
turns to the people as before, says, Dominus vobiscian; 
in the mean while, the deacon makes another genuflec- 
tion, turns to the people in the same manner as the cele- 
brant, and sings, Ite^ missa est. Then the celebrant 
and the ministers make a genuflection ; the celebrant 
says, Placeat, &c., and the ministers kneel on the plat- 
form for the benediction. 

8. The celebrant having said the Placeat^ kisses the 
altar, says, JBenedicat vos^' instead of bowing, makes a 
genuflection, turns as for the Dorrdnus vohiscum, blesses 
the people, without completing the circle, and without 
making another genuflection, turns on his left, says the 
Gospel, does not make the sign of the cross on the altar, 
but he makes it on his forehead, mouth, and breast, and 
saying, JEt verbum caro, he makes a genuflection to the 
Blessed Sacrament. 

9. After Mass, the ministers go up to the platform at 
the side of the celebrant, and having made a genuflec- 
tion on one knee, go directly by the side steps to the 
bench. 

10. Towards the end of Mass, the acolytes give the 
candles to the clergy and light them ; the two censer- 
bearers prepare their censers, and whilst the celebrant 
reads the last Gospel, the latter go to the altar and 
make a genuflection on both knees. 



FORTY HOCKS EXPOSITION. 603 

Akticle III. 
Of the Procession for the Exposition. 

1. The celebrant and tlie ministers, on ai'riving at the 
bench, take off their maniples ; the celebrant, moreover, 
takes off his cliasuble and puts on the cope, puts incense 
in both censers, without blessing it, the deacon pre- 
senting the incense-boat, and goes Avith them to the 
middle, below the steps, where he makes with them a 
genuflection on both knees, kneels on the lowest step, 
and incenses the Blessed Sacrament with three double 
throws. 

2. In the mean time, the master of ceremonies brings 
from the side-table the long veil, and puts it on the 
celebrant, after he has given the censer to the deacon. 
The censer-bearers go to each side of the altar, and the 
acolytes give the canopy to those who are to carry it. 

3. The celebrant having incensed the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, goes up to the second step with the deacon and 
sub-deacon ; the celebrant and the sub-deacon kneel, and 
the deacon goes up to the altar, makes a genuflection 
on one knee, takes the Blessed Sacrament without bow- 
ing, and standing gives it to the celebrant ; then the 
deacon makes a genuflection, and at the same time bows, 
goes to the celebrant's right, who, with the ministers, 
goes up to the platform, and they turn towards the 
people in such a manner that the deacon be at the right, 
and the sub-deacon at the left of the celebrant, whose 
cope they raise on each side; a priest in surplice holds 
the umbrella opened over the Blessed Sacrament, and 
the singers intone the Pange Lingua. 

4. The procession moves in the following order : the 



504 APPENDIX. 

cross-bearer, in surplice, having on each side the acolytes 
with their candlesticks, goes to the lower part of the 
sanctuary near the railing, and stands turned to the 
altar. When the chanters intone the Pange Lingua, 
they turn towards the people, without making any 
genuflection, and begin to move; the clergy, two by 
two, make a genuflection on both knees, follow thera, 
carrying their candles outside — that is, those who are at 
the right carry them in their right hand, and those at 
the left side, in their left hand. 

5. The celebrant, between the deacon and sub-deacon, 
who raise his cope on each side, preceded by the two 
censer-bearers, who gently swing their censers, and sur- 
rounded by four or six acolytes, who carry lighted can- 
dles on each side of the canopy, walks in the last place, 
reciting, in a low voice, psalms and hymns alternately 
with the ministers, and the choir continues to sing the 
Pange Lingua. 

6. The procession having returned, the acolytes put 
their candlesticks on the side-table, and the cross-bearer 
leaves the cross at its place, the clergy divide in two 
lines at each side of the altar, and as the Blessed Sacra- 
ment approaches, they all kneel down. The censer- 
bearers, on arriving near the altar, do not swing their 
censers any more, but stop at each side of it, and remain 
there standing. The celebrant stops at the lowest step 
of the altar, and there standing, gives the Blessed Sacra- 
ment to the deacon, who receives it kneeling on both 
knees, and turned a little to the Epistle side. Then the 
celebrant kneels, and takes oflT the long veil. The dea- 
con places the Blessed Sacrament on the altar, if there 
be another priest to place it on th^ throne ; otherwise the 
deacon himself places it thereon, makes a genuflection 



FORTY HOUES' KXPOSinON. 605 

on the platform, without bowing his head, and goes 
down by one side to the right of the celebrant. 

7. Those who carried the canopy, having left it at a 
convenient place, receive candles, and kneel down, form- 
ing a semcircle before the altar, if they be clergymen ; 
but if laymen, they kneel outside of the chancel. 

8- After the deacon has placed the Blessed Sacrament 
on the throne, and returned to the right of the celebrant, 
the chanters intone Tantum ercfo. At the verse Geni- 
tori the celebrant rises with the ministers, puts incense 
into the censer, without blessing it, the deacon present- 
ing the incense-boat, and the sub-deacon raising the 
celebrant's cope at his right, while he incenses the 
Blessed Sacrament with three double throws. After 
the incensing, the censer-bearer having received the 
censer from the deacon, goes to the middle, makes a 
genuflection, with the second censer-bearer, and both 
cai-ry their censers back to the sacristy. 

9, After the Tantum ergo^ the chanters do not sing the 
verse Fan&m de coeio^ but they go in the middle, kneel, 
and sing the Litany. At the end of it the celebrant in- 
tones Fater tioster^ the rest of which being recited 
secretly, the chantei's intone the Psalm Deus in adjuto- 
riwnj after it, the celebrant, kneeling, sings in a ferial 
tone the verses from the book, which the ministers hold 
on each side ; he then rises, and standing, sings with his 
hands joined, Dorninus vohiscmn^ and the prayers that 
follow ; these being ended, he kneels, says again Domi- 
nus vobiscum^ and the chanters, JExaudiat nos omnipo- 
tens et rnisericors Dominiis; the choir answers, Amen ; 
the celebrant subjoins, Fidelium animoe, &c., without 
making the sign of the cross ; the choir answers, Amen. 

43 



606 APPENDIX. 

Then all the clergy pray for a short time in silence ; the 
acolytes go to the middle with their candlesticks, kneel 
on both knees, rise, and walk to the sacristy, followed, 
as usual, by the clergy and the sacred ministers, who all 
make in the middle a genuflection on botii knees ; the 
latter, when at a proper distance from the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, put on their caps. 

If, for want of a sufficient number of persons, or for 
any other cause, the procession cannot be made, the 
celebrant, and the deacon and sub-deacon, after Mass, 
go to the bench, as has been said above, take off their 
maniples, the celebrant taking off also his chasuble, and 
putting on the cope; go to the altar, make a genuflec- 
tion on both knees below the last step, then kneel on it 
and after a short prayer, rise ; the celebrant puts incense 
into the censer, and kneeling, incenses with three double 
throws the Blessed Sacrament ; then the deacon, or 
another priest in surplice and stole, making the usual 
genuflections, places it on the throne; the choir sings 
Pange Lingua; at the vei'se Genitori the celebrant 
puts incense again into the censer, and incenses, as usual, 
the Blessed Sacrament. After the hymn is finished, the 
chanters sing the Litany immediatisly. The same is to 
be done at the reposition of the Blessed Sacrament, ex- 
cept that the hymn Pange Lingua is sung after the 
verse Domine exaudi orationem ineani, and the bene- 
diction is given as usual. 

10. After the clergy have left the sanctuaiy, the 
bench or stool prepared for the purpose is placed near 
the last step of the altar in the middle, and the two 
clergymen destined to begin the adoration, dressed in 
surplice (and stole if they be priests), kneel before it, 
and remain there for the space of an hour, after which 



FORTY hours' EXPOSmON. 507 

two others go to take their place, aud so on till the ex- 
position is finished. 

11. There should be constantly, day and night, during 
the exposition, at least twenty lights ; and when the 
church is shut in the night, at least ten of them should 
be candles and ten lamps. 



Article IV. 
Of the Mass pro pace. 

1. Every thing is to be prepared for this Mass as for 
others, but the color of the vestments is to be violet. 

2. This Mass ought to be sung on the second day of 
the forty-hours' exposition, with the assistance of deacon 
and sub-deacon. It should not be sung at the altar 
where the Blessed Sacratnent is exposed, or where it is 
usually kept in the tabernacle. However, as in most of 
our churches in this country there is but one altar, the 
Mass here spoken of must necessarily be celebrated at 
the altar of the exposition. The assistance of the dea- 
con and sub-deacon must be dispensed with where there 
is only one clergyman. 

3. The Mass, pro pace^ is sung without Gloria and 
Credo^ and without any other commemoration besides 
that of the Blessed Sacrament, which is said, Sub unica 
conclusione. At the elevation, the little bell is not to 
be rung. However, if it is celebrated on a Sunday, the 
Credo is to be said. 

4. The days on which this Mass, ji^ro jt>ae€, cannot be 
said, are the same as mentioned above for that of the 
Blessed Sacrament, n. 1, art, ii. When any other is 
said in its place, the prayer, pro pace^ is to be said, Sub 



508 APPENDIX. 

unica conclusione^ with that of the current Mass, and 
the commemoration of the Blessed Sacrament is omitted. 
5. All private Masses celebrated during the exposi- 
tion are of the current office, with the commemoration 
of the Blessed Sacrament after the others prescribed for 
that day by the Rubrics ; and if a feast of the first or 
second class be then celebrated, the commemoration of 
the Blessed Sacrament is omitted ; the little bell is not 
to be rung ; if, on the days of the exposition, votive 
Masses are permitted by the Rubrics, it is proper that 
all private Masses should be of the Blessed Sacrament, 
without Gloria and without Credo^ with the Preface de 
N'atwitate, 

Article V. 
Things to he prepared for the Mass of the deposition. 

1. In the sacristy and on the side-table, every thing 
as for the first day. 

2. On the altar, the key of the tabernacle, the Missal 
on its stand, the cards and the cross, according to the 
established custom. All the candles are to be lighted 
before Mass. 

3. In the sanctuary, the bench or stools placed in the 
middle for the adoration are to be removed. 

Article VI. 

Of the Mass for the Meposition. 

1. We think it proper to mention here some general 
rules, before we speak of the ceremonies to be observed 
in Masses celebrated at the altars on which the Blessed 
Sacrament is exposed. 



FORTY hours' EXPOSITION. 609 

2. These rules are the following: during Mass, the 
genuflections are made only on one knee, except when 
the priest first arrives at the altar, and when he leaves it 
to return to the sacristy ; in both these cases, he makes 
tiie genuflection on both knees. 

The usual reverences to salute the clergy are omitted, 
by the celebrant and ministers, and by every one else. 

The ministers and all others in giving any thing to the 
celebrant, or receiving it trotn him, do not kiss it or his 
hand ; but the sub-deacon, after the Epistle, kisses the 
hand in receiving his blessing ; likewise the deacon when 
he goes to receive bis blessing before he sings the Gos- 
pel ; at the Offertory, when he presents the paten to the 
celebrant, he kisses both the paten and his liand, as also 
when he gives it to him at the end of the Pater noster. 
The celebrant, at the end of the Gospel, sung by the 
deacon, kisses the Missal, as usual. 

3. The sacred ministers being vested, go from the 
sacristy to the sanctuary as usual ; the acolytes arriving 
before the altar, make a genuflection on both knees, and 
a profound bow, retire on each side, and wait for the 
ministeis. The clergy, as they arrive at the middle, 
make likewise a genuflection on both knees, with a pro- 
found revei'ence, and go to their respective places, with- 
out bowing to each other. The sacred ministers uncover 
their heads, as soon as they can see the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, carry their caps till they enter the sanctuary, then 
they give them to the master of ceremonies, and on ar- 
riving before the last step of the altar, they, with the 
acolytes and the master of ceremonies, make a geuflec- 
tion on both knees, and a profound bow, and Mass is 
begun as usual. 

4. Having made the confession, they go up to the 

43* 



510 APPENDIX. 

altar, without making a genuflection, where they make 
a genuflection on one knee. The deacon and sub-deacon 
should observe, that in making the genuflections, they 
must not place their hands on the altar, this being 
allowed only to the celebrant. When the latter has 
said, Oramus te Domine^ they retire a little to the Gos- 
pel side, turned to the Epistle side, to put incense into 
the censer ; and before the censer-bearer goes up for this 
purpose, he makes below the last step a genuflection, 
bending one knee ; the deacon does not kiss the spoon, 
nor the celebrant's hand, as has been observed before 
for all similar cases. 

5. The incense having been blessed, the censer-bearer 
retires to his place, making a genuflection, and the cele- 
brant and ministers go down to the second step, taking 
care not to turn their back to the Blessed Sacrament ; 
on which account the celebrant and the sub-deacon go 
down by the Gospel side, and the deacon by that of the 
Epistle, kneel on the edge of the platform ; there the 
celebrant having received the censer from the deacon, 
without the usual kisses, and made a profound bow, in- 
censes the Blessed Sacrament with three double throws, 
the ministers raising, in the mean while, his chasuble on 
each side. Then they rise, go up to the altar, making a 
genuflection on one knee, and incense the altar, as usual. 

If, according to the custom established in some 
churches, the cross has been placed on the altar, it must 
not be incensed. (.Deer. S. B. (7., 29 Sept., 1738.) 

6. After the incensing, the celebrant goes down to the 
first step, or below them all, according to the construc- 
tion of the altar, and there, turned towards the people, 
is incensed by the deacon, who turns towards him. 
Then he goes tp read the Introit, &c. 



FORTY hours' EXPOSITION. 611 

7. After the choir have done singing the Kyrie^ the 
celebrant with the ministers goes to the middle as usual, 
makes with them a genuflection, and intones the Gloria; 
the ministers make again a genuflection, go to his side, 
recite the rest of the hymn, make a genuflection, and by 
the side steps go to the bench, where they sit without 
their caps; after it is sung, they go to the middle, make 
a genuflection below the steps, and go, one behind the 
other, without making any other genuflection. The 
celebrant, after arriving on the platfoi-m and kissing the 
altar, with his shoulders turned a little towards the Gos- 
pel side, sings the Dominus vobiscum; then returns to 
the middle, makes a genuflection with the ministers, 
and goes to sing the prayers as usual ; after which, the 
sub-deacon sings the Epistle, having made the usual 
genuflections before the altar, then asks the celebrant's 
blessing, kisses his hand, and carries the Missal to the 
Gospel side, as usual. 

8. During this time, the celebrant says the Munda cor 
meutn^ makes a genuflection before and after, then reads 
the Gospel ; and the deacon takes the book to the altar, 
having made a genuflection in the middle on the lowest 
step, and again on the platform. 

9. When the celebrant has read the Gospel, he turns 
in his place, and puts in the incense as at n. 4 ; then all 
three go to the middle on the platform, the sub-deacon 
descends to the bottom of the steps, and the deacon 
kneels to say the Munda cor meum. The celebrant, 
at the proper time, gives him his blessing, who, having 
kissed his hand, rises, both make a genuflection, the cele- 
brant goes to the Epistle side, the deacon goes to the 
floor, makes a genuflection with the others, and proceeds 
as usual to sing the Gospel. At the end, the sub-deacon 



512 APPENDIX. 

takers the Missal to the celebrant to kiss, without mak- 
ing a genuflection before, comes down from the altar 
(which he must do without turning his back to the 
Blessed Sacrament), and the deacon incenses the cele- 
brant as usual. 

10. After incensing the celebrant, all three go to the 
middle, one behind the other, make a genuflection, and 
the celebrant intones the Credo j at the end, the minis- 
ters make a genuflection, and go to recite it with the 
celebrant. Then all three make a genuflection and go 
to the bench, as was mentioned at n. V. 

11. At the Crucifixus^ the deacon takes the burse 
from the side-table, bows to the celebrant only, goes to 
the middle, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and 
again on the platform, and spreads the corporal in the 
usual manner, makes a genuflection, and returns by the 
side of the altar to the right of the celebrant. 

12. At the end of the Credo^ the ministers go to the 
altar, as at n. 7. The celebrant sings the Dominus vo- 
bismcm^ makes a genuflection, and says Oremus, After 
which the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflection, 
and go, the first to the celebrant's right, and the other 
to the side-table, in the usual manner, for the chalice, 
which he brings to the altar, making there a genuflec- 
tion. The deacon presents the paten and chalice with 
the usual kiss. In like manner the sub-deacon presents 
the cruets, then takes the paten, and makes a genuflec- 
tion, first on the platform, and again on the lowest step. 
He does not, however, make a genuflection when the 
celebrant kneels on the platform to incense the Blessed 
Sacrament.— aS. O. B., 11 Feb., 1764. 

13. After the oblation of the chalice, the deacon gives 
the insense as at n. 4. And the celebrant, without mak- 



FORTY hours' EXPOSITION. 513 

ing a genuflection, incenses the offerings; the deacon 
does not remove the chalice from the middle of the cor- 
poral. When this is done, they descend to the second 
step, kneel on the edo^e of the platform, and inceni^e the 
Blessed Sacrament, the altar as at n. 5, and the cele- 
brant as at n. 6, and in the same place washes his hands 
according to the Rubric of the Missal on Good Friday, 
and the S. C. R., 22d August, 1682 ; then he returns to 
the middle, makes a genuflection, and says the SuscijJe 
fSancta Triaitas^ &c. 

14. When the deacon has incensed the celebrant, he 
incenses the choir as usual, then the sub-deacon, who 
makes a genuflection, and then turns for this purpose a 
little towards the Gospel side. This done, the deacon 
gives the censer to the censer-bearer, goes up to the 
second step, makes a genuflection, and turns in the same 
manner as the sub-deacon, to be incensed, and again 
makes a genuflection. 

15. When the celebrant has said the Suscipe Sancta 
Trinitas^ he kisses the altar, makes a genuflection, and 
turns, as at the Domimis voMscum, to say the Orate 
Fratresj but he does not make a perfect circle ; then he 
retui"ns to the middle, makes a genuflection, and con- 
tinues Mass. 

16. At the Sanctus^ the acolytes go out with torches, 
and without bowing, kneel down till after communion, 
as they did on the first day. From this to the end of 
Mass, they observe exactly what is prescribed for the 
first day, and make preparations towards the end for the 
procession. 



514 APPENDIX. 



Article VII. 
From the Litany to the end of the Forty Sours. 

1. At the end of Mass, the ministers return to the 
bench, vest, do not put in incense, but go to the middle, 
make a genuflection on both knees, and kneel on the 
lowest step ; then the singers sing the Litany, as on the 
first day, to Domine^ exaudi orationem^ &c., inclusive. 

2. At Peccatores^ the acolytes give the candles to the 
clei'gy, and Hght them; the censer-bearers prepare their 
censers, and approach the altar with the usual genuflec- 
tions. 

3. After the celebrant has said the Domine exaudi^ 
&c., he rises with the ministers, puts incense into the 
censers, Avithout blessing it, and kneeling, incenses three 
times the Blessed Sacrament ; and the master of cere- 
monies gives him the veil. 

4. After incensing the Blessed Sacrament, the censer- 
bearers place themselves on each side of the altar, and 
the deacon or a priest with surplice and stole, with the 
usual genuflections, takes it from the repository ; if it is 
a deacon, without placing it upon the corporal, he places 
it in the celebrant's hands, who receives it after a genu- 
flection ; and as soon as he has delivered it, the deacon 
makes in turn a genuflection. If another priest takes it 
from the repository, he places it upon the corporal, 
makes a genuflection and retires ; then the deacon goes 
upon the platform, and takes it as said above, and as to the 
remainder, observes what is prescribed in the ceremonies 
and rite of the procession. 

5. When the procession has returned, and the cele- 
brant has arrived at the lowest step of the altar, the 



FORTY hours' EXPOSITION. 515 

deacon makes a genuflection, receives from him the 
Blessed Sacrament ; the celebrant then immediately 
makes a genuflection, and takes ofl" the veil. The dea- 
con places the remonstrance on the corporal, in the 
middle of the altar, and returns to the right of the cele- 
brant, making the usual genuflections. 

6. As soon as the deacon returns to the right of the 
celebrant, the singers intone the Tantum ergo; at the 
Genitori incense is given, and the Blessed Sacrament is 
incensed ; and after the verse Panem de ccelo (to which 
an Alleluia is added during paschal time, and the 
octave of Corpus Christie according to the Decree, S. C. 
R., 10 Jan., 1705), the celebrant rises without making 
another genuflection, or saying Dorninus vohiscum^ 
(Dec/ee, S. C. R., 16th June, 1663 ; 28th Sept. 1675 ; 2d 
Aug. and 6th Sept., 1698), and sings the prayers with 
his hands joined, and the ministers hold the book. 

7. After the prayers, he kneels, and after saying 
Fidelium animoe^ as on the first day, he puts on the 
veil, and goes upon the platform (the ministers place 
themselves at each side of him, on the edge of the plat- 
form), makes a genuflection, with both his hands covered 
with the veil he takes the Blessed Sacrament, and blesses 
the people in the usual manner ; the ministers, bowing 
a little, lift the border of the cope. After having placed 
the remonstrance upon the corporal, he makes a genu- 
flection (at the same time takes ofl" the veil), and returns 
with the ministers to the lowest step, in such a manner 
as not to turn his back to the Blessed Sacrament, and 
remains there kneeling. The deacon immediately, or a 
priest with a stole, observing the usual ceremonies, puts 
the Blessed Sacrament in the tabernacle, which must be 
on the altar where the exposition is made, and the con- 



616 APPENDIX. 

secrated host must be consumed during Mass, either the 
same morning or the following. (I7istruct. Clement.) 

8. Whilst the Blessed Sacrament is put away, the aco- 
lytes take their candles from the side-table, and go to 
the middle; the master of ceremonies takes the minis- 
ters' caps, and at the end of the function gives them a 
signal to rise ; all make a genuflection together on the 
floor ; he presents the caps, and they go, preceded by the 
censer-bearers and acolytes, to the sacristy, to disrobe 
as usual. 

As it frequently happens that not the celebrant, but a 
Bishop, terminates the function, it may be necessary to 
point out what is to be observed after Mass. At the 
end of the last Gospel, the celebrant, with the ministers 
at each side of him, goes to the middle of the altar, 
makes a genuflection on one knee, without bowing the 
head, and then goes down to the floor, in such a manner 
as not to turn his back to the Blessed Sacrament. When 
they are at the bottom of the steps, they all make a 
genuflection together on both knees, together witli a 
prostration; the acolytes with their candles, and the 
master of ceremonies, do the same as they did in the 
beginning of Mass. Then they all depart with their 
heads uncovered, and do not take their caps until they 
are out of sight of the Blessed Sacrament. When ihey 
arrive in the sacristy, the ministers take ofl" their mani- 
ples ; and if they are to assist the Bishop, and their vest- 
ments be not white, they take them ofl" and put on 
white. (Decree S. C. R., 20th Sept., 1806.) Then they 
assist the Bishop to vest, and proceed to the altar, pre- 
ceded by the acolytes with their candles, and followed 
by the train-bearer and mitre-bearer. When they 
come in sight of the Blessed Sacrament, the deacon 



FORTY hours' EXPOSITION. 617 

takes off the Bishop's mitre, and after making a genu- 
flection on both knees, both kneel on the first step, on 
which the master of ceremonies will put a cushion for 
the Bishop. The function is then continued as pre- 
scribed above, and the mitre-bearer during the benedic- 
tion kneels down, 

9. The greater part of the ceremonies prescribed in 
this chapter, have been taken from the 6th volume of 
the Collection of Decrees of the S. C. R., Part II., in 
which Gardellini explains the instructions of Clement 
XL on the Forty Hours, 

44 



518, DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



CHAPTER IV. 

DIFFERENT INTONATIONS FOR VESPERS AND 
SOLEMN MASS. 

It was deemed advisable to add, at the end of this 
Manual, the different intonations for Vespers and Sol- 
emn Mass. 

It may be well to remark that the priest who offi- 
ciates or celebrates, if capable of regulating his voice, 
or intoning Deus in adjutorhmi., &c., or in commenc- 
ing a prayer, &c., should take a moderate pitch, 
neither too high nor too low — such a note, for instance, 
that would answer that of 50^ or la of the organ, would 
suit the generality of voices of the choir that is to sing 
the responses. 

Deus in adjutoeium, &c. 

For Festivals. 



-B— ■ — ! — a — s — H^i^— ♦— sa^ — & — b^^^^^b — « — -a — a — H~ 
■-H ' ' ' ' n 



y. Deus in ad-ju- to- ri-um meum in- ten -de. 
-|| -a- — ^H^ ^^^, — ♦— "V-H — S — I ^^^^HB — a — a-^^ 



R. Do-mi-ne ad ad-juvandum me fes-ti - na. 



-[^- — H — »— a^, — ■ — WH^^ — H^, — B — ^— a — I — a — I, — ■ — ♦— ^— a- 



Glo - ri - a Pa-tri, et Fi - 11 - o, et Spi- ri- tu- i 
Sanc-to. Si - cut e - rat in prin-ci - pi - o, et nunc 



FOK VESPEKS AND SOLEMN MASS. 



519 



-fe— ^— » — a^— «-[-igH ~^ — ♦—SB —! -" — ♦-■ — ■ — I - -a — " — ^ n 



et semper, et in ssec-u-la scec - u- lo-rum. Amen. 



:^ 



=^— ■- 



Al- le - lu - ia. 



During Paschal time. 



R-«— g-j' -" — »-H ~"H- »-"— ^ -"i » ■ — [{ • 



La - us ti - bi Do- mine, rex je-ternse glo - ri- S9. 
Ferial Intonation. 



^ 



-■ — a- 



-S #-B — 1- 



V. De-US in a,d-ju-to - rium meum in-ten-de. 



^— -H »— a — I — H — I — ^♦— a — B — A — B- 



Do - mi-ne ad ad-juvandum me fes - ti - na. 



_^__^_^ 



-S — — 3- 



{p«-^r=s- 



fe 



b 



Glo - ri- a Pa-tri. &c. Al - le - lu - ia. 

Laus tihi Donime^ as above. 

The Chapter 

is snng on the note Z>o, recto tono^ all tlie way through, 
except the last word, which is sung on la^ sol, la. 



yE^ 



Ec-ce sa- cerdos magnus, &c. et in tem-po-re 



620 



DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



BS 



-|^4— ■ — i^ ♦— ■ 



-■— ♦ 



:?=:<i3c 



i - ra-cuQ-di- se fac-tus est re-con- ci - li - a - ti - o. 



:^— r-g 



E. De-o gra-ti-as. 
or JLaus tibi, as above. 



The Verses 

Immediately after the Eym^i. 



■die: 



V. Grlo-ri-a et ho-no-re co-ro-nasti e-um Domine 



e; E. Et consti-tuisti ... tu 



a- 



-^M^gjgi=^ : 



rum. 



The Veeses 

Within the Commemorations. 



V. Di - ri-ga-tur Do-mi-ne o - ra - ti - o me - a. 



E. Si-cut in-censum in conspectu tu - o. 

The tones for Domimcs voUscum and for the prayers 
are marked hereafter at page gjjjj : and as the different 






FOR VESPERS AND SOLEMN MASS. 521 

intonations for Benedicamus are to be found in ev.ery 
missal, we abstain from noting them here. 

Atter the Deo gvatias^ in response to the Benedica- 
nms^ the priest sings in the low note do^ Fldelhuii ani- 
moe^ in the following manner : 



_i__B~B i^i 3b"I— H — ^ 15 -B — -l~iB m R H -H—H- 



V. Fi-de-li-um a - nimae . . . in pa-ce. R A-men. 

After the prayer that follows the Antiphon of the 
Blessed Virgin, the officiating priest sings, in a low note 
of voice : — 



±1: 



-a m 4>-B I a ^ m-^—w 



Y. Di-vinum au- xi - Hum ma-neat semper no-bis-cmn. 



±1 



-fBT-mr 



A~men. 

In tlie Festival tone the prayers are sung on one note, 
do^ with the exception of two variations, Jo, sz, la^ do, 
do, and do, si. The former of these variations is made 
on a princij^al point, tlie second on a semi-jDoint. - 

It will be observed that in every prayer there is the 
address to God, tlie petition througli the mystery, or 
the intercession of a saint M'hose mass i.i celebrated, and 
the conclusion. The end of tlie address is generally 
marked by a semicolon ; and on the v\'^ord preceding it 
the principal point is su:]g. If in the petition, the sen- 
tences are divided so r.s to admit a semicolon, the semi- 
point is then sung on the last word of the first part of 
tlie sentence. In the conclusion the semipoint is sung 



522 



DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



first, and the principal point in the second place, as will 
be seen in the following example : — 

Prayers. 



-^ — a — #— a— j - 



: — m — [S — s — 



" — B— I — B— [— a — ^— M -H— B — B- 



Do- minus vo-biscum. Et cum spi-ri-tu tu-o. 



=^=3: 



B — a- 



- re - mus. De-us qui ho - di- er-nam di - em, 



::^ 



t 



A-pos - tu- lo-rum tu-o - rum Pe - tri, et Pau-li, 

Principal Point. 



-B — a- 



-m — a — ♦— a — [ — B — b— i- ^- 



mar-ty-rio con- se-cras-ti ; . Da Ec-cle- si- 33 tu - se 

Semi-point. 



-^ — -m — fea — a — i— b— |— a- — ^ - 



-B — h- a- 



e - o- rum in om - nibus se-qui pr£eceptum : per 



=g=^: 



-» 1— a- 



quos re - li - gi- o - nis sump-sit ex- or - dium. Per 



-H- 



Do-mi-num nostrum Jesum Christum Fi - li-um tu - um. 



-\—m — a— h- a— I— B 



-^^— a- 



n 



qui te-cum vi-vit et reg-nat in u - ni-ta-te 



■^. 



-a — ♦— B- 



Spi- ri- tus Sancti Dj-us, per om-ni-a ssec-u-la 



1^=:^— ♦-^-^ 



sa3c - u- lo- rum. A-men. 



FOR VESPERS AND SOLEMN MASS. 



523 



Ferial Tones. 

The ferial tone is more simple, and is used in the 
prayers of ferial Masses, and in the Mass of Requiem^ 
The inflection is from Do to i?e, and is made at the 
end of the prayer, and at the conclusion. When there 
is more than one prayer, the inflection is made at the 
end of the first, at the end of the last, and at the 
conclusion. 

Example. 



Con- ce- de, mi- se - ri-cors De-us, fra - gi - 11- ta - ti 



-^-■-^-F-»~ 



>— ■ 



_a i- 



nos- tras prae-sid - i - um. 



Re - sur-ga - mus. Per 



e-un-dem Christum Do-mi-num nostrum. A-men. 



I 



Epistle. 

The Epistle is intoned and continued throughout on 
the note Do. A prolonging of the voice is made on 
the fourth, fifth, or sixth syllable before the end of a 
period, according as the accents may require an inflec- 
tion of the voice, from Do to Si. Another inflection, 
sanctioned by custom, may be made at the end, as it 
may suit the accents. 

Example. 



-^— a— »— a-H-« 



-■- ti— "^^^-m H-^H-^ 



Lec-ti - o Li - bri Sa - pi- en - ti- i 



Be- a - tus vir- 



524 



DIFFERENT INTONATIONS 



-&— BM-a— g — B- 


l-a— [-B— a I B — ♦— a— [-■— 


~ ■ \ ' \y 


. ' 1 




qui in-ven-tus 


est si - lie ma-cu- la, et 


qui post 


P^HHImImI AnlBa lA^^I-n-lai. 


e ■ H "i H -H ■ a 




1. H . 


1 1 1 , , _. . — l.. 


au-rum non a 


- bi it, nee spe-ra-vit in pe - 


- ^ (m A tSt \ IB 




m 1 ja 1 — 1 »> 1 - 


^ SB V .S 1 !^ 






[ ^ 1 ■ 






- cu - 111 - a et 


the-sau-ris. Quis est 


hie, et 






n n i !!3 ^ ▲ K 1 ■ 


"K B 8B ^ m \ I 


U H ■» J 






▼ - 1 •! 


' ' ! 




' 



lau-da - bimus e - u - m. . . . Om-nis ec-cle - si - a 



:^ 



sancto-rum. 



The Gospel 



is sung on the note Do, as its dominant, with three 
variations. At the end of a period the voice is lowered 
to JOa in the fourth, fifth or sixth syllables, returning 
immediately to Do. The interi-ogation point is sung 
as at the Epistle. At the close of the Gospel the voice 
descends to Xa on the fourth, fillli or sixth last sylla- 
ble, which are sung on three notes, Da, Si, Do, the 
remaining syllable being sung in Do. 



Example. 



:1=*: 



-H B — B- 



-I r 



i§ 



Do- minus vo-biscum. Et cum spi-ri-tu tu-o. 
-1^ — B — a — f — m — j — a — b— P^ — # — b-^-4 — ^ —p" 



B — a 



zt=^ 



Se-quenti - a Sancti E - van-ge- h - i t-c-cun-dum 



FOR VESPEES AND SOLEMN MASS. 



525 






Mattheum. Grlo-ri - a ti - bi Do-mi-ne. lii il - lo 



M 



>4B — ■— I— ■ — rn^^m — ■ — ♦— ■ — I— ■- 



-■-h-t- 



tem-po-re dix-it Je-sus dis- ci - pu-lis su-is: vos 



-■ ■ »— a— [-■— l-F 



es-tis sal ter-rse. Quod si sal e - va-nu-e- rit, ia 



*=!; 



quo sa- li - e - tur ? . . Hie magnus vo- ca - bi-tur in 



r ^~^^ m ^~ ! * ^ ^ — * — B I ^ — ^ — r 



reg-no C3e - lo-rum La-us ti - bi Christe. 

CONPITEOR. 



=fc=« 



Con-fi - te-or De- o om-ni - po-tenti, Be- a - tse 



-■ — ■ — ■ — ♦— H- 



Ma-ri - 89 semper Vir- gi- ni, be - a - to Michae-li 



Archan-ge-lo, be -a -to Jo-an-ni Baptis-tas, sanc-tis 



- ^— ■— ♦-«-,^— H-h"-hi 



-a — I — a — B- 



n 



A- pos-to-lis Petro et Paulo, om-ni-bus sanc-tis 



■- R -^ ! ■ »-E r 



:5=i=tt 



et ti - bi Pa-ter ; qui- a pec - ca-vi ni - mis 



-i — - — ^ 



E— ♦- 



iHzbi 



-a—m- 



^-a- 



co- gi-ta - ti- o - ne, verbo, et o - pe-re : me- a 



526 



DIFFERENT INTONATIONS. 



z^: 



-s — a- 



^^ 



3*=irtMi— z:l 



-riti: 



cul-pa, me-a ciil-pa, me-a max-i-ma cul-pa. 



- |^ — B — ^— gj— j— a — a ^ -H— ■ —'[— ■— B^ - 



¥==1: 



I - de-o j^raBcor Beatam Ma-ri-am semper Vir-ginem, 



a — m — m — i 



-♦ — e — B — [ — a- 



-^— a- 



-B — S — B- 



be-a-tum Mi-chael-em Archan-geluirij be-a-tum 



-|^ — H— a — 3- 



-^g— a— »- 



±=^ 



Jo-an-nera Bap-tis-tam, sanctos A - pos-to-los Petrum 



- ^ — H — i — ^ — a — h-a — E — I — B — a— [-- ii — | — j 



& 



-i r 



1 — 1- 



et Paulum, omnes sanctos, et te Pa - ter 



-g— a— a— B- 



:i=i!dd2B=:i— hTT 



o - ra - re pro me ad Do-mi-num De-um nostrum. 



INDEX. 



Absolution after Mass for the dead, 383. 

Acolytes, Instruction for the, at High Mass, 193 ; at Solemn 
Vespers, 243. 

Acunctis, What Saint to be named in, 25, n. 

Adorna thalamum, 110. 

Advent, Sundays in, when Bishop oflficiates, 416. 

All Souls, Vespers of, 264 ; when Bisliop officiates, 415. 

Altar, Mode of kissing, 24, n. 

Altar-veil, 105. 

Ambry, 14, n. 

Antependium, what, 14, 105. 

Archbishop, 357 ; vesting of, 233. 

Ash-Wednesday, necessary preparations, 112, 275 ; blessing of 
ashes, 112, 276 ; Mass, 116, 279 ; when Bishop officiates, 423. 

Ashes, Blessing of, 112, 278 ; distribution, 115, 276. 

Ashes, Putting on of, 115. 

Asperges, when there is but one priest, 163. 

Assistant Deacon, Instructions for, 392 ; their quality, dress, and 
place, 392 ; at Pontij&cal Vespers, 392 ; at Pontifical Mass, 
393 ; when the Bishop does not celebrate, 396. 

Assistant Priest, his quality, dress, and place, 387 ; his office in 
general, 388 ; his office at Pontifical Vespers, 388 ; at Pontifi- 
cal Mass, 393 ; when the Bishop does not celebrate, 396. 

Baptism of Infants on Holy Saturday, 159. 

Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, 169 : ceremonies when 



528 INDEX. 

bnt one priest, 170 ; wlieii assisted by anotlier priest, 175 ; by 
Bisbop, 177. 

Bishop, what bishop to be named in Memento, 36, n. ; what 
Mass on Ember Days when he ordains, 53, n. ; serving of, 
at Low Mass, 82 ; when there is but one chaplain, 88 ; Mass 
in presence of, 65 ; Mass and Vespers solemnly celebrated by, 
338, 340 ; Solemn Vespers in presence of, 340 ; Complins by, 345 ; 
Matins, 345 ; 378 ; Lauds, 348, 378 ; Matins and Lauds for the 
Dead, 378 ; Solemn Pontifical Mass, 348 ; Seat of, 350 ; Ves- 
pers for the Dead, by, 377 ; Instruction for officers who attend, 
389 ; on All Souls, 415 ; Sundays in Advent, 416 ; Christmas, 
417 ; Festivals between Christmas and Candlemas, 419 ; Candle- 
mas 419 ; Ash Wednesday, 433 ; Sundays in Lent, 426 ; Palm 
Sunday, 426 ; Maundy Thursday, 431 ; The Mandatum, or Wash- 
ing of Feet, 442 ; Good Friday, 444 ; what to be prepared for, *&., 
to the beginning of the office, 446; the Office, 447; Holy 
Saturday, 454 ; what to be prepared for, 454 ; Solemn adminis- 
tration of Confirmation, 485 ; Visitation of Parishes, 489. 

Blessed Sacrament, how often to be renewed, 48, n.\ Low Mass, 
when it is exposed, 63 ; Solemn Vespers, when it is exposed, 
257 ; when exposed, no bow made to any one in the Sanctuary, 
260 ; Collect of, to be said when Blessed Sacrament is ex- 
posed, 56. 

Book-bearer, Lastruction for, 412. 

Bows, 19, n, 75 ; not made when Blessed Sacrament is exposed, 
260. 

Burse, 50, 75. 

Calotte, what, 183. 

Candle-bearer, Instruction for, 413. 

Candlemas, blessing of candles, 104, 268 ; distribution, 108, 268 ; 

procession, 109, 272 ; when Bishop officiates, 419 ; of the Mass 

after the procession. 111. 
Candles, Blessing of, 106 ; distribution of, 108. 
Canon, what, 89, n. 
Cappa magna, 377. 

Celebrant, at High Mass, instruction for the, 228 ; at Vespers, 254. 
Censer-bearer, Instruction for, at High Mass, 189; at Solemn 

Vespers, 245. 



K 



INDEX. 529 

Ceremonies of Low Mass, 13 ; High Mass, 91, 180 ; Pontifical 
High Mass, 348 ; for the Dead, 237 ; Pontifical Mass for the 
Dead, 379 ; for the principal Festivals, 267, &c. ; Chapter, In- 
tonation for, 519. 

Choir, Rules for clergy in, at High Mass, 180 ; at Vespers, 241 ; 
order to be observed, 181 ; internal dispositions, 184 ; order in 
going from, 186. 

Christmas, when Bishop oflBciates, 417 ; Festivals between Christ- 
mas and Candlemas, 419. 

Ciborium, Veil of, 31, ^. ; Purification of, 71. 

Cincture, how made, 18, n. 

Commemoration of all the faithful departed, 264, 415. 

Communion at Masses for the dead, 62, n. ; general rules for 
Communion at Mass, 68 ; at other times, 72 ; at High Mass, 
185. 

Complins, when Bishop officiates solemnly, 345. 

Confirmation, Solemn administration of, 485 ; things to be pre- 
pared for, 485 ; the administration of the sacrament, 487. 

Corporal, what, 17, n. ; Confiteor, Intonation for, 525. 

Corpus Christi, Procession on, and its octave, 262. 

Cope-bearers, Instruction for the, at Solismn Vespers, 251 ; Ves- 
pers without, 96. 

Credence, what, 14. 

Credo, generally omitted in Votive Masses, 56. 

Crosier-bearer, Instructions for, 411. 

Cross, Veneration of, on Good Friday, 135. 

Cruets, not to be of glass, 142. 

Cum a/ppropinquarety 121. 

Deacon, Instruction for the officiating, 396 ; deacon at High Mass, 

207. 
Dead, Low Mass for the, 60 ; High Mass, 236 ; Vespers for the, 264. 
Deus in adjutorium, Intonation, 518. 
Dies irm, when said, 62. 
Diocesan Synods, Ceremonies to be observed in, 479. 

Epistle, Intonation for, 523. 

Faldstool, what, 351 ; Ferial tones, 523. 

45 



530 INDKX. 

Flowers, none on altar in Mass for the Dead, 60. 

Fontj Blessing of tlie, 157. 

Forty Hours' Exposition, 499 ; tilings to be prepared, ib. ; of tlie 
Mass of the Exposition, 500 ; of the Procession for the Exposi- 
tion, 503 ; of the Mass pro pace, 507 ; things to be prepared 
for the Mass of the Reposition, 508 ; of the Mass of the Reposi- 
tion, 508 ; from the Litany to the end of the Forty Hours, 514. 

Genuflection, how made, 76. 

Gloria in Excelsis, in what votive Masses omitted, 55. 

Good Friday, what is to be prepared, 135 ; when Bishop oflBciates, 
444 ; OflBce to the uncovering of the Cross, 135, 306 ; uncover- 
ing and veneration of the Cross, 136, 310 ; Procession, 143, 314 j 
Remaining part of the Of&ce, 316 ; from the entrance of the 
Bishop to the beginning of the Office, 446 ; the Office, 447. 

Gospel, Intonation for the, 524. 

High Mass, without deacon or sub-deacon, 91 ; vesting, 93 ; cere- 
monies, 92 ; Rules for clergy in choir, 180 ; order to be observed, 
181 ; internal dispositions, 184 ; receiving Holy Communion, 
185 ; going from choir, 186 ; Preparation for, 187 ; Instructions 
for the offices at, 187-227 ; instruction for celebrant, 228 ; in- 
censing, 233. {See Pontifical Mass, Solemn Mass.) 

High Mass for the Dead, What to be observed particularly at, 237 ; 
Pontifical, 379. 

Holy Saturday, things to be prepared, 150, 321 ; when Bishop 
officiates, 454 ; Office, 152 ; Benediction of the new fire, 323 ; 
by Bishop, 455 ; Exultet, 323 ; Blessing of the Paschal Candle, 
154, 327 ; by Bishop, 456 ; Prophecies, 156, 329 ; Blessing of the 
Font, 157, 330 ; by the Bishop, 457-9 ; Baptism of Infants, 159 ; 
Litany, Mass, 161, 334 ; Vespers, 161 ; bringing back the Pyx 
to the altar, 162 ; to the beginning of Mass, when Bishop offi- 
ciates, 460 ; Mass, 461. 

Holy Week and other Festivals, ceremonies for, 104, 526. 

Host, how broken, 44, n. 

Incense-boat, 104. 

Incensing candles at Candlemas, 107 ; ashes, 114 ; palms, 119 ; 
the Blessed Sacrament in the Repository, 143 ; on Holy Satur- 



INDKX. 531 

day, 155 ; at Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament, 174, 175 ; 

at High Mass, 230, 233 ; in High Mass for the Dead, 339 ; at 

Solemn Vespers, 258 ; Corpus Christi, 263. 
Inferior ministers, at Pontifical Mass, Instmctions for, 410. 
Intonation for Mass and Vespers, 518. 

Laetare and Gaudete Sundays, 280. 

Lauds, ^vhen the Bishop officiates, 348 ; for the Dead, 378. 

Lent, Sundays in, 56 ; when the Bishop officiates, 426. 

Low Mass, Ceremonies of, 13 ; what to he prepared for, 13 ; Priest's 
preparation, 15-22 ; from commencement to Introit, 22 ; In- 
troit to the Epistle, 25 ; Epistle to the Offertory, 27 ; Offertory 
to the Canon, 30 ; Canon to the Consecration, 35 ; Consecration 
to the Pater Noster, 40 ; Pater Noster to the Communion, 43 ; 
Communion to the end of Mass, 50 ; Low Mass for the Dead, 
60 ; when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, 63 ; in the pres- 
ence of Prelates, 65 ; Manner of serving at, 75 ; Bishop at Low 
Mass, 82. 

Mandatum, or Washing of the Feet, 443. 

Mass, Preparations for, 15 ; ceremonies for Low Mass, 13 ; Votive 
Masses, 53 ; Mass pro Sponso et Sponsa, 54 ; Low Mass for the 
Dead, 60 ; High Mass, 91 ; High Mass for the Dead, 237 ; Pon- 
tifical Mass, Solemn, 348 ; for the Dead, 379. 

Masses for the Dead, classed among Votive Masses, 53 ; when 
prohibited, 53, 60, n. ; when allowed, 54 ; Mass, 236 ; Dies iroB, 
when said, 62 ; Low Mass for the Dead, 60 ; Communion at, 
62 n. ; High Mass, 236 ; Pontifical, 379 ; things to be prepared 
ib. ; the Mass, 380 ; absolution after Mass, 383. 

Master of Ceremonies, duty of; at High Mass, 198; at Solemn 
Vespers, 245. 

Matins, when the Bishop officiates, 345 ; for the Dead, 378 ; of 
Tenebrse, 431. 

Maundy Thursday, Preparation, 125, 295 ; Mass, 126, 297 ; Pro- 
cession, 129, 300 ; removal of the Pyx, 131 ; Vespers, 303 ; 
Stripping of the Altar, 132, 303 ; when the Bishop officiates, 
431 ; repository, how prepared, 126, 296. 

Mitre-bearer, Instruction for, 413. 
^Monstrance, 171. 



632 INDEiX. 

Mozetta, 339. 

Newly ordained priest, The three Masses of, 53. 

Obtulerunt Domino, 111. 

Officers, Instructions for the, at High Mass, 187 ; censer-bearer, 
189 ; acolytes, 193 ; master of ceremonies, 198 ; sub-deacon, 
207 ; deacon, 217, 387 ; celebrant 228 ; instruction for officers 
who attend Bishop, 387. 

Officiating deacon. Instruction for, 387. 

Ordo, to be observed by priest celebrating in another church, 56. 

Pall, what, 16, n. 

Palm Sunday, Preparation for, 116, 280 ; blessing of the palms, 
117, 282.; distribution of, 119, 284 ; procession, 121, 286 ; Mass 
and Passion, 289 ; when Bishop officiates, 426. 

Parishes, Episcopal visitation of, 489. 

Paschal Candles, Blessing of, 154. 

Pax, how given, 183. 

Peace, Instrument of, 67. 

Pontifical mantle, 377. 

Pontifical Mass, Solemn, 348 ; things to be prepared, ib. \ vesting 
of the clergy and Bishop, 353 ; the Pontifical Mass, 258 ; for 
the Dead, 379 ; things to be prepared, *&. ; the Mass, 380 ; abso- 
lution after Mass, 383. 

Popule mens, 138. 

Prelates, what, 65. 

Priest, preparation for Mass, 15 ; at Low Mass, 22 ; after Mass, 
52 ; instruction for, at High Mass, 228 ; assistant priest, 387. 

Procession at Candlemas, 109; Palm-Sunday, 121, 286; Maundy 
Thursday, 129 ; Good Friday, 143 ; Corpus Christi and its 
octave, 262-273 ; at Provincial Councils, 465. 

Prophecies on Holy Saturday, 156. 

Provincial Councils, Ceremonies to be observed in, 462 ; how the 
Metropolitan church is to be adorned and arranged, 463 ; opSi- 
ing of the Council, 464 ; procession, 465 ; Mass, 466 ; C'eremo- 
nies for first session or opening of the Council, 467; Mode of 
procedure, 471 ; second Solemn Session, 473 ; third Solemn 
Session, 475. 



INDEX. 533 

Purification, Feast of the, necessary preparations, 267 ; from tlie 
Vesting to the distribution of the candles, 268 ; to the Proces- 
sion 270 ; the Procession, 272. 

Purificator, what, 16, n. 

Pyx, Of the removal of the, 131 ; bringing back to the altar, 149, 
162. 

Quarant' Ore, 499. 

Remonstrance, see Monstrance. 

Repository, how prepared, 126, 296 ; procession to, on Maundy 

Thursday, 149, 300 ; on Good Friday, 143, 314. 
Requiem Masses, 53 ; Communion at, 62, n. 

Sacred species. Renewal of, 48. 

Sanctuary, Chairs in, 181, n. ; rules for clergy in, 180, 241. 

Serving Mass : Low Mass, 75 ; Vesting, 77 ; the Mass, 77 ; Bishop's 

Low Mass, 82. 
Sign of the Cross, how made, 23, n. 
Solemn Mass, in presence of Bishop in mitre and cope, 371 ; 

when in rochet and cope, 376 ; Litonations for, 518. 
Solemnities when Bishop officiates, 415. 
Stole, Use of, 97, n. 
Sub-deacon, Instruction for, at High Mass, 207 ; Pontifical Mass, 

404. 

Tenebrae, Office of, 293 ; when Bishop officiates, 431 
Two Masses on the same day. Order of, 58. 

Unrobing after Mass, 52. 

Vespers, without cope-bearers, 96 ; Solemn, 240 ; tnings to be 
prepared, ib. ; general rules for the clergy in the sanctuary, 241 ; 
instruction for cope-bearers, 251 ; for the celebrant, 254 ; Sol- 
emn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament being exposed, 257 ; for 
the dead, on Nov. 1st, 264 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; peculiar 
ceremonies, 265 ; on Maundy Thursday, 303 ; Solemn Pontif- 
ical, 338 ; things to be prepared, %b. ; from the entrance to the 
beginning of Vespers, 339 ; to the end of Vespers, 340 ; Solemn 



634: INDEX. 

Vespers in the presence of the Bishop, 377 ; All Souls, when 

the bishop officiates, 415 ; Christmas, 417 ; Intonations for, 518. 
Vesting priest at Low Mass, 14 ; Bishop, 83. 
Vexilla regis, 144. 
Visitation of the Parishes, 489 ; the bishop's reception, ^&. ; 

things subject to the Episcopal visitation, 495. 
Votive Masses, 53 ; Vestments at, 56. 
Votive Masses of the Holy Ghost, what does not warrant singing, 

55, n. 

'W2XGK4 what quantity to be poured into chalice, 83, n. 



EXPLANATION OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS. 



The engravings at the end of the book may be found useful by 
our young colleagues in the ministry, especially on country mis- 
sions. The church articles which they represent are in accord- 
ance with Roman usages. It is not necessary to give a description 
of all of them, as many are well known, being used in this coun- 
try as well as elsewhere. It will not be amiss, however, to de- 
scribe some of them more in detail ; for instance, the Ceremonial 
of Bishops makes a distinction between candles and torches. 

No. 2. A Bishop's throne, or chair, should be high and well 
made ; there ought to be three steps to reach the platform, which 
should be large enough for the Bishop's chair and two stools, with 
their occupants. The steps and platform are covered with car- 
pet. The top part or canopy, according to the ceremonial of 
Bishops, should be square, ornamented with drapery more or 
less rich, and of the color of the feast celebrated. The Bishop's 
throne should be placed in the sanctuary, at the Gospel side. 

No 4 shows the shape of a torch, which consists of four long can- 
dles joined together, of the length of from five to eight feet. They 
are used during the Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament, High 
Mass, and the procession of the Blessed Sacrament. There should 
be on such occasions four, or at most eight. 

No. 6 represents a lantern to be carried during the procession 
of the Blessed Sacrament ; there may be four, six, eight, or more, 
near the officiating priest. These lanterns should be handsomely 
made, and if possible gilded ; and be from seven to ten feet long 
lantern and handle included. They are carried either by clerks 
in surplices, or by the most prominent Catholics of the congrega- 
tion ; and are used to protect the lights from the wind, so that if 
other candles should be put out, these at least may continue to 
burn. 



536 EXPLANATION OF THE ELLUSTKATIONS. 

No. 7 is an antipendium or altar-veil, made of silk, or more 
costly material, which may be ornamented with silver or gold 
embroidery ; and in the middle a cross with palms may be worked, 
representing the tomb of martyrs • about eight inches from the 
top, a lace with fringe, or some other work, is placed horizontally, 
and two lines are formed with the same kind of lace, from the 
upper line to the bottom. The silk is stretched on a wooden 
frame, and then placed like a painting, in a gilded frame, which 
should be as high and as long as the altar, or mensce, as may be 
seen in the engraving at the head of the book. 

No. 8 represents a canopy used in the procession of the Blessed 
Sacrament, at a solemn reception of a Bishop, &c. It is made of 
white silk, or even silver or gold cloth, when used for the proces- 
sion of the Blessed Sacrament ; and may be six feet wide and 
eight long, or seven feet wide and ten long ; in the centre of 
the underneath it may be embroidered with gold, silver, or sUk. 
The outer part, or hanging border, is made of the same material, 
divided into pieces about eight inches wide and eighteen long, 
and these bordered with laces and trimmed with fringe of gold, 
silver, or silk. The whole canopy is lined with linen sufficiently 
strong to prevent tearing, and is suspended from thatop of six 
or eight poles by means of strings, or otherwise ; these poles are 
from eight to ten feet long, ornamented with carvings at the top, 
and are gilded from the middle up, the lower part being painted 
red or blue. The most prominent Catholics of the parish carry 
these poles during a procession. 

No. 9 is the form of a bench for the celebrant, deacon, and 
sub-deacon. This may be neatly made, and embellished with 
carvings ; nevertheless there should be nothing to give it the 
appearance of a throne. 

No. 12 shows the shape of a veil of white silk, more or less richly 
ornamented, which is placed before the Blessed Sacrament ex- 
posed in the niche, during a sermon, through reverence for the 
Holy Eucharist. 

Nos. 14, 15, and 16 represent the forms of baptismal font. The 
Roman ritual does not indeed prescribe any special shape of bap- 
tistery or baptismal font, but it requires that they should be of 
solid materials, neatly shaped, and located in a decent place ; 
moreover, that the vase containing the baptismal water should 



EXPLANATION OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS. 537 

not be porous or leaky ; that it should be decently ornamented, 
and protected from dirt or dust, secured by a lock, and inclosed 
witliin railings ; and where it can be done, the image of St. John 
the Baptist, in the act of baptizing our Lord, should be painted. 
The form suggested in the manual is very simple, and yet it an- 
swers the purpose, at least in country churches. The vase a a 
should be of stone, three feet six inches from the floor to the 
brim, and o.t the brim about four feet. In it two recipients 
should be hewed, as in No. lf>. These should be of round 
concave form, 15 inches in diameter at the opening, and about 
six inches in depth ; so that, if the water should happen to freeze, 
there will be no danger of breaking the stone. One of these 
vases is to contain the baptismal water, and the other to be used 
as a recipient of the water which drips from the head of the bap- 
tized. This latter vase should have a hole at the bottom, in con- 
nection with a pipe about an inch and a half in diameter, through 
the pedestal of the font, to carry the v/ater into a small cistern 
which is to serve as a sacrarium. The vase destined for bap- 
tismal water should have a cover of hard wood, that can easily 
be removed when baptism is to be administered. This baptismal 
font should be covered with a sort of canopy, made of wood, and 
richly ornamented ; for convenience sake, it may be so construct- 
ed, and interiorly so divided by partitions, and provided with 
shelves, as to be able to contain the holy oils, the candle, the sil- 
ver shell, the white garment and ritual, &c., as can be seen in m, 
No. 15. This cover should have doors so constructed that, while 
they are opened, they cannot interfere with the performance of 
the ceremonies in baptizing ; it should be securely fixed to the 
font with iron fastenings. The size of the font should be pro- 
portioned to the necessities of the parish. The model given in 
No. 15 would answer for a pretty large parish.* The place for 
the baptismal font is at the end of the church ; and in large 
churches it should be placed in a chapel, which would be more 



* This cover, and at least a part of the font, commencing from the ball on which 
the cross stands, should be covered with a white &\\k cloth in the shape of cur- 
tains, opened in front, that can be easily moved apart when the doors of the font 
are to bo opened. 



538 EXPLANATION OP THE ILLUSTRATIONS. 

suitable, and correspond better with the dignity of so great and 
essential a sacrament. Cathedrals and principal churches have 
their baptismal fonts of different construction, and more richly 
ornamented, as can be seen in the Instructions on Ecclesiastical 
Architecture, by St. Charles Borromeo. 

No. 20 is a single confessional ; the proportions are the same, 
or nearly so, as those of the double confessional, except that there 
is only one place for the penitent. In this there is no necessity 
for a door at the window. Above the window on the penitents' 
side it is customary, in Italy, to place an engraving, representing 
the image of our crucified Saviour ; and in the inside a similar 
image, and the words of absolution, which should be placed op- 
posite the confessor, above the door. 

No. 21. Vmbrellino, used instead of a canopy, when the Blessed 
Sacrament is carried to the sick, or is transferred from one altar 
to another. It is made pretty much like an umbrella, not, how- 
ever, so ovally shaped ; it is made of white silk, and bordered 
with gold or silk lace and fringe. The rod of the umhrellino is 
gilded, and is about six inches longer than that of a common 
umbrella. 

No. 22 represents a double confessional. A confessional should 
be constructed in such a manner as to inclose the confessor en- 
tirely on all sides, except in front, where there should be a door 
of lattice work, or so made as to admit suflBcient air. The sides 
where the penitents kneel should be open, so that the people can 
see there is a person in the confessional. The height of the con- 
fessional inside should be about six feet. It should have a base, 
especially when it is placed on a pavement, to prevent dampness ; 
and it should be raised a few inches, at most five, above the floor 
or pavement of the church, and should project about two inches 
on all sides of the confessional except at the back. The place 
for the confessor should be about three feet three inches from 
back to front, and two feet nine inches from side to side. 
The seat for the confessor should be one foot seven inches high 
above the base, and one foot five inches from front to back. On 
each side of the boarding which stands between the confessor and 
the penitent, a small wooden rail should be fixed, that the con- 
fessor may lean on it while resting on his arm, and should be so 
made that he can raise or lower it at will. The steps on which 



EXPLANATION OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS. 539 

the penitent kneels should rest on the base of the confessional, 
and be about fourteen inches broad and four or five inches high. 
The place where the penitent may lean with joined hands should 
be seven or eight inches broad and two feet six inches above the 
base, resting against the bordering of the confessional. An open- 
ing or small window should be made in the middle of the board- 
ing between the confessor and the penitent ; the lowest part of 
this opening should be one foot ten inches above the seat of the 
confessor, and about eleven inches high and eight wide ; to this 
opening should be fixed on the side of the penitent a plate <jf 
sheet-iron full of holes, each as small as a pea. Moreover, on the 
side of the confessor should be attached to the opening a light 
serge cloth. This cloth on the window of the confessional is in 
use in many churches in Italy ; it is mentioned as a requisite by 
St. Charles Borromeo, and is one of the articles subject to the in- 
spection of the Bishop during his episcopal visitation. When 
there are two places for penitents, there should be a door at the 
window, to be opened and closed with a latch et from the inside 
by the confessor ; it may be a sliding-door, or it should hang at 
the nearest end of the window from the front of the confessional. 
No. 24 is the form of a repository or urn, in which the Blessed 
Sacrament is placed on Holy Thursday in the chapel of the Re« 
pository ; it should be neatly made, and if possible gilded ; the 
inside should be lined, first with linen, and then with white silk, 
or even richer material ; the door in front should have a lock and 
key. The rays may or may not be put outside. They represent 
the holiness and majesty of the King of Heaven, who, for the love 
of men, it pleased to be inclosed in that tabernacle ; and to show 
that although we commemorate the death of His sacred human- 
ity, yet as God, is living, not dead. This, however, is one form 
of repositories, which can be made in many other shapes. 



I 




'W— )—> I I I ■ ■" ■ ■ ■■ .. I . . . » -J i .ii jn8IBmWB WH| iiiii .»J III i i n n 




1. Altar with Canopy. 





2. Throne for the Bishop. 



T 



/a 



1 


*;- 


\ j 





V 





Paschal Candle. 

Torch used at the Benediction, Elevation and Procession of the B. S. 

Triangle used on Holy Saturday. 

Lantern used during the procession of the Blessed Sacrament. 



;: 




8. 




^v^?>*i>>^-'^- 



Antipendium, or altar veil. 

8. Canopy used in the procession of the Blessed Sacrament. 

9, Bench for Celebrant, Deacon and Subdeacon. 



t 



wm. 




10. Processional Cross. 

11. Triangle used during the office of Tenebrae. 

12. Veil to be placed before the B. Sacrament exposed durhig a sermon. 



I 




14. Baptismal Font closed, which, should be covered with & white silk cloth. 
16. A form of a simple Baptismal Font, opened. 

16. Horizontal section showing the basin containing baptismal water and 
the recipient of same when dripping from the head of the Baptized. 

17. Kneeling desk covered with green drapery. 

18. Clapper used during holy week instead of the httle bell. 

19. Stool for cope-bearei's. 



20. 






20. Simple Confessional after the model given by St. Cliarles Borromeo. 

21. Umbrellino, closed and opened, used instead of a canopy in transferring 
the Blessed Sacrament from one altar to another. 




23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 



Two niches for the exposition of the Blessed Sacrament. 

Um wherein to deposit the B. S. in the Chapel of the Repository. 

Eelic-cases. 

Pyx covered with white silk cloth trimmed with gold or silver fringe. 



■ ^ 



9 

p 

o 

P 




6 9i ,^ 




V> ^ ^ * « ^ > ' o"- 











0^ 










,->,^ 1, f o >. rA* i" N 



^Oo 



0^' 












^^,^V 



"* G^ 






'1/ * '^t^jjy>f^ o« .^ 






^^ 



^ <'\ 










ft a .• ^ t- ^'^ ' s"^ ^0 



,0 









^^^ 



r". 



O 






the Bookkeeper process, 
agnesium Oxide 
r>r\r\R 



Deacidified using the Bookk 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Jan. 2006 

PreservationTechnologif 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATI 

1 1 1 Thornson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



RVATION 



-j.-.^>« 



'y "C 



. 4.J ' ,^ 



A 



V^V'^ 



// 'C 



-r-'. 






* ^ 



%'' ^^^ v^' 






.-xV 



sP'ic. 



^ .0 



y " ">KJ^ 









7. * s ^ \\^ 



^^, 



7- 



%/^7^^^'^<p 



■^> 






•/• 



0* c 






v\ 



^\ 






,\' 



...... - '^ ,#\^ 



% 


<^^" 








.^^' 










>-7 




•^b 










- 


■^o 


0^ 






- 


o"^ 


-v;.. 



'. '^^. 



^^ 



■, "^-io 



X V-- 



<>^ v^' 



-■^^^ 



■0, 



. -^^ 



?• f? =^ * 









^^ .- 



.0 



'^ 



O' 









,r^-7- 



\ 









•^c^. 



v- - ^" <^ 



. ■^ 



>" o\^- 









^\ 



-^^ 



^^^ S 



,0^ 



<^ 



.s-^ 






\^^ .0 



.\"' 



'/% 






« ' ^ ■■ .N^" .... '^/^ 






.\' 









-■> 



^ V-- 



/■.-. --' 






1 o 









^ 



C-^ 



.^^^ 



vOo^ » y* 



^ Wli^^^ 



^^^ V. 



.0 o 



■■i' 



^\^-'.S-''^'''^ 



.V 



^ '- 






'.%' '^ 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




017 339 670 3 



(/;::;',.{. ^':^:'lvi^' 



:i:;'"'''///,-;ij''''m!;)^V;;:-)i^l{ 













